EQE (2022) - 112 Mercedes-Benz - Panduan pengguna gratis

PANDUAN PENGGUNA EQE (2022) Mercedes-Benz

EQE

Owner's Manual +

Mercedes-Benz

Did you know?

In order to meet all needs, your operator's manual is available to you in various formats. In addition to this PDF, the following options are open to you:

Digital - in the vehicle

Familiarise yourself with the contents of the Owner's Manual directly via the vehicle's multimedia system (menu item "Vehicle information"). Begin with the Quick start guide or broaden your knowledge with practical tips.

Vehicle document wallet

Here you can find comprehensive information about operating your vehicle as well as the servicing and warranty of your vehicle in printed form.

Digital-on the Internet

You can find the Owner's Manual on the Mercedes-Benz homepage.

Digital - as an App

The Mercedes-Benz Guides App is available free-of-charge in the popular App stores.

Apple iOS Android

14

Front passenger airbag warning

Observe the chapter "Children in the vehicle".

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag

If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.

NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz

Before your first drive, please read this Owner's Manual carefully and familiarise yourself with your vehicle. For your own safety and a longer service life of the vehicle, follow the instructions and warning notices in this Owner's Manual. Disregarding them may lead to damage to the vehicle or injury to people.

THE STANDARD EQUIPMENT AND PRODUCT DESCRIPTION OF YOUR VEHICLE MAY VARY AND DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

Model
Order
National version
Availability

Your vehicle may therefore differ from that shown in the descriptions and illustrations in individual cases.

The illustrations in this Owner's Manual show a left-hand drive vehicle. On right-hand drive vehicles, the layout of vehicle parts and controls differs accordingly.

Mercedes-Benz is constantly developing its vehicles further.

MERCEDES-BENZ THEREFORE RESERVES THE RIGHT TO INTRODUCE CHANGES IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS:

Design
Equipment
• Technical features

THE FOLLOWING DOCUMENTS ARE COMPONENTS OF THE VEHICLE:

Digital Owner's Manual
• Printed Owner's Manual
Service Booklet
• Supplementary manuals relating to specific equipment
• Supplementary documents

Keep these documents in the vehicle at all times. Ensure that all documents are in the vehicle or passed on in the event of sale or rental.

Disclaimer

The following online version of the Owner's Manual describes all models as well as all the standard and optional equipment of your vehicle. Country-specific differences in the language variants are possible. Note that your vehicle may not be fitted with all features described. This is also the case for safety-relevant systems and functions.

Please contact your authorised Mercedes-Benz dealer if you would like to have a printed Owner's Manual for other vehicle models and vehicle model years. The online version is the current valid Owner's Manual version. Possible variations to your vehicle may not be taken into account as Mercedes-Benz constantly updates their vehicles and equipment to the state of the art and introduces changes in design and equipment.

Please also read the printed Owner's Manual, any supplementary documents and the digital Owner's Manual in the vehicle.

COPYRIGHT

All Rights Reserved. All texts, images, graphics, are subject to Copyright and other laws for the protection of intellectual property. They may not be copied for commercial purposes or for transmission, nor changed and used on other websites.

EQE - Owner's Manual

Contents

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left.

Symbols 7	>	Safely transporting children in the vehicle 165	MBUX Voice Assistant 519	>
Addenda 9	>	Opening and closing 194	MBUX multimedia system 530	>
Quick start and Tips 27	>	Seats and stowing 237	Maintenance and care	798
At a glance 88	>	Light and sight 280	Breakdown assistance	725
Digital Owner's Manual 110	>	Climate control 307	Wheels and tyres	749
General notes 113	>	Driving and parking 326	Technical data	724
Occupant safety 144	>	Driver's display 495	Display messages and warning/indicator lamps	828

EQE - Owner's Manual

Index 936

F294 0056 02

EQE - Owner's Manual

Symbols

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. EQE - Owner's Manual Symbols In this Owner's Manual, you will find the following symbols: 

WARNING

Danger due to not observing the warning notices Warning notices draw your attention to hazards that may endanger your health or life, or the health or life of others. Observe the warning notices.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to failure to observe environmental notes Environmental notes include information on environmentally responsible behaviour or environmentally responsible disposal. Observe environmental notes. 

NOTE

Damage to property due to failure to observe notes on material damage Notes on material damage inform you of risks which may lead to your vehicle being damaged. ▶ Observe notes on material damage. These symbols indicate useful instructions or further information that could be helpful to you. Instruction (→ page) Further information on a topic Display Display in the central display Highest menu level, which is to be selected in the multimedia system Relevant submenus, which are to be selected in the multimedia system * Indicates a cause   EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda 

< Addenda

This interactive PDF works like a website – tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Car wash mode 10  Calling up music online 20  Information about Dolby Atmos*  Calling up online music settings 21  Switching Dolby Atmos® on or off  Information about Sound Drive 22  Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist  Operating Sound Drive 23  Parking with Active Parking Assist 15  Overview of Emotion Tour in the MBUX multimedia system  Requirements 18  Operating Emotion Tour Explore in the MBUX multimedia system  Searching for music in online music 19  Operating Emotion Tour Routes in the MBUX multimedia system 

< Car wash mode

Depending on the range of functions, the following settings can be set for car wash mode. The availability of individual settings may depend on the equipment and the country. In car wash mode, the vehicle is prepared for driving into an automatic car wash. Car wash mode can be activated up to a speed of 20 km/h ( → page 718).

WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS ACTIVATED, THE CAR WASH MODE ACTIVE MES- SAGE WILL APPEAR ON THE DRIVER DISPLAY. THE FOLLOWING ADJUST- MENTS WILL BE MADE:

• The outside mirrors will be folded in. - To prevent the windscreen washer system from starting up automatically, the rain sensor will be deactivated. • Air-recirculation mode will be activated. • The rear window wiper will be deactivated. • The windows and the sliding sunroof will be closed. • Mercedes-Maybach vehicles: the running boards will be retracted. • Convenience door opening will be inoperative. • The comfort doors will be deactivated. • Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be deactivated. • Active Brake Assist will be deactivated, if applicable. - Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be activated after approximately eight seconds. • Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be deactivated. If one of the settings cannot be selected, this will be indicated by a X after the respective setting. Pressing Switch off will cancel car wash mode. Car wash mode will automatically be deactivated above a speed of 20 km/h. You can also switch off car wash mode via the MBUX multimedia system ( → page 718).

THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS WILL BE RESET WHEN CAR WASH MODE IS DEACTIVATED:

• The outside mirrors will be folded out. • The rain sensor will be activated. • Air-recirculation mode will be deactivated. • The rear window wiper will be activated. • Convenience door opening will be activated again. - Parking Assist PARKTRONIC will be reset to the previously selected setting. • Active Brake Assist will be activated, if applicable. • The windows and the sliding sunroof will remain closed. - Vehicles with 360° camera: the front image will be deactivated at speeds above 18 km/h. • Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: kick detection will be activated. EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda > Information about Dolby Atmos*

Information about Dolby Atmos®

The MBUX multimedia system enables playback of Dolby Atmos ^® content via the Burmester ^® sound system, thereby providing an even more immersive three-dimensional sound experience. The function is available with a streaming provider that supports Dolby Atmos ^® or by using a USB device with the corresponding file formats. The availability of this function is equipment-dependent.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda > Switching Dolby Atmos ^® on or off 

Switching Dolby Atmos ^® on or off

Requirements:

- An account with a streaming provider that supports Dolby Atmos is available. - A subscription with a streaming provider that supports Dolby Atmos ^® has been taken out. • Sufficient data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. • A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Tap to switch off Dolby Atmos . Tracks which are present or available in Dolby Atmos ^® will be played accordingly in this format by the sound system.

Multimedia system:

 Select Online music. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. Select a streaming provider that supports Dolby Atmos®. Select Tap to switch on Dolby Atmos ^® . or  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist 

Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist


WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with a 360" camera. • The vehicle has been parked with Active Parking Assist. Start the vehicle.  Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button may also be located in a different position on the centre console. Press button ①.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Exiting a parking space with Active Parking Assist   Parking Assist menu (example for left-hand side of the screen) Select the menu Parking Assistance ②. If necessary, change the direction of exit ③. To initiate the unparking procedure: press the button ① again. Depress the brake pedal and select Start unparking procedure (depending on the respective vehicle equipment). If necessary, change the transmission position. Observe any messages displayed on the driver display and central display. The vehicle moves out of the parking space. The duration of the unparking procedure is indicated by a progress bar. or The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when the unparking procedure is initiated, and automatically switched off again when it is completed. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly. ▲ WARNING Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. Pay attention to objects and other road users. Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. After the parking space has been exited, a warning tone and the Active Parking Assist finished, take control of vehicle message prompt you to take control of the vehicle. You have to accelerate, brake, steer and change gear yourself again. If you do not react to the prompt to take control of the vehicle, the system will brake the vehicle to a standstill.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Parking with Active Parking Assist 

Parking with Active Parking Assist


WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.  Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the button may also be located in a different position on the centre console. Press the button ①.  Parking Assist menu (example for left-hand side of the screen) Select the menu Parking Assistance ②. Parking spaces ③ detected by the system are shown on the central display. At speeds greater than approximately 16 km/h, the camera perspective on the right-hand side of the screen switches off.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Parking with Active Parking Assist   Parking Assist menu (example) When the vehicle is at a standstill, the indicated vehicle path Ⓐ into the currently selected parking space Ⓤ also appears. If a parking space is displayed: stop the vehicle. If necessary, select another parking space. Vehicles with 360° camera: to change the parking direction, tap the selected parking space again. To start the parking procedure: press the button ① again. or Depress the brake pedal and select Start parking procedure ⑥ (depending on the respective vehicle equipment). Take your hands off the steering wheel. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. The duration of the parking procedure is indicated by a progress bar. The turn signal indicator is switched on automatically when the parking procedure begins. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. If necessary, select the turn signal indicator accordingly.

WARNING

Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or exiting a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. Pay attention to objects and other road users. Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Active Parking Assist. Following completion of the parking procedure, the Active Parking Assist finished message appears. Secure the vehicle against rolling away. When necessitated by legal requirements or local conditions: turn the wheels towards the kerb. You can stop the vehicle and change the transmission position during the parking procedure. The system then calculates a new vehicle path. If no new vehicle path is available, the transmission position can be changed again, or the process can be cancelled.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Parking with Active Parking Assist   Immediate parking via the Camera views menu ▶ Select the Camera views menu. When the vehicle is stationary and in transmission position R, and the symbol ⑦ appears in the camera image: press the button ① again. or Depress the brake pedal and select Start parking procedure (depending on the respective vehicle equipment). The parking procedure is initiated for the detected parking space. The parking space and parking direction cannot be changed in immediate parking.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Requirements

Requirements

• There is an account for the music streaming service. • A subscription for the music streaming service has been obtained. • The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. • A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Multimedia system: Media

ADDING A STREAMING PROVIDER THE FIRST TIME YOU START THE APPLICATION

Select Online music. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. Select a streaming provider. A QR code is shown on the display. ▶ Scan the QR code with the mobile phone. Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.

ADDING MORE STREAMING PROVIDERS

Select Online music. The last active streaming provider is active. Select Select Music services. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. Select a streaming provider. A QR code is shown on the display. Scan the QR code with the mobile phone. Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.

LOGGING OUT FROM A STREAMING PROVIDER

Select Online music. The last active streaming provider is active. Select Select Music services. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. | 📄 | next to the streaming provider. Tap on Log out.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Searching for music in online music

Searching for music in online music

Multimedia system: 

SEARCHING FOR CATEGORIES IN ONLINE MUSIC

The media content of the streaming provider can be scanned through in the category search. The available categories and the symbol for the category search depend on the streaming provider. Start the category search. The list of available categories appears. Select a category.

KEYWORD SEARCH IN ONLINE MUSIC

You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input. Select A keyboard for character entry appears. Enter the term searched for. The more characters entered when using the keyword search, the more concrete the search results are. Select the desired entry from the result list. Depending on the selected hit, playback is started or a lower level in the search is opened.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Calling up music online

Calling up music online

Multimedia system:  Music playback can be controlled with the Touch Control or by using the media application.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Calling up online music settings 

Calling up online music settings

Multimedia system: Media Online music Select ☐. Select Music services. Select ☐ next to a streaming provider. Select a setting. Information about the linked accounts can be displayed using the gear icon next to the configured streaming provider. The available information depends on what is offered by the provider of the streaming service.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Information about Sound Drive

Information about Sound Drive

Sound Drive brings your favourite song to life through the way you drive. Different layers of your favourite song are thus built up and then broken down again through the experience of different driving situations.

THE FOLLOWING DRIVING SITUATIONS CAN INFLUENCE YOUR FAVOUR-ITE SONG (EXAMPLES):

• Stationary vehicle with drive running - Acceleration Recuperation

YOUR FAVOURITE SONG CAN BE EXPANDED WITH THE FOLLOWING LAYERS (EXAMPLES):

Bass Melody • Certain instruments ① The availability of this function is equipment-dependent.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Operating Sound Drive

Operating Sound Drive

Requirements:

• You have a Mercedes me user account. • The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. • The service is available and has been activated. Multimedia system: 

CONTROLLING PLAYBACK

Tap on ▶ to start playback. Playback starts. or Tap on [■] to stop playback. Playback stops.

REPEATING A TRACK

Tap on ↩ to repeat a track. The track is repeated. or Tap twice to repeat the playlist. The playlist is repeated. or Tap three times to deactivate the repeat feature. The repeat feature is deactivated.

CALLING UP THE SETTINGS

Tap on ☐ to access the settings. Select a setting.

CALLING UP A PLAYLIST

Tap on 📄 to call up the playlist. Select a track.

SEARCHING FOR A TRACK

Tap on 📞 to search for a track.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Overview of Emotion Tour in the MBUX multimedia system 

Overview of Emotion Tour in the MBUX multimedia system

In the Emotion Tour menu, routes can be recorded and reviewed, as well as saved for later reuse or sharing with other users. The function allows you to navigate along an emotional route on public roads and record it. These routes can be driven again and the journey recorded again in the process. In addition to vehicle data, a video can also be recorded if the appropriate vehicle equipment is available. The self-recorded routes from Emotion Tour can be shared to make them available to other users.

ROUTES

In the Routes tab you can record and drive along your own routes, as well as call up downloaded routes.

EXPLORE

The Explore tab is used to download nearby routes from the community, as well as to calculate routes or explore the surroundings and have destinations suggested to you. Further information on using the Routes and Explore tabs ( → page 26).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Operating Emotion Tour Explore in the MBUX multimedia system 

Operating Emotion Tour Explore in the MBUX multimedia system

Multimedia system: 

CALLING UP AND DOWNLOADING ROUTES

Select a route from the carousel. Select Save in EMOTION TOUR. The tour will be downloaded and saved in My routes. Select Let's go to start recording and navigation. A new recording for the selected route is started.

CALCULATING TOUR

Select the first tile from the carousel. Enter the Start point and Destination. Select Next. Select the category shown. A route is displayed that can then be saved. Alternatively, it can be deleted using Back.

DISCOVER THE SURROUNDINGS

Select the second tile from the carousel. Select the category shown. A route is displayed that can then be saved. Alternatively, it can be deleted using Back.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Addenda Operating Emotion Tour Routes in the MBUX multimedia system 

Operating Emotion Tour Routes in the MBUX multimedia system

Multimedia system: 

CREATING YOUR OWN ROUTE

Select +. The recording is started and the Active recording tab is displayed while driving. In addition, the EMOTION TOUR widget is displayed in the navigation. Enter a route name. Confirm with Save tour. The route is saved. 

CALLING UP DOWNLOADED ROUTES

Select a route from My routes. Select Let's go to start recording and navigation. A new recording for the selected route is started. ① If the vehicle is too far from the start point of the route, it can either navigate to the start or to the next possible logical waypoint of the route. Further information on navigation: (→ page 587).

DELETING ROUTES

Select a route in the carousel and keep it pressed. Select Delete route. The route is deleted.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   Quick start and Tips 

< Quick start and Tips

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Seats 28 MBUX Voice Assistant 36 New multimedia system features 43 Children in the vehicle 29 ENERGIZING Packages 37 At the filling station 50 DIGITAL LIGHT 30 Driving Assistance package 38 Preparing for a holiday 54 Touch-sensitive controls 31 Parking Package 39 Luggage and loading Radio 33 High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3) Ice and snow Wi-Fi hotspot 34 High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4) Help in the event of a breakdown Connecting a mobile phone 35 Destination entry navigation 42 Expert tips EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Seats

< Seats

Adjusting the seats  1 Head restraint height 2 Seat height Seat cushion inclination 4 Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft position 6 Seat backrest inclination Save the settings with the memory function ( → page 254).   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Children in the vehicle

Children in the vehicle

Safely transporting children in the vehicle

Always observe when children are travelling in the vehicle ( → page 168) Important warning notices ( → page 169) Recommended child restraint systems ( → page 176) Suitable vehicle seats for fitting a child restraint system ( → page 166) Approval categories for child restraint systems ( → page 175) Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint systems ( → page 180) \- Fitting the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system on the rear seat ( → page 185) Suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems ( → page 181) - Fitting the i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat ( → page 185) Attaching Top Tether belt ( → page 187) Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( → page 181) \- Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 174) Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( → page 172) • Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ( → page 188)

You can find additional important information on the safe transportation of children here:

Correct use of the seat belt ( → page 148) ▶ Automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (→ page 174) Child safety locks for the rear side windows ( → page 191) ▶ Child safety locks for the rear doors (→ page 189)   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips DIGITAL LIGHT

DIGITAL LIGHT

Intelligent Light System with DIGITAL LIGHT headlamps

With this system, the headlamps adapt to the driving and weather situation. It also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING ADAPTIVE FUNCTIONS:

• Active headlamps ( → page 285) • Cornering light ( → page 285) • Motorway mode ( → page 285) • Enhanced fog light function ( → page 286) • Bad weather light ( → page 286) • City lighting ( → page 286) • Off-road light ( → page 286) • Topographical compensation ( → page 286)

To activate or deactivate Digital Light:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. - Select Settings. - Select Lights. • Select DIGITAL LIGHT. • Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.

To activate or deactivate enhanced assistance functions:

• Select Supporting projections. • Activate or deactivate the desired projection. The availability of the assistance functions is dependent on the country.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Touch-sensitive controls 

Touch-sensitive controls

Overview of touch-sensitive controls  Control panel: Switches the seat heating on/off Switches the seat ventilation on/off M Operates the memory function 2 Control panel: Driver's display Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and variable limiter 3 Control panel for the MBUX multimedia system Control panel: Switches the front interior lighting on/off Switches the rear interior lighting on/off me button Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Touch-sensitive controls 5 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof Opens/closes the roller sunblind 6 Control panel: DYNAMIC SELECT Active Parking Assist EQ Calls up the EQ menu Quick vehicle access Fingerprint sensor Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off Switches sound on/off Adjusts the volume 7 Operates the outside mirrors Observe the notes on the touch-sensitive controls ( → page 118).   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Radio

Radio

Operating radio

To switch to radio:

- Briefly press in the multimedia system display. Tap on [↑].

To set the frequency band:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Tap on □. • Select a frequency band or a favourite.

To set a radio station:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Tap on ↑. - Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station.

To call up the radio station list:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Tap on □i. Select :≡.

To search for radio stations using station names or frequency entry:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Tap on [↑]. Select • Enter a station name or frequency. - Select a station.

To store radio stations:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Tap on Select | ☆ |.

To set the traffic information service volume increase:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Tap on [○]. - Select System. - Select Audio. • Select Navigation & traffic announcements. • Set a value for Traffic announce, vol. increase.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Wi-Fi hotspot

Wi-Fi hotspot

Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot

GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE:

R Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot The multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communication devices such as a smartphone or tablet PC. The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device is used for the data connection. Data volumes must be purchased via the Mercedes me Portal. The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. R Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the multimedia system. The data tariff of the mobile communication device via Acquired package is used for the data connection.

OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A CONNECTION:

R QR code The connection is set up by scanning the QR code shown on the multi-media system. R NFC The connection is set up by placing the mobile communication device in the NFC interface of the vehicle. R Security key The connection is established by entering the security key displayed on the multimedia system.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Connecting a mobile phone

Activating Bluetooth*:

• Make sure that the mobile phone Bluetooth ^® is switched on. Tap on 📋 on the central display or media display. - Select Settings. - Select System. • Select Internet and Bluetooth. • Activate Bluetooth*.

Searching for a mobile phone:

Tap on [icon] on the central display or media display. Select Phone. Select Select Devices. - Select Devices. - Select Connect new device.

Authorising a mobile phone:

\- Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. If the codes match, confirm the code on the mobile phone.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips MBUX Voice Assistant

MBUX Voice Assistant

Operating the MBUX voice assistant

YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT:

- Telephone • Text message and e-mail Navigation Radio and media - Vehicle functions • Online functions

EXAMPLES OF POSSIBLE VOICE COMMANDS:

• To operate the phone: Call my father. • To manage e-mails: Show me my new e-mails. • To operate the navigation: Search for a French restaurant in the area. • To operate the radio: Which station am I currently listening to? • To operate media: Play a similar track. • To operate climate control: My feet are cold. • To operate vehicle functions: Open the window. • To call up the weather: Will it be sunny tomorrow? - To ask a general knowledge question: Who painted the picture "The Scream"?   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips ENERGIZING Packages

ENERGIZING Packages

Operating ENERGIZING COMFORT

To start an ENERGIZING programme:

- Briefly press 📋 on the multimedia system display. Select Comfort. • Select ENERGIZING COMFORT. Select a programme and start with ▶.

To configure an ENERGIZING programme:

- Select a programme. - Select Settings. - Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.

To start a training programme:

- Select Training. - Select a programme and start with ▶. • To activate fragrancing for training, select Air freshener.

To start tips:

- Select Tips. - Select an area of the body and start with ▶.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Driving Assistance package 

Driving Assistance package

Functions of the Driving Assistance Package

The Driving Assistance Package contains various functions that assist you when driving. For this purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and radar sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle. The following functions are included in the Driving Assistance Package, depending on country-specific availability: Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Active Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 417) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Active Brake Assist ( → page 427) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Active Steering Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 421) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( → page 441) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Active Lane Keeping Assist ( → page 444) PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side (→ page 155)  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Parking Package

Parking Package

Functions of the Parking Package

Depending on country-specific availability, your vehicle may be equipped with various functions to assist you with parking and manoeuvring. For this purpose, your vehicle uses cameras and ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area around the vehicle. Depending on the equipment level, the following systems and functions are part of your Parking Package: Reversing camera: monitors the area to the rear of the vehicle and displays this in the driver display ( → page 454). 360° Camera: a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle and display this in the driver display (→ page 456). Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and the distance to obstacles in the vicinity using ultrasound ( → page 463). Active Parking Assist: an electronic parking assistance system which assists you when parking or leaving a parking space by changing gear, accelerating, braking and steering the vehicle ( → page 466). You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Remote Parking Assist: can park your vehicle and leave a parking space while you are outside of your vehicle ( → page 469). You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Memory Parking Assist: can park your vehicle in and leave a previously recorded and stored parking space ( → page 477). You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Trailer Manoeuvering Assist: Trailer Manoeuvering Assist provides support when reversing with a trailer attached. Using the reversing camera, it monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Manoeuvering Assist also limits your speed. (→ page 481).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3) 

High-voltage battery AC charging (mode 2 or 3)

AC charging (mode 2 or 3)

Starting and ending the charging process (combo 2 socket) Starting and ending the charging process (combo 1 socket) ▶ More notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( → page 358) Overview of the charging cable control panel ( → page 365)  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4) 

High-voltage battery direct current charging (mode 4)

Direct current charging (mode 4)

Starting and ending the charging process (combo 2 socket) Starting and ending the charging process (combo 1 socket) ▶ More notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( → page 358) Overview of the charging cable control panel ( → page 365) 

Destination entry navigation

Entering a navigation destination

Briefly press [ ] in the multimedia system display. The zero layer is shown. Select 📋 Where to?.

SELECT THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR DESTINATION ENTRY:

\- Enter a POI, an address or a three-word address in the input line. Online search results for POIs (if available) may contain additional information, for example opening times and prices. The information is provided by an online map service. You can find further information about three-word addresses at: https://+what3words.com \- Select a destination suggestion directly on the zero layer. Requirements: The Navigation option is switched on in the user settings for Suggestions. The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions. \- Select Previous destinations. Select a previous destination. You can save the destination as a favourite. \- Select POIs. Select a POI category, e.g. P or enter a POI name or POI category in the input line. If search results are displayed, limit them with Filter, for example by search position or the desired travel time. \- Select Contacts. Requirements: A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system and contacts have been downloaded. The contact contains a navigable address. \- Enter the geocoordinates as latitude and longitude in the input line. Example 1: 47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes, seconds and compass direction) Example 2: 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees) • Select a destination on the map. \- Select Favourites, Requirements: The destinations have been saved as favourites. • Select Received destinations. Requirements: There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations. The destinations have been sent to the vehicle. EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features 

New multimedia system features

Information about the telephone menu  Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone 2 Bluetooth® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network Battery status of the connected mobile phone 5 Options 6 Messages 7 Calls up my devices Numerical pad 9 Starts contact search

TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW

Via the telephone menu you can use the functions in connection with your mobile phone.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED:

Call lists - Contacts - Messages • Device manager

USING CALL LISTS

If your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth ^® profile, the call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

• Making calls from the call list • Opening contacts on the call list

MESSAGES

In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. In addition, you can conveniently use the read-aloud function during the journey.

DEVICE MANAGER

In the device manager, you can connect your mobile phone with the multimedia system.  EQE - Owner's Manual Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features You have the option of using your mobile phone alone in single telephone mode or together with another mobile phone in two phone mode.

USING CONTACTS

If you permit the multimedia system to access the contacts in your mobile phone, you can use these in the vehicle. You can store up to 8,000 contacts.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU VIA THE CONTACTS MENU:

• Making telephone calls (calling a contact) Navigation • Composing messages with the help of the MBUX voice assistant • Additional options The contacts from your mobile phone can be downloaded automatically or manually.

CONDUCTING A CALL

When conducting a call, additional functions are available apart from making, accepting or rejecting a call. For example, you can switch between calls, conduct a call with several participants or conference calls. It is also possible to accept or reject waiting calls. If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed.

DURING A CALL YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

- Microphone off - Fade in the numerical pad to send DTMF tones - Add a call - Hands-free mode to transfer the call to the front or rear passenger compartment • Privacy mode to transfer the call to the telephone or headphones

Information about navigation

Zero layer with digital map Navigation module (reduced view) Route guidance active: The navigation module shows the information relevant to the route in the zoomed-out view, e.g. the destination or a traffic delay ☒ Ends the current route guidance Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the route overview Destination entry 3 Searches for a parking space Map orientation Ⓞ and set map type 5 Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow) 6 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and suggestions 7 Navigation window shows the next driving manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view) EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features  Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, destination, traffic delays, 3D images at motorway exits, online content Switches off navigation announcements Switches on navigation announcements When you switch on the multimedia system or after selecting 🔒, the digital map is shown in the zero layer. The navigation system offers many options for destination entry, route planning and route guidance. The traffic situation is taken into account during route guidance. When using route guidance with augmented reality, additional information can be shown in a camera image before a turning manoeuvre. Services and apps help you reach the destination quickly, safely and in comfort. Start entering the destination via 📄 on the digital map. You can enter the POI, address or contact as the destination on-board or search online using a map service. Or you select a previous destination. The destination can be stored here as a favourite or be saved as an address for home and work. When the Allow destination suggestions option is switched on, the vehicle makes suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations. If external destinations and routes are received from apps or services, these are also available.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR ROUTE PLANNING, FOR EXAMPLE:

- Route options: e.g. avoid or use toll roads, tunnels, unpaved roads or areas • Intermediate destinations • Alternative routes - Commuter route • Automatic filling station and service station search You can record and save routes then select or share them with a USB device. Lane recommendations are shown during route guidance on multi-lane roads. When driving on a motorway, service facilities on the route ahead can be shown and used for route guidance. The Live Traffic Information service takes the current traffic situation into account. The map can show the current traffic flow, traffic incidents or warning messages, e.g. before the end of traffic jams that pose a risk. Hazardous situations on public roads are detected automatically by the vehicle via Car-to-X-Communication or these can be reported by the driver. The early warning makes it possible to adapt your driving characteristics in good time. Accidents, broken-down vehicles, weather hazards or a vehicle with activated hazard warning lights are shown on the map. For route guidance with augmented reality, information objects such as arrows indicating a turn, street names and house numbers are shown in a video image during the driving manoeuvre or at traffic lights. The map shows map data from the database or from an online map service. In small map scales, buildings are shown as realistic images. The online map update service makes possible the updating of the map data. Weather information and data from other services can be shown on the map. Multi-storey car parks with the corresponding equipment, deliver data about the current occupancy and about parking charges, for example. The options offered vary depending on the country, vehicle equipment and available services.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features  NAVIGATION MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW) WITH ROUTE OVERVIEW  Example: route guidance is active Traffic event on the route Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time Destination 3 Searches for a filling station Switches traffic information display on or off Information on radio  Active frequency band 2 Station name or set frequency Settings Additional options 5 Switches on traffic reports 6 Station list 7 Search Using the radio menu you can play a multitude of radio stations and use the Internet Radio TuneIn. Search for your preferred stations and save these as favourites or in station lists. The function of TuneIn Internet radio is country-dependent. Radio text: this function shows you the station name, the track and the artist for the song currently playing, for example.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features DAB: with the DAB function, graphically formatted extra information about a station can be shown, e.g. logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news or also service information. Traffic announcements: Traffic messages can be displayed by pressing TA. Information on media  Album cover 2 Active media source Track and artist Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback list Random playback 6 Repeat 7 Settings a Additional options 9 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward 10 Additional categories ⑪ Playlists and categories 12 Media search Controls playback 14 Timeline Using the Media application, you can set and use the audio and video functions of your multimedia system. You can listen to music or look at videos, for example. USB: Using the USBmenu, you can play back your own audio or video data from a data storage medium connected by USB. Bluetooth*: Using the Bluetooth menu, you can connect Bluetooth* audio equipment with the multimedia system and play back the available tracks on the audio equipment. Connecting the device can be conveniently handled in the device manager, so you can complete all settings with just a few clicks. Online music: The Online music menu allows you to access music streaming services.

Notes on comfort

The Comfort menu makes all the functions available that contribute to your comfort when driving or taking a break.

SEAT COMFORT

The Seat menu allows you to flexibly adjust the contours of the seats to your needs by adjusting the side bolsters and lumbar support independently. You can save these settings in your Mercedes me profile, so they can be called up each time you drive. With the Seat kinetics function, you can start a programme that causes slight modifications of the seat position when you are driving. These modifications promote a healthy back.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features

MASSAGE

In the Massage menu you will find the massage programmes that are available for your vehicle. By selecting the desired program you start it directly and it runs for a period of approximately ten minutes, depending on the program selected. With the High intensity function you can increase the effect of the massage programme.

AMBIENT LIGHT

In the Ambient light menu you can set the colour and brightness for your ambient lighting. Using the Link zones function, the ambience, accent and impression zones can be regulated separately so that you can set the lighting of your vehicle individually.

Information about smartphone integration

Using the Smartphone Integration menu, various applications are available that can bring the functions of your mobile phone to the multimedia system display. Operation can by carried out via the touchscreen or voice control, for example. Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Smartphone Integration to the multimedia system. Also for use with two phone mode with Smartphone Integration, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system. Use Android Auto for mobile phones with the Android operating system and use Apple CarPlay ^® with your iPhone ^® . The full functionality of Android Auto and Apple CarPlay ^® is only possible with an Internet connection.

Information about vehicle info

You can have important vehicle information displayed in the Info menu. At a glance you will have an overview of vehicle and engine data or current con- sumption values, for example. In addition, you can call up the Digital Owner's Manual via the Owner's Manual menu item.

VEHICLE DATA

THE FOLLOWING DATA WILL BE SHOWN, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Activity of the acceleration and brake pedal • Activity of the suspension strut - Wheel angle • G-force display for the linear and lateral acceleration

ENGINE DATA

THE FOLLOWING DATA IS SHOWN:

• Transmission oil temperature • Engine/coolant temperature Performance Torque - Boost pressure

CONSUMPTION DATA

Depending on your driving style, this display shows the current and average fuel consumption. Together with the displays of vehicle and engine data, you can adapt your driving style to be as efficient and economical as possible.

Information about In-Car Office

Using the In-Car Office menu, you can connect your online services with the multimedia system.

YOU THEN HAVE MULTIPLE OPTIONS AVAILABLE:

• Organising your meetings and telephone conferences.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips New multimedia system features • Managing your e-mails and appointments. • Have navigation to the location for a meeting.

Information about Mercedes me Apps

USING THE MERCEDES ME APPS MENU, VARIOUS SERVICES AND ONLINE FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU:

• Managing Mercedes me services • Using the dashcam • Using the web browser to surf the Internet You require a user account, and have to connect your vehicle with the user account, in order to be able to use services. If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown. Please not that the available features are country-dependent.

Information on settings

In the Settings you can set the basic configuration for your multimedia system and the vehicle. You have access to all functions in this menu, from switching the driver assistance systems on and off to display and language settings.

THE SETTINGS ARE STRUCTURED IN THE FOLLOWING MENUS:

- Assistance Vehicle Lights System

ASSISTANCE MENU

With the Assistance menu you have direct access to the driver assistance systems which are installed in your vehicle and can either switch these on or off, or configure according to your wishes.

VEHICLE MENU

HERE YOU CAN ACTIVATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Automatic folding in of the outside mirrors when parking the vehicle • Automatic adjustment of the seat and steering wheel, for comfortable entry and exit from the vehicle • Automatic activation of the 360° camera when selecting reverse gear

LIGHT MENU

All the light settings can be carried out in the Lights menu. You can activate or deactivate the Intelligent Light System here, set for how long your vehicle should remain lit after parking or unlocking or switch the function off.

SYSTEM MENU

All important settings for the multimedia system can be carried out in the System menu.

YOU CAN CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Setting the system language • The configuration of Wi-Fi and Bluetooth® • Setting of time and date  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips At the filling station

At the filling station

Topping up the windscreen washer system


WARNING

Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the creation of sparks when using windscreen washer concentrate.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.  Press on the rear area of washer fluid filler flap Ⓛ. Washer fluid filler flap Ⓞ will open. Top up the washer fluid. Close washer fluid filler flap ①. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.  Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the 📋 button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 297). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips At the filling station 

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES

Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.  Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① as far as it will go. Press release button 2. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ③.

FITTING THE WIPER BLADES

 Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow until release knob engages. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. Switch on the vehicle. Press the button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions. Switch off the vehicle. Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY

There is a maintenance display at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips At the filling station  Remove protective film ① from the maintenance display. When the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash


WARNING

Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.  

NOTE

Damage from automatic braking

IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHICLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:

• Active Brake Assist • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC • HOLD function • Active Parking Assist To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during towing or in the car wash. 

NOTE

Damage due to unsuitable car wash Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH, ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. • the HOLD function is switched off. • the 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips At the filling station • the vehicle is locked and the door handles retracted. • the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. • the outside mirrors are folded in. • the blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. • the windscreen wiper switch is in position 0. - the key is at a minimum distance of 6 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate or a door could open unintentionally. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. • for car washes with a conveyor system: - neutral N is engaged. - The vehicle is locked from the inside. If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday

Preparing for a holiday

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

As a convenience function, the headlamps automatically adjust when the vehicle crosses the border into a country where traffic drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be adjusted manually in the Low beam menu ( → page 293).

THE AUTOMATIC LIGHT ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE:

• If Automatic is activated in the Low beam menu • If the navigation and the navigation position are available

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, CHECK THE HEADLAMP SETTING AND CHANGE IT MANUALLY IF NECESSARY:

- If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only display message is displayed. - If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is displayed.

FOLLOWING MANUAL ADJUSTMENT:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled. • The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high. - The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres

WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday  

WARNING

Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm • M+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

• Check the tyre pressure ( → page 755). • Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage. - Check the valve caps. - Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Removing the safety vest

 There is a compartment in the door racks of all doors for storing a safety vest. To remove: pull out the safety vest bag ① by the loop ②. Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and place it in the safety vest bag ①. Slide the safety vest bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety vest compartment. Ensure the loop ② hangs out so that it is easy to reach. For a new safety vest, remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest compartment. Otherwise, it may cause unintentional slipping out or make it difficult to remove. Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday   ① Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

REPLACE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty • The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded - The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

• Please contact your local waste disposal company. Removing the warning triangle  The warning triangle ⓘ is located under the load compartment floor. Remove the warning triangle ①. First-aid kit  The first-aid kit ① is located in the net in the load compartment on the left when the vehicle is first delivered.

Map data update overview

As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-Benz.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday 

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP DATA:

• Online map update • Updates from the Mercedes me Portal • Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre Additional costs can be incurred in this process.

ONLINE MAP UPDATE

REQUIREMENTS:

• Mercedes me connect is available. • You have a Mercedes me user account. • The Online Map Update service is available for your region. • The service has been activated. The Online Map Update service is only available in certain countries. Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update. The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved. The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle is switched on.

UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL

The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/ Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage medium. After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has been restarted, the updated map data is used.

Entering a POI or address

Requirements:

Observe the notes on destination entry ( → page 588).

• For the online search:

- There is an Internet connection. - Mercedes me connect is available. - The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use. - Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me - The service is available and has been activated. If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using the data of the digital map.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday  Multimedia system:  Example: entering a POI or address ① Input line with current entry 2 Search result 3 Selects destination search, displays further destination searches with double arrow 4 Deletes an entry Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search 6 Deletes the last character entered 7 Hides the keypad Switches to handwriting recognition 9 Starts the MBUX voice assistant ( → page 521) Sets the written language Switches to digits and special characters 12 Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list. Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and ratings. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.

THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN ①:

• Town, street, house number or street, town Postcode • POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants Town, POI name - Contact name • Geo-coordinates ( → page 592) • Three-word addresses from what3words ( → page 592) Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search. ▶ Hide the keyboard with OK. Select the destination in the list. The following menu shows the selected destination with the address information and a corresponding map section. The menu enables the route to be calculated.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Preparing for a holiday 

Searching for radio stations using station names or frequency entry

Multimedia system:  Select □. Enter a station name or frequency. Select a station.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading

Luggage and loading

Attaching a roof luggage rack


WARNING

Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section in the printed Owner's Manual.  

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading  

NOTE

Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof luggage rack is fitted, the tailgate can be fully opened. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.  

NOTE

Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. Do not use metallic or hard objects. Carefully fold covers ① upwards in the direction of the arrow. Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer. Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.

Folding the rear seat backrests forward


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading  

WARNING

Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

- The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury. • A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or properly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended. - The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or load compartment.

ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPECIALLY:

• After the seat has been adjusted. • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

Requirements

• The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. • Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up.

FOLDING THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD MECHANICALLY

You can fold the centre and right seat backrests forwards separately. The left seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre seat backrest. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place. Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position and locked to the left seat backrest.  Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt ① into marked position ②. Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading  Pull release lever ①. ▶ Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

FOLDING THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS SEPARATELY

If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place.  Press release catch 3 ▶ Fold seat backrest ② forwards.

Folding back the rear seat backrest

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. WARNING Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

- The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury. - A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or properly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended. - The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or load compartment.

ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPECIALLY:

• After the seat has been adjusted. • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards 

EQE - Owner's Manual

Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. 

NOTE

Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back. ▶ Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verification indicator ② will be visible.

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically


WARNING

Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. ▶ Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place. 

NOTE

Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted. Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure. Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. ▶ Swing seat backrest ① back until it engages. Red lock verification indicator ② will no longer be visible. The seat backrest will now be engaged. EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading  

NOTE

Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck. 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be damaged in the process. Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack). Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is permitted. When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing eye."

EXTENDING THE BALL NECK FULLY ELECTRICALLY

 Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Keep the swivel range clear. Pull button ①. Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically. Wait until the ball neck has reached the swung-out position with a clear locking noise. When indicator lamp ② is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp Ⓞ will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading  

RETRACTING THE BALL NECK FULLY ELECTRICALLY

Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug. Pull button ①. Indicator lamp Ⓞ will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically. Wait until the ball neck has reached the swung-in locked position. When indicator lamp ② goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp Ⓞ will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT THE DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:

• Indicator and warning lamps ( → page 920) • Display messages (→ page 849)

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256).  1 Tie-down eyes  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading 

Overview of the front stowage compartments


WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. 

WARNING

Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell Objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell. Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another.  ① Stowage spaces in the doors Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with multimedia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player Stowage compartment in the front centre console, with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones depending on the vehicle version Stowage tray under the central display of the multimedia system Glove compartment   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Luggage and loading The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre console can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior (→ page 722).

Opening and closing the glove compartment


WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. ▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.  To open: press button 1. The glove compartment will open. To close: fold the glove compartment upwards. The glove compartment will close. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Ice and snow

< Ice and snow

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres


WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. 

WARNING

Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm • M+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

• Check the tyre pressure ( → page 755). • Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage. - Check the valve caps.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Ice and snow \- Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm.

Setting the speed limit for winter tyres

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Winter tyre limit ▶ Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.

SETTING A SPEED

Select Winter tyre limit. Select a speed.

Notes on snow chains


WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. ▶ Never fit snow chains to the front wheels. ▶ Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs.  

NOTE

Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. 

NOTE

Damage to wheel trims through fitted snow chains If you fit snow chains on aluminium wheels you could damage the wheel trims. Remove the wheel trims from the aluminium wheels before fitting snow chains.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:

- Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. - For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. • Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer. • If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h. • Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Ice and snow - Vehicles with AIRMATIC: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level ( → page 448). - Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are fitted, only drive with snow chain mode active ( → page 754). You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( → page 410). You can deactivate ESP ^* to pull away ( → page 399). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( → page 832). 

WARNING

Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components, it may ignite. Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled near to the filler opening.  

NOTE

Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting.  Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. 

NOTE

Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids  Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind-screen washer fluids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit • below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Ice and snow 

Topping up the windscreen washer system


WARNING

Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable.  Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the creation of sparks when using windscreen washer concentrate.

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.  Press on the rear area of washer fluid filler flap ①. Washer fluid filler flap ① will open. Top up the washer fluid. Close washer fluid filler flap ①. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.  Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the 📋 button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 297). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES

Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Ice and snow  Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① as far as it will go. Press release button 2. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ③ FITTING THE WIPER BLADES  Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow until release knob engages. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. Switch on the vehicle. Press the 📋 button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions. Switch off the vehicle. Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY

There is a maintenance display at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.  Remove protective film ① from the maintenance display.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Ice and snow When the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown 

< Help in the event of a breakdown

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights  Vehicles without MBUX Hyperscreen  Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen Press button ①

THE HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS WILL SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY IF:

• the airbag has been deployed. - the vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill. When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using the warning lamp button.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown 

Removing the fire extinguisher


WARNING

Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants. ▶ Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket. Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.  Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 1 upwards. Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab ① downwards. Remove fire extinguisher 2.

Removing the safety vest

 There is a compartment in the door racks of all doors for storing a safety vest. To remove: pull out the safety vest bag ① by the loop ②. Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and place it in the safety vest bag ①. Slide the safety vest bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety vest compartment. Ensure the loop ② hangs out so that it is easy to reach. For a new safety vest, remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest compartment. Otherwise, it may cause unintentional slipping out or make it difficult to remove. Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown   ① Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

REPLACE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty • The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded - The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

• Please contact your local waste disposal company. Removing the warning triangle  The warning triangle ⓑ is located under the load compartment floor. Remove the warning triangle ①. First-aid kit  The first-aid kit ① is located in the net in the load compartment on the left when the vehicle is first delivered.

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the socket flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue  EQE - Owner's Manual  > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form. Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Only have starting assistance provided by a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only have the battery charged at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Notes on electrical fuses


WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a fire.  Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage.  

NOTE

Damage due to incorrect fuses Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted.  Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram. Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the rear passenger compartment ( → page 748). 

NOTE

Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction.  When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box.  When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown • All electrical consumers are switched off. • The vehicle is switched off.

THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:

• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit ( → page 748) • Fuse box in the front passenger footwell ( → page 748) • Fuse box in the rear passenger compartment ( → page 748)

Notes on flat tyres


WARNING

Risk of accident due to a flat tyre A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre. Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:

- Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) (→ page 730). - Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit ( → page 731). - Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( → page 659). • All vehicles: change the wheel ( → page 764).

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

With the exception of some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out which wheel change tools are necessary and approved for changing the wheel on your vehicle.

YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A WHEEL:

Jack - Chock - Wheel wrench Centring pin The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag ① in the load compartment. When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately secured. 

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS:

Jack Gloves - Wheel wrench Centring pin - Folding chock - Ratchet for jack

TREFIT kit storage location

The TREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.  ① Tyre inflation compressor 2 Tyre sealant bottle Depending on the model, the TREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the load compartment floor.

YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE POWER CATEGORY (LK) AND/OR ELECTRICAL DATA ON THE BACK OF THE TYRE INFLATION COMPRESSOR:

LK3 - 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg AT A DISTANCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1 M TO THE TYRE INFLATION COMPRESSOR AND APPROXIMATELY 1.6 M ABOVE THE GROUND, THE FOLLOWING SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS APPLY: • Emission sound pressure level LFA 84 dB(A) • Sound power level L_WA 92 dB(A) The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods(→ page 739). Make sure that the 12-V-battery is connected and charged

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE 12-V-BATTERY IS DISCONNECTED OR DISCHARGED

• The drive system cannot be started. • The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied. • The selector lever cannot be put into position N or P.

ONLY ONE TRANSPORT IS PERMITTED WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS OCCUR:

• If the selector lever cannot be put into position [N]. • If the 12-V-battery is disconnected or discharged. • If the display in the instrument cluster is not working. - If the [icon] Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual message is displayed. - If the Top up coolant See Owner's Manual message is displayed. • If the Stop Switch off the vehicle message is displayed. In such cases, transport the vehicle ( → page 742). Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. ▶ A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

NOTE

WARNING

Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOW-STARTED OR TOWED AWAY IS HEAVIER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN OCCUR:

• the towing eye may become detached. • the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn. Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( → page 830).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown

TOWING AWAY THE VEHICLE

Fit the towing eye ( → page 745). Fasten the towing device. 

NOTE

Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar ▶ Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ( → page 210). Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate tow-away protection ( → page 235). Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( → page 433). Put the selector lever into position N. Release the electric parking brake. Remain in the cockpit during towing and observe the display messages. Do not switch off the vehicle while it is being towed. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door, because otherwise the selector lever automatically switches to position P. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

SAFETY-RELATED FUNCTIONS ARE LIMITED OR NO LONGER AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• the vehicle is switched off. • the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. - the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. In such cases, do not tow the vehicle. ▶ Transport the vehicle ( → page 742). 

NOTE

Damage to the drive system due to incorrect towing

THE VEHICLE MAY NOT BE TOWED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• the vehicle is switched off. • the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. - the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. In such cases, do not tow the vehicle.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Help in the event of a breakdown  

NOTE

Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. ▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Expert tips

< Expert tips

Additional functions of buttons

OPENING AND CLOSING THE WINDOWS USING THE AIR-RECIRCULATION BUTTON (CONVENIENCE CLOSING/OPENING)

When air-recirculation mode is activated, the side windows will be closed automatically, e.g. before entering a tunnel. When air-recirculation mode is deactivated, the side windows will automatically move back to their original position. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof.  When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side windows.  When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.  To close windows: press and hold the button in the climate bar in the central display or in the air conditioning control panel until the windows move. The windows close and air-recirculation mode switches on.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Expert tips  

WARNING

Risk of entrapment from the convenience opening feature During convenience opening parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side windows. If someone becomes trapped, immediately press the button in the door to open the side windows. The side windows stop. To continue closing the side windows, pull on the ☐ button. To reopen closed windows: press and hold 📄 the button in the climate bar in the central display or in the air conditioning control panel until the windows move. The windows move back to their original position and air-recirculation mode switches off. Vehicles with a sliding sunroof: the sliding sunroof closes or opens simultaneously.

IF BODY PARTS BECOME ENTRAPPED IN THE SLIDING SUNROOF:

To stop: press the button. To open: pull the button 📄 back.

RESETTING THE CLIMATE CONTROL SETTINGS

Press and hold the Climate menu entry on the climate bar of the multimedia system for five seconds. The climate control settings will be reset to the basic settings.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS

Multimedia system:  Select TA. The traffic information is switched on or off.

Useful vehicle functions

NOTES ABOUT THE AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVE REAR WINDOW WIPER THE REAR WINDOW WIPER WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE ACTIVE IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET AT THE SAME TIME:

• The front windscreen wiper is switched on • Reverse gear is engaged

STORING THE PARKING POSITION OF THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR USING THE MEMORY BUTTON

Requirements

• Reverse gear has not been engaged.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Expert tips Use button ② to select the front-passenger outside mirror. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button ①. Press the M button. Confirm immediately using button Ⓞ to store the setting. No more than three seconds may pass between the M button and button ① being pressed. The mirror adjustment will be cancelled after three seconds.

Good to know

DEACTIVATING THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY

If you deactivate the key function, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time. If you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key. Press and hold the key 🔒 button. With the key button | 📁 | pressed, immediately press key button twice in quick succession. The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time.

YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE KEY:

• Press any key on the key. - Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage compartment (→ page 334).

OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically ( → page 670) or manually ( → page 671). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS

THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:

\- SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be transmitted. The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Quick start and Tips Expert tips \- SOS: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call. If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:

- A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display. • The SOS button lights up red continuously.

EMERGENCY GUIDE

In the event of an accident or breakdown, the emergency guide shows safety notes on the central display.

THESE INCLUDE, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Recommended actions when leaving the vehicle • Procedure for safely removing seat belts in the event of an accident whereby the vehicle comes to rest on its roof

THE EMERGENCY GUIDE IS ACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• Occupant protection system has been triggered • An emergency call is made • Certain breakdown situations  The availability as well as the scope of the emergency guide can vary depending in the country and vehicle equipment.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance 

< At a glance

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Cockpit (central display) 89 Emergencies and breakdowns 108 Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) 92 Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 95 Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) Overhead control panel 100 Door operating unit and seat adjustment 102 Control settings in the rear passenger compartment EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Cockpit (central display) 

Cockpit (central display)

 Left-hand-drive vehicles (with central display) EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Cockpit (central display)   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Cockpit (central display)

1 - Increases recuperation	31
+ Reduces recuperation	31
2 Combination switch 283	>
3 Driver's display 499	>
4 DIRECT SELECT lever 353	>
5 Central display 534	>
6 Glove compartment 67	>
7 Stowage compartment 67	>
8 Switch panel for:
---- DYNAMIC SELECT button	3$0

Active Parking Assist EQ Calls up the EQ menu 378 Quick vehicle access Fingerprint sensor 5×4 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off 5\$4 Switches sound on/off 57 Adjusts the volume 558 Hazard warning light system 75 Start/stop button 331 Control panel for the MBUX multi-media system 5×2 12 Adjusts the steering wheel 249 13 (P) Electric parking brake 326 14 Diagnostics connection 130 Light switch 281 16 Control panel: Driver's display 499 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and variable limiter EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen) 

Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)

 Left-hand-drive vehicles (with MBUX Hyperscreen)  EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Cockpit (MBUX Hyperscreen)  \- Increases recuperation 391 \+ Reduces recuperation 3>1 ② Combination switch 283 DIRECT SELECT lever 353 MBUX Hyperscreen with: Driver's display 496 Central display 534 Front passenger display 534 Control panel for the MBUX multi-media system 52 Glove compartment 67 ⑦ Stowage compartment 67 B Hazard warning light system 75 Switch panel for: DYNAMIC SELECT button 350 Active Parking Assist EQ Calls up the EQ menu 378 Quick vehicle access Fingerprint sensor 54 Switches the MBUX multimedia system on/off 584 Switches sound on/off 57 Adjusts the volume 558 Start/stop button 331 Adjusts the steering wheel 249 12 (P) Electric parking brake 386 13 Diagnostics connection 130 Light switch 281 15 Control panel: Driver's display 499 Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and variable limiter 423 EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard) 

Indicator and warning lamps (standard)

 Standard driver's display  EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (standard)  1 Turn signal lights 283 2 System error Trailer hitch 4 Suspension (red) Suspension (yellow) Electrical fault 6 Power steering (red) Power steering (yellow) Rear axle steering (red) Rear axle steering (yellow) 7 Restraint system B Seat belt Distance warning 10 ABS Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem 12 ESP® OFF ESP® 13 Reduced power READY Operational readiness of drive system 321 Electric parking brake (yellow) 926 Electric parking brake (red) 926 17 (D) Brakes (red) 926 (1) Brakes (yellow) 926 18 Range 593 12 Charge level display 503 20 D High beam 283 SD Low beam 281 Parking lights 281 21 0¢ Rear fog light 282 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 983 EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera) 

Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)

 Driver's display with driver camera  EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Indicator and warning lamps (with driver camera)  System error 2 Turn signal lights 283 Seat belt 4 Distance warning Restraint system 6 Reduced power 7 Tyre pressure monitoring sys- tem ESP® OFF ESP® 9 ABS 10 KFAOY Operational readiness of drive system 331 Electric parking brake (yel- low) 926 12 (P) Electric parking brake (red) 926 13 (1) Brakes (red) 926 (1) Brakes (yellow) 926 14 Range 503 Charge level display 503 16 | 0‡ | Rear fog light 222 17 High beam 203 Low beam 201 300 Standing lights 281 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 993 19 Trailer hitch 20 Electrical fault 21 Power steering (red) Power steering (yellow) Rear axle steering (red) Rear axle steering (yellow) 22 Suspension (red) Suspension (yellow) EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Overhead control panel

Overhead control panel

   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Overhead control panel  Sun visors Switches the front interior lighting on/off 294 Switches the rear interior lighting on/off 294 me button 659 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off 294 6 SOS SOS button 6\$9 Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 294 B Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof 229 Opens/closes the panorama sliding sunroof roller sunblind 229 PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps 150 Inside rear-view mirror 302 11 Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 294   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment 

Door operating unit and seat adjustment

   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment  EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Door operating unit and seat adjustment

1 Locks/unlocks the vehicle	297
2 Opens the door 206	>
3 Adjusts the seats electrically 240	>
4 Switches the seat heating on/off	297
5 Switches the seat ventilation on/off	298
6 M Operates the memory function	254

☑	Opens/closes the tailgate	29
☑	Operates the outside mirrors	31
☑	Opens/closes the right side window	25
☑	Opens/closes the rear right side window	25
☑	Child safety lock for the rear side windows	11
☑	Opens/closes the rear left side window	25

10 Opens/closes the left side window	295
14 Adjusts the head restraints 243	>
15 Seat adjustment using the multi-media system	245
16 Adjusts the 4-way lumbar support 242	>

 EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment 

Control settings in the rear passenger compartment

   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment  EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Control settings in the rear passenger compartment Climate control rear operating unit 309> Electronics compartment in the centre console 3 Cup holder 273   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns 

Emergencies and breakdowns

   EQE - Owner's Manual At a glance Emergencies and breakdowns  ① B-pillar with: QR code for accessing the rescue card  Information label on tyre pressure 756> ② Safety vests 55  me button  SOS SOS button  Towing away 739  5 Flat tyre 79  6 Operating the high-voltage disconnect device  7  Fire extinguisher 76  Socket flap with: QR code for accessing the rescue card  10 TREFIT kit 731  11 Warning triangle 56  ⑫ Towing away 739  13 First-aid kit (soft sided) 56   EQE - Owner's Manual Digital Owner's Manual 

< Digital Owner's Manual

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual 111  EQE - Owner's Manual Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual 

Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual

Multimedia system: Settings Info Owner's Manual ▶▶ Open Digital Owner's Manual The Digital Owner's Manual describes the functions and operation of the vehicle and the multimedia system. Select one of the following menu items in the Digital Owner's Manual: - Quick start: find the first steps towards adjusting your seat (driver's side). - Tips: find information that prepares you for certain everyday situations with your vehicle. • Animations: watch animations of the vehicle functions. - Messages: receive additional information about the messages in the driver's display. • Language: select the language for the Digital Owner's Manual. You can search for keywords using the search field Search, in order to find quick answers to questions about the operation of the vehicle.  ① Menu ② Search 3 Back Contents section Some sections in the Digital Owner's Manual, such as warning notes, can be expanded and collapsed.

Additional methods of calling up the Digital Owner's Manual:

Driver's display: call up brief information as display messages in the driver's display MBUX Voice Assistant: call up via the voice control system Global search: call up search results for contents of the Digital Owner's Manual in the home screen  M EQE - Owner's Manual Digital Owner's Manual Calling up the Digital Owner's Manual For safety reasons, the Digital Owner's Manual is deactivated while driving.   Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   General notes 

< General notes

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Protection of the environment 114  Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries  Implied warranty 137  Take-back of end-of-life vehicles 115  Diagnostics connection 130  QR code for rescue card 138  Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 116  Qualified specialist workshop 132  Data storage 139  Touch-sensitive controls 118  Vehicle registration 133  Copyright 143  Mercedes me App 119  Correct use of the vehicle 134  Operating safety 120  Information on the REACH regulation 135  Notes on assembling the number plate on the front licence plate holder  Notes for persons with electronic medical aids  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Protection of the environment 

Protection of the environment

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to operating conditions and personal driving style Operate your vehicle in an environmentally responsible manner to help protect the environment. Please observe the following recommendations on operating conditions and personal driving style.

Operating conditions:

Make sure that the tyre pressure is correct. Do not carry any unnecessary weight (e.g. roof luggage racks once you no longer need them). Monitor energy consumption. Adhere to the service intervals. A regularly serviced vehicle will contribute to environmental protection. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:

Drive carefully and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and braking. Drive in a way that conserves energy. Observe the ECO display for an economical driving style.

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental pollution caused by irresponsible disposal of the high-voltage battery A high-voltage battery contains materials which are harmful to the environment. \- Dispose of faulty high-voltage batteries at a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

Take-back of end-of-life vehicles

EU COUNTRIES ONLY:

Mercedes-Benz will take back your end-of-life vehicle for environment-friendly disposal in accordance with the European Union (EU) End-Of-Life Vehicles Directive. A network of vehicle take-back points and dismantlers has been established for you to return your vehicle. You can leave it at any of these points free of charge. This makes an important contribution to closing the recycling circle and conserving resources. For further information about the recycling and disposal of end-of-life vehicles, and the take-back conditions, please visit the national Mercedes-Benz website for your country.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts 

Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts


ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage caused by not using recycled reconditioned components Mercedes-Benz AG offers recycled reconditioned components and parts with the same quality as new parts. The same entitlement from the implied warranty is valid as for new parts.  Recycled reconditioned components and parts from Mercedes-Benz AG. 

NOTE

Impairment of the operating efficiency of the restraint systems from installing accessory parts or from repairs or welding

AIRBAGS AND SEAT BELT TENSIONERS, AS WELL AS CONTROL UNITS AND SENSORS FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEMS, MAY BE INSTALLED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE:

doors • door pillars - Sill Seats Cockpit - Driver's display - Centre console - lateral roof frame Do not install accessory parts such as audio systems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs or welding. Have accessories retrofitted at a qualified specialist workshop. You could jeopardise the operating safety of your vehicle if you use parts, tyres and wheels as well as accessories relevant to safety that have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. Safety-critical systems (e.g. the brake system)   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts may malfunction. Use only Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts or parts of equal quality. Use only tyres, wheels and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model. Mercedes-Benz tests original parts and conversion parts and accessory parts that have been specifically approved for your vehicle model for their reliability, safety and suitability. Despite ongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz is unable to assess other parts. Mercedes-Benz therefore accepts no responsibility for the use of such parts in Mercedes-Benz vehicles, even if they have been officially approved or independently approved by a testing centre. Certain parts are officially approved for installation or modification only if they comply with legal requirements. All Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts meet the approval requirements. The use of non-approved parts may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit.

THIS IS THE CASE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- The vehicle type is different from that for which the vehicle's general operating permit was granted. • Other road users could be endangered. • The noise level gets worse. Always specify the vehicle identification number (VIN) ( → page 830) when ordering Mercedes-Benz GenuineParts.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Touch-sensitive controls 

Touch-sensitive controls

In addition to conventional switches and buttons, your vehicle is equipped with touch-sensitive controls.

THESE ARE LOCATED IN THE FOLLOWING AREAS OF YOUR VEHICLE:

• Roof and door control panel • Climate control - Steering wheel MBUX multimedia system The controls have touch-sensitive user interface surfaces. The surfaces are controlled by pressing or swiping to adjust settings or to trigger functions, forexample. In the area of the touchscreen, you also receive haptic feedback in the form of a pulse or a vibration, or the surface structure changes on the touch-sensitive user interface surface, forexample.

YOU RECEIVE HAPTIC FEEDBACK IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOREEXAMPLE:

- When pressing a button on the user interface surface - When scrolling in a list or table - When reaching a new area on the user interface surface, e.g. a pop-up window

WHEN HANDLING TOUCH-SENSITIVE USER INTERFACE SURFACES, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS TO AVOID PROBLEMS OPERATING:

• Do not affix stickers or similar objects on the surfaces - Keep the surfaces protected from moisture and wet conditions. - Keep the surfaces free of dust and dirt (→ page 722). Some touch-sensitive control elements have a symbol and integrated indicator lamps. When operating, make sure to press on the symbol of the control element.  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Mercedes me App

Mercedes me App

Notes about the on-demand feature

You can also activate various functions (on-demand feature) subsequently via Mercedes me after purchasing your vehicle. Information is available at any Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Activating on-demand feature using Mercedes me

Requirements:

• The vehicle has a wireless connection. • The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account.

ORDERING AND ACTIVATING ON-DEMAND FEATURE

Add the desired on-demand feature for the vehicle to the shopping basket in the Mercedes me Store. Complete the order. The on-demand feature is activated when operating the vehicle.

SPEEDING UP ACTIVATION

Switch the vehicle off and lock it. Unlock the vehicle after about two minutes and switch on the vehicle. The on-demand feature has been activated. For some features, a notification also appears in the vehicle's multimedia system. If the activation was not successful, repeat the process.  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Operating safety

Operating safety


WARNING

Risk of accident due to malfunctions or system failures If you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairs carried out, this could result in malfunctions or system failures. Always have the prescribed service- and maintenance work or any required repairs carried out in a qualified workshop. 

WARNING

Risk of accident or injury due to improper modifications to electronic components Modifications to electronic components, their software or wiring can impair their functionality and/or the functionality of other networked components or safety-relevant systems. This can endanger the vehicle's operating safety. You must not tamper with wiring, electronic components, or their software. Always have work on electrical and electronic devices carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. If you modify the on-board electronics, the general operating permit is rendered invalid. Observe the "On-board electronics" section in "Technical data". 

NOTE

Impairment of the operating efficiency of the vehicle or individual components due to tampering with the on-board electronics The vehicle is equipped by the manufacturer with various safety mechanisms that interact with each other.

IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS TAMPERING WITH THE ON-BOARD ELECTRONICS DUE TO AN UNAUTHORIZED MODIFICATION OF CONTROL UNITS AND/OR THEIR SOFTWARE/DATA, THIS MAY HAVE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:

- Individual vehicle functions are (temporarily) no longer operational. • The overall vehicle is (temporarily) no longer operational. Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop and, if necessary, reset to factory settings.  

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to driving too fast and due to impacts to the vehicle underbody and suspension components

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR, THERE IS A RISK OF DAMAGE TO THE VEHICLE:

- the vehicle becomes grounded, e.g. on a high kerb or an unpaved road - the vehicle is driven too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bump or pothole • a heavy object strikes the underbody or suspension components In situations such as these, damage to the body, underbody, suspension components, wheels or tyres and high-voltage battery components may not be visible. Components damaged in this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, may no longer absorb the resulting force as intended. Have the vehicle checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. or If driving safety is impaired while continuing your journey, pull over and stop the vehicle immediately, while paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and contact a qualified specialist workshop. Electric vehicles have an electric motor. The electric motor's energy supply is provided by the high-voltage on-board electrical system. 

DANGER

Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components may cause a fire. In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high-voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible. Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage onboard electrical system components have been modified or damaged. Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. After an accident, have the vehicle transported away. Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary. EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Operating safety  The components of the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system are marked with yellow warning stickers. The cables of the high-voltage on-board electrical system are orange.  High-voltage components that can become very hot are marked with an additional warning sticker:  Example Vehicles with an electric motor generate significantly less driving noise than vehicles with internal-combustion engines. Therefore the vehicle may not be heard by other road users due to the significantly reduced sound produced. For this reason the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This protective equipment is prescribed by law. The outside sound produced by the sound generator (AVAS) can be heard in the passenger compartment at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction.  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Notes on assembling the number plate on the front licence plate holder 

Notes on assembling the number plate on the front licence plate holder


NOTE

Malfunctions and system failures due to incorrect assembly of the licence plate on the front licence plate holder If the licence plate is incorrectly assembled on the front licence plate holder, sensors, cameras or driving and safety systems may malfunction or fail. Observe the following points when assembling the licence plate on the front licence plate holder: Assemble the licence plate directly on the licence plate holder without advertising media or other holders. Assemble the licence plate so that it does not protrude above or to the side of the licence plate adapter.  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries 

< Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries

Electromagnetic compatibility

The electromagnetic compatibility of the vehicle components has been checked and certified according to the currently valid version of Regulation UN-R 10.

National information for regulatory radio components

NOTES WHEN CROSSING NATIONAL BORDERS

You must observe the radio regulatory requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the vehicle.

ONLY FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES AND COUNTRIES THAT RECOGNISE THE EU MANUFACTURER'S DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:

 The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle: The manufacturers of the wireless components ensure that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with Directive 2014/53/EU. The full texts of the EU declarations of conformity are available at the following web address: https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html  You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

FOR ISRAEL ONLY:

It is prohibited to make any change to a vehicle-installed radio component that could affect the wireless specifications of the device, including software changes, replacement of the original antenna, or adding the option to connect the device to an external antenna, without first obtaining approval from the Communica-tions Ministry, because of concern about wireless interference.

FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:

 The following information applies to all wireless components of the vehicle and of the information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle: The manufacturers of the radio components declare that all radio equipment installed in the vehicle is in compliance with the relevant statutory require-   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries  ments. The full texts of the declarations of conformity are available at the following web address: https://moba.i.mercedes-benz.com/markets/ece-row/baix/cars/certificates-of-conformity/en_GB/index.html 

FOR BRAZIL ONLY:

 Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle: These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems.

FOR JAMAICA ONLY:

All wireless vehicle components have received type approval from the SMA.

FOR NIGERIA ONLY:

Connection and use of this communications equipment is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission Connection and use of the radio communications equipment in this vehicle is permitted by the Nigerian Communications Commission

FOR RUSSIA ONLY:

 The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that all wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

FOR UKRAINE ONLY:

 The manufacturers of the wireless components installed in the vehicle hereby declare that the wireless components installed in the vehicle comply with the technical regulations for two-way radios. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

Jack

FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES ONLY:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

EC declaration of conformity

1. The undersigned, representing   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries  Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 747 41 Hradec nad Moravicí, Opavská 1000, The Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product: 2. a) Name: Jack Type, Number: A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 D) A 639 580 03 18 E) A 910 580 00 00 F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00 G) A 247 580 01 00, A 293 580 01 00 H) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00 Year of manufacture: 2022 Complies with all relevant provisions Directive No. 2006/42/EC b) Description and purpose of use: The jack is intended solely for lifting the specified car, in accordance with the instruction label on the jack. 3. References of harmonized and other standards or specifications ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, AS 2693, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435, Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravici Place 5. 14.03.2022 Date Dipl. Engineer Michal Koberský [Signature]   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries  Director SBU-CJ

FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity:

UK Declaration of Conformity

1. The undersigned, representing Manufacturer: BRANO a.s. 74741 Hradec nad Moravici, Opavská 1000, The Czech Republic ID No.: 64-387-5933 VAT No.: CZ64-387-5933 herewith declares under our sole responsibility that the product: 2. a) Name: Jack Type, Number: A) A 164 580 02 18, A 166 580 01 18 B) A 240 580 00 18 C) A 639 580 02 18 D) A 639 580 03 18 E) A 910 580 00 00 F) A 247 580 00 00, A 293 580 00 00 G) A 247 580 02 00, A 293 580 02 00 Year of manufacture: 2022 Complies with all relevant provisions Supply of Machinery (Safety) Regulations 2008 b) Description and purpose of use: The jack is intended solely for lifting the specified car, in accordance with the instruction label on the jack. 3. References of harmonized and other standards or specifications ISO 4063, EN ISO 14341-A, DBL 8230.10, DBL 7382.20, DBL 7392.10, DBL 8451.15, MBN 10435, Technical documentation of the product is stored at the premise of the manufacturer. The person responsible for assembling the technical documentation of the product: Head of the Technical Department Brano a.s. 4. Hradec nad Moravicí 5.04.07.2022 [Signature] Dipl. Engineer Michal Kober- ský Place Date Director SBU-CJ  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries 

TREFIT kit

FOR EU AND EFTA COUNTRIES ONLY:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: CE EU Declaration of Conformity We Dunlop Tech GmbH Offenbacher Landstr. 8 DE-63456 Hanau Declare under our sole responsibility that Product Description: Electrical Air Pump Serial Number: 000000001 to 999999999 Brand: Mercedes Benz Model: DT 200116 (UW0852-LK1), DT 200136 (UW0855-LK2), DT 200146 (UW0851ve-IBK LK2), DT 200177 (UW0872-IBK-LK2P), DT 200156 (UW0867-LK3) Mercedes Benz Part Number: A 000 583 8805, A 000583 8905, A 000 583 8205, A 000 583 8305, A 000 583 8405 is in conformity with all relevant provisions of the directives: The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016 and complies with the following standards : EN 55014-1:2017 EN 55014-2: 2015 Including (Category I) Dunlop Tech GmbH, Offenbacher Landstr. 8, 63456 Hanau, Germany authorized representative for the compilation of the technical documentation. Factory name: UNIK WORLD IND. CO., LTD. Address: NO. 110-2, Xiwei, Shanhua Dist., Tainan City 74163, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Name Dunlop Tech GmbH, Authorized Representative: IMS Department Adress: Offenbacher Landstraße 8, 63456 Hanau, Germany 06-05-2022 i.A. [signature] i.A. [signature] (Signature 1) (Signature 2) Declaration place: Germany

FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY:

Copy and translation of the original declaration of conformity: Dunlop Tech GmbH UKCA Declaration of Conformity Product: Product Electrical Air pump Model / Brand   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Declarations of conformity and notes on driving in different countries  DT 200116 (UW0852-LK1), DT 200136 (UW0855-LK2), DT 200146 (UW0851ve-IBK LK2), DT 200177 (UW0872-IBK-LK2P), DT 200156 (UW0867-LK3) Mercedes Benz Part Number: A 000 583 8805, A 000 583 8905, A 000 583 8205, A 000 583 8305, A 000 583 8405 Authorized Representative (UK-GB): Name: Address: Contact person: This declaration is issued under the sole responsibility of the mentioned Representative. The subject equipment under declaration is in conformity with the UK-GB Regulation(s) below: Statutory Instruments 2016 No. 1091 The Electromagnetic Compatibility Regulations 2016 Below designated standards were taken conferring a presumption of conformity with the relevant UK-GB regulations: BS EN 55014-1: 2017 BS EN 55014-2: 2015 including(Category I) Authorized Representative responsible for making this declaration: Name: Dunlop Tech GmbH, Authorized Representative: Department IMS Address: Offenbacher Landstraße 8, 63456 Hanau, Germany 06-05-2022 i.A. [signature] i.A. [signature] (Date) (Signature 1) (Signature 2)  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Diagnostics connection

- Diagnostics connection

The diagnostics connection is a technical interface in the vehicle. It is used, for example, during repair and maintenance work or for reading out vehicle data in a specialist workshop. Diagnostic devices should therefore only be connected in a qualified specialist workshop. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to connecting devices to the diagnostics connection If you connect devices to the diagnostics connection of the vehicle, the function of vehicle systems and operating safety may be impaired.  For safety reasons, we recommend that you only use and connect products approved by a Mercedes-Benz service centre. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. 

NOTE

Battery discharging from using devices connected to the diagnostics connection Using devices at the diagnostics connection drains the battery. Check the charge level of the battery. If the charge level is low, charge the battery, e.g. by driving a considerable distance.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Diagnostics connection 

CONNECTING AND USING ANOTHER DEVICE WITH THE DIAGNOSTICS CONNECTION CAN HAVE THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:

• Malfunctions in the vehicle system • Permanent damage to vehicle components Please refer to the warranty terms and conditions for this matter.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Qualified specialist workshop

< Qualified specialist workshop

A qualified specialist workshop has the necessary special skills, tools and qualifications to correctly carry out any necessary work on your vehicle. This particularly applies to safety-relevant work.

ALWAYS HAVE THE FOLLOWING WORK CARRIED OUT ON YOUR VEHICLE AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP:

- Safety-relevant work • Service and maintenance work Repair work • Modifications as well as installations and conversions • Work on electronic components Mercedes-Benz recommends a Mercedes-Benz service centre.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Vehicle registration

Vehicle registration

Mercedes-Benz may ask its service centres to carry out technical inspections on certain vehicles. The quality or safety of the vehicle is improved as a result of the inspection. Mercedes-Benz can only inform you about vehicle checks if Mercedes-Benz has your registration data.

IT IS POSSIBLE THAT YOUR VEHICLE HAS NOT YET BEEN REGISTERED IN YOUR NAME IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• if your vehicle was not purchased at an authorised specialist dealer. - if your vehicle has not yet been examined at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. It is advisable to register your vehicle with a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Inform Mercedes-Benz as soon as possible about any change in address or vehicle ownership. You can do this at a Mercedes-Benz service centre, for example,   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Correct use of the vehicle

Correct use of the vehicle

If you remove any warning stickers, you or others could fail to recognise certain dangers. Leave warning stickers in position.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IN PARTICULAR WHEN DRIVING YOUR VEHICLE:

- The safety notes in this Owner's Manual, vehicle-specific supplements and further supplementary documents • Technical data for the vehicle - Traffic rules and -regulations of the country in which you are currently located - Motor vehicle laws and safety standards of the country in which you are currently located • Radio legislation of the country in which you are currently located   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Information on the REACH regulation 

Information on the REACH regulation

EU and EFTA countries only:

the REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) No. 1907/2006, Article 33) stipulates a duty to supply information about substances of very high concern (SVHCs). Mercedes-Benz AG acts to the best of its knowledge to prevent these SVHCs from being used and to enable customers to safely handle these substances. There are SVHCs known to Mercedes-Benz AG, according to supplier information and internal product information, found in individual components of this vehicle in quantities of over 0.1 percent by weight.

FURTHER INFORMATION CAN BE OBTAINED AT THE FOLLOWING ADDRESSES:

- https://reach.daimler.com/de/home/ - https://reach.daimler.com/en/home/ 

Notes for persons with electronic medical aids

Mercedes-Benz AG cannot, despite carefully developing vehicle systems, completely rule out the interaction of vehicle systems with electronic medical aids such as cardiac pacemakers. In addition, there are components installed in the vehicle that, regardless of the operating status of the vehicle, can generate magnetic fields on a par with permanent magnets. These fields can be found, for example, in the area around the multimedia and sound system or also in the area of the seats, depending on the vehicle equipment.

FOR THIS REASON, THE FOLLOWING CAN OCCUR IN ISOLATED CASES, DEPENDING ON THE AIDS USED:

• Medical aids malfunctioning • Adverse health effects Observe the notes and warnings of the manufacturer of the medical aids; if in doubt, contact the device manufacturer and/or your doctor. If there is continuing uncertainty concerning the possibility of medical aids malfunctioning, Mercedes-Benz AG recommends using only few electrical vehicle systems and/or maintaining a distance from the components.

WHEN CHARGING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY, KEEP A DISTANCE OF AT LEAST AN ARM'S LENGTH BETWEEN THE MEDICAL AID AND THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:

• the power supply equipment This includes charging stations in the form of a wallbox or a public charging point, for example. • vehicle components carrying live voltage This includes the charging cable and the charging control box, for example.

ONLY HAVE REPAIRS AND MAINTENANCE WORK IN THE AREA OF THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS CARRIED OUT AT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP:

• vehicle components carrying live voltage • transmission aerials • multimedia system and sound system If you have any queries or suggestions, consult a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Implied warranty

< Implied warranty


NOTE

Damage to the vehicle arising from violation of these operating instructions. Damage to the vehicle can arise from violation of these operating instructions. This damage is not covered either by the Mercedes-Benz implied warranty or by the New- or Used-Vehicle Warranty. Follow the instructions in these operating instructions on proper operation of your vehicle as well as on possible vehicle damage.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes QR code for rescue card

QR code for rescue card

QR codes are attached in the socket flap and on the opposite side on the B-pillar. In the event of an accident, rescue services can use the QR code to quickly find the appropriate rescue card for your vehicle. The current rescue card contains the most important information about your vehicle (e.g. the routing of the electric lines) in compact form. Further information can be obtained at https://www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code  

Data storage

Data processing in the vehicle

ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS

Electronic control units are fitted in your vehicle. Control units process data which, forexample, they receive from vehicle sensors, generate themselves or exchange between themselves. Some control units are required for the safe operation of your vehicle, some assist you when driving, such as driver assistance systems, while others enable convenience or infotainment functions. The following provides you with general information regarding data processing in the vehicle. Additional information regarding exactly which data in your vehicle are collected, saved and transmitted to third parties, and for what purpose, can be found in the information directly related to the functional characteristics in question in their respective operating instructions. This information is also available online and, depending on the vehicle equipment, digitally.

PERSONAL DATA

Every vehicle is identified by a unique vehicle identification number. Depending on the country, this vehicle identification number can be used by, forexample, governmental authorities to determine the identity of the owner. There are other possibilities to use data collected from the vehicle to identify the owner or driver, such as the licence plate number. Therefore, data generated or processed by control units may be attributable to a person or, under certain conditions, become attributable to a person. Depending on which vehicle data are available, it may be possible to make inferences about, forexample, your driving behaviour, your location, your route or your use patterns.

LEGAL REQUIREMENTS REGARDING THE DISCLOSURE OF DATA

If legally required to do so, manufacturers are, in individual cases, legally obliged to provide governmental entities, upon request and to the extent required, data stored by the manufacturer. Forexample, this may be the case during the investigation of a criminal offence. Governmental entities are themselves, in individual cases and within the applicable legal framework, authorised to read out data from the vehicle. In the case of an accident, information that can help with an investigation can, therefore, be taken from the airbag control unit, forexample.

OPERATIONAL DATA IN THE VEHICLE

This is data regarding the operation of the vehicle, which have been processed by control units.

THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING DATA, FOREEXAMPLE:

- vehicle status information such as the speed, longitudinal acceleration, lateral acceleration, number of wheel revolutions or the fastened seat belts display • ambient conditions, such as temperature, rain sensor or distance sensor Generally, the use of these data is temporary; they will not be stored beyond the period of operation and will only be processed within the vehicle itself. Control units often contain data memories for vehicle keys, forexample. Their use permits the temporary or permanent documentation of technical information about the vehicle's operating state, component loads, maintenance requirements and technical events or faults. EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Data storage 

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE STORED:

- operating status of system components, such as fill levels, tyre pressure or battery status - malfunctions or faults in important system components, such as lights or brakes - system reactions in special driving situations, such as airbag deployment or the intervention of stability control systems • information on events leading to vehicle damage • charge level of the high-voltage battery, estimated range In certain cases, it may be required to store data that would have otherwise been used only temporarily. This may be the case if the vehicle has detected a malfunction, forexample. If you use services, such as repair services and maintenance work, stored operational data as well as the vehicle identification number can be read out and used. They can be read out by service network employees, such as workshops and manufacturers or third parties, such as breakdown services. The same is true in the case of warranty claims and quality assurance measures. In general, the readout is performed via the legally prescribed port for the diagnostics connection in the vehicle. The operational data that are read out document technical states of the vehicle or of individual components and assist in the diagnosis of malfunctions, compliance with warranty obligations and quality improvement. To that end, these data, in particular information about component loads, technical events, malfunctions and other faults may be transmitted along with the vehicle identification number to the manufacturer. Furthermore, the manufacturer is subject to product liability. For this reason the manufacturer also uses operational data from the vehicle, forexample, for recalls. These data can also be used to examine the customer's warranty and guarantee claims. Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset by a service outlet or at your request as part of repair or maintenance work.

CONVENIENCE AND INFOTAINMENT FUNCTIONS

You can store convenience settings and individual settings in the vehicle and change or reset them at any time.

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOREEXAMPLE:

• seat and steering wheel positions • suspension and climate control settings • individual settings, such as interior lighting Depending on the selected equipment, you can import data into vehicle info-tainment functions yourself.

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THIS INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING DATA, FOREEXAMPLE:

- multimedia data, such as music, films or photos for playback in an integrated multimedia system - address book data for use in connection with an integrated hands-free system or an integrated navigation system • entered navigation destinations • data about the use of Internet services These data for convenience and infotainment functions may be saved locally in the vehicle or they may be located on a device which you have connected to the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB flash drive or MP3 player. If you have entered these data yourself, you can delete them at any time.  EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Data storage  This data is transmitted from the vehicle to third parties only at your request. This applies, in particular, when you use online services in accordance with the settings that you have selected.

SMARTPHONE INTEGRATION (E.G. ANDROID AUTO OR APPLE CARPLAY)

If your vehicle is accordingly equipped, you can connect your smartphone or another mobile end device to the vehicle. You can then control them by means of the control elements integrated in the vehicle. Images and audio from the smartphone can be output via the multimedia system. Certain information is simultaneously transferred to your smartphone. Depending on the type and integration, this includes position data, day/night mode and other general vehicle statuses. For more information please consult the Owner's Manual of the vehicle/infotainment system. This integration allows the use of selected smartphone apps, such as navigation or music player apps. There is no further interaction between the smartphone and the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is not directly accessible. The type of additional data processing is determined by the provider of the app being used. Which settings you can make, if any, depends on the specific app and the operating system of your smartphone.

Online services

WIRELESS NETWORK CONNECTION

If your vehicle has a wireless network connection, it enables data to be exchanged between your vehicle and additional systems. The wireless network connection is made possible by the vehicle's own transmitter and receiver or by a mobile end device that you have brought into the vehicle, forexample, a smartphone. Online functions can be used via the wireless network connection. This includes online services and applications/apps provided to you by the manufacturer or by other providers.

MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES

Regarding the manufacturer's online services, the individual functions are described by the manufacturer in a suitable place, forexample, in the Owner's Manual or on the manufacturer's website, where the relevant data protection information is also given. Personal data may be used for the provision of online services. Data are exchanged via a secure connection, such as the manufacturer's designated IT systems. Any personal data which are collected, processed and used, other than for the provision of services, is done so exclusively on the basis of legal permission. This is the case, forexample, for a legally prescribed emergency call system, a contractual agreement or when consent has been given. You can have services and functions, some of which are subject to a fee, activated or deactivated. This excludes legally prescribed functions and services, such as an emergency call system.

THIRD PARTY SERVICES

If you use online services from other providers (third parties), these services are the responsibility of the provider in question and subject to that provider's data protection conditions and terms of use. As a general rule, the manufacturer has no influence on the content exchanged. For this reason, when services are provided by third parties, please ask the service provider in question for information about the type, extent and purpose of the collection and use of personal data.

Data protection rights

Depending on your country or the equipment and range of functions of your vehicle as well as the services you use and the services on offer, you are entitled to different data protection rights. Further information on data protection and your data protection rights can either be found on the manufacturer's website or you will receive this information as part of the various services and   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Data storage service offers. There you will also find the contact information for the manufacturer and its data protection officers. At a workshop, forexample, with the support of a specialist and possibly for a fee, you can have data read out which is stored only locally in the vehicle.   EQE - Owner's Manual > General notes Copyright

Copyright

Information on licences for free and open-source software used in your vehicle can be found on the data carrier in your vehicle document wallet and with updates on the following website: https://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource  EQE - Owner's Manual   Occupant safety 

< Occupant safety

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Brief overview of most important points 145 Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system  Purpose and function of the restraint system  Seat belts 163 Airbags 164

Brief overview of most important points

Basic information

MAKE SURE THAT THE FOLLOWING PREREQUISITES IN PARTICULAR HAVE BEEN MET SO THAT THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM ARE ABLE TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED LEVEL OF PROTECTION:

Sit correctly ( → page 146). • Fasten the seat belt correctly ( → page 147). Function of the 4 seat belt warning lamp ( → page 149). - Function of the rear seat belt status display (→ page 149). - The restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test (→ page 149). - The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( → page 150).

FOR CLEAR UNDERSTANDING

The chapter "Occupant safety" includes information on equipment, functions and behaviours that contribute directly to safety of vehicle occupants.

THE INFORMATION IS STRUCTURED AS FOLLOWS:

- The most important information in brief: in this chapter, you are provided with an overview of the relationship between the restraint system and the correct behaviour of all vehicle occupants. - Specific information: in further sections of the chapter "Occupant safety", you can find specific information on the equipment and functions of the restraint system. \- Keyword directory: you can also find certain subjects in this Owner's Manual using the keyword directory.

INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING SUBJECTS, AMONG OTHERS, ARE NOT PROVIDED IN THE CHAPTER "OCCUPANT SAFETY":

• Children in the vehicle (→ page 166) • Driving and driving safety systems ( → page 391) • Stowage areas ( → page 256)

DEFINING GENERIC TERMS CLEARLY

IN THIS OWNER'S MANUAL, THE FOLLOWING GENERIC TERMS ARE USED:

- Occupant safety: comprises the components and system functions which help to minimise, as much as possible, the stresses on and consequences for vehicle occupants during an accident. - Restraint system: comprises those components which, along with the vehicle structure, help prevent vehicle occupants from potentially coming into contact with parts of the vehicle interior. The seat belts and airbags, for example, are components of the restraint system. - Child restraint system: you can find all information on this subject in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 166).

BE DILIGENT

For the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection, it is essential that your posture is correct and that the seat belt is correctly fastened. EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points Bear in mind that negligence when adjusting your sitting position and fastening the seat belt may have serious consequences. Be diligent and make sure that all vehicle occupants are sitting correctly and have fastened their seat belts properly before starting every journey ( → page 146).

Information on the correct seat position

The seat position must be correct in order for the components of the restraint system to provide the intended level of protection. The seat position influences both the protection provided by the seat belt and the additional protection provided by the airbag. A correct seat position in which the seat is nearly perfectly upright and a correctly fastened seat belt reduce the risks posed by the airbag when it is deployed. Keep space considerations in mind when choosing a seat. With the seat in the correct, nearly upright position, your head should not touch the roof. 

WARNING Risk of injury or death due to an incorrect seat position

If you deviate from the correct seat position, the airbag cannot provide its intended protective function. Each vehicle occupant must make sure of the following. Put the seat in the correct position. Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant women must take particular care to ensure that the lap belt never lies across the abdomen. Observe the following information.

IN ORDER FOR THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED LEVEL OF PROTECTION, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

• Before starting your journey, adjust your seat correctly ( → page 238). When doing so, make sure you are able to fasten your seat belt correctly. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder. - Keep your distance from the airbags, especially the front airbags. Set the driver's seat and front passenger seat as far back as possible while making sure the seat belt is fastened correctly. - If persons are sitting on the rear seats, vehicle occupants should maintain an sufficient distance to the parts of the vehicle interior in front of them. • Make sure there are no people, animals or objects between the vehicle occupants and an airbag. - If you are the driver, observe the following information on the correct position of the driver's seat (→ page 238).   EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points Only hold the steering wheel by the steering wheel rim. This allows the driver's airbag to fully deploy. - Assume a nearly upright sitting posture, with your buttocks positioned as far back as possible in the gap between the seat cushion and the seat backrest. Your back must lie as flatly and as firmly as possible against the seat backrest. - While driving, do not lean forward and do not lean against the door or side window. You may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbags. - Sit with their feet resting on the floor, if possible. Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion Do not put your feet on the cockpit, for example. Your feet may otherwise be in the deployment area of the airbag. • Fasten the seat belt correctly ( → page 147).

Notes on wearing the seat belt correctly

Always fasten your seat belt correctly before starting a journey. A seat belt can only provide the best level of protection if it is worn correctly. 

⚠ WARNING Risk of injury or death due to incorrectly fastened seat belt

If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot perform its intended protective function. In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause injuries, for example, in the event of an accident or when braking or changing direction suddenly. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly.

▲ WARNING Risk of injury or death when additional restraint systems are not used for persons with a smaller stature

Persons under 1.50 m tall cannot wear the seat belt correctly without a suitable additional restraint system. Always secure persons under 1.50 m tall in a suitable restraint system. Observe the following information on the correct seat position and posture ( → page 146).

EACH VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES IN PARTICULAR:

• The seat belt must not be twisted. - The shoulder belt strap must be routed forward from the seat belt outlet over the centre of your shoulder.   EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points - The shoulder belt strap should neither touch your neck nor be routed under your arm or behind your back. • The lap belt must be routed as low down across the hips as possible. In addition, push the lap belt down as far as possible across your hips and pull tight with the shoulder belt strap. Never route the lap belt across your abdomen. Pregnant women must also take particular care with this. • After being tightened, the shoulder belt strap and lap belt must fit snugly against the body. - Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a winter coat. - Never route the seat belt across sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile objects. • Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. - Never secure objects with a seat belt if the seat belt is also being used by one of the vehicle's occupants. Also ensure that no objects, e.g. a cushion, are ever placed between a person and the seat. If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" (→ page 166) Observe the instructions for loading the vehicle when securing objects, luggage or loads ( → page 256).

Fastening and adjusting seat belts

If the seat belt is pulled quickly or sharply, the seat belt retractor locks. The seat belt strap cannot be pulled out any further.  Always engage seat belt tongue ① of the seat belt into seat belt buckle ② of the corresponding seat. To adjust the seat belt height: press button ③ on the seat belt outlet and slide the seat belt outlet to the desired position. To engage the seat belt outlet: release button ③ and ensure that the seat belt outlet engages.

NOTE

Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied and a seat belt is buckled When the front passenger seat is unoccupied and the seat belt tongue of the seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle, components of the restraint system may deploy unnecessarily on the front passenger side, e.g. the seat belt tensioner. ▶ Only buckle the seat belts as intended.  EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points

Function of the restraint system warning lamp

When the vehicle is switched on, a self-test is performed, during which the restraint system warning lamp lights up. It goes out no later than a few seconds after the vehicle is started. The components of the restraint system are then functional.

A MALFUNCTION HAS OCCURRED IN THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM IF:

- the restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on - the restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey If components of the restraint system have been deployed, the ☐ restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously. 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to malfunctions in the restraint system Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as intended in an accident. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the restraint system is malfunctioning, the automatic high voltage emergency shutoff may not function.  

DANGER

Risk of fatal injury due to malfunctioning automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may receive an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Have the automatic high-voltage emergency shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop.

Function of the seat belt warning lamp

The seat belt warning lamp in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. As soon as the driver and front passenger fasten their seat belts, the seat belt warning goes out.

Function of the rear seat belt status display

The rear seat belt status display is only available for certain countries.   The rear seat belt status display in the driver's display is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. In addition, a warning tone may sound. If a person unfastens a seat belt in the rear passenger compartment while the vehicle is motion, the rear seat belt status display appears again.

DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

 

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, YOU CAN DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE REAR SEAT BELT BY THE COLOUR OF THE SEAT SYMBOL IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY AS FOLLOWS:

\- Vehicles with seat occupancy recognition in the rear passenger compartment (seat belt warning) When the vehicle is switched on, if one of the rear seats is occupied and the seat belt tongue of the rear seat belt is not engaged in the seat belt buckle of the corresponding seat, the status display for the rear seat belt is displayed. - Grey: the rear seat is unoccupied. - Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the displayed seat. \- Red: the seat belt of the person in the rear seat is not fastened. The seat belt warning goes out as soon as the seat belt of the person in the rear seat is fastened.  \- Vehicles without seat occupancy recognition in the rear passenger compartment Every time the vehicle is switched on, the rear seat belt status display informs you for a certain amount of time which rear seat belt is not fastened. - Grey: the rear seat belt is not fastened. - Green: the seat belt tongue of a rear seat belt is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the displayed seat. - Red: the person in the rear seat has unfastened their seatbelt.

Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps (front passenger airbag)

 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( → page 174). The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the status of the front passenger airbag.  EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points If the front passenger seat is occupied or a child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, you must make sure both before, and also during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the situation. 

WARNING

Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat. Self-test: when the vehicle is switched on, both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps light up simultaneously for several seconds.

AFTER THE SELF-TEST, YOU CAN DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG AS FOLLOWS:

\- Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously. The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat. If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF must be lit continuously.  \- Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat. If you are driving with a child in the vehicle, observe the information in the chapter "Children in the vehicle" ( → page 166)   EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Brief overview of most important points  

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to a disabled front passenger airbag The front passenger airbag is disabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the cockpit.

IF THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT IS OCCUPIED, ALWAYS ENSURE THAT:

- the classification of the person in the front passenger seat is correct and the front passenger airbag is enabled or disabled in accordance with the person in the front passenger seat. • the front passenger seat has been moved as far back as possible. • the person is seated correctly. Both before and during the journey, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct.

MALFUNCTION OF THE AUTOMATIC FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG SHUTOFF

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp and the ☐ restraint system indicator lamp light up simultaneously. In this case, no one may use the front passenger seat and no child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat. Have the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Disabling or enabling the front passenger air-bag

The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front passenger airbag according to the situation. This happens automatically as a result of the classification of the person or child restraint system on the front passenger seat. You cannot manually disable or enable the front passenger airbag.

Information on the child restraint system

When fitting a child restraint system, observe the notes in "Children in the vehicle" ( → page 166).

NOTES ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT


WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to an enabled co-driver airbag If the co-driver airbag is enabled, a child on the co-driver seat may be struck by the co-driver airbag during an accident.  NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. Also pay particular attention to the notes on rearward-facing or forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( → page 172).  EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system 

Information on the automatic functions of the restraint system

Function of the automatic front passenger air-bag shutoff A PERSON ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT MUST OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION: - Sit correctly (→ page 146). • Fasten the seat belt correctly ( → page 147). The automatic front passenger airbag shutoff can disable or enable the front passenger airbag according to the situation.

MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

- Status of the front passenger airbag, see "Function of the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps" (→ page 150). - When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( → page 172).  STATUS OF THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG IN RELATION TO THE STATURE OF THE PERSON: - Front passenger airbag disabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up continuously. The front passenger airbag will not be deployed in the event of an accident. If PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF is lit, no one may use the front passenger seat. - Front passenger airbag enabled: PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for up to 60 seconds or until both the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF indicator lamps go out. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. Observe the following information on the correct seat position ( → page 146). Vehicles with rear seats: a person of smaller stature should use a rear seat. 

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG MAY OTHERWISE BE DISABLED BY MIS-TAKE, FOR EXAMPLE, IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATION:

- The front passenger transfers their weight by supporting themselves on a vehicle armrest. - The front passenger sits in such a way that their weight is raised from the seat surface. 

NOTE

Deployment of components of the restraint system when the front passenger seat is unoccupied

IN AN ACCIDENT, THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM MAY DEPLOY UNNECESSARILY ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SIDE IF:

• There are heavy objects on the front passenger seat. - The seat belt tongue is engaged in the seat belt buckle of the front passenger seat and the front passenger seat is unoccupied. Stow objects in a suitable place. ▶ Only one person should use each seat belt at any one time. Depending on the detected accident situation, the window airbag on the front passenger side may deploy. The airbag is deployed regardless of whether the front passenger seat is occupied.

Function of PRE-SAFE ^® (anticipatory occupant protection)

PRE-SAFE ^® is able to detect certain critical driving situations and implement pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants.

PRE-SAFE® CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDEPENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER:

- Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. • Closing the side windows. • Vehicles with sliding sunroof: closing the sliding sunroof. - Vehicles with memory function: moving the front passenger seat to a more favourable seat position. - Vehicles with multicontour seat: increasing the lateral support by inflating the seat side bolsters of the seat backrest. PRE-SAFE® Sound: provided that the multimedia system is switched on, generating a brief noise signal to stimulate the innate protective mechanism of a person's hearing. 

NOTE

Damage caused by objects in the footwell or behind the seat The automatic adjustment of the seat position may result in damage to the seat and/or the object. Stow objects in a suitable place. 

Reversing the PRE-SAFE ^® system measures

If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed. You will need to perform certain settings yourself. If the seat belt pre-tensioning is not reduced, move the seat backrest back slightly. The locking mechanism releases.

Function of PRE-SAFE® PLUS (anticipatory occupant protection plus)

PRE-SAFE® PLUS can detect certain impacts, particularly an imminent rear impact, and take pre-emptive measures to protect the vehicle occupants. These measures cannot necessarily prevent an imminent impact.

PRE-SAFE® PLUS CAN IMPLEMENT THE FOLLOWING MEASURES INDEPENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER:

- Tightening the seat belts on the driver's seat and front passenger seat. - Activating the rear hazard warning lights at a higher flashing frequency. - Increasing brake pressure when the vehicle is stationary. This brake application is cancelled automatically when the vehicle pulls away. If an accident did not occur, the pre-emptive measures that were taken are reversed.

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM WILL NOT INITIATE ANY ACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- when reversing or - when the vehicle is towing a trailer and there is a risk of a rear impact

THE SYSTEM WILL NOT INITIATE ANY BRAKING APPLICATION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• whilst driving or - when entering or exiting a parking space while using Active Parking Assist You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Function of PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side

If an imminent side impact is detected, PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side can pre-emptively move the front seat vehicle occupant's upper body towards the centre of the vehicle. It does this by rapidly inflating an air cushion in the outer seat side bolster of the seat backrest on the side on which the impact is anticipated. This increases the distance between the door and the vehicle occupant. If PRE-SAFE ^® Impulse Side has been deployed or is faulty, the PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual display message appears. 

Seat belt adjustment function

Vehicles with PRE-SAFE ⁴ : after you have fastened the seat belt of the front seat, it may adjust itself against your body by pulling at the shoulder until somewhat tight. Do not hold the seat belt tightly while it is adjusting. This function is a reminder that all vehicle occupants must wear their seat belts correctly. You can activate and deactivate the seat belt adjustment function using the multimedia system ( → page 156).

Activating/deactivating seat belt adjustment via the multimedia system

Multimedia system:  ▶ Activate or deactivate Belt adjustment.

Overview of the automatic measures after an accident

DEPENDING ON THE TYPE AND SEVERITY OF THE ACCIDENT, AND DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES CAN BE IMPLEMENTED, FOR EXAMPLE:

• automatic braking (post-collision brake) (→ page 156) • activating the hazard warning lights • triggering an automatic emergency call ( → page 86) - switching off the drive system and high-voltage on-board electrical system - unlocking the vehicle doors • lowering the side windows • displaying the emergency guide in the central display ( → page 87) • switching on the interior lighting

Function of the post-collision brake after an accident

Depending on the accident situation, the post-collision brake can minimise the severity of a further collision or even avoid it. If an accident is detected, the post-collision brake can initiate automatic braking. When the vehicle has come to a standstill, the electric parking brake is automatically applied.

THE DRIVER CAN CANCEL AUTOMATIC BRAKING BY TAKING THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

• braking more strongly than automatic braking • fully depressing the accelerator pedal with force  

Purpose and function of the restraint system

Overview of deployment situations (restraint system)

MAKE SURE THAT THE FOLLOWING PREREQUISITES IN PARTICULAR HAVE BEEN MET SO THAT THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM ARE ABLE TO PROVIDE THE INTENDED LEVEL OF PROTECTION:

- Sit correctly (→ page 146). • Fasten the seat belt correctly ( → page 147). Function of the seat belt warning lamp ( → page 149). Function of the rear seat belt status display ( → page 149). - The restraint system warning lamp is not lit up after the self-test ( → page 149). - The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( → page 150).

DEPENDING ON THE DETECTED DEPLOYMENT SITUATION, THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM CAN BE ACTIVATED OR DEPLOYED INDEPENDENTLY OF EACH OTHER:

- Seat belt tensioner: frontal impact, rear impact, side impact, rollover • Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: frontal impact • Knee airbag: frontal impact - Side airbag: side impact • Centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest: side impact • Window airbag: side impact, rollover, frontal impact PRE-SAFE® Impulse Side: side impact The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( → page 164). Observe the information on the function of the restraint system ( → page 157).

Information on how the restraint system works

How the restraint system functions depends on the severity of the impact detected and the apparent type of accident. For more information about types of accidents, see "Overview of deployment situations" ( → page 157). The activation thresholds for the components of the restraint system are determined based on the evaluation of the sensor values measured at various points in the vehicle. This process is pre-emptive in nature. The triggering/deployment of the components of the restraint system must take place in good time at the start of the collision. Factors which can only be seen and measured after a collision has occurred cannot play a decisive role in airbag deployment. Nor do they provide an indication of airbag deployment. EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system The vehicle may be deformed significantly without an airbag being deployed. This is the case if only parts which are relatively easily deformed are affected and the rate of vehicle deceleration is not high. Conversely, an airbag may be deployed even though the vehicle suffers only minor deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts such as longitudinal members are hit, this may result in sufficiently high levels of vehicle deceleration. Depending on the apparent type of accident and the detected deployment situation, seat belt tensioners and/or airbags supplement the protection offered by a correctly worn seat belt. When enabled, an airbag can provide additional protection for the respective vehicle occupant.

POTENTIAL PROTECTION PROVIDED BY EACH AIRBAG:

• Knee airbag: thigh, knee and lower leg • Driver's airbag, front passenger airbag: head and ribcage • Window airbag: head • Side airbag: ribcage, also pelvis for front seat occupants • Centre airbag: head and ribcage However, no system available today can completely eliminate injuries and fatalities in every accident situation. In particular, the seat belt and airbag generally do not protect against objects penetrating the vehicle from the outside. It is also not possible to completely rule out the risk of injury caused by the airbag deploying. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. Take this into account, particularly if a seat belt tensioner is triggered or an airbag deployed. 

IF THE SEAT BELT TENSIONERS ARE TRIGGERED OR AN AIRBAG IS DEPLOYED, YOU WILL HEAR A BANG, AND A SMALL AMOUNT OF POWDER MAY ALSO BE RELEASED:

• The bang will not generally affect your hearing. - In general, the powder released is not hazardous to health but may cause short-term breathing difficulties to persons suffering from asthma or other pulmonary conditions. Provided it is safe to do so, leave the vehicle immediately or open the window in order to prevent breathing difficulties.

Information on the limited protection provided by the restraint system

RISK DUE TO THE INCORRECT BEHAVIOUR OF VEHICLE OCCUPANTS EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN PARTICULAR:

• They observe the information on the correct seat position ( → page 146). - There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.  EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system 

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

RISK DUE TO OBJECTS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR

EVERY VEHICLE OCCUPANT MUST MAKE SURE OF THE FOLLOWING IN PARTICULAR:

• They observe the information on the correct seat position ( → page 146). • There are no objects between the seat, door and door pillar (B-pillar). - There are no hard objects, e.g. coat hangers, hanging on the grab handles or coat hooks. - There are no heavy, sharp-edged or fragile objects in the pockets of their clothing. Store such objects in a suitable place.  

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to blocked seat belt buckle or seat belt anchorage Objects next to the front seat that block the seat belt buckle or the moving seat belt anchorage on the front seat impair the function of the seat belt tensioners.  Before starting the journey, make sure that there are no objects around the seat belt buckle or between the front seat and door. 

WARNING

Risk of injury from objects in the deployment area of an airbag Objects in the deployment area of an airbag can hinder or prevent the correct deployment of the airbag. The airbag may then deploy in an uncontrolled manner and may even cause additional injuries to the vehicle occupants by deploying. This may be the case in particular if the airbag is integrated into the seat.  Always stow and secure objects correctly.  Before commencing your journey, make sure that no objects are stowed in the deployment area of an airbag. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG ( → page 164) symbol.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

• Notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256)  EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system • Information on the centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest ( → page 164)

RISK DUE TO FITTING ACCESSORIES

Do not attach accessories such as mobile navigation devices, mobile phones or cup holders, within the deployment area of an airbag, e.g. on the cockpit, on the door, on the side window or on the side trim. In addition, no connecting cables, tensioning straps or retaining straps must be routed or attached to the vehicle within the deployment area of an airbag. Always comply with the accessory manufacturer's installation instructions and, in particular, the notes on suitable places for installation. 

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to unsuitable protective covers Due to unsuitable protective covers, the airbags cannot protect vehicle occupants as they are designed to do.  You should only use protective covers that have been approved for the corresponding seat by Mercedes-Benz. In addition, the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff could be restricted due to an unsuitable protective cover. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps display the correct status of the front passenger airbag ( → page 150). 

RISK DUE TO PETS IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR


WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to animals left unsecured or unattended in the vehicle If you leave animals in the vehicle unattended or unsecured, they could press buttons or switches, for instance.

AN ANIMAL MAY:

• activate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example - switch systems on or off and endanger other road users Unsecured animals may be thrown about the vehicle in the event of an accident, or sudden steering and braking manoeuvres, and injure vehicle occupants. ▶ Never leave animals unattended in the vehicle. Always correctly secure animals while driving, e.g. using a suitable animal carrier. EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system 

RISK DUE TO MODIFICATION, DAMAGE OR WEAR TO THE COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM


WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to modifications to the restraint system Vehicle occupants may no longer be protected as intended if alterations are made to the restraint system. ▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint system. ▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any electronic component parts or their software. If it is necessary to modify the vehicle to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use driving aids which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. 

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to damaged or modified seat belts

SEAT BELTS CANNOT PROVIDE PROTECTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- the seat belt is damaged, has been modified, is extremely dirty, bleached or dyed • the seat belt buckle is damaged or extremely dirty - modifications have been made to the seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage or seat belt retractor Seat belts may sustain non-visible damage in an accident, e.g. due to glass splinters. Modified or damaged seat belts could tear or fail in the event of an accident, for example. Modified seat belt tensioners could accidentally trigger or fail to function as intended. Never modify the seat belt system, for example the seat belt, seat belt buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage and seat belt retractor. Make sure that the seat belts are undamaged, not worn and clean. Always have the seat belts checked immediately after an accident at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use seat belts which have been approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.   EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Purpose and function of the restraint system  

WARNING

Risk of injury due to modifications to the cover of an airbag If you modify the cover of an airbag or affix objects such as stickers to it, the airbag can no longer function as intended. ▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag. Do not attach any objects to the cover. The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol ( → page 164). 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to malfunctioning sensors in the door The function of the airbags can be impaired due to modifications or incorrect work performed on the doors or door trim, or if the doors are damaged. ▶ Never modify the doors or parts of the doors. Always have work on the doors or door trim carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

RISK DUE TO COMPONENTS OF THE RESTRAINT SYSTEM WHICH HAVE ALREADY BEEN DEPLOYED

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop after an accident. 

WARNING

Risk of burns from hot airbag components The airbag parts are hot after an airbag has been deployed. Do not touch the airbag parts. Have a deployed airbag replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to deployed airbag A deployed airbag no longer offers any protection. Have the vehicle towed to a qualified specialist workshop in order to have the deployed airbag replaced. Have deployed airbags replaced immediately. 

WARNING

Risk of injury or death from deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that have been deployed are no longer operational and are unable to perform their intended protective function.  Therefore, have deployed pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners immediately replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Seat belts

< Seat belts

Releasing seat belts

Press the release button in the seat belt buckle and guide the seat belt back with the seat belt tongue. 

NOTE

Damage caused by trapping the seat belt If an unused seat belt is not fully retracted, it may become trapped in the door or in the seat mechanism. Always ensure that an unused seat belt is fully retracted.   EQE - Owner's Manual Occupant safety Airbags 

Airbags

Overview of airbags  Driver's/front passenger seat: 1 Knee airbag 2 Driver's airbag 3 Front passenger airbag Window airbag 5 Side airbag 6 Centre airbag ^{2 1)} Only for certain countries.  Rear seats: Window airbag 7 Side airbag The installation location of an airbag is identified by the AIRBAG symbol. An additional arrow symbol ▶ indicates the installation location for certain airbags. Observe the information in "Overview of deployment situations" ( → page 157).

Information on the centre airbag in the driver's seat backrest

When triggered, the centre airbag deploys between the front seats. Do not stow any objects in the deployment area of the centre airbag. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256).  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle 

< Safely transporting children in the vehicle

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Brief overview of most important points 166 Important safety notes 168 Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 1>5 Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 190 Securing the child restraint system 184 Child safety locks 189 Occupant presence reminder 193 EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Brief overview of most important points 

Brief overview of most important points

Safely transporting children in the vehicle 

ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN TRANSPORTING CHILDREN:

• Never leave children unattended in the vehicle ( → page 169). - Secure children up to a height of 1.50 m on the seat (see illustration above) properly with a suitable and approved child restraint system ( → page 175), and secure small children in a rearward-facing child restraint system. - Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

LEFT/RIGHT REAR SEAT (PREFERRED SEATS)

PREFERRED SECURING SYSTEM:

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ( → page 180) or i-Size securing rings ( → page 181) and Also secure Top Tether if present ( → page 187).

ALTERNATIVE SECURING SYSTEM:

Vehicle seat belt Additionally attach Top Tether if recommended by the manufacturer of the child restraint system ( → page 187). The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U, UF, i-U, IUF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( → page 180).

FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

SECURING SYSTEM:

Vehicle seat belt  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Brief overview of most important points

BE SURE TO OBSERVE:

\- If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( → page 150). The following child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U ^(*) , UF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( → page 181). (*) rearward-facing child restraint system only in combination with automatic airbag shutoff

CENTRE REAR SEAT

SECURING SYSTEM:

Vehicle seat belt The following belt-secured child restraint systems within the Universal category are approved: U, UF. Observe the other alternatives for use ( → page 188).   EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes 

Important safety notes

Basic information

BE DILIGENT

Bear in mind that negligence when securing a child in the child restraint system may have serious consequences. Always be diligent in securing a child carefully before every journey. Never allow babies and children to travel sitting on the lap of another vehicle occupant.

TO IMPROVE PROTECTION FOR CHILDREN YOUNGER THAN 12 YEARS OLD OR UNDER 1.50 M IN HEIGHT, MERCEDES-BENZ RECOMMENDS YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

• Always secure the child in a child restraint system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehicle. - The child restraint system must be appropriate to the age, weight and size of the child. - The vehicle seat must be suitable for the child restraint system to be fitted: \- LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings: (→ page 180) \- i-Size securing rings: (→ page 181) Securing with the vehicle seat belt: (→ page 181) Accident statistics show that children secured on the rear seats are generally safer than children secured on the front seats. For this reason, Mercedes-Benz strongly advises that you fit a child restraint system to a rear seat.

THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

THE GENERIC TERM CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS USED IN THIS OWNER'S MANUAL. A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM IS, FOR EXAMPLE:

a baby car seat • a rearward-facing child seat • a forward-facing child seat - a child booster seat – Mercedes-Benz recommends using a child booster seat with a backrest and seat belt guide.

OBSERVE LAWS AND LEGAL REQUIREMENTS

Always observe the legal requirements when using a child restraint system in the vehicle. Make sure that the child restraint system is approved in accordance with the valid test specifications and guidelines. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS IN THE VEHICLE ONLY USE THE FOLLOWING SECURING SYSTEMS FOR CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS:

• the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size securing rings • the vehicle's seat belt system • the Top Tether anchorages  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes Simply attaching to the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size securing rings on the vehicle can reduce the risk of fitting the child restraint system incorrectly. When securing a child with the integrated seat belt of the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system, always comply with the permissible gross weight for the child and child restraint system ( → page 185).

Important warning notices

ALWAYS SECURE A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM CORRECTLY


WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect installation of the child restraint system The child can then not be protected or restrained as intended. Be sure to comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system always rests on the sitting surface of the seat. ▶ Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. Use child restraint systems only with the original cover designed for them. ▶ Always replace damaged covers with genuine covers. • Always observe the vehicle-specific information. \- Fitting an ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system on the rear seat ( → page 185).  Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt ( → page 188). \- Observe the warning labels in the vehicle interior and on the child restraint system. 

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to unsecured child restraint systems in the vehicle If the child restraint system is incorrectly fitted or not secured, it can become detached. The child cannot then be protected or restrained as intended. The unused child restraint system can be become detached and strike vehicle occupants. Always comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions for the child restraint system and its correct use. Always fit child restraint systems correctly, even if they are transported unused in the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes 

DO NOT MODIFY THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM


WARNING

Risk of injury due to modifications to the child restraint system The child restraint system can no longer function properly. This poses an increased risk of injury. ▶ Never modify a child restraint system. Only affix accessories which have been specially approved for this child restraint system by the child restraint system's manufacturer.

ONLY USE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS WHICH ARE IN PROPER WORKING CONDITION


WARNING

Risk of injury or death caused by the use of damaged child restraint systems Child restraint systems or their retaining systems that have been subjected to stress in an accident may not be able to perform their intended protective function. It may be the case that the child cannot be properly restrained. Always immediately replace child restraint systems that have been damaged or involved in an accident. Have the securing systems for the child restraint systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop before installing a child restraint system again.

AVOID DIRECT SUNLIGHT


WARNING

Risk of burns when the child seat is exposed to direct sunlight If the child restraint system is exposed to direct sunlight or heat, parts could heat up. Children could suffer burns from these parts, particularly on metallic parts of the child restraint system. Always make sure that the child restraint system is not exposed to direct sunlight. Protect the child restraint system with a blanket, for example. If the child restraint system has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool before securing a child into it. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

OBSERVE WHEN STOPPING OR PARKING


WARNING

Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.  Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes  

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children.

Overview of warning stickers in the vehicle

 ① Front passenger airbag warning (on the front passenger sun visor) (→ page 172) 2 Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff (visible when the front passenger door is open) ( → page 174)  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes  Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat

A

WARNING

Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems ( → page 184).  Warning notice on the front passenger sun visor

IF IT IS ABSOLUTELY NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE ADDITIONAL NOTES.

• The notes on automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( → page 152). - When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must always be disabled. This is only the case if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit continuously (→ page 150). - The front passenger airbag is enabled when the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is not lit. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. In that case, do not use rearward-facing child restraint systems.

Information on the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation.

EQE - Owner's Manual

Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes

A

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system Objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system could affect the function of the automatic co-driver airbag shutoff. Do not place any objects between the seat surface and the child restraint system. ▶ Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system is always resting on the seat surface of the co-driver seat. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the co-driver seat. It is essential to comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. When fitting a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, observe the vehicle-specific information ( → page 172).

REARWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

If a rearward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag must be disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up continuously ( → page 150).

A

WARNING

Risk of injury or death when using a rearward-facing child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a rearward-facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. ▶ Always ensure that the front passenger airbag is disabled. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. ▶ NEVER use a rearward-facing child restraint system on a seat with an ENABLED FRONT AIRBAG. This can result in the DEATH of or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD. The front passenger airbag is enabled depending on the child restraint system and the stature of the child. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not light up. The front passenger airbag may be deployed during an accident. If the front passenger airbag is in this status, no rearward-facing child restraint system may be fitted on the front passenger seat. Instead, fit the rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

If a forward-facing child restraint system is fitted on the front passenger seat, the front passenger airbag may be automatically enabled or disabled. The status of the front passenger airbag depends on the child restraint system and the stature of the child. EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Important safety notes The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is either lit continuously, or it is not lit ( → page 150). Always observe the following information. 

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect positioning of the child restraint system

IF YOU SECURE A CHILD IN A FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE CO-DRIVER SEAT AND YOU POSITION THE CO-DRIVER SEAT TOO CLOSE TO THE DASHBOARD, IN THE EVENT OF AN ACCIDENT, THE CHILD COULD:

- come into contact with the vehicle's interior if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is lit, for example - be struck by the airbag if the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is off Always move the co-driver seat as far back as possible. In doing so, always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards and downwards from the seat belt outlet. If necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the co-driver seat accordingly. Always comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions.

Notes on vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff

Vehicles without automatic front passenger airbag shutoff have a special sticker affixed to the side of the cockpit on the front passenger side ( → page 171).

MAKE SURE YOU OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

- Never fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to the front passenger seat • Always fit a rearward-facing child restraint system to a suitable rear seat - Notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (→ page 172)  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 

Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children

Information on the advantage of a rearward-facing child restraint system

Transport a baby in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system only. It is also preferable to transport a small child in a suitable rearward-facing child restraint system. In this case, the child sits in the opposite direction to the direction of travel and faces backwards. Babies and small children have comparatively weak neck muscles in relation to the size and weight of their head. The risk of injury to the cervical spine during an accident can be reduced in a rearward-facing child restraint system.

Approval categories for child restraint systems

ONLY CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS THAT MEET THE FOLLOWING UNECE STANDARDS ARE PERMITTED FOR USE IN THE VEHICLE:

UN-R44 UN-R129

IDENTIFICATION ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION, E.G., IS AVAILABLE ON THE APPROVAL LABEL ON THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM:

- Approval category Child weight group • Authorisation number • Child restraint size class

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R44

 Example of an approval label \- Universal: child restraint systems in the "Universal" category are approved for installation in vehicles. They can be used on seats labelled U, UF or IUF, in accordance with overviews of the suitability of seats for securing child restraint systems. The identification IUF refers to ISOFIX child restraint systems in the "Universal" category. These child restraint systems must also be secured using Top Tether or support points. \- Semi-Universal: child restraint systems in the "Semi-Universal" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children \- Vehicle-specific: child restraint systems in the "vehicle-specific" category may only be used if the vehicle and vehicle seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

Approval categories in accordance with UN-R129

 Example of an approval label - i-Sizechild restraint systems and booster seats with backrest: suitable for attachment to i-Size mounting brackets. They can be used on the seats marked i-U. Child restraint systems in this category can also be attached to ISOFIX bars if approved by the child restraint system manufacturer. I-Size booster seats with backrest can be used on seats marked U if the seat is approved for category B2/B3. - Belted child restraint systems and belted booster seats without backrest of the Universal category: suitable for attachment to the seats marked U. - Vehicle-specific child restraint systems (ISOFIX or belted attachment as well as child booster seats with and without backrest): suitable for attachment to the seats marked i-U or U if this is approved by the child restraint system manufacturer. 

OBSERVE THE SUITABILITY OF VEHICLE SEATS

- Suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems ( → page 180) - Suitability of seats for securing i-Size child restraint systems (→ page 181). - Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems ( → page 181)

Overview of recommended child restraint systems

Further information on the correct child restraint system can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre for this purpose.

SECURING WITH ISOFIX

WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROXIMATELY 15 MONTHS)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus (including base)
Size category E
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	B6 6 86 8224
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9H95.

 EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children  WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROXIMATELY 9 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS)

Type1	DUO plus
Size category B1
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer; 2 With colour code 5H95.

FASTENING FIXTURE WITH I-SIZE (R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM) WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, HEIGHT FROM 40 TO 83 CM, AND AGED UP TO 15 MONTHS

Type1	Baby Safe 3 I-Size
Size category R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
Order number (including base) A 000 970 66 02
Base order number A 000 970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Rümer.

WEIGHT UP TO 18 KG, HEIGHT FROM 61 TO 105 CM, AND AGED 3 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS

Type1	DualFix |Sense
Size category F2X/R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
Order number (Including base) A000 970 87 02

Type1	DualFix iSense
Base order number A000 970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Rémor.

WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS

Type1	KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 89 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS

Type1	AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 91 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Rümer.

 EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children 

SECURING WITH THE VEHICLE SEAT BELT

WEIGHT CATEGORY 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND APPROXIMATELY 6 MONTHS) AND WEIGHT CATEGORY 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND APPROXIMATELY 15 MONTHS)

Type1	BABY SAFE plus II
Approval E1 04 301 146
Order number2	A 000 970 38 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer; 2 Wih colour code $H95.

R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (WEIGHT UP TO 13 KG, HEIGHT FROM 40 TO 83 CM, AND AGED UP TO ABOUT 15 MONTHS)

Type1	Baby Safe 3 I-Size
Size category R2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0060*02
Order number (including base) A 000 970 66 02
Base order number A 000 970 73 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Kdimer.

WEIGHT CATEGORY I (9 TO 18 KG AND FROM APPROXIMATELY 9 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS)

Type1	DUO plus
Approval E1 04 301 133
Order number2	A 000 970 43 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Rämer; 2 With colour code 5H95.

WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROXIMATELY 3 TO 12 YEARS)

Type1	KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 49 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer. 2 With colour code 9695.

WEIGHT CATEGORY II/III (15 TO 36 KG AND FROM APPROXIMATELY 3 TO 12 YEARS)

Type1	AMG KIDFIX XP
Approval E1 04 301 304
Order number2	A 000 970 33 02
1 Manufacturer: Britav Römer. 2 With colour code 9=95.

R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS)

Type1	KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 89 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Römer.

EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable child restraint systems for the transport of children R129 CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS (WEIGHT FROM 15 TO 36 KG, HEIGHT FROM 100 TO 150 CM, AND AGED 3.5 TO 12 YEARS)

Type1	AMG KIDFIX M i-Size
Size category B2
Approval E1*129R03/04*0061*02
Order number A 000 970 91 02
1 Manufacturer: Britax Rümer

  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 

Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching ISOFIX child restraint systems

ISOFIX IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS.

 The symbol indicates seats suitable for attaching an ISOFIX child restraint system in accordance with UN R44 ( → page 175).  ISOFIX child restraint systems can also be installed on seats with i-Size markings ( → page 181). Attach only ISOFIX child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with UN R44 as per the following ISOFIX tables. CARRY COT

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
F - ISO/L1 X
G - ISO/L2 X
X Not suitable for an ISOP/IX child restraint system in this weight group and/or size class.

WEIGHT GROUP 0 (UP TO 10 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 6 MONTHS)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
E - ISO/R1 IL
IL Suitable for ISOFDX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.

WEIGHT GROUP 0+ (UP TO 13 KG AND UP TO APPROX. 15 MONTHS)

Size class - Equipment

Left/right rear seat

E - ISO/R1 IL D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL C - ISO/R3 IL (1) 1. Suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. (1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/R3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems  WEIGHT GROUP 1 (9-18 KG AND APPROX. 9 MONTHS TO 4 YEARS)

Size class - Equipment	Left/right rear seat
D - ISO/R2, ISO/R2X IL
C - ISO/R3 IL (1)
B - ISO/F2 IUF
B1 - ISO/F2X IUF
A - ISO/F3 IUF
IL Suitable for ISO/FIX child restraint systems according to the table in "Overview of the recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed on the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list.
IUF Suitable for forward-facing ISO/FIX child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight group.
(1) When using a child restraint system of size class (ISO/II3), move the front seat into the highest position. Make sure that the seat backrest of the front seat does not rest against the child restraint system.

Overview of suitability of the seats for attaching i-Size child restraint systems

I-SIZE IS A STANDARDISED SECURING SYSTEM FOR SPECIALLY DESIGNED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS.

i-Size child restraint systems can be attached to a seat with the i-Size marking ( → page 175). Child restraint systems that are approved in accordance with the following i-Size table may be attached. LEFT AND RIGHT REAR SEAT

I-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)	I-U
I-U Suitable for forward-facing and rearward-facing I-Size child restraint systems in the "Universal" category.
FRONT PASSENGER SEAT
I-Size child restraint systems (ISO/R1, ISO/R2, ISO/R2X, ISO/R3, ISO/F2, ISO/ F2X, ISO/F3, ISO/B2, ISO/B3)	X
X Not suitable for an I-Size child restraint system in the "Universal" category.

Overview of the suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems

Suitability of seats for attaching belt-secured child restraint systems REAR SEATS

Weight category 0: to 10 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat 1	U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat 1	U, L
Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg
Left/right rear seat U, L
Centre rear seat 1	U, L

 EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems  Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg Left/right rear seat U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg Left/right rear seat U, L

Centre rear seat1

U, L

UN-R129 child restraint systems Left/right rear seat U, L, B2, B3

Centre rear seat1

U, L, B2, B3

1 Child restraint systems with a supporting bracket are not suitable for this seat. U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. 92, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint systems complying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child seat cushion test equipment.

NOTES ON CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT

- If it is absolutely necessary for you to fit a child restraint system to the front passenger seat, be sure to observe the information on child restraint systems on the front passenger seat (→ page 172). - Observe the specific instructions for the rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems. If the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct for the current situation ( → page 150). FRONT PASSENGER SEAT Weight category 0: to 10 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1	X
Front passenger airbag disabled1,2	U, L
Weight category 0+: to 13 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1	X
Front passenger airbag disabled1,2	U, L

Weight category I: 9 to 18 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled1	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2	U, L
Weight category II: 15 to 25 kg
Front passenger airbag enabled1	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled1, 2	U, L

Weight category III: 22 to 36 kg

Front passenger airbag enabled 1	UF, L
Front passenger airbag disabled 1,2	U, L
UN-R129 child restraint systems
Front passenger airbag enabled 1	UF, L, B2, B3
Front passenger airbag disabled 1,2	U, L, B2, B3

  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle > Suitable seats for attaching child restraint systems 1. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. 2 The vehicle is equipped with automatic front passenger airbag shutoff. The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must be lit. X Not suitable for children in this weight category. U Suitable for child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. L Suitable for semi-universal child restraint systems according to the table in "Recommended child restraint systems", or if the vehicle and the seat are listed in the child restraint system manufacturer's vehicle model list. UP Suitable for forward-facing child restraint systems of the "Universal" category in this weight category. 82, B3 Suitable for the installation of child restraint systems complying with ISO/B2 and ISO/B3 child seat cushion test equipment.  

Securing the child restraint system

Adjusting the seat correctly

WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE LEFT OR RIGHT REAR SEAT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:

Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards. If the head restraint of the child restraint system cannot be fully extended when it is installed in the vehicle, this will result in restrictions on the maximum size setting for certain child restraint systems. Observe the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Contact with the roof when the head restraint is fully extended and locked in place will not result in any restrictions on use.

WHEN FITTING AN ISOFIX/LATCH OR I-SIZE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:

When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system. When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint.

WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:

When using a rearward-facing child restraint system on a rear seat: adjust the front seat so that it does not touch the child restraint system. When using a forward-facing child restraint system with integrated child seat belt: adjust the head restraint of the respective seat so that it does not push the child restraint system forwards. If necessary, the respective head restraint can be removed. In addition, the backrest of the child restraint system must lie as flat as possible against the backrest of the vehicle seat. After the child restraint system has been removed, replace the vehicle head restraint immediately and adjust correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the rear seat.   EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Where possible, adjust the seat cushion inclination accordingly. Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint. Make sure that the child's feet do not touch the front seat. If necessary, move the front seat slightly forwards.

☑ DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN FITTING A BELT-SECURED CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM ON THE FRONT PASSENGER SEAT:

Observe the notes on rearward-facing and forward-facing child restraint systems on the front passenger seat ( → page 172). When using a forward-facing child restraint system integrated child seat belt: remove the head restraint from the respective seat, if possible. After the child restraint system has been removed, immediately replace the head restraint and adjust correctly. The backrest of the forward-facing child restraint system must, as far as possible, be resting on the seat backrest of the front passenger seat. The child restraint system must not be put under strain between the roof and the seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the wrong direction. Adjust the vehicle head restraints so that the child restraint system is not put under strain by the head restraint. Never place objects (e.g. cushions) under or behind the child restraint system. Set the front passenger seat as far back as possible and move the seat into the highest position if possible. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to  the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system. ▶ Fully retract the seat cushion length adjustment. Adjust the seat cushion inclination so that the front edge of the seat cushion is in the highest position and the rear edge of the seat cushion is in the lowest position. Set the seat backrest to the most vertical position possible.

Fitting an ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system

WARNING

Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. - As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. - Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible.   EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system  

WARNING

Risk of injury or death if the permissible gross mass of the child and child restraint system together is exceeded. Too much load may be placed on the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint systems and the child may not be restrained correctly in the event of an accident, for example. If the child is secured in an ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with integrated seat belts, the total mass of the child and child restraint system must not exceed 33 kg.

ALWAYS COMPLY WITH THE INFORMATION ABOUT THE MASS OF THE CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM:

- in the manufacturer's installation and operating instructions for the child restraint system used • on a label on the child restraint system, if present Regularly check that the permissible gross weight of the child and child restraint system is still complied with.

WHEN FITTING A CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING:

√ Always observe the correct use of the seats and consider their suitability for attaching a child restraint system. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ( → page 180) or i-Size securing rings ( → page 181)  LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing rings ② i-Size securing rings Before every journey, make sure that the ISOFIX/LATCH child restraint system or the i-Size child restraint system is engaged correctly in both securing rings in the vehicle. 

NOTE

Damage to the seat belt for the centre seat during installation of the child restraint system Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped. Remove and stow away covers ① or ②. Attach the ISOFIX/LATCH or i-Size child restraint system to both securing rings in the vehicle. After removing the child seat, reattach covers ① or ②.   EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system 

Fastening a Top Tether


WARNING

Risk of injury or death if the rear seat backrests are not locked after Top Tether belts are fitted The rear seat backrests may fold forwards when you are driving. As a result, child restraint systems will no longer be able to perform their intended protective function. This may also cause additional injuries. ▶ Always lock rear seat backrests after fitting Top Tether belts. ▶ Observe the lock verification indicator. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. If the child restraint system is equipped with a Top Tether belt: The risk of injury may be reduced by Top Tether. The Top Tether belt enables an additional connection between the child restraint system attached with ISOFIX or i-Size and the vehicle.   If necessary, slide head restraint ① upwards (→ page 243). Fit the ISOFIX or i-Size child restraint system with Top Tether. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. Guide Top Tether belt ⑤ under head restraint ① between the two head restraint bars. Guide Top Tether belt ⑤ downwards between load compartment cover ③ and seat backrest ②. Hook Top Tether hook ⑥ of Top Tether belt ⑤ into Top Tether anchorage ④ without twisting.   EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Securing the child restraint system Tension Top Tether belt ①. In doing so, comply with the child restraint system manufacturer's installation instructions. If necessary, slide head restraint ① downwards (→ page 243). Make sure that you do not interfere with the correct routing of Top Tether belt ⑤.

Securing the child restraint system with the seat belt

A

WARNING

Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. - As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. - Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. If the rear seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, the red lock verification indicator will be visible. For a child restraint system in the "Universal" or "Semi-Universal" category, make sure that the system has been approved for the vehicle seat.  ▶ Install the child restraint system. The entire base of the child restraint system must always rest on the sitting surface of the seat. Always make sure that the shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to the shoulder belt guide on the child restraint system. The shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards from the seat belt outlet and, where possible, downwards to the child restraint system. When fitting on the rear seat: also secure Top Tether if present. When fitting on the front passenger seat: if necessary, adjust the seat belt outlet and the front passenger seat accordingly.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Child safety locks

< Child safety locks

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear doors 

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.  Keep the key out of reach of children. 

WARNING

Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death.  Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Child safety locks 

A

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN PARTICULAR:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are travelling in the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle.  Press the lever in direction ① (activate) or ② (deactivate). Make sure that the child safety locks are working properly. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section. The child safety lock on the rear doors secures each door separately. The doors can no longer be opened from the inside.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Child safety locks 

Activating/deactivating the child safety lock for the rear side windows


WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. 

WARNING

Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. 

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to children left unattended in the vehicle

IF CHILDREN ARE TRAVELLING IN THE VEHICLE, THEY COULD, IN PARTICULAR:

• open doors, thereby endangering other persons or road users • get out and be struck by oncoming traffic • operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, for example Always activate the child safety locks installed if children are travelling in the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles for the United Kingdom: observe the important safety notes in the "Notes on the additional door lock" section. There are child safety locks for the rear doors and the rear side windows.  EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Child safety locks  To activate/deactivate: press button 2. THE REAR SIDE WINDOW CAN BE OPENED OR CLOSED AS FOLLOWS: - Indicator lamp is lit: via the switch on the driver's door - Indicator lamp is off: via the switch on the corresponding rear door or driver's door WHEN THE CHILD SAFETY LOCK IS ACTIVATED, THE CONTROLS IN THE REAR COMPARTMENT ARE DISABLED FOR: • the rear side windows • the adjustment of the front passenger seat from the rear compartment • the roller sunblinds in the roof   EQE - Owner's Manual Safely transporting children in the vehicle Occupant presence reminder 

Occupant presence reminder

Function of the occupant presence reminder

The occupant presence reminder can help to remind you about a child who may have been forgotten in the rear compartment of the vehicle. It activates and deactivates automatically when a rear door is open for an extended period of time and a child, which the system presumes to be present, could enter or exit the vehicle. When the vehicle is switched off, the Do not leave persons or animals in the vehicle message appears on the driver's display if the system was already automatically activated. You can permanently deactivate the function in the multimedia system (→ page 193). When the system is deactivated, the indicator lamp in the driver's display lights up.

Activating or deactivating the occupant presence reminder in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:  ▶ Activate or deactivate the function.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   Opening and closing 

< Opening and closing

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Key 195 Digital Vehicle Key 200 Doors 206 Load compartment 219 Side windows 225 Sliding sunroof 229 Anti-theft protection 234 EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Key

< Key

Overview of key functions


WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. 

NOTE

Damage to the key caused by magnetic fields  Keep the key away from strong magnetic fields. 

Vehicle key

1 Indicator lamp 2 To lock 3 Unlocks (with embossed surface) 4 Opens/closes the tailgate  If indicator lamp 1 does not light up after pressing the 📄 or ⏻ button, the battery is weak or possibly discharged. Replace the battery as soon as possible. Replace the key battery ( → page 198).   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Key  ① Vehicles with convenience doors: if you have activated the convenience doors function in the multimedia system (→ page 215), you can open or close the driver's or front passenger door by pressing the ⏻ or ⏱ button. Additional information on the convenience doors (→ page 211).

THE KEY LOCKS AND UNLOCKS THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS:

- Doors - Socket flap Tailgate If the vehicle is not opened within approximately 40 seconds after unlocking, it locks again. Anti-theft protection is primed again. Do not keep the key together with electronic devices or metal objects. This can affect the key's functionality.

Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Open/close ▶ Activate or deactivate the Acoustic lock. i Please observe: The selected setting for the acoustic locking verification signal must comply with the relevant national road and traffic regulations. In some countries, including Germany, using the acoustic locking verification signal is forbidden by traffic laws (in accord- ance with §16 Para. 1 and §30 Para. 1 of the German national road traffic regulations). The driver of the vehicle must comply with these regulations. In countries where the use of this function is forbidden, this function is not activated in the vehicle and must not be activated.

Changing the unlocking settings

POSSIBLE UNLOCKING FUNCTIONS OF THE KEY:

Central unlocking • Unlocking the driver's door and socket flap To switch between settings: press the ☐ and ⏻ buttons simultaneously for approximately six seconds until the indicator lamp flashes twice.

OPTIONS IF THE UNLOCKING FUNCTION FOR THE DRIVER'S DOOR AND SOCKET FLAP HAS BEEN SELECTED:

• To unlock the vehicle centrally: press the ☑ button twice. - Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: if you touch the inner surface of the door handle on the driver's door, only the driver's door and the socket flap are unlocked.

Deactivating the function of the key

If you deactivate the key function, the KEYLESS-GO functions are also deactivated. Access or drive authorization by KEYLESS-GO is then no longer possible with that particular key. Activate the function of the key so that all its functions will again be available. You can also deactivate the function of the key to   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Key reduce the energy consumption of the key if you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time. If you do not use the vehicle or a key for an extended period of time, you can also deactivate the function of the key to reduce the energy consumption of the key. Press and hold the key Ⓐ button. With the key button Ⓐ pressed, immediately press key button ♂ twice in quick succession. The indicator light of the key lights up once briefly and once for a long time.

YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO REACTIVATE THE KEY:

• Press any key on the key. - Start the vehicle with the key in the centre console storage compartment ( → page 334).

Removing/inserting the emergency key

REMOVING THE EMERGENCY KEY

 Press release button 1. Emergency key ② is pushed out slightly. Fully remove emergency key ②.

INSERTING THE EMERGENCY KEY

 Insert emergency key ② at marking ③ until it engages. ① You can use emergency key Ⓞ to attach the key to a key ring. EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Key 

Replacing the key battery


DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to swallowing batteries Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substances. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, severe internal burns can occur within two hours. There is a risk of fatal injury. ▶ Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If the battery compartment cover and/or lid do not close securely, stop using the key and keep it away from children. If batteries are swallowed or otherwise enter the body, seek immediate medical attention. 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries ☒ Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish. Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.

Requirements

• You require a CR 2032 3 V cell battery. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Remove the emergency key ( → page 197).  Press emergency key ② into the opening in the key in the direction of the arrow until cover ① opens. When doing so, do not hold cover ① closed.   Insert emergency key ② into the opening and lift up covering ③ and remove it. Repeatedly tap the key against your palm until battery ⚙ falls out of the key. Insert the new battery with the positive pole facing upwards. Use a lint-free cloth to do so.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Key Make sure that the surface of the battery is free of lint, grease and other impurities. Insert the front tabs of covering Ⓔ into the housing and then press on both sides to close it. Make sure that covering Ⓢ is completely closed. Insert the front tabs of cover Ⓞ into the housing and then press until it is completely closed. Insert the emergency key again ( → page 197).

Problems with the key, troubleshooting

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE POSSIBLE CAUSES:

• The key battery is weak or discharged. Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( → page 195). Replace the key battery, if necessary ( → page 198). Use the replacement key. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( → page 216). Have key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF THE KEY IS IMPAIRED:

• high voltage power lines mobile phones • electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) • shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference.

YOU HAVE LOST A KEY

Have the key deactivated at a qualified specialist workshop. If necessary, have the mechanical lock replaced as well.

Digital Vehicle Key

Function of the Digital Vehicle Key

If you have activated a suitable terminal device, e.g. a smartphone, as a digital vehicle key, you can use it like a conventional vehicle key. Information on setting up a user account and activating the "Digital Vehicle Key" service https://www.mercedes.me.

THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY CAN THEN BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

- Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO (→ page 207) - Locking and unlocking the vehicle with the NFC function (→ page 204) • HANDS-FREE ACCESS function ( → page 222) • Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside) (→ page 227) • Anti-theft protection ( → page 234) • Starting the vehicle ( → page 331) or parking ( → page 380) - Starting the vehicle with the digital vehicle key in the storage compartment (emergency mode) (→ page 332)

SET UP AND MANAGE THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:

• Registering the digital vehicle key ( → page 200) • Manage digital vehicle key (→ page 202) - Remove digital vehicle key (→ page 203) - Unlocking and locking the vehicle with the digital vehicle key (→ page 204) - Changing the Unlocking Settings for the Digital Vehicle Key (→ page 205) • Fixing Problems with the Digital Vehicle Key ( → page 205)

Setting up the digital vehicle key

Requirements

• Create a Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes.me. • The Mercedes me app is installed on the end device (optional). - You have received an e-mail from Mercedes me connect. If you have selected the "Digital Vehicle Key" equipment, you will receive an e-mail with information on how to set up the digital vehicle key. - Bluetooth is switched on at the end device and at the vehicle. • The terminal is sufficiently charged.

YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR SETTING UP A TERMINAL AS A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:

• via Mercedes me app by e-mail • via MBUX multimedia system  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key

SET UP VIA THE MERCEDES ME APP

Start the Mercedes me app. Select the "Digital vehicle key" menu. Follow the steps in the Mercedes me app.

When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears:

Place the terminal in the tray ( → page 332). Follow the action steps on the terminal. Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in the Wallet-App of your end device.

SET UP BY E-MAIL

Open the e-mail from Mercedes me connect. Follow the displayed action steps as described in the email. Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in the Wallet-App of your end device. or Open the link in the e-mail with the end device that you want to use as a digital vehicle key. Follow the action steps on the terminal. When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears: Place the terminal in the tray ( → page 332). Follow the action steps on the terminal. Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in the Wallet-App of your end device. or ▶ Set up the terminal on the vehicle. Place the terminal in the tray ( → page 332). Mercedes-Benz Digital Vehicle Key" is displayed on the terminal device. Press "Enter code". The display for entering the code appears. Enter the 8-digit code displayed in the e-mail. When the message "Add key and pair with vehicle" appears: Follow the action steps on the terminal. Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in the Wallet-App of your end device.

SET UP VIA MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

Select the menus in the multimedia system Settings, Vehicle, Open/close. Select Digital Vehicle Key menu. Follow the action steps in the multimedia system. Your Digital Vehicle Key is now stored in the Wallet-App of your end device. ① You can now use the digital vehicle key like the conventional vehicle key ( → page 204).  ① Set up and manage the digital vehicle key: • Function ( → page 200) • Managing (→ page 202) - Remove (→ page 203) - Changing the Unlocking Settings for the Digital Vehicle Key (→ page 205)

Manage Digital Vehicle Key

Requirements

• A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. - Bluetooth is switched on at the end device (with the activated Digital Vehicle Key) and at the vehicle. • The end device is sufficiently charged.

YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR MANAGING A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:

• Switch express mode (comfort mode) off or on - Set up other devices of family members or friends as Digital Vehicle Keys. • Setting up permissions for the Digital Vehicle Keys

SWITCH EXPRESS MODE OFF OR ON

Open the Wallet-App on the end device. Switch express mode off or on Express mode is switched on by default. This setting allows you to make the best possible use of the Digital Vehicle Key. If the express mode is switched off and the battery of the end device is empty, you can no longer unlock the vehicle via the NFC function. Only switch off the express mode if you do not want to use the Digital Vehicle Key function.

SETTING UP OTHER TERMINALS AS DIGITAL VEHICLE KEYS

Open the Wallet-App on the end device. Select the menu "Invite people to use your Mercedes-Benz key". ▶ Follow the action steps on the end device.

SETTING UP PERMISSIONS FOR THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEYS YOU CAN ASSIGN THE FOLLOWING AUTHORISATIONS TO THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEYS:

• Vehicle access and driving authorisation • Vehicle access authorisation Open the Wallet-App on the end device. Select the menu "Invite people to use your Mercedes-Benz key". Select the "Configure car key access" menu. ▶ Follow the action steps on the terminal. ① Further information on the Digital Vehicle Key: • Function ( → page 200) • Setting up (→ page 200)   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key - Remove (→ page 203) - Changing the Unlocking Settings for the Digital Vehicle Key (→ page 205)

Remove digital vehicle key

Requirements

• A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. - Bluetooth is switched on at the end device (with the activated digital vehicle key) and at the vehicle. • The terminal is sufficiently charged.

YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR REMOVING A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY:

• via the Wallet-App via iCloud • via Mercedes me user account • via MBUX multimedia system You can remove individual users or remove your own digital vehicle key from the terminal.

REMOVE VIA WALLET-APP

Open the Wallet-App on the end device. Select the user whose Digital Vehicle Key is to be removed. ▶ Follow the action steps on the terminal. The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used. Log in to iCloud. Follow the action steps. The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.

REMOVE VIA ICLOUD

REMOVE VIA MERCEDES ME USER ACCOUNT

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Remove the linked vehicle • object to the terms of use and consents - Delete the user account Log in to the Mercedes me user account. Select one of the above options. The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used.

REMOVE VIA MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

• Disconnect all digital vehicle keys • Change the Digital Vehicle Key of the main owner • Disconnect the owner's Digital Vehicle Key - Remove a digital vehicle key Select the menus in the multimedia system Settings, Vehicle, Open/close. Select Digital Vehicle Key menu.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key Select one of the above options. Follow the action steps in the multimedia system. The selected Digital Vehicle Key is removed and can no longer be used. i Further information on the digital vehicle key: • Function ( → page 200) • Setting up ( → page 200) • Managing (→ page 202) \- Changing the Unlocking Settings for the Digital Vehicle Key (→ page 205)

Unlocking and locking the vehicle with the Digital Vehicle Key

Requirements

- The "Digital Vehicle Key" function is activated via Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me. • A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. - Bluetooth ^® is switched on at the end device and at the vehicle. • The end device is sufficiently charged. If the connection via Bluetooth* is faulty or the battery of the Digital Vehicle Key is empty, you can also lock, unlock or start the vehicle using the NFC function. (→ page 332).

THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY CAN BE USED FOR THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

- Locking and unlocking the vehicle using the NFC function - Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO (→ page 207) • HANDS-FREE ACCESS function ( → page 222) • Convenience closing (locking the vehicle from outside) (→ page 227) • Anti-theft protection ( → page 234) • Starting the vehicle ( → page 331) or parking ( → page 380) - Starting the vehicle with the Digital Vehicle Key in the storage compartment (emergency mode) (→ page 332) ① Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions ( → page 197). Mercedes-Benz recommends that you place the Digital Vehicle Key in the stowage space while driving ( → page 332).  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Digital Vehicle Key Lock and unlock the vehicle with the NFC function: Hold the Digital Vehicle Key against the door handle in the area of the NFC antenna

Changing the Unlocking Settings for the Digital Vehicle Key

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Open/close

SET SELECTIVE OR GLOBAL UNLOCKING

Unlock driver's door only. Selective unlocking is activated. If this function is deactivated, the owner key unlocks the entire vehicle.

Fixing Problems with the Digital Vehicle Key

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK AND UNLOCK THE VEHICLE WITH THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY.

POSSIBLE CAUSES:

- Bluetooth ^® is switched off on the Digital Vehicle Key or on the vehicle. • The battery of the Digital Vehicle Key is low or empty. Switch on Bluetooth ^® on the digital vehicle key or on the vehicle. Check the charge level of the Digital Vehicle Key battery. If necessary, charge the battery of the Digital Vehicle Key. Use the NFC function of the digital vehicle key to lock or unlock the vehicle. (→ page 204). Use the vehicle key. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( → page 216). Have the vehicle and the Digital Vehicle Key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE POSSIBLE CAUSES OF DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IMPAIRMENT:

• high voltage power lines mobile phones • electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) • shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers Ensure sufficient distance between the Digital Vehicle Key and a potential source of interference.

YOU HAVE LOST A DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY.

Remove the Digital Vehicle Key ( → page 203). EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors

< Doors

Notes on the additional door lock

The additional door lock is only available for vehicles for the United Kingdom. 

WARNING

Risk of injury to persons inside the vehicle when the additional door lock is activated If the additional door lock is activated, the doors can no longer be opened from the inside. Never leave persons, in particular children, unattended in the vehicle. If there are persons in the vehicle, do not activate the additional door lock.

THE ADDITIONAL DOOR LOCK IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• The vehicle is locked using the key. • The vehicle is locked using KEYLESS-GO. If the vehicle has been locked via Mercedes me connect, the additional door lock is not activated ( → page 664). If the additional door lock is activated, the doors cannot be opened from the inside. ① After locking you can issue a signal with the horn. You can prevent the additional door lock from being activated by deactivating interior protection before locking the vehicle ( → page 236).

Unlocking/opening the doors from the inside

United Kingdom only: observe the notes on the additional door lock ( → page 206).  Pull the door ① handle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors 

Centrally locking and unlocking the vehicle from the inside

 To unlock: press ① button. To lock: press button ②. The red indicator lamp on button ② lights up once the vehicle is locked. The socket flap is also locked and unlocked. The socket flap can be opened even if a key is detected in the car.

THE VEHICLE IS NOT UNLOCKED:

• if you have locked the vehicle using the key • if you have locked the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO

Recessed door handles extend or retract

THE DOOR HANDLES EXTEND AUTOMATICALLY:

• when you unlock the vehicle with the key \- when you touch the outer sensor surface of the door handle (when the vehicle is unlocked)

THE DOOR HANDLES RETRACT AUTOMATICALLY:

• when you lock the vehicle with the key - when pulling away • after waiting for a time  Extend the door handle: Touch the outer ① sensor surface.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with KEYLESS-GO

Requirements

• The key is outside the vehicle. • The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors \- The driver's door and the door on which the door handle is used are closed. ① Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: You can use the Digital Vehicle Key like the conventional vehicle key.

THE DOOR HANDLES EXTEND AUTOMATICALLY:

- when a vehicle key is detected (the vehicle is then not yet unlocked) • when you unlock the vehicle with the key - when you touch the outer sensor surface of the door handle to unlock it

THE DOOR HANDLES RETRACT AUTOMATICALLY:

• when you lock the vehicle with the key • when you touch the recessed sensor surface of the door handle to lock it • after comfort locking ( → page 227) - when pulling away • after waiting for a time Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate or a door • when using an automatic car wash • when using a high pressure cleaner Deactivate the function of the key in these situations. or Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m (high-pressure cleaner) or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle.

NOTE

Vehicles with digital vehicle key:

Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate or a door • when using an automatic car wash • when using a high pressure cleaner In these situations, switch off the Digital Vehicle Key. or Make sure that the digital vehicle key is at least 3 m (high-pressure cleaner) or 6 m (car wash) away from the vehicle.

NOTE

  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors

OBSERVE THE NOTES:

• on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( → page 52) • on using a high pressure cleaner ( → page 719)  Unlocking the vehicle: With the door handle extended, touch the inside surface ① of the door handle.

If the door handle is not extended, e.g. after a waiting period:

 ▶ Touch the sensor surface ② to unlock.  To lock the vehicle: touch recessed sensor surface ③. ▶ Convenience closing: touch recessed sensor surface Ⓔ for an extended period. ① Further information on convenience closing ( → page 227). You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Problems with KEYLESS-GO, troubleshooting

YOU CAN NO LONGER LOCK OR UNLOCK THE VEHICLE USING KEYLESS-GO POSSIBLE CAUSES:

• The function of the key has been deactivated. • The key battery is weak or discharged.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors Activate the function of the key ( → page 86). ▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp (→ page 195). Replace the key battery, if necessary ( → page 198). ▶ Use the replacement key. Use the emergency key to lock or unlock ( → page 216). Have the vehicle and key checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

THERE IS INTERFERENCE FROM A POWERFUL RADIO SIGNAL SOURCE POSSIBLE CAUSES IF THE FUNCTION OF KEYLESS-GO IS IMPAIRED:

• high voltage power lines mobile phones • electronic devices (notebooks, tablets) • shielding due to metal objects or induction loops for electrical gate systems or automatic barriers Make sure that there is sufficient distance between the key and the potential source of interference. 

Activating or deactivating the automatic locking feature

Multimedia system:  The vehicle is locked automatically when the vehicle is switched on and the wheels are turning faster than walking pace. Activate or deactivate Automatic locking.

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THERE IS A DANGER OF BEING LOCKED OUT WHEN THE FUNCTION IS ACTIVATED:

• The vehicle is being towed or pushed. • If the vehicle is being tested on a roller dynamometer. 

Opening and closing the front convenience doors


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the front convenience doors Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people or animals in the closing area. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area. ▶ Use one of the following options to stop the closing process: - Press the 📊 or 🔒 button on the key. • Driver's door: depress the brake pedal. • Pull the inner or outer door handles. • Push against or pull the door. - Touch the touch screen in the convenience menu in the multimedia system. 

NOTE

Always observe the following during automatic opening and closing of the front convenience doors Your view of your surroundings may be restricted. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the area of the doors when opening and closing. When opening, pay particular attention to low objects and obstacles in the side window area. 

OPENING OR CLOSING THE FRONT CONVENIENCE DOORS

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE REQUIRED TO AUTOMATICALLY OPEN AND CLOSE THE FRONT CONVENIENCE DOORS:

• KEYLESS-GO ( → page 207) • Power closing function ( → page 216) • Parking Package with 360° Camera (→ page 456) or Remote Parking Assist with Mirror Package ( → page 469) • Active Blind Spot Assist ( → page 441) The convenience doors can then be opened and closed automatically. If Active Blind Spot Assist is deactivated or unavailable, the convenience doors cannot be opened from inside.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR OPENING OR CLOSING THE FRONT CONVENIENCE DOORS:

• the key (to open and close) • approaching the vehicle (to open the driver's door) • depressing the brake pedal (to close the driver's door) • the inner front door handles (to open and close) • the outer front door handles (to open and close) • the multimedia system ( → page 215)  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors

SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE FRONT CONVENIENCE DOORS:

- If, when closing, the front door has reached the first detent position, the power closing function ( → page 216) will automatically draw the door into the lock. Open with the key: Press and hold the ☐ key button until the door starts to open. In the multimedia system, you can set whether the driver's door, the front passenger door or no door opens when you press the button on the key (→ page 215). If no front door opens, the convenience opening function is carried out when the 3 button is pressed. The convenience opening function opens, forexample, the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof. Further information on convenience opening (→ page 227). To close with the key: Press and hold the key button ⏻ until the door starts to close. Both open front doors close. Comfort locking with the key: Press and hold the key button Ⓧ. All open front doors, side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof close. i Press the ⏻ button on the key again to lock the vehicle.

To open the vehicle by approaching it:


NOTE

Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of a door - When passing the vehicle • when using an automatic car wash • when using a high pressure cleaner In these situations, deactivate the function of the key. When you approach your vehicle and the key is detected, the vehicle is unlocked and the driver's door opens automatically. Set the function in the multimedia system ( → page 215).

To close the driver's door with the brake pedal:

▶ Depress the brake pedal until the door starts to close.

To open or close the front convenience doors from inside:

▶ Briefly pull the door handle ( → page 206). Automatic operation is then started. If you pull the door handle during automatic operation, the opening or closing process is stopped. If you pull the door handle again, the process continues in reverse order. To open the front convenience doors from outside: pull on the outside door handle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors  To close the front convenience doors from outside: touch recessed sensor surface Ⓞ on the door handle.

OBJECT DETECTION

Object detection uses several sensors to monitor the opening range of the convenience doors in order to detect objects. If one of the sensors detects an object, the convenience doors are stopped and a warning is displayed in the multimedia system. ▶ Manually open a door stopped in an intermediate position. Even if the convenience doors are equipped with sensors, it cannot be guaranteed that all objects are detected. Object detection is only an aid and is not a substitute for the attention of the vehicle occupants to their immediate surroundings when opening and closing the convenience doors. The vehicle occupants are always responsible for opening and closing the doors safely.

Detection range of the sensors

 ① approximately 1 m

NOTE

Risk of an accident from objects at close range Object recognition may not detect certain objects at close range. When opening the convenience doors, pay particular attention to low objects and obstacles in the side window area. Object detection does not always detect such objects at close range, especially during movement. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged.

NOTE

Risk of accident due to faulty sensors The sensors may malfunction because of snow or due to objects that absorb ultrasonic waves. Make sure that the convenience doors are free from dirt, ice or slush. Be especially careful when opening the convenience doors if other ultrasonic sources are nearby.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors 

NOTE

Risk of accidents if the detection performance of the sensors in the convenience doors is restricted If the sensors are covered, the convenience doors cannot function reliably. Do not apply stickers, foils or other coatings to the outside of the convenience doors. The sensors may otherwise be blocked and obstacles may not be detected or only detected to a limited extent.

EXIT WARNING WHEN OPENING THE FRONT DOORS FROM INSIDE

The exit warning of Active Blind Spot Assist is used as an additional safeguard. If an obstacle is detected, the convenience function is deactivated and the moving door will be stopped. Manually open a door stopped in an intermediate position. 

WARNING

Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.  Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( → page 441).

BLOCKAGE DETECTION WHEN OPENING THE FRONT DOORS

If an obstacle obstructs a door during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the door. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Manually open a door stopped in an intermediate position. 

NOTE

Damage to the convenience doors despite blockage detection Blockage detection may not be able to stop the automatic opening process of the doors in all cases. This can be the case in particular with light, soft objects. Therefore, make sure that there is sufficient clearance next to the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION WHEN CLOSING THE FRONT DOORS

The doors are equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle stops a door during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. • towards the end of the closing process. In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. ▶ Make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, use one of the following options: - Press the 🔒 or ⏻ button on the key. • Driver's door: depress the brake pedal. • Pull the inner or outer door handles. • Push against or pull the door. - Touch the touch screen in the convenience menu in the multimedia system. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Setting comfort doors

Multimedia system: 

OPERATING CONVENIENCE DOORS

 Select Open door control. The window for operating the doors opens. The doors can be opened or closed by using the slider. Select Cancel process. The procedure is interrupted and the door remains in the position it has reached. Select Close all. All doors are closed simultaneously.

SETTING THE KEY FUNCTION FOR THE CONVENIENCE DOORS

Select Select Key assignment. Convenience opening, windows, opening Front door, right and opening Front door, left can be set separately for operation with the key.

DOOR OPENING ON APPROACH

Activate or deactivate the function. When the function is activated, the driver's door opens automatically when the vehicle is approached.

WARNING OF OBSTACLES IN THE DOOR AREA

Activate or deactivate the function. The vehicle warns you of obstacles in the door area with acoustic feedback and a graphic display.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors 

Power closing function


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when the doors close automatically Body parts or objects can become trapped, causing injuries. Ensure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area. ▶ Automatic closing of the doors can be cancelled by pulling the outer or inner door handle. If you push the door into the lock to the first detent position, the power closing function will automatically pull the door into the lock. If the vehicle is locked from the outside, or while pulling away, an automatic closing of the doors can be triggered.

Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the emergency key

UNLOCKING A LEFT-HAND VEHICLE DOOR WITH THE EMERGENCY KEY ELEMENT

If you unlock and open the driver's door with the emergency key, this triggers the burglar alarm system. If you unlock the driver's door with the emergency key, the tailgate will not be unlocked.

Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO

Remove the emergency key ( → page 197).  ▶ Pull and hold the door handle. Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder. ▶ Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1. ▶ Turn the emergency key back to its starting position. Remove the emergency key and release the door handle.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO

Remove the emergency key ( → page 197).   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors  If the door handle is retracted: Insert a flat, non-metallic object behind door handle ① from above and pry it slightly outward. Reach behind door handle ① from below, pull it outward to the pressure point and hold it there.  If the door handle is extended:  Pull door handle ① outward to the pressure point and hold it there. Insert the emergency key into the lock cylinder. Turn the emergency key anti-clockwise to position 1. Forcefully pull door handle Ⓞ outward past the pressure point. ▶ Turn the emergency key back to its starting position. Remove the emergency key and release the door handle. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: LOCKING THE DOORS  Insert a suitable object, e.g. the emergency key, into opening ① on the door lock. To lock the left-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key clockwise as far as it will go. To lock the right-hand side of the vehicle: turn the emergency key anti-clockwise as far as it will go.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Doors  If the locked door is then closed, it can no longer be opened from the outside.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Load compartment

Load compartment

Opening the tailgate


NOTE

Damage to the tailgate caused by obstacles above the vehicle. The tailgate swings rearwards and upwards when it is opened. Make sure that there is sufficient space behind and above the tailgate. If the tailgate is unlocked, press the top of the Mercedes star. ▶ Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( → page 222).  Pull remote operating switch ① until the tailgate opens. or Press and hold the 📋 button on the key. If the tailgate has stopped in an intermediate position, pull it upwards. Release it as soon as it begins to open. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic opening process, blockage detection will stop the tailgate. The automatic blockage detection function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attentiveness. EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Load compartment

Closing the tailgate


WARNING

Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle. Notes on closing the tailgate: your vehicle is equipped with automatic key recognition. If a key belonging to the vehicle is detected in the vehicle, the tailgate will not be locked.

NOTE THAT THE TAILGATE WILL NOT BE LOCKED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATION:

- You have locked the vehicle and close the tailgate while a key belonging to the vehicle is inside the vehicle. and - A second key belonging to the vehicle is not detected outside the vehicle. Automatic key recognition is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. Before locking, ensure that at least one key belonging to the vehicle is outside the vehicle. To close the tailgate: pull the tailgate downwards slightly. Release it as soon as it begins to close.

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped during automatic closing of the tailgate Parts of the body could become trapped. There may be people in the closing area. Make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the closing area.

USE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS TO STOP THE CLOSING PROCESS:

- Press the 📄 button on the key. - Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. • Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. • Press the top of the Mercedes star on the tailgate. Vehicles with HANDS-FREE ACCESS: it is also possible to stop the closing process by making a kicking movement below the rear bumper.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Load compartment  Switch on the power supply or the vehicle. ▶ Push remote operating switch ① until the tailgate is fully closed.  Press closing button Ⓞ on the tailgate.

VEHICLES WITH KEYLESS-GO

Press locking button Ⓞ on the tailgate. If a key is detected outside the vehicle, the tailgate will close and the vehicle will be locked.  Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: this also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key if the function is activated and the Digital Vehicle Key is connected to the vehicle. Press and hold the 📄 button on the key. The key must be in the vicinity of the vehicle.

VEHICLES WITH HANDS-FREE ACCESS

Make a kicking movement with your foot below the bumper ( → page 222).

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION FOR THE TAILGATE

The tailgate is equipped with automatic blockage detection with a reversing function. If an obstacle obstructs the tailgate during the automatic closing process, it will automatically open again slightly. Automatic blockage detection with the reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Load compartment  

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. • towards the end of the closing procedure. In these situations in particular, the reversing function cannot prevent someone being trapped. ▶ Make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

IF SOMEONE IS TRAPPED, EITHER:

- Press the [ ] button on the key. • Press or pull the remote operating switch on the driver's door. • Press the closing or locking button on the tailgate. • Press the top of the Mercedes star on the tailgate.

HANDS-FREE ACCESS function

 With HANDS-FREE ACCESS you can open, close or stop the closing process of the tailgate by performing a kicking movement under the rear bumper. The kicking movement triggers the opening or closing process alternately. Observe the notes when opening ( → page 219) and closing ( → page 220) the tailgate. ① Two warning tones sound when the tailgate is opening or closing. 

NOTE

Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate or a door • when using an automatic car wash • when using a high pressure cleaner ▶ Deactivate the function of the key in these situations. or Make sure that the key is at a minimum distance of 3 m (high-pressure cleaner) or 6 m (automatic car wash) away from the vehicle. Vehicles with digital vehicle key:  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Load compartment  

NOTE

Vehicle damage due to unintentional opening of the tailgate or a door • when using an automatic car wash • when using a high pressure cleaner In these situations, switch off the Digital Vehicle Key. or Make sure that the digital vehicle key is at least 3 m (high-pressure cleaner) or 6 m (car wash) away from the vehicle. When making the kicking movement, make sure that you are standing firmly on the ground. You could otherwise lose your balance, e.g. on ice.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

• The key is behind the vehicle. - Vehicles with digital vehicle key: The Digital Vehicle Key is behind the vehicle. - Stand at least 30 cm away from the vehicle while performing the kicking movement. - Do not come into contact with the bumper while making the kicking movement. • Do not carry out the kicking movement too slowly. • The kicking movement must be towards the vehicle and back again.  ① Detection range of the sensors If several consecutive kicking movements are not successful, wait ten seconds.

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The sensors are dirty, e.g. due to road salt or snow. • The kicking movement is made using a prosthetic leg.

THE TAILGATE CAN OPEN OR CLOSE UNINTENTIONALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- A person's arms or legs are moving in the sensor detection range, e.g. when polishing the vehicle or picking up objects. - Objects are moved or placed behind the vehicle, e.g. a charging cable or luggage. - Clamping straps, tarpaulins or other coverings are pulled over the bumper. - A protective mat with a length reaching over the boot sill down into the detection range of the sensors is used. • The protective mat is not secured correctly. • Work is being done on the trailer hitch, trailers or rear bicycle racks.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Load compartment Deactivate the function of the key ( → page 86) or do not carry the key about your person in such situations. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Limiting the opening angle of the tailgate

ACTIVATING THE OPENING ANGLE LIMITER

You can limit the opening angle of the tailgate in the top half of its opening range up to a point shortly before the end position. ▶ Stop the opening procedure of the tailgate at the desired position. Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until you hear a short acoustic signal. The opening angle limiter will be activated. The tailgate will then stop in the stored position when opened. To open the tailgate fully, pull the top part of the Mercedes star on the tailgate again after it has stopped automatically.

DEACTIVATING THE OPENING ANGLE LIMITER

Press and hold the closing button on the tailgate until two short acoustic signals sound.

Unlocking the tailgate with the emergency key

Requirements

• The rear seat backrest has been folded forward. • The load compartment cover has been removed.  Remove the emergency key ( → page 197). Insert emergency key ② into opening ① in the trim and push it in the direction of the arrow. The tailgate will be unlocked.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Side windows

Side windows

Opening and closing the side windows


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when opening a side window When you open a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or pull it in order to close the side window again. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when closing a side window When closing a side window, body parts could be trapped in the closing area in the process. When closing, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the button immediately or press the button in order to reopen the side window.  

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when children operate the side windows Children could become trapped if they operate the side windows, particularly when unattended. Activate the child safety lock for the rear side windows. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle.

Requirements

• The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Side windows  Closing 2 Opening The buttons on the driver's door take precedence. To start automatic operation: press the button beyond the point of resistance or pull and release it. To interrupt automatic operation: press or pull the [ ] button again. When the vehicle is switched off, you can continue to operate the side windows. The function is also available until the doors are closed again.

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SIDE WINDOWS

If an obstacle impedes a side window during the closing process, the side window will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped despite there being reversing protection on the side window

THE REVERSING FUNCTION DOES NOT REACT:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. • during resetting. The reversing function cannot prevent someone from becoming trapped in these situations. During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone becomes trapped, press the ☐ button to open the side window again.

Automatic function of the side windows

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE SIDE WINDOWS WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF:

• if it starts to rain Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. • in extreme temperatures • after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system voltage) • if there is a malfunction in the power supply The side windows will be closed as far as the ventilation position.   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Opening and closing Side windows Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: the side windows will be closed completely if the sliding sunroof is open. If the side windows are obstructed during automatic closing, the side window concerned will open again slightly. After another automatic closing process, the automatic function may be deactivated. The automatic function will be active again the next time the vehicle is started.

Convenience opening (ventilating the vehicle before starting a journey)


WARNING

Risk of entrapment when opening a side window When opening a side window, parts of the body could be drawn in or become trapped between the side window and window frame. When opening, make sure that nobody is touching the side window. Release the button immediately if somebody becomes trapped.

Requirements

• The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle. Press and hold the button on the key. THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED: • The vehicle is unlocked. • The side windows are opened. • The panoramic sliding roof is opened. • The seat ventilation of the driver's seat is switched on. If the roller sunblind of the panoramic sliding sunroof is closed, the roller sunblind is opened first. To interrupt convenience opening: release ☑ the button. To continue convenience opening: press and hold the ☐ button again.

Convenience closing (closing the vehicle from outside)


WARNING

Risk of entrapment due to not paying attention during convenience closing When the convenience closing feature is operating, parts of the body could become trapped in the closing area of the side window and the sliding sunroof. When the convenience closing feature is operating, monitor the entire closing process and make sure that no body parts are in the closing area.

Requirements

• The key is in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Side windows Press and hold the ⏻ button on the key.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED:

• The vehicle is locked. • The side windows are closed. • The panoramic sliding roof is closed. To interrupt convenience closing: release the button. To continue convenience closing: press and hold the Ⓐ button again. (i) Convenience closing also functions with KEYLESS-GO ( → page 207).

Resolving problems with the side windows


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped or fatally injured if reversing protection is not activated If you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked, the side window will close with increased or maximum force. The reversing function is then not active and body parts may become trapped. ▶ Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, release the button or press the button again to reopen the side window.

A SIDE WINDOW CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE CAUSE.

▶ Check to see whether any objects are in the window guide. Adjust the side windows.

Adjusting the side windows

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens again immediately: Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (re-adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function. If the side window is obstructed again and reopens again immediately: Immediately after this, pull and hold the corresponding button again until the side window has closed and hold the button for at least one more second (follow-up adjustment). The side window will be closed without the automatic reversing function.

THE SIDE WINDOWS CANNOT BE OPENED OR CLOSED USING THE CONVENIENCE OPENING FEATURE.

POSSIBLE CAUSES:

• The key battery is weak or discharged. Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( → page 195). Replace the key battery, if necessary ( → page 198).  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Sliding sunroof

Sliding sunroof

Opening and closing the sliding sunroof

The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when the sliding sunroof is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped in the range of movement. During the opening and closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the sweep of the sliding sunroof. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment if the sliding sunroof is operated by children Children operating the sliding sunroof could get caught in the moving parts, particularly if unattended. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when the roller sunblind is being opened and closed Body parts may become trapped between the roller sunblind and frame or sliding roof. During the opening or closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the roller sunblind's range of movement. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or Touch the control panel during automatic operation. The opening/closing process will be stopped.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Sliding sunroof  

NOTE

Malfunction due to snow and ice Snow and ice may cause the sliding sunroof to malfunction. Open the sliding sunroof only if it is free of snow and ice. 

NOTE

Damage caused by protruding objects Objects that protrude from the sliding sunroof may damage the seals. Do not allow anything to protrude from the sliding sunroof. 

NOTE

Damage to panorama sliding sunroof caused by roof luggage rack If the panorama sliding sunroof is opened when a roof luggage rack is fitted, the panorama sliding sunroof may be damaged by the roof luggage rack. Do not open the panorama sliding sunroof if a roof luggage rack is fitted.  The sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind are operated using control panel 1. The panorama sliding sunroof can be operated only when the roller sunblind is open. Exception: Ventilating the vehicle interior To open: swipe backwards across control panel ① and hold. To close: swipe forwards across control panel ① and hold. To ventilate the vehicle interior: briefly press control panel when the roller sunblind is closed. The sliding sunroof lifts and the roller sunblind opens slightly. To lower: briefly press control panel ①. The sliding sunroof is closed. To close the roller sunblind: swipe forwards across control panel 1. To start automatic operation: swipe forwards or backwards across control panel ①.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Sliding sunroof To cancel automatic operation: press control panel ① again. The opening/closing process will be stopped.

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE SLIDING SUNROOF

If an obstacle obstructs the sliding sunroof during the closing process, the sliding sunroof will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function

THE REVERSING FUNCTION WILL NOT REACT:

• to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. • towards the end of the closing procedure. • during resetting. During the closing process, make sure that no body parts are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or ▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped.

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ROLLER SUNBLIND

If an obstacle obstructs the roller sunblind during the closing process, the roller sunblind will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped despite reversing function In particular, the reversing function does not react to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers. When closing the roller sunblind, make sure that no body parts are in the range of movement. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or ▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped.

Automatic functions of the sliding sunroof

The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof.

THE SLIDING SUNROOF WILL BE CLOSED AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• if it starts to rain Rain is detected by a rain sensor on the windscreen. • in extreme temperatures • after a certain time (depending on the on-board electrical system voltage)   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Sliding sunroof • if there is a malfunction in the power supply The sliding sunroof will rise at the rear in order to continue ventilating the vehicle interior. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during an automatic closing procedure, the roof will be opened again slightly. The automatic function for the sliding sunroof and the side windows will then be deactivated.

RAIN CLOSING FUNCTION WHEN DRIVING

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if it starts to rain, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered while the vehicle is in motion.

AUTOMATIC LOWERING FUNCTION

Vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof: if the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it will automatically be lowered slightly at higher speeds. At low speeds, it will be raised again automatically. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped by automatic lowering of the sliding sunroof At higher speeds, the raised sliding sunroof will automatically be lowered slightly at the rear. Make sure that nobody reaches into the sliding sunroof's range of movement while the vehicle is in motion. If someone becomes trapped, touch the control panel.

Rectifying problems with the sliding sunroof


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped or fatal injuries when the sliding sunroof is closed again If you close the sliding sunroof again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the sliding sunroof will close with increased or maximum force. There is a risk of becoming trapped or even of fatal injuries! Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. If someone is trapped, release the control panel immediately. or ▶ Touch the control panel during automatic closing. The closing process will be stopped.

THE SLIDING SUNROOF CANNOT BE CLOSED AND YOU CANNOT SEE THE CAUSE.

The term "sliding sunroof" refers to the panorama sliding sunroof. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed during closing and reopens again slightly: Immediately after automatic reversing, swipe forwards across the control panel ( → page 229) and hold until the sliding sunroof is closed. The sliding sunroof will be closed with increased force. If the sliding sunroof is obstructed again and opens again slightly:   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Sliding sunroof Repeat the previous step. The sliding sunroof will be closed again with increased force. THE SLIDING SUNROOF OR THE ROLLER SUNBLIND IS NOT OPERATING SMOOTHLY. Reset the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind. Resetting the sliding sunroof and the roller sunblind Swipe forwards across the control panel ( → page 229) and hold repeatedly until the sliding sunroof is completely closed. Press and hold the control panel for another second. Press and hold the control panel until the front roller sunblind is completely closed. Press and hold the control panel for another second. Use automatic operation to fully open and then close the sliding sunroof.   EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Anti-theft protection 

Anti-theft protection

Function of the immobiliser

The immobiliser prevents your vehicle from being started without the correct key. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. The immobiliser is automatically activated when the vehicle is switched off, and deactivated when the vehicle is switched on.

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

FUNCTION OF THE ATA SYSTEM

IF THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED, A VISUAL AND AUDIBLE ALARM IS TRIGGERED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• when a door is opened • when the tailgate is opened • when interior protection is triggered (→ page 236) • when tow-away protection is triggered (→ page 235) ① Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: The EDW works with the Digital Vehicle Key in the same way as with the conventional vehicle key.

THE ATA SYSTEM IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROXIMATELY TEN SECONDS IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• after locking the vehicle with the key • after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO • After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with digital vehicle key:)  Example: with MBUX hyperscreen Indicator lamp ① flashes when the ATA system is primed.

THE ATA SYSTEM IS DEACTIVATED AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• after unlocking the vehicle with the key • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Anti-theft protection • after unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with digital vehicle key) • after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334)

DEACTIVATING THE ATA

Press the 🔒, 🔒 or 📋 button on the key. or Press the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334) ▶ Vehicles with digital vehicle key: Press the start/stop button with the digital vehicle key in the storage compartment ( → page 332).

DEACTIVATING THE ALARM USING KEYLESS-GO

With the key outside the vehicle, touch the inner surface of the door handle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

Function of tow-away protection

An audible and visual alarm is triggered if an alteration to your vehicle's angle of inclination is detected while tow-away protection is primed.

TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY PRIMED AFTER APPROXIMATELY 60 SECONDS:

• after locking the vehicle with the key • after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. • After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with digital vehicle key:) 

TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS ARE CLOSED:

- Doors Tailgate

TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED:

• after pressing the ☐ or ☑ button on the key • after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334) • after pressing the start-stop button with the digital vehicle key in the storage compartment (Vehicles with digital vehicle key) (→ page 332) • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. • after unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with digital vehicle key) • when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle ( → page 389).

Priming/deactivating tow-away protection

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Opening/closing Vehicle protection ▶ Prime or deactivate Tow-away protection.

TOW-AWAY PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The vehicle is unlocked again. A door is opened.  EQE - Owner's Manual Opening and closing Anti-theft protection • The vehicle is locked again.

Function of interior protection

When interior protection is primed, a visual and audible alarm is triggered if movement is detected in the vehicle interior.

INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AUTOMATICALLY AFTER APPROXIMATELY TEN SECONDS:

• after locking the vehicle with the key • after locking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. • After locking with the NFC function (vehicles with digital vehicle key:)

INTERIOR PROTECTION IS ONLY PRIMED WHEN THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS ARE CLOSED:

- Doors Tailgate

INTERIOR PROTECTION IS AUTOMATICALLY DEACTIVATED:

• after pressing the ☐ or ⚪ button on the key • after pressing the start/stop button with the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334) • after pressing the start-stop button with the digital vehicle key in the storage compartment (Vehicles with digital vehicle key) (→ page 332) • after unlocking the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. • after unlocking with the NFC function (vehicles with digital vehicle key) • when using HANDS-FREE ACCESS

THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO A FALSE ALARM:

- when there are moving objects such as mascots in the vehicle interior • if a side window is open • if the panoramic sunroof is open

Priming/deactivating interior protection

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Opening/closing Vehicle protection ▶ Prime or deactivate Interior motion sensor.

INTERIOR PROTECTION IS PRIMED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The vehicle is unlocked again. • A door is opened. • The vehicle is locked again.   Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   Seats and stowing 

< Seats and stowing

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Notes on the correct driver's seat position 238 Cup holders 270  Notes on grab handles 239  Sockets 275  Seats 240  Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial  Steering wheel 249  Fitting and removing floor mats 279  Easy entry and exit feature 251  Memory function 253  Stowage areas 256  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Notes on the correct driver's seat position 

Notes on the correct driver's seat position


WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

- if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion • if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. 

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING WHEN ADJUSTING STEERING WHEEL ①, SEAT BELT ② AND DRIVER'S SEAT ③:

- You are sitting as far away from the driver's airbag as possible, taking the following points into consideration: • You are sitting in an upright position - Your thighs are slightly supported by the seat cushion - Your legs are not fully extended and you can depress the pedals properly - The back of your head is supported at eye level by the centre of the head restraint • You can hold the steering wheel with your arms slightly bent • You can move your legs freely • You can see all the displays on the driver's display clearly • You have a good overview of the traffic conditions - Observe the notes on correctly fastening the seat belt (→ page 147). EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Notes on grab handles

Notes on grab handles


WARNING

Risk of injury due to excessive load on the grab handles If you apply your full body weight to the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the grab handle may be damaged or come loose from its anchorage. This may result in injuries. Use the grab handles only to stabilise the seating position or to assist in getting in and out of the seat.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Seats

< Seats

Adjusting the front seat electrically


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the seats are adjusted by children. Children could become trapped if they adjust the seats, particularly when unattended. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. You can adjust the seats when the vehicle is switched off. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped during seat adjustment When you adjust a seat, you or other vehicle occupants could become trapped, e.g. on the seat guide rail. Make sure when adjusting a seat that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. Observe the safety notes on "Airbags" and "Children in the vehicle". 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

- if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion • if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the seat height is adjusted carelessly If you adjust the seat height carelessly, you or other vehicle occupants could be trapped and thereby injured. Children in particular could accidentally press the electrical seat adjustment buttons and become trapped. While moving the seats, make sure that hands or other body parts do not get under the lever assembly of the seat adjustment system.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats 

A

WARNING

Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. ▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

A

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to incorrect seat position The seat belt will not offer the intended level of protection if you have not moved the seat backrest to an almost vertical position. In particular, you may slip under the seatbelt and injure yourself. Adjust the seat properly before beginning your journey. Always ensure that the seat backrest is in an almost vertical position and that the shoulder section of your seat belt is routed across the centre of your shoulder.

A

WARNING

Risk of potentially fatal injuries due to objects trapped under the front passenger seat Objects trapped under the front passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat. When the front passenger seat is occupied, ensure that no objects have become trapped beneath the front passenger seat.

!

NOTE

Damage to the seats when adjusting The seats may be damaged by objects when adjusting the seats. When adjusting the seats, make sure that there are no objects in the footwell, under or behind the seats. The switches for adjusting the seats do not move. You will therefore receive no direct feedback on the switch while pressing the switch. Feedback is provided only by the movement of the seat.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats   1 Head restraint height Seat height Seat cushion inclination Seat cushion length Seat fore-and-aft position 6 Seat backrest inclination Save the settings with the memory function ( → page 254). The head restraint height will be adjusted automatically when you adjust the seat height or the seat fore-and-aft position. Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support  1 Higher 2 Softer Lower 4 Firmer Use buttons ① to ④ to adjust the contour of the backrest.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats

Head restraints

ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINTS ON THE FRONT SEATS


WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

- if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion • if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level. Adjust the head restraint fore-and-aft position so that it is as close as possible to the back of your head.

MOVING FORWARD OR BACK

 Take hold of the head restraint on both sides and press release knob ①. Pull the headrest forwards or push it backwards. Let go of release knob ①. To raise or lower: adjust the head restraint using the buttons on the door operating unit ( → page 240).

ADJUSTING THE HEAD RESTRAINTS OF THE REAR SEATS MANUALLY


WARNING

Risk of injury due to incorrectly adjusted head restraints If head restraints have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or sudden braking.  Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats Move all head restraints up at least to the first detent, even in the steeper seating position (cargo position) ( → page 263). If a head restraint is in the lowest, non-locked position, the respective seat must not be used.  To raise: push release knob in the direction of the arrow and pull the head restraint up until it engages. To lower: press release knob Ⓞ in the direction of the arrow and push the head restraint down until it engages. If the centre seat of the second row of seats is occupied: pull the centre head restraint up and engage it before starting the journey.

FITTING/REMOVING THE REAR SEAT HEAD RESTRAINTS


WARNING

Risk of injury due to head restraints not being fitted or being adjusted incorrectly If head restraints have not been installed or have not been adjusted correctly, there is an increased risk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g. in the event of an accident or when braking. ▶ Always drive with the head restraints fitted. Before driving off, make sure for every vehicle occupant that the centre of the head restraint supports the back of the head at about eye level.

REMOVING

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can remove the head restraints in the rear. Release the rear seat backrest and fold it forwards slightly ( → page 61).   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats Press release buttons ① and ② and pull out the head restraint.

INSTALLING

Insert the head restraint such that the notches on the bar are on the left when viewed in the direction of travel. Press release buttons ① and ②. ▶ Push the head restraint down until it engages. Fold the rear seat backrest back until it engages.

Configuring the seat settings

Multimedia system: 

ADJUSTING THE AIR CUSHIONS

On the corresponding menu, adjust the air cushions for Lumbar, Shoulders or Side bolsters.

SETTING THE SEAT HEATING BALANCE

Select Heating settings. Select Seat heating balance. Adjust the heat distribution for the desired seat.

Setting automatic seat adjustment

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by: a) Pressing the warning message on the central display. or b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. Multimedia system: 

MANUALLY ADJUSTING DRIVER'S SEAT AND STEERING WHEEL POSITION TO BODY SIZE

The vehicle calculates a suitable driver's seat and steering wheel position on the basis of the driver's body size and sets this directly.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats To set the unit of measurement: select cm or ft/in. Set the size using the scale. Select Start positioning. The driver's seat and steering wheel position is adjusted to the body size that has been set. You can also configure these settings via the Mercedes me user account for your user profile. By synchronising the profiles in the vehicle and the Mercedes me connect profiles, you can carry over these settings for your vehicle. Further information about synchronising user profiles ( → page 550). If the driver's seat and steering wheel position calculated by the vehicle is not practical or comfortable, it can be manually adapted at any time via the control buttons. The outside mirrors are not set via this function. Instead, they have to be set manually via the operating switches.

Overview of massage programmes

• Classic Massage Calming back massage programme. - Mobilizing Massage Mobilising massage programme with upward-moving massaging waves. Can promote slower, deeper respiration. This can improve the supply of oxygen to cells and the brain. - Activating Massage Activating massage programme with upward-moving massaging waves. - Hot Relaxing back: Based on hot stone massage, the programme combines heat and massage. It starts by massaging the back. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. - Hot Relaxing shoulders Combination of heat and massage. It starts by massaging the shoulders. In addition, warm pressure points become noticeable, starting in the pelvic area. • Wave Massage Regenerating massage programme via soothing waves across the back and in the seat cushion. - Depth waves: Wave-like movements in the cushion can promote blood flow and metabolic processes in the lower back and legs. - Deep workout: Connect the Workout, backrest to the Workout, cushion. The vibrations in the cushion intensify the effectiveness of tensing and releasing muscles when you tense against the pressure point. This supports metabolic processes and blood flow in the buttocks and legs. - Workout, backrest and Workout, cushion These programmes require your cooperation. Alternating between tensing and releasing helps to improve blood flow to your muscles. Press against a pressure point as soon as you feel it to activate back, abdominal and leg muscles.

Selecting a massage programme for the front seats

Multimedia system: Comfort Massage Select a massage programme ( → page 246). Start the programme for the desired seat ▶. To set the massage intensity: switch High intensity on or off. ^ 246 EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Seats The availability of this function is dependent on the vehicle's equipment.

Resetting seat settings

Multimedia system: Comfort Seat Select Reset. Select [ ] for the desired seat.

Switching the seat heating on/off


WARNING

Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.  

NOTE

Damage to the seats caused by objects or documents when the seat heater is switched on When the seat heater is switched on, overheating may occur due to objects or documents placed on the seats e.g. seat cushions or child seats. This could cause damage to the seat surface. Make sure that no objects or documents are on the seats when the seat heater is switched on.

Requirements

• The power supply is switched on.  Seat heating in the door operating unit in the cockpit (example) Press button ① for the respective seat repeatedly until the desired heating level is reached. Depending on the heating level, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat heating is switched off.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Seats The seat heating will automatically switch down from the three heating levels after 8, 10 and 20 minutes until the seat heating switches off. If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous setting of the seat heating for the driver's seat will remain active.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Requirements

• The power supply is switched on.  Seat ventilation in the door operating unit in the cockpit (example)  Press button Ⓞ for the respective seat repeatedly until the desired blower setting is reached. Depending on the blower setting, up to three indicator lamps will light up. If all indicator lamps are off, the seat ventilation is switched off. If you switch the power supply off and on again within 20 minutes, the previous seat ventilation setting for the driver's seat will remain active.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Steering wheel

< Steering wheel

Adjusting the steering wheel electrically


WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion • if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment for children when adjusting the steering wheel Children could injure themselves if they adjust the steering wheel. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. The steering wheel can be adjusted when the power supply is disconnected.  To move up To move back To move down To move forward Save the settings with the memory function ( → page 254).

Decoupling the steering wheel heater from the seat heating

Requirements

• The power supply or the vehicle has been switched on.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Steering wheel • The steering wheel heater and the seat heating are linked. Multimedia system: Comfort Seat Heating settings The function is active by default and the steering wheel heater is automatically activated and deactivated when the seat heating is switched on and off. Tap on Additional steering wheel heater. The steering wheel heater is decoupled from the seat heating.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature

Easy entry and exit feature

Using the easy entry and exit feature


WARNING

Risk of accident when pulling away during the adjustment process of the easy entry and exit feature You could lose control of the vehicle. Always wait until the adjustment process is complete before driving off. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the easy entry and exit feature You and other vehicle occupants, particularly children, may become trapped. Make sure that no one has any part of their body within the range of movement of the steering wheel and driver's seat. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the steering wheel: Move the steering wheel adjustment lever. The adjustment process is stopped. If there is a risk of becoming trapped by the driver's seat: \- Press the switch for seat adjustment. The adjustment process is stopped. - Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. - When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. Vehicles with memory function: you can stop the adjustment process by pressing one of the memory function position switches.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Easy entry and exit feature  

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if children activate the easy entry and exit feature Children could become trapped if they activate the easy entry and exit feature, particularly when unattended. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. In order to use the easy entry and exit feature, the automatic seat adjustment function must have been switched on ( → page 245).

WHEN THE EASY ENTRY AND EXIT FEATURE IS ACTIVE, THE STEERING WHEEL AND DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE AS FOLLOWS:

• The steering wheel will move upwards. - The driver's seat will move forward or backward to a seat position suitable for getting out of the vehicle.

THIS WILL OCCUR IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• You switch off the vehicle when the driver's door is open. • You open the driver's door when the vehicle is switched off. The steering wheel will then move upwards only if it is not already as high as it will go. The driver's seat will then move backwards only if it is not already at the rear of the seat adjustment range.

THE STEERING WHEEL AND THE DRIVER'S SEAT WILL MOVE BACK TO THE LAST DRIVING POSITION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

- You switch the power supply or the vehicle on when the driver's door is closed. • You close the driver's door when the vehicle is switched on.

THE LAST DRIVE POSITION WILL BE SAVED WHEN:

• You switch off the vehicle. - Vehicles with memory function: you call up the seat settings via the memory function. Vehicles with memory function: press one of the memory function position switches to stop the adjustment process.

Setting the easy entry and exit feature

Requirements

• The automatic seat adjustment has been activated ( → page 245). Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Easy entry and exit feature Select Steering wheel and seat, Steering wheel only or Off. If you are using an individual user profile, this information is used for the easy entry and exit feature. This will cause the driver's seat and steering wheel to move into the correct position automatically ( → page 547).   EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Memory function

< Memory function

Function of the memory function


WARNING

Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving. If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment when adjusting the seat with the memory function When the memory function adjusts the seat, you and other vehicle occupants - particularly children - could become trapped. During the adjusting process of the memory function, ensure that no body parts are in the area of movement of the seat or the steering wheel. If someone becomes trapped, press a preset position button or seat adjustment switch immediately. The adjustment process is stopped.  

WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off. Seat adjustments for up to three people can be stored and called up using the memory function.

YOU CAN SAVE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS FOR THE FRONT SEAT:

- Seat, backrest, head restraint position and contour of the seat backrest in the lumbar region - Seat heating: distribution of the heated sections of the seat cushion and seat backrest - Driver's side: steering wheel position and position of the outside mirrors on the driver's and front passenger sides Head-up display  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Memory function 

Operating the memory function


WARNING

Risk of an accident if the memory function is used while driving If you use the memory function on the driver's side while driving, you could lose control of the vehicle as a result of the adjustments being made. Only use the memory function on the driver's side when the vehicle is stationary. 

WARNING

Danger of entrapment when memory function is activated by children When children activate the memory function, they can get trapped, especially if they are unsupervised. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the key with you and lock the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. You can use the memory function when the vehicle is switched off. STORING  Set the seat, the steering wheel, the head-up display and the outside mirror to the desired position. Press the M button and then release it. Press one of the preset position buttons 1, 2 or 3 within three seconds. An acoustic signal sounds. The settings are stored.    EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Memory function  To call up: press the preset position button 1, 2 or 3. The seat is moved to the stored position. After releasing the button, the front seat, outside mirror, head-up display and steering column continue to move into the stored position automatically.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Stowage areas

Notes on loading the vehicle

Objects in the deployment area of an airbag may prevent the airbag from functioning correctly. Observe the notes on protection provided by the airbag. 

WARNING

Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip over or be thrown around and thereby hit vehicle occupants. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Before the journey, secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over. 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of braking manoeuvres or abrupt changes in direction. Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Stow and secure objects that are heavy, hard, pointed, sharpedged, fragile or too large in the load compartment.  

WARNING

Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell Objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell. Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another. Vehicles with automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff: objects trapped under the front-passenger seat may interfere with the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff or damage the system. Please observe the notes on the function of the automatic front-passenger airbag shutoff ( → page 152). Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

THE HANDLING CHARACTERISTICS OF YOUR VEHICLE ARE DEPENDENT ON THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE LOAD WITHIN THE VEHICLE. YOU SHOULD BEAR THE FOLLOWING IN MIND WHEN LOADING THE VEHICLE:

- Do not exceed the permissible total mass or the permissible axle loads of the vehicle (including load and occupants). information can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( → page 830). • The load must not protrude above the upper edge of the seat backrests. \- Always use the partition net when transporting objects in the load compartment. • Always place the load behind unoccupied seats if possible. \- Secure the load using the lashing eyelets and distribute the load evenly.

NOTES ON DRIVING WITH A ROOF LOAD

- Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle. - Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering. - When transporting roof loads and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied, select drive programs E and C. These are designed to focus on stability ( → page 347). EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Stowage spaces in the vehicle interior

OVERVIEW OF THE FRONT STOWAGE COMPARTMENTS


WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.  

WARNING

Risk of accident from objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell Objects in the driver's footwell and front-passenger footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell or front-passenger footwell. Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not lay multiple floor mats on top of one another.  ① Stowage spaces in the doors Stowage and telephone compartment beneath the armrest with multimedia and USB ports as well as stowage space, e.g. for an MP3 player Stowage compartment in the front centre console, with cup holders, USB ports and charging module for wireless charging of mobile phones depending on the vehicle version Stowage tray under the central display of the multimedia system Glove compartment   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Stowage areas The rubber mat in the stowage compartment in front centre console can be removed for cleaning with clean, lukewarm water. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior ( → page 722).

OPENING AND CLOSING THE STOWAGE COMPARTMENT IN THE FRONT CENTRE CONSOLE


WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.   To open: slide the cover of the stowage compartment in the front centre console all the way forwards in the direction of the arrow using handle Ⓓ. To close: briefly push handle ① of the open cover of the stowage compartment in the front centre console forwards. The cover will automatically close the stowage compartment in the front centre console.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas 

OPENING AND CLOSING THE GLOVE COMPARTMENT


WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.  To open: press button 1. The glove compartment will open. To close: fold the glove compartment upwards. The glove compartment will close. Through-loading feature in the rear bench seat (EASY-PACK Quickfold)

FOLDING THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas  

WARNING

Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

- The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury. • A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or properly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended. - The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or load compartment.

ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPECIALLY:

• After the seat has been adjusted. • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children.

Requirements

• The rear seat backrest head restraints are fully inserted. • Vehicles with a folding rear armrest: the rear armrest has been folded up.

FOLDING THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS FORWARD MECHANICALLY

You can fold the centre and right seat backrests forwards separately. The left seat backrest can be folded forwards only together with the centre seat backrest. If you no longer require the folded-down rear seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place. Ensure that the centre seat backrest is in an upright position and locked to the left seat backrest.  Press the seat belt tongue of seat belt ① into marked position ②. Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas  Pull release lever ①. Fold the corresponding seat backrest forwards.

FOLDING THE CENTRE REAR SEAT BACKREST FORWARDS SEPARATELY

If you no longer require the folded-down seat backrest as a load area, fold the backrest back into place.  Press release catch 3 Fold seat backrest forwards.

FOLDING BACK THE REAR SEAT BACKREST

WARNING Risk of becoming trapped when adjusting the seats When you adjust a seat, you may trap yourself or a vehicle occupant. When adjusting a seat, make sure that no one has any body parts in the sweep of the seat. WARNING Risk of an accident because the seat backrest is not engaged The seat backrest may fold forwards.

THERE IS A RISK OF THE FOLLOWING, IN PARTICULAR:

- The vehicle occupant may be pressed against the seat belt. The seat belt cannot protect as intended and could cause additional injury. - A child restraint system is no longer properly supported or properly positioned and may no longer fulfil its function as intended. - The seat backrest cannot restrain objects or goods in the boot or load compartment.

ALWAYS ENSURE THAT THE SEAT BACKREST IS ENGAGED, ESPECIALLY:

• After the seat has been adjusted. • After the load compartment enlargement has been folded forwards  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas Make sure that the red marking of the lock verification indicator is no longer visible. Otherwise, the seat backrest is not locked. Always ensure that all vehicle occupants have their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting properly. Particular attention must be paid to children. 

NOTE

Damage caused by trapping the seat belt when folding back the seat backrest The seat belt could become trapped and thus be damaged when the seat backrest is folded back.  Make sure that the seat belt is not trapped when folding back the seat backrest.  Move the driver's or front passenger seat forwards, if necessary. Swing seat backrest ① back until it engages. Red lock verification indicator ② will no longer be visible. The seat backrest will now be engaged. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verification indicator will be visible.

ADJUSTING THE ANGLE OF THE REAR SEAT BACKRESTS (CARGO POSITION)


WARNING

Risk of accident if the rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest are not engaged The rear bench seat, rear seat and seat backrest may fold forwards, even while the vehicle is in motion. - As a result, the vehicle occupant will be pressed into the seat belt with increased force. The seat belt will not be able to protect as intended and could cause additional injury. - Objects or loads in the boot or load compartment cannot be restrained by the seat backrest. Make sure that the rear bench seat, the rear seat and the seat backrest are engaged before every trip. To enlarge the load compartment, you can adjust the seat backrests so that they are ten degrees steeper (cargo position). EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas  Fold the seat backrest forwards ( → page 61). Move bracket ① in the direction of the arrow.  Push seat backrest ② back to bracket ① until the backrest engages. If the seat backrest is not engaged and locked in place, red lock verification indicator ③ will be visible.

Load compartment cover

EXTENDING/RETRACTING THE LOAD COMPARTMENT COVER


WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects The load compartment cover alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the load compartment cover. 

NOTE

Damage to the load compartment cover when loading the vehicle The load compartment cover may be damaged when the vehicle is being loaded. Do not place any objects above the lower edge of the side windows or on the load compartment cover. The load compartment cover is attached behind the seat backrest of the rear bench seat.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas  To extend: pull load compartment cover ① back by grab handle ② and hook it into holders on the left and right. To retract: unhook load compartment cover ① from the holders on the left and right and guide it forwards by grab handle ② until it is fully retracted.

INSTALLING AND REMOVING THE LOAD COMPARTMENT COVER

Requirements

• The load compartment cover is retracted.

REMOVING THE LOAD COMPARTMENT COVER

 Press in the end cap of load compartment cover Ⓞ on the right- or left-hand side. Push load compartment cover ① into recess ② on the opposite side.  Take the load compartment cover ① out by pulling it upwards.

INSTALLING THE LOAD COMPARTMENT COVER

 Press in the end cap of load compartment cover ① on the opposite side and insert load compartment cover ① into other recess ②. Slide the end cap outwards.

Attaching/removing the partitioning net

WARNING

Risk of injury or death due to poorly secured objects The partitioning net alone cannot secure or restrain heavy objects, items of luggage or heavy loads. You could be hit by an unsecured load, particularly in the event of abrupt changes in direction, sudden braking or an accident. Always slow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around. Secure objects, luggage or loads against slipping or tipping over, e.g. by using lashing material, even if you are using the partitioning net.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas For safety reasons, always use a partitioning net when transporting a load. Damaged partitioning nets can no longer fulfil their functions and must be replaced. Visit a qualified specialist workshop. Please note that the availability of the partitioning net depends on the equipment. ATTACHING  Partitioning net without load compartment enlargement  Partitioning net with load compartment enlargement  ▶ Unfold the partitioning net until it audibly clicks into place. Hook partitioning net ① into holders ② on the left and right on the roof lining. Engage hooks ③ in tie-down eyes ④ on the left and right. Pull on the loose ends of the lashing straps at the same time until partitioning net ⓑ is tight. REMOVING  Raise the buckle of lashing strap ⑥ in the direction of arrow. Slide the loose end of lashing strap Ⓤ into the buckle in the direction of arrow until the lashing straps are loose. Remove hooks 3 from tie-down eyes 4 on the left and right. Remove partitioning net ① from brackets ② on the roof lining on the left and right.

STOWING

Press the red buttons on the top and bottom guide rods.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas ▶ Collapse and roll up the partition net.

Overview of the tie-down eyes

Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256).  1 Tie-down eyes 

Overview of bag hooks

WARNING Risk of injury when using bag hooks with heavy objects The bag hooks cannot restrain heavy objects or items of luggage. Objects or items of luggage may be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. Only hang light objects on the bag hooks. Never hang hard, sharp-edged or fragile objects on the bag hooks. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256). Subject the bag hooks to a maximum load of 3 kg and do not attach any goods to them.  Bag hooks   EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas

Attaching a roof luggage rack


WARNING

Risk of accident due to exceeding the maximum roof load The vehicle centre of gravity and the usual driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics alter. If you exceed the maximum roof load, the driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, will be greatly impaired. Never exceed the maximum roof load and adjust your driving style. You will find information on the maximum roof load in the "Technical data" section in the printed Owner's Manual. 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. ▶ Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. 

NOTE

Vehicle damage from non-approved roof luggage racks The vehicle could be damaged by roof luggage racks that have not been tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Only use roof luggage racks tested and approved for Mercedes-Benz. Depending on the vehicle equipment, ensure that when the roof luggage rack is fitted, the tailgate can be fully opened. Position the load on the roof luggage rack in such a way that the vehicle will not sustain damage even when it is in motion.  

NOTE

Damage to the covers The covers may be damaged and scratched when being opened. Do not use metallic or hard objects.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Stowage areas Carefully fold covers ① upwards in the direction of the arrow. Comply with the installation instructions of the roof luggage rack manufacturer. ▶ Secure the load on the roof luggage rack.    EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Cup holders

Cup holders

Fitting the cup holder in or removing it from the centre console


WARNING

\- Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. ▶ Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. ▶ Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. ▶ Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. ▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot.

Requirements:

\- For installation: the locking catch is pushed in the direction of the cup holder. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256).  EQE - Owner's Manual   Seats and stowing Cup holders  TO FIT  Insert cup holder housing Ⓞ into the stowage compartment at a slight angle. Place cup holder housing ① in the stowage compartment, aligning the recesses with the two hubs ② so that they fit. ▶ Push the cup holder down. TO LOCK  Slide locking catch ① toward the side wall of the centre console. The cup holder will be locked. TO REMOVE  Slide locking catch ① toward the cup holder. The cup holder will be unlocked. First pull the cup holder up in the direction of arrow ② and then tilt it slightly to remove it from the stowage compartment.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Cup holders 

Using the cup holder

 Place a beverage container in the cup holder. Bottom ① of the cup holder will lower automatically and side walls ② of the cup holder will move forward automatically. The cup holder will automatically adjust to the size of the container placed in it.

THE SIDE WALLS OF THE CUP HOLDER CAN ALSO BE ACTIVATED MANUALLY IN DIFFERENT WAYS:

- Press the bottom down slightly with the beverage container. - Press on the grooved surface on the side wall of the cup holder. Check whether the beverage container is held firmly by the cup holder. Some beverage containers will not be secured adequately in the cup holder due to their shape or size.

ORIGINAL POSITION

When the cup holder is not in use, the side walls of the cup holder can be retracted manually. The bracket arms of the cup holder will automatically be retracted as well, and the cup holder's holding function will then no longer be available.  Manually push back the side walls of cup holder ② in the direction of the arrow.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Cup holders

Opening or closing the cup holders in the rear armrest


WARNING

\- Risk of accident or injury when using the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion The cup holder cannot hold a container secure while the vehicle is in motion. If you use a cup holder while the vehicle is in motion, the container may be flung around and liquids could be spilled. The vehicle occupants may come into contact with the liquid and if it is hot, they could be scalded. You could be distracted from traffic conditions and you may lose control of the vehicle. ▶ Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is stationary. ▶ Only use the cup holder for containers of the right size. ▶ Always close the container, particularly if the liquid is hot. 

NOTE

Damage to the rear armrest due to body weight When folded out, the rear armrest can be damaged by body weight. Do not sit or support yourself on the rear seat armrest. 

NOTE

Damage to the cup holder The cup holder can be damaged when folding back the rear seat arm-rest. When open, the cup holder can be damaged by body weight. The rear seat armrest can only be folded back when the cup holder is closed. Do not sit or support yourself on the cup holder when it is open.

Opening the mobile phone holder in the rear armrest

 Press cover trim ① once. The mobile phone holder will open in the direction of the arrow. Place the mobile phone in or remove it from the holder. i Observe the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256).  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Cup holders The mobile phone holder is designed for two mobile phones or one tablet. You can also charge the devices in the holder by inserting the charging cable into the devices through the opening on the underside of the holder. Observe the notes on USB connections (→ page 275).

Closing the mobile phone holder in the rear armrest

Press cover trim 0. The mobile phone holder and the cup holder will both open. Press cover trim a second time. The mobile phone holder will be closed.

Opening or closing the cup holders in the rear armrest

 To open: press cover trim twice. The cup holder will open in the direction of the arrow. Place a container in or remove a container from the cup holder. To close: slide the cup holder back into the rear armrest.   EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Sockets

< Sockets

Using the 12 V socket

Requirements:

• Only connect devices up to a maximum of 180 W (15 A). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the vehicle has 12 V sockets in the front passenger footwell and in the load compartment.  Example: 12 V socket in the front passenger footwell Fold up socket cap 1. Insert the plug of the device. Make sure that no cables are running through or secured in the airbag deployment area when using the socket. Also observe the notes on airbag protection.

USB ports

DEPENDING ON ITS EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOLLOWING USB PORTS:

• In the stowage compartment in the front centre console • In the stowage compartment under the front armrest • In the electronics compartment in the centre console of the rear passenger compartment You can charge a USB device, such as a mobile phone, at the USB ports using a suitable charging cable. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the devices can be charged with up to 20 V (5 A) when the vehicle is switched on.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial 

< Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial

Notes on wirelessly charging a mobile phone 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. ▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment. 

WARNING

Risk of fire from placing objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment Placing other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment could constitute a fire hazard. Apart from a mobile phone, do not place any other objects in the mobile phone stowage compartment, especially those made of metal. 

NOTE

Damage to objects caused by placing them in the mobile phone stowage compartment If objects are placed in the mobile phone stowage compartment, these may be damaged by electromagnetic fields. Do not place credit cards, storage media, ski passes or other objects sensitive to electromagnetic fields in the mobile phone stowage compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.   

NOTE

Damage to the mobile phone stowage compartment caused by liquids If liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment, the compartment may be damaged.  Ensure that no liquids enter the mobile phone stowage compartment. Always observe the notes for persons with electronic medical aids ( → page 136). - Depending on the vehicle equipment, the mobile phone is connected to the vehicle's exterior aerial via the charging module. - The charging function and wireless connection of the mobile phone to the vehicle's exterior aerial are only available if the vehicle is switched on. - Small mobile phones may not be able to be charged in every position of the mobile phone stowage compartment. - Large mobile phones which do not rest flat in the mobile phone stowage compartment may not be able to be charged or connected with the vehicle's exterior aerial. - The mobile phone may heat up during the charging process. This may also depend on the applications (apps) currently open in the background. - To ensure more efficient charging and connection with the vehicle's exterior aerial, remove the protective cover from the mobile phone. Protective covers which are necessary for wireless charging are an exception.

Wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front


WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone brackets cannot always retain all objects they contain. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects in such a way that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

Requirements:

• The mobile phone is suitable for wireless charging. A list of compatible mobile phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/  EQE - Owner's Manual > Seats and stowing Wireless charging of the mobile phone and connection with the exterior aerial 

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE VEHICLE HAS THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS FOR WIRELESSLY CHARGING A MOBILE PHONE IN THE COCKPIT:

• In the front stowage compartment of the centre console • in the stowage compartment in the armrest  Example: wirelessly charging a mobile phone in the front stowage compartment Place the mobile phone as close to the centre of mat ① as possible with the display facing upwards. When the charging symbol is shown in the multimedia system, the mobile phone is being charged. In addition, malfunctions during the mobile phone's charging process are shown in the multimedia system display. ① The mat can be removed for cleaning, e.g. using clean, lukewarm water.

RADIO EQUIPMENT APPROVAL NUMBERS FOR BRAZIL

This device operates on a secondary basis, that is to say it has no protection against harmful interference, not even from the same type of stations, and must not cause interference with systems operating on a primary basis. This product is permitted in accordance with the procedure defined in Directive 242/2000 by the Brazilian telecommunications agency ANATEL and meets the applicable technical requirements. Further information is available on the ANATEL website. www.anatel.gov.br Further information on the declaration of conformity for vehicle components which receive and/or transmit radio waves.  EQE - Owner's Manual Seats and stowing Fitting and removing floor mats 

Fitting and removing floor mats


WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. FITTING FLOOR MATS  Slide the corresponding seat backwards and lay the floor mat in the footwell such that it fits. Press studs ① onto holders ②. Adjust the corresponding seat.

REMOVING FLOOR MATS

Slide the corresponding seat backwards and pull the floor mat off holders ②. Adjust the corresponding seat.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   Light and sight 

< Light and sight

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Exterior lighting 281 Interior lighting 294 Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system 297 Mirrors 301 Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen 305 Infrared-reflective windscreen function 306 EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting 

Exterior lighting

Notes on adjusting the lights when driving abroad

As a convenience function, the headlamps automatically adjust when the vehicle crosses the border into a country where traffic drives on the other side of the road. If necessary, the headlamps can also be adjusted manually in the Low beam menu ( → page 293).

THE AUTOMATIC LIGHT ADJUSTMENT FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE:

• If Automatic is activated in the Low beam menu • If the navigation and the navigation position are available

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, CHECK THE HEADLAMP SETTING AND CHANGE IT MANUALLY IF NECESSARY:

- If the Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only display message is displayed. - If the Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) display message is displayed.

FOLLOWING MANUAL ADJUSTMENT:

• Oncoming traffic will not be dazzled. • The edge of the road will not be illuminated as far or as high. - The "motorway mode" and "enhanced fog light" functions will not be available.

Information about lighting systems and your responsibility

The various lighting systems of the vehicle are only aids. The driver of the vehicle is responsible for correct vehicle illumination in accordance with the prevailing light and visibility conditions, legal requirements and traffic situation.

Light switch

OPERATING THE LIGHT SWITCH  1 ←P ∈ Left-hand parking lights 2 P← Right-hand parking lights 3 Standing lights and licence plate lighting  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting 4 AUTO Automatic driving lights (preferred light switch position) 5 SD Low beam/high beam 6 Switches the rear fog light on/off. When low beam is activated, the 3005 indicator lamp for the standing lights will be deactivated and replaced by the 0 low-beam indicator lamp. Always park your vehicle safely using sufficient lighting, in accordance with the relevant legal stipulations. 

NOTE

Battery discharging by operating the standing lights Do not have the standing lights switched on over a period of several hours. For vehicles that are wider than 2 m or longer than 6 m, single-sided parking lighting is not permitted in some countries. In this case, the standing lights are also switched on in the parking lights position. If the battery is insufficiently charged, the standing lights or parking lights will be switched off automatically to facilitate the next engine start.

THE EXTERIOR LIGHTING (EXCEPT STANDING AND PARKING LIGHTS) WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY WHEN THE DRIVER'S DOOR IS OPENED.

• Observe the notes on locator lighting ( → page 293).

AUTOMATIC DRIVING LIGHTS FUNCTION

When the vehicle is switched on, the standing lights, low beam and daytime running lights will be switched on automatically depending on the light conditions.  

WARNING

Risk of accident when the dipped beam is switched off in poor visibility When the light switch is set to AUTO, the dipped beam may not be switched on automatically if there is fog, snow or other causes of poor visibility such as spray. In such cases, turn the light switch to . The automatic driving lights are only an aid. You are responsible for the vehicle lighting.

SWITCHING THE REAR FOG LIGHT ON/OFF

Requirements

• The light switch is in the \$D or AUTO position. Press button 0#. Please observe the country-specific laws on the use of rear fog lamps.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting

Operating the combination switch for the lights

 1 High beam Turn signal light, right Headlamp flashing Turn signal light, left ▶ Use the combination switch to select the desired function.

SWITCHING ON HIGH BEAM

Turn the light switch to the ☑ or AUTO position. Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ①. When high beam is activated, the indicator lamp for low beam 📄 will be deactivated and replaced by the indicator lamp for high beam 📄.

SWITCHING OFF HIGH BEAM

Push the combination switch in the direction of arrow ① or pull it in the direction of arrow ③.

HEADLAMP FLASHING

Pull the combination switch in the direction of arrow 3.

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT

To indicate briefly: push the combination switch briefly to the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ☐ or Ⓗ. The corresponding turn signal light will flash three times. To indicate permanently: push the combination switch beyond the point of resistance in the direction of arrow ② or ④.

VEHICLES WITH ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST:

- A turn signal indicator activated by the driver may continue to operate for the duration of the lane change. - If the driver indicated directly beforehand but a lane change was not immediately possible, the turn signal indicator may activate automatically.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting 

Activating/deactivating the hazard warning lights

 Vehicles without MBUX Hyperscreen  Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen Press button ①.

THE HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS WILL SWITCH ON AUTOMATICALLY IF:

• the airbag has been deployed. \- the vehicle brakes are applied heavily from a speed of more than 70 km/h to a standstill. When you pull away again, the hazard warning light system will switch off automatically at approximately 10 km/h. You can also switch off the hazard warning light system using the warning lamp button.

DIGITAL LIGHT adaptive functions

INTELLIGENT LIGHT SYSTEM FUNCTION

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: With this system, the headlamps will adapt to the driving and weather situation. It also provides extended functions for improved illumination of the road.

THE SYSTEM COMPRISES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Active headlamps ( → page 285) • Cornering light ( → page 285) • Motorway mode ( → page 285) • Enhanced fog light function ( → page 286) • Bad weather light ( → page 286) • City lighting ( → page 286) • Off-road light ( → page 286) • Topographical compensation ( → page 286) The system will be active only when it is dark.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting

ACTIVE HEADLAMPS FUNCTION

 • The headlamps follow the steering movements. • Relevant areas are better illuminated during a journey. The functions will be active when low beam is switched on. Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the course of the lane in which you are driving will also be evaluated and the active headlamps function will adjust the light in advance.

CORNERING LIGHT FUNCTION

 The cornering light improves the illumination of the carriageway over a wide angle in the turning direction, enabling better visibility on tight bends, for example. The cornering light will be activated only when low beam is switched on. 

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

- At speeds below 40 km/h when the turn signal light is switched on or the steering wheel is turned - At speeds between 40 km/h and 70 km/h and when the steering wheel is turned Roundabout and junction function: the cornering light will be activated on both sides based on an evaluation of the vehicle's current navigation position. It will remain active until after the vehicle has left the roundabout or junction.

MOTORWAY MODE FUNCTION

Motorway mode increases the range and brightness of the cone of light, enabling better visibility. 

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IF A MOTORWAY JOURNEY IS DETECTED BY MEANS OF:

• the vehicle's speed • the multifunction camera • the navigation system

THE FUNCTION WILL NOT BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• at speeds below 80 km/h  EQE - Owner's Manual > Light and sight Exterior lighting

ENHANCED FOG LIGHT FUNCTION

The enhanced fog light function reduces self-dazzling and improves the illumination of the edge of the carriageway. 

THE FUNCTION IS AUTOMATICALLY ACTIVATED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• At speeds below 70 km/h and when the rear fog light is switched on.

THE FUNCTION WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE DEACTIVATED UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

- When speeds greater than 100 km/h are reached. - When the rear fog light is switched off.

FUNCTION OF THE BAD WEATHER LIGHT

The bad weather light reduces reflections in rainy conditions by dimming individual areas of the headlamps. The driver and other road users are dazzled less as a result.

THE CITY LIGHTING FUNCTION

City lighting improves the illumination of roadsides in urban areas using a broad distribution of light.

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

\- At low speeds • In illuminated parts of urban areas

FUNCTION OF THE OFF-ROAD LIGHT

The off-road light improves illumination during off-road driving. The low beam is distributed symmetrically and across a wide angle, and brightness is increased slightly. This makes it easier to find your way when driving off road and to detect obstacles at an early stage. The active headlamps will be deactivated during this time so that steering movements do not change the illumination. The function will be active when the low beam is switched on if you are not driving at a speed greater than 50 km/h and the (Offroad) drive program has been selected.

FUNCTION OF THE TOPOGRAPHICAL COMPENSATION

Based on available map data, the lighting system responds pre-emptively to different road heights. This means that the headlamp range remains virtually constant when you are driving on uphill or downhill gradients. ① Only vehicles with a multimedia system with navigation have this function.

ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS OF DIGITAL LIGHT

DIGITAL LIGHT visually expands on the driver assistance systems by projecting the assistant displays in front of the vehicle while it is in motion. DIGITAL LIGHT can therefore help the driver in critical situations. The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. The assistance functions of DIGITAL LIGHT may be an on-demand feature ( → page 119).   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting

THE SYSTEM WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The light switch is in the AUTO position. • High beam is switched on. Depending on the country in which you are currently driving, certain functions may be disabled due to different legal requirements, even if they are enabled in the multimedia system. When you cross a border, the vehicle will automatically adapt to the applicable requirements. SPOTLIGHT  The spotlight function runs in the background and flashes the headlamps in four short bursts at persons detected within the lane markings. You will also be made aware of the position of the person by a projected symbol.

THE FUNCTION WILL BE ACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:

• You are driving outside illuminated areas. • The system detects a lane marking. WARNINGS 

IF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST DETECTS A CORRESPONDING SITUATION, A TRI- ANGLE WILL BE PROJECTED ONTO THE ROAD IN THE FOLLOWING CASES AT SPEEDS OF AT LEAST 30 KM/H:

- You are driving in the opposite direction to the permissible direction of travel, e.g. on a motorway slip road. • You are driving towards a stop sign without reducing your speed. • You are driving towards a red traffic light without reducing your speed. Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist ( → page 436). NOTES   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting

IF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST DETECTS A ROADWORKS ZONE, THE SYSTEM WILL PROVIDE SUPPORT AS FOLLOWS:

- A corresponding symbol will be projected onto the road when you enter a roadworks zone. - When you drive through a roadworks zone, guide lines that roughly match the width of the vehicle will be projected onto the road. The guide lines will be switched off temporarily on tight bends.  Observe the system limitations of Traffic Sign Assist ( → page 436). COLLISION WARNING  If you fall below the safe distance at speeds of at least 30 km/h, a collision warning symbol will be projected onto the road. Observe the system limitations of Active Brake Assist ( → page 427). LANE CHANGE WARNING  During assisted lane changes at speeds of at least 30 km/h, the course of the lane change as displayed will be brighter. This enables you to identify possible dangers in the new lane at an early stage. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Change Assist ( → page 425). LANE KEEPING AND BLIND SPOT WARNING 

AT SPEEDS OF AT LEAST 30 KM/H, A TRIANGLE THAT INDICATES A LANE CORRECTION AND ITS DIRECTION WILL BE PROJECTED ONTO THE ROAD IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• You leave the lane unintentionally. Observe the system limitations of Active Lane Keeping Assist ( → page 444). - You switch on the turn signal light while an object or obstacle is in your blind spot.  Observe the system limitations of Active Blind Spot Assist ( → page 441).

SWITCHING THE INTELLIGENT LIGHT SYSTEM ON/OFF

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system:  ▶ Activate or deactivate Dynamic low beam.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ENHANCED ASSISTANCE FUNCTIONS

① The availability of the functions is dependent on the country. ① This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). Select Supporting projections. Activate or deactivate the desired projections. Switch Projection for greeting/farewell on or off. If the locator lighting or the exterior switch-off delay time is activated, a high-resolution greeting or farewell scene will be played back for a short period of time when the vehicle is opened or switched off. You can choose between the Digital Rain and Particle Flow sequences. ① More information on locator lighting ( → page 293) More information on the exterior switch-off delay time ( → page 293)

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST FUNCTION


WARNING

Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians • road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists • road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow • if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions.   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting ① Adaptive Highbeam Assist is available on demand ( → page 119). 

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT:

Low beam High beam

AT SPEEDS GREATER THAN 30 KM/H:

\- If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically.

THE HIGH BEAM WILL SWITCH OFF AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• At speeds below 25 km/h • If other road users are detected • If street lighting is sufficient  The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST ON/OFF

WARNING

Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST DOES NOT REACT TO:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians • road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists • road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

SWITCHING ON

Turn the light switch to the AUTO position. Switch on high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist is activated, the indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display.   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting

SWITCHING OFF

▶ Switch off high beam using the combination switch.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS FUNCTION


WARNING

Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians • road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists • road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users.  Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time. Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions.

DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• In poor visibility, e.g. fog, heavy rain or snow • if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is only an aid. You are responsible for adjusting the vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, visibility and traffic conditions. 

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS AUTOMATICALLY SWITCHES BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING TYPES OF LIGHT:

Low beam - Partial high beam High beam • ULTRA RANGE Highbeam ULTRA RANGE Highbeam increases the brightness of the cone of light to the legally permitted maximum. Partial high beam does not include other road users in the high beam area. It does not dazzle them but enables full high-beam illumination for the driver apart from the excluded vehicles. Highly reflective signs are also illuminated with reduced brightness.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting

AT SPEEDS BELOW 25 KM/H OR WHEN THERE IS SUFFICIENT STREET LIGHTING:

• Partial high beam and high beam will be switched off automatically.

AT SPEEDS GREATER THAN 30 KM/H:

- If no other road users are detected, high beam will switch on automatically. - If other road users are detected, partial high beam will switch on automatically.

AT SPEEDS BELOW 40 KM/H:

• The ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will switch off automatically.

AT SPEEDS ABOVE 50 KM/H:

- If no other road users are detected, the road is straight and it is not raining heavily, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched on automatically. - If other road users are detected, the ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will automatically switch off and the partial high beam will switch on. - If highly reflective signs are detected, ULTRA RANGE Highbeam will be switched off automatically. The system's optical sensor is located behind the windscreen near the overhead control panel.

SWITCHING ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS ON/OFF

WARNING

Risk of accident despite Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus

ADAPTIVE HIGHBEAM ASSIST PLUS DOES NOT REACT TO:

• road users without lights, e.g. pedestrians • road users with poor lighting, e.g. cyclists • road users whose lighting is obstructed, e.g. by a barrier On very rare occasions, Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus may fail to recognise other road users with their own lighting, or may recognise them too late. In these, or in similar situations, the automatic high beam will not be deactivated or will be activated despite the presence of other road users. Always observe the road and traffic conditions carefully and switch off the high beam in good time.

SWITCHING ON

Turn the light switch to the AUTO position. Switch on high beam using the combination switch. If Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is activated, the ▶ indicator lamp will light up on the driver's display. When partial high beam or high beam is active, the corresponding blue indicator lamp will also light up.

SWITCHING OFF

Switch off high beam using the combination switch.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Exterior lighting 

Setting low beam

Multimedia system: Settings Lights DIGITAL LIGHT Low beam Select Right-side traffic, Left-side traffic or Automatic.

Setting the exterior lighting switch-off delay time

Multimedia system: Settings Lights Interior/exterior lighting Exterior lighting delayed switch off Set the switch-off delay time. When the vehicle's engine is switched off, the exterior lighting will be activated for the set time.

Activating/deactivating the locator lighting

Multimedia system: Settings Lights Interior/exterior lighting Activate or deactivate Locator lighting. When the function is activated, the exterior lighting will light up for 40 seconds after the vehicle is unlocked or the driver's door is opened when the vehicle is parked and not locked. When you start the vehicle, the locator lighting will be deactivated and the automatic driving lights activated.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Interior lighting

Interior lighting

Adjusting the interior lighting

 Switches the front interior lighting on/off. Switches the rear interior lighting on/off. 3 Switches automatic interior lighting control on/off. To switch reading lamps on/off: touch respective reading lamp ④ or ⑤.

OPERATING UNIT IN THE REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

 ① 善 Rear reading lamp To switch on or off: press button ①.

Adjusting the ambient lighting

Multimedia system: 

SETTING THE COLOUR

Select Colour. Select Monochrome or Multi-colour. Set the desired colour or colour scheme.

ENERGY SHINE

\- The interactive Energy Shine colour world shows the different phases during the journey. Depending on the type of driving condition (speed, boost effect or recuperation), this will be shown in colour by the active ambient lighting.

ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS

Select Brightness. Adjust the brightness. Depending on the ambient light conditions, the ambient lighting will automatically switch between day and night modes. 

ACTIVATING THE BRIGHTNESS FOR ZONES

Select Brightness. Switch off Link zones. The Direct, Indirect and Accents zones can be set separately. The Light strip zone can also be set in vehicles with active ambient lighting.

ACTIVATING EFFECTS


WARNING

Risk of accident if ambient lighting and active ambient lighting effects are not switched on The warning support effects are fully active only if the respective driving or driving safety systems are switched on on the driving assistance menu.  Ensure that the respective driving or driving safety systems are switched on. ① Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391). Select Effects. ▶ Activate the desired effect. (i) Depending on the vehicle equipment, different effects are available.

OPERATING FEEDBACK EFFECTS

• Climate: If changes are made to the temperature settings in the vehicle, the colour of the ambient lighting will change briefly. • Voice assistant: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the voice assistant is visually animated. - Greeting: When you get into the vehicle, a special colour animation will play. - Charging sequence: The ambient lighting provides visual feedback on the different states of charge when the vehicle is connected to or disconnected from the charging station.

WARNING ASSISTANCE EFFECTS

- Warning when exiting: If an object is detected in the blind spot while you are getting out of the vehicle, the ambient lighting in the affected door will flash red. Further information on the exit warning (→ page 441). - Active Lane Keeping Assist: If there is a warning from Active Lane Keeping Assist, the active ambient lighting will flash red. Further information on Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 444). - Active Brake Assist: If there is an Active Brake Assist warning, the active ambient lighting in the centre of the cockpit will flash bright red. Further information on the Active Brake Assist (→ page 427). - Active Blind Spot Assist: In vehicles with active ambient lighting, the ambient lighting on the affected side will flash red if there is a warning from Active Blind Spot Assist.   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Interior lighting Further information on Active Blind Spot Assist ( → page 441). \- Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: The information from the parking sensors during parking manoeuvres is displayed in colour. Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC: (→ page 463)

MULTI-COLOUR ANIMATION

• The chosen colour combination will change at predefined intervals. ① In vehicles with active ambient lighting, an animation will be played. The desired operating feedback and warning assistance can be activated or deactivated via the symbol. Depending on the equipment, different operating feedback and warning assistance effects are available. If the brightness is set to a low level, warning animations will be displayed at a higher basic brightness.

Switching the interior lighting switch-off delay time on/off

Multimedia system: Settings Lights Interior/exterior lighting Interior lighting delayed switch off Activate or deactivate Interior lighting delayed switch off. If this function is active, the interior lighting will be switched on for a short time after the end of the journey.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system 

Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system

Switching the windscreen wipers on/off  1 0 Windscreen wipers off 2 ⋯ Automatic wiping, normal 3 .... Automatic wiping, frequent 4 — Continuous wiping, slow 5 = Continuous wiping, fast Turn the combination switch to the corresponding position 1 - 5. Single wipe/washing: push the button on the combination switch in the direction of arrow ①. Single wipe Wipes with washer fluid ① Observe the notes on washing the vehicle in a car wash ( → page 52). Switching the rear window wiper on/off  Single wipe/washing Intermittent wiping Single wipe: press button ① as far as the point of resistance. Wiping with washer fluid: press button ① beyond the point of resistance.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Switching intermittent wiping on/off: press button. The symbol will appear on the driver's display when the rear window wiper is switched on.

Replacing the windscreen wiper blades


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

MOVING THE WIPER ARMS INTO THE REPLACEMENT POSITION

Switch the vehicle on and then off again immediately. Within around 15 seconds, press and hold the ☑ button on the combination switch for approximately three seconds (→ page 297). The wiper arms will move into the replacement position.

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADES

Fold the wiper arms away from the windscreen.  Hold the wiper arm with one hand. With the other hand, turn the wiper blade away from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow ① as far as it will go. Press release button 2. Remove the wiper blade from the wiper arm in the direction of arrow 3 FITTING THE WIPER BLADES    EQE - Owner's Manual > Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system  Push the new wiper blade into the wiper arm in the direction of arrow until release knob engages. Make sure that the wiper blade is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arms back onto the windscreen. Switch on the vehicle. Press the 📋 button on the combination switch. The wiper arms will return to their original positions. Switch off the vehicle. Check the condition of the wiper blades regularly and replace them in the event of visible damage or ongoing smearing.

MAINTENANCE DISPLAY

There is a maintenance display at the tip of the newly mounted wiper blade.  Remove protective film ① from the maintenance display. When the colour of the maintenance display changes from black to yellow, the wiper blades should be replaced.

Replacing the rear window wiper blade


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped if the windscreen wipers are switched on while wiper blades are being replaced If the windscreen wipers begin to move while you are changing the wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and vehicle before changing the wiper blades.

REMOVING THE WIPER BLADE

 Switch off the vehicle. Fold wiper arm ② away from the rear window until it engages in the replacement position.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Light and sight Windscreen wipers and windscreen washer system Unclip wiper blade ① from wiper arm ② and remove it in the direction of arrow ③. FITTING THE WIPER BLADE  Position wiper blade ① with both lugs ③ on holder ② on the wiper arm. Push wiper blade ① in the direction of arrow ④ until it engages in holder ②. Make sure that wiper blade Ⓞ is seated correctly. Fold the wiper arm from the replacement position back onto the rear window.   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Mirrors

< Mirrors

Operating the outside mirrors


WARNING

Risk of accident due to adjusting the vehicle settings while the vehicle is in motion

YOU COULD LOSE CONTROL OF THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IN PARTICULAR:

• if you adjust the driver's seat, the head restraint, the steering wheel or the mirror while the vehicle is in motion • if you fasten your seat belt while the vehicle is in motion Before starting the vehicle: in particular, adjust the driver's seat, head restraint, steering wheel and mirror, and fasten your seat belt.  

WARNING

Risk of accident due to misjudgement of distance when using the outside mirror The outside mirrors reflect objects on a smaller scale. The objects in view are in fact closer than they appear. Therefore, always look over your shoulder in order to ensure that you are aware of the actual distance between you and the road users driving behind you.

ADJUSTING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS

 Use button ② or ④ to select the desired mirror. Use button Ⓤ to adjust the position of the selected mirror.   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Mirrors

FOLDING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS IN/OUT (VEHICLES WITH ELECTRICALLY FOLDING OUTSIDE MIRRORS)

Briefly press button 3. If the battery has been disconnected or has discharged, the outside mirrors must be moved briefly using button. Only then will the automatic mirror folding function work properly.

ENGAGING THE OUTSIDE MIRRORS

If an outside mirror has been forcibly disengaged, proceed as follows. Vehicles with electrically folding outside mirrors: press and hold button ③. You will hear a click and the mirror will audibly engage. The outside mirror will now be set to the correct position.

Automatic anti-dazzle mirrors function

WARNING

Risk of acid burns and poisoning due to the anti-dazzle mirror electrolyte Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an automatic anti-dazzle mirror breaks. The electrolyte is hazardous to health and causes irritation. It must not come into contact with your skin, eyes, respiratory organs or clothing or be swallowed. If you come into contact with electrolyte, observe the following: - Immediately rinse the electrolyte from your skin with water and seek medical attention. - If electrolyte comes into contact with your eyes, immediately rinse them thoroughly with clean water and seek medical attention. - If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. - Immediately change out of clothing which has been contaminated with electrolyte. • If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. The inside rearview mirror and the outside mirror on the driver's side will automatically go into anti-dazzle mode if light from a headlamp hits the sensor on the inside rearview mirror. EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Mirrors

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM WILL NOT GO INTO ANTI-DAZZLE MODE IF:

• The vehicle is switched off. • Reverse gear is engaged. • The interior lighting is switched on.

Front-passenger outside mirror parking position function

The parking position makes parking easier.

THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL SWIVEL DOWNWARDS IN THE DIRECTION OF THE REAR WHEEL ON THE FRONT PASSENGER'S SIDE WHEN:

• the parking position is stored ( → page 303). • the front-passenger mirror is selected. • reverse gear is engaged.

THE FRONT-PASSENGER OUTSIDE MIRROR WILL MOVE BACK TO ITS ORIGINAL POSITION WHEN:

• you shift the transmission to another transmission position. • you are travelling at a speed greater than 15 km/h. - you press the button for the outside mirror on the driver's side.

Storing the parking position of the front-passenger outside mirror using reverse gear

STORING  Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ②. Engage reverse gear. Move the front-passenger outside mirror into the desired parking position using button ①.  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Mirrors  CALLING UP  1 Adjusts the outside mirrors. 2 Selects the front-passenger outside mirror. Select the front-passenger outside mirror using button ②. Engage reverse gear. The front-passenger outside mirror will move into the stored parking position.

Activating/deactivating the automatic mirror folding function

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Open/close ▶ Activate or deactivate Automatic mirror fold-in.   EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen 

Area permeable to radio waves on the windscreen

 Radio-controlled equipment such as toll systems can be mounted only on areas ① of the windscreen that are permeable to radio waves. Areas permeable to radio waves ① are best visible from outside the vehicle when the windscreen is illuminated with an external light source.

NOTE THIS POSITION FOR VEHICLES WITH:

• Windscreen heater • Infra-red reflective windscreen  EQE - Owner's Manual Light and sight Infrared-reflective windscreen function

Infrared-reflective windscreen function

The infrared-reflective windscreen is coated and reduces the build-up of heat in the vehicle interior. The coating shields the vehicle interior from radio waves.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Climate control 

< Climate control

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Overview of climate control systems 308 Operating the climate control system 311 EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Overview of climate control systems 

Overview of climate control systems

Notes on climate control

An interior filter in combination with the prefilter in the engine compartment must always be used so that the air conditioning system, pollution level monitoring and the air filtration work correctly. Use filters recommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. Always have maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the THERMATIC climate bar

The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated.  Front climate bar on the central display (example) Increases the temperature ② Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of _i switching climate control on/off ( → page 311) and SYNC synchronisation function ( → page 316) 9 Demists the windscreen ( → page 312) 4 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 316) or Fine particle prefilter status display (→ page 312) 5 Switches the rear window heater on/off 6 ▼ Reduces the temperature 7 Depending on vehicle equipment and settings: temperature display, display for the demist function, airflow, pre-entry climate control or climate mode ☐ A/C | Activates/deactivates the A/C function (→ page 313) 9 MENU Calls up the air conditioning menu (→ page 312) 10 |AUTO| Sets climate control to automatic mode (→ page 313) 10 Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (→ page 311) ☒ Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(→ page 311) The climate bar is visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off ( → page 311). The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment. EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Overview of climate control systems

Overview of the THERMOTRONIC climate bar

The indicator lamps indicate that the corresponding functions are activated.  Front climate bar on the central display (example) 1 ▲ Increases the temperature Upper display area of the climate bar with the examples of ₁ switching off climate control ( → page 311), /C switching the A/C function on/off ( → page 313) and SYNC synchronisation function ( → page 316) 3 Demists the windscreen 4 Switches air-recirculation mode on/off (→ page 316) or Fine particle prefilter status display (→ page 312) 5 Switches the rear window heater on/off Depending on vehicle equipment and settings: temperature display, display for pre-entry climate control or climate mode 7 Increases the airflow or switches on climate control (→ page 311) Reduces the temperature 9 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode, right (→ page 313) 10 MENU Calls up the air conditioning menu (→ page 312) 11 AUTO Sets climate control to automatic mode, left (→ page 313) 12 □ Reduces the airflow or switches off climate control(→ page 311) The climate bar will remain visible even when the vehicle is parked or the air conditioning is switched off ( → page 311). The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment.

Overview of the rear operating unit

The rear operating unit is available only for vehicles with the THERMOTRONIC air conditioning control panel.  Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents in the rear passenger compartment, left Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, left Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, left, or switches climate control on/off ( → page 311)   EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Overview of climate control systems Switches climate control on/off ( → page 311) Sets the airflow in the rear passenger compartment, right, or switches climate control on/off ( → page 311) 6 Sets the temperature in the rear passenger compartment, right Sets the air distribution to the centre air vents in the rear passenger compartment, right Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, right ( → page 313) Sets the air distribution to the right rear footwell vents 10 Synchronisation is activated ( → page 316) Sets the air distribution to the rear left footwell vents Sets rear climate control to automatic mode, left (→ page 313) The settings for the second row of seats can be configured via the rear operating unit or the multimedia system ( → page 315) depending on the vehicle's equipment.   EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system 

Operating the climate control system

Switching climate control on/off

SWITCHING ON CLIMATE CONTROL


SWITCHING OFF CLIMATE CONTROL

  If climate control is switched off, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch climate control off only briefly. If climate control is switched off via ₁ , OFF will be shown on the climate bar. When the range maximisation function is activated, certain climate control functions are restricted and the window and mirror heaters are switched off. This can lead to windows misting up and reduced visibility due to weather conditions. To quickly reac- tivate the climate control functions, press the 📄️ button on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching climate control on/off via the rear operating unit

SWITCHING ON    EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system Press buttons 2, 6, 8 or 12.

SWITCHING OFF

Press the ④ button. or Set the airflow to level 0 using buttons ③ and ⑤. i rear climate control is switched off via button Ⓓ, OFF will be shown on the display.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the climate bar

Requirements

• THERMATIC automatic climate control is fitted. The A/C function heats, cools and dehumidifies the vehicle's interior air. Press A/C on the climate bar on the central display. Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

Calling up the air conditioning menu using the climate bar

The air conditioning menu can be called up via the climate bar. The climate bar is always shown on the lower edge of the central display. Select the Climate menu entry in the air conditioning bar. The First row of seats menu is opened.

JUMPING DIRECTLY TO THE AIR QUALITY MENU

Select the 2√33×10 fine particle prefilter status display in the air conditioning bar. The Air quality menu is opened. An animation of the automatic air cleaning taking place is shown. The fine particle prefilter status display is on the home screen next to the temperature display on the right and it informs you of the current particulate levels inside and outside of the vehicle. The measurement values are shown with the µg / m³ units (microgrammes per cubic metre).

Defrosting the windscreen via the climate bar

SWITCHING ON

Press ☐ on the climate bar on the central display.

SWITCHING OFF

Press 📄, AUTO or 🔒 on the climate bar on the central display or set the airflow to 0.   EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system  When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated.

Activating/deactivating the A/C function via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: Climate menu First row of seats Depending on the external conditions, support for improved cooling and dehumidification of the interior air will be provided when the A/C function is activated. If it is not possible to operate the A/C function on the climate bar on the central display, switch the function on or off in the climate menu of the central display. Select A/C (A/C). Switch off the A/C function only briefly; otherwise, the windows may mist up more quickly. Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when cooling mode is active. This is not indicative of a fault.

Setting climate control to automatic mode via the climate bar

In automatic mode, the set vehicle interior temperature is controlled automatically and maintained at a constant level by the air supply. Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display. ① You can increase or reduce the airflow by pressing \$ on the climate bar on the central display. To switch to manual operation: switch off automatic mode or adjust an aspect of air distribution, e.g.

Setting climate control to automatic mode via the rear operating unit

In automatic mode, the temperature is automatically regulated by the temperature of the dispensed air and the airflow.  Press the ⑧ or ⑫ button. 

Selecting climate modes via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: Climate menu First row of seats It is possible to switch between different climate modes on the Climate menu. If ECO or ECO+ mode is activated, certain climate control functions will be restricted to conserve energy and extend the vehicle's range.

THE FOLLOWING MODES ARE AVAILABLE ON THE CLIMATE MENU:

• Comfort: maximum climate comfort ECO: while heating and cooling output are limited, it remains possible to operate climate control without restriction. If you activate [icon], the system will automatically switch to Comfort mode. - ECO+: mode using only the blower and waste heat, if applicable. The temperature can no longer be adjusted. If you activate 📄, the system will automatically switch to Comfort mode. The windows may mist up more when ECO or ECO+ mode is activated. ECO+ climate mode can also be switched on and off via the range maximisation button in the EQ menu under Range. When the range maximisation function is deactivated, the system will automatically switch to the last selected climate mode. Pressing the temperature or blower display on the climate bar of the central display allows direct access to the air conditioning menu when ECO or ECO+ mode is active. The climate mode can be changed by pressing the ECO button. The vehicle's climate control automatically detects seat occupancy. When the system switches to ECO or ECO+ mode, the climate control functions of the unoccupied seats are further restricted. If you activate [icon], the system will automatically switch to Comfort mode. If the vehicle is parked in ECO or ECO+ mode for a short period, the previously selected mode will still be activated the next time the vehicle is started. If the vehicle is parked in ECO or ECO+ mode for a longer period of time, Comfort mode is automatically activated the next time the vehicle is started. Tap on ECO. Select Comfort, ECO or ECO+. If an ECO mode is selected via the air conditioning menu, two LEDs will appear on the temperature display on the climate bar. When ECO mode is switched on, one LED will light up green on the temperature display. When ECO+ mode is switched on, both LEDs will light up green and the ECO+ display will appear.

Overview of the air distribution settings

THE SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY INDICATE THE VENTS THROUGH WHICH THE AIRFLOW IS BEING DIRECTED:

Demister vents  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system Centre air vents Footwell vents

Setting air distribution using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: Climate menu Select First row of seats or Second row of seats. To set the air distribution: select 📂, 🙏 or 🕒. Set the airflow. When the air conditioning system is switched on, at least one zone is always active. However, several air distribution options can be selected at the same time, for example to set the climate control for the interior and the footwells simultaneously. In doing so, the [icon] climate control for the windscreen can only be selected for the first seat row. When automatic mode is active, the buttons for setting the air distribution are automatically deactivated. When the air conditioning system is switched off, the buttons remain operable and the last setting is saved.

Setting rear climate control using the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: Climate menu

SETTING THE TEMPERATURE

▶ Select Second row of seats. Set the temperature.

SETTING THE AIRFLOW

Select Second row of seats. Set the air flow with ▲ or ▼.

CONTROLLING THE REAR CLIMATE CONTROL AUTOMATICALLY

Select AUTO. When the defrost function is activated, some functions (e.g. the temperature setting) will automatically be deactivated. To deactivate the defrost function, press either _B^TM , or _g set the air flow to level 0 ( → page 312).  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system

Switching the synchronisation function on/off via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: Climate menu First row of seats The synchronisation function controls the climate control centrally. The driver's settings for temperature, airflow and air distribution are automatically adopted for each climate zone. Select SYNC (SYNC).

Demisting the windows

WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE INSIDE

Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display. If the windows remain misted up: press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display.

WINDOWS MISTED UP ON THE OUTSIDE

Switch on the windscreen wipers. Press AUTO on the climate bar on the central display.

Switching air-recirculation mode on/off via the climate bar

Requirements:

• No fine particle prefilter is installed in the vehicle. Press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while. If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly.

Switching the air-recirculation mode on/off via the air conditioning menu

Requirements:

• A fine particle prefilter is installed in the vehicle. Multimedia system: Climate menu Air quality Press 📄 in the upper display area of the climate bar. The interior air will be recirculated. Air-recirculation mode will automatically switch to fresh air mode after a while. If air-recirculation mode is switched on, the windows may mist up more quickly. Switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly. ① By selecting the fine particle status display □ on the climate bar, you can jump directly to the air quality menu.  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system

Activating or deactivating ionisation via the air conditioning menu

Multimedia system: Climate menu Air quality When ionisation is activated, the indoor air is enriched with negatively charged oxygen ions. These can promote the well-being of the occupants. Select Ionisation. The function can only be performed if the AUTO mode is activated or the air distribution is set to the side air vent. The function is restricted if the side air vent on the driver's side is closed.

Fragrance system

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

Requirements

• Automatic climate control is activated. • The glove compartment will close. A flacon is inserted. Multimedia system: Climate menu Air quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove box.  ▶ Navigate down until the climate control bar is active. Select Air freshener. Activate or deactivate scenting.

SETTING THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

Requirements

A flacon is inserted. • The glove compartment will close. • Climate control is activated. Multimedia system: Climate menu Air quality The fragrance system distributes a pleasant fragrance throughout the vehicle interior from a flacon located in the glove compartment. Select Air freshener. Keep pressing until the desired intensity is reached.  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system 

INSERTING OR REMOVING THE FLACON OF THE FRAGRANCE SYSTEM


WARNING

Risk of injury from liquid perfume If children open the flacon, they could drink the liquid perfume or it could come into contact with their eyes. Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle. Consult a doctor immediately if liquid perfume has been drunk. If liquid perfume comes into contact with your eyes or skin, rinse your eyes with clean water. If symptoms continue, consult a doctor. 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to improper disposal of full flacons  Full flacons must not be disposed of with household waste.   Full flacons must be taken to a harmful substance collection point.   Cap  Flacon To insert: slide the flacon into the holder as far as it will go. To remove: after opening the glove box, wait for approximately seven seconds and pull out the flacon. If you do not use genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfumes, observe the manufacturers' safety notices on the perfume packaging. Dispose of the genuine Mercedes-Benz interior perfume flacon when it is empty and do not refill it.

REFILLABLE FLACON

Unscrew the cap of the empty flacon. ▶ Fill the flacon with a maximum of 15 ml. Screw the cap back onto the flacon. Always refill the empty refillable flacon with the same perfume. Observe the separate information sheet with the flacon.  

Information on the windscreen heater


WARNING

Risk of burns from touching the windscreen when the windscreen heater is switched on The windscreen can become very hot when the windscreen heater is switched on. The health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Do not touch the windscreen while the windscreen heater is switched on. ▶ Allow the windscreen to cool down before touching it. The windscreen heater will be enabled automatically if [icon MAX] is activated on the climate bar on the central display. After the vehicle is started, the windscreen heater will be switched on automatically as required. If the on-board electrical system voltage is low, the function of the windscreen heater may be impaired.

Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked

FUNCTION OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS UNLOCKED

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: The seats can be briefly pre-warmed or pre-cooled before you get into the vehicle.

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED DURING PRE-COOLING:

• Automatic climate control Blower - Seat ventilation

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED AS NEEDED DURING PRE-WARMING:

• Automatic climate control Blower - Seat heating • Steering wheel heater - Mirror heater - Rear window heater • Windscreen heater • Wiper park position heater  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE OPERATION:

Fragrancing - Ionisation

SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS UNLOCKED IN THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

Multimedia system: Climate menu ▶ Pre-entry climate ctrl ▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

SELECTING SEATS

▶ Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right. The seat-specific functions of pre-entry climate control, such as seat heating, will be performed for the selected seats. If pre-entry climate control is enabled, an LED on the climate bar of the central display will light up blue for a cooled vehicle and red for a heated vehicle.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL WHEN THE VEHICLE IS UNLOCKED

Requirements

• The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently. • The function has been activated via the multimedia system. To switch on: unlock the vehicle. The climate control functions are activated for up to five minutes for pre-heating and pre-cooling. Pre-entry climate control via unlocking cannot be activated more than three times in succession when the vehicle is switched off.

To switch off: press 📄 on the climate bar on the central display. THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN STARTED:

- Seat heating - Seat ventilation

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE OPERATION:

- Fragrancing - Ionisation

Pre-entry climate control for departure time

PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME FUNCTION

⚠ WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. ▶ Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system 

WARNING

Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: The air inside the vehicle can be heated, ventilated or cooled to the set temperature when the vehicle is parked. When the vehicle is connected to power supply equipment, priority will be given to charging the high-voltage battery to a specified minimum charge.

THE RUNNING TIME OF PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL MAY BE REDUCED IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES:

• The vehicle is not connected to power supply equipment. • The high-voltage battery is not fully charged. With active pre-entry climate control, the charge level of the high-voltage battery may be reduced, even if the charging cable connector is connected. If present, seat ventilation will be activated in cooling and ventilation modes.

IF PRESENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL BE ACTIVATED IN HEATING MODE:

- Seat heating • Steering wheel heater - Mirror heater • Rear window heater • Windscreen heater • Wiper park position heater When the set temperature is changed, the climate control mode will automatically be updated. It will be switched from heating mode to ventilation or cooling mode, from cooling mode to ventilation or heating mode or from ventilation mode to heating or cooling mode.

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE OPERATION:

- Fragrancing - Ionisation   EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system

SETTING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPARTURE TIME VIA THE CLIMATE BAR

Multimedia system: Climate menu ▶ Pre-entry climate ctrl

SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME

The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. Additional information on the charging settings ( → page 378). Select Edit departure time Select a departure time or set a new departure time. If the range maximisation function is activated, an approximate time for reaching the desired state of charge will be determined automatically during a charging stop. This is used as an approximate departure time for pre-entry climate control and is set automatically. Departure times previously set cannot be edited when the function is switched on. The automatically determined departure time can be activated or deactivated via the air conditioning menu.

SETTING THE REPEAT DAYS

Select Edit departure time Set the desired departure time and select the corresponding weekdays on which this departure time is to apply. Press OK to confirm.

SELECTING SEATS

▶ Select Driver, Passenger, Rear left or Rear right. Pre-entry climate control will take place for the selected seats. If a departure time is set, a yellow LED will appear on the climate bar of the central display. In addition, an LED on the climate bar will indicate when pre-entry climate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being cooled and red when it is being heated.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL FOR DEPAR-TURE TIME

WARNING

Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle.

WARNING

Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

Requirements

• The high-voltage battery is charged sufficiently. • The function has been activated via the multimedia system. To activate: set the departure time ( → page 322). Pre-entry climate control for departure time will switch on a maximum of 55 minutes before the selected departure time. It will remain active for another five minutes if departure is delayed. To deactivate the pre-entry climate control for departure time early: press on the climate bar on the central display or switch off the preselection of the time in the climate menu. DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL REMAIN ACTIVE ONCE THE VEHICLE HAS BEEN STARTED: - Seat heating - Seat ventilation DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS WILL ALSO BE ADJUSTED DURING PRE-ENTRY CLIMATE CONTROL IF THEY HAVE ALREADY BEEN SWITCHED ON DURING REGULAR VEHICLE OPERATION: - Fragrancing Ionisation

Operating immediate pre-entry climate control via the climate bar

WARNING Risk of fatal injury due to exposure to extreme heat or cold in the vehicle If persons, particularly children, are subjected to prolonged exposure to intense heat or cold, there is a risk of severe injury or even death. Never leave persons, particularly children, unattended in the vehicle. WARNING Risk of burns due to repeatedly switching on the seat heating Repeatedly switching on the seat heating can cause the seat cushion and seat backrest padding to become very hot. In particular, the health of persons with limited temperature sensitivity or a limited ability to react to high temperatures may be affected or they may even suffer burn-like injuries. Do not repeatedly switch on the seat heating. To protect against overheating, the seat heating may be temporarily deactivated after it has been switched on repeatedly.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched off.  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system Air conditioning of the vehicle interior can continue for up to 50 minutes, e.g. if the journey is interrupted. Press the button on the climate bar on the central display. Set the temperature using the ▲ and ▼ arrows on the climate bar on the central display. An LED on the climate bar on the central display indicates when pre-entry climate control is activated. It will light up blue when the vehicle is being cooled and red when it is being heated.

Air vents

ADJUSTING THE FRONT AIR VENTS


WARNING

Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.

TO GUARANTEE THE FLOW OF FRESH AIR THROUGH THE AIR VENTS INTO THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, NOTE THE FOLLOWING:

• Always keep the vents and ventilation grilles in the vehicle interior clear. - Keep the air inlet grilles free of residue build-up (→ page 715).  To open or close the side air vents: hold the outer ring of side air vent ① and turn it to the left or right as far as it will go. To open or close the centre air vents: move controller ② inwards or outwards as far as it will go. To adjust the airflow direction of the side air vents: hold the centre of side air vent and move it up or down or to the left or right. To adjust the airflow direction of the centre air vents: hold the controller of centre air vent and move it up or down or to the left or right.

ADJUSTING THE REAR AIR VENTS


WARNING

Risk of burns or frostbite due to being too close to the air vents Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air vents. Make sure that all vehicle occupants always maintain a sufficient distance from the air vents. If necessary, direct the airflow to another area of the vehicle interior.  EQE - Owner's Manual Climate control Operating the climate control system  To open or close the rear air vents: hold the controller of rear air vent ① and move it inwards or outwards as far as it will go. To set the airflow direction of the rear air vents: hold controller and move it up or down or to the left or right.   Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking 

< Driving and parking

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Driving 327 > Trailer hitch 484 > DYNAMIC SELECT 347 Bicycle rack function 491 Transmission 353 > Vehicle towing instructions 494 > Function of 4MATIC 357 Charging the high-voltage battery 358 Parking 380 Driving and driving safety systems 391 EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving

< Driving

Notes on electric mode


WARNING

Risk of chemical burns and poisoning from damaged high-voltage battery If the housing of the high-voltage battery has been damaged, electrolyte and gases may leak out. ▶ Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Immediately rinse electrolyte splashes off with water and seek medical attention straight away. 

DANGER

Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite. Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a sufficient distance. ▶ Call the fire service.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON VEHICLE NOISE EMISSIONS AND THE ACOUSTIC VEHICLE ALERTING SYSTEM:

- The vehicle is equipped with an all-electric drive system and produces considerably lower vehicle noise emissions than a vehicle with a combustion engine. For this reason the vehicle is equipped with a sound generator, which serves as an acoustic vehicle alerting system (AVAS). This safety device is prescribed by law. The external noise of the sound generator is perceptible in the vehicle interior at low speeds and does not represent a malfunction. - The sound generator generates a stationary noise and speed-dependent vehicle noise emissions at a speed of up to around 30 km/h when the vehicle is driving both forwards and in reverse. This helps other road users, particularly pedestrians and cyclists, to hear your vehicle better. - When you drive at speeds above 20 km/h the acoustic vehicle alerting system will gradually switch off. - Despite the sound generator, the vehicle still may not be heard by other road users. Adapt your driving style accordingly. • The sound generator will be off when the vehicle is stationary.

Manually disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system


DANGER

Risk of death and fire due to modified and/or damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system The vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. If you modify component parts in the vehicle's high-voltage on-board electrical system or touch damaged component parts, you may be electrocuted. In addition, modified and/or damaged components may cause a fire. In the event of an accident or impact to the vehicle underbody, components of the high-voltage electrical system may be damaged although the damage is not visible. Never make any modifications to the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Do not switch on or use the vehicle if its high-voltage on-board electrical system components have been modified or damaged. ▶ Never touch damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. After an accident, do not touch any components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. After an accident, have the vehicle transported away. Have the components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop and replaced if necessary.

Requirements

ONLY DISCONNECT THE HIGH-VOLTAGE ON-BOARD ELECTRICAL SYSTEM MANUALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- The restraint system warning lamp lights up in the driver's display, e.g. after an accident. - The vehicle is badly damaged, e.g. after an accident, and the restraint system components have not been triggered.

OPERATING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE DISCONNECT DEVICE

Only disconnect the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually in the above-mentioned situations. Switch off the vehicle. Switch the transmission to position [P]. Apply the electric parking brake. ▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving   Remove flap ① of the fuse box in the front passenger footwell.  Press release tab ③ on high-voltage disconnect device ② in the direction of the arrow and pull it out. Pull connector ④ in the direction of the arrow until it engages. The high-voltage on-board electrical system is switched off. All work on the drive system (including after disconnecting the high-voltage on-board electrical system manually) may only be carried out in a qualified specialist workshop.

Switching on the power supply or the vehicle

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised. • Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: a Digital Vehicle Key with drive authorisation is detected. • The brake pedal is not depressed.  Vehicles with central display  Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen  To switch on the power supply: press button ① once. You can, for example, switch on the windscreen wipers.

THE POWER SUPPLY WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:

• You open the driver's door. • You press button ① twice more. To switch on the vehicle: press button ① twice. Indicator and warning lamps will light up on the driver's display.

THE VEHICLE WILL BE SWITCHED OFF AGAIN IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET:

- You do not start the vehicle within 15 minutes and the transmission is in position P or the electric parking brake is applied. • You press button ① once. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving 

Starting the vehicle

STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE START/STOP BUTTON


WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

Requirements

• The key is in the vehicle and is recognised. \- Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: a Digital Vehicle Key with drive authorisation is detected.  Vehicles with central display  Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen Shift the transmission to position P or N. Depress the brake pedal and press button ① once. • The vehicle will be started.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving \- The READY display appears on the driver's display: the vehicle is ready to drive. If the vehicle does not start: switch off non-essential consumer equipment and press button once. If the vehicle still does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display: start the vehicle with the key in the marked space (emergency operation mode) (→ page 334). You can switch off the vehicle while driving. To do this, press and hold button ① for about three seconds or press button ② three times within three seconds. The transmission will shift to neutral N automatically. When you press button ③ again, the vehicle will start again and you can engage drive position ④ again. Be sure to observe the safety notes concerning this under "Driving tips" (→ page 335). Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IN THE MARKED SPACE (EMERGENCY OPERATION MODE)

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.

Requirements

\- The vehicle is equipped with the "Digital Vehicle Key" pre-installation.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving • A suitable end device is activated as a Digital Vehicle Key. ① Mercedes-Benz recommends that you carry the emergency key in case of function restrictions. If the vehicle does not start and the Please place key in the cup holder or Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.  Place key ① in stowage compartment ②.  Place the Digital Vehicle Key in stowage space 3.  Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. It may take a few seconds until the vehicle starts. When the Key not detected display message appears on the driver's display, press the start/stop button again. When the READY display appears on the driver's display, the vehicle is ready to drive. 

STARTING THE VEHICLE WITH THE KEY IN THE MARKED SPACE (EMERGENCY OPERATION MODE)

A

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. If the vehicle does not start and the Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode. Vehicles with Digital Vehicle Key: If the vehicle does not start and the Please place key in the cup holder or Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket See Owner's Manual display message appears on the driver's display, you can start the vehicle in emergency operation mode.  Make sure that marked space ⑦ is empty. Remove key ① from the key ring. Place key ① on the symbol in marked space ②. The vehicle will start after a short time. If you remove key ① from marked space ②, the vehicle can still be driven. For further engine starts, however, key ⑪ must be located on the symbol in marked space ⑫ during the entire journey. Have key ① checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

IF THE VEHICLE DOES NOT START:

Place key ① in marked space ② and leave it there. Depress the brake pedal and start the vehicle using the start/stop button. You can switch on the power supply or the vehicle with the start/stop button.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving Observe any information regarding display messages that may be shown on the driver's display.

Running-in notes

- In certain handling and driving safety systems, the sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered or after repairs. Full system effectiveness is only reached when this teaching-in process has concluded. - Brake pads, brake disks and tyres that are either new or have been replaced only achieve optimum braking effect and grip after driving several hundred kilometres. Compensate the reduced braking effect by applying greater force to the brake pedal.

Notes on driving


WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects in the driver's footwell Objects in the driver's footwell may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. Stow all objects in the vehicle securely so that they cannot get into the driver's footwell. Always fit the floor mats securely and as prescribed in order to ensure that there is always sufficient room for the pedals. Do not use loose floor mats and do not place floor mats on top of one another. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrect footwear

INCORRECT FOOTWEAR INCLUDES, FOR EXAMPLE:

• shoes with platform soles • shoes with high heels - slippers There is a risk of an accident. Always wear suitable footwear so that you can operate the pedals safely. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if the vehicle is switched off while driving If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety functions are restricted or no longer available. This may affect the power steering system and the brake force boosting, for example. You will need to use considerably more force to steer and brake, for example.  Do not switch off the vehicle while driving.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving  

WARNING

Risk of accident due to the brake system overheating If you leave your foot on the brake pedal when driving, the brake system may overheat. This increases the braking distance and the brake system can even fail. ▶ Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Do not depress the brake pedal and the accelerator pedal at the same time while driving. 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. Please bear in mind that all the speed values stated in this Operator's Manual are approximate and are subject to a certain tolerance.

NOTES ON DRIVING WITH A ROOF LOAD, TRAILER OR FULLY LADEN VEHICLE

When driving with a loaded roof luggage rack or trailer as well as with a fully laden or fully occupied vehicle, the vehicle's driving and steering characteristics change.

YOU SHOULD BEAR THE FOLLOWING IN MIND:

- Do not exceed the permissible roof load and towing capacity. Also observe the information in the Technical Data. - Distribute the roof load and the load inside the vehicle evenly, placing heavy objects at the bottom. Also comply with the notes on loading the vehicle ( → page 256). - Drive attentively, and avoid abrupt starts, braking and steering as well as rapid cornering.

ADVICE ON DRIVING ON SALT-STREWN ROADS

The braking effect is limited on salt-strewn road surfaces.

THEREFORE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

- Due to salt build-up on the brake disks and brake pads, the braking distance can increase considerably or result in one-sided braking. - Maintain a much greater safety distance to the vehicle travelling ahead.

REMOVE SALT BUILD-UP AS FOLLOWS:

- Brake occasionally, paying attention to the traffic conditions - Carefully depress the brake pedal at the end of the journey and when starting the next journey

NOTES ON AQUAPLANING

Aquaplaning can take place if a certain depth of water has built up on the road surface.  

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES DURING HEAVY PRECIPITATION OR IN CONDITIONS IN WHICH AQUAPLANING MAY OCCUR:

Reduce speed - Avoid tyre ruts - Avoid sudden steering movements - Brake carefully Also observe the notes on regularly checking wheels and tyres ( → page 54).

NOTES ON DRIVING THROUGH WATER ON THE ROAD

Water ingress can damage the drive system, electrics and transmission.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING IF YOU HAVE TO DRIVE THROUGH WATER:

- The water, when calm, may reach no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. - Drive at walking pace at most; water can otherwise enter the vehicle interior. - Vehicles travelling ahead, or oncoming vehicles, can create waves which may exceed the maximum permissible depth of the water. The braking effect of the brakes is reduced after fording. Brake carefully, paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored.

Function of rear axle steering

The rear axle steering is an electromechanical auxiliary steering on the rear axle which adjusts the steering of the rear wheels according to the position of the front wheels, depending on the speed. This results in greater manoeuvrability and improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering.

REAR AXLE STEERING HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:

• reduced steering effort and turning circle resulting in reduced parking effort • improved driving stability, e.g. when cornering • more direct steering resulting in improved handling of the vehicle Observe the notes on snow chains and snow chain mode ( → page 754).

Notes on off-road driving

WARNING

Risk of accident if you do not keep to line of fall on inclines If you drive at an angle or turn on an incline, the vehicle could slip sideways, tip and rollover. Always drive on inclines in the line of fall (straight up or down) and do not turn. When driving off-road, sand, mud and water or water mixed with oil, etc., may get into the brakes. This may lead to a reduction in braking effect or even a total brake failure as a result of increased wear. The braking characteristics will vary depending on the material that has entered the system. Clean the brakes after driving off-road. If you then notice reduced braking effect or hear scrap- ing noises, have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Adapt your driving style to the changed braking characteristics. 

NOTE

Damage caused by driving over obstacles

THE VEHICLE CAN BE DAMAGED BY:

• driving onto high kerbs or unpaved roads. - quickly driving over obstacles such as kerbs, speed bumps or pot-holes. • heavy objects hitting the underbody or chassis components. Do not drive over obstacles that could damage the vehicle. ▶ Check the vehicle regularly for damage during off-road driving. Adjust the vehicle speed to suit the road surface conditions. If there is damage, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to non-observance of prohibition signs Environmental protection has priority. Treat nature with respect. Be sure to observe prohibition signs. The vehicle is designed for easily negotiable and moderate off-road terrain. When driving off-road, make sure there is sufficient ground clearance. The high-voltage battery in particular can be damaged by bottoming out or by impacts against the underbody. Please also observe the notes on operating safety ( → page 120).

CHECK-LIST BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD

CHECK THE FOLLOWING POINTS BEFORE DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

• State of charge of the high-voltage battery • Tyre-change tool kit and spare wheel - Tyres and wheels Further information about special all-terrain tyres for retrofitting can be obtained from a qualified specialist workshop.

OFF-ROAD DRIVING

Read this section before driving your vehicle off-road. Practise by driving over less demanding off-road terrain first. - Observe the notes on the off-road ABS (→ page 394). - Select the 📄 (→ page 350, 349) drive program before driving off-road. To avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure there is always sufficient ground clearance. Vehicles with AIRMATIC: The vehicle is automatically raised by 25 mm to the off-road level. \- Only drive on downhill gradients and enbankments with the vehicle started and only in D or R. Observe the notes on driving in mountainous terrain.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving - Do not drive on unknown terrain that is not easily visible and stay on marked paths. • Always keep the doors and windows closed while the vehicle is in motion. - Deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, cruise control and the variable limiter. • Adapt your driving style to the terrain. - Do not use the HOLD function on steep downhill or uphill gradients with slippery or loose surfaces.

Driving on sand

WHEN DRIVING ON SAND, ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS:

- Drive swiftly to overcome the rolling resistance, as the vehicle may otherwise dig itself in. - Drive in the tracks of other vehicles if possible. Make sure that the following prerequisites are met: - the tyre ruts are not too deep. the sand is firm enough. - there is sufficient ground clearance.

Fording

ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION WHEN FORDING:

• Drive no faster than 10 km/h. - The water, when calm, may reach no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body. • Switch off automatic climate control ( → page 313). • Ensure that a bow wave does not form as you drive. • Do not stop in the water.

Driving in mountainous terrain

ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION WHEN DRIVING IN MOUNTAINOUS TERRAIN:

- When driving downhill, use the recuperation level D - of the regenerative brake system (→ page 341). • Activate DSR before driving downhill, if necessary ( → page 420).

CHECK-LIST AFTER DRIVING OFF-ROAD

Driving off-road places greater demands on your vehicle than driving on normal roads. Check the entire vehicle for damage and foreign bodies every time after driving off-road. Foreign bodies in the wheels or drivetrain can lead to imbalances and therefore vibrations. - If the drive program is selected: select another drive program. Vehicles with AIRMATIC: The vehicle is lowered to the normal level. - Deactivate DSR. • Apply the brakes to dry them after fording. - Check that the service brake is working normally after a long downhill stretch. • Clean the following components every time after driving off-road: \- licence plate number headlamps and tail lamps \- tyres, wheels and wheel arches \- underbody • After driving through sand, mud, water or gravel, have the following components checked and cleaned:  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving - brake disks and brake pads - tyres and wheels - axle joints

ECO display function

 The ECO display shows an evaluation of your driving style on the driver's display depending on the situation. This enables you to check the efficiency of your driving style and adjust it if necessary. The ECO display menu shows a ball that will roll forwards or backwards on a stylised road in the direction of travel according to the driving characteristics. Above and below the road, lines mark the area for an efficient driving style ③. Ball ② will light up in green if it is rolling within these lines. Outside the lines, the ball will light up in orange.

THE ECO DISPLAY ASSESSES THE FOLLOWING CRITERIA FOR AN ECONOMICAL DRIVING STYLE:

• coasting at the right times • consistent speed • moderate acceleration The overall assessment of your driving style "from start" is indicated using stars ①. It starts with five empty stars, which you can fill one after the other if you drive efficiently. When all five stars are filled, a glow will appear in the background. ① You can call up the ECO display function via the Classic menu (→ page 501).

Recuperative brake system

FUNCTION OF THE RECUPERATIVE BRAKE SYSTEM

Depending on the selected recuperation level, the electric motors are operated as an alternator when in overrun mode and during braking in order to charge the high-voltage battery while driving. As soon as you take your foot off the accelerator pedal when the vehicle is in motion and in transmission position ₁ , recuperation in overrun mode is initiated. The higher the recuperation, the more sharply the vehicle is braked when coasting and the more electrical energy is fed into the high-voltage battery. The deceleration in overrun mode may not be sufficient depending on the driving conditions. Also brake with the service brake if necessary. Always adapt your speed to the driving conditions and keep a sufficient distance.

THE RECUPERATIVE BRAKE SYSTEM HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:

• supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting • converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy - supports braking with electronically controlled brake force boosting - converts the kinetic energy of the vehicle into electric energy  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving  If you brake hard, the mechanical brake is also used. This means that the maximum recuperative energy cannot be recovered. The more you drive and brake in an anticipatory manner, the more efficiently energy can be recuperated.

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE BRAKING EFFECT OF THE ELECTRIC MOTOR DURING RECUPERATION IN OVERRUN MODE MAY BE REDUCED OR MAY NOT BE AVAILABLE AT ALL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• when the high-voltage battery charge level increases • if the high-voltage battery is not yet at a normal operating temperature In these cases, the desired deceleration is set by the brake control system. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

MANUALLY SETTING RECUPERATIVE DECELERATION

You can use the steering wheel gearshift paddles to manually adjust the intensity of recuperation in overrun mode.  When the vehicle is started again, D is automatically set as the recuperation level.

THE FOLLOWING RECUPERATION LEVELS ARE AVAILABLE:

D AUTO Intelligent and anticipatory recuperation with ECO Assist (→ page 341) D + No recuperation: the vehicle coasts, rolls freely • D Normal recuperation (standard setting) D- Increased recuperation: increased deceleration in overrun mode To increase recuperation: briefly pull gearshift paddle ①. To reduce recuperation: briefly pull gearshift paddle 2. To select D AUTO: if D + has been selected, briefly pull gearshift paddle ②. Otherwise, pull and hold gearshift paddle ① or ②. If D AUTO has been selected, briefly pulling gearshift paddle again reactivates D | +. The driver's display shows the currently selected recuperation level next to the transmission position display.

ECO Assist

ECO ASSIST FUNCTION

ECO Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and does not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving  traffic law. The driver is responsible for keeping a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed and for braking in good time. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if ECO Assist does not provide sufficient deceleration ECO Assist only brakes your vehicle when you take your foot off the gas pedal. If vehicles are detected late, e.g. after tight curves, or if you do not react immediately to the ECO Assist display, the deceleration may not be sufficient. React promptly to the ECO Assist recommendation and take your foot off the gas pedal. Adjust your speed to the driving conditions and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action. ECO Assist is active only in |D|AUTO (→ page 341). Depending on the vehicle's equipment, ECO Assist analyses data for the vehicle's expected route. This allows the system to optimally adjust the driving style for the route ahead, use minimal energy and recuperate as much as possible. If the system has detected an event ahead or a vehicle in front and the vehicle is approaching the event, ECO Assist will calculate an optimised speed profile based on the distance, speed and available route information. If you release the accelerator pedal in this case, intelligent recuperation will start in overrun mode. If ECO Assist has detected a vehicle travelling in front or a stationary vehicle ahead, it can brake your vehicle to a standstill. This may be the case, for example, at the end of a traffic jam or if the detected vehicle ahead stops in front of you. If the deceleration provided by ECO Assist is not sufficient, you must also brake with the service brake. This is especially the case if, for example, you pull away again in slow-moving traffic and the distance to the vehicle in front is very short. Depending on the vehicle equipment and at low speeds, e.g. in a multi-storey car park or on play streets, no adjustment will be made for stationary vehicles and therefore there will be no display.  "Foot off the accelerator" recommendation Route event ahead i ECO Assist can also be shown on the head-up display. If a route event that requires an adjustment of your driving style is detected ahead, corresponding symbol ② and the □ symbol (grey) will be displayed. If you release the accelerator pedal, the symbol will turn green and recuperation in overrun mode will be initiated. If the deceleration is not sufficient, also apply the service brake. If ECO Assist intervenes for a route event ahead and you press the accelerator pedal, you end ECO Assist's control. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in front. 

THE ECO ASSIST DISPLAY IS HIDDEN AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• You do not react to the ECO Assist recommendation for a long time. - You press the accelerator pedal while ECO Assist is intervening because of a route event ahead. This does not apply in the case of a vehicle in front. • ECO Assist cannot identify any further recommendations from the route ahead.

IN ADDITION TO A VEHICLE IN FRONT ☐, ECO ASSIST CAN DETECT THE FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS ② DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:

Roundabout S-bend Sharp bend T-junction Downhill gradient Speed limit ECO Assist can also react to other intersections or junctions if you activate the turn signal indicator in good time. On roads with an obligation to drive in a lane as far to the right as possible, vehicles driving in the lane to your left will also be recognised as vehicles ahead of you. To enable ECO Assist to react to future route events, the equipment-dependent speed adaptation functions of Active Distance Assist must be active ( → page 419).

SYSTEM LIMITS

If the calculated route is adhered to when route guidance is active, ECO Assist will operate with greater accuracy. The basic function is also available without active route guidance. Not all information and traffic situations can be foreseen. The quality depends on the map data. ECO Assist will be available after driving off, as soon as the sensor check is completed.

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. • If the windscreen is dirty in the vicinity of the multifunction camera. • If the multifunction camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. - If road signs are hard to detect, e.g. due to dirt, snow or insufficient lighting, or because they are obscured. - If the information in the navigation system's digital map is incorrect or out of date. • If signs are ambiguous, e.g. road signs in roadworks or in adjacent lanes. • If the radar sensors are dirty or obscured. - When you drive on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. • If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving 

ACTIVATING AND DEACTIVATING ECO ASSIST

Multimedia system: Settings Assistance Driving ▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Function of the haptic accelerator pedal

The haptic accelerator pedal features an additional point of resistance to help you drive as efficiently as possible in drive program E.

Range maximisation

RANGE MAXIMISATION FUNCTION

The range maximisation function enables a maximum range gain. To achieve this, the function partially or completely switches off convenience systems that are not relevant to driving and activates efficiency-enhancing driving functions.

THE RANGE MAXIMISATION FUNCTION CONTROLS THE RESTRICTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTION GROUPS:

• Climate control

\- Restricting climate control functions and deactivating front windscreen, rear window and mirror heaters

- Interior

\- Switching off ambient lighting, displays and certain charging functions

Seating comfort

\- Deactivating the steering wheel heater, seat heating and ventilation and deactivating the massage function

• ECO drive functions

Changing to the E drive program, activating ECO Assist and the D AUTO recuperation level If necessary, you can deactivate the restrictions of individual function groups again. This will reduce the maximum range gain by the value specified for the function group. If you switch on a deactivated function while range maximization is activated, all restrictions of the corresponding function group will be removed and the maximum range gain will be reduced accordingly. For example, if you switch on the seat heating again, all restrictions of the "Seating comfort" function group will be deactivated. This does not apply to the "ECO driving functions" group, as the range gain in this case depends mainly on your personal driving style. The activated ECO driving functions help you to drive in an energy-efficient manner. The specified range gain for the ECO drive functions can be achieved only if you observe the driving instructions and recommendations displayed and drive without kick-down.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING RANGE MAXIMISATION

Multimedia system: Settings EQ Range Activate or deactivate Maximum range. All function groups concerned will be activated or deactivated. or Individually activate or deactivate the individual subsystems of the four function groups Climate control, Interior, Seat comfort and ECO drive functions. 

AMG Active Sound

SELECTING SUPPORTING SOUND CHARACTERISTIC WITH THE STEERING-WHEEL BUTTON

You can select a comfortable (Balanced), a sporty (Sport) or a very sporty (Powerful) supporting sound characteristic for interior and drive noises using the steering-wheel button or the multimedia system ( → page 352).  Press the upper or lower Ⓤ display button repeatedly, until it displays the ▼ symbol. If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( → page 346). Press the corresponding button Ⓐ. THE COLOUR OF THE SYMBOL 📄 INDICATES THE SUPPORTING SOUND CHARACTERISTIC CURRENTLY SELECTED: • Blue: Balanced - comfortable • Orange: Sport - sporty • Red: Powerful – very sporty

Function of the AMG steering-wheel buttons

 The AMG steering-wheel buttons are an additional control element with two buttons on the steering wheel. You can assign two vehicle functions of your choice to the control element. You can change between the available functions for the corresponding button ② by pressing the upper or lower part of the display button ① repeatedly. The display buttons ① show each function selected.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON EQUIPMENT:

ESP ^* (→ page 396) AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 449) Camera views ( → page 456) AMG DYNAMICS (→ page 348) AMG Active Sound ( → page 345)  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving In addition, all functions that you have created as favourites in the multimedia system are available for selection. Information on favourites Individual functions may not be shown. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( → page 346). If you have assigned a function to one of the display buttons ①, you can operate this function with the corresponding button ②. The assignment of the display buttons Ⓞ remains stored even after the vehicle is started again. The operating status of the respective function is, however, reset to the basic setting.

Setting the AMG steering wheel buttons

Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Control elements AMG steering-wheel buttons The SETTINGS SELECT menu can also be called up using the AMG button in the centre console or by pressing and holding the respective display button. The left display buttons on the steering wheel can be set in the SETTINGS SELECT menu. Select the upper or lower display button in the central display and switch to editing mode by pressing and holding it.  Press + and select the desired function from the list. The selected function is assigned to the corresponding display button and can now be called up directly by simply pressing it.

DELETING BUTTON ASSIGNMENT

Select the upper or lower display button and switch to editing mode by pressing and holding it. Press ☒ to delete the selected display button assignment.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

DYNAMIC SELECT

Function of DYNAMIC SELECT

DYNAMIC SELECT allows a driving program to be selected quickly according to the current driving situation or the desired vehicle characteristics ( → page 350, 349).

DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM SELECTED, THE FOLLOWING VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS WILL CHANGE:

Drive • Vehicles with AIRMATIC: suspension ( → page 447) - Suspension and damping - Vehicle level (speed-dependent) Steering ESP ^® • Sound of the drive system in the vehicle interior • Point of resistance on the haptic accelerator pedal In drive program E, an additional pressure point is activated in the haptic accelerator pedal. \- First point of resistance: at approx. 60% pedal travel (only in E) \- Second point of resistance: transition to kickdown (always available)

AVAILABLE DRIVE PROGRAMS

INDIVIDUAL

• The following vehicle characteristics are individually adjustable: - Drive Suspension - Steering - ESP ³ - Sound of the drive system in the vehicle interior

S (SPORT)

• Sporty and dynamic driving characteristics - Suitable only for good road conditions, a dry surface and a clear stretch of road

C (COMFORT)

• Comfortable driving style • Recommended for all road conditions • Best balance between efficiency and performance for all driving situations 

E (ECO)

• Economical setting of vehicle functions • Recommended for all road conditions • Additional first point of resistance in the haptic accelerator pedal indicates an efficient, economical driving style

(OFF-ROAD)

- For driving on easily and moderately negotiable terrain, e.g. on dirt tracks, loose surfaces, gravel or sand, as well on uneven terrain, where there are no firm road surfaces - Intervenes later if there is oversteer or understeer, thus improving traction • Not suitable for use on public roads • Can be selected up to a maximum of 100 km/h - Raises the vehicle to off-road level +1 From 70 km/h: lowers the vehicle to normal level below 50 km/h: raises the vehicle to off-road level +1 again • from 110 km/h: switch to [C]

• Vehicles with AIRMATIC:

The ESP ^* settings in the drive programs [L] and [C] are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied.

Function of the DYNAMIC SELECT (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

DYNAMIC SELECT allows a driving program to be selected quickly according to the current driving situation or the desired vehicle characteristics.

YOU CAN SELECT THE FOLLOWING DRIVE PROGRAMS:

Slippery Power level 1 - With limited power release for optimised pulling away and driving characteristics in wintry and slippery road conditions - Kickdown not available Comfort Power level 2 \- With a moderate power release for comfortable driving and maximum range \- Individual For individual drive, suspension, steering, ESP ^® and sound settings in the vehicle interior • S Sport \- Power level 3 \- With a somewhat limited power release for sporty driving \- S ⁺ Sport+ \- Power level 4 \- Maximum power availability for particularly sporty driving

DEPENDING ON THE DRIVE PROGRAM SELECTED, THE FOLLOWING VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS WILL CHANGE:

• Drive and power availability  EQE - Owner's Manual > Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT The power release for the drive is selected automatically depending on the drive program. - The four power levels are designed to provide constant power over as long a period as possible in the respective drive program. • AMG Dynamics The three agility functions Basic, Advanced and Pro are automatically selected depending on the drive program. \- The steering, all-wheel drive and stabilisation functions are adapted to the selected drive program. \- Suspension Steering • AMG Active Sound sound characteristic The ESP ^® settings in the drive programs ☐ and ☒ are designed for stability. Therefore, choose one of these drive programs especially when transporting roof loads, in trailer operation and when the vehicle is fully loaded or fully occupied. If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the maximum power is always available in all drive programs with the exception of the drive program ☐. Kickdown is not available in the drive program ☐. You can set the vehicle characteristics using the multimedia system ( → page 352). You can also adjust the agility functions of AMG Dynamics using the AMG steering-wheel buttons. 

Selecting the drive program

 Press the DYNAMIC SELECT button Ⓞ on the left or right. The drive program selected will appear on the driver's display. In the drive program, some driving systems are restricted in their function or not available. When selecting the drive program, a confirmation prompt therefore appears on the central display before the drive program is activated.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT 

Selecting a drive program (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

SELECTION WITH RIGHT-HAND STEERING-WHEEL BUTTON

 Turn rotary switch ②. The selected drive program will appear on display button ① and on the driver's display. ① Individual drive programs may not be shown. How drive programs are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( → page 352). To select the drive program directly: press display button

SELECTION VIA THE CENTRAL DISPLAY (MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM)

 Push button Ⓐ and select the drive program via the central display (→ page 352).

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the multi-media system

Multimedia system: 

SETTING DRIVE PROGRAM I

Select Individual. Select and set a category.

SWITCHING THE RESET DISPLAY ON/OFF

Activate or deactivate Ask when starting.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT  This function must be activated for each user profile separately. Only when this function is activated will the drive program and ECO start/stop setting for the previous journey be saved for the respective user profile. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. If the ECO start/stop function was deactivated, an additional prompt appears asking if the function should remain deactivated. The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically. The ECO start/stop function is activated automatically.

Configuring DYNAMIC SELECT in the MMS (plug-in hybrid and electric vehicles)

Multimedia system: 

SETTING DRIVE PROGRAM I

Select Individual. Select and set a category.

SWITCHING THE RESET DISPLAY ON/OFF

▶ Activate or deactivate Ask when starting. This function must be activated for each user profile separately. The drive program for the respective user profile of the last driver is only stored if this function is activated. Function on: the next time the vehicle is started a prompt appears asking whether the last active drive program should be restored. The prompt only appears if the previously active settings deviate from the standard settings. Function off: the next time the vehicle is started the C drive program is set automatically.

Displaying vehicle data

Multimedia system:  Select Vehicle. The vehicle data is displayed.

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator

Multimedia system:  Select Consumption. The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking DYNAMIC SELECT

Setting AMG DYNAMIC SELECT in the MBUX multimedia system

Multimedia system:  OVERVIEW OF THE AMG DYNAMIC SELECT MENU  1 AMG drive program settings Drive programs ③ ESP (→ page 396) Depending on the equipment, the AMG menu DYNAMIC SELECT can also be called up using the AMG button in the centre console. Select the appropriate drive program. The settings of the drive programs can be adjusted individually. Select the desired tab on the left and make the relevant setting.

SETTING OPTIONS FOR THE DRIVE PROGRAMS

• AMG DYNAMICS: Basic/Advanced/Pro \- Suspension: Comfort/Sport/Sport+ Sound: Balanced/Sport/Powerful \- Drive (can only be set in the drive program): Reduced/Moderate/Sport/Dynamic  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Transmission

Transmission

DIRECT SELECT lever

FUNCTION OF THE DIRECT SELECT LEVER


WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.  Keep the key out of reach of children. Use the DIRECT SELECT lever to switch the transmission position. The current transmission position will be shown on the driver's display.  Park position R Reverse gear N Neutral D Drive position  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Transmission  ENGAGING REVERSE GEAR R  Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever upwards past the first point of resistance. ENGAGING NEUTRAL N  Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever up or down to the first point of resistance, holding it there until the transmission position is shown on the driver's display. Subsequently releasing the brake pedal will allow you to move the vehicle freely, e.g. to push it or tow it away.

IF YOU WANT THE TRANSMISSION TO REMAIN IN NEUTRAL N EVEN IF THE VEHICLE IS SWITCHED OFF:

Start the vehicle. Depress the brake pedal and engage neutral [N]. Release the brake pedal. Switch off the vehicle. ① If you then exit the vehicle leaving the key in the vehicle, the transmission will remain in neutral N. 

ENGAGING PARK POSITION P


WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. 

NOTE

Damage due to engaging park position P while the vehicle is rolling If you shift the transmission into park position P while the vehicle is rolling, the transmission may be damaged. If the vehicle is rolling, do not open a door. Only engage the park position P when the vehicle is stationary.  Observe the notes on parking the vehicle ( → page 380). Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill. When the vehicle is stationary, press button ①. When the transmission position display shows P, the park position is engaged. If the transmission position display P is not shown, apply the parking brake and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Transmission  Depending on the situation, it may take a short time until [P] is engaged. Therefore, always pay attention to the transmission position display.

PARK POSITION ⑭ WILL BE ENGAGED AUTOMATICALLY IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS MET:

• You switch the stationary vehicle off in transmission position [D] or [R]. - You open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary in transmission position D or R. - When the vehicle is rolling, you switch if off in transmission position D or R and bring it to a standstill. - When the vehicle is rolling, you shift to transmission position , bring the vehicle to a standstill and open the driver's door when the vehicle is stationary. • Engaging park position P automatically is required by the vehicle. To manoeuvre with an open driver's door, open the driver's door while the vehicle is stationary and engage transmission position D or R again. ENGAGING DRIVE POSITION D  Depress the brake pedal and push the DIRECT SELECT lever down past the first point of resistance. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Function of 4MATIC

Function of 4MATIC

The flexible all-wheel distribution of the 4MATIC means the drive is always ideally distributed between both axles. Depending on the situation, only the front axle or only the rear axle can be driven, or the drive can be distributed continuously between both axles. This means that recuperation can be used even more effectively and the range of the vehicle can be increased ( → page 340). Together with ESP ^® and 4ETS, 4MATIC improves the traction of your vehicle whenever a driven wheel spins due to insufficient traction. If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can neither reduce the risk of an accident nor override the laws of physics. It cannot take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsible especially for maintaining a safe distance from the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. In wintry road conditions, the maximum effect of the flexible all-wheel distribution can be achieved only if you use winter tyres (M+S tyres), with snow chains if necessary.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery

< Charging the high-voltage battery

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery


NOTE

High-voltage battery damage due to leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time Lithium-ion batteries experience a natural self-discharge. Exhaustive discharging can therefore occur if the vehicle is idle for several months. This can damage the high-voltage battery. To avoid damage, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.  

NOTE

Accelerated ageing of the high-voltage battery due to not observing the following recommendations As a result of its basic characteristics, the storage capacity of, and the amount of energy available from, the high-voltage battery decreases over the course of its life. As a result, the maximum electrical range that can be achieved by the vehicle is reduced and its maximum electrical output can be impaired.

THE FOLLOWING FACTORS COULD ACCELERATE THE AGEING OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:

- frequently fully charging (charge level 100%) the high-voltage battery, especially when this process is not directly followed by a journey • frequent rapid charging with direct current (mode 4) • leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods at high ambient temperatures To avoid accelerated ageing, please observe the following recommendations when handling the high-voltage battery.

RECOMMENDATIONS WHEN HANDLING THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY:

\- Every six months, when the outside temperature is above 10 °C, park the vehicle overnight with a charge level below 20%.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery - Only charge the high-voltage battery with direct current (mode 4) if necessary. - Charge the high-voltage battery on average to a charge level of 80%. Beyond a charge level of 80%, the charging time is considerably prolonged. - If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods, park up the vehicle with a high-voltage battery charge level between 30% and 50%. Do not keep the high-voltage battery continuously connected to power supply equipment. - If leaving the vehicle idle for lengthy periods of time avoid, if possible, high ambient temperatures. - Check the high-voltage battery's charge level every six weeks ( → page 377). • Charge the high-voltage battery if the charge level is below 20%. - Do not disconnect the 12 V battery even if the vehicle is left idle for a lengthy period. Otherwise, the condition of the vehicle's high-voltage battery cannot be monitored.

YOU CAN CONTRIBUTE TO REDUCING THE VEHICLE'S ENERGY CONSUMPTION IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

• An anticipatory driving style ( → page 340) • Reduced use of electrical consumers • Having the vehicle regularly maintained The charging time of the high-voltage battery may change over the course of its life. (i) Depending on the national version, your vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.  You can charge the high-voltage battery with both alternating current (mode 2/3) and direct current (mode 4).  Combo 1 vehicle socket  Combo 2 vehicle socket Type 1 or type 2 connection for charging with alternating current 2 Socket extension for charging with direct current  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery When using a CCS (Combined Charging System) charging cable to charge with direct current at a combo vehicle socket, both vehicle socket connections ① and ② are used for charging.

CHARGING OPTIONS FOR THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY (MODE 2, 3 OR 4):

• Charging through recuperation while the vehicle is in motion • Charging with alternating current when stationary: \- at a mains socket (mode 2) \- at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3) • Charging with direct current when stationary: \- at a rapid charging station (mode 4) Depending on the country-specific vehicle equipment and your vehicle's charging cable, single phase AC charging is also possible. Observe the different grid requirements of your current location when charging. Only use charging cables which conform to the grid requirements. Consult a qualified electrician or your local grid operator if you have any questions. It is recommended that you charge the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station due to the improved charging performance and better charging efficiency offered.

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE POWER OUTPUT OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY MAY BE IMPAIRED BY THE FOLLOWING:

• High or low outside temperatures • Electrical auxiliary consumers in the vehicle being switched on, e.g. operating the air conditioning system • Extended periods without charging

THE CHARGING TIME OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY MAY BE INCREASED BY THE FOLLOWING:

• High or low outside temperatures • Extended periods without charging • The maximum available charge current of the charging facility - The settings of the charging process in the multimedia system (→ page 378) You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Stowing the charging cable

Always stow the vehicle's charging cable in the charging cable bag provided, and secure the charging cable bag in the boot or load compartment with the included retaining strap. Otherwise, the charging cable bag with the charging cable is not sufficiently secured.  Example: charging cable bag in the boot/load compartment  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery As delivered, charging cable bag ① with retaining strap ② is located in the boot or load compartment. To secure the charging cable bag, the retaining strap must be attached to tie-down eye ③. Do not use bag hooks to attach the retaining strap.  Feed the loop end of retaining strap ② through tie-down eye ③ into the boot or load compartment. Feed the end with the snap hook through the loop of retaining strap 2.  Tighten retaining strap ② so that the knot around tie-down eye ③ is tight and secure. Hook the snap hook of retaining strap ② in a tie-down eye of charging cable bag ①. 

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket (mode 2)


DANGER

Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts Connecting the charging cable to a mains socket using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example. ▶ Only connect the charging cable to a mains socket that: • Has been properly installed and • Has been inspected by a qualified electrician For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. ▶ Never use a damaged charging cable. Do not use: \- Extension cables • Extension reels  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery • Multiple sockets Never use socket adapters to connect the charging cable to the mains socket. The only exception being if the adapter has been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery of an electric vehicle. Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the socket adapter.

ONLY THE FOLLOWING CHARGING CABLES MAY BE USED:

• The charging cable supplied with the vehicle. • A charging cable that has been approved for the vehicle. The charging process can vary depending on the power supply equipment. The charging times when charging the high-voltage battery at the mains socket are considerably longer than when charging at a wallbox or charging station. When doing so, always observe the local information. Do not leave the charging cable controls hanging loose from a mains socket.

DO NOT LIFT THE CONTROLS BY THE FOLLOWING COMPONENT PARTS:

• the charging cable connector • the mains plug When charging, protect the charging cable control element from excessive heat such as direct sunlight. Otherwise, the charging process may be cancelled. 

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a wallbox or charging station (mode 3)


DANGER

Risk of fatal injury from incorrectly installed component parts Connecting the charging cable to a wallbox using incorrectly installed component parts could cause a fire or an electric shock, for example. ▶ Only connect the charging cable to a wallbox that: • Has been properly installed and • Has been inspected by a qualified electrician For safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. ▶ Never use damaged charging cables. Do not extend the charging cable. Do not use adapters. Observe the safety notes in the operating instructions for the wallbox. If charging at a wallbox without pre-installed cable, use the optionally available charging cable for wallbox and charging station (mode 3). The charging cable is stowed in a bag in the boot/luggage compartment. Only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle.   

DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to the charging station, this can result in fire or an electric shock, for example. Perform a visual inspection of the charging station for obvious defects, e.g. damage to the housing or on the charging cable connection. At charging stations without a pre-installed cable, for safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. Do not use a damaged charging cable. Do not use an extension for the charging cable. Do not use an adapter. ▶ Always observe the safety information on the charging station. Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or via Plug & Charge. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge ( → page 600). The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging losses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on charging the high-voltage battery at a rapid charging station (mode 4)


DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to damaged components If you use a damaged component to connect the vehicle to the charging station, this can result in fire or an electric shock, for example. Perform a visual inspection of the charging station for obvious defects, e.g. damage to the housing or on the charging cable connection. At charging stations without a pre-installed cable, for safety reasons, only use charging cables that have been tested and approved by the manufacturer for charging the high-voltage battery in an electric vehicle. Do not use a damaged charging cable. Do not use an extension for the charging cable. Do not use an adapter. ▶ Always observe the safety information on the charging station. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery  

DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage.  Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process. Most charging stations must be activated before the charging process, e.g. using an RFID card or via Plug-and-Charge. Observe the on-site operator's instructions for the charging station and the notes on Mercedes me Charge ( → page 600). The charging cable for the vehicle must not be longer than 30 m due to the legal requirements in some countries. This is to prevent the interference of signals being received by radio communication devices in the vehicle or in close proximity to the charging station. Be aware that parts of the charging cable may be routed underground. If in doubt, ask the charging station operator if this is the case before charging the high-voltage battery. The amount of energy dispensed for the charging process, shown by the charging station, may be higher than the amount of energy actually absorbed by the high-voltage battery. This is the result of different levels of charging losses and is described as recharge efficiency. Charging losses occur, for example, due to heat that builds up when the vehicle is charging or from auxiliary consumers that are switched on. Further information on recharge efficiency can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting the maximum permissible charging current for charging at a mains socket


NOTE

Overloading the mains socket due to excessive charging current If the charging current is too high, the fuse could be tripped or the external mains supply could overheat. Ensure that the external mains supply has been designed to handle the charging current provided. For safety reasons, only use the charging cable supplied with the vehicle or an original Mercedes-Benz charging cable. Mercedes-Benz thoroughly tests these original charging cables for their suitability for high-voltage charging of your vehicle. Purchase these parts at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre and obtain advice there. Check the maximum charging current using the charging capacity shown in the driver's display. The charging cable supplied is set to a country-specific maximum charging current value. When charging abroad, the maximum value may exceed the permitted value for that country. Before charging at a mains socket, have the maximum permissible charging current for the relevant mains socket or the building inspected by a qualified electrician. When abroad, observe the country-specific laws when charging.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery If you have questions concerning the charging current or if there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Overview of the charging cable control panel

The charging cable control panel shows the current status of the charging process.  Supply voltage indicator 2 Charging process indicator 3 Temperature monitor indicator Safety system indicator SUPPLY VOLTAGE INDICATOR

Display	Meaning
Lights up white The supply voltage is connected.
CHARGING PROCESS INDICATOR 2
Display	Meaning
Flashes green The high-voltage battery is charging.


TEMPERATURE CONTROL INDICATOR

Display Meaning

Lights up red The green LED flashes simultaneously: over- temperature - the charging performance is reduced. The green LED does not flash: overtemperature - the charging process is stopped. Flashes red Overtemperature at the mains plug – the charging process is stopped.

SAFETY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Display Meaning

Flashes red Charging cable malfunction - cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit. Lights up red White LED is off: power supply malfunction - cannot carry out the charging process, replace the mains socket. White LED is on: vehicle malfunction - cannot carry out the charging process, reset the charging cable operating unit. When all four displays light up, the charging cable operating unit performs a self-test. If temperature monitor Ⓐ indicates a malfunction, it may help to protect the charging cable from direct sunlight. To reset the charging cable operating unit: if safety system Ⓧ indicates a charging cable malfunction or a vehicle malfunction, first reset the charging cable operating unit. To do this, disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle and from the mains socket and wait for approximately five seconds. If the malfunction persists after the charging cable is reconnected, charging at the   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery mains socket is not possible. The charging cable must be replaced or the vehicle plug must be checked at a qualified specialist workshop, depending on the indicator.

Functions of the indicator lamp on the vehicle socket

The socket flap is centrally locked and unlocked together with the vehicle.  Example: Combo 2 vehicle socket The colour and signalling of status display ① have the following meanings:

LOCKING STATUS

• Lights up white: vehicle socket unlocked; insert or remove charging cable • Flashes white: disconnection or malfunction during locking or unlocking

CHARGE STATUS

• Lights up blue: charging process completed • Flashes blue: charging; active energy flow • Lights up orange: charging paused • Flashes orange: connection is being established - Flashes red (for approx. 90 s): malfunction in vehicle; charging not possible Vehicles with active ambient lighting: when the charging sequence is activated, the charge level is also accompanied by ambient lighting ( → page 294).

Starting the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)


DANGER

Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock. ▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable. Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable. Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket. 

NOTE

Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT VALUES ARE INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged - the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked. 

NOTE

Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again. 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts.  If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements

• The transmission is in position P. - The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. - The vehicle has not been started. The READY display in the driver's display is off. • The charging cable is not taut. Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery  Combo 1 vehicle socket  Combo 2 vehicle socket Open socket flap ⓘ via the EQ module of the multimedia system (→ page 539). or Press the centre rear section of socket flap ①. Socket flap ① swings open and status display ② lights up white.  Vehicles with an electrical socket flap: if an obstacle impedes the socket flap while it is opening, the socket flap will close again automatically. When the vehicle is started (the READY display is lit in the driver's display), socket flap ① cannot be opened. ① Only upper connection Ⓐ is required for the charging cable connector. To charge at a mains socket, insert the mains plug into the mains socket of the external power source as far as it will go. Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket connection to the stop. If the wallbox/charging station is not equipped with a charging cable, insert the plug of the vehicle's charging cable into the wallbox/charging station socket to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. Status display ② flashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, blue. When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with status display (→ page 294). When Sound Experience is activated, different situations, for example the charging cable connector being inserted or the beginning of the charging process, are accompanied by selected sounds ( → page 706).  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery Vehicles with an electric socket flap: if a charging cable is not connected to the vehicle after the socket flap has been opened, the socket flap will close again automatically. When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control).

Ending the alternating current charging process (mode 2/3)


DANGER

Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock. Only use an undamaged charging cable. Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable. Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery 

NOTE

Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT VALUES ARE INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged - the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked. 

NOTE

Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

Requirements

• The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.

COMBO 1 VEHICLE SOCKET

 Press charging interruption button ② The charging process is ended. Status display ① lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked. Press and hold button Ⓐ on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery Close the socket cover and the socket flap. For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the notes at the end of the section. Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle (→ page 360). COMBO 2 VEHICLE SOCKET  Press charging interruption button ②. The charging process is ended. Status display lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked. Remove charging cable connector 3 from the vehicle socket within 30 seconds. After the 30 seconds have elapsed, the vehicle socket will be locked again and the charging process will resume.  If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, repeat the unlocking procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Status display ① indicator lamp remains lit for some time after the charging cable connector has been removed and then goes out. Close the socket flap. For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the following notes on closing the socket flap. Remove the charging cable connector from the mains socket, or from the socket on the wallbox/charging station, and stow the vehicle's charging cable safely in the vehicle ( → page 360).

THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP CLOSES AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• shortly after the charging cable connector has been removed • after the socket flap has been tapped in the direction to close it • after transmission position N, D or R has been engaged

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP

If an obstacle impedes the electrical socket flap while it is closing, the socket flap will open again automatically. When closing the socket flap, make sure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery

Starting the direct current charging process (mode 4)


DANGER

Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock. ▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable. Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable. Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket. 

NOTE

Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT VALUES ARE INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged - the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked. 

NOTE

Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery  

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle socket or the charging cable connector due to incorrect handling Do not use excessive force (maximum 300 N) to insert the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket to the stop. You may otherwise damage the vehicle socket, the charging cable connector or their contacts. If you feel there is increased resistance, pull the charging cable connector out of the socket and reinsert it.

Requirements

• The transmission is in position P. - The vehicle is unlocked or the distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m. - The vehicle has not been started. The READY display in the driver's display is off. • The charging cable is not taut. Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets.  Combo 1 vehicle socket  Combo 2 vehicle socket Open socket flap ⓘ via the EQ module of the multimedia system (→ page 539). or Press the centre rear section of socket flap ①. Socket flap ① swings open and status display ② lights up white.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery  Vehicles with an electrical socket flap: if an obstacle impedes the socket flap while it is opening, the socket flap will close again automatically. When the vehicle is started (the 📄FALV display is lit in the driver's display), socket flap ⚪ cannot be opened. Remove socket cover ④ from the lower connection of vehicle socket ③. The CCS charging cable connector requires both vehicle socket connections. Insert the charging cable connector into vehicle socket Ⓞ to the stop. Make sure that the charging cable is not taut when inserted. Status display ⚫ flashes orange and, as soon as the high-voltage battery is charged, blue. When the charging sequence for the ambient lighting is activated, the ambient lighting lights up for approximately 30 seconds as with status display (→ page 294). When Sound Experience is activated, different situations, for example the charging cable connector being inserted or the beginning of the charging process, are accompanied by selected sounds (→ page 706). Vehicles with an electric socket flap: if a charging cable is not connected to the vehicle after the socket flap has been opened, the socket flap will close again automatically. When the charging cable is connected to the vehicle, the vehicle cannot be started or moved. At the start of the charging process, the charge level display is shown in the driver's display with a charging prediction. The charging prediction refers to the time at which the high-voltage battery will be fully charged. Depending on the temperature, the fan and battery cooling system may audibly switch on during the charging process. If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods and connected to the mains supply, the high-voltage battery will be recharged automatically as needed or when electrical consumers are activated (e.g. the pre-entry climate control). EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery

Ending the direct current charging process (mode 4)


DANGER

Risk of death when charging at a damaged socket The charging process uses high voltage. If the charging cable, the vehicle socket or the mains socket are damaged, you could receive an electric shock. ▶ Only use an undamaged charging cable. Avoid mechanical damage such as crushing, abrading or driving over the cable. Have a damaged vehicle socket replaced at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible. Never connect the charging cable to a damaged vehicle socket. 

NOTE

Damage due to overheating of charging cable and charge port During the charging process, the charging cable and charge port can heat up within the permissible limits.

THE PERMISSIBLE LIMIT VALUES ARE INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

• the power supply system and the charging cable are not damaged - the instructions for handling the charging cable and the control element on the charging cable have been observed If the charging cable or charge port becomes too hot, have the power supply system checked. 

NOTE

Damaged or dirty vehicle socket when the socket flap is open Always keep the socket cover and the socket flap closed when there is no charging cable connected. This protects the vehicle socket from dirt and damage. Make sure that the socket cover is closed properly before closing the socket flap. This can otherwise result in damage which may prevent the socket flap from being opened again.

Requirements:

• The distance between the key and the vehicle does not exceed 1 m.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery  Depending on the national version, the vehicle is equipped with one of the following vehicle sockets. COMBO 1 VEHICLE SOCKET  Press charging interruption button ②. The charging process is ended. Status display lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked. Press and hold button ③ on the charging cable connector and remove the charging cable connector from the vehicle socket. If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Status display ① indicator lamp remains lit for some time after the charging cable connector has been removed and then goes out. Insert socket cover ④ into the lower vehicle socket connection. Close the socket flap. For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the notes at the end of the section. COMBO 2 VEHICLE SOCKET  Press charging interruption button ②. The charging process is ended. Status display lights up white. The vehicle socket is unlocked. Remove charging cable connector 3 from the vehicle socket.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery If you cannot remove the charging cable connector, unlock the vehicle and repeat the procedure. If the charging cable connector is still locked, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Status display ● indicator lamp remains lit for some time after the charging cable connector has been removed and then goes out. Insert socket cover ④ into the lower vehicle socket connection. Close the socket flap. For vehicles with an electric socket flap, observe the following notes on closing the socket flap.

THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP CLOSES AUTOMATICALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• shortly after the charging cable connector has been removed • after the socket flap has been tapped in the direction to close it • after transmission position N, D or R has been engaged

AUTOMATIC REVERSING FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC SOCKET FLAP

If an obstacle impedes the electrical socket flap while it is closing, the socket flap will open again automatically. The automatic reversing function is only an aid and is not a substitute for your attentiveness. When closing the socket flap, make sure that no body parts or objects are in the closing area.

Function of the charge level display in the driver's display

The data shown in the illustration is example data.  1 Range at current charge level Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery Maximum state of charge (depending on the setting) Time remaining until completely charged (until the selected maximum charge level is reached) Charge level recommended by Range Assistant to reach the next destination 6 Dynamic charge level display 7 Current charging capacity ① Specified remaining range ① may vary due to different factors, e.g. driving style or topography. When the vehicle is connected to the mains supply and is switched off, the driver's display shows the charge level display for approximately two minutes.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery The value of current charging capacity can differ from the display on the charging station. At a charging capacity of 10 kW or higher, the value in the charge level display is rounded off and shown without a decimal place. The value in Ⓞ varies depending on the setting of the charging process. It displays the charging prediction, e.g. the time at which the selected charge level will be reached or the charge level at the pre-selected departure time.

Configuring the charging settings

Multimedia system:  SETTING THE CHARGING PROGRAM Select Home, Work or Standard. OPENING AND CLOSING THE SOCKET FLAP USING THE MMS Press Open socket flap to open the socket flap. The charging process can be interrupted using Cancel charging. The charging process is ended and the charging cable is unlocked. Press Close socket flap to close the socket flap. The socket flap also closes automatically when the transmission is shifted out of position P. The socket flap also closes automatically after one minute if it has been opened but no plug has been inserted, and ten to fifteen seconds after the plug has been removed. Further notes on charging with alternating current: (→ page 366) or direct current: (→ page 372). 

UNLOCKING THE CHARGING CABLE (MODE 3 OR 4)

When the function is active, the charging cable is unlocked when the maximum charge level is reached. Select Home or Work. Activate or deactivate Unlock charging cable. ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING LOCATION-BASED CHARGING Select Charge at home or Charge at work. Activate or deactivate Select based on location. When the function is activated, the vehicle's current position is saved as one of the selected options. When the address is reached again, the charging program is automatically switched over as soon as parking position is engaged. ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ECO CHARGING Activate or deactivate the function. The ECO charging function limits the charging voltage at charging stations to conserve the vehicle's battery. SETTING THE DEPARTURE TIME The set departure times are used for the vehicle's pre-entry climate control and for predictions regarding the approximate state of charge and range at the time selected. The charging process always starts immediately, irrespective of the next departure time. Select Departure time. THE FOLLOWING CHARGING TIMES CAN BE SELECTED: • individual charging times  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Charging the high-voltage battery a Week profile

SETTING AN INDIVIDUAL DEPARTURE TIME

Select Add new time and set a new departure time. or Select ☐ and adapt an existing departure time.

SETTING THE REPEAT DAYS

Select Add new time and set a new departure time. Mark the relevant weekdays for which the departure time will apply and confirm with OK. or Select ☐ and edit existing repeat days.

SETTING A BREAK IN THE CHARGING PROCESS

Up to four breaks in the charging process can be set during which the vehicle is not charged, even if it is connected to a charging station. Select Charging interruptions. Select Add new time and then set and save the times for the beginning and end of the break. ▶ Activate or deactivate the charging breaks that have been set. Set charging breaks can be edited with the ☐ button or deleted with the ☐ button.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking

Parking

Parking the vehicle


WARNING

Risk of accident and injury caused by an insufficiently secured vehicle rolling away If the vehicle is not securely parked sufficiently, it can roll away in an uncontrolled way even at a slight downhill gradient. On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving. apply the parking brake. ▶ Switch the transmission to position P. 

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. • start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to it rolling away ▶ Always secure the vehicle against rolling away. 

NOTE

Damage caused by vehicle being lowered Vehicles AIRMATIC: The vehicle can be lowered due to differences in temperature or extended non-operational times. This can cause damage to parts of the body. When stopping the vehicle and when driving off, make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs under or in the immediate vicinity of the body.

IF YOU PARK THE VEHICLE FOR A LONG PERIOD, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

- Make sure the high-voltage battery has a sufficient state of charge, especially at very low outside temperatures. That way, you can avoid any problems when the vehicle is subsequently started. • If possible, avoid parking spaces in direct sunlight. Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( → page 358).  Vehicles with central display  Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen Bring the vehicle to a standstill by depressing the brake pedal. On uphill or downhill gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle rolls towards the kerb if it starts moving. Apply the electric parking brake.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking Engage transmission position P in a stationary vehicle with the brake pedal depressed ( → page 355). Switch off the vehicle by pressing button ①. Release the service brake slowly. Get out of the vehicle and lock it. When you park the vehicle, you can still operate the side windows and the panoramic sliding sunroof for approximately four minutes if the driver's door is closed.

Garage door opener

PROGRAMMING BUTTONS FOR THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER


WARNING

Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.

Requirements

- The vehicle has been parked outside the garage or outside the range of movement of the door. • The vehicle is switched on. • The vehicle has not been started. The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.  Press and hold button ①, ② or ③ that you wish to program. Indicator lamp ● flashes yellow. ① It can take up to 20 seconds before the indicator lamp flashes yellow.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking Release the previously pressed button. Indicator lamp 4 continues to flash yellow. Point remote control ⑤ from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm towards button Press and hold button ⑥ of remote control ⑤ until one of the following signals appears: - Indicator lamp lights up green continuously. Programming is complete. - Indicator lamp ● flashes green. Programming was successful. Additionally, synchronisation of the rolling code with the door system must be carried out. If indicator lamp Ⓐ does not light up or flash green: repeat the procedure. Release all of the buttons.  The remote control for the door drive is not included in the scope of delivery of the garage door opener.

SYNCHRONISING THE ROLLING CODE


WARNING

Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement.  Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.

Requirements

• The door system uses a rolling code. • The vehicle must be within range of the garage door or door drive. - The vehicle as well as persons and objects are located outside the range of movement of the door. The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking   Press the programming button on the door drive unit. Initiate the next step within approximately 30 seconds. Press previously programmed button ①, ② or ③ repeatedly until the door closes. When the door closes, programming is completed. (i) Please also read the operating instructions for the door drive.

TROUBLESHOOTING WHEN PROGRAMMING THE REMOTE CONTROL


WARNING

Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.  Check if the transmitter frequency of remote control is supported. Replace the batteries in remote control 5. Hold remote control ⑤ at various angles from a distance of 1 cm to 8 cm front of the inside rearview mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. Hold remote control ⑤ at the same angles at various distances in front of the inside rear view mirror. You should test every position for at least 25 seconds before trying another position. On remote controls that transmit only for a limited period, press button on remote control again before transmission ends. Angle the aerial line of the garage door opener unit towards the remote control.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking It is possible that older garage doors cannot be operated using the remote control in the inside rearview mirror even after you have successfully performed the measures described above. If this is the case, contact the HomeLink® Hotline. i SUPPORT AND ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON PROGRAMMING: • on the HomeLink® Hotline on (0) 08000 466 354 65 or [phone] • on the Internet at https://www.homelink.com

OPENING OR CLOSING THE GARAGE DOOR


WARNING

Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement. Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started.

Requirements

• The corresponding button is programmed to operate the door.  The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.  Press and hold buttons ①, ② or ③ until the door opens or closes. If the indicator lamp ④ flashes yellow after approx. 20 seconds: Press the previously pressed button again and keep it pressed until the door opens or closes.

CLEARING THE GARAGE DOOR OPENER MEMORY


WARNING

Risk of injury by becoming trapped when opening and closing a garage door When you operate or program a garage door with an integrated garage door opener, persons can become trapped or struck by the garage door if they stand within its range of movement. Always make sure that nobody is within the range of the garage door's movement.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking Before programming the garage door opener, park the vehicle outside the garage. Make sure that the vehicle is switched on but not started. The garage door opener function is always available when the vehicle is switched on.  Press and hold buttons ① and ③. Indicator lamp ④ lights up yellow. If indicator lamp ④ flashes green: release buttons ① and ③. The entire memory has been deleted.

Electric parking brake

FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (APPLYING AUTOMATICALLY)

WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

- Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. 

THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED IF THE TRANSMISSION IS IN POSITION ⑭ AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED:

• The vehicle is switched off. - The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. To prevent application: pull the handle of the electric parking brake ( → page 388).

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS ALSO APPLIED:

• The HOLD function is keeping the vehicle stationary. • Active Parking Assist is keeping the vehicle stationary. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is bringing the vehicle to a standstill. • In addition, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: The vehicle is switched off. The seat belt tongue is not inserted in the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat and the driver's door is opened. There is a system malfunction. - The power supply is insufficient. - The vehicle is stationary for a lengthy period. When the electric parking brake is applied, the red Ⓓ indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

FUNCTION OF THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE (RELEASING AUTOMATICALLY)

THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS RELEASED WHEN THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE FULFILLED:

• The driver's door is closed. • The vehicle has been started. - The transmission is in position D or R and you depress the accelerator pedal or you shift from transmission position P to D or R when on level ground. • If the transmission is in position R, the tailgate must be closed. \- The seat belt tongue is inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat. If the seat belt tongue is not inserted into the seat belt buckle of the driver's seat, one of the following conditions must be fulfilled: \- You shift from transmission position P. or \- You have previously driven at speeds greater than 3 km/h. When the electric parking brake is released, the red [P] indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking 

APPLYING/RELEASING THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE MANUALLY


WARNING

Accident- and risk of injury with unsupervised children in the vehicle.

IF YOU LEAVE CHILDREN UNATTENDED IN THE VEHICLE, THEY CAN IN PARTICULAR

• Open doors and thereby endanger other persons or road users. • get out of the car and are hit by traffic. • Operate vehicle equipment and become trapped, forexample.

IN ADDITION, THE CHILDREN COULD ALSO SET THE VEHICLE IN MOTION, FOR EXAMPLEBY:

• releasing the parking brake. • change the gearbox setting. - start the vehicle. ▶ Never leave children unattended in the vehicle. When leaving the vehicle, always take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. ▶ Keep the key out of reach of children. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. APPLYING   Push handle 1. The red Ⓗ indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.  The electric parking brake is only securely applied if the red indicator lamp is lit continuously. RELEASING    EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking Switch on the vehicle. Pull handle ①. The red Ⓔ indicator lamp in the driver's display goes out. EMERGENCY BRAKING  Press and hold handle 🔒. As long as the vehicle is in motion, the Release parking brake message is displayed and the red (P) indicator lamp flashes. When the vehicle has been braked to a standstill, the electric parking brake is applied. The red (D) indicator lamp lights up in the driver's display.

Information on collision detection on a parked vehicle

If a collision is detected on the locked vehicle when towing protection is switched on and collision detection is switched on, you will receive a message in the multimedia system when the vehicle is switched on. 

YOU WILL RECEIVE INFORMATION ABOUT THE FOLLOWING POINTS:

• The area of the vehicle that may have been damaged. • The force of the impact.

THE FOLLOWING SITUATION CAN LEAD TO INADVERTENT ACTIVATION:

• The parked vehicle is moved, forexample, in a two-storey garage. Deactivate tow-away protection in order to prevent inadvertent activation. If you deactivate tow-away protection, collision detection will also be deactivated. You can permanently deactivate collision detection via the multimedia system ( → page 390).

SYSTEM LIMITS

DETECTION MAY BE RESTRICTED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- the vehicle is damaged without impact, forexample, if an outside mirror is torn off or the paint is damaged by a key • an impact occurs at low speed • the electric parking brake is not applied You are responsible for your vehicle. Convince yourself that your vehicle is free of damage and roadworthy.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Parking

Setting collision detection on a parked vehicle

Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate the function via Collision notification. A maximum of three incidents can be registered. Up to 15 photos are taken for every incident. In the event of another incident, the photos of the first incident will be overwritten if they have not been deleted already.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE COLLISION PHOTOS FUNCTION

Note possible legal restrictions in some countries regarding automatic recording of the vehicle surroundings. Activate or deactivate Collision photos.

TRANSFERRING THE COLLISION PHOTOS WITH THE MERCEDES ME APP

Select Upload collision photos. Select Upload automatically. Scan the generated QR code on the central display with the Mercedes me App. The encrypted collision photos will then be uploaded to Mercedes me. ① Any device that can scan QR codes can be used to view the collision photos in the Mercedes me App. 

COPYING THE COLLISION PHOTOS TO A USB FLASH DRIVE

Connect a USB flash drive ( → page 687). Select Manage collision photos. Select Copy (USB). All collision photos are copied to the USB flash drive. To ensure secure operation, only use with FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage devices.

DELETING COLLISION PHOTOS

Select Manage collision photos. Select Delete. All collision photos will be deleted.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

Driving and driving safety systems

Driving systems and your responsibility

Your vehicle is equipped with driving systems which assist you in driving, parking and manoeuvring the vehicle. The driving systems are only aids. They are not a substitute for you paying attention to your surroundings and do not relieve you of your responsibility pertaining to road traffic law. The driver is always responsible for maintaining a safe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed, for braking in good time and for staying in lane. Pay attention to the traffic conditions at all times and intervene when necessary. Be aware of the limitations regarding the safe use of these systems. Driving systems can neither reduce the risk of accident if you fail to adapt your driving style nor override the laws of physics. They cannot always take into account road, weather or traffic conditions. Some driving systems can regulate or limit the speed to a previously set value. Draw attention to the stored speed when changing drivers.

Information on vehicle sensors and cameras

Some driving and driving safety systems use cameras as well as radar or ultrasonic sensors to monitor the area in front of, behind or next to the vehicle.   Multifunction camera  Cameras in the outside mirrors  Front radar  Front camera  Corner radars  Ultrasonic sensors  Reversing camera  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

A

WARNING

Risk of accident due to restricted detection performance of vehicle sensors and cameras If the area around vehicle sensors or cameras is covered, damaged or dirty, certain driving and safety systems cannot function correctly. There is a risk of an accident. Keep the area around vehicle sensors or cameras clear of any obstructions and clean. Have damage to the bumper, radiator grille or stone chipping in the area of the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. Particularly, keep the areas around the sensors and cameras free of dirt, ice or slush ( → page 721). The sensors and cameras must not be covered and the detection ranges around them must be kept free. Do not attach additional licence plate brackets, advertisements, stickers, foils or foils to protect against stone chippings in the detection range of the sensors and cameras. Make sure that there are no overhanging loads protruding into the detection range. If there is damage to a bumper or the radiator grille, or after an impact, have the function of the sensors checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Have damage or stone chipping in the area of the cameras on the front and rear windows repaired at a qualified specialist workshop. The reversing camera can extend and retract automatically for the purpose of calibration, even though there is no camera image in the display.

Overview of driving systems and driving safety systems

ABS ( → page 394) • BAS (→ page 394) - ESP ° (→ page 395) - ESP ^® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) (→ page 396) - ESP® Crosswind Assist (→ page 398) - ESP ⁹ trailer stabilisation (→ page 398) EBD ( → page 400) • STEER CONTROL (→ page 400) • HOLD function ( → page 401) • Hill Start Assist ( → page 402) • Adaptive Brake Lights (→ page 402) • Valet service mode • Beginner driver mode (→ page 403) • ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 404) • Cruise control ( → page 406) - Limiter (→ page 407) • DSR ( → page 420) • Speed Limit Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 433) • Traffic Sign Assist (→ page 436) • Traffic light view ( → page 440) • AIRMATIC ( → page 447) • RACE START (→ page 452)  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE

The availability of some functions or sub-functions of the Driving Assistance Package is equipment- or country-specific. The functions of your Driving Assistance Package may differ from the functions listed here. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, Active Blind Spot Assist, Active Brake Assist, Active Lane Keeping Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are also available without the Driving Assistance Package, albeit with restricted functionality. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) • Active Speed Limit Assist ( → page 417) • Route-based speed adaptation ( → page 417) • Active Brake Assist (→ page 427) • Active Steering Assist ( → page 421) • Active Emergency Stop Assist (→ page 423) • Active Lane Change Assist ( → page 425) • Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( → page 419) • Active Blind Spot Assist with exit warning ( → page 441) • Active Lane Keeping Assist ( → page 444) PRE-SAFE* Impulse Side (→ page 155)

PARKING PACKAGE

The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment. • Reversing camera ( → page 454)  360° Camera ( → page 456) • Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( → page 463) • Active Parking Assist ( → page 466) • Remote Parking Assist (→ page 469) • Memory Parking Assist (country-dependent) (→ page 477) • Trailer Manoeuvring Assist ( → page 481)

Information about the AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package

The AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package is on-demand equipment ( → page 119).

NOTE

Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types Driving at increased maximum design speed is only approved for a specific types of tyres. Before using the functions, observe the information on approved tyre types. You could otherwise fail to recognise dangers. You will find the information on the approved tyre types in the "Wheels and tyres" section" (→ page 759).  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

THE AMG DYNAMIC PLUS PACKAGE INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Raising of the maximum design speeds ( → page 837) • RACE START with boost function ( → page 452) • Additional Performance Sound Experience for a particularly sporty driving experience

Function of ABS

THE ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) REGULATES THE BRAKE PRESSURE IN CRITICAL DRIVING SITUATIONS:

- During braking, for instance, at maximum full-stop braking or if there is insufficient tyre traction, the wheels are prevented from locking. • Vehicle steerability while braking is ensured. If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feel a pulsing in the brake pedal. The pulsating brake pedal can be an indication of hazardous road conditions and can serve as a reminder to take extra care while driving.

SYSTEM LIMITS

• ABS is active from speeds of approximately 5 km/h. - ABS may be impaired or may not function if a malfunction has occurred and the yellow ☑ ABS warning lamp lights up continuously after the vehicle is started.

Function of off-road ABS

Off-road ABS is activated automatically when you select the drive program.

OFF-ROAD ABS IS SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

• The front wheels lock cyclically during braking. • The braking distance is shortened due to the digging-in effect.

SYSTEM LIMITS

• Off-road ABS functions at speeds below 40 km/h. • If Off-road ABS intervenes, the ability to steer may be restricted.

Function of BAS

WARNING

Risk of an accident caused by a malfunction in BAS (Brake Assist System) If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance in an emergency braking situation is increased. Depress the brake pedal with full force in emergency braking situations. ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The Brake Assist System (BAS) supports your emergency braking situation with additional brake force.  EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

IF YOU DEPRESS THE BRAKE PEDAL QUICKLY, BAS IS ACTIVATED:

• BAS automatically boosts the brake pressure. • BAS can shorten the braking distance. • ABS prevents the wheels from locking. The brakes will function as usual once you release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Function of ESP®


WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP ^® is deactivated If you deactivate ESP ^® , ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. FSP ^® should only be deactivated in the following situations.

THE ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP ² ) CAN MONITOR AND IMPROVE DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS WITHIN PHYSICAL LIMITS:

- When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways. - When braking.

IF THE VEHICLE DEVIATES FROM THE DIRECTION DESIRED BY THE DRIVER, ESP ⁴ CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

• One or more wheels are braked. • The drive system output is adapted according to the situation.

WHEN ESP® IS DEACTIVATED, THE Ⓞ WARNING LAMP LIGHTS UP CONTINUOUSLY:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved. • The drive wheels could spin. • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. When ESP ^® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP ^® when braking.

WHEN THE ⚡️ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT:

• Adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions. • Do not deactivate ESP*. - Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as is necessary when pulling away.

DEACTIVATE ESP* IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS TO IMPROVE TRACTION:

- When using snow chains. In deep snow. - On sand or gravel. ① Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP ^® is not available due to a malfunction.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

• Warning and indicator lamps (→ page 920) • Display messages (→ page 849)

ETS/4ETS (ELECTRONIC TRACTION SYSTEM)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP ^® and makes it possible to pull away and accelerate on a slippery carriageway. If you select drive program 📄, a special ETS system specifically suited to off-road terrain is automatically activated.

ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

• The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. • More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction.

INFLUENCE OF DRIVE PROGRAMS ON ESP®

The drive programs enable ESP ⁶ to adapt to different weather and road conditions as well as the driver's preferred driving style. Depending on the selected drive program, the appropriate ESP ⁶ mode will be activated (→ page 350, 349).

Function of ESP® (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

YOU CAN SELECT BETWEEN THE FOLLOWING MODES OF THE ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM (ESP®):

- ESP ³ ON - ESP SPORT - ESP ³ OFF

CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP ^® IS ACTIVATED

ESP ^* MONITORS AND IMPROVES DRIVING STABILITY AND TRACTION, PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- When pulling away on wet or slippery carriageways. - When braking. - Vehicles with trailer hitch: in trailer operation from speeds of 65 km/h, if the vehicle/trailer combination begins to sway from side to side. - When there is a strong crosswind of 80 km/h or more.

ESP® CAN STABILISE THE VEHICLE BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

• One or more wheels are braked. • The drive system output is adapted according to the situation. ESP ^* is activated every time the vehicle is started regardless of whether ESP was in ESP ^* SPORT or deactivated before the vehicle was switched off.

WHEN THE ⚡ WARNING LAMP FLASHES, ONE OR SEVERAL WHEELS HAS REACHED ITS GRIP LIMIT:

- Adapt the driving style to suit the prevailing road and weather conditions. • Do not deactivate ESP ^® under any circumstances. • Only depress the accelerator pedal as far as necessary. EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

CHARACTERISTICS OF ESP® SPORT


WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP® SPORT is used incorrectly When you activate ESP® SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Activate ESP® SPORT only in the circumstances described below. When ESP ^® SPORT is selected, the ☐ and ☐ warning lamps light up continuously. Select ESP® SPORT when the vehicle's own oversteering and understeering characteristics are desired, e.g. on cordoned-off roads. Driving with ESP® SPORT or with ESP® deactivated requires an extremely qualified and experienced driver. If ESP SPORT is activated and one or more wheels start to spin, the warning lamp flashes. ESP then only stabilises the vehicle to a limited degree.

ESP® SPORT ALSO HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:

- ESP only improves driving stability to a limited degree. • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. - The power of the drive system is only slightly limited according to the situation and the drive wheels can spin. The spinning of the wheels results in a cutting action for better traction on loose surfaces. - ESP ^a continues to provide assistance when the brakes are firmly applied. • Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active. • Crosswind Assist is no longer active.

CHARACTERISTICS WHEN ESP ⁴ IS DEACTIVATED


WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP ^* is deactivated If you deactivate ESP ^® , ESP ^® cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation.  ESP ^* should only be deactivated in the following situations. When ESP ^® is deactivated, the ☐ and ☐SPOFF warning lamps light up continuously.

DEACTIVATING ESP ° HAS THE FOLLOWING EFFECTS:

• Driving stability will no longer be improved. • The drive wheels could spin. • ETS/4ETS traction control is still active. - Vehicles with trailer hitch: stabilisation of the vehicle/trailer combination is no longer active. • Crosswind Assist is no longer active. Even when ESP ^® is deactivated, you are still assisted by ESP ^® when braking hard.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

IT MAY BE BEST TO ACTIVATE ESP® SPORT OR DEACTIVATE ESP® IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- When using snow chains. In deep snow. - On sand or gravel. ① Spinning the wheels results in a cutting action, which enhances traction. ① Activate ESP ^* as soon as the situations described above no longer apply. ESP ^* will otherwise not be able to stabilise the vehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or a wheel starts to spin. If the warning lamp lights up continuously, ESP is not available due to a malfunction.

OBSERVE THE DISPLAY MESSAGES, WARNING LAMPS AND INDICATOR LAMPS, WHICH ARE SHOWN.

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 920) • Display messages ( → page 849)

ETS/4ETS (ELECTRONIC TRACTION SYSTEM)

ETS/4ETS traction control is part of ESP ^® .

ETS/4ETS CAN IMPROVE THE VEHICLE'S TRACTION BY INTERVENING IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

• The drive wheels are braked individually if they spin. • More drive torque is transferred to the wheel or wheels with traction. 

Function of ESP® Crosswind Assist

ESP ^® CROSSWIND ASSIST DETECTS SUDDEN GUSTS OF SIDE WIND AND HELPS THE DRIVER TO KEEP THE VEHICLE IN THE LANE:

- ESP® Crosswind Assist is active at vehicle speeds between approx. 80 km/h and 200 km/h when driving straight ahead or cornering slightly. - The vehicle is stabilised by means of individual brake application on one side.

Function of ESP ^® trailer stabilisation

WARNING

Risk of accident in poor road and weather conditions In poor road and weather conditions, the trailer stabilisation cannot prevent lurching of the vehicle/trailer combination. Trailers with a high centre of gravity may tip over before ESP ^® detects this. Always adapt your driving style to suit the current road and weather conditions.

WHEN DRIVING WITH A TRAILER, ESP® CAN STABILISE YOUR VEHICLE IF THE TRAILER BEGINS TO SWERVE FROM SIDE TO SIDE:

- ESP ^® trailer stabilisation is active above speeds of 65 km/h. - Slight swerving is reduced by means of a targeted, individual brake application on one side. - In the event of severe swerving, the operating energy output is also reduced and all wheels are braked.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

ESP* TRAILER STABILISATION MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IF:

\- The trailer is not connected correctly or is not detected properly by the vehicle.

Activating or deactivating ESP ^® (Electronic Stability Program)

Multimedia system:  Select ESP. Select On or Off. ESP ³ is deactivated if the ESP ⁶ OFF warning lamp lights up continuously in the driver's display. Observe any information on warning lamps and display messages which may be shown in the driver's display.

Setting ESP ^® with the steering-wheel button

① You can also adjust ESP ^® via the multimedia system ( → page 400).  To set ESP: press upper or lower display button ① repeatedly, until it displays the symbol. If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system(→ page 346).

THE LANE COLOUR OF THE ☐ BUTTON SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENT SETTING:

( blue ): ESP ON (yellow): ESP SPORT (red): ESP ^F OFF To set ESP SPORT: briefly press button 2 when ESP is activated. The road in the button symbol lights up yellow. The □ and □ warning lamps appear in the driver's display. To deactivate ESP*: select ESP® SPORT and then press and hold button 2. The road in the [OFF] button symbol lights up red. The ☐ and ☐SPOFF warning lamps appear in the driver's display.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  To activate ESP*: briefly press button ② when ESP® SPORT is selected or ESP® is deactivated. The road in the ☐ button symbol lights up blue. The □ and □ or □ warning lamps go out. If the symbol is shown with a red ! on the display button, ESP ^* is malfunctioning. Observe the information on warning lamps and display messages which are shown in the driver's display.

Setting ESP ^® in the multimedia system

Multimedia system:         Depending on the equipment, the AMG menu DYNAMIC SELECT can also be called up using the AMG button in the centre console. ESP® is always activated when the vehicle is started. The road in the button symbol lights up blue. To set ESP SPORT: when ESP is activated, briefly press ☐ to change to the Sport program. The road in the button symbol lights up yellow. To deactivate ESP ^® : set the ESP ^® SPORT program and press and hold to deactivate ESP ^® . The road in the button symbol lights up red. The and ESPOFF warning lamps appear in the driver's display. To activate ESP*: briefly press in ESP® SPORT or if ESP® is deactivated. The road in the button symbol lights up blue. The and or ESPOFF warning lamps go out. ① You can also adjust ESP via the steering-wheel button (→ page 399).

Function of EBD

ELECTRONIC BRAKEFORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING:

• Monitoring and regulating the brake pressure on the rear wheels. • Improved driving stability when braking, especially on bends.

Function of STEER CONTROL

STEER CONTROL assists you by transmitting a noticeable steering force to the steering wheel in the direction required for vehicle stabilisation.

THIS STEERING RECOMMENDATION IS GIVEN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- both right wheels or both left wheels are on a wet or slippery road surface when you brake • the vehicle starts to skid  

SYSTEM LIMITS

STEER CONTROL MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- ESP ³ is deactivated. - ESP ^® is malfunctioning. • The steering is malfunctioning. If ESP ^® is malfunctioning, you will be assisted further by the electric power steering.

HOLD function

HOLD FUNCTION

The HOLD function holds the vehicle at a standstill without requiring you to depress the brake pedal, e.g. while waiting in traffic. The HOLD function is only an aid. The responsibility for the vehicle safely standing still remains with the driver.

SYSTEM LIMITS

The HOLD function is only intended to provide assistance when driving and is not a sufficient means of safeguarding the vehicle against rolling away when stationary. • The incline must not be greater than 30%.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION


WARNING

Risk of an accident due to the HOLD function being active when you leave the vehicle

IF THE VEHICLE IS ONLY BRAKED WITH THE HOLD FUNCTION IT COULD, IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ROLL AWAY:

• If there is a malfunction in the system or in the power supply. - If the HOLD function is deactivated by depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. Always secure the vehicle against rolling away before you leave it. 

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary. - The driver's door is closed or the seat belt on the driver's side is fastened. • The vehicle has been started. • The electric parking brake is released. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. • The transmission is in position D, R or N.

ACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION

Depress the brake pedal, and after a short time quickly depress further until the HOLD display appears in the driver's display. Release the brake pedal.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

DEACTIVATING THE HOLD FUNCTION

▶ Depress the accelerator pedal to pull away. or Depress the brake pedal until the HOLD display disappears from the driver's display.

THE HOLD FUNCTION IS DEACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. • The transmission is shifted to position P. • The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake.

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE VEHICLE IS HELD BY TRANSMISSION POSITION ⑭ AND/OR BY THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE:

• The seat belt is unfastened and the driver's door is opened. • The vehicle is switched off. • There is a system malfunction. • The power supply is insufficient. In addition, the Brake immediately message may appear in the driver's display and a horn tone may sound at regular intervals. Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the warning message disappears. The HOLD function is deactivated. Additionally secure the vehicle against rolling away.

Function of Hill Start Assist

HILL START ASSIST HOLDS THE VEHICLE FOR A SHORT TIME WHEN PULLING AWAY ON A HILL UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• The transmission is in position D or R. • The electric parking brake is released. This gives you enough time to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal and depress it before the vehicle begins to roll away. 

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to the vehicle rolling away After a short time, Hill Start Assist no longer holds the vehicle. Swiftly move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Do not leave the vehicle when it is being held by Hill Start Assist.

Function of Adaptive Brake Lights

ADAPTIVE BRAKE LIGHTS WARN FOLLOWING TRAFFIC IN AN EMERGENCY BRAKING SITUATION WITH THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

• flashing the brake lamps • activating the hazard warning lights ( → page 75) If the vehicle is braked sharply from speeds above 50 km/h, the brake lamps flash rapidly. This provides traffic travelling behind you with an even more noticeable warning.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Valet service mode

FUNCTION OF THE VALET SERVICE MODE

In valet service mode, the vehicle acceleration is limited to reduce the risk of damage to and improper use of the vehicle when it is handed over to third parties.

VALET SERVICE MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING:

• Power output is reduced. • In principle, a maximum speed of 80 km/h can be reached. - Drive programs S+ and I* are not available. - ESP ° cannot be deactivated. • Profiles that are still logged in are logged out and unprotected profiles are secured.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING VALET SERVICE MODE

Requirements:

• For activation: the vehicle is stationary. • For deactivation: park position P is engaged. Multimedia system:  ① This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). Activate or deactivate the function. If valet service mode is activated, an indicator lamp in the driver's display lights up.  Alternatively, valet service mode can be activated or deactivated via the Mercedes me connect App. Further information on Mercedes me connect ( → page 664) ① Valet service mode is protected from deactivation by third parties only in combination with Mercedes me connect. If the vehicle is connected to Mercedes me connect, only the profile that activated the mode or the established main user can deactivate it again. ① Valet service mode remains active even following a change of profile or after the vehicle is switched on or off, and must be deliberately deactivated by the authorised user.

Beginner driver mode

FUNCTION OF THE BEGINNER DRIVER MODE

In beginner driver mode, the vehicle acceleration is limited to increase safety for inexperienced drivers.

BEGINNER DRIVER MODE IS CHARACTERISED BY THE FOLLOWING:

• Power output is reduced. • In principle, a maximum speed of 120 km/h can be reached. - Drive programs S ⁺ and I ⁺ are not available. - ESP ^® cannot be deactivated.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING BEGINNER DRIVER MODE

Requirements:

• For activation: the vehicle is stationary. • For deactivation: park position is engaged. Multimedia system:  ① This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). Activate or deactivate the function. If beginner driver mode is activated, an indicator lamp in the driver's display lights up. Alternatively, beginner driver mode can be activated or deactivated via the Mercedes me connect app. Further information on Mercedes me connect ( → page 664) Beginner driver mode is protected from deactivation by third parties only in combination with Mercedes me connect. If the vehicle is connected to Mercedes me connect, only the profile that activated the mode or the established main user can deactivate it again. Beginner driver mode remains active even following a change of profile or after the vehicle is switched on or off, and must be deliberately deactivated by the authorised user.

ATTENTION ASSIST

FUNCTION OF ATTENTION ASSIST

Depending on the country and equipment, ATTENTION ASSIST has the sub-functions microsleep detection and distraction detection. These functions are only available in conjunction with the driver camera in the driver display ( → page 561). ATTENTION ASSIST assists you on long, monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways and trunk roads. If indicators of fatigue or increasing lapses in concentration on the part of the driver are detected, the system suggests taking a break. ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid. It cannot always detect fatigue or lapses in concentration in time. The system is not a substitute for a well-rested and attentive driver. On long journeys, take regular breaks in good time that allow for adequate recuperation.

YOU CAN CHOOSE BETWEEN TWO SETTINGS:

• Standard: normal system sensitivity. - Sensitive: higher system sensitivity. The driver is warned earlier and the attention level detected by ATTENTION ASSIST is adapted accordingly. If fatigue or increasing inattention is detected, the warning appears in the driver display: ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!. you can acknowledge the message and take a break if necessary. If you do not take a break and ATTEN-   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems TION ASSIST continues to detect increasing lapses in concentration, you will be warned again after a minimum of 15 minutes. If ATTENTION ASSIST is unable to calculate the attention level and cannot issue a warning, the System suspended message appears. If the driver display shows a warning, a service area search is offered in the multimedia system. You can select a rest area and start navigation to this rest area. When you restart the vehicle, ATTENTION ASSIST is automatically switched on. The last selected sensitivity level remains stored. 

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:

• The length of the journey since the last break • The attention level determined by ATTENTION ASSIST: \- The more segments ⑦ of the circle displayed, the higher the detected attention level. Fewer segments ② are displayed in the circle as the attention level decreases. • The status of microsleep and distraction detection ①: - Deactivated: display ① is hidden. - Activated but not operational: display ⓣ is grey. - Activated and operational: display ① is green.

MICROSLEEP DETECTION

If the system, which uses the driver camera, detects indicators of microsleep, the ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! warning message appears in the driver's display and a warning tone sounds simultaneously. This warning message must be confirmed by Touch Control. It is recommended that you take a break immediately. If the driver does not react to the microsleep warning, an emergency stop can be initiated by the system ( → page 423).

DISTRACTION DETECTION

Attention Assist can use the driver's camera to detect when the driver is distracted by averting his or her gaze from the road ahead. If the system detects driver distraction, the white message ATTENTION ASSIST Remain alert! appears after a few seconds and a warning tone sounds. If the driver does not return his or her gaze to the traffic situation, the message is displayed in yellow, and a continuous warning tone sounds. If the driver still does not react to the warning, an emergency stop can be initiated by the system ( → page 423).

SYSTEM LIMITS

ATTENTION ASSIST is active in the 60 km/h to 200 km/h speed range. The microsleep detection function is available at a speed of 20 km/h and above. If the system is not available due to a fault, the ATTENTION ASSIST warning light illuminates continuously in the driver display.

PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, ATTENTION ASSIST ONLY FUNCTIONS IN A RESTRICTED MANNER AND WARNINGS MAY BE DELAYED OR NOT OCCUR:

• If you have been driving for less than approximately 30 minutes.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems • If the road condition is poor (uneven road surface or potholes). • If there is a strong side wind. - If you adopt a sporty driving style (high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration). - If the Steering Assist function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active. • If the clock is set to the incorrect time. - If you change lanes and vary your speed frequently in active driving situations.

IN ADDITION, MICROSLEEP AND DISTRACTION DETECTION DOES NOT FUNCTION WHEN THE DRIVER CAMERA CANNOT DETECT THE DRIVER'S EYES, FOREEXAMPLE AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

- The driver's eyes are covered due to the steering column position, forexample. • Poor lighting conditions. • Some types of spectacles or sunglasses. The driver's line of vision is outside the driver camera's field of vision. Also observe any information regarding display messages that can be displayed in the driver's display.

THE ATTENTION ASSIST DROWSINESS OR ALERTNESS ASSESSMENT IS RESET AND RESTARTED WHEN CONTINUING THE JOURNEY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• You switch off the vehicle. - If you unfasten your seat belt and open the driver's door (e.g. to change drivers or take a break).

SETTING ATTENTION ASSIST

Multimedia system: → Settings → Assistance → Assistance ▶ ATTENTION ASSIST

SETTING THE SENSITIVITY

Select ☐ next to ATTENTION ASSIST. Select Standard or Sensitive.

Cruise control and limiter

FUNCTION OF CRUISE CONTROL

Cruise control regulates the speed to the value selected by the driver. If you accelerate to overtake, forexample, the stored speed is not deleted. If you remove your foot from the accelerator pedal after overtaking, cruise control will resume speed regulation back to the stored speed. You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed, up to the speed recommended by range monitoring or up to the set winter tyre limit. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: cruise control is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

DISPLAYS IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

- (grey): cruise control is selected but not yet active, or temporarily passive. • (green): cruise control is active.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems A stored speed appears under the □ display and is indicated in the speedometer.

SYSTEM LIMITS

Cruise control may be unable to maintain the stored speed on uphill gradients. The stored speed is resumed when the gradient evens out. Increase recuperation in good time on long and steep downhill gradients. Take particular note of this when driving a laden vehicle. By doing so, you will make use of the electric motor's braking effect to charge the high-voltage battery. This relieves the load on the brake system and prevents the brakes from overheating and wearing too quickly.

DO NOT USE CRUISE CONTROL IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- in traffic situations which require frequent changes of speed, e.g. in heavy traffic, on winding roads - on slippery roads. Accelerating can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. - when visibility is poor

FUNCTION OF THE LIMITER

The limiter restricts the speed of the vehicle. To reduce the speed to the set speed, the limiter applies the brakes automatically.

YOU CAN LIMIT THE SPEED AS FOLLOWS:

• Variable: for a short-term speed restriction, e.g. in built-up areas • Permanent: for a longer-term speed restriction, e.g. in winter tyre mode You can store any speed above 20 km/h up to the maximum design speed or up to the set winter tyre limit. You can also perform settings while the vehicle is stationary if the vehicle has been started.  Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391). Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the limiter is available up to a maximum speed of 250 km/h.

DISPLAYS IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

• LIM (grey): variable limiter is selected but not yet activated. • LIM (flashes grey): variable limiter is temporarily passive. • LIM (green): variable limiter is activated. A stored speed appears under the LIM display and is indicated in the speedometer. If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point (kickdown), the variable limiter switches to passive mode. The message LIM passive appears in the driver's display and the display LIM flashes.

THE VARIABLE LIMITER IS REACTIVATED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• If the vehicle speed drops below the stored speed. • If the stored speed is called up. • If you store a new speed.  EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

OPERATING CRUISE CONTROL OR THE VARIABLE LIMITER


WARNING

Risk of accident due to stored speed If you call up the stored speed and this is lower than your current speed, the vehicle decelerates. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

Requirements

CRUISE CONTROL

• Cruise control is selected. - ESP ^® must be activated, but not intervening. • The vehicle speed is at least 20 km/h. • The transmission is in position D.

VARIABLE LIMITER

• The variable limiter is selected.  Steering wheel control panel for cruise control and variable limiter  Adopts the stored/detected speed  Deactivates cruise control/the variable limiter  Selects cruise control  Selects the variable limiter  Control panel to increase/decrease speed

Operating cruise control and the variable limiter

Press the corresponding button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

Switching between cruise control and the variable limiter

To select cruise control: press [10]. To select the variable limiter: press LIM. ① Vehicles with Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: the variable limiter is selected by a different button (→ page 413).   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

Activating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press SET/+ or SET/- on control panel ①. The current vehicle speed is stored and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). or Press [RES]. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (cruise control) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the last stored speed has previously been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you activate cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

Increasing/decreasing the stored speed

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①. The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. • The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. or Briefly press SET/+ or SET/- on control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten (e.g. to 50 km/h or 60 km/h). or Press and hold SET/+ or SET- on control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or decreased to the next increment of ten and afterwards by increments of 10 km/h. or Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press SET/+ on control panel ①. When the variable limiter is switched to passive mode, you cannot increase or decrease its stored speed in increments of 1 km/h.

Adopting a detected speed

If cruise control/variable limiter is activated and Traffic Sign Assist has detected a speed restriction sign with a maximum permissible speed and this is displayed in the driver's display; Press RES ^® The maximum permissible speed shown by the traffic sign is stored and the vehicle maintains or does not exceed this speed.

Deactivating cruise control or the variable limiter

Press CANCEL.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, cruise control is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated. When you switch off the vehicle, the last speed stored is deleted. When you select cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is cleared.

INFORMATION ON THE PERMANENT LIMITER

If the vehicle should never exceed a specific speed (e.g. for driving in winter tyre mode), you can set this speed with the permanent limiter. You do this by limiting the speed between 160 km/h and 240 km/h in the multimedia system ( → page 70). Shortly before the set speed is reached, it appears in the driver's display. When you confirm the message, display messages no longer appear until you switch off the vehicle. The speed will only be displayed again once the vehicle has been restarted or if the set speed is changed. The permanent limiter does not switch to passive mode even during kickdown and the driven speed remains below the set speed.

SETTING THE SPEED LIMIT FOR WINTER TYRES

Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate Winter tyre limit.

SETTING A SPEED

Select Winter tyre limit. Select a speed.

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC

Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC described for vehicles without the Driving Assistance package is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC maintains the set speed when driving freely. If vehicles are detected ahead, the set distance is maintained, if necessary until the vehicle comes to a standstill. The vehicle accelerates or brakes depending on the distance to the vehicle in front and the set speed. The speed and distance to the vehicle in front are set and saved using the steering wheel.

AVAILABLE SPEED RANGE:

• Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 160 km/h • Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: 20 km/h - 210 km/h The adjustable set speed may differ if a limit speed (e.g. winter tyre limit) ( → page 410) is stored. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active and the range monitor recommends a lower driving speed, this is automatically adopted as the new set speed. If necessary, the setting speed can be increased again manually.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

OTHER FEATURES OF ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:

- Adjusts the driving style depending on the selected drive program (energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic) (→ page 347) - Initiates acceleration to the stored speed if the turn signal indicator is switched on to change to the overtaking lane • Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: - Reacts to stationary vehicles detected in urban speed ranges (except bicycles and motorcycles) - Takes one-sided overtaking restrictions into account on motorways or on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways (country-dependent) In the DYNAMIC SELECT menu, it is possible to set the driving mode of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. Depending on which drive program is selected, the driving characteristics can be geared towards energy economy, comfort or dynamic performance. In the Active Distance Assist menu, the driving style can be permanently set to Comfort or Dynamic ( → page 419). Vehicles with Active Parking Assist and Driving Assistance Package: If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has braked the vehicle to a standstill, it can automatically follow the vehicle in front when driving off again within 30 seconds if the system detects that the driver is holding the steering wheel. If a critical situation is detected in the surrounding area when driving off, such as a person in the vehicle path, a visual and acoustic warning is given indicating that the driver must now take control of the vehicle. The vehicle is not accelerated any further. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391).

DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY IN THE ASSISTANCE MENU

 Vehicle in front 2 Distance indicator Set specified distance Vehicle detected in front ① is highlighted in green. It may also be in the lane to the left of your vehicle in situations where it is not permitted to overtake on the right, for example on motorways.

PERMANENT STATUS DISPLAY

- (grey): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC selected but not yet active - (green speedometer, grey vehicle): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active, speed set - (green): Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC active and vehicle detected The stored speed is shown under the permanent status display and highlighted on the speedometer. When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is passive, the status display is greyed out. If the speed of the vehicle in front or the speed adjustment is less than the stored speed due to the route event ahead, the segments in the speedometer light up.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  The display appears briefly if you increase or decrease the set target distance  The green vehicle symbol 📄 is displayed cyclically when the vehicle is ready to pull away. ① If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of the Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system is switched to passive mode. The following message appears briefly in the driver's display 📁 suspended.

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

- In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. - The windscreen in the area of the camera is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. • If the radar sensors are dirty or covered. - In multi-storey car parks or on roads with steep uphill or downhill gradients. • If there are narrow vehicles in front, such as bicycles or motorcycles. In addition, on slippery roads, braking or accelerating can cause one or several wheels to lose traction and the vehicle could then skid. Do not use Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC in these situations. 

WARNING

Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. - If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. - If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  

WARNING

Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A LIMITED REACTION:

• when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes • to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles • to complex traffic conditions • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations. Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

OPERATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC AND THE VARIABLE LIMITER


WARNING

Risk of accident if detection function of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is impaired

ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DOES NOT REACT OR HAS A LIMITED REACTION:

• when driving on a different lane or when changing lanes • to pedestrians, animals, bicycles or stationary vehicles, or unexpected obstacles • to complex traffic conditions • to oncoming vehicles and crossing traffic As a result, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC may neither give warnings nor intervene in such situations.  Always observe the traffic conditions carefully and react accordingly.  EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

A

WARNING

Risk of accident from acceleration or braking by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC

ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC MAY ACCELERATE OR BRAKE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, FOR EXAMPLE:

• If the vehicle pulls away using Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC. - If the stored speed is called up and is considerably faster or slower than the currently driven speed. - If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC no longer detects a vehicle in front or does not react to relevant objects. Always carefully observe the traffic conditions and be ready to brake at all times. Take into account the traffic situation before calling up the stored speed.

A

WARNING

Risk of accident due to insufficient deceleration by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC brakes your vehicle with up to 50% of the possible deceleration. If this deceleration is not sufficient, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC alerts you with a visual and acoustic warning. Adjust your speed and maintain a suitable distance from the vehicle in front. Brake the vehicle yourself and/or take evasive action.

A

WARNING

Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: • at speed limits below 20 km/h • in wet conditions or in fog • when towing a trailer ▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions.

Requirements

ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC:

• The electric parking brake is released. - ESP ^® is activated and is not intervening. • The transmission is in position D. • All the doors are closed. - Check of the radar sensor system has been successfully completed. • Snow chain mode is not active ( → page 754). • DSR is deactivated. • Drive program 📁 is deactivated.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

VARIABLE LIMITER:

• The variable limiter is selected.  RES® Adopts the stored/detected speed CANCEL Deactivates Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC/ the variable limiter Increases/decreases the speed Increases/decreases the specified distance Switches between the variable limiter and Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC To operate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press the respective button with only one finger or swipe on the control panel.

SWITCHES BETWEEN THE VARIABLE LIMITER AND ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC

Press

ACTIVATING THE VARIABLE LIMITER OR ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC

To activate without a stored speed: press SET/+, SET/- or RES/+. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The current vehicle speed is stored and maintained (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or limited (variable limiter) by the vehicle. OF To activate with a stored speed: press RES ¹⁰ . Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC: remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. The last stored speed is called up and the vehicle maintains this speed (Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC) or does not exceed it (variable limiter). If the stored speed has been deleted, the current vehicle speed is stored. When you switch off the vehicle, the stored speed is deleted. When you activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the last speed stored for the variable limiter is deleted.

INCREASING OR REDUCING THE SPEED

To increase the stored speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①. • The stored speed is increased by 1 km/h. To decrease the stored speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. • The stored speed is decreased by 1 km/h. or   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Briefly press SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or reduced by 10 km/h. or Press and hold SET/+ on the upper section or SET/- on the lower section of control panel ①. The stored speed is increased or reduced in increments of 10 km/h. or Accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed. Press SET/+ on the upper section of control panel ①.

ADOPTING THE LIMIT SPEED SHOWN IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or the variable limiter: press SET/+, SET/- or RES[0]. Accept the displayed speed limit: press [RES]^[0] . The limit speed displayed in the driver's display is adopted as the stored speed. The vehicle adapts its speed to that of the vehicle in front, but only up to the stored speed, or limits its speed accordingly. A speed limit shown in the driver display is only adopted while driving, not when stationary.

PULLING AWAY WITH ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC

Activate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and remove your foot from the brake pedal. Press RES ^® of Depress the accelerator pedal briefly and firmly. The functions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC continue to be carried out.

REDUCING OR INCREASING THE SPECIFIED DISTANCE FROM THE VEHICLE IN FRONT

Press □. The □ display appears. The specified distance is reduced by one level. If the lowest level is already selected, the selection jumps to the highest level.

DEACTIVATING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC OR THE VARIABLE LIMITER


WARNING

Risk of an accident due to Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC being active when you leave the driver's seat If you leave the driver's seat while the vehicle is being braked by Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC only, the vehicle can roll away. Always deactivate Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away before you leave the driver's seat. Press CANCEL.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  If you brake, deactivate ESP or if ESP intervenes, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. The variable limiter is not deactivated.

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE SPEED LIMIT ASSIST

If a changed speed limit is detected and the automatic adoption of speed limits is switched on, this is automatically adopted as the stored speed ( → page 419). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not accepted. The driven speed is adjusted when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign at the latest. In the case of signs indicating entry into an urban area, the speed is adapted according to the speed permitted within the urban area. The speed limit display in the driver's display is always updated when the vehicle is level with the traffic sign. If you are driving on German motorways and there is no speed limit, the system uses the speed stored for a stretch of road with no speed limit as the set speed. If you do not alter the stored speed on a stretch of road with no speed limit, the recommended speed of 130 km/h is adopted. If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has been put into passive mode by pressing the accelerator pedal, only speed limits which are higher than the set speed are adopted. The maximum permissible speed does not take the road condition and current weather and traffic conditions into account. Adjust your speed accordingly, when necessary. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391).

SYSTEM LIMITS

The system limits of Traffic Sign Assist apply to the detection of traffic signs ( → page 436). Speed limits below 20 km/h are not automatically adopted by the system as the stored speed. Temporary speed restrictions (e.g. for a certain time or due to weather conditions) cannot be properly detected by the system. The maximum permissible speed applying to a vehicle with a trailer is not detected by the system. Adjust the speed in these situations. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to Active Speed Limit Assist adapting the vehicle's speed The speed adopted by Active Speed Limit Assist may be too high or incorrect in some individual cases, such as: • at speed limits below 20 km/h • in wet conditions or in fog • when towing a trailer ▶ Ensure that the driven speed complies with traffic regulations. Adjust the driving speed to suit current traffic and weather conditions. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

FUNCTION OF ROUTE-BASED SPEED ADAPTATION

When Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated, the vehicle speed will be adapted accordingly to the route events ahead. Depending on the drive program selected, the vehicle negotiates a route event ahead in an energy-saving, comfortable or dynamic manner. When the route event has been passed, the vehicle accelerates again to the stored speed. The set distance to the vehicle   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems in front, vehicles detected ahead and speed restrictions ahead are taken into account. Route-based speed adaptation can be activated in the multimedia system ( → page 419).

THE FOLLOWING ROUTE EVENTS ARE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT:

Bends Roundabouts T-junctions - Turns and exits • Traffic jams ahead (only with Live Traffic (→ page 617))

ALSO, THE SPEED IS REDUCED IF THE TURN SIGNAL INDICATOR IS SWITCHED ON AND ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS IS DETECTED:

• Turning at junctions • Driving on slowing-down lanes - Driving on lanes adjacent to slowing-down lanes The driver is responsible for choosing the right speed and observing other road users. This applies in particular to junctions, roundabouts and traffic lights, as route-based speed adaptation does not brake the vehicle to a standstill.

SPEED ADAPTATION IS CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

- If the turn signal indicator is switched off before the route event and it is therefore assumed that the route event is not relevant to the driver. • If the driver depresses the accelerator or brake pedal during the process. 

SYSTEM LIMITS

Route-based speed adaptation does not take right of way regulations into account. The driver is responsible for complying with road traffic regulations and driving at a suitable speed.

IN DIFFICULT CONDITIONS, THE SPEED SELECTION MADE BY THE SYSTEM MAY NOT ALWAYS BE SUITABLE. THIS APPLIES TO THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOREEXAMPLE:

• the road's course not clearly visible Road narrowing • varying maximum permissible speeds in individual lanes, forexample at toll stations • wet road surfaces, snow or ice - If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established. In these situations the driver must intervene accordingly.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  

WARNING

Risk of accident in spite of route-based speed adaptation Route-based speed adaptation can malfunction or be temporarily unavailable in the following situations: • If the driver does not follow the calculated route • If map data is not up-to-date or available • In the event of roadworks • In bad weather or road conditions • If the accelerator pedal is depressed • In the event of electronically displayed speed limitations Adapt the speed to the traffic situation.

SETTING ACTIVE DISTANCE ASSIST DISTRONIC DRIVING STYLES

Requirements

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Multimedia system: 

SELECTING A DRIVING STYLE

Select Based on DYNAMIC SELECT, Dynamic or Comfortable. Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 413).

SETTING SPEED ADJUSTMENT

Select Adopt speed limit or Route-based speed adaptation. When these functions are active, the vehicle speed is adjusted depending on the route events ahead.

i WHEN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVE, THE DETECTED SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE SPEED LIMIT:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Cruise control - Variable limiter i Further information on speed adjustment(→ page 417).

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STOP-AND-GO ASSIST

Active Stop-and-Go Assist helps you when in traffic jams on multi-lane roads with separate carriageways by automatically pulling away within up to 60 seconds and with moderate steering manoeuvres. It orients itself using the vehicle in front and lane markings. Active Stop-and-Go Assist automatically maintains a safe distance from the vehicle in front and vehicles cutting in. Active Stop-and-Go Assist requires you, as the driver, to keep your hands on the steering wheel at all times so that you are able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391).  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

ACTIVE STOP-AND-GO ASSIST ACTIVATES AUTOMATICALLY WHEN ALL OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:

• You are in a traffic jam on a motorway or high-speed major road. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated and active ( → page 413). • Active Steering Assist is activated and active ( → page 423). • You are travelling no faster than 60 km/h. When Active Stop-and-Go Assist is active the status display appears in the driver's display.

SYSTEM LIMITS

The system limitations of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist apply to Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( → page 421).

DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

FUNCTION OF THE DSR SYSTEM

DSR is an aid to assist you when driving downhill. It keeps the speed of travel at the selected target speed. The steeper the downhill gradient, the greater the D S R braking effect on the vehicle. On flat stretches of road and uphill gradients, the DSR brakes the vehicle minimally or not at all. When DSR is activated and the transmission is in position [D] , [R] or [N] , DSR controls the driving speed. The target speed can be set to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h. By braking or accelerating, you can drive at a higher or lower speed than the target speed at any time. If you drive faster than 45 km/h or change the driving programme (except in /), DSR switches off automatically. The off message appears in the driver's display. The status indicator in the driver's display goes out. You also hear a warning tone. 

INFORMATION ON DSR


WARNING

Risk of skidding and accident when DSR is activated on slippery road surfaces If the driven speed and the target speed differ, the wheels may lose traction.  Take into account the road surface and the difference between the driving speed and target speed before activating DSR. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391). You are always responsible for keeping control of the vehicle and for assessing whether the downhill gradient can be negotiated. Depending on road surface and tyres, DSR may not always be able to keep to the target speed. Select a target speed suitable for the environmental conditions and also apply the brakes yourself if required.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING DSR (DOWNHILL SPEED REGULATION)

Requirements

• You are driving at 40 km/h or slower. If the vehicle speed is too high, the Max. speed 40 km/h message appears in the driver's display. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, TEMPOMAT, variable limiter and recuperation stage DAuto are switched off.   EQE - Owner's Manual  Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  Multimedia system:  Select A status display appears in the driver's display when the function is activated.

CHANGING THE TARGET SPEED

When DSR is activated, you can change the target speed to a value between 2 km/h and 18 km/h.  To increase the target speed: swipe upwards from the bottom of control panel ①. • The target speed is increased by 1 km/h. or Press and hold Ⓞ at SET/+ the top of the control panel. The target speed is increased in 1-km/hincrements. To decrease the target speed: swipe downwards from the top of control panel ①. • The target speed is decreased by 1 km/h. of Press and hold ① at SET/- the bottom of the control panel. The target speed is reduced in 1-km/hincrements. The set target speed is shown next to the status display in the driver's display.

Active Steering Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST

Active Steering Assist is only available up to a speed of 210 km/h. The system helps you to stay in the centre of the lane by means of moderate steering interventions. Depending on the speed driven, Active Steering Assist uses the vehicles ahead and lane markings as a reference. Depending on the country, in the lower speed range Active Steering Assist can use the surrounding traffic as a reference. If necessary, Active Steering Assist can then also provide assistance outside the centre of the lane. If the detection of lane markings and vehicles ahead is impaired, Active Steering Assist switches to passive mode. The system provides no support in this case.

PERMANENT STATUS DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

[NO TEXT] Grey: activated and passive [NO TEXT] Green: activated and active [NO TEXT] Red, flashing: prompts the driver to actively confirm or transition from active to passive status, system limit detected   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  During the transition from active to passive status, the symbol is shown as enlarged and flashing. Once the system is passive, the symbol is shown as grey in the driver's display.

CONTACT DETECTION

The driver is required to keep their hands on the steering wheel at all times and be able to intervene at any time to correct the course of the vehicle and keep it in lane. The driver must expect a change from active to passive mode or vice versa at any time.  If the system detects that the driver has not steered the vehicle for a considerable period of time or has removed their hands from the steering wheel, an optical warning is given first. Display ① appears in the driver's display. If the driver still does not steer the vehicle, or gives no confirmation to the system, a warning tone sounds in addition to the visual warning message. If the driver does not react to this warning for a considerable period, an emergency stop is initiated ( → page 423). The warning is not issued or is stopped as soon as the system detects that the driver has touched the steering wheel. The touch detection may be limited or inoperative if there is no direct contact between the hand and the steering wheel, e.g. when wearing gloves or if there is a steering wheel cover on the steering wheel. If Active Steering Assist detects that a system limit has been reached, a visual warning is issued and a warning tone sounds. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391).

SYSTEM LIMITS

Active Steering Assist has a limited steering torque for lateral guidance. In some cases, the steering intervention is not sufficient to keep the vehicle in the lane.

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING INSTANCES:

- There is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, greatly varying light conditions or strong shadows on the carriageway. • There is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. • Insufficient road illumination. - The windscreen is dirty, misted up, damaged or covered in the vicinity of the camera, e.g. by a sticker. - No, or several, unclear lane markings are present for one lane, or the markings change quickly, forexample, in a construction area or junctions. - The lane markings are worn away, dark or covered up, e.g. by dirt or snow. - If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. • The road is narrow and winding. - There are obstacles on the lane or projecting out into the lane, such as object markers. - If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

THE SYSTEM DOES NOT PROVIDE ASSISTANCE IN THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• On very tight bends and when turning. - When crossing junctions. • At roundabouts or toll stations. - When actively changing lane without switching on the turn signal indicator. • When the tyre pressure is too low. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limits of Active Steering Assist are reached there is no guarantee that the system will remain active or will keep the vehicle in lane. Always keep your hands on the steering wheel and observe the traffic carefully. ▶ Always steer the vehicle paying attention to traffic conditions. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if Active Steering Assist unexpectedly intervenes The detection of lane markings and objects may malfunction and cause unexpected steering interventions. ▶ Steer according to traffic conditions. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ACTIVE STEERING ASSIST

Requirements:

- ESP ^® is activated, but is not intervening. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is activated. Multimedia system:          Activate or deactivate Active Steering Assist.

Function of Active Emergency Stop Assist

Active Emergency Stop Assist monitors the steering wheel and the accelerator and brake pedals. If the system detects a lack of driver activity and the vehicle threatens to leave the lane, a warning can be issued and an emergency stop initiated. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: The system is available from a speed of approx. 60 km/h. Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: If Active Steering Assist is switched off, the system is available from a speed of approx. 60 km/h.

IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS THAT THE VEHICLE IS THREATENING TO LEAVE THE LANE, A WARNING CAN BE ISSUED AND AN EMERGENCY STOP INITIATED.

- The driver does not touch the steering wheel for a longer period of time or no steering movement can be measured for a longer period of time (depending on the vehicle equipment). • Neither the accelerator nor the brake pedal is depressed.   Vehicles with Driving Assistance package: if Active Steering Assist is switched on and active, only the steering wheel is monitored by the system. If the driver does not touch the steering wheel for a longer period of time, a warning may be given despite pedal actuation. Also observe the instructions on the contact detection of Active Steering Assist ( → page 421). 

ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST ISSUES THE FOLLOWING WARNINGS IN ORDER:

• Display message 🔒 appears in the driver's display. • In addition to display ① a warning tone sounds. - The message Beginning emergency stop will appear in the driver's display, a continuous warning tone will sound, the vehicle will no longer accelerate and, if necessary, slight belt tensioning will be produced. - The vehicle speed is reduced in increments until it is at a standstill. Sharp brake impulses are also produced. ① Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: If Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is active and the driver unfastens the seat belt and driver's door, an emergency stop can be initiated immediately. Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Depending on the country, a lane change to the adjacent lane is carried out, if possible. It is only possible to change across one lane and only into the outer lane, not onto the hard shoulder. When automatic braking is initiated, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. Depending on the country, the hazard warning light system is switched on.

WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STATIONARY, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS ARE CARRIED OUT:

• The vehicle is secured with the electric parking brake. • The vehicle is unlocked. - If possible, an emergency call is placed to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. Before automatic braking is initiated, you can cancel Active Emergency Stop Assist by steering.

YOU CAN CANCEL THE INTERVENTION BY ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST AFTER AUTOMATIC BRAKING IS INITIATED BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

• Accelerating or braking: the emergency stop is cancelled, but the warning message, warning tone and power steering remain active • Steering: power-assisted steering is cancelled, the warning message and warning tone remain active and the vehicle continues to be braked   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  Active Emergency Stop Assist can initiate an emergency stop a maximum of three times within a driving cycle. After that, Active Steering Assist and Active Emergency Stop Assist are disabled until the vehicle has been restarted.

SYSTEM LIMITS

FOR THE DETECTION OF VEHICLES AND OTHER OBSTACLES, OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) • Active Steering Assist ( → page 421) • Active Lane Change Assist ( → page 425) • Active Brake Assist ( → page 427)

Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package:

ACTIVE EMERGENCY STOP ASSIST IS INACTIVE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• Active Lane Keeping Assist has reached a system limit. • Active Lane Keeping Assist is not operational (grey status display) or deactivated (white status display) ( → page 444).

Active Lane Change Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST

Active Lane Change Assist is activated via the turn signal indicator, and supports the driver when changing lanes by applying steering torque.

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE MET FOR THIS FUNCTION:

• You are driving on a motorway or a main road similar to a motorway. • The travel speed is between approximately 80 km/h and 180 km/h. • A dashed boundary marking separates the adjacent lane. • No vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane. - The sensors have detected a vehicle with sufficient distance behind your own vehicle once since the last vehicle start. • Active Lane Change Assist is selected in the multimedia system ( → page 427). • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are activated on the motorway.

THE SYSTEM IS NOT AVAILABLE AND MUST BE REACTIVATED:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist were already activated before the vehicle entered the motorway. - The system briefly no longer recognises the road being travelled on as a motorway or a main road similar to a motorway, e.g. at a motorway junction. As soon as Active Lane Change Assist detects a suitable road again, you can reactivate it using the buttons RESI®, SET+ or SET-. Depending on the respective country, Active Lane Change Assist activates again automatically. The Indicating briefly starts lane change message is then shown on the driver display.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems   Notification on the driver display in the menu Assistance ① Green arrow: lane change initiated 2 Red arrow: lane change cancelled If Active Lane Change Assist is available, the notification 🧑️ appears with green arrows on the driver display. If the system has been activated but is not currently available, the notification 🧑️ appears with grey arrows on the driver display. If no vehicle or obstacle is detected in the adjacent lane, and a lane change is permitted, the lane change is initiated as soon as the driver activates the turn signal indicator. The lane change is indicated to the driver by a green flashing arrow next to the steering wheel symbol [icon]. In the Assistance menu, a green arrow ① indicating the respective adjacent lane appears on the driver display. The message Lane change to the left, for example, also appears.

ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST CAN BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

• The environmental conditions change (e.g. obstacle detected). • The driver takes his hands off the steering wheel. • The driver steers too hard or in the opposite direction. • The driver switches on the turn signal indicator in the opposite direction. • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC or Active Steering Assist are deactivated. • The lane change cannot be executed by the vehicle as planned.

A CANCELLATION OF ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST IS DISPLAYED AS FOLLOWS:

• The arrow in the selected direction of travel turns red. • A corresponding message appears on the driver display. • In certain circumstances a warning tone sounds.

WARNING

Risk of accident when changing lane to an occupied adjacent lane Lane Change Assist cannot always clearly detect if the adjacent lane is free. The lane change might be initiated although the adjacent lane is not free. Before changing lanes, make sure that the neighbouring lane is free and there is no danger to other road users. Monitor the lane change.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  

WARNING

Risk of accident if Lane Change Assist unexpectedly stops functioning If the system limitations for Lane Change Assist have been reached, there is no guarantee that the system will remain active. Lane Change Assist cannot then assist you by applying steering torque. Always monitor the lane change and keep your hands on the steering wheel. Observe the traffic conditions and steer and/or brake if necessary.

SYSTEM LIMITS

For Active Lane Change Assist, the system limits of Active Steering Assist ( → page 421) apply.

IN ADDITION, THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• The sensors are damaged, covered or dirty ( → page 391). • The exterior lighting indicates a defect. - The system does not recognise a suitable road, e.g. in narrow bends or shortly after a slip road. • The vehicle is within a construction site. Active Lane Change Assist sensors adjust automatically while a certain distance is being driven after the vehicle has been delivered. Active Lane Change Assist is unavailable during this teach-in process, and no arrows are displayed next to the Active Steering Assist symbol. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise potential dangers ( → page 391).

SETTING ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST

Multimedia system: Settings Assistance Driving Active Lane Change Assist Select Active Lane Change Assist. Select between the On or Off setting options. ① If Active Steering Assist has been deactivated, Active Lane Change Assist cannot be operated.

Active Brake Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST

ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CONSISTS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Distance warning function Collision warning • Autonomous braking function • Situation-dependent brake force boosting • Cornering Assist • Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: Evasive Steering Assist - Vehicles with Driving Assistance Package: intersection start-off function Active Brake Assist can help you to minimise the risk of a collision with vehicles, cyclists or pedestrians or to reduce the effects of such a collision.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  If Active Brake Assist has detected a risk of collision, a warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up.  In the Assistance menu, too near a distance ① to the vehicle in front is displayed in red. If you further reduce the distance, the vehicle in front is also highlighted in red. When the system detects a risk of collision, red radar waves ② appear in front of the vehicle. Vehicles with PRE-SAFE: depending on the country, an additional haptic warning occurs in the form of slight, repeated tensioning of the seat belt. Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning assistance is activated, the Active Brake Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting ( → page 294). If you do not react to the warning, autonomous braking can be initiated in critical situations. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up simultaneously with the brake application. If you apply the brake yourself in a critical situation or apply the brake during autonomous braking, situation-dependent brake force boosting occurs. The brake pressure increases up to maximum full-stop braking if necessary.  If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, pop up ① appears in the driver's display and then automatically goes out after a short time. If the autonomous braking function or situation-dependent brake force boosting is triggered, additional preventive measures for occupant protection (PRE-SAFE ^® ) may also be initiated.  

WARNING

Risk of an accident caused by limited detection performance of Active Brake Assist Active Brake Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and complex traffic situations.

IN SUCH CASES, ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MIGHT:

• Give a warning or brake without reason • Not give a warning or not brake Active Brake Assist is only an aid. The driver is responsible for maintaining a sufficiently safe distance to the vehicle in front, vehicle speed and for braking in good time. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Active Brake Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated or the functions are restricted, e.g. due to activation of another driving system, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp appears in the driver's display. If the system is unavailable due to dirty or damaged sensors or due to a fault, or if the functions are restricted, the ⚠! Active Brake Assist warning lamp appears in the driver's display. Also observe the system limits of Active Brake Assist. The individual subfunctions are available in the following speed ranges:

DISTANCE WARNING FUNCTION

You are warned by the distance warning function from approximately 30 km/h if, over several seconds, the distance maintained to the vehicle travelling in front is too near for the driven speed. In this case, the △ distance warning lamp in the driver's display lights up. If the distance to the vehicle in front continues to decrease at higher speeds, the △ distance warning lamp begins to flash.

COLLISION WARNING

The collision warning can assist you in the following situations from approximately 7 km/h with an intermittent warning tone and the distance warning lamp.

VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

- at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead - at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and cyclists ahead - at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists - at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead - at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists - at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles • at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems • at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

AUTONOMOUS BRAKING FUNCTION

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, the autonomous braking function may intervene in the following situations:

VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

- at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead - at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and stationary vehicles - at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists

VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

- at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead • at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists - at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles • at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead • at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

SITUATION-DEPENDENT BRAKE FORCE BOOSTING

If the vehicle is travelling at speeds above approximately 7 km/h, situation-dependent brake force boosting may intervene in the following situations.

VEHICLES WITHOUT DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead - at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead, pedestrians walking in the direction of travel and stationary vehicles - at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching crossing pedestrians and cyclists - at speeds up to approximately 60 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE:

• at speeds up to approximately 250 km/h when approaching vehicles ahead - at speeds up to approximately 120 km/h when approaching crossing vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists - at speeds up to approximately 100 km/h when approaching stationary vehicles • at speeds up to approximately 80 km/h when approaching cyclists ahead - at speeds up to approximately 70 km/h when approaching stationary pedestrians and cyclists

CANCELLING A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST YOU CAN CANCEL A BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST AT ANY TIME BY:

• Fully depressing the accelerator pedal or with kickdown. • Releasing the brake pedal.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST MAY CANCEL THE BRAKE APPLICATION WHEN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS IS FULFILLED:

• you manoeuvre to avoid the obstacle • there is no longer a risk of collision • an obstacle is no longer detected in front of your vehicle

REACTION TO ONCOMING ROAD USERS (ONLY VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE)

ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST CAN ALSO REACT TO DETECTED ONCOMING ROAD USERS:

• Reaction up to speeds of approximately 100 km/h - Warning for oncoming road users via acoustic warning and distance warning lamp - Autonomous braking application in order to reduce the severity of an accident

CORNERING FUNCTION

If the system detects a danger of collision from oncoming road users when turning across an oncoming lane, autonomous braking can be initiated at speeds of up to approx. 20 km/h.

INTERSECTION START-OFF FUNCTION (ONLY VEHICLES WITH DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE)

 If, when pulling away or driving at a walking pace, the risk of collision with other crossing vehicles is detected, three red arrows pointing in the direction of the crossing road user light up one by one along with the distance warning lamp in the driver's display. If the situation is particularly critical, the arrows flash. A warning tone will also sound. If you do not react to the warning in critical situations, acceleration may be restricted or autonomous braking may be initiated. Autonomous braking can also prevent the vehicle from pulling away and hold it at a standstill. In particularly critical situations, Active Brake Assist can also initiate autonomous braking directly. In this case, the warning tone sounds and the distance warning lamp lights up simultaneously with the brake application. If autonomous braking or situation-dependent brake force boosting has occurred, a pop up appears in the driver's display and then automatically goes out after a short time. In the Late setting of Active Brake Assist, the purely visual warning level and the limitation of possible acceleration is deactivated. If the situation is particularly critical, a visual warning may continue to be displayed, a warning tone may sound and autonomous braking may be initiated.

EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST


WARNING

Risk of accident despite Evasive Steering Assist Evasive Steering Assist cannot always recognise objects or complex traffic situations clearly. Moreover, the steering support provided by Evasive Steering Assist is not sufficient to avoid a collision. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Evasive Steering Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve if necessary. End the support by actively steering in non-critical situations. Drive at an appropriate speed if there are pedestrians close to the path of your vehicle.

EVASIVE STEERING ASSIST HAS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:

• Detection of pedestrians, cyclists and vehicles. - Assistance through power-assisted steering if it detects a swerving manoeuvre. - Activation by an abrupt steering movement during a swerving manoeuvre. • Assistance during swerving and straightening of the vehicle. - Reaction from a speed of approximately 20 km/h up to a speed of approximately 110 km/h. The steering support of Evasive Steering Assist can be cancelled at any time by counter steering.

SYSTEM LIMITS

Full system performance is not available for a short time after switching on the vehicle or after driving off. As long as the functions are restricted, the Active Brake Assist warning lamp can also be shown in the driver's display. Depending on the environmental conditions, it may take a few minutes before full system performance is available.

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION, PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- In snow, rain, fog, heavy spray, if there is glare, in direct sunlight or in greatly varying light conditions. • If the sensors are dirty, misted up, damaged or covered. (→ page 391) - If the sensors are impaired due to interference from other radar sources, e.g. strong radar reflections in multi-storey car parks. - If a loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre has been detected and displayed. - In complex traffic situations where objects cannot always be clearly identified. - If pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles move quickly into the sensor detection range. - If road users are hidden by other objects or are located close to other objects. - If the typical outline of a pedestrian or cyclist cannot be distinguished from the background. - If a pedestrian or cyclist is not detected as such, e.g. due to special clothing or other objects. • If the driver's seat belt is not fastened. • On bends with a tight radius. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

SETTING ACTIVE BRAKE ASSIST

Requirements:

• The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate the function. ① It is recommended that you always leave Active Brake Assist activated. When Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the distance warning function, the collision warning, the autonomous braking function and Evasive Steering Assist are deactivated. If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the symbol appears in the status bar of the driver's display, and the system is reactivated the next time the vehicle is started.

SETTING THE TIME OF THE WARNINGS

Select ☐ next to Active Brake Assist. Select Early, Medium or Late. If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indications of fatigue or a microsleep, the system can issue a warning earlier than the set time (country-dependent). Further information about ATTENTION ASSIST ( → page 404).

Speed Limit Assist

FUNCTION OF SPEED LIMIT ASSIST

Speed Limit Assist uses OpenStreetMap data, which is made available under the conditions of the Open Database License (OBbL). For more information, see: https://www.osmfoundation.org/wiki/licence. Speed Limit Assist detects speed limits with multifunction camera and displays them in the driver's display and optionally in the head-up display. The camera also detects speed limits with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391).

WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can set whether the warning should be visual (by flashing the traffic sign in the driver display) or visual and audible. The selection of the type of warning is confirmed country-specifically by an indication in the driver display.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems    ① Warning only visual 2 WARNING off The type, duration and activation threshold of the speed warning, as well as the possibility of setting the activation threshold above which the warning is to be triggered, are subject to the country-specific legislation of the country of delivery of the vehicle. DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY  1 Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction 3 Additional sign with restriction Traffic signs which have an impact on the maximum permissible speed, e.g. signs indicating the beginning or end of dual carriageways, can also be detected. The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver's display, forexample when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display. If Speed Limit Assist cannot determine the current maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display:  This is displayed continuously if the vehicle is in a country where Speed Limit Assist is not supported. Speed Limit Assist is not available in all countries. If the system is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault or dirt on the windscreen, a corresponding message appears in the driver display. Depending on the country, the warning light ☐ also appears in the driver's display. ① Please also note the information on the display messages ( → page 849).  

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. - If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. - if the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insufficiently illuminated or distorted. • Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, such as transmission frequency. - if the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. in the case of traffic signs in construction sites, at exits and driveways, in the case of adjacent lanes or parallel roads, in the case of pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights • if the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard - if the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and deviates from the route guidance of the navigation system, e.g. in or after road works • After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. - If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them. - If you are using transport equipment secured with a trailer coupling, such as a bicycle rack, the system may react to restrictions for car/trailer combinations.

SETTING SPEED LIMIT ASSIST

Multimedia system:          

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED WARNING

① The speed warning is switched on by default (depending on the country). ▶ Switch off Speed limit warning. The speed warning remains off according to country-specific legislation until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and (depending on equipment) the driver's door is opened. The audible speed warning can also be switched off and on by quick access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of the central display or via a voice control command (functions are available depending on the country).

CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED WARNING

Modify the warning on Visual or Visual & audible.

SWITCHING THE ADVISORY TONE FOR A NEW SPEED LIMIT ON OR OFF

The advisory tone for a new speed limit is switched off at the factory. The function determines whether each change of the displayed speed in the driver's display is supported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Activate or deactivate the function. The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. The availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.

WHEN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS IS ACTIVE, THE DETECTED SPEED CAN BE MANUALLY ADOPTED AS THE SPEED LIMIT:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC Cruise control - Variable limiter Further information about Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 413).

Traffic Sign Assist

FUNCTION OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST

The traffic sign assistant detects the traffic signs with the multifunction camera and compares them with the information on the digital road map of the navigation system. It supports you by showing detected speed limits and overtaking bans in the driver's display. Speed limits can also be displayed in the head-up display. The system can issue a warning when you exceed the maximum permissible speed. In some countries, the system can provide you with further functions and can warn you when you are approaching pedestrian crossings or when you are about to drive past stop signs or red lights unintentionally. The camera also detects and analyses traffic signs with a restriction indicated by an additional sign (e.g. when wet). Traffic Sign Assist portrays only selected signs in the driver's display. Actual traffic signs and speed limits have priority over traffic signs and speed limits shown in the driver's display.

ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

- select a speed adapted to the traffic, surroundings and weather conditions • observe actual traffic signs • observe applicable traffic rules and regulations Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391). EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  DISPLAYS IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY  Permissible speed 2 Permissible speed when there is a restriction Additional sign with restriction The system can show up to two traffic signs in the driver's display simultaneously. The system always prioritises displaying speed limits. Up to one traffic sign with a maximum permissible speed can be shown in the head-up display. If two speed signs are shown in the driver's display, forexample when speed limits are detected, the value of left-hand speed limit is transmitted to the limiter, cruise control or Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC for adoption and is shown in the head-up display.  Examples of traffic signs which can be displayed

TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN DETECT AND DISPLAY FOLLOWING TRAFFIC SIGNS 0:

speed limits • end of the speed limit • overtaking restrictions - play streets • depending on the country: signs showing the start or end of motorways and dual carriageways

TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST CAN DETECT FOLLOWING ADDITIONAL SIGNS AND, IF NECESSARY, ANALYSE THE RELEVANCE OF THE RESTRICTIONS USING OTHER VEHICLE SENSORS:

- when wet • slippery road surfaces in fog • temporary restrictions • exits • restrictions for car/trailer combinations Traffic Sign Assist also uses data from the digital street map in the navigation system. When you leave or enter a municipality or change roads, on a motorway exit or slip road forexample, or after you turn at a junction, the display in the driver's display can thus be updated without a traffic sign having been detected. ① Regularly update the digital road map of the navigation system so that the traffic sign assistant can work optimally ( → page 56). Depending on vehicle equipment and country, the system can also display speed restrictions ahead in the driver's display and in the head-up display. The driver's display can also show the distance to an upcoming lower limit speed. For this purpose, information from the digital road map of the navigation sys- EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  tem is used. The Assistance menu can also display a dynamic visualisation of the speed limits ahead. If Traffic Sign Assist cannot determine the currently applicable maximum permissible speed (e.g. due to missing signs), the following display appears in the driver's display:  Traffic Sign Assist is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in a country where Traffic Sign Assist is not supported, this is displayed continuously. If Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily or permanently unavailable due to a technical fault or soiling of the windscreen, the warning light ☐ appears on the driver display. Please also note the information on the display messages of the traffic sign assistant ( → page 849).

WARNING WHEN THE MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE SPEED IS EXCEEDED

The system can warn you if you unintentionally exceed the maximum permissible speed. Depending on the country, you can set in the multimedia system by how much the maximum permitted speed may be exceeded before a warning is given. You can switch off the warning or set whether the warning should be visual (by flashing the traffic sign in the driver display) or visual and audible. The selected setting is confirmed by an indication in the driver's display.  1 Warning only visual 2 WARNING off The type, duration and activation threshold of the speed warning, as well as the possibility of setting the triggering threshold above which the warning is to be triggered, are subject to the country-specific legislation of the country of delivery of the vehicle.

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST (COUNTRY-SPECIFIC)

Warning for no-entry signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you if you drive the wrong way down a section of road, forexample on motorway slip roads or one-way streets. Warning at pedestrian crossings: if you approach pedestrian crossings, provided that pedestrians are in the danger zone or are moving towards it, Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h. Warning at stop signs: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive past a stop sign unintentionally. For this to be possible, the signs must be clear, forexample if the system detects more than one stop sign, or a stop sign can be confirmed using the digital navigation map. No warning can be issued if several different signs are detected.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Warning at red lights: Traffic Sign Assist can warn you up to a speed of approximately 70 km/h if you are about to drive through a red light unintentionally.

THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS MUST BE FULFILLED:

• Several traffic lights have been detected. • All traffic lights detected are red. - At least one of the red traffic lights detected is on the front passenger side beside the vehicle's own lane. - The traffic lights are in the following sequence (from top to bottom): red, yellow, green. If the function is available, you can activate or deactivate the warnings at pedestrian crossings, stop signs and red lights in the Traffic Sign Assist menu under Further warnings (→ page 439).

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR INOPERATIVE, PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- If visibility is poor, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog, swirling dust or heavy spray. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, direct sunlight or reflections. - If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. - if the traffic signs are difficult to see because, forexample, they are dirty, obscured, faded, iced over, damaged, inconveniently positioned, insufficiently illuminated or distorted. • Active traffic signs with LED displays may not be detected correctly or at all due to technical factors, such as transmission frequency.  - If the information on the navigation system's digital map is incorrect, incomplete or out of date. - if the signs, road markings or road layout are ambiguous, e.g. in the case of traffic signs in construction sites, at exits and driveways, in the case of adjacent lanes or parallel roads, in the case of pedestrian crossing markings at traffic lights • if the signage or road markings do not comply with the standard - if the signage, road markings or road guidance is country-specific and deviates from the route guidance of the navigation system, e.g. in or after road works • After sharp turns and tight bends, when traffic signs are outside the camera's field of vision. - If you overtake vehicles with traffic signs which are affixed or attached to them. - If you are using transport equipment secured to the vehicle with a trailer coupling, such as a bicycle rack, restrictions for car/trailer combinations may be considered valid if applicable.

SETTING TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST

Multimedia system:          

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING THE SPEED WARNING

 The speed warning is switched on by default (depending on the country). Switch off Speed limit warning. The speed warning remains off according to country-specific legislation until the next time the vehicle is switched on or off and (depending on equipment) the driver's door is opened.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  The audible speed warning can also be switched off and on by quick access, by pressing and holding the mute button on the steering wheel, by pressing the speed icon in the status line of the central display or via a voice control command (functions are available depending on the country).

CHANGE THE TYPE OF SPEED WARNING

Modify the warning to Visual or Visual & audible.

SETTING THE WARNING THRESHOLD

This value determines the speed at which a warning is issued when exceeded. Set the desired speed under Warning Threshold. The availability of the function is subject to country-specific legislation.

SWITCHING THE ADVISORY TONE FOR A NEW SPEED LIMIT ON OR OFF

The advisory tone for a new speed limit is switched off at the factory. The function determines whether each change of the displayed speed in the driver's display is supported with a subtle, non-intrusive sound. ▶ Activate or deactivate the function. ① The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING FURTHER FUNCTIONS OF TRAFFIC SIGN ASSIST

Switch further warning contents on or off. The available functions are switched on or off.

SET THE TYPE OF WARNING FOR OTHER FUNCTIONS

Select Visual or Visual & audible.

Traffic light view

INFORMATION ABOUT THE TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW

The traffic light view supports the driver when waiting in front of a red light by displaying the camera image on the central display. The camera image is displayed when the driver is the first vehicle in front of the red light and faded out when the vehicle drives off.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC LIGHT VIEW

Requirements:

• The Traffic light view option is switched on. • A traffic light view is available. Multimedia system:         This function is not available in all countries. If the vehicle is in first position at a traffic light, the camera image with traffic light view is shown on the central display. When the vehicle pulls away, the camera image is faded out.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  Activate or deactivate Traffic light view.

USING OTHER AVAILABLE FUNCTIONS

Select Select On request or Automatic. If On request is set and a traffic light view is available, the Please tap here for traffic light view. message is displayed. The camera image is shown after confirmation of the message. When Automatic is set, the camera image is automatically displayed when the traffic light view is available.

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist

FUNCTION OF BLIND SPOT ASSIST AND ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST WITH EXIT WARNING

Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist use radar sensors to monitor the area up to 40 m behind and 3 m next to your vehicle. The system can detect vehicles travelling from speeds of approximately 12 km/h and issue a warning if they move into the monitoring range.

STATUS DISPLAY IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

Grey: the system is activated but inoperative. Green: the system is activated and operational.  Display in the driver's display in the menuAssistance If a vehicle is detected at speeds above approximately 12 km/h and this vehicle enters the warning range immediately afterwards, the warning lamp in the corresponding outside mirror lights up red. In the Assistance menu, the lamp in outside mirror also lights up red, and the lane in which the vehicle is detected is hatched out. If a vehicle is detected in the warning range and you switch on the turn signal indicator in the corresponding direction, a double warning tone sounds once, and the warning lamp flashes red in the corresponding outside mirror. Red radar waves ② are displayed next to your vehicle in the assistance graphic. If the turn signal indicator remains on, the display in the outside mirror flashes for all other detected vehicles, but no further warning tone sounds. If you overtake a vehicle quickly, no warning is given. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391). EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  

WARNING

Risk of accident despite Blind Spot Assist Blind Spot Assist does not react to vehicles approaching and overtaking you at a greatly different speed. Blind Spot Assist cannot warn drivers in this situation. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.

EXIT WARNING

The exit warning is an additional function of Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist and can warn vehicle occupants attempting to leave a stationary vehicle about approaching vehicles. 

WARNING

Risk of accident despite exit warning The exit warning neither reacts to stationary objects nor to persons or road users approaching you at a greatly differing speed. The exit warning cannot warn drivers in these situations. Always pay particular attention to the traffic situation when opening the doors and make sure there is sufficient clearance. If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring range, the red warning lamp lights up in the corresponding outside mirror. If a vehicle occupant pulls the door handle on the side of the warning, a warning tone sounds twice and the ambient lighting in the respective door and the warning lamps in the corresponding outside mirror flash red. ① Vehicles with ambient lighting: the Warning assistance of the ambient lighting can be activated and deactivated ( → page 294). The warning assistance can differ depending on the equipment and may vary according to the setting. This exit warning is only available when Blind Spot Assist is active. After the vehicle is switched off, the exit warning continues to function for a few minutes. When the outside mirror warning lamp flashes three times, the exit warning is no longer available. The exit warning is only an aid and not a substitute for the attention of vehicle occupants. The responsibility for opening and closing the doors and for leaving the vehicle remains with the vehicle occupants.

SYSTEM LIMITS

BLIND SPOT ASSIST AND ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST MAY BE LIMITED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, IN PARTICULAR:

• if there is dirt on the sensors or the sensors are obscured • in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or snow • if there are narrow vehicles, e.g. bicycles or motorbikes • if the road has very wide or narrow lanes • if vehicles are not driving in the middle of their lane Warnings may be issued in error when driving close to crash barriers or similar continuous lane borders. Always make sure that there is sufficient distance to the side for other traffic or obstacles.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Warnings may be interrupted when driving alongside long vehicles, for example lorries, for a prolonged time. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational when reverse gear is engaged. Blind Spot Assist and Active Blind Spot Assist are not operational if transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

ADDITIONALLY, THE EXIT WARNING MAY BE LIMITED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- when the sensors are covered by adjacent vehicles in narrow parking spaces • when people approach the vehicle • in the event of stationary or slowly moving objects You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

FUNCTION OF THE BRAKE APPLICATION OF ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST

The brake application function is only available for vehicles with a Driving Assistance Package. If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of a side impact in the monitoring range, a course-correcting brake application is carried out. This is designed to help you avoid a collision. The course-correcting brake application is available in the speed range between approximately 30 km/h and approximately 200 km/h.  

WARNING

Risk of accident despite brake application of Active Blind Spot Assist A course-correcting brake application cannot always prevent a collision. Always steer, brake or accelerate yourself, especially if Active Blind Spot Assist warns you or makes a course-correcting brake application. Always maintain a safe distance at the sides. 

WARNING

Risk of accident despite Active Blind Spot Assist

ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST DOES NOT REACT IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• If you overtake vehicles at a high speed. • If vehicles approach and overtake you at a greatly different speed. Active Blind Spot Assist may not give warnings or intervene in such situations. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation and maintain a safe distance at the side of the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems   If a course-correcting brake application occurs, the red warning lamp flashes in the outside mirror and a warning tone sounds. In addition, a display ● indicating the danger of a side collision appears in the driver's display. In rare cases, the system may make an inappropriate brake application. This brake application may be interrupted at any time if you steer slightly in the opposite direction or accelerate.

SYSTEM LIMITS

EITHER A COURSE-CORRECTING BRAKE APPLICATION APPROPRIATE TO THE DRIVING SITUATION, OR NONE AT ALL, MAY OCCUR ESPECIALLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- Vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash barriers, are located on both sides of your vehicle. • A vehicle approaches too closely on the side. • You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds. • You brake or accelerate significantly. • A driving safety system intervenes, e.g. ESP ^® or Active Brake Assist. - ESP is deactivated. • A loss of tyre pressure or a defective tyre is detected. - Transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BLIND SPOT ASSIST OR ACTIVE BLIND SPOT ASSIST

Multimedia system:          Activate or deactivate Active Blind Spot Assist.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in front of your vehicle by means of the multifunction camera ( → page 391) and can warn you before you leave your lane unintentionally. The system can guide you back into your lane through a course-correcting steering intervention and additionally warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. Active Lane Keeping Assist is available in the speed range between 60 km/h and 200 km/h.

THE SYSTEM CAN INTERVENE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• Active Lane Keeping Assist detects a lane marking. • One of your front wheels goes over a lane marking. If you activate the turn signal indicator, a steering intervention does not occur on the corresponding side. If you leave the lane without activating the turn signal indicator, but danger of a collision with a moving obstacle is detected in your lane, a steering intervention does not occur. Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist or Driving Assistance Package: if the system detects an obstacle, such as another vehicle in the adjacent lane, a steering intervention will occur regardless of the turn signal indicator.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS (COUNTRY-DEPENDENT), ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST MAY ALREADY REACT FROM A SPEED OF APPROXIMATELY 45 KM/H:

- If your own vehicle is overtaken by another road user and the danger of a collision is detected, a lane-correcting steering intervention occurs. - If you drive over a detected lane marking, the system warns you with vibration pulses in the steering wheel. 

DISPLAY Ⓞ WILL APPEAR IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY AND A WARNING TONE WILL SOUND IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- A steering intervention by Active Lane Keeping Assist lasts longer than approximately ten seconds. - The system carries out two or more steering interventions within approximately three minutes without any steering intervention from the driver. In the Active Lane Keeping Assist settings, you can set the sensitivity of the system and set the level of support. Additionally, you can set whether the system should react to discontinuous lane markings or only continuous lane markings ( → page 446). If ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indications of fatigue or a microsleep, the most sensitive setting is automatically selected ( → page 404).

STATUS DISPLAYS FOR ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

White: Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated. If ESP ^® is deactivated or a tyre pressure loss warning is displayed, Active Lane Keeping Assist is automatically deactivated. Z'X Yellow: there is a malfunction. Please also observe the display messages. Grey: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated, but not operating. Green: Active Lane Keeping Assist is activated and operating. If the system is operational on only one side, the lane marking is shown in green on the corresponding side. Z: Z Red: Active Lane Keeping Assist has guided you back into your lane with a course-correcting steering intervention. The status display will flash if there is also a haptic warning in the steering wheel. The lane marking is shown in red only on the side for which there is a warning. Vehicles without Driving Assistance Package: if both lane markings are simultaneously shown in red in the status display, Active Lane Keeping Assist has initiated an emergency stop ( → page 423).

ACTIVE LANE CHANGE ASSIST DISPLAY IN THE "ASSISTANCE" MENU

 If the front wheel of the vehicle drives over a detected lane marking, this will be highlighted red in the Assistance menu in the driver's display.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems ① Vehicles with active ambient lighting: if Warning assistance is activated, the Active Lane Keeping Assist warning is also accompanied by ambient lighting (→ page 294).

SYSTEM LIMITS

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, A LANE-CORRECTING STEERING INTERVENTION MAY NOT OCCUR BUT RATHER A WARNING MAY BE GIVEN ON THE STEERING WHEEL, DEPENDING ON THE SITUATION:

• You clearly and actively steer, brake or accelerate. - If a driving safety system intervenes, such as ESP , Active Brake Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist. - You have adopted a sporty driving style with high cornering speeds or high rates of acceleration. - If transport equipment, for example a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

- If there is poor visibility, e.g. due to insufficient illumination of the road, highly variable shade conditions, rain, snow, fog or heavy spray. • If there is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic, the sun or reflections. - If there is dirt on the windscreen in the vicinity of the multifunction camera or if the camera is misted up, damaged or obscured. - If there is dirt on the bumper in the area of the radar sensors, or if they are damaged or covered. - If there are no lane markings, or several unclear lane markings are present for one lane, e.g. around roadworks. • If the lane markings are worn, dark or covered. - If the distance to the vehicle in front is too short and thus the lane markings cannot be detected. - If the lane markings change quickly, e.g. lanes branch off, cross one another or merge. • If the carriageway is very narrow and winding. Observe the notes on driving systems and your responsibility; you may otherwise fail to recognise dangers ( → page 391).

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

Multimedia system: Settings Assistance Collision avoidance Active Lane Keeping Assist ▶ Activate or deactivate the function. Alternatively, Active Lane Keeping Assist can be activated and deactivated via the quick vehicle access. ① After starting the vehicle, the settings are country-specific.

SETTING ACTIVE LANE KEEPING ASSIST

Multimedia system: Settings Assistance Collision avoidance Active Lane Keeping Assist

SETTING THE SENSITIVITY

Select Select Early, Med. or Late. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems The standard setting for this function is dependent on the country.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ASSISTANCE ON DISCONTINUOUS LANE MARKINGS

Select Advanced support. The last selected setting will be adopted the next time the vehicle is started. ① The standard setting for this function is country-specific. This function must be activated in vehicles without Driving Assistance Package, so that Emergency Stop Assist is fully available. Further information on Emergency Stop Assist ( → page 423)

AIRMATIC

FUNCTION OF AIRMATIC

AIRMATIC is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving comfort. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

AIRMATIC INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS:

• air suspension with automatic all-round level control - ADS PLUS (Adaptive Damping System with constant adjustment of damping characteristics) • speed-dependent lowering of the vehicle level • increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the multimedia system

SUSPENSION SETTING AND VEHICLE LEVEL PER DRIVE PROGRAM DRIVE PROGRAMS C, E AND S:

• a comfortable suspension setting in drive programs C and E • a firmer, sporty suspension setting in drive program • adjusting the vehicle to normal level - lowering the vehicle at speeds above 120 km/h to save energy: by approx. -10 mm in C and E \- by approx. - 20 mm in [s] • raising the vehicle to normal level at speeds below 80 km/h

DRIVE PROGRAM :

• suspension setting for off-road - at speeds below 50 km/h: raises the vehicle by approx. + 25 mm to off-road level +1 • lowering the vehicle to normal level at speeds above 70 km/h • below 50 km/h: raises the vehicle to off-road level +1 again • from 110 km/h: switch to [C] Individual suspension settings can be called up in drive program (→ page 350). EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if transport equipment, such as a trailer or a bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established, the vehicle always remains at normal level in all drive programs with the exception of 📄. In drive program 📄, the vehicle lowers above speeds of approx. 30 km/hto normal level.

SETTING THE VEHICLE LEVEL


WARNING

Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering.  Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.  Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AIRMATIC or level control: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.  When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. 

NOTE

Damage due to vehicle lowering Parts of the body could be damaged when the vehicle is lowered.  Make sure that there are no obstacles such as kerbs underneath or in the immediate vicinity of the body when the vehicle is being lowered.

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started. • The vehicle is not moving faster than 50 km/h. - When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 30 km/h.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Multimedia system: 

RAISING THE VEHICLE

Select The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to off-road level +1. Your selection is saved. Off-road level+1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

THE VEHICLE IS LOWERED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• When driving faster than 70 km/h. - When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 30 km/h.

GPS-BASED RAISING

If the function is activated, it is possible to save the vehicle position when the vehicle level is raised. Confirm the prompt. The position of the vehicle is stored. When the previously stored position is reached again, a prompt appears in the Zero Layer as to whether the vehicle level should be raised again. ① Settings for GPS-based raising ( → page 449). i Function of the Zero Layer ( → page 536).

LOWERING THE VEHICLE

Select The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level. Use the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads.

SETTING GPS-BASED RAISING OF THE VEHICLE

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Driving GPS-based raising Select Positions saved on request, Always save positions or Delete all saved positions.

AMG RIDE CONTROL +

FUNCTION OF AMG RIDE CONTROL +

AMG RIDE CONTROL + is an air suspension system with variable damping for improved driving characteristics. The all-round level control system ensures the best possible suspension and constant ground clearance, even with a laden vehicle. When driving at speed, the vehicle is lowered automatically to improve driving safety and to reduce energy consumption. You also have the option of manually adjusting the vehicle level.

THE DAMPING IS SET INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH WHEEL AND IS AFFECTED BY THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

• The drive program selected - Driving style, e.g. sporty • Road condition, e.g. bumps   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems • The individual selection of SPORT, SPORT + or COMFORT

AMG RIDE CONTROL + INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING COMPONENTS AND FUNCTIONS:

• Air suspension with variable spring rate and automatic level control • Speed-dependent lowering to reduce energy consumption - Increased vehicle level for greater ground clearance, selected via the multimedia system • Adaptive Damping System with constant damping force adjustment

SUSPENSION SETTING AND VEHICLE LEVEL PER DRIVE PROGRAM DRIVE PROGRAMS AND C:

• The suspension setting is comfortable. • The vehicle is set to the normal level. - The vehicle is lowered while you are driving in the following cases: - You are driving faster than 120 km/h for at least 20 seconds. - You are driving faster than 160 km/h. - The vehicle is raised to the normal level again in the following cases: - You are driving slower than 100 km/h for at least one minute. - You are driving slower than 80 km/h.

DRIVE PROGRAMS \AND \+ :

• The suspension setting is firm (S). • The suspension setting is even firmer (S). • The vehicle is set to low level. - The vehicle is not lowered any further if you are travelling at higher speeds. When the vehicle is started again, the COMFORT setting is activated automatically.

SELECTING THE SUSPENSION SETTING

You can also adjust the suspension setting via the multimedia system ( → page 352).

YOU CAN SELECT FROM THREE DIFFERENT SUSPENSION SETTINGS:

• COMFORT ensures a comfortable suspension setting. Select this suspension setting if you prefer a comfortable driving style. - SPORT lowers the vehicle to the lowest level and ensures a firmer suspension setting. Select this suspension setting when employing a sporty driving style, e.g. on winding country roads. - SPORT + lowers the vehicle to the lowest level and ensures a very firm suspension setting.  Press upper or lower display button repeatedly, until it displays the symbol.  EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  If the display button does not show the symbol, then it is hidden. How functions are displayed and the order in which they are displayed can be set in the multimedia system ( → page 346).  Press corresponding button 2. The selected suspension setting is shown in the driver's display as a message. THE SYMBOL INDICATES THE CURRENTLY SELECTED MODE: ( blue ): COMFORT (yellow): SPORT • (red): SPORT +

SETTING THE VEHICLE LEVEL


WARNING

Risk of accident because vehicle level is too high Driving characteristics may be impaired. The vehicle can drift outwards, for example, when steering or cornering. Choose a vehicle level which is suited to the driving style and the road surface conditions. 

WARNING

Risk of entrapment from vehicle lowering When lowering the vehicle, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle.  Make sure no one is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when the vehicle is being lowered. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped due to the vehicle lowering Vehicles with AMG RIDE CONTROL+ or level control system: when you unload luggage or leave the vehicle, the vehicle first rises slightly and then returns to the set level shortly afterwards. You or anyone else in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody could thus become trapped. The vehicle can also be lowered after being locked.  When leaving the vehicle, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the wheel arches or the underbody. Multimedia system: 

RAISING THE VEHICLE

REQUIREMENTS FOR RAISING THE VEHICLE:

• The vehicle has been started.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems • The vehicle is not moving faster than 60 km/h. - When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is not moving faster than 30 km/h. Select The indicator lamp lights up continuously. The vehicle is raised to high level +1. Your selection is saved. High level +1 set remains stored even after the vehicle has been switched off.

THE VEHICLE IS LOWERED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• When driving faster than 70 km/h. - When the trailer socket is contacted (trailer/bicycle rack): the vehicle is moving faster than 30 km/h.

GPS-BASED RAISING

If the function is activated, it is possible to save the vehicle position when the vehicle level is raised. Confirm the prompt. The position of the vehicle is stored. When the previously stored position is reached again, a prompt appears in the Zero Layer as to whether the vehicle level should be raised again. ① Settings for GPS-based raising ( → page 449) (i) Zero Layer function ( → page 536)

LOWERING THE VEHICLE

Select The indicator lamp goes out. The vehicle is adjusted to the normal level. Use the normal level in trailer operation. High-level driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads.

RACE START

INFORMATION ABOUT RACE START

① RACE START is available only for Mercedes-AMG vehicles. RACE START enables optimal vehicle acceleration from a standstill. A suitably high-grip road surface is required for this, and the tyres and vehicle must also be in good condition. RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE START may be activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads. Read the safety notes and information on ESP ^® (→ page 396). EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

WARNING

Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP ^® mode selected, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

RACE START WITH BOOST FUNCTION

The boost function for RACE START is available only for vehicles with the AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package ( → page 393). If the activation conditions are fulfilled, the additional engine output will be added automatically during RACE START. In this case, vehicle acceleration from a standstill will be even more dynamic.

ACTIVATING RACE START


WARNING

Risk of skidding and having an accident from wheels spinning If you use RACE START, depending on the ESP ^® mode selected, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident.  Make sure that no persons or obstacles are in the close vicinity of your vehicle.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on and at normal operating temperature. • The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient. • The driver's door is closed. • The front wheels are in a straight-ahead position. • The vehicle is on level ground. - The vehicle is stationary, the brake pedal is depressed (left foot) and the parking brake is released. • The transmission is in position D. • One of the drive programs S or S' is selected (→ page 348). ① RACE START must not be used in normal road operation. RACE START may be activated and used only on dedicated race circuits, not on public roads. Read the safety notes and information on ESP ^® (→ page 396). Rapidly depress the accelerator pedal fully. The drive noise becomes louder and the vehicle vibrates. The seat belts on the driver and front passenger seats are pre-tensioned. If the activation conditions are not fulfilled, RACE START cannot be used. The RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual message appears in the driver's display. EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems    RACE START display range activated  Boost function display range available The display range ① displayed varies according to the selected menu for the driver's display.  The display ranges ① flash red in the driver's display and the RACE START Release brake to start message appears. RACE START with boost function: if RACE START with boost function is activated, the race start messages are supplemented with the Boost active information. In addition, lower centre display range Ⓞ will flash red (vehicles with AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package). If the brake pedal is not released after a short while, RACE START will be cancelled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the driver's display.  Take your foot off the brake, but keep the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle will pull away at maximum acceleration. The RACE START active message appears in the driver's display. RACE START will be deactivated immediately if you release the accelerator pedal during RACE START or if any of the activation conditions are no longer fulfilled. The RACE START cancelled message appears in the driver's display.  After using it several times in quick succession, RACE START will be unavailable until a certain distance has been driven.

Reversing camera

FUNCTION OF THE REVERSING CAMERA

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.  The area behind the vehicle is displayed as a mirror image, as in the inside rear view mirror. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems   Camera views menu (top view) Menu Parking Assistance 2 Reversing camera with top view Wide-angle view 4 Trailer view 5 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 465) 6 Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 463, 481) 7 Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m from the rear area Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) 9 Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) 10 Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes are displayed in green ( → page 466).  Wide-angle view  Trailer view Yellow guide line, locating aid Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch Ball head of the trailer hitch

SYSTEM LIMITS

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the central display.  

THE REVERSING CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION OR WILL ONLY PARTIALLY FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h. • The tailgate is open. - The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. - The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. - The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. Observe the notes on cleaning the reversing camera ( → page 721). - The camera or rear of your vehicle is damaged. In this case, have the camera and its position and setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. - The detection range is limited by additional vehicle attachments at the rear, such as a licence plate bracket or bicycle rack. Also observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras ( → page 391). Do not use the reversing camera in these types of situations. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. The contrast of the display may be impaired by direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use.

360° Camera

FUNCTION OF THE 360° CAMERA

The 360° Camera is a system that consists of four cameras which cover the immediate surroundings of the vehicle. The cameras assist you when you are parking, forexample, or at exits with reduced visibility.

THE 360° CAMERA INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING CAMERAS AND EVALUATES THEIR IMAGES:

- Reversing camera - Front camera • Two side cameras in the outside mirrors The cameras are only an aid and may show a distorted view of obstacles, show them incorrectly or not show them at all. They are not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc., in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  MENU OVERVIEW CAMERA VIEWS  Menu Parking Assistance 2 Top view with image from the front camera 3 Top view with image from the reversing camera 3D view, left-hand side of the vehicle 3D view, right-hand side of the vehicle 6 3D auto view 7 Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( → page 465) To set the GPS activation point ( → page 462) To switch between standard and wide-angle view To switch between standard and trailer view In all views, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning display is shown ( → page 463). FUNCTION OF THE GUIDE LINES  Guide lines at a distance of approximately 0.5 m, 1.0 m, 1.5 m and 3.0 m Distance from the rear area Lane marking the course the tyres will take with the current steering angle (dynamic) Driven surface depending on the current steering angle (dynamic) Guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the rear area When Active Parking Assist is active, lanes and guide lines are displayed in green instead of yellow ( → page 466). TOP VIEW WITH IMAGE FROM THE FRONT OR REVERSING CAMERA  Warning display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 463) Your vehicle from above Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

3D VIEW, LEFT/RIGHT-HAND SIDE OF THE VEHICLE


NOTE

Risk of accident due to objects being severely distorted in the display or not displayed at all Due to the projection of the cameras, objects in the 3D views may be severely distorted when displayed or not displayed at all.  Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects etc. in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking.  ① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( → page 463) In the 3D view, left-/right-hand side of the vehicle, the virtual camera moves to the respective side of the vehicle. When you change the transmission position, the view is automatically adapted.

3D AUTO VIEW

The area behind the vehicle is not displayed as a mirror image as is usual in the 3D views.  Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( → page 463) 2 Guide lines In the 3D auto view, the virtual camera moves to the standard perspective, facing forward from the rear above the roof. The view changes automatically when approaching obstacles. If you touch the touchscreen, the view changes to 3D view with free rotation. You can turn, tilt and zoom the views by touch.

WIDE-ANGLE VIEW

 ① Display of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC (→ page 463) To switch between standard and wide-angle view

TRAILER VIEW

① In trailer mode, the guide lines are shown at the level of the trailer hitch.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  If you select trailer view and no trailer is coupled to the vehicle, the following display appears:  Trailer view: locating aid To switch between standard and trailer view 2 Yellow locating aid Ball head of the trailer hitch Red guide line at a distance of approximately 0.3 m from the ball head of the trailer hitch When the electrical connection is established between the vehicle and the trailer, the display changes to the side camera view.  Trailer view: side view of the mirror cameras  To switch between standard and trailer view

SYSTEM LIMITS

If the system is not ready for operation, the System inoperative message appears in the central display.

THE 360° CAMERA WILL NOT FUNCTION OR WILL ONLY PARTIALLY FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• You are driving forwards at a speed greater than approximately 16 km/h. • The doors are open. • An outside mirror is not completely folded out. • The tailgate is open. - The weather conditions are poor, e.g. heavy rain, snow, fog, storm or spray. - The light conditions are poor, e.g. at night or if light is shining into the camera. • The camera lens is obstructed, dirty or misted up. - If cameras or vehicle components in which the cameras are fitted are damaged. In this event, have the cameras, their positions and their setting checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Do not use the 360° Camera under such circumstances. You could otherwise injure others or collide with objects when parking the vehicle. For technical reasons, the standard height of the vehicle may be altered if the vehicle is carrying a heavy load and can result in inaccuracies in the guide lines and in the display of the generated images. The field of vision and other functions of the camera system may be restricted due to additional attachments on the vehicle (e.g. licence plate bracket, bicycle rack).   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  The contrast of the display may be impaired by abrupt, direct sunlight or by other light sources, e.g. when driving out of a garage. In this case, pay particular attention. i Have the display repaired or replaced if, forexample, pixel errors considerably restrict its use. See the notes on cleaning the 360° Camera (→ page 721).

OFF-ROAD FUNCTION OF THE 360° CAMERA

The 360° camera can support you with different views when driving off-road.

THE FOLLOWING VIEWS ARE AVAILABLE:

• Transparent bonnet Front view Rear view To call up the function, call up the off-road menu in the multimedia system ( → page 580). Active Parking Assist and the manoeuvring assistance functions are not available in the driving programme. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is available in all driving programmes when it is switched on. Please also note the system limits of the respective functions.

TRANSPARENT BONNET

 Display of the transparent bonnet (example) 1 Point of the compass 2 Switch camera view on/off 3 Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC ( → page 463) 4 Position of the wheels Area under the bonnet Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle 7 Altitude above sea level If the off-road menu is open in the central display and the button ② is switched on, the Transparent bonnet view is automatically displayed in gearbox position [D]. The Transparent Bonnet view shows a virtual image of the area directly in front of the bumper, in front of the tyres and under the bonnet. In addition, the current lane is displayed. The Transparent Bonnet can assist you when driving in difficult terrain, e.g. on rocky or uneven ground. The hatched area under the bonnet ⑤ was captured and recorded by the front camera. As soon as the area has been crossed by the vehicle, it is faded   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems in. If the vehicle has not been moved for some time, the recorded area is displayed in greyscale and faded out. FRONT AND REAR VIEW  Front and rear view display (example) ① Point of the compass 2 Switch camera view on/off Activating/deactivating PARKTRONIC ( → page 463) Pitch display Lane indicating the route the vehicle will take at the current steering angle 6 Roll display 7 Altitude above sea level (i) Note that the area between the vehicle and up to approx. 1 m in front of the vehicle is not displayed. The slope and inclination indicators are only shown in the front view. If the vehicle is travelling faster than approx. 8 km/h the view automatically changes from Transparent Bonnet to Front View. If the vehicle is travelling  faster than approx.. 20 km/h - 30 km/h (depending on the driving programme), the camera image is closed. When you engage reverse gear, the image from the reversing camera is automatically displayed.

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE AREA UNDER THE BONNET MAY NOT BE DISPLAYED CORRECTLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

in the rain - Driving in the dark - When shadows fall on the area recorded by the camera Observe the instructions on the function of the 360° camera as well as its system limits, otherwise you will not be able to recognise dangers ( → page 456). CALLING UP THE 360° CAMERA VIEWS USING THE BUTTON  Press button 1. Select Camera views menu.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( → page 456).

SELECTING A VIEW FOR THE 360° CAMERA (REVERSE GEAR)

Requirements

\- The Activation in R setting is activated in the multimedia system ( → page 462). Engage reverse gear. Select the desired view in the multimedia system ( → page 456).

SETTING THE REVERSING CAMERA OR 360° CAMERA

The reversing camera is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying full attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Pay attention to your surroundings and be ready to brake at all times. Multimedia system:         ▶ Activate or deactivate Activation in R. The settings for deactivating the reversing camera are not available in every country. 

360° CAMERA WITH GPS - MANAGING ACTIVATION POSITIONS

Multimedia system:        

RENAMING AN ACTIVATION POSITION

① You can determine activation positions in the Camera views menu. (→ page 456) Select for the desired activation position. Select Edit. Enter a name and confirm. The activation position is saved under the new name.

DELETING AN ACTIVATION POSITION

Select for the desired activation position. Select Delete entry. Confirm the prompt. The activation position is deleted.

OPENING THE CAMERA COVER

Multimedia system:         Select Open camera cover. The camera cover closes automatically after some time or after the vehicle is switched on or off.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC

FUNCTION OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC

Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking assistance system which monitors the area surrounding your vehicle and shows you the distance between the vehicle and a detected obstacle visually and audibly. The passive side impact protection also warns you of obstacles to the side. These must be detected beforehand by the sensors in the front or rear bumper while driving by them. If you steer in the direction of a detected obstacle and there is a risk of a lateral collision, a warning is issued. The passive side impact protection can be activated and deactivated via the multimedia system. In order for front or rear obstacles to the side to be displayed, the vehicle must first travel a distance of at least half a vehicle length. Once the vehicle has travelled one vehicle length, obstacles on all sides can be shown. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. DISPLAYS IN THE CENTRAL DISPLAY  Vehicles with 360° Camera  Vehicles with reversing camera As soon as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is ready for display, the respective areas of the display are shown in blue.  Front and rear display ready  All-round display ready  All around display ready and obstacles detected

THE COLOUR OF THE DISPLAY CHANGES DEPENDING ON THE DISTANCE TO THE DETECTED OBSTACLE:

• Blue: > 1 m (no obstacles detected) • Yellow: approx. 1 m - 0.7 m • Orange: approx. 0.7 m - 0.4 m Red: <0.4 m Vehicles with 360° Camera: the boundary line shifts dynamically depending on the position and distance of the obstacles detected. Depending on the distance to the obstacle detected, an intermittent warning tone also sounds. You can set the timing of the warnings in the multimedia system. In the Warn early setting, the system warns you from a distance of 1 m, in the standard setting only from 0.4 m.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems   Vehicles with 360° Camera  Vehicles with reversing camera IF YOU ARE NOT IN THE CAMERA & PARKING MENU AND AN OBSTACLE IN THE VEHICLE PATH IS DETECTED, POP-UP WINDOW ① APPEARS IN THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IF THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS ARE MET: \- Vehicles without Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 12 km/h. • Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: when driving no faster than 18 km/h.  Optionally, obstacles detected by Parking Assist PARKTRONIC from a distance of approximately 1.0 m in front and 0.7 m on sides can also be displayed in the head-up display.

VEHICLES WITH ACTIVE AMBIENT LIGHTING AND PARKING PACKAGE WITH REMOTE PARKING FUNCTIONS

When Warning assistance is activated, the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is also accompanied by ambient lighting. If an obstacle is detected, the ambient lighting lights up in the same colour as the display in the central display. The ambient lighting which accompanies the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display is only intended to accentuate the display in the central display and does not replace it. More information on ambient lighting: (→ page 294) A display message for the ambient lighting does not occur in the area of the driver's display or in the rear compartment. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Depending on the selected setting, other functions may supersede the ambient lighting effects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. In this case, the ambient lighting effects of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC do not occur.

SYSTEM LIMITS

PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC DOES NOT NECESSARILY TAKE INTO ACCOUNT THE FOLLOWING OBSTACLES:

• Obstacles below the detection range, e.g. persons, animals or objects. - Obstacles above the detection range, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of lorries. • Pedestrians or animals approaching the vehicle from the side. - Objects placed next to the vehicle

OBSTACLES ON THE SIDES ARE NOT SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

• You park the vehicle and switch it off. • You open the doors. After the engine is restarted, obstacles must be detected again by driving past them before a new warning can be issued.

ALSO OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

• Reversing camera ( → page 454) • 360° Camera (→ page 456) Observe the information on vehicle sensors and cameras; otherwise, the system cannot function properly ( → page 391). Vehicles with towbar: If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier, is attached to the towbar and the electrical connection is correctly established, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear zone.

PROBLEMS WITH PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC

If the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC display lights up red for approximately three seconds then goes out, and the P_PM^off symbol appears in the driver's display, the system may have been deactivated due to signal interference. Start the vehicle again and check if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is working at a different location.

IF A WARNING TONE ALSO SOUNDS, IT MAY BE DUE TO ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CAUSES:

- The sensors are dirty: clean the sensors and observe the notes on care of vehicle parts (→ page 721). - Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has been deactivated due to a malfunction: restart the vehicle. If the problem persists, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC

NOTE

Risk of an accident from objects at close range Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not detect certain objects at close range. When parking or manoeuvring the vehicle, pay particular attention to any objects which are above or below the sensors, e.g. flowerpots or drawbars. The vehicle or other objects could otherwise be damaged. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

Requirements:

• The camera menu is open. • Or: Active Parking Assist is active. • Or: the PARKTRONIC pop-up window appears. Press P ₀₁ in the central display. If the indicator lamp is lit, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is active. If the indicator lamp does not light up or the symbol ₀ is displayed, PARKTRONIC Parking Assist is not active. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automatically activated when the vehicle is started. Alternatively, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC can be activated or deactivated in the quick access menu.

SETTING THE WARNING TONES OF PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC

Multimedia system: Settings Assistance Parking

SETTING WARNING TONES

Select Set warning tones. Set the desired level under Volume or Tone pitch.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING AUDIO FADEOUT

Select Audio fadeout and switch Audio fade for warnings on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced during a Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warning tone. or Select Audio fadeout and switch Audio fadeout in trans. position R on or off. The volume of the currently playing media source is reduced when reverse gear is engaged.

SETTING THE TIME OF THE WARNINGS

Select Time of warning. ▶ Activate or deactivate Side warning. Set the desired warning time for Front or Rear.

Active Parking Assist

FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST

Active Parking Assist is an electronic parking assistance system, which uses ultrasound with the assistance of the reversing camera and 360° Camera. When you are driving forwards up to approximately 35 km/h, the system automatically measures parking spaces on both sides of the vehicle. Active Parking Assist offers the following functions:

VEHICLES WITH REVERSING CAMERA

• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road • Reversing into parking spaces perpendicular to the road

VEHICLES WITH 360° CAMERA

• Parking in parking spaces parallel to the road - Parking in parking spaces perpendicular to the road (optionally either forwards or reverse)  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems - Parking in parking spaces that can only be detected as such due to markings (forexample at the roadside) • Exiting a parking space parallel to the road - Exiting a parking space perpendicular to the road (optionally either left or right) Active Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. If Active Parking Assist is available, the message appears in the driver's display. When the system detects parking spaces, appears. The arrows show on which side of the road free parking spaces are located. These are then shown in the central display. When Active Parking Assist is activated, the turn signal indicators are activated based on the calculated path of your vehicle. When you are entering or exiting a parking space, the procedure is assisted by acceleration, braking, steering and gear changes. To start the parking procedure, press the button (→ page 15).

ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST WILL BE CANCELLED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• You deactivate Parking Assist PARKTRONIC. • You press the P button again. You begin steering. • You engage park position P, - ESP intervenes. • You open the driver's door. 

SYSTEM LIMITS

In drive mode 📄 or when the exterior lighting is disturbed, Active Parking Assist is not available.

ALSO OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

• Reversing camera ( → page 454) 360° Camera ( → page 456) Objects that are above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist, e.g. protruding loads, overhangs or loading ramps of trucks or boundaries of parking spaces, are not detected when measuring the parking space. These are also then not taken into account when calculating the parking procedure. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely or brake too late. Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately. Parking spaces that are partially occupied by trailer drawbars might not be identified as such or be measured incorrectly. Only use Active Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground.   > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  

WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Active Parking Assist can also display unsuitable parking spaces, e.g. parking spaces in which parking is not permitted or parking spaces on unsuitable surfaces.

DO NOT USE ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. - When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. • If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. • When snow chains are fitted. - When a trailer or bicycle rack is attached. • Directly after a tyre change or when spare tyres are fitted. • If the tyre pressure is too low or too high. • If the suspension is out of alignment, e.g. after bottoming out on a kerb. • On steep inclines of more than approximately 15%. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

PAUSING ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST


WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. You can interrupt the parking or exiting procedure of Active Parking Assist by performing one of the following actions, forexample: Depress the brake pedal. Open the passenger door, a rear door or the tailgate. Apply the electric parking brake or activating the HOLD function. To resume the parking or exiting procedure: gently depress the accelerator pedal. If the electric parking brake was applied before Active Parking Assist was activated, depress the accelerator pedal lightly to start the parking or exiting procedure. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming a paused parking procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist.

AUTOMATIC BRAKING FUNCTION OF ACTIVE PARKING ASSIST


WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist. Persons or objects detected in the manoeuvring range could cause the vehicle to brake sharply and interrupt the parking or exiting procedure. The vehicle will then be held at a standstill. If you depress the accelerator pedal, the parking or exiting procedure is resumed. Check the area around your vehicle again before resuming the parking or exiting procedure. Make sure that persons, animals or objects are no longer in the manoeuvring range. Also observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist. 

Remote Parking Assist

FUNCTION OF REMOTE PARKING ASSIST

Remote Parking Assist is an additional function of Active Parking Assist. Comply with local traffic laws and regulations when using Remote Parking Assist on public roads. If it is required to turn the wheels toward the kerb, you cannot use Remote Parking Assist. Please note that you can only use Remote Parking Assist if you have a valid driving licence and are in a fit state to drive. Remote Parking Assist parks your vehicle or exits the parking space while you are outside of your vehicle. You can monitor the manoeuvring and parking procedure on your mobile phone. With Remote Parking Assist, you can carry out all the parking procedures of Active Parking Assist. You can also position the vehicle directly in front of a garage or a driveway entrance and then use Remote Parking Assist to enter or exit a parking space. Remote Parking Assist manages pulling away, braking and steering. While Remote Parking Assist is active, the vehicle is locked. Remote Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Interrupt or terminate the parking procedure if necessary. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. Make sure to also pay attention to other vehicles.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

SYSTEM LIMITS

IF THE SYSTEM DETECTS A MALFUNCTION OR A SYSTEM LIMIT DURING THE MANOEUVRING OR PARKING PROCEDURE, THE PROCEDURE WILL BE CANCELLED:

• The vehicle is brought to a standstill. - Transmission position P is selected and the electric parking brake is applied automatically. • The vehicle is switched off. • The vehicle remains locked. If the parking manoeuvre is cancelled, a corresponding message is displayed on the mobile phone. Depending on the situation, you can then take control of the procedure, manoeuvre the vehicle back to the starting position or manually take control of the vehicle. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( → page 466). Certain environmental conditions, such as snowfall or heavy rain, may lead to a parking space being measured inaccurately or to connection problems with the mobile phone. Only use Remote Parking Assist on level, high-grip ground. During the parking procedure, you should not stand more than approx. 3.0 m away from the vehicle. At greater distances, the procedure will be interrupted and a corresponding message will be displayed on the mobile phone. If you move closer to the vehicle, you will be able to continue the procedure. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

OPERATING REMOTE PARKING ASSIST

Requirements

FOR THE REMOTE PARK ASSIST FUNCTION YOU NEED:

• a Mercedes me user account • the current Remote Park Assist app for your vehicle type a mobile phone  A list of compatible phones can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

THE FOLLOWING OPERATING SYSTEMS ARE SUPPORTED:

- Android™ Apple® iOS 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Active Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Active Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. There is a danger of collision! In these situations, do not use Active Parking Assist.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  Objects located above the detection range of Active Parking Assist will not be detected when the parking space is measured. These are not taken into account when the parking procedure is calculated, e.g. overhanging loads, overhangs or loading ramps of goods vehicles. In some circumstances, Active Parking Assist may therefore guide you into the parking space prematurely. 

WARNING

Danger due to insufficient view of the vehicle surroundings If you manoeuvre, park or exit a parking space with the vehicle using Remote Parking Assist, observe the following: Make sure that you have the best view possible of the vehicle and the vehicle's surroundings. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects are in the path of your vehicle. Make sure that you maintain a suitable distance to the vehicle and that neither you nor other road users could be endangered. Be aware of the vehicle's surroundings at all times and identify possible dangers. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. No persons or pets are permitted to remain in the vehicle during the parking procedure. Observe the system limits at all times. If necessary, cancel the parking procedure. Always ensure that vehicle access by other road users is maintained.  Activate the "Remote Parking Assist" service e.g. via the Mercedes me homepage. Authorise the mobile phone using the Remote Parking Assist App in the vehicle ( → page 473).

SELECTING THE PARKING MANOEUVRE IN ADVANCE WHILE INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Stop the vehicle and select transmission position P.   Depending on the vehicle's equipment, button ① may also be located at a different position in the centre console.  Press button ①.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems   Select ② Parking Assistance menu. For further information on Remote Parking Assist: select ③. If necessary, select another parking space ④ or select ⑤ to drive straight ahead into a garage, forexample. If necessary, change parking direction 6. Alternatively, you can begin parking with Active Parking Assist ( → page 15) and continue with the Remote Parking Assist from any vehicle position. To do this, stop the parking process and adjust the gearbox setting [P]. Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key.

STARTING THE PARKING PROCEDURE WITHOUT SELECTING IN ADVANCE

▶ Stop the vehicle and select transmission position P. Switch off the vehicle and exit it with the key.

STARTING THE PARKING PROCEDURE WHILE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Unlock the vehicle.

CARRYING OUT A PARKING PROCEDURE WITH REMOTE PARKING ASSIST

Keep the vehicle key with you during the parking procedure. You can cancel the parking procedure and bring the vehicle to a standstill by pressing a button on the key. ① On completion of the parking procedure, the vehicle is locked. If you have started the parking procedure as described above, the vehicle is ready to connect to your mobile phone for a limited time. Start the Remote Parking Assist App on the mobile phone and connect to the vehicle. Follow the instructions of the Remote Parking Assist App. The turn signal indicator is automatically switched on when starting parking and switched off when it is completed. If the connection between the vehicle and the mobile phone is interrupted while a parking manoeuvre is being performed, the manoeuvre can be continued if the connection is re-established within a short time.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  

WARNING

Risk of accident due to vehicle swinging out while parking or pulling out of a parking space While parking or pulling out of a parking space, the vehicle swings out and can drive onto areas of the oncoming lane. This could cause you to collide with objects or other road users. Pay attention to objects and other road users. Where necessary, stop the vehicle or cancel the parking procedure with Remote Parking Assist. After ending the parking procedure, ensure that all vehicle doors, windows and the boot are closed. Secure the vehicle against rolling away.

CANCELLING THE PARKING PROCEDURE

You can cancel the parking procedure of Remote Parking Assist at any time and bring the vehicle to a standstill. Cancel the parking procedure in the Remote Parking Assist App. or Press a button on the vehicle key. or Pull a door handle.

AUTHORISING/DE-AUTHORISING A MOBILE PHONE FOR REMOTE PARKING ASSIST

Multimedia system:        

AUTHORISING A NEW MOBILE PHONE

In order to be able to use the Remote Parking Assist function, you must authorise your mobile phone. You can authorise up to ten mobile phones. Select Remote Parking Assist. IN the open window select Authorise a new device. Remote Parking Assist is ready to connect. Start the Remote Parking Assist app and additionally start the authorisation process. A connection prompt is displayed. ▶ Scan the QR code on the central display. The mobile phone is authorised.

DE-AUTHORISING MOBILE PHONES

Select Remote Parking Assist. In the opened window, select the device to be de-authorised. To de-authorise a mobile phone: Select a mobile phone and confirm with Yes. The mobile phone is deleted from the device list. To de-authorise all mobile phones: Select Deauthorise all devices and confirm with Yes. All mobile phones are deleted from the device list.  

Manoeuvring assistant

FUNCTION OF DRIVE AWAY ASSIST

Drive Away Assist can reduce the severity of an impact when pulling away. If the system detects an obstacle in the direction of travel, the vehicle's speed is briefly reduced to approximately 2 km/h.

A RISK OF COLLISION MAY OCCUR IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOREEXAMPLE:

• If the driver mixes up the accelerator and brake pedals. • If the driver engages an incorrect gear. • If the driver depresses the accelerator pedal with too much force.

DRIVE AWAY ASSIST IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

- If the vehicle was stationary and the transmission position was changed to R or D. - If the vehicle has rolled less than approximately 1.0 m since being at a standstill. • If the detected obstacle is less than approx. 1.0 m away. The Drive-away Assist can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu ( → page 477). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & parking menu. ① If Drive Away Assist is not available, the same symbol appears in grey. If the Camera & parking menu is not opened in the central display, the symbol and pop-up of Parking Assist PARKTRONIC both appear. Drive Away Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. 

WARNING

Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of Drive Away Assist Drive Away Assist cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on Drive Away Assist alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

SYSTEM LIMITS

The drive-away assistance is not available in the driving programme. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( → page 466). On uphill gradients, the performance of Drive Away Assist is restricted. If a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier, is attached to the hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established, the drive-away assistance is not available when reversing. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

FUNCTION OF CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING

The cross traffic warning can warn you of crossing traffic when you are exiting a parking space. The radar sensors in the bumper also monitor the area adjacent to the vehicle.

THE CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING IS ACTIVE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

- Warning for crossing traffic behind: the vehicle is driving in reverse at a speed slower than approx. 10 km/h. - Warning for crossing traffic ahead: the vehicle is driving forwards at a speed slower than approx. 10 km/h and the camera image is shown in the central display ( → page 461). The Warning for crossing traffic ahead can be deactivated or activated in the Manoeuvring assistance menu. Depending on the country, the Warning for crossing traffic behind can also be deactivated or activated ( → page 477). If a critical situation is detected, the symbol appears in red in the selected view in the Camera & parking menu.

WARNING FOR CROSSING TRAFFIC BEHIND

- The vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected. - If the Camera & parking menu is not opened and a critical situation is detected, a warning appears in the central display together with the PARKTRONIC Parking Assist pop-up. 

WARNING FOR CROSSING TRAFFIC AHEAD

- If Active Parking Assist is active, the vehicle can be braked automatically when crossing traffic is detected. - If Active Parking Assist is not active but the Camera & parking menu is opened, a warning appears. - If the Camera & parking menu is not opened, the system cannot react to crossing traffic. The cross traffic warning is only an aid and not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

WARNING

Risk of accident caused by limited detection performance of the cross traffic warning The cross traffic warning cannot always clearly identify objects and traffic situations. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the cross traffic warning alone. Be prepared to brake or swerve as necessary, provided the traffic situation permits and that it is safe to take evasive action.

SYSTEM LIMITS

If the cross traffic warning is not available, the symbol appears in grey.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems In the driving programme, the cross traffic warning is not available. The system limits of Active Parking Assist apply ( → page 466). If the radar sensors are obstructed by vehicles or other objects, detection is not possible.

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, THE CROSS TRAFFIC WARNING IS NOT AVAILABLE:

• on inclines - Warning for crossing traffic behind: if a transport device, e.g. trailer or bicycle carrier, is attached to the hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established.

MANOEUVRING BRAKE FUNCTION

The manoeuvring brake function can prevent collisions with pedestrians when the vehicle is reversing at slow speeds. If the reversing camera detects a person in the vehicle path, the vehicle can be braked to a standstill.

THE MANOEUVRING BRAKE FUNCTION CAN INTERVENE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• The vehicle is reversing at a speed slower than 10 km/h. • The camera image is shown in the central display ( → page 461). Depending on the country, you can activate and deactivate the manoeuvring brakeManoeuvring assistance function in the menu ( → page 477). If the manoeuvring brake function is triggered, the symbol appears in red in the selected view in the menuCamera & parking.  If the manoeuvring brake function is not available, the same symbol appears in grey. The manoeuvring brake function is only an aid. It is not a substitute for your attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range. 

WARNING

Risk of accident caused by limited detection by the manoeuvring brake function The manoeuvring brake function cannot always clearly detect people. Other obstacles are not detected by the function. In these cases, the function may brake unnecessarily or not brake at all. Always pay careful attention to the traffic situation; do not rely on the manoeuvring brake function alone. Be ready to brake.

SYSTEM LIMITS

In the driving programme, the shunt braking is not available.

OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Active Parking Assist ( → page 466) • 360° Camera ( → page 456) • Reversing camera ( → page 454)  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems

THE MANOEUVRING BRAKE FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• on inclines - If transport equipment, forexample a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection has been correctly established.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING MANOEUVRING ASSISTANCE

Multimedia system:  ① This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). The function for switching Manoeuvring Assist on and off is not available in all countries. Select Manoeuvring assistance. Activate or deactivate the desired manoeuvring assistance.

Memory Parking Assist

FUNCTION OF MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Memory Parking Assist can park your vehicle using a previously stored parking space. You can store parking procedures with a total distance of up to 500 m (100 m per parking or exiting procedure). During parking or exiting, the system can travel a previously stored path of up to approximately 100 m to or out of the desired parking space, for example, from the driveway entrance into the garage. Within a radius of approx. 150 m, only one parking or exiting procedure can be recorded. Only use Memory Parking Assist on private property. Use on public roads, e.g. in public parking spaces, is not permitted. Memory Parking Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying full attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that no persons, animals or objects etc. are in the manoeuvring range.

SYSTEM LIMITS

Observe the system limitations of Active Parking Assist ( → page 466).

WARNING

Risk of accident due to objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist

IF THERE ARE OBJECTS ABOVE OR BELOW THE DETECTION RANGE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY ARISE:

• Memory Parking Assist may steer too early. • The vehicle may not stop in front of these objects. This result in a collision. In these situations, do not use Memory Parking Assist. Objects located above or below the detection range of Memory Parking Assist may not be detected during the parking procedure. Drawbars of parked trailers, among other objects, that protrude into the parking space may not be detected.   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

DO NOT USE MEMORY PARKING ASSIST IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

• In extreme weather conditions such as ice, packed snow or in heavy rain. - When transporting a load that protrudes beyond the vehicle. • If the parking space is on a steep downhill or uphill gradient. • When snow chains are fitted. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

RECORDING A PARKING PROCEDURE USING MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements

- The entire route is, forexample, within your own property and not on public roads. - The system needs reference points in the surroundings to orient itself, suchas fences, walls or trees. Therefore, after starting the vehicle, a certain distance must first be driven. If not enough reference points are detected in the surrounding area, no new route can be recorded.  Press button ①. The Camera & parking view opens in the central display.  Select ② Memory Parking Assist menu. Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the desired starting point of the assisted parking procedure, e.g. a driveway entrance. Start recording: Tap on 3. If not all conditions for a recording are met, symbol is greyed out. Park the vehicle in the desired parking space. Do not exceed 8 km/h. Stop recording: Stop the vehicle and tap ③ again. The recording is stored. In the Memory Parking Assist settings you can delete and rename stored parking procedures.   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

PARKING WITH MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements:

• A parking procedure has been recorded.   Press button ①. The Camera & parking view opens in the central display.   Select Memory Parking Assist ② menu. Brake the vehicle to a standstill at the starting point of the stored parking procedure. To start the parking procedure: press Select the stored parking procedure from the list. Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives into the selected parking space. The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. After completion of the parking procedure, safeguard the vehicle against rolling away.

EXITING A PARKING SPACE WITH MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Requirements

- The exiting procedure was recorded together with the respective parking procedure and stored separately within one driving cycle. • The vehicle was parked using Memory Parking Assist.  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems   Press button 1. The Camera & parking view opens in the central display.   Select Memory Parking Assist ② menu.

STARTING THE EXITING PROCEDURE

   Confirm the saved exiting procedure.  ▶ Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle drives the recorded route. The turn signal indicator is not switched on automatically. You are responsible for selecting the turn signal indicator in accordance with the traffic conditions. Take control of the vehicle after the exiting procedure has been completed.

SETTING MEMORY PARKING ASSIST

Multimedia system:  Settings Assistance Parking  Memory Parking Assist

RENAMING A RECORDING

Select Memory Parking Assist. Select ☐ next to the desired recording. Enter a name and confirm with OK.

DELETING A RECORDING

Select Memory Parking Assist. Select □ next to the desired recording. The selected recording will be deleted.

DELETING ALL RECORDINGS

Select Memory Parking Assist. Select Delete all lanes.   EQE - Owner's Manual   Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems Alternatively, you can delete all data in Memory Parking Assist by resetting the multimedia system ( → page 572).

Trailer Manoeuvring Assist

FUNCTION OF TRAILER MANEUVERING ASSIST

This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to unsuitable trailers Trailers with a steered axle or a fifth wheel cannot be used with Trailer Manoeuvring Assist. Due to this, the trailer cannot be manoeuvred in the desired direction and you can cause a collision or the trailer can overturn.  Only use Trailer Manoeuvring Assist with trailers with fixed drawbars and axles. 

NOTE

Damage due to overhanging loads in front or drawbar installations The vehicle and the trailer may be damaged during manoeuvring due to overhanging loads at the front of the trailer or drawbar installations.  Pay attention to overhanging loads or drawbar installations while manoeuvring.  Trailer Maneuvering Assist assists you when reversing with a trailer. Using the reversing camera, it monitors the articulation angle between the vehicle and trailer and adjusts it to a specified value. Trailer Maneuvering Assist also limits your speed. Trailer Maneuvering Assist is only an aid. It is not a substitute for you paying full attention to the surroundings. The responsibility for safe manoeuvring and parking remains with you. Make sure that there are no persons, animals or objects in the manoeuvring area while manoeuvring and parking in/exiting parking spaces. You can either enter the articulation angle value directly via the multimedia system, or use a straightening manoeuvre or the 90° manoeuvre. When carrying out a straightening manoeuvre, the system calculates the articulation angle automatically and straightens the vehicle/trailer combination to the trailer's current direction. Observe the notes on towing a trailer ( → page 484).

SYSTEM LIMITS

OBSERVE THE SYSTEM LIMITS OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Active Parking Assist ( → page 466) • 360° Camera ( → page 456) • Reversing camera ( → page 454)

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• The gradient is greater than approximately 15 %.  EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems 

USING TRAILER MANEUVERING ASSIST

Requirements

• The vehicle has been started and is stationary. • A trailer is selected in the Vehicle menu ( → page 490). • A trailer has been detected. • The gradient is less than approximately 15 %. • The tailgate is closed. • The electric parking brake is not applied. • The driver's seat belt is fastened.

USING TRAILER MANEUVERING ASSIST

 Engage reverse R gear. Press button①. The camera image is shown in the central display.  The picture is provided as an example, and is shown without a trailer. You can select various manoeuvres in the Trailer Maneuvering Assist menu. The manoeuvres available depend on the current articulation angle and length of the trailer. To adjust the articulation angle: select Ⓐ. In the central display, swipe the entire area of the camera image to the left or right to change the bend angle. or To activate the straightening manoeuvre: select ①. The system calculates the articulation angle in such a way that the direction of the trailer at the time of activation is maintained. There is a short countersteering movement of the trailer while the vehicle is reversed, which then guides it back to the desired line. In this way, the vehicle is aligned straight with the trailer and, at the same time, the direction of the trailer is maintained. or To activate the 90° manoeuvre: \- Align the vehicle in the same direction (line) as the trailer.   EQE - Owner's Manual  > Driving and parking Driving and driving safety systems  \- Select (left or right) ②. The system calculates the articulation angle so that the trailer can be manoeuvred into a space perpendicular to the vehicle using the smallest possible angle. After the manoeuvre, the vehicle is aligned again in the direction of the trailer. Accelerate and brake as required. ① The maximum articulation angle depends on the length of the trailer. This is calculated by the system by driving the vehicle forwards, including cornering. Before the length of the trailer has been calculated, the maximum articulation angle is approximately 23°. The longer the trailer is, the higher the maximum articulation angle (max. approximately 60°). ① Be aware of all surroundings and always remain ready to brake.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch

< Trailer hitch

Notes on trailer operation


NOTE

The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches The installation – including retrofitting – of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited.  Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to car/trailer combination swerving If you drive too fast in trailer operation, the car/trailer combination may start to swerve. This could cause you to lose control of the car/trailer combination. The car/trailer combination may even overturn. Under no circumstances should you try to straighten the car/trailer combination by increasing your speed. ▶ Reduce the speed and do not countersteer. Brake if necessary. Retrofitting a trailer hitch is permissible only if a trailer load is specified in your vehicle documents. If this is not the case, the vehicle is not approved for trailer operation. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON THE TONGUE WEIGHT:

- Do not use a tongue weight that exceeds or falls below the permissible tongue weight • Use a tongue weight as close as possible to the maximum tongue weight   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch

DO NOT EXCEED THE FOLLOWING VALUES:

• Permissible towing capacity • Permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle • Permissible gross weight of the towing vehicle • Permissible gross weight of the trailer • Maximum permissible speed of the trailer

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE STARTING A JOURNEY:

- The tyre pressure on the rear axle of the towing vehicle is set for a maximum load • The lighting of the connected trailer is operational In the event of increased rear axle load, the car/trailer combination must not exceed a maximum speed of 100 km/h for reasons concerning the operating permit. This also applies in countries in which the permissible maximum speed for car/trailer combinations is above 100 km/h. When you are reversing with a trailer, remember to use the Trailer Manoeuvring Assist function ( → page 481). 

Extending and retracting the ball neck fully electrically

A WARNING Risk of accident due to the ball neck not being engaged If the ball neck is not engaged, the trailer may come loose. Make sure that the ball neck securely engages and locks into place. NOTE Damage to the all-electric trailer hitch due to additional pressure The all-electric trailer hitch could be mechanically damaged by applying additional pressure when the ball neck is being extended or retracted. Do not make the ball neck extend/retract faster by applying additional pressure. NOTE Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the trailer hitch If a trailer hitch is used to recover the vehicle, the vehicle or the trailer hitch itself may be damaged in the process. Use the trailer hitch only for pulling a trailer or attaching approved carrier systems (e.g. a bicycle rack). Exception: Since vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a fixture for a towing eye at the rear, towing or tow-starting is permitted. When towing or tow-starting with the trailer hitch, observe the information in the section "Fitting and removing the towing eye."

EXTENDING THE BALL NECK FULLY ELECTRICALLY

 Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Keep the swivel range clear. Pull button ①. Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will extend fully electrically. Wait until the ball neck has reached the swung-out position with a clear locking noise. When indicator lamp ② is continuously lit, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp Ⓞ will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display. 

RETRACTING THE BALL NECK FULLY ELECTRICALLY

Remove the trailer cable or adapter plug. Pull button 1. Indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling in motion will appear on the driver's display. The ball neck will retract fully electrically.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch Wait until the ball neck has reached the swung-in locked position. When indicator lamp ② goes out, the ball neck is securely locked in place. If the ball neck is not securely locked in place, indicator lamp ② will flash and a message reading Trailer coupling Check lock will appear on the driver's display.

OBSERVE THE INFORMATION ABOUT THE DISPLAYS ON THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:

• Indicator and warning lamps (→ page 920) • Display messages (→ page 849)

Coupling up/uncoupling a trailer


WARNING

Risk of injury due to a change in vehicle level Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the vehicle level may be changed unintentionally, e.g. by other persons. If you couple or uncouple the trailer during this time, you may become trapped. In addition, other people could become trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. Observe the following when coupling or uncoupling: Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate. Do not initiate the level control system and do not operate DYNAMIC SELECT. Do not lock or unlock the vehicle.

THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:

• The ball neck is extended and engaged in a securely locked position. - Vehicles with AIRMATIC: ensure the vehicle is at the normal level (→ page 448). Use the normal level in trailer operation. Off-road-level +1 driving is not permitted in trailer operation on public roads. • A trailer is selected on the Vehicle menu ( → page 490).

TRAILERS WITH A 7-PIN PLUG CAN BE CONNECTED TO THE VEHICLE WITH THE FOLLOWING ADAPTERS:

Adapter plug Adapter cable

THE TRAILER WILL BE CORRECTLY DETECTED BY THE VEHICLE ONLY IF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS ARE MET:

• The trailer is connected correctly. • The trailer lighting system is in working order.

A CORRECTLY CONNECTED TRAILER INFLUENCES, AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE FUNCTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING SYSTEMS:

- ESP ^® trailer stabilisation • Trailer Manoeuvring Assist • Active Lane Keeping Assist • Parking Assist PARKTRONIC • Active Parking Assist • Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch Drive Away Assist Cross traffic warning • Manoeuvring brake function • Reversing camera 360° camera AIRMATIC

COUPLING UP A TRAILER


NOTE

Damage to the starter battery due to full discharge Charging the trailer battery using the power supply of the trailer can damage the starter battery. Do not use the vehicle's power supply to charge the trailer battery. ▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away. Remove the cover cap from the ball head and store it in a safe place. Position the trailer on a level surface behind the vehicle and couple it up to the vehicle.  Open the socket cap. Insert the plug with lug ① into groove ③ on the socket. Turn bayonet coupling ② to the right as far as it will go. Let the cap engage. Secure the cable to the trailer with cable ties (only if you are using an adapter cable). Make sure that the cable is always slack for ease of movement during cornering.

IN THE FOLLOWING CIRCUMSTANCES, A MESSAGE MAY APPEAR ON THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY EVEN IF THE TRAILER HAS BEEN CONNECTED CORRECTLY:

• LEDs have been installed in the trailer lighting system. - The current has fallen below the trailer lighting system's minimum current (50 mA). ① Accessories can be connected to the permanent power supply up to 180 W and to the power supply that is switched on via the ignition lock. EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch 

UNCOUPLING A TRAILER


WARNING

Risk of being crushed and becoming trapped when uncoupling a trailer When uncoupling a trailer with an engaged inertia-activated brake, your hand may become trapped between the vehicle and the trailer drawbar. Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. 

NOTE

Damage during uncoupling with an engaged overrun brake The vehicle may be damaged if you uncouple with an engaged overrun brake. Do not uncouple trailers with an engaged overrun brake. 

WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped when disconnecting the trailer cable Vehicles with AIRMATIC: the vehicle may lower when you disconnect the trailer cable. This could result in other people becoming trapped if their limbs are between the vehicle body and the tyres or underneath the vehicle. Make sure nobody is underneath the vehicle or in the immediate vicinity of the wheel arches when you disconnect the trailer cable. 

NOTE

Damage to the rear bumper from installing adapter cables or adapter plugs

THE FOLLOWING PARTS COULD BE DAMAGED WHEN SWIVELING THE BALL NECK FULLY ELECTRICALLY:

- Bumper - Adapter cable - Adapter plug Always remove the adapter cable or adapter plug before swiveling the ball neck fully electrically. ▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling away. ▶ Disconnect the electrical connection between the vehicle and the trailer. Uncouple the trailer. Place the cover cap on the ball head. ① Trailers with LED lighting: after uncoupling the trailer, switch the vehicle on and then off again.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Trailer hitch 

Configuring settings for trailer operation

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Driving Trailer settings

CONFIGURING SETTINGS FOR A TRAILER

The settings in this menu enable the energy forecast at the start of the trip to be calculated more accurately. Thus the amount of energy, charging station scheduling, charging time and arrival time are calculated more accurately. Select the desired trailer type. Enter the maximum permissible speed of the selected trailer. To save changes: select Confirm.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Bicycle rack function

Bicycle rack function


WARNING

Risk of an accident if the bicycle rack is used incorrectly

THE BICYCLE RACK MAY BECOME DETACHED FROM THE VEHICLE IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch is exceeded. • the bicycle rack is used incorrectly. • the bicycle rack is secured to the ball neck beneath the ball head.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY AND THAT OF OTHER ROAD USERS:

• always adhere to the permissible load capacity of the trailer hitch. • always observe the permissible rear axle load of the towing vehicle. • use the bicycle rack only to transport bicycles. • always mount the bicycle rack properly by attaching to the ball head and the ball neck guide pin, if possible. - when transporting four bicycles, always use bicycle racks that have additional support on the ball neck guide pin. • use only bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz. • always observe the bicycle rack operating instructions. 

NOTE

Damage to or breakage of the trailer hitch due to unsuitable or improperly used bicycle rack. Only use bicycle racks approved by Mercedes-Benz properly as described below. 

NOTE

Increased risk of damage to property due to folded-out ball neck When the trailer is not coupled or the bicycle rack is attached, fold in the ball neck or, in the case of a fully electric trailer hitch, retract the ball neck. 

NOTE

The operating permit may be invalidated due to the illegal installation of trailer hitches The installation - including retrofitting - of a non-folding or non-removable trailer hitch that even partially conceals the license plate or the lighting system is prohibited. Observe the applicable legal regulations for the installation of trailer hitches.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Bicycle rack function  Trailer hitch with additional guide pin Depending on the bicycle rack's design, different numbers of bicycles can be transported.

THE FOLLOWING BICYCLE RACK DESIGNS ARE POSSIBLE:

- When mounted by attaching to ball head ①, the maximum load capacity is 75 kg. You can transport up to three bicycles. - When mounted on ball head ① and guide pin ②, the maximum load capacity is 100 kg. You can transport up to four bicycles. The maximum load capacity is calculated from the weight of the bicycle rack and the bicycle rack load. Observe the notes on driving with a roof load, trailer or fully laden vehicle ( → page 335). When using a bicycle rack, set the tyre pressure for increased load on the rear axle of the vehicle. Further information on the tyre pressure can be found in the tyre pressure table ( → page 756). 

NOTES ON LOADING

The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the ball head, the greater the load on the trailer hitch.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

• mount heavy bicycles as close to the vehicle as possible • always distribute the load on the bicycle rack as evenly as possible across the vehicle's longitudinal axis Mercedes-Benz recommends removing all detachable parts from bicycles (e.g. baskets, child seats, rechargeable batteries) before loading them onto the bicycle rack. This will improve the aerodynamic resistance and centre of gravity of the bicycle rack. Always secure the bicycles to prevent them from moving around and check them at regular intervals to ensure that they are secure. Do not use tarpaulins or other covers. The driving characteristics and rear view may be impaired. In addition, aerodynamic resistance and the load on the trailer hitch will increase.  Load distribution on the bicycle rack Vertical distance between centre of gravity and ball head 2 Horizontal distance between centre of gravity and ball head The centre of gravity is on the vehicle's centre axis.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Bicycle rack function Observe the following information when loading the bicycle rack: LOADING THE BICYCLE RACK

	3 bicycles 4 bicycles
Total weight of bicycle rack and load	Up to 75 kg Up to 100 kg
Max. distance 📋 420 mm 420 mm
Max. distance 🔒 300 mm 400 mm

When transporting four bicycles or a total weight between 75 kg and 100 kg, always use bicycle racks with additional support on both trailer hitch guide pins.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driving and parking Vehicle towing instructions

Vehicle towing instructions

The vehicle is not suitable for the use of tow bar systems that are used for flat towing or dinghy towing, for example. Attaching and using tow bar systems may result in damage to the vehicle. When you are towing a vehicle with tow bar systems, safe driving characteristics cannot be guaranteed for the towing vehicle or the towed vehicle. The vehicle-trailer combination may swerve from side to side.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

• Permitted towing methods ( → page 739) - The notes on towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground ( → page 81)  EQE - Owner's Manual   Driver's display 

< Driver's display

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Notes on the driver's display 496 Overview of status displays on the driver's display 5-5 Notes on the range 497 Overview of status displays on the driver's display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 57 Notes on the 3D driver display 498 Operating the driver's display 499 Driver display menus 501 Head-up display 511 Function of the power availability display 514 EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Notes on the driver's display 

Notes on the driver's display


WARNING

Risk of accident if the driver display fails If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop.

THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING BASIC INFORMATION:

• Speed and power meter level - Range according to average consumption, personal driving style or high-consumption driving style • State of charge of the high-voltage battery • Indicator and warning lamps

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

• Different menus, e.g. for assistance and navigation • Status displays for the driving systems • Display messages Some menu content and settings can be customised ( → page 502). 

Notes on the range

THE RANGE IN GENERAL

- All ranges shown are assumptions based on various calculation bases. The actual range achieved may differ from the range displayed. - Outside temperatures, climate control settings, vehicle interior temperatures, road conditions, driving style etc. directly influence the achievable range. • Pay attention to the charging prompts at all times.

RANGE ACCORDING TO PERSONAL DRIVING STYLE

- Your previous personal consumption will be taken into account when the range is being calculated. - While the navigation system or commuter route is active, additional information about the route ahead can be included in the range calculation.

RANGE WITH LOW CONSUMPTION

\- The maximum range shows the potential range when consumption is low, e.g. as a result of economical driving or having the air conditioning system turned off.

RANGE WITH HIGH CONSUMPTION

- The minimum range shows the range when consumption is high, e.g. as a result of a sporty driving style or having the air conditioning system turned on. • This range is determined based on past and current consumption figures.

ELECTRIC ENERGY CONSUMPTION

\- The From start and From reset consumption figures take into account all active consumer equipment when it comes to the drive system's operational readiness. If the range maximisation function is switched on, the range on the speedometer may increase depending on the potential range ( → page 344). EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Notes on the 3D driver display

Notes on the 3D driver display


WARNING

Risk of accident if the driver display fails If the driver display has failed or is malfunctioning, function restrictions in systems relevant to safety cannot be detected. The operating safety of your vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. If the operating safety of your vehicle is impaired, park the vehicle immediately and safely. Contact a qualified specialist workshop. The 3D driver's display enables a three-dimensional representation of the content of the driver's display. This requires the driver to be recorded by the driver camera.

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• The driver camera is deactivated or is not working. • The driver is outside the detection range of the driver camera. - The operating conditions are not in place, e.g. if the outside temperature is too low or too high.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Operating the driver's display 

Operating the driver's display


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display. SCROLLING ON THE MENU BAR  1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control  EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Operating the driver's display  Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control The content on the driver's display is controlled using the control elements on the left side of the steering wheel. You can use Touch Control to navigate vertically and horizontally by swiping with one finger. Confirm your selection by pressing the Touch Control. To operate Touch Control in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can also set the sensitivity of the Touch Control on the central display (→ page 543). Briefly press main menu button ②. Select a menu by swiping to the left or right on Touch Control To confirm: press Touch Control ③. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus

Driver display menus

Notes on menus on the driver's display


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the driver's display.

THE FOLLOWING MENUS CAN BE CALLED UP VIA THE MENU BAR ON THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:

- Understated - Sport Classic Navigation - Assistance • Offroad (vehicles with 4MATIC) Service • Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport • Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE On some of these menus, you can choose between different display content on the centre display area. On most of the menus, you can use Options to configure further settings for the menu-specific display content. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:  EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus  Calling up and operating menus on the driver's display CALLING UP A MENU VIA THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY MENU BAR  Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1 Back button 2 Main menu button 3 Touch Control Press main menu button ② on the steering wheel. The driver's display menu bar will open.   Mercedes-AMG vehicles Swipe to the left or right on left-hand Touch Control Ⓐ and select a menu (e.g. the Classic menu) on the menu bar. To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control 3.

CALLING UP OR EXITING THE OPTIONS SUBMENU

To call up: press left-hand Touch Control ③. To exit: press back button ①.

BROWSING THROUGH DISPLAY CONTENT OR LISTS

Swipe up, down, left or right on left-hand Touch Control   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus  Within different menus, icons will also appear at the right edge of the centre display section to indicate the current position on a list.

SETTING DISPLAY CONTENT AS THE STANDARD DISPLAY

You can set custom-configured menu display content as the standard display. Press and hold left-hand Touch Control ③ until the bar display that appears is completely filled. The Set direct entry? prompt will appear. Swipe left on left-hand Touch Control ③ and select Yes. To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control 3. To call up standard displays: press back button Ⓞ on the upper level of a menu. i Pressing back button Ⓞ on the standard display will call up the previous menu.

RESETTING VALUES

To call up the Options submenu: press left-hand Touch Control Select Yes. To confirm: press left-hand Touch Control ③.

Configuring settings on the Classic or Under-stated menus

Driver's display: 

SELECTING DISPLAY CONTENT IN THE CENTRE DISPLAY SECTION OF THE CLASSIC MENU

 Speedometer Recommended maximum speed when range monitoring and route guidance are active Digital speedometer 4 Display range of the output 5 Display range of recuperated power (recuperation) 6 Outside temperature 7 Centre display content (example: trip computer) Time 9 Charge level display 10 Range with low consumption ( → page 497) Range according to personal driving style ( → page 497)   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus 

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT WILL BE SHOWN IN CENTRE DISPLAY AREA ⑦:

- Trip and total distance • Distance From start and From reset ECO display - Range trend display • Current consumption • ATTENTION ASSIST Audio • Navigation (with changing navigation instructions)

THE FOLLOWING VALUES ARE SHOWN IN TRIP COMPUTER DISPLAY CONTENT ②:

• Distance covered in electric mode • Electric energy consumption - Driving time Average speed Swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select the desired display content.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON THE CLASSIC MENU:

\- Recommended maximum speed ② ensures that the destination is reached with active route guidance. The state of charge that is desired and entered is taken into account. If it becomes necessary to limit the vehicle's speed to reach the destination safely with the specified state of charge, the recommended maximum speed will be displayed on the speedometer. A message will also appear on the driver's display. Please note that despite recommended maximum speed ②, the maximum permissible speed must not be exceeded. • Display Ⓐ will change when intelligent recuperation is activated ( → page 341).

CHANGING THE RADIO STATION OR TRACK ON THE STATION OR TRACK LIST

You can change radio stations or tracks on the station or track list in the audio display content.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED IN THE MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM:

- Configuring the radio station and track lists. • Switching between tracks • Setting the frequency band  Track list for the audio display content in the centre display section (example) To change radio stations or tracks: swipe left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select a radio station or track on station or track list.  The radio station or track displayed when the vehicle is started depends on the user profile used on the previous trip.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU, FOR EXAMPLE:

- Navigation: selecting and adjusting zoom, route guidance and map settings - Resetting the trip odometer • Resetting the trip computer From start • Resetting the trip computer From reset • Resetting the ECO display values

CHANGING COLOUR SETTINGS ON THE UNDERSTATED MENU

Call up the Understated menu via the driver's display menu bar. To call up the colour list: press the left-hand Touch Control. To select colour settings: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select the desired colour setting. Press the left-hand Touch Control to confirm. To exit the colour list: press the back button ↻. ① Depending on the equipment, the selected colour adjustment will be adopted for the ambient lighting and the MBUX multimedia system. When you select the Understated menu on the driver's display, the content in the MBUX multimedia system will also be reduced.

Calling up the Service menu

Driver's display: Service The current status of the vehicle is shown on the Service menu. To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control. THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT IS AVAILABLE ON THE SERVICE MENU (EQUIPMENT-DEPENDENT): • Information about how many messages are in the message memory - Tyre pressure: \- Checking the tyre pressure with the tyre pressure monitoring system ( → page 757) \- Restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system (→ page 757) • ASSYST PLUS: calling up the service due date ( → page 709) \- Mercedes-AMG vehicles: temperature display (high-voltage battery, front and rear high-voltage motors)

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:

• Tyre pressure ( → page 757) • Message memory ( → page 849)   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus 

Calling up the assistant display (Assistance menu)

Driver's display: → Assistance Various driver assistance systems and navigation instructions are displayed on the assistant display. To call up the display: select Assistance on the driver's display.  Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC display on the assistant display (example)

THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS MAY VARY DEPENDING ON THE DRIVING SITUATION:

• The navigation instructions in the left-hand display section • The traffic light view in the right-hand display section • The display of the driver assistance systems • The level of detail on the assistant display

THE FOLLOWING STATUS DISPLAYS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE ASSISTANT DISPLAY:

Green: pedestrian detection active Grey: pedestrian detection enabled - Green radar waves next to vehicle: Active Blind Spot Assist is enabled and ready for operation - Grey radar waves next to vehicle: Active Blind Spot Assist is enabled but not ready for operation

THE CONTENT ON THE ASSISTANT DISPLAY WILL ADAPT TO THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• Number of lanes detected • Change of direction, e.g. lane change • Current road conditions • Road users detected The assistant display does not display other detected obstacles with the exception of road users.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:

• Starting route guidance • With active route guidance: end route guidance • Call up previous destinations and favourites • Start new route guidance to a recent destination • Start new route guidance to a favourite

Configuring settings on the Supersport menu

Requirements

• For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus  Driver's display: Supersport To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control. To select: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control and select the desired display content.  1 Display range of the output 2 Centre display content (example: power display) 5 Display range of recuperated power (recuperation) The displays for output ① and recuperated power ③ are given either as percentages or as absolute values.

CENTRE DISPLAY AREA OF THE SUPERSPORT MENU SHOWS THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT:

• Power display (electrical drive support) • Temperature display (high-voltage battery and front and rear high-voltage motors) • Setup (drive, AMG DYNAMICS, suspension and sound) G-force - Trip and total distance • Distance From start and From reset - Current consumption Audio Navigation Depending on the vehicle equipment, AMG-specific content regarding temperature, engine data and setup will be displayed. The settings for the setup display content can be configured either via the buttons on the multifunction steering wheel or via the MBUX multimedia system ( → page 352).

DEPENDING ON THE SELECTED DISPLAY CONTENT IN CENTRE DISPLAY AREA Ⓞ, THE FOLLOWING WILL BE DISPLAYED IN THE OUTER AREA OF THE MENU:

• Power display as a percentage • Current engine output and current torque

Calling up the Track Pace menu

Requirements

• For Mercedes-AMG vehicles only. Driver's display: TRACK PACE The Track Pace function is intended for use on designated race tracks. Do not use this function on public roads, and adapt your driving style to your personal capabilities and the ambient conditions.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus 

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS WILL BE DISPLAYED ON THE TRACK PACE MENU:

G-meter • Race track selected • Braking and acceleration procedure • Gear currently selected  Displays on the Track Pace menu (example) G-meter 2 Centre display content (example: electric drive support display) Telemetry display (example: selected race track) To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

THE DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE TRACK PACE MENU WILL ADAPT TO THE SELECTED SETTINGS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:

Gear display Electric drive support display • Recuperated power display G-meter - Braking points - Acceleration • Quarter-miles • Race track selected on the central display - Current race - Record route While the vehicle is in motion, the G-meter shows the forces that are exerted on the vehicle occupants both laterally and in the direction of travel. The maximum values appear in red in the coordinate system.

Calling up the Sport menu

Driver's display:  Information on electric mode is displayed on the Sport menu. To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.  Maximum available output 2 Current output 3 Recuperative braking G-force display 5 Selected recuperation level 6 Range trend display ⑦ State of charge of the high-voltage battery   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus The range indicator on the driver's display will vary depending on the menu selected.  Display content for range ① Range with high consumption ( → page 497) 2 Range according to personal driving style ( → page 497) Range with low consumption ( → page 497)

Calling up the off-road menu

Driver's display:  To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control. 

AMONG OTHER THINGS, THE MENU CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

\- Steering angle  - Chassis height • Elevation above sea level • Compass with direction of travel Coordinates

Calling up navigation instructions on the driver's display

 To call up the menu: press the left-hand Touch Control.

CHANGING THE SCALE OF THE SELECTED MAP VIEW

 ① Distance to the change of direction Road to which the change of direction leads ③ Display of traffic incident Currently selected route 5 Indicator showing vehicle's current position 6 Change-of-direction symbol 7 Recommended lane (white) Lane not recommended (grey) 9 Current lane  EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Driver display menus  The level of detail in the navigation instructions in the left-hand display section may vary. To zoom in and out on the map directly: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. If no operation is performed within a short time of the autozoom being activated, the set map scale of the map view already selected will appear. You can set the permanent map scale display in the MBUX multimedia system ( → page 624).

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE OPTIONS SUBMENU:

• With active route guidance: end route guidance - Select route guidance - Map settings If the current route guidance is ended on the Navigation menu of the driver's display, it will also be ended in the MBUX multimedia system. On the Options submenu, you can use other functions in the Destinations and Map settings categories.

YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IN THE DESTINATIONS CATEGORY:

• Call up previous destinations and favourites • Start new route guidance to a favourite The two options Work and Home will be displayed in Favourites even if no address is stored.

YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IN THE MAP SETTINGS CATEGORY:

• Activate auto zoom - Set the map view, satellite view and route overview.

THE FOLLOWING MAP VIEWS ARE AVAILABLE ON THE NAVIGATION MENU:

Entire route • 2D direction of travel 2D north-up 3D map There is an additional navigation view on the front passenger display. The front passenger can thus assist the driver with route guidance ( → page 611).  EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Head-up display 

Head-up display

Function of the head-up display

The head-up display projects various content into the driver's field of vision, for example.

YOU CAN USE THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY MENU BAR TO SELECT VARIOUS CONTEXTS, E.G.:

• Mercedes-AMG vehicles: Supersport • Mercedes-AMG vehicles: TRACK PACE • Mercedes-AMG vehicles: RACE START Race Minimal Sport Standard • Offroad (vehicles with 4MATIC) • ECO display (depending on model and equipment) (→ page 340) Settings Head-up display on/off

HEAD-UP DISPLAY CONTENT WITH NAVIGATION (9X3°)

 Navigation instructions Navigation instructions (distance to the next route event) 3 Steer Assist status Current speed 5 Set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control) 6 Detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist) When you receive a call, the 📄 Call waiting message will appear on the head-up display and the driver's display.  EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Head-up display 

HEAD-UP DISPLAY ON THE SUPERSPORT MENU (AMG VEHICLES)

 1 Output obtained as a percentage Setting of the recuperation behaviour Current speed, set speed in the driving system (e.g. cruise control), detected traffic signs (Traffic Sign Assist) When you receive a call, the 📄 Call waiting message will appear on the head-up display and the driver's display.

SYSTEM LIMITS

VISIBILITY IS PARTICULARLY INFLUENCED BY THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

- Seat position • Image position setting • Light conditions - Wet road surfaces - Objects on the display cover • Polarisation in sunglasses You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Operating the head-up display

SELECTING DISPLAY CONTENT OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY VIA THE MENU BAR OF THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

Press the main menu button on the left. To select the menu bar of the head-up display: swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. 

SWITCHING BETWEEN DISPLAY CONTENT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. A preview of the selected display content will appear on the head-up display. To confirm: press the OK button.

SWITCHING BACK TO THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY

Press the ↩ or ↩ button.

SETTING THE POSITION AND BRIGHTNESS

Swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control and select Settings on the menu bar of the head-up display. Press the left-hand Touch Control. The current position and brightness settings will be displayed as graphics on the head-up display as well as on the driver's display.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Head-up display To adjust the position: swipe upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To adjust the brightness: swipe to the left or right on the left-hand Touch Control. The settings configured for position and brightness will be saved automatically. Press the ↩ or OK button to exit the settings.

Switching the head-up display on/off

Driver's display: 

SWITCHING ON

Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Press the left-hand Touch Control OK.

SWITCHING OFF

Swipe upwards on the left-hand Touch Control. Swipe on the left-hand Touch Control and select Head-up display. Press the left-hand Touch Control OK.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Function of the power availability display 

Function of the power availability display

 1 Current output ② Available operating energy output 3 Recuperated energy (recuperation) 4 Recuperation level set The maximum operating energy output is available in normal operating status. When the maximum recuperated power is reached, the additional desired deceleration is set via the brake control system. Also brake with the service brake if necessary.

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES, THE OPERATING ENERGY OUTPUT AVAILABLE MAY DEVIATE FROM THE MAXIMUM VALUE:

- When the outside temperatures are very high or low • In the event of very high output requests for a longer period of time - When the high-voltage battery's state of charge is very low - When the drive system is malfunctioning The values displayed serve only as orientation. The displayed operating energy output value can deviate from the actual value.   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Overview of status displays on the driver's display 

Overview of status displays on the driver's display

The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems can be found in display sections ① to ②.  The number, positions and presentation of the status indicators on the driver's display depend on which systems are activated or deactivated. Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display) Active Parking Assist is available ( → page 15) Active Parking Assist has recognised a parking space ( → page 15) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 465) Cruise control ( → page 406) LIM Limiter ( → page 407) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) Active Brake Assist switched off (→ page 433) Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (→ page 433) Active Steering Assist ( → page 421) Active Lane Change Assist ( → page 425) Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 444) Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (→ page 443) Haptic accelerator pedal (→ page 344) HOLD HOLD function (→ page 401) Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( → page 289) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( → page 291) Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only)   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display Overview of status displays on the driver's display Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( → page 419) * Slippery road surface warning Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( → page 433) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( → page 436)   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display > Overview of status displays on the driver's display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) 

Overview of status displays on the driver's display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The status displays for the driving and driving safety systems in Mercedes-AMG vehicles can be found in display sections ① to ⑤.  The number, positions and presentation of the status indicators on the driver's display depend on which systems are activated or deactivated. Pedestrian detection (only on assistant display) Active Parking Assist is available ( → page 15) Active Parking Assist has recognised a parking space ( → page 15) Parking Assist PARKTRONIC deactivated (→ page 465) Cruise control ( → page 406) LIM Limiter ( → page 407) Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) Specified distance for Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 410) Active Brake Assist switched off (→ page 433) Active Brake Assist impaired or not functioning (→ page 433) Active Steering Assist ( → page 421) Active Lane Change Assist ( → page 425) Active Lane Keeping Assist (→ page 444) Active Blind Spot Assist (only on assistant display) (→ page 443) HOLD HOLD function (→ page 401) Adaptive Highbeam Assist ( → page 289) Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus ( → page 291) Maximum permissible speed exceeded (for certain countries only) Active Stop-and-Go Assist ( → page 419)   EQE - Owner's Manual Driver's display > Overview of status displays on the driver's display (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) * Slippery road surface warning AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 449) AMG Active Sound ( → page 345) AMG DYNAMICS (→ page 348) Vehicles with Speed Limit Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( → page 433) Vehicles with Traffic Sign Assist: detected instructions and traffic signs ( → page 436)   Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual   MBUX Voice Assistant 

< MBUX Voice Assistant

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Notes on operating safety 520 Operation 521 Using MBUX voice assistant effectively 524 Essential voice commands 526 EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Notes on operating safety

Notes on operating safety

FOR YOUR OWN SAFETY, ALWAYS OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN OPERATING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT AND ESPECIALLY YOUR VOICE CONTROL SYSTEM:

- Observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are driving. - If you use the voice control system in an emergency your voice can change and your telephone call, e.g. an emergency call, can thereby be delayed. - Familiarise yourself with the voice control system functions before starting the journey.

The voice control system does not replace the Owner's Manual.

The answers from the voice control system do not provide the complete scope of information contained in the Owner's Manual. The voice control system also does not give detailed warning or damage information. Therefore read the Owner's Manual so that you are fully informed about the functions and safe operation of the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Operation

Operation

Function of the MBUX voice assistant

You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link: Using the MBUX voice assistant, vehicle functions and various areas of the MBUX multimedia system can be operated by voice input, e.g. Navigation or Telephone. The MBUX voice assistant is operational about half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats (depending on the optional equipment).

Conducting a dialogue

Requirements:

- The voice activation function is activated in the multimedia system ( → page 522). - For corrections during output, the Voice barge-in option must be activated in the multimedia system ( → page 522).

STARTING A DIALOGUE

Say Hey Mercedes to activate the MBUX voice assistant. or Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel. A wave appears in the MBUX multimedia system. The dialogue can be started. For the dialogue with the MBUX voice assistant, you can use complete sentences of colloquial language as voice commands. Voice activation can also be combined directly with a voice command, e.g. Hey Mercedes, how warm is it outside?

INTERRUPTING THE DIALOGUE

During the dialogue say Pause. The dialogue is interrupted. Say Hey Mercedes to continue the dialogue.

CORRECTING AN ENTRY

During the dialogue say Correction. or Interrupt the system's voice output.

CHANGING DIALOGUE LEVEL

During the dialogue, say Back. The MBUX voice assistant jumps back to the previous dialogue step. During the dialogue, say From the beginning again. The MBUX voice assistant jumps to the highest dialogue level.

NAVIGATING IN THE SELECTION LIST

If a voice command does not achieve a clear result, a selection list is shown.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Operation Say the line number or the content to select an entry or to have further details shown. Say Next page or Previous page to browse the selection list.

CALLING UP HELP

For information about the MBUX voice assistant: say Hey Mercedes, what can you do? . Current application: say Help. You will receive suggestions and information about operation of the MBUX voice assistant for the current application. Specific function: call up the voice command for the required function, for example with Hey Mercedes, I need help with the radio. Digital Owner's Manual: say Show me the Owner's Manual. The full extent of the Digital Owner's Manual is available on the central display when the vehicle is stationary.

Overview of the operable functions of the MBUX voice assistant

YOU CAN USE THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT TO OPERATE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT:

Telephone • Text message and e-mail Navigation Radio and media - Vehicle functions • Online functions Full functionality of the voice control system is only available for you with activation of online voice control ( → page 522).

Information on the language setting

You can change the language of the MBUX voice assistant via the system language settings ( → page 568). If the set system language is not supported by the MBUX voice assistant, English will be selected.

Setting functions of MBUX voice assistant using the multimedia system

Multimedia system: Settings System Voice assistant

SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION OF MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT ON OR OFF

Select Hey Mercedes. When the function is active, the Hey Mercedes voice command can activate the dialogue.

SWITCHING DIRECT COMMANDS ON OR OFF

Select ▶ Activate or deactivate the function. If the function is active, some commands can be used without Hey Mercedes, for example Next track.

SWITCHING VOICE ACTIVATION FOR INDIVIDUAL SEATS ON OR OFF

Select ▶ Switch the function for the desired seats on or off.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Operation

SWITCHING VOICE INTERRUPTION ON OR OFF

Select Further settings. Select Voice barge-in. If the function is active, a command can be interjected during voice output of the system.

SWITCHING PROACTIVITY ON OR OFF

Select Further settings. Select the desired situation, e.g. Activate your profile or Don't forget your phone. When the function is active, the voice assistant proactively provides information in specific situations.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING ONLINE VOICE CONTROL

① Online voice control is activated at the factory. Select Online recognition. ▶ Activate or deactivate the function. If the function is activated and a Mercedes me user account is linked to the vehicle, additional results are available through the provision of external information, e.g. information on POIs. By clicking the symbol in the wave, more information about the online voice control can be displayed.

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING CONTACTS FOR ONLINE USE

Select Contact upload for online recognition. When the function is active, contacts will be found more easily and accurately using voice input.  

Using MBUX voice assistant effectively

Notes on optimum use of MBUX voice assistant

- The MBUX voice assistant is operational half a minute after switching on the vehicle and can be operated from all seats, depending on the equipment installed. The system recognises from which seat the command was spoken and performs actions according to the seat position. - When a dialogue is ended, the MBUX voice assistant continues to be active for as long as the wave is displayed in the multimedia system. You can say another voice command without saying Hey Mercedes. - Using the direct command Change language to English, the system language can be changed to English without Hey Mercedes. Direct commands must be activated for this. - If a user profile has been stored and is active, the MBUX voice assistant can make suggestions based on the habits of the user. If the voice commands are not clear, the system selects an action. The action can be corrected with a new voice command. Say Hey Mercedes, load my personal profile, to activate the profile. The user's voice must first be learned by the system and assigned to a profile. Further information on user profiles ( → page 547). - With the MBUX voice assistant, incoming calls can be accepted or rejected without the keyword Hey Mercedes.

Information on the MBUX online voice assistant

The online voice control facilitates recognition and thanks to external information makes additional results available. Therefore, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you activate online voice control ( → page 522). You will need a Mercedes me user account for this. If you do not yet have a user account you have to create one and connect it with your vehicle ( → page 665). Then call up your Mercedes me user account. The Mercedes me services are shown and can be activated ( → page 666). By clicking on the symbols displayed in the wave, further information on the online status is displayed.

WHEN ONLINE VOICE CONTROL IS ACTIVE, ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE SUCH AS:

Weather - General knowledge • Public holidays and school holidays - Smarthome - Messages • Time, date and time zones EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Using MBUX voice assistant effectively - Pocket and currency calculator • Football results and fixture lists Share prices - Calendar ChitChat Horoscope Geo Quiz The availability of these functions is country and equipment-dependent. ① Text content is taken from Wikipedia in accordance with the CC BY-SA 3.0 licence.  

Essential voice commands

Notes on voice commands

It is not necessary to use exact voice commands to call up a specific function. The MBUX voice assistant also understands you when you use your colloquial speech. Some examples are listed below. For some languages however these examples are only available to a limited extent.

EXAMPLES OF VOICE COMMANDS:

• Navigation ( → page 526) • Telephone ( → page 526) • Radio and TV ( → page 527) • Media player ( → page 527) - Messages (→ page 527) • Vehicle functions ( → page 527) • Online functions ( → page 528)

Examples of navigation voice commands

You can operate the navigation system using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible navigation commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for navigation. Drive me home. • Where is the nearest service station? • Is there a service area along the route? • Set Central Park as intermediate destination. - Cancel the route guidance. • Show my last destination. • I want to buy juice. • Search for a French restaurant in Manhattan.

Examples of telephone voice commands

You can operate phones connected with MBUX multimedia system the using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible telephone commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for phone. • Call Peter Miller on the mobile phone. Dial 0711 17 0. Call my father. - Accept call Reject call • Search for the contact Peter Miller. - Switch to address book • Show me the incoming calls. - Switch the phone 

Examples of radio and TV voice commands

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can operate the radio and TV using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible radio or TV voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for radio or Help for TV. • Play the radio station Heart FM. Next station. Previous station. • Show me the list of radio stations - Save the station • What am I listening to?

Examples of media voice commands

You can operate connected media sources and online music using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible media voice commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for media or Help for player. • Play Michael Jackson. - Next track. Previous track. • Play similar track. - Repeat this track. • Switch on random playback. - Mute the music. - Switch to USB. • Play "Yellow Submarine" by the Beatles.

Examples of message voice commands

Messages can be created, edited and listened to using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible message commands. You will receive additional suggestions if you say Help for messaging. • Write a text message to Jane Doe: When will the next meeting take place? • Show me my new e-mails. • Write an e-mail to Jane Doe. • Read me my new text messages. • Show all new text messages. • Write an e-mail to John Doe in English

Examples of vehicle voice commands

You can operate vehicle settings and vehicle functions using the MBUX voice assistant. The following list offers just a small selection of the possible vehicle voice commands. If no seat is mentioned for commands, the action is carried out automatically for the seat from which the command was spoken or for the function which is closest to that seat. • Switch the seat heating to level 2. • My feet are cold. • Start the Refresh programme. • Switch the massage function on. • I would like to set the ambient light to blue • Switch on the reading lamp.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands • Turn off the rear light. - Open all the windows. • Switch the driver's display to 3D. • How fast can I drive here? • Tell me my next service appointment How warm is it outside?

INFORMATION ABOUT THE VEHICLE CAN ALSO BE REQUESTED:

• Information about individual items of the vehicle equipment - Hey Mercedes, which massage programmes do you have? - Hey Mercedes, do I have Blind Spot Assist? - Hey Mercedes, where is the warning triangle? • Information about functioning of the systems and components installed in the vehicle Hey Mercedes, what is DISTRONIC? - Hey Mercedes, what do I need ESP for? Hey Mercedes, what is MBUX? • Information about operating the systems and components installed in the vehicle - Hey Mercedes, how do I connect my smartphone? - Hey Mercedes, how can I turn on the main beam headlamps? - Hey Mercedes, how do I stop the ionization function?

Examples of online functions

Depending on the country, language and vehicle equipment, additional functions are available when online voice control is active. The system accesses external information and can answer questions about general knowledge and perform calculations, for example. • Is the sun shining in Manchester? • Is it raining at my location? • What are the skiing conditions on the Zugspitze? • What's the time in Sydney now? • In which country do you pay with dollars? • How many Swiss franks make 25 euros? • How long now until the holidays? • What day is it tomorrow? • What is 20 % of 29? • What does my horoscope say? • What is the price of Mercedes-Benz Group shares? Let's play Geo Quiz. I'm bored. • Who is the current prime minister? • What do you know about the Globe Theatre in London? • Who painted the picture "The Scream"? • What's the status in the Premier League? • Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 am. • What's my next task? Tell me a joke. • How many languages do you speak? • What is your favourite animal? Are there any updates? Is the light still on in the kitchen? • Switch off all the devices in my house.    EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX Voice Assistant Essential voice commands • Please set the temperature in the living room to 24 degrees. • Change language to English

Direct command examples

With direct commands, some functions can be operated without first saying the voice command Hey Mercedes. To use direct commands, the function must be activated in the multimedia system ( → page 522). Next TV channel Previous TV channel - Next radio station • Previous radio station Next station Previous station Next track Previous track • Start dashcam recording - Stop dashcam recording • Show the map 3D map 2D map - Align map to north • Align map in direction of travel • Show all routes Show traffic - Navigate to work - Navigate home • Repeat driving instruction - Cancel route guidance  EQE - Owner's Manual   MBUX multimedia system 

< MBUX multimedia system

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Overview and operation 531  Navigation and traffic 587  Driver camera 561  Telephone 636  System settings 563  Online and Internet functions 675  AMG TRACK PACE 573  Media 684  Drive system settings 579  Radio 693  Off-road menu 580  TV 698  Fit & Healthy 582  Sound 704  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

Overview and operation

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.  

NOTE

Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display/front passenger display. The surface of the display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface may heat up considerably.  If the display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a longer period of time.  Example: Vehicles with central display Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience. \- Operating Touch Control (→ page 542) 2 Central display with touch functionality • Overview of the Zero Layer ( → page 537) - Calling up and operating the Zero Layer (→ page 539)  581 EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation • Home screen overview (→ page 541) - Operating the touchscreen (→ page 543) 3 Switch panel with: Fingerprint sensor Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the central display off Switches sound on or off Adjusts the volume  Example: Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen ① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system \- Operating Touch Control (→ page 542) 2 Central display with touch functionality for the driver • Overview of the Zero Layer ( → page 537) - Calling up and operating the Zero Layer (→ page 539) • Home screen overview (→ page 541) - Operating the touchscreen (→ page 543) Front passenger display with touch functionality Switch panel with: Fingerprint sensor Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off Switches sound on or off Adjusts the volume To connect the passenger's mobile phone to the MBUX multimedia system, a QR code is shown in front passenger display. If possible, the QR code should be scanned with the mobile phone when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. after entering the vehicle. Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice dialogue. Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes" (→ page 521). You can start a voice navigation, for example, with the input of a 3 word address from what3words. Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you. In the zero layer, entertainment sources as well as telephone, active applications and suggestions are directly available to you. You can conveniently call up and add your favourites using the ★ button on the steering wheel. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly. If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, phone numbers dialled during operation, active massage programmes or vehicle functions are suggested to you. Suggestions are displayed on the zero layer based on context and your user behaviour. The configuration of the suggestions is completed in the system settings. You can compile your user profile from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some functions and services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric procedures to identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN. The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various actions. The call is made via the Control Center.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g. in the navigation, and on the Internet.

ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN)


WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to distraction when the driver is looking at the front passenger display If you look at the front passenger display while driving, you may be distracted from the traffic. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The front passenger display is intended exclusively for the front passenger. Keep the actual traffic situation constantly in view. Avoid looking at the front passenger display while driving. The front passenger display is an additional touchscreen specifically for the front passenger.

REQUIREMENTS FOR DISPLAYING CONTENT ON THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY WHILE DRIVING:

• The passenger is sitting on the passenger seat. • The driver camera is switched on (→ page 562). In the status line of the central display is shown as a ☐ white symbol.  • The driver camera detects the driver's head and line of sight. It displays content from the MBUX multimedia system independently of the central display. Depending on the application, operation is independent of the driver. Depending on the market, extended content, e.g. playback of media content, is also available while driving. For the playback of certain content on the front passenger display, e.g. moving images, the pairing of Bluetooth ^® headphones is necessary. If the driver keeps their eyes on the front passenger display for too long, content, e.g. moving images, will be hidden. An intelligent, camera-based blocking concept is used for this purpose.

WHEN THE VEHICLE IS PARKED, THE FRONT PASSENGER CAN USE THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• The passenger is sitting on the passenger seat. • There is interaction with the MBUX multimedia system. If the driver has left the vehicle briefly, e.g. to go shopping, the front passenger display can also be operated. If no front passenger is present, a digital decorative image can be shown on the front passenger display ( → page 563).

Overview of the MBUX multimedia system


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. 

NOTE

Increased surface temperature due to direct sunlight on the central display/front passenger display The surface of the display is very dark. If the display is exposed to direct sunlight, the surface may heat up considerably. If the display has been exposed to direct sunlight, allow it to cool down before touching it for a longer period of time.  Vehicles with central display ① Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system MBUX stands for Mercedes-Benz User Experience. \- Operates Touch Control (→ page 542) 2 Central display with touch functionality • Overview of the zero layer ( → page 537) - Calls up and operates the zero layer (→ page 539) • Home screen overview (→ page 541) - Operates the touchscreen (→ page 543) 3 Switch panel with: Fingerprint sensor Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the central display off Switches sound on or off Adjusts the volume  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation   Vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen 1 Touch Control and control panel for the MBUX multimedia system \- Operates Touch Control (→ page 542) 2 Central display with touch functionality for the driver • Overview of the zero layer (→ page 537) - Calls up and operates the zero layer (→ page 539) • Home screen overview (→ page 541) - Operates the touchscreen (→ page 543) 3 Front passenger display with touch functionality Switch panel with: Fingerprint sensor Switches the MBUX multimedia system on or off, switches the central and front passenger displays on or off Switches sound on or off Adjusts the volume Various MBUX multimedia system apps offer the option of linking via QR code. Scan this QR code with your mobile phone before starting the journey. Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice dialogue. Operation with natural speech starts after the wake-up call "Hey Mercedes" (→ page 521). You can start a voice navigation, for example, with the input of a three-word address from what3words. Numerous application, online services, services and apps are available for you. These can be called up via the home screen. In the zero layer, entertainment sources as well as telephone, active applications and suggestions are directly available to you. You can conveniently call up and add your favourites using the ★ button on the steering wheel. Quick-access in the home screen and in the applications serve to select functions more quickly. If you use the learning function of the multimedia system, phone numbers dialled during operation, active massage programmes or vehicle functions are suggested to you, for example. Suggestions are displayed on the zero layer based on context and your user behaviour. The configuration of the suggestions is completed in the system settings. You can compile your user profile from various vehicle settings and settings of the multimedia system. Some functions and services are protected by a PIN. You can teach in biometric procedures to identify yourself with these instead of the four-digit Mercedes me PIN. The Notifications Centre collects incoming notifications, e.g. about an available software update. Depending on the type of notification it offers various actions. The call is made via the Control Center. With the global search, you can search on the home screen via categories, e.g. in the navigation, and on the internet. 

FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN)

A

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to distraction when the driver is looking at the front passenger display If you look at the front passenger display while driving, you may be distracted from the traffic. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. The front passenger display is intended exclusively for the front passenger. ▶ Keep the actual traffic situation constantly in view. Avoid looking at the front passenger display while driving. The front passenger display is an additional touchscreen specifically for the front passenger.

REQUIREMENTS FOR DISPLAYING CONTENT ON THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY WHILE DRIVING:

• The passenger is sitting on the passenger seat. • The driver camera is switched on (→ page 562). In the status line of the central display is shown as a white symbol. • The driver camera detects the driver's head and line of sight. It displays content from the MBUX multimedia system independently of the central display. Depending on the application, operation is independent of the driver. Depending on the market, extended content, e.g. playback of media content, is also available while driving. For the playback of certain content on the front passenger display, e.g. moving images, it is necessary to connect Bluetooth ^® headphones. If the driver keeps their eyes on the front passenger display for too long, content, e.g. moving images, will be hidden. An intelligent, camera-based blocking concept is used for this purpose.

i

WHEN THE VEHICLE IS PARKED, THE FRONT PASSENGER CAN USE THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• The passenger is sitting on the passenger seat. • There is interaction with the MBUX multimedia system. If the driver has left the vehicle briefly, e.g. to go shopping, the front passenger display can also be operated.

i

If no front passenger is present, a digital decorative image can be shown on the front passenger display ( → page 563).

ANTI-THEFT PROTECTION

This device is equipped with technical provisions to protect it against theft. More detailed information about anti-theft protection can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Zero layer

FUNCTION OF THE ZERO LAYER

The zero layer provides you with dynamic content from the MBUX multimedia system and is used to quickly access and control the applications you use.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation When you select 📄 on the central display, the digital map with the applications appears in the lower display area. Compared to the home screen with a classic menu, the steps required to call up the applications are reduced. You can switch between the zero layer and the home screen with a classic menu. The applications can be hidden from the display area and shown again.

THE ZERO LAYER PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING MODULES AND APPLICATIONS:

• EQ module and navigation module The EQ module is always shown on the digital map. In the expanded view, charging settings and navigation functions are offered. • Entertainment (media, radio) and telephone When the lower display area is shown, the entertainment sources are always displayed. A mobile phone must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system for the phone to be displayed. • Active applications The lower display area shows an active massage programme, for example. \- Suggestions Suggestions are displayed on the lower display area based on context and your user behaviour. Here are a few examples: \- Latest calls \- Active massage programs \- Vehicle functions \- Online voice applications • Online voice applications In the lower display area, context-dependent services that can be executed via voice are available for direct access.  The applications are first displayed in a reduced view. By tapping on them, you can operate them or open the associated menu (expanded view). A long press on a suggestion opens a context menu in which further functions are available. The learning function can be switched on and off for the options ( → page 568).

OVERVIEW ZERO LAYER

DIGITAL MAP AND USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS (EXAMPLE)

 ① EQ module (reduced view) 2 Enters a destination ( → page 57) 3 Searches for a charging station Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down 5 Calls up user profile settings 6 Content sharing menu ( → page 555) 7 Status line 8 Suggestions Requirement: suggestions are activated ( → page 568). 9 Active application, e.g. massage programme 10 Press briefly: displays all applications and the global search ( → page 539) Press and hold: calls up the home screen with classic menu ( → page 541)   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation 11 Entertainment sources (media, radio) and telephone Requirement for phone: the mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multi-media system. The zero layer shows the digital map and the user-specific applications.

THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS ARE DISPLAYED IN THE LOWER DISPLAY AREA:

Suggestions • Active applications 9 • Entertainment sources and telephone • Online voice applications The lower display area can be hidden and shown ( → page 539).

INFORMATION ABOUT ENTERTAINMENT SOURCES

You can operate the applications in the reduced view or in the menu (expanded view) ( → page 539).

EXAMPLES:

• Control a media source, e.g. pause/play, next track, set a station • Select tracks from the current playlist or stations from the station list - Select a media source The media source must be connected to the MBUX multimedia system.

INFORMATION ABOUT THE TELEPHONE

To use the functions, your mobile phone must be connected with the MBUX multimedia system. Requirement for suggestions: the Calls & messages option is activated in the suggestions.

EXAMPLES:

- Answer a call and call a missed call The missed calls are displayed for the mobile phone currently connected to the MBUX multimedia system. • Display contacts and call list and call a contact • Use voice functions - Suggest contacts The contacts are suggested for the mobile phone connected to the MBUX multimedia system. No contacts are suggested for a mobile phone that is linked to another user profile. • Write messages to contacts (suggestion) - Connect a device via the device manager (suggestion)

INFORMATION ABOUT ACTIVE APPLICATIONS

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

• Operating the massage programme • Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme • Raising or lowering the vehicle level

SUGGESTIONS FOR COMFORT AND VEHICLE FUNCTIONS AS WELL AS NAVIGATION

Requirement: the Comfort, Vehicle and Navigation options are activated in the suggestions. - Operating the massage programme For example, the multimedia system suggests a programme at a certain time. • Operating an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme - Opening the tailgate Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with boot lid convenience closing.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation - Opening and closing the convenience doors Requirement: the vehicle is equipped with comfort doors. • Setting the vehicle level • Making heating settings • Activating/deactivating Parking Assist PARKTRONIC • Selecting previous destinations and destinations from favourites

SUGGESTIONS FOR ONLINE VOICE APPLICATIONS

Requirement: the Online voice services option is activated in the suggestions. The suggested voice applications are made available online and are based on your previous voice inputs.

EXAMPLES:

• What will the weather be like tomorrow? • Play the messages. - Start geoquiz. - Open the garage door.

CALLING UP AND OPERATING THE ZERO LAYER

CALLING UP THE ZERO LAYER

When the vehicle has been switched on, the zero layer is displayed with the digital map. Navigation is active. From another application: press the button on the right side of the steering wheel. or Tap on

OPERATING APPLICATIONS IN THE REDUCED VIEW (EXAMPLES)

Media: to play the previous or next track, tap ▶ or ▶. To answer a call or call a missed call: tap on the contact. After the connection has been established, the call functions are available. To end a call: tap on the contact again. To reply to message: tap on a message and dictate the message via the MBUX Voice Assistant. To start a relaxation programme: tap on the application and start the relaxation programme. To select a previous destination: tap on the application and select one of the previous destinations. To select a destination from the favourites: tap on the application and select the destination.

HIDING AND SHOWING THE DISPLAY AREA WITH APPLICATIONS

To hide: pull the applications down. To show: pull the bar above upwards. or Select or Press the button on the steering wheel on the right.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation  EQ MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW)  Setting the charging program ( → page 378) Current state of charge of the high-voltage battery Maximum state of charge (depending on the setting) Sets the next charging break (to use a less expensive tariff) Sets the departure time 6 Opens the socket flap 7 Activates or deactivates ECO charging Tap on the EQ module ( → page 537). The charging settings are displayed.

ADDITIONAL EQ AND NAVIGATION FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE LOWER MENU BAR:

Symbol Enters a destination ( → page 57) Route The route shows charging stops and the destination. Range Switches range maximisation on or off ( → page 344). Consumption The current and average fuel consumption will be displayed. Symbol Makes settings for View, Messages & tones and Route. To close the menu: select ↩.

NAVIGATION MODULE (EXPANDED VIEW)

 Example: navigation module with active route guidance Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station Charging stop shows the charging time recommended by the Navigation with Electric Intelligence as well as states of charge on arrival and onward journey for an optimal travel time Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time Searches for an additional charging station Tap on the EQ module ( → page 537). Select Route in the lower menu bar.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation 

OPERATING A MENU IN THE LOWER DISPLAY AREA (EXAMPLE: ACTIVE MASSAGE PROGRAMME)

 Selecting a massage programme 2 Starts/stops a massage programme for the driver Starts/stops a massage programme for the front passenger Sets the massage programme intensity for the driver's or front passenger seat Tap on the application. The expanded view of the application is displayed. To close the menu: select ↩.

OPENING AND CLOSING THE CONTEXT MENU FOR A SUGGESTION

Press and hold on a suggestion. The context menu opens and shows the Do not suggest option, for example. To close: swipe downwards.

REMOVING A SUGGESTION FROM THE DISPLAY AREA

Swipe the suggestion upwards.

SHOWING ALL APPLICATIONS

Press □ briefly. Available applications are displayed. The global search is available. To hide applications: briefly press 📋 again.

SWITCHING BETWEEN ZERO LAYER AND HOME SCREEN WITH CLASSIC MENU

Long press on The home screen with classic menu is shown. To return to the zero layer: press and hold on

Home screen overview

 ① Displays in the status line 2 Calls up user profile settings and switches user 3 Calls up the Control Centre: pull the bar down 4 Calls up favourites 5 Displays in the status line 6 Displays further applications 7 Calls up an application Quick-access to application Global menu Calls up previous menu Press and hold: switches between home screen and zero layer Previous track or previous radio station ▶ Next track or next radio station   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation  During a telephone call, the call duration is displayed in global menu 9. Alternatively, to switch between the home screen and the zero layer, press and hold the © button on the steering wheel on the right.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE CALLED UP IN THE CONTROL CENTRE:

- Notifications Centre Content sharing menu Favourites • Vehicle quick-access

Touch Control

OPERATING TOUCH CONTROL (MBUX MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM)

 Mercedes-AMG vehicles 1 © Shows zero layer/home screen 2 Touch Control ◀ ▲ ▶ ▼ swipe in the direction of the arrow (navigate) OK Press (confirm) 3 Returns to the previous display 4 Makes or accepts a call 5 Rejects or ends a call 6 To increase volume: swipe upwards To reduce volume: swipe down To switch off the sound: press 7 B Calls up favourites (press briefly) or adds favourites (press and hold) 8 Starts the MBUX voice assistant   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation  To operate Touch Control in the most effective way, use the tip of your thumb if possible. You can navigate through menus and lists via the touch-sensitive surface of Touch Control using a single-finger swipe, for example: To enter a character: select a character using the keyboard and press on Touch Control. To select a menu option: scroll in a list and press Touch Control ②. To move the digital map: swipe in any direction.

SETTING THE SENSITIVITY FOR TOUCH CONTROL

Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Control elements ▶ Touch Control sensitivity Select Fast, Medium or Slow.

SETTING ACOUSTIC OPERATIONAL FEEDBACK FOR ALL CONTROL ELEMENTS

Multimedia system: Settings System Control elements Acoustic feedback The function is supported by the selection in a list. Set Off, Unleaded or Loud. If the function is activated you will hear a clicking sound when selecting control elements or when scrolling in a list. When the beginning or end of the list is reached you will hear another clicking sound.

Touchscreen

OPERATING THE TOUCHSCREEN

TAPPING

To select a menu item or entry: tap on a symbol or an entry. To increase the map scale: tap twice quickly with one finger. To reduce the map scale: tap with two fingers. To enter characters with the keypad: tap on a button.

SINGLE-FINGER SWIPE

To navigate in menus: swipe up, down, left or right. To move the digital map: swipe in any direction. To use handwriting to enter characters: write the character with one finger on the touchscreen.

TWO-FINGER SWIPE

To zoom in and out of the map: move two fingers together or apart. To enlarge or reduce the size of a section of a website: move two fingers together or apart. To turn the map: turn anti-clockwise or clockwise using two fingers.

THREE-FINGER SWIPE

To call up the home screen: swipe up with three fingers in an application.

TOUCHING, HOLDING AND MOVING

To move the map: touch the touchscreen and move your finger in any direction.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation To set the volume on a scale: touch the touchscreen and move the finger to the left or right.

TOUCHING AND HOLDING

To save the destination in the map: touch the touchscreen and hold until a message is shown. To call up a global menu in the applications: touch the touchscreen and hold until the Options menu appears.

SETTING HAPTIC OPERATION FOR THE TOUCHSCREEN

Multimedia system: Settings System Control elements Touch & feel disp. Set Off, Unleaded or High. If the function is switched off, all you need to do is tap the display to make an entry. If the function is switched on, the entry is made by pressing the display. The system supports you with discreet tactile aids and pressure resistances. You can operate the function on the MBUX Hyperscreen for the central and front passenger display.

Overview of the fingerprint sensor

 Equipment with central display  Equipment with MBUX Hyperscreen Fingerprint sensor ① allows you to conveniently access protected MBUX multimedia system functions and services. Compared to protection provided by the Mercedes me PIN, the entry of a four-digit number is not required to activate services and functions with personal content. The fingerprint sensor must be set up before use ( → page 547).   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation If equipped with a front passenger display, one fingerprint can be scanned in for the driver's seat and one for the front passenger seat. These fingerprints are then assigned to the respective seat. They can be used for authentication or to activate your own user profile on the assigned display. The fingerprint sensor stores only a data model and no image of the fingerprint. The data model is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle.

User

NOTES ON USER PROFILES


WARNING

Risk of becoming trapped during adjustment of the driver's seat after calling up a driver profile Selecting a user profile may trigger an adjustment of the driver's seat to the position saved under the user profile. You or other vehicle occupants could be injured in the process. Make sure that when the position of driver's seat is being adjusted using the multimedia system, no people or body parts are in the seat's range of movement. If there is a risk of someone becoming trapped, immediately stop the adjustment process by: a) Pressing the warning message on the central display. or b) Pressing a position button of the memory function or a seat adjustment switch in the driver's door. The adjustment process is stopped. The driver's seat is equipped with an anti-entrapment feature. If the driver's door is open, the driver's seat will not be set after calling up the driver's profile. 

OVERVIEW OF USER PROFILES

REQUIREMENTS FOR USE

• You have a Mercedes me user account. • You have a Mercedes me PIN. • You have agreed to the terms of use. • The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. If one of the pre-requisites listed is missing or if no user profile has been selected, the data described in the following section will be saved in the vehicle as the standard setting. Standard settings can be changed by all vehicle users. User profiles save personal settings. If the vehicle is used by several people, a person can change their profile settings without changing the settings of other users. You can individualise a user profile in the vehicle using the set-up assistant or using the settings in your user profile. Some settings, e.g. the Mercedes me PIN and a profile photo are made in the Mercedes me App or in the Mercedes me Portal. If the user profile is downloaded while travelling, user profiles are not set up using the set-up assistant. User-specific content and applications with personal data are protected by different levels of security ( → page 547). To access protected content, the Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are used. The security level is set by the multimedia system and calculated from the combination of all sensor inputs. Some security levels cannot be turned off. ① WHEN A USER PROFILE IS ACTIVATED, THE FOLLOWING PERSONALISED COMFORT SYSTEMS, FOR EXAMPLE, CAN BE ADJUSTED OR THEIR SETTINGS LOADED: Seat - Ambient light - Outside mirrors Blinds • Climate control settings If the user profile is activated when driving, the driver's seat position will not be adjusted.

USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE EQUIPMENT YOU CAN, AS A USER, SAVE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Driver's seat, steering wheel and mirror settings • Climate control - Ambient light • Radio (including station list) • Suggestions and favourites You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation 

ADDING A USER

Requirements:

• The vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system:  Select + Add user. A QR code is loaded. Scan the displayed QR code with the Mercedes me App or any QR code scanner on a mobile device. If the Mercedes me App is not yet installed on your mobile device, you will be directed to the store of your mobile device. Follow the steps in the Mercedes me App. The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account. This automatically creates your user profile in the vehicle. You will be informed when your user profile is available. When the vehicle is stationary, the set-up assistant starts automatically after user selection. When the user has been added, they can be selected ( → page 549).

SELECTING USER OPTIONS

Multimedia system: 

PROTECTING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS

If you add a new user, access protection is already activated for the user profile. The Mercedes me PIN and, depending on the vehicle equipment, biometric sensors are available for access. Biometric sensors in the vehicle must be taught in. The authentication process then takes all taught-in and available sensors into account.

THE FOLLOWING USER-SPECIFIC CONTENT AND APPLICATIONS ARE PROTECTED, FOR EXAMPLE:

• User selection and user profile settings • ENERGIZING COACH The recorded health data and its evaluation. • In-Car Office The calendar, the tasks and the e-mails. - Parking service The payment transactions. • Mercedes me Store The purchase of services. • System activations of paid vehicle functions \- Biometric sensors The teaching-in of biometric sensors For teaching in and editing biometric recognition see the following section. \- Suggestions The data and determination of the most probable navigation destinations, media sources, radio stations, contacts and messages.  

IN THE FOLLOWING CASES YOU WILL BE PROMPTED FOR AUTHENTICATION OR RE-AUTHENTICATION USING A SENSOR OR THE MERCEDES ME PIN:

• When selecting a protected user profile - When calling a function requiring special protection • If biometric sensors provide insufficient or contradictory information • If the multimedia system no longer trusts a sensor - If the seat belt buckle and the door are opened at the same seat and a function requiring particular protection is called up - When the vehicle is locked from outside ① Facial recognition for re-authentication in the driver's seat is only possible once the door has been closed or the seat belt buckle has been fastened. Select Protect content. ▶ Switch Access protection on or off. When access protection is switched off, your user profile can be viewed from any seat and changes can be made. Access protection is switched on or off on a vehicle-specific basis. i Please note that authentication is necessary for several functions such as In-Car Office and cannot therefore be completely switched off.

SETTING UP AND EDITING BIOMETRIC RECOGNITION

The biometric data models are saved in the sensors in the vehicle. If recognition has been set up, this sensor serves as a contributory factor for authentication on the multimedia system. Select Protect content. Select Facial recognition, Fingerprint recognition or Voice recognition. ① If necessary, authenticate yourself on the multimedia system.

SETTING UP FACIAL RECOGNITION

Follow the system's instructions. Your face is scanned. A message in the driver's or central display shows whether facial recognition was successful or not. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with the facial scan.

SETTING UP FINGERPRINT RECOGNITION

Place and lift your finger several times on the fingerprint sensor under the touchscreen ( → page 544). The finger is scanned. If the scanning procedure is successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile and protected applications with your finger print.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation 

SETTING UP VOICE RECOGNITION

Speak the sentence shown on the central display and follow the voice assistant's instructions. If the voice recognition was successful, a message appears on the central display. You can unlock your user profile. ① Avoid background or disturbing noises during voice recognition.

DELETING BIOMETRIC DATA

Tap on ☐, for example, behind Fingerprint recognition. Select Yes.

CALLING UP THE SET-UP ASSISTANT

Select Profile. Select Set-up assistant. ▶ Follow the directions from the set-up assistant.

CHANGING USER NAME OR PROFILE PHOTO

Select Profile. Select Change user name. or Select Profile picture. Enter the user name or select a user image. Select Finished. You can store your photo in the Mercedes me user account using the app or in the portal. The photo will then be shown in the vehicle. In the vehicle itself, you can select other sample images instead of the photo.

DELETING A USER PROFILE

Select Profile. Select Remove. Select Remove user profile. Your Mercedes me user account and your personal data will remain within the Mercedes me ecosystem.

RESETTING THE USER PROFILE TO FACTORY SETTINGS

Select Profile. Select Reset. Select Yes. This resets the contents of the user profile to factory settings, but not the vehicle. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

SELECTING A USER

Multimedia system:  When you call up your driver profile, the driver's seat and the steering wheel can be set.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

YOU CAN CANCEL THE SETTING PROCESS WITH THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

- Press Tap here to cancel. message on the central display. • Press one of the seat operating buttons in the driver's door. Select Change user. Select a user. When requested to do so, authenticate with the Mercedes me PIN or a taught-in biometric characteristic. The user profile is loaded and activated. If you select Continue without selecting user, no specific settings for the user profile are loaded.

SYNCHRONISING USER PROFILES

Requirements:

• You have a Mercedes me user account. • The vehicle is connected with your Mercedes me user account.

Multimedia system:

Settings Synchronisation Activate Allow synchronisation. When the vehicle is switched on or off, the data stored in the vehicle is automatically synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts. This synchronization is done for all user profiles and is not profile-specific. or Select Synchronise now. After selecting this option, the data stored in the vehicle is synchronised with the Mercedes me user accounts. ① Not all user profile functions are available during synchronization. ① IF THE PERSONALISATION SERVICE IN THE VEHICLE IS DEACTIVATED, ONLY THE FOLLOWING USER PROFILE MASTER DATA IS SYNCHRONISED: Profile name • Profile image • Mercedes me PIN

Favourites

OVERVIEW OF FAVOURITES

Favourites offer you quick access to frequently used applications. 100 favourites are available in total. You can select favourites from categories or you add favourites directly from an application. ① You can add and edit navigation favourites within the application. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

CALLING UP FAVOURITES

Multimedia system:  Alternatively, in the home screen pull down bar ③ in the centre of the status line (→ page 541). Select ★ in the Control Center.

ADDING FAVOURITES

Multimedia system: 

SELECTING FAVOURITES FROM CATEGORIES

Select ▷. Select + Create new favourite. Select the category. Select a favourite. The favourite is stored at the next available position. All positions in the favourites are taken: confirm the message shown. A list shows all the favourites. Select a favourite to be overwritten.

ADDING A FAVOURITE FROM AN APPLICATION

You can, for example, save a contact (example), or add an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. To save a contact as a global favourite: select a contact ( → page 645). Press on a telephone number until a menu is shown. Select Save as favourite. The contact is added as a favourite.

RENAMING FAVOURITES

Multimedia system:  Press on a favourite until a menu is shown. Select Rename. Enter the name. Save the names.

MOVING FAVOURITES

Multimedia system:  Press on a favourite until a menu is shown. Select Move. Move the favourite to the new position. Tap on

DELETING FAVOURITES

Multimedia system:  Press on a favourite until a menu is shown. Select Delete. Select Yes.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation 

RESETTING FAVOURITES

Select Reset all favourites in the menu. Select Yes.

Notifications Centre

OVERVIEW OF THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE

THE FOLLOWING COMMUNICATIONS ARE COLLECTED IN THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE:

• Communications which are generated by the vehicle or from the multimedia system. • Communications which are received through the use of services.

THE FOLLOWING NOTIFICATION TYPES ARE AVAILABLE FOR YOU:

• Navigable destinations and routes - Messages (text messages) • Calendar entries and reminders, e.g. from In-Car Office This function is not available in all countries. - System information, e.g. Important software update available. Confirm to start the update. - Other notifications, e.g., from additional online services that can be subscribed to or emergency reports (e.g. tornado) The Notifications Centre is in the Control Center. Depending on the style set, newly received notifications are shown using a coloured dot. Notifications are normally briefly shown as they are received. If you take no action, these are stored for future access in the Notifications Centre. The notifications are sorted chronologically. The most recent notifications are at the top.  Example of a message ① Calls up the Notifications Centre Symbol for a pinned notification Time message received 4 Calls up the settings Deletes notifications 6 Display for available actions 7 Description of the notification and the issuing service Symbol for notifications Date of the received notifications Depending on the type of notification, up to four different actions are available.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation

EXAMPLES OF ACTIONS INCLUDE:

- Reading aloud - Placing a call - Replying - Calling up a web page Navigation Some notifications, e.g. a navigation destination, are stored longer. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out available actions directly upon receipt of the notifications. A route guidance can be started at a later time. You can pin a notification so that this is not deleted automatically after a certain time. The notification is then denoted by symbol ②.

CALLING UP NOTIFICATIONS

OPENING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE

In the zero layer pull down bar ① in the centre of the status line ( → page 537). or In the home screen pull down bar ③ in the centre of the status line (→ page 541). The Control Centre opens. Select □ in the Control Center.

SELECTING A NOTIFICATION

If several messages are available swipe up or down. Select an action.

CLOSING THE NOTIFICATIONS CENTRE

Select

SELECTING ACTIONS FOR A NOTIFICATION

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Select the action directly after a notification is received and shown. - Select the action later after calling up in the Notifications Centre. Up to two actions available: select the action. More than two actions available: select □. Select the action. The notification is still available. Close the actions with ▶.

EDITING NOTIFICATIONS

▶ Call up the Notifications Centre ( → page 553).

CONFIGURING SETTINGS

Select Settings. Select the service. ▶ Switch the options on or off. THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON THE SERVICE: - Allow notifications • Display in notification centre • Show notifications • Switching Acoustic signals on or off    EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation External access The option allows an external service access to specific data, e.g. the current vehicle position. The detailed, approved information is shown with ⓘ. If Allow notifications is switched off, the options cannot be selected with the exception of External access.

PINNING A NOTIFICATION

Drag a notification to the right on the touchscreen. A pin appears. Tap on the pin. The notification is marked with a pin.

DELETING NOTIFICATIONS

Drag a notification to the left on the touchscreen. or Select □. Select Yes. All messages are deleted.

Global search

GLOBAL SEARCH OVERVIEW

You can call up the global search on the home screen. You can input characters using the keyboard or the handwriting recognition. Alternatively, the MBUX voice assistant allows voice input.

THE GLOBAL SEARCH PROVIDES SEARCH RESULTS FOR THE FOLLOWING CATEGORIES:

Navigation Entertainment • Phone, In-Car Office In-Car Office is not available in all countries. • Digital operator's manual - Internet The global search enables you to search for towns, roads and tourist attractions in the navigation category, for example. The global search makes it possible to enter a 3 word address ( → page 592). If the search field is empty, you will first see smart suggestions in the Suggestions category. As soon as a letter is entered, you will be shown the best hits in the All category. You will find further search results in the individual categories. Next to the category is the number of results. After selecting a category you can select the search results within the category. When you select a search result, a detailed view is opened depending on the category.

USING THE GLOBAL SEARCH

Multimedia system:  In the Suggestions category up to six smart suggestions are displayed, even if no search entry has been entered yet.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation Enter the search term into the search field. As soon as a character is entered the All category is marked. Up to ten search results per category are displayed there. In the other categories suitable search results for the entered search item are displayed. Alternatively, the MBUX Voice Assistant allows voice input using or you switch to the handwriting recognition. To end the search: select OK. To show search results for a category: select a category. To accept the search result: select the search result. An action starts, e.g. a radio station is set or a detailed view is displayed, e.g. for a contact.

Content sharing menu

OVERVIEW OF THE CONTENT SHARING MENU

You can find the Share content menu in the Control Center. It shows the available displays in the vehicle and their playback status. Content currently on a display can be shared with other displays; playback of an entertainment source, for example. Status symbols on the displays inform you about the current settings, for example "Headphones connected". Content is shared in the menu itself or directly from an application. Active content is shared on a display and played back on the receiving display. Inactive content can be searched for in an application and then shared from there. 

THE FOLLOWING DISPLAY CONTENT CAN BE SHARED, FOR EXAMPLE:

Radio stations Media - Browser • ENERGIZING COMFORT programme

OPENING THE CONTENT SHARING MENU IN THE CONTROL CENTER

 Example: content sharing menu Calls up a menu 2 Central display with active content (cover display) 3 Front passenger display Displays animation for content sharing 5 Status information, e.g. ^* Bluetooth* headphones connected to the front passenger display on the right In the zero layer pull down bar ④ in the centre of the status line (→ page 537). or  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation In the home screen pull down bar ③ in the centre of the status line (→ page 541). The Control Centre opens. Select 1

5 SHOWS THE FOLLOWING STATUS INFORMATION:

- Audio playback, e.g. via Bluetooth® headphones 📄 or vehicle loudspeakers 📄 - Playback status, for example pause or mute function active

DEPENDING ON THE STATUS OF THE DISPLAY, THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS SHOWN ON Ⓐ AND Ⓤ:

The cover • The active privacy mode • Display off System off

SHARING MBUX DISPLAY CONTENT

In the Share content menu, you can share content currently being played back on one display with other displays. You can also share content from an application in the vehicle, e.g. in a menu or in a search. In the menu drag and drop a display to another display. The content of one display is placed on another display or retrieved from another display. or  Select Share with everyone. The content of one display is shared with all displays in the vehicle. or Share content directly from an application using Share; share a radio station in the vehicle, for example.

CONTROLLING ENTERTAINMENT SOURCES WITH MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT

Activate the voice assistant with "Hey Mercedes". Say a voice command, for example "Play Rihanna on front passenger seat".

CONTROLLING MEDIA PLAYBACK IN THE CONTROL CENTRE

 Example: control menu Cover (if available) Track and other information Controls playback of the entertainment source Previous track/scene, play/pause or sound on/off, next track/scene On the central display: switches the MBUX multimedia system or the display off On the front passenger display: switches the display off 5 Switches the ☐ privacy mode on or off at the seat 6 Selects the current audio source at the seat for playback on the vehicle speakers   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation The available options are seat-specific. On the front passenger display the sound for the connected headphones can also be switched on or off and the volume can be set. The options in 3 are available depending on the application. In the active ☐ privacy mode, the display content being played back is hidden from the other seats. The display content can be shared but not retrieved. Call up the Control Center on the home screen ( → page 541). The Control Centre opens. Briefly press on a display. The control menu for media playback is called up. Change the settings.

SETTING THE VOLUME FOR HEADPHONES

Select Slide the volume button up or down.

SWITCHING THE SOUND FOR THE HEADPHONES ON AND OFF

To switch off: press and hold The current audio source is muted. To switch on: press and hold once again. Switching the sound for the MBUX multimedia system on or off  On the steering wheel  On the central display control panel  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation   On the control panel when equipped with MBUX Hyperscreen To switch off: press button 1. The current audio source is muted. The 🔔 symbol appears in the status line of the central display. If you are listening to a radio station, for example, and switch off the sound then all media sources will be muted. Traffic and navigation announcements can still be heard in this case. The MBUX voice assistant and telephony are also not affected.

SWITCHING ON

Press button ① again. or Set the volume. or The media source changes. Setting the volume of the MBUX multimedia system

SETTING WITH THE BUTTON

 On the steering wheel  On the central display control panel Press - or + 1. or Swipe across button ①. The volume of the current audio source in the foreground is set.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation  On the control panel when equipped with MBUX Hyperscreen Press - or + 1. The volume of the current audio source in the foreground is set.

THE VOLUME IS ADJUSTED FOR THE FOLLOWING GROUPS:

Entertainment - Ringtone - Calls, for example phone calls • Voice output, for example MBUX voice assistant • Navigation announcements If you set the volume of the voice output to "0", for example, a minimum volume is automatically set when the MBUX voice assistant is next called up. The entertainment volume is automatically adjusted after the multimedia system is restarted.

SETTING IN THE MENU

Press and hold the button on the right of the steering wheel.  of Press and hold on the touchscreen. The home screen appears. Select Settings. Select System. Select Audio. Select a volume setting. The volume can be set for all groups except the entertainment volume. Set the volume.

THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN THE ASSISTANCE MENU:

• Switching the navigation announcements on or off during a phone call. • Reducing the entertainment volume while a navigation announcement is being issued.

Entering characters

USING THE CHARACTER INPUT FUNCTION

Requirements:

- For the handwriting recognition read-aloud function: the MBUX multi-media system is equipped with the MBUX Voice Assistant. • The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Overview and operation • The handwriting recognition read-aloud function is activated. Enter the characters on the Touch Control or on the touchscreen. Character input can be started with a control element and resumed with another. When the keypad is shown, enter the characters by swiping and pressing on the Touch Control or by tapping on the touchscreen. or If handwriting recognition has been selected, write the characters on the touchscreen. Examples for character input include the global search, entering a navigation destination or the renaming of a favourite, for example.

THE TOUCHPAD SUPPORTS CHARACTER INPUT WITH THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

• Handwriting recognition offers character suggestions. - If the read aloud function is activated for handwriting recognition then the entered characters are read aloud.

SETTING THE KEYBOARD AND HANDWRITING RECOGNITION FOR CHARACTER ENTRY

Requirements: • The read-aloud function is available for the selected system language. Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Keyboards and handwriting

SETTING THE KEYBOARD LANGUAGE

Select Keyboard languages. Select one or more keyboard languages.

SETTING THE WRITING SPEED

Select Handwriting recognition. Select an option, e.g. Medium.

ACTIVATING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION

Select Handwriting recognition. Activate Read out The letter that your write on the touchscreen is read aloud.

ACTIVATING HANDWRITING RECOGNITION ON THE KEYBOARD

Select Handwriting recognition. Activate Handwriting recognition You can write characters directly on the keyboard.

DELETING THE USER DICTIONARY

The user dictionary learns from your inputs and offers suggestions during character input. You can reset the user dictionary. Select Reset my dictionary. Select Yes.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Driver camera

Driver camera

Overview of the driver camera


WARNING

Risk of injury from infrared radiation from the camera This product uses an infrared lighting system of risk group 0 (RGO). If the housing is opened or damaged, infrared radiation may damage your retina. Do not open the housing. Always have maintenance work and repairs carried out by a qualified specialist workshop. This device is a product of risk group 0 (RG0) according to IEC 62471: 2006 (First Edition) & DIN EN 62471: 2008. The driver camera is on the driver display or in the 3D driver display. The driver camera can be equipped as a mono camera or as a stereo camera.

THE DRIVER CAMERA DETECTS THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERISTICS:

Head position - Viewing direction • Eyelid closure characteristics Driver's face The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is opened with the key. The current status of the driver camera is shown in the status line of the central display. ① The driver camera records image data for applications such as ATTENTION ASSIST and facial recognition, for example. The driver camera converts the image data directly into meta data. No image data is saved in the process. The data is only processed in the vehicle and is not transmitted from the vehicle. The driver camera must be set up for face detection before use ( → page 547).

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• The driver camera is covered or dirty, misted up or scratched. • The driver's face and/or eyes are covered. • The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared.

DISPLAY MESSAGES

IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS DISPLAY MESSAGES MAY BE SHOWN:

• If the driver camera is not functioning.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Driver camera  The driver camera is malfunctioning. The Driver camera Inoperative See Owner's Manual message appears. • If the driver camera cannot capture the position of your head. The Change steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen message appears. • If the view of the driver camera is reduced or restricted. The Driver camera view currently restricted See Owner's Manual message appears. The message can appear, for example, in the following cases: \- The camera's view is obstructed, e.g. due to a scarf or hat being worn. \- The driver is wearing glasses that block infrared. \- If hair partially obstructs the eyes, e.g. as with a long fringe. \- In the event of strong direct sunlight. The driver camera cannot detect the driver's eyes if the light-dark contrast is too strong. \- When one hand or both hands are on top of the steering wheel (twelve o'clock position).

NOTES ON CARE

Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior ( → page 722).

Switching the driver camera on or off

Multimedia system: Settings System Intelligent assistants The driver camera is automatically activated each time the vehicle is switched on. Select On or Off.

WHEN THE DRIVER CAMERA IS SWITCHED OFF OR THE DRIVER CAMERA VIEW CURRENTLY RESTRICTED SEE OWNER'S MANUAL MESSAGE APPEARS, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE OR LIMITED:

• The 3D driver display (only with stereo camera) (→ page 498) • The microsleep and distraction detection of ATTENTION ASSIST ( → page 404) - The facial recognition This function serves as sensor input for authentication and unlocking of the user profile and protected applications ( → page 547).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings

System settings

Display

CONFIGURING DISPLAY SETTINGS

Multimedia system: 

ADJUSTING THE BRIGHTNESS

Select Display brightness. Vehicles with a driver's display and central display: Adjust the display brightness of the driver's display or central display. ▶ Vehicles with the MBUX Hyperscreen: Adjust the display brightness of the driver's display, central display or the front passenger display.

SETTING THE DECORATIVE IMAGE FOR THE FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY (VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN)

① The function is country-dependent. Select Screensaver, passenger display. A selection of decorative images is displayed. Select the desired decorative image. ① The number of available decorative images is variable. If no user is logged in to the front passenger display and the front passenger display is switched on, the decorative image is visible.

Time and date

SETTING THE TIME ZONE

Multimedia system:  Select Time zone. The list of countries is displayed. ① If there are several time zones available in a country, these will be shown after the country is selected. Select a country and, if required, a time zone. The time zone set is displayed after Time zone. or Select the Automatic time zone entry from the country list. The time zone will be set automatically according to the vehicle location.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings  The Automatic time zone option is available for vehicles with satellite reception.

SETTING THE TIME AND DATE FORMAT

Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Time and date ▶ Set format Select a time and date format.

SETTING THE TIME AND DATE MANUALLY

Requirements

• The vehicle does not have satellite reception. Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Time and date

SETTING THE TIME

Select Set time. Set a time. Press OK to confirm.

SETTING THE DATE

Select Set date. Select a date. Press OK to confirm. On vehicles with satellite reception, the time and date settings are determined automatically based on the vehicle location and cannot be set manually.

ADJUSTING THE TIME

Select Adjust time. Set a value. Press OK to confirm. ① The function is only available in vehicles with satellite reception.

Vehicle position

SWITCHING TRANSMISSION OF THE VEHICLE POSITION ON OR OFF

Requirements

• A Mercedes me user account is available. - At least one service is activated in the Mercedes me user account which has access to the transmitted position data. The function is country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Data protection Activate or deactivate the Transmit veh. position function.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings Alternatively, you can also switch the function on or off in the status line via 29 .

Setting permissions

Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Data protection ▶ Permissions In the Permissions menu, you can set access authorisations for various data points (such as microphone, camera) used in an application. You can change permissions that have already been granted here. You can set permissions either for individual data points or for certain applications or websites. Select Requests or Apps/websites. Make the required settings for the permissions.

Bluetooth ^®

INFORMATION ABOUT BLUETOOTH*

Bluetooth ^® technology is a standard for short-range wireless data transfer up to approximately 10 m.

YOU CAN USE BLUETOOTH® TO CONNECT YOUR MOBILE PHONE TO THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AND USE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS, FOR EXAMPLE:

\- Hands-free system with access to the following options: - Contacts ( → page 644) Call lists ( → page 647) - Text messages (→ page 647) • Internet connection (→ page 675) Bluetooth ^* is a registered trademark of Bluetooth Special Interest Group (SIG) Inc. ① Internet connection via Bluetooth® is not available in all countries.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING BLUETOOTH

Multimedia system: Settings System Internet and Bluetooth Activate or deactivate Bluetooth.

Near Field Communication (NFC)

INFORMATION ON NEAR FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC)

NFC enables short-range wireless data transfer or connection of a mobile phone with the multimedia system. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

SWITCHING NEAR-FIELD COMMUNICATION ON OR OFF

Multimedia system: Settings System Internet and Bluetooth ▶ Activate or deactivate NFC. ① Further information on connecting a mobile phone via the NFC interface ( → page 640).   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings 

Wi-Fi

WI-FI CONNECTION OVERVIEW

You can use Wi-Fi to set up a connection to the Internet or to external network devices. ① The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

GENERALLY, TWO TYPES OF WI-FI CONNECTION ARE AVAILABLE:

\- Using the multimedia system as a Wi-Fi hotspot (→ page 566) The vehicle's multimedia system serves as a Wi-Fi hotspot for mobile communication devices, such as smartphone or tablet PC, for example. \- Using a mobile communication device as a Wi-Fi hotspot (tethering) (→ page 677) An external Wi-Fi hotspot is accessed for the Internet connection of the vehicle's multimedia system.

SWITCHING WI-FI ON OR OFF

Multimedia system:  Select Wi-Fi. The controller is to the right: Wi-Fi is switched on. When Wi-Fi is switched on, you can connect the multimedia system with external hotspots or make it available as a hotspot for external devices. When Wi-Fi is switched off, it is not possible to establish a hotspot connection. The availability of the function is dependent on the country.

USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AS A WI-FI HOTSPOT

Requirements

\- The device to be connected supports at least one of the types of connection described. The connection types shown depend on the device to be connected. The function must be supported by the multimedia system and by the device to be connected. The type of connection established must be selected on the multimedia system and on the device to be connected. The data volume of the vehicle or an already connected tethering device is used for the data connection. Vehicle data volumes: depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country. If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings Some functions may first need to be activated on the device being connected. More detailed information can be found in the manufacturer's operating instructions. The use of the vehicle data tariff by external devices is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: Settings System Internet and Bluetooth Select MBUX hotspot. Select one of the following connection options.

CONNECTING USING A QR CODE

Requirement: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the device being connected. Alternatively: the device being connected has an integrated QR code scanner (see manufacturer's operating instructions). Scan the QR code shown. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

CONNECTING USING NFC

▶ Activate NFC on the device to be connected. When the NFC symbol is displayed in the MBUX hotspot menu, hold the device to be connected to the NFC interface. Follow the instructions on the device. The Wi-Fi connection is established.

CONNECTING USING A SECURITY KEY

Select the vehicle from the device to be connected. The vehicle is displayed with the MBUX XXXXX network name. Enter the security key which is shown in the central display on the device to be connected. Confirm the entry.

GENERATING A NEW SECURITY KEY

Select the Generate new security key option in the MBUX hotspot menu. ▶ Confirm the prompt with Yes. A new security key is generated. A connection will be established with the newly created security key. When a new security key is generated, all existing Wi-Fi connections are then disconnected. If the Wi-Fi connections are being re-established, the new security key must be entered.

System language

NOTES ON THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE

This function allows you to determine the language for the menu displays and the navigation announcements. The selected language affects the characters available for entry. The navigation announcements are not available in all languages. If a language is not available, the navigation announcements will be in English. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings

SETTING THE LANGUAGE

Multimedia system: 

SETTING THE SYSTEM LANGUAGE

A list of the available system languages is shown. Select a language. The system language is switched to the selected language.

Setting the distance unit

Multimedia system:  ① This function is not available in all countries. Select Units. ▶ Select a unit for the distance. For an additional display in the driver display of the instrument cluster, switch Additional speedometer on.

Activating/deactivating system PIN protection

Multimedia system: 

SETTING THE SYSTEM PIN

Select Set PIN. Enter a four-digit system PIN. Enter the four-digit system PIN again. If both system PINs match, then the system PIN protection is active.

CHANGING THE SYSTEM PIN

Select Change settings. Enter the current system PIN. Select Change PIN. Set a new system PIN.

ACTIVATING SYSTEM PIN PROTECTION FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES

Select Protect software updates. ▶ Activate or deactivate the function.

Configuring suggestions

Multimedia system:  Select Switch the options on or off individually. If an option is switched on and sufficient data has been gathered, personalised suggestions based on your user behaviour will be offered to you. These are, for example, navigation destinations visited, phone numbers dialled as well as suggestions based on your music preferences. Navigation When Allow destination suggestions is switched on, the vehicle makes suggestions based on your visited navigation destinations.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings  If Activate commuter route is switched on, the navigation automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. Calls & messages Suggestions are offered for numbers dialled and messages sent. Comfort The vehicle makes suggestions based on the use of your comfort functions, e.g. which massage programme should be started at what time. Entertainment Suggestions are offered for the currently played media source. Suggestions are also made for online digital services, e.g. Spotify, TuneIn Radio and streaming services, and for categories, e.g. genre, artist and mood. Vehicle Suggestions for vehicle functions, such as Parking Assist PARKTRONIC, setting of the vehicle level and the comfort doors, are displayed on the zero layer. Online voice services The suggestions are made available online based on your voice input and are offered on the zero layer. The suggestions offered depend on the equipment.

Deleting collected suggestions

Multimedia system: 

Software update

INFORMATION ON SOFTWARE UPDATES

Software updates keep your vehicle and the related systems up-to-date and prevent security flaws. Software updates are available online for vehicle components such as control units, convenience systems, locking and safety systems, driver assistance systems, suspension and drive systems as well as for the MBUX multimedia system. Software updates are available via the communication module or a Wi-Fi connection to an external hotspot. The navigation maps are also updated via updates from external storage media (e.g. USB flash drive). Install available software updates regularly. Otherwise the security of your MBUX multimedia system and individual vehicle components cannot be ensured. ① Software updates can be protected with a system PIN. Further information about the system PIN ( → page 568). Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com.

CARRYING OUT SOFTWARE UPDATES

Requirements

FOR SOFTWARE UPDATES VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE AND WIFI: \- Your vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account (→ page 665).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings - Software updates without Mercedes me user account: The Allow software updates option is activated in the Software update menu. - For software updates via the communication module: an Internet connection exists via the communication module ( → page 676). - For software updates via Wi-Fi: a connection to an external Wi-Fi hotspot exists (→ page 677). Depending on the software update, this is started via the communication module, Wi-Fi or external storage medium. Online software updates cannot be performed via external Wi-Fi hotspots that are encrypted via TKIP. If the Wi-Fi hotspot requires logging in via the browser, once the connection is successfully established the browser will open in order to start the update. Follow the instructions in the browser in order to start the download. Multimedia system: Settings System Software update

STARTING A MAP UPDATE FROM AN EXTERNAL STORAGE MEDIUM

Connect the storage medium with the vehicle via a media interface. A message about an available map update appears on the central display. Select the message. Select Start. The map update is started.

STARTING THE SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA THE COMMUNICATION MODULE

If the Automatic online update option is active, available software updates are downloaded and installed automatically. Activate the option in order to always keep your vehicle up-to-date and avoid security flaws. Select Automatic online update. The software update is downloaded and installed automatically. If the option is deactivated, you will be informed of new software updates once. The updates are available for downloading for a limited period of time. Select an update from the list of available updates. Start the update. The software update is downloaded and installed automatically.

STARTING A SOFTWARE UPDATE VIA WI-FI

Some software updates require an additional connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The connection to an external hotspot can be established when the software update is started. Select an update from the list of available updates. Start the update. Establish the connection to a Wi-Fi hotspot. The update is downloaded and installed automatically. For software updates requiring a safe vehicle status: when the last installation step is reached, a message appears on the central display after the vehicle is switched off. Follow the step-by-step instructions on the central display to complete the installation. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings  There are software updates that can only be installed when the vehicle is safely parked, there are no more people in the vehicle and the vehicle is locked.

INSTALLING SOFTWARE UPDATES

Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears in the central display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system. Software updates are installed automatically after they are downloaded. As soon as the software update has been completed, a message appears in the central display. It may be necessary to restart the MBUX multimedia system. Some software updates require a safe vehicle status for the installation to be completed. They can only be carried out in a safely parked vehicle with the vehicle switched off. If this is necessary, a message appears on the central display after the vehicle is switched off. Follow the instructions on the central display. For some software updates, you can set a time for installation. The installation is carried out automatically at the scheduled time. You do not need to be in the vehicle during installation. Note that the planned installation is cancelled as soon as the vehicle door is opened. If an installation is available where you can set the time, a message appears on the central display after the vehicle is switched off. ▶ Follow the instructions on the central display. The vehicle cannot be used while these software updates are being installed. Make sure that no persons or animals are in the path of your vehicle. Events stored in the vehicle's control units can be overwritten.

AVAILABILITY OF THE DRIVER'S AND CENTRAL DISPLAY

During the installation of software updates, it is not possible to use the vehicle, driver's display and central display. You may receive the following display messages when an installation is running:  The display message does not appear every time a software update is installed. In rare cases, an error can occur during the installation. The multimedia system automatically attempts to restore the previous version. If it is not possible to restore the previous version, the display message shown above appears every time the vehicle is started.

FAILURE OF THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY:

If the driver's display fails or there is a malfunction, you may not recognise limitations in the functions of systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired. Drive on carefully and have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Further information about software updates can be found at https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system System settings

FAILURE OF THE CENTRAL DISPLAY:

If the central display fails or the display message shown above is shown continuously, several systems such as the reversing camera, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC or climate control are no longer available. Drive on carefully and consult a specialist workshop as soon as possible.

FRONT PASSENGER DISPLAY FAILURE (ONLY VEHICLES WITH MBUX HYPERSCREEN):

If the front passenger display has failed or a display message appears permanently, functions and systems are no longer available via the front passenger display. Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Resetting the multimedia system (reset function)


WARNING

Risk of accident due to failure of central display functions While the multimedia system is reset, its functions, such as the reversing camera, are not available. Only reset the multimedia system when the vehicle is stationary.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on. • Some settings can only be reset when the vehicle is stationary. Multimedia system: Settings System Reset

WHEN RESETTING THE SYSTEM, PERSONAL DATA AND SETTINGS ARE DELETED, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Connected devices • Individual user profiles • Biometric data • Vehicles with rear telephony: handset connection The data used and saved in the multimedia system by the driver assistance systems is deleted. ① Vehicles with rear telephony: The handset must be in the cradle while the system is reset. Select Reset. A query appears asking if the system should really be reset. Select Yes. The multimedia system is reset to the factory settings. The multimedia system is restarted after the system reset. Due to data protection, as well as the function of individual driving systems and driving safety systems, it is a requirement to carry out a complete system reset before selling the vehicle or transferring it to a third party, or after use as a hire car.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE

AMG TRACK PACE

Function of AMG TRACK PACE

① This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). With AMG TRACK PACE, the driving characteristics on race tracks can be analysed and optimised. You can drive previously saved race tracks (e.g. Hockenheimring), or record and save new tracks. The driven lap times are stored for every track. These can be analysed and compared to other lap times to achieve the best possible race results. Additionally, acceleration and braking procedures can be measured and stored. Note: Use AMG TRACK PACE only on closed-off routes outside the public traffic area. Adapt your driving style to your personal performance and environmental conditions. As the driver, you alone are responsible for driving your vehicle. Park your vehicle safely before operating the application.

Setting Track Race

Multimedia system: 

RECORDING A NEW TRACK

Select ☐ New track. Select ▶ Start Record. at the desired starting point. The track recording starts at this point. During track recording, sectors can be set to divide up the track. Select Set Sector. Select ■ Stop Recording to end track recording or cross the starting line again. Confirm the prompt with Yes. Select the weather. The temperature is determined automatically. Enter a name. Press OK to confirm. The track is saved under the name entered.

SEARCHING BY TRACK NAME

Select Search. Enter the desired track name. Tracks with the searched name are displayed.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE 

MEASURING TIME ON A SAVED TRACK

Select All tracks. Select the desired track. Select Select Start timing if you are already at the starting line. or Select Navigate to for navigation to the starting line. Timing begins automatically when the starting line has been crossed. When AR is selected, the track display can be switched to AR. In addition, it is possible to switch to the telemetry display by selecting √. Select Stop timekeeping to end timekeeping. ▶ Confirm the prompt with OK. Select the weather. Select Yes to save the times driven for this track.

SHOWING READINGS DURING TRACK RACE

THE FOLLOWING READINGS CAN BE SHOWN:

- Tyre temperature Miniature map Sector overview G-force display Lap overview Select Start timing. Select By selecting × on the active display, you can deactivate this.

DISPLAYING THE ANALYSIS

Select All tracks. An overview of all the driven tracks appears. Select a track. Select a session.

THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE DISPLAYED:

- Lap and sector times • Average and top speed Driver Vehicle Date Weather Select Add recording to use a different session as a reference value. Select ↩ to return to the overview. Select Diagram. Set the desired parameters. The analysis is displayed.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE 

THE FOLLOWING VALUES CAN BE SET FOR THE PARAMETERS, FOR EXAMPLE:

Speed • Longitudinal/lateral acceleration - Steering angle Engine speed • Engine oil/tyre temperature Based on the analysis, you can check and optimise the driving behaviour for any position on the track.

EXPORTING TRACKS (USB)

Select Tracks. An overview of all stored tracks appears. ▶ Select the desired track. Select options for the desired track. Select Export track to.... The selected track can be exported to a USB storage device connected to the vehicle.

EDITING TRACKS AND RECORDINGS

Select Track. Select the desired track. Select options □□□ for the desired track. Select Rename or Delete. or Select a track. ▶ Highlight the desired recording. Select options. Select Exporting to... or Delete.

Setting Drag Race

Multimedia system: TRACK PACE Drag Race

MEASURING ACCELERATION

Select Drag race options. Select Acceleration. Set a starting speed or select Automatic. Measurement begins as soon as the specified starting speed has been reached. Set a target speed. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target speed has been reached. Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

QUARTER MILE RACE

Select Drag race options.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE Select Quarter-mile. Set a target distance. Measurement stops as soon as the specified target distance has been reached. Start off and begin the measurement. Measurement begins when the vehicle accelerates. Timing runs until the target distance or a maximum of one mile has been travelled. Measurement can be stopped early by interrupting the acceleration procedure.

MEASURING BRAKING

Select ☐ Drag race options. Select Braking. Set a starting speed or select Automatic. Start off and begin the measurement. Brake to a stop. Measurement is incremental, in steps of 10 km/h to a stop. If the braking procedure is started e.g. at a speed of 157 km/h, measurement starts as soon as 150 km/h has been reached

STORING AND CALLING UP MEASURED VALUES

If measurement is completed or cancelled, a prompt appears asking whether the measurement should be saved. ▶ Confirm the prompt with OK to save.

CALLING UP SAVED MEASUREMENTS

Select History. Select Acceleration, Quarter-mile or Braking. Select a measurement. The desired measurement is displayed in detail. or Delete a measurement.

Calling up the telemetry display

Multimedia system: TRACK PACE Telemetry The telemetry display shows current vehicle data as a digital value and as a diagram. Up to four parameters can be selected to be shown on the display.

FOR EXAMPLE:

Engine speed - Wheel angle Speed - Steering angle Set the desired parameters. Set the time. The set parameters are evaluated in the diagram for the selected time.

Configuring AMG TRACK PACE

Requirements: To connect a mobile device to the TRACK PACE app:   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE • the TRACK PACE app is installed on the mobile device. - The mobile device is connected to the multimedia system via Wi-Fi (→ page 566). Multimedia system: TRACK PACE

CONNECTING A MOBILE DEVICE VIA THE TRACK PACE APP

The TRACK PACE app makes it possible to record videos and to synchronise them with stored tracks. Select TRACK PACE App. Select Authorise new device. Start the TRACK PACE app on the device to be connected. Enter the code on the smartphone. The device is authorised.

DE-AUTHORISING THE MOBILE DEVICE

Select TRACK PACE App. Select a device. Confirm the prompt with Yes. The device is de-authorised.

SETTING THE TRACK PACE READOUT ON THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY AND DRIVER DISPLAY

Select IC and HUD contents. Activate or deactivate the desired contents. The content on the head-up display and driver display is adjusted.  i Further information on the display of the head-up display ( → page 511). i Further information on the driver display ( → page 496).

SETTING ACOUSTIC FEEDBACK

Select Acoustic feedback. A scale with values from 0 to 10 is shown. Select a setting.

SHOW STATISTICS

Select TRACK PACE statistics. Statistics on the current user profile are displayed.

THE FOLLOWING DATA ARE DISPLAYED:

- Driving time • distance driven - tracks recorded - track races recorded - laps recorded • drag races recorded • maximum speed

ACTIVATING THE AMBIENT LIGHT

If this function is active, the vehicle interior is lit in red or green depending on delta time. Select Ambient light. ▶ Activate or deactivate the function.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system AMG TRACK PACE 

SETTING THE DASH CAM

If the vehicle is equipped with a dash cam, it can be used in AMG TRACK PACE. Select Dashcam. Select Track Race or Drag Race and switch on Activate recording. You can set which overlay is to be used in the recorded video under Video overlay contents.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Drive system settings 

Drive system settings

Calling up the energy flow display

Multimedia system:  Select Energy flow. The energy flow in the vehicle will be displayed.

Overview of the energy flow display in the multimedia system

The active components of the drive system are highlighted on the energy flow display. The energy flow between the individual components is shown in colour.

THE COMPONENTS DISPLAYED ARE:

• State of charge of the high-voltage battery • Electric motors (drive system) Energy flow • High-voltage battery

THE ENERGY FLOW IS SHOWN IN DIFFERENT COLOURS DEPENDING ON THE OPERATING STATUS:

• White: strong acceleration (boost effect) • Copper: driving at constant speed or with moderate acceleration • Blue: recuperation (charging the high-voltage battery) or overrun mode   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Off-road menu 

Off-road menu

Off-road menu overview in the multimedia system

The Off-road menu provides an overview of the most important, relevant data for off-road driving. The content is displayed in different tiles that can be changed with directional arrows or swipes. In addition, this menu contains buttons for quick-access to certain off-road functions.

DISPLAYED DATA ARE, FOR EXAMPLE:

R Artificial horizon R Compass R Altitude R Steering angle of the front and rear wheels R Torque and power R Tyre pressure and temperature In the Off-road menu you can continue to make settings for Off-road Assist and the Offroad Score.

Setting the off-road menu in the multimedia system

Multimedia system: 

SETTING DISPLAYS IN THE CENTRAL DISPLAY

Press ◀, ▶ or on the display itself to jump to the next display.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING PARKING ASSIST PARKTRONIC

Press P ₀₁ to switch the function on or off. (i) Further information on Parking Assist PARKTRONIC ( → page 463).

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING ESP® (ELECTRONIC STABILITY PROGRAM)

Press ☐ to switch the function on or off. ① Further information on ESP ( → page 395).

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING MANUAL GEAR CHANGING

Press M to switch the function on or off. ① Additional information on manual shifting.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Off-road menu 

ACTIVATING OR DEACTIVATING DSR (DOWNHILL SPEED REGULATION)

Press to switch the function on or off. ① Further information on DSR ( → page 420).

SETTING THE VEHICLE LEVEL

Press 📄 to raise or lower the vehicle. i Additional information about vehicle level ( → page 447). The availability of individual functions depends on the country and equipment.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Fit& Healthy

< Fit & Healthy

Setting ENERGIZING seat kinetics

Requirements

These functions are available only for fully electric seats with a memory function. Multimedia system: Comfort Seat Select Seat kinetics. ENERGIZING seat kinetics can support back health by changing the seat position during a journey. This involves repeatedly stressing and relieving the muscles and joints by means of minor movements of the cushion and backrest.

STARTING SEAT KINETICS

Select ▶ for the desired seat. The programme will run for the set duration.

CONFIGURING SEAT KINETICS

Select 🎨 for the desired seat. Select Backrest, Backrest & seat surface or Seat surface. Select the desired duration for the selected seat. Vehicles with a multicontour seat: In addition to the seat backrest and seat cushion, the lumbar region can be activated for the function. ▶ Activate or deactivate Including lumbar.

ENERGIZING COMFORT

OVERVIEW OF ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMS

Note that the available programs and the associated functions depend on your vehicle equipment. Depending on your equipment, fewer functions may be available.

PROGRAM OVERVIEW

- Refresh: Can have a refreshing effect with short, cool puffs of air. The seat is ventilated, the vehicle interior is illuminated with cool colours and the program is completed with appropriate sound. In addition, the vitalising massage in the cushions can loosen the muscles. - Warmth: Can increase the comfort level for the vehicle occupants. Seat, surface and steering wheel heating provide soothing warmth. The program is completed with unobtrusive sound and warm colours. - Vitality: Can counteract diminishing attentiveness in monotonous driving situations. The activating stimulation of the vehicle occupants is carried out with invigorating sound, activating light and a vitalising massage.  - Joy: Can promote a positive mood in the vehicle occupants as well as mental regeneration. This results from the activation of a massage programme, friendly sound and illumination with suitable colours. • Well-being: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. This is achieved through relaxing massage, friendly light and calming sound. - Forest Glade: Can have a calming and soothing effect on the vehicle occupants thanks to the acoustics of the forest. The ambience is supported by a suitable animation, colours and sound. - Sounds of the Sea: Can contribute to calming the vehicle occupants. The acoustics of the sound of waves and seagulls in combination with other vehicle functions create a relaxing seashore atmosphere. - Summer Rain: Can help relax the vehicle occupants. The relaxing effect of a rain shower can be experienced via acoustics and other vehicle functions inside the vehicle. • Power Nap: The program consists of three phases. - Falling asleep phase: here relaxing music is played and the air is cleaned by ionisation. - Sleep phase: the active functions are deactivated or restricted as much as possible. - Waking phase: slightly stimulating music is played, and the air is purified with ionisation. Additionally, functions such as seat ventilation and massage are activated. \- Training: Can counteract the onset of muscle tension, limbs falling asleep or stress with targeted relaxation or stimulation exercises. The exercises are demonstrated in short videos. The training consists of audio content and a brief animation. The audio content is conceived so that it can also be played back when you are driving. Animations are only shown when the vehicle is stationary. Always observe the traffic conditions if you are training when driving. \- Tips: The system gives auditory tips for possible exercises or measures for improving the comfort level of the vehicle occupants. By selecting the desired area of the body you can receive targeted tips for the comfort level of this area. Most programs that have been started for one seat can also be transferred simultaneously to another seat.

STARTING THE ENERGIZING COMFORT PROGRAMME

WARNING

Increased risk of accidents when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes Tips and Training The Tips and Training ENERGIZING COMFORT programmes can distract you when driving. ▶ Only carry out exercises if the traffic situation permits. When listening to the tips, make sure you are aware of the traffic around you at all times.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy  

WARNING

Risk of entrapment when using the ENERGIZING COMFORT programme Power Nap With the Power Nap ENERGIZING COMFORT programme the following systems are moved automatically if required: - Seats - Side windows - Sliding sunroof - Roller sunblinds This can cause you or another vehicle occupant to be trapped. Make sure that there is sufficient space behind the front seats. Make sure that no body parts are in the areas of movement.

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on.

FOR THE START OF POWER NAP:

• Only the power supply is on. • The doors are closed. • The vehicle is secured against rolling away. - The state of charge of the high-voltage battery is sufficient for the use of the auxiliary climate control. Multimedia system: Comfort ➕ ENERGIZING COMFORT

STARTING AND STOPPING A PROGRAMME

Select a programme. Select ▶ for the desired seat. Select ■ to stop the program. If, during an active programme, a function requirement is no longer met, a corresponding message appears. The active programme is cancelled.

CONFIGURING THE PROGRAMME

Select a programme. Select Settings. Switch the functions included in the programme on or off.

SETTING THE DURATION

Select a programme. Select Settings. ▶ Select the desired duration.

STARTING A POWER NAP

Select Power Nap. Select ▶ for the desired seat.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Fit& Healthy 

WHEN THE VEHICLE IS STATIONARY, THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS ARE CARRIED OUT WHEN POWER NAP IS STARTED:

• The roller sunblinds are extended. • The doors are locked. • The windows and sliding sunroof are closed. • The seats are moved into the fully reclined position. • The parking brake is applied. Select ■ to stop the program.

STARTING THE TRAINING PROGRAMME

Select Training. Select a programme ▶. To activate fragrancing for training: select Air freshener. Select ■ to stop the training programme. The animations demonstrating the exercises are faded out when the vehicle is in motion and you only hear the instructions.

STARTING TIPS

Select Tips. Select ▶ a region of the body. Select ■ to stop playback of the tip.

ENERGIZING COACH

FUNCTION OF THE ENERGIZING COACH

REQUIREMENTS:

- The ENERGIZING COACH service is activated in the Mercedes me portal or the Mercedes me App. - The Mercedes me ENERGIZING app is installed on the mobile phone to use the service. With ENERGIZING COACH you can evaluate the driving and driver situation. Depending on the situation, it offers recommendations for the start of an appropriate ENERGIZING COMFORT programme.

THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMMES COULD BE SUGGESTED:

Vitality As an activating programme in monotonous driving situations or for long journey times, for example Information on the vitality program see ( → page 582). - Joy As a balancing programme in demanding driving situations Information on the Joy programme see ( → page 582). - Refresh As a refreshing programme when temperatures rise Information on the Refresh programme; see (→ page 582). - Warmth As a warming programme when temperatures drop Information on the Warmth programme; see (→ page 582).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Fit & Healthy By connecting a Garmin fitness tracker, for example the Garmin vivoactive ^® 3, additional information can be entered into the evaluation for recommending an ENERGIZING COMFORT programme. The additional information includes the stress level, that is calculated by the fitness tracker. The stress level is based primarily on the pulse rate.

REQUIREMENTS FOR THE INTEGRATION OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION VIA A GARMIN FITNESS TRACKER:

- Your fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account. - Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account. If you wear your Garmin fitness tracker at night also, the sleep data is included in the evaluation of the ENERGIZING COACH.

REQUIREMENT FOR THE INTEGRATION OF THE SLEEP DATA:

\- The Garmin fitness tracker is synchronised with the Garmin account before the beginning of the journey.

CALLING UP THE ENERGIZING COACH DISPLAY

Requirements:

• The fitness tracker is connected with your Garmin account. - Your Garmin account is connected with your Mercedes me user account in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app. • The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( → page 638). - You are logged in with your Mercedes me profile both in the vehicle and in the Mercedes me ENERGIZING app. Multimedia system: → Apps ➕ ENERGIZING COACH Your current pulse as well as an evaluation of your pulse for the last 30 minutes of driving are shown. A corresponding fault message is shown if there is no mobile phone connected or no pulse can be sent to the system for an extended period. (i) Only pulse values in the range of 30 - 140 (possibly 150) bpm are shown on the central display. The pulse values have no medical validity but are only informative in nature and are therefore also not required to be accurate.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Navigation and traffic

Switching navigation on

Multimedia system:  Alternatively, press the button on the steering wheel on the right (→ page 542). The zero layer with the digital map is displayed.

Navigation overview

DIGITAL MAP AND USER-SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS  Navigation module (reduced view) or EQ module (reduced view) Route guidance active: Reduced view of the navigation module shows information relevant to the route, e.g. the next charging stop, the destination and a delay ☒ Ends the current route guidance Tapping opens the navigation module in the expanded view with the Route ( → page 606) Route guidance not active: EQ module is shown in the reduced view Tapping opens the EQ module in the expanded view with the charging functions ( → page 539) Destination entry 3 Calls up the Control Centre in the status line Current vehicle position (vehicle symbol or arrow) 5 Display area with entertainment sources, phone, active applications and suggestions 6 Searches for POIs, e.g. charging stations [P] and parking facilities [P], as well as setting map orientation [O] and map type 7 Navigation window shows the next driving manoeuvre (zoomed out view) or the route monitor (zoomed in view) Route guidance active: route monitor shows, e.g. route sections, upcoming driving manoeuvres with lane recommendations, charging stops, destination, traffic delays, 3D images at motorway exits, online content Switches off navigation announcements Switches on navigation announcements

THE FOLLOWING MAP ORIENTATIONS ⑥ ARE AVAILABLE:

2D and to the north • 2D and direction of travel • 3D and direction of travel   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic • Map with complete route If the map is moved, the map switches between 3D direction of travel and 2D north orientation.

THE FOLLOWING MAP TYPES ⑥ ARE AVAILABLE:

Daytime display • Night-time display Satellite map ① If you notice a problem with the digital map you can report this under https://mapfeedback.here.com/#/report.

Destination entry

NOTES ON DESTINATION ENTRY


WARNING

Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system.

ENTERING A POI OR ADDRESS

Requirements:

Observe the notes on destination entry ( → page 588).

• For the online search:

- There is an Internet connection. - Mercedes me connect is available. The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use. - Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic The service is available and has been activated. ① If Online Search is not available, the search is performed using the data of the digital map. Multimedia system:   Example: entering a POI or address ① Input line with current entry 2 Search result 3 Selects destination search, displays further destination searches with double arrow Deletes an entry Adopts the search result in the input line and continues the search 6 Deletes the last character entered 7 Hides the keypad Switches to handwriting recognition Starts the MBUX voice assistant ( → page 521) Sets the written language 11 Switches to digits and special characters 12 Switches to upper-case or lower-case letters Enter a destination. The entries can be made in any order. The search results are displayed in a list. ① Online search results for POIs may contain additional information, for example opening times and ratings. The information is provided by an online map service. This online function is not available in all countries.

THE FOLLOWING ENTRIES CAN BE MADE, FOR EXAMPLE IN ①:

• Town, street, house number or street, town Postcode • POI name or POI category, e.g. Restaurants Town, POI name - Contact name • Geo-coordinates ( → page 592) • Three-word addresses from what3words ( → page 592) Entering three-word addresses is possible in the online search. ▶ Hide the keyboard with OK. Select the destination in the list. The following menu shows the selected destination with the address information and a corresponding map section. The menu enables the route to be calculated.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SELECTING A DESTINATION SUGGESTION

Requirements

• The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on ( → page 568). - The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions. Multimedia system:  Select Suggestions. or Select a destination suggestion directly on the Zero Layer ( → page 536). The route is calculated in the following menu. If Suggestions has been selected, a menu is available via .... The menu offers settings for the suggestions and memory functions. ① Managing destination suggestions ( → page 616).

SELECTING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Multimedia system:  ▶ Select Previous destinations. Select the destination. The following menu enables the route to be calculated. ① You can save a destination as a favourite ( → page 616).

SELECTING A POI

Requirements

• For the use of personal POIs: - A USB device is connected with the multimedia system. Personal POIs with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx) have been saved in the PersonalPOI folder on the USB device. Multimedia system:  Select POIs. Select one of the displayed quick-access categories, e.g. P. Select the POI. The following menu enables the route to be calculated. or Select All categories or Personal POIs (see requirements). Select the category. Select the POI. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.    EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SETTING A SEARCH FILTER AFTER SELECTING A POI CATEGORY

THE PRESET SEARCH POSITION DEPENDS ON THE STATUS OF THE ROUTE GUIDANCE:

• If route guidance is not active, In the vicinity is searched. • If route guidance is active, Along the route is searched. When the search results are displayed, select Filter. Select the search position, e.g. In the vicinity. If a route with intermediate destinations already exists and Near destination has been selected in the search filters, the destination is selected for the search. or Select the desired travelling time to the point of interest. Select Search results.

CONFIGURING CATEGORIES FOR QUICK ACCESS

THE CATEGORIES ARE DISPLAYED:

• As symbols after calling up the destination entry via 🔒 • As a list after calling up All categories In the POI menu, select All categories. Select ☆ or ★ for a category. Tapping on ☆ adds the category. Tapping on ★ removes the category. Use ↩ to change back. The new categories are shown after the destination entry is called up the next time. ① If all available quick-access positions are full, select the category to be replaced.

CHANGING THE ORDER OF QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES

In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access. Tap on the arrows next to the selected category. The arrows for the other categories are greyed out. Drag the category up or down. Select

DELETING QUICK-ACCESS CATEGORIES

In the POI menu, press and hold a category for quick access. Select ★ for the chosen category. Select Delete. Select

CHANGING CATEGORIES FOR PERSONAL POIS

Select Personal POIs. Press on a category as long as is necessary until a menu appears. Select Change name and enter a name. Select Change icon and select a symbol.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Select Delete and confirm the prompt with Yes.

SELECTING A CONTACT FOR DESTINATION ENTRY

Requirements

• A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( → page 638). • The contacts from the mobile phone have been downloaded. • The contact has a navigable address. • The address data can be located on the digital map.

Multimedia system:

 Enter a contact in the entry line. Select the address. Alternatively, after calling up the destination entry, you can enter the name of a contact in the search field. Alternatively, after calling up the destination entry, you can enter the name or phone number of a contact in the search field.

ENTERING GEO-COORDINATES

Multimedia system:  Enter the geo-coordinates as latitude and longitude.

EXAMPLES OF INPUT FORMATS:

47°58'11"N 7°57'25"E (degrees, minutes and seconds) • 47.969722 7.956944 (decimal degrees) Confirm the entry. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

ENTERING THE DESTINATION AS A THREE-WORD ADDRESS

Requirements

- An active Internet connection is indicated in the status line on the central display with the → symbol. • The online search is active.

Multimedia system:

 Enter the destination as a three-word address from what3words. The entry can be made with spaces between the words instead of dots. The search results are displayed. Select the destination in the list. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

THE BRANDENBURG GATE HAS THIS LANGUAGE DEPENDENT THREE-WORD ADDRESS:

• German: tapfer.gebäude.verliehen • English: that.lands.winning • French: posteaux.bobineur.ombrant i Searching for a destination using three-word addresses is not possible in all countries and in all languages.

ALTERNATIVELY, USE THE FOLLOWING ENTRY OPTIONS:

• Entry in the global search ( → page 554)   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic • Voice navigation ( → page 521) Example: during a telephone call you are given a 3-word address. After activating the MBUX voice assistant, say one of the following two voice commands: Navigate to tapfer gebäude verliehen \- Navigate to tapfer Punkt gebäude Punkt verliehen

/// WHAT3WORDS

Three-word addresses from what3words are an alternative addressing system for multilingual georeferencing of global locations with a resolution of three metres. Using this grid, locations on the Earth's surface are included which do not have a building address such as a street and house number, for example. Three-word addresses are unique, easy to remember and suffice for most routine applications.

YOU CAN CONVERT ADDRESSES TO THREE-WORD ADDRESSES AND BACK AGAIN:

• At the website https://what3words.com • In the what3words apps

SELECTING A DESTINATION ON THE MAP

Multimedia system:  If necessary, move the map ( → page 623). Press and hold on the map. Available destinations are displayed. or Briefly press on a POI symbol. The POI is selected. If there are several POIs at this map position, a list appears. Select the destination in the Selected objects list. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.

SELECTING A DESTINATION FROM FAVOURITES

Requirements

• Destinations are saved as favourites. Save a previous destination or a destination suggestion as a favourite ( → page 616). Multimedia system:  Select Favourites. Select a favourite. The following menu enables the route to be calculated.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE ALREADY SET

Select Home or Work. The route is calculated in the following menu.

ADDRESSES FOR HOME AND WORK ARE NOT YET SET

Select Home or Work. The prompt No "Home" address available. Set address now? appears, for example. Select Yes. ▶ Search for or select the address. Select Save.

DELETING FAVOURITES

Select ⋯ for a favourite. Select Delete. or Select Delete all. Confirm the prompt. When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for example.

SELECTING RECEIVED DESTINATIONS

Requirements

• There is an Internet connection for receiving external destinations. • A destination has been sent to the vehicle. • Destinations have been shared from another seat in the vehicle. Multimedia system: Where to? The vehicle can receive destinations from services or apps. You will be informed when a destination is received. Select Received destinations. Select a destination. The route is calculated in the following menu. ① You can save a received destination in the favourites (→ page 616).

DELETING RECEIVED ADDRESSES

Delete a destination with or Select Delete all.

Route

CALCULATING A ROUTE WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE

Requirements:

• The destination has been entered. • The destination address is shown. • For navigation with Electric Intelligence: - Mercedes me connect is available. - You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is connected with the account.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are required for optimal function. The Schedule charging stops route option is switched on (→ page 597).  Example: detailed display Saves destination as a favourite (Schedule charging stops is switched on) Calls up alternative routes (Schedule charging stops is switched off) 2 Calculates the route and starts route guidance 3 Selects a point of interest in the vicinity of the destination Destination information, online content (e.g. pictures, opening hours), three-word address from what3words The route with Electric Intelligence is automatically and intelligently calculated to the destination. This is updated during route guidance. The route with Electric Intelligence contains the required charging stops as intermediate destinations. The charging stations are determined taking account of the driving distance and the estimated charging times. Select one of the options. When the Schedule charging stops route option is switched off, a route without charging stations is calculated. If the destination is located in a multi-storey car park, for example, and corresponding data is available, the parking levels are displayed.

SAVING A DESTINATION AS A FAVOURITE

Select ★ Favourite. Select an option.

CALLING UP THE ROUTE OVERVIEW

When Schedule charging stops is switched off, this option is available instead of the favourites function. Select Routes. Select an alternative route.

STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE

Select Let's go!.

CALLING UP THE DETAILED DISPLAY WITH DESTINATION ADDRESS

Pull the bar above the ▲ Let's go! symbol upwards. Depending on the destination selection and availability, online content, for example ratings, prices and weather information, is shown. If the destination is in a different time zone, a message is displayed.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic  To share a destination: select Share. This option allows you to scan the displayed QR code. To call up an Internet address: if a web address is available, select Browser. To call the destination: if a telephone number is available, select Call.

SEARCHING FOR POIS IN THE VICINITY OF THE DESTINATION SHOWN

Select In the vicinity. Search using categories, enter a search entry or search for a personal POI ( → page 590).

ADDING AN INTERMEDIATE DESTINATION TO THE EXISTING ROUTE OR STARTING A NEW ROUTE GUIDANCE

Select Add. The selected destination address is set as the next intermediate destination. Route guidance begins. There are already four intermediate destinations: confirm the prompt with Yes and select an intermediate destinations in the route overview ( → page 606), that should be overwritten with the new intermediate destination. or Select Replace. The selected destination address is set as a new destination. Route guidance begins.

IF YOU CALL UP THE MENU DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE, MORE OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

• To change the order of destinations, select Move ( → page 607). • To delete the destination, select Delete ( → page 607). • To end route guidance, select Cancel route guidance.

OVERVIEW: NAVIGATION WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE

If the Schedule charging stops route option is enabled, the optimal route based on time is calculated with the required charging stations. The charging stops are determined taking into account the route and charging times and are set as intermediate destinations for route guidance. Navigation with Electric Intelligence constantly checks a large number of influencing variables, e.g. specifications for the climate control in the vehicle interior or changes in the weather. For each section of the route, the current energy requirement is calculated from the high-voltage battery. The multimedia system determines the ideal charging stations along the route based on availability and charging capacity. For each charging stop, the required amount of energy and the expected charging time is calculated and displayed. If the driver wishes, they will be informed by a notification on their mobile phone when the required charge status is reached. The high-voltage battery continues to charge until the process is interrupted by the driver. ① Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( → page 358). You can influence the route calculated by the navigation with Electric Intelligence.  The options "Ignore charging station" and "Add charging station" are available for this purpose ( → page 606).

① NAVIGATION WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE ATTEMPTS TO SHORTEN THE TOTAL TRAVEL TIME, IF NECESSARY, BY USING THE FOLLOWING CHARGING STRATEGIES:

- Charge twice briefly with high charging power instead of charging once for a long time with low charging power - Charge once briefly with low charging power to reach a charging station with higher charging power

NAVIGATION WITH ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE USES THE FOLLOWING DATA:

Online Route Route calculation establishes an Online Route. The Online Route is continuously updated during the journey, e.g. if traffic information is available. • Specific vehicle information The current state of charge of the high-voltage battery and electrical consumption are taken into account, for example. - Charging stations These are made available as intermediate destinations in the Online Route. This function is not available in all countries. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

SWITCHING ON THE ELECTRIC INTELLIGENCE ROUTE OPTION

Multimedia system:  Switch on the Schedule charging stops route option. If the route has been calculated and the state of charge of the high-voltage battery is not sufficient to reach the destination, charging stations are set automatically as intermediate destinations. ① This function is not available in all countries. When contact with the trailer socket is established (trailer/rear bicycle rack), a menu automatically appears on the display.

THE FOLLOWING SELECTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

Bicycle rack - Small trailer • Large trailer You can change the selection and make further settings ( → page 490).

SELECTING SETTINGS FOR CHARGING STATIONS ON THE ROUTE

Requirements

\- The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are required for optimal function.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Multimedia system: 

SETTING THE STATE OF CHARGE OF THE HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY WHEN THE CHARGING STATION AND DESTINATION ARE REACHED

Select Charge level at destination or Charge level at charging stations. Move the control knob to the left or right and set the preferred state of charge in percent (%). To reach a charging station, the system uses the battery capacity, e.g. up to 10 % residual energy content (state of charge) or even less. The Min. message appears on the central display. You can increase this state of charge for the arrival at the charging station and destination, e.g. to 25 % at the charging station and 50 % at the destination.

① IN THE EVENT OF INCREASED ENERGY CONSUMPTION WHILE DRIVING, E.G. WITH HEADWIND, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FROM THE SYSTEM:

• The charging station is safely reached even at states of charge of less than 10 %. • Navigation with Electric Intelligence selects a closer charging station for the route. If a charging facility is available at the destination, the state of charge can be lowered below 10%. The Min. message appears on the central display. Make sure that the range monitor is switched on.  When planning a route, you can enter another destination or the return journey. The navigation with Electric Intelligence then takes into account the required state of charge at the destination. This ensures that an optimal charging station or the new destination is reached safely on the onward journey.

SELECTING A PROVIDER FOR CHARGING STATIONS

Activate or deactivate Mercedes me Charge. If the option is activated, only charging stations payable with Mercedes me Charge are taken into account when selecting the charging station. or Activate All. All charging stations known to the navigation system are taken into account when calculating routes with Electric Intelligence, regardless of the type of payment. It may be necessary to register with the provider. If route guidance is active, the high-voltage battery is tempered before a charging stop depending on the state of charge and the battery temperature.

SWITCHING THE RANGE MONITOR ON OR OFF

Multimedia system:  The activated range monitoring assists with messages on the driver and central display to ensure safe arrival at the destination.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Activate or deactivate Range monitoring. To reach the destination with the state of charge set by the driver, the range is permanently monitored when the option is switched on. If necessary, the range monitor in the speedometer shows a recommended maximum speed and informs you in the driver display, e.g. with the message Avoid additional charging stop: drive less than 100 km/h. Tips for saving energy are then also shown on the central display while driving.

THE RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM SPEED IS ACCOUNTED FOR BY THE FOLLOWING DRIVING SYSTEMS:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC (→ page 413) • Cruise control ( → page 408) ① This function is not available in all countries.

SHOWING CHARGING STATIONS ON THE MAP

Requirements:

• For the display of online charging stations: - Mercedes me connect is available. - You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is connected with the account. The "Display of charging stations" service is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. Multimedia system: View EQ Select Schedule charging stops.

DISPLAYING ON-BOARD CHARGING STATIONS

On-board charging stations are included in the map data of the MBUX multi-media system navigation. The data on these charging stations is not updated regularly. In contrast, online charging stations are transmitted to the vehicle via an Internet connection and displayed on the map. Select POI symbols ▷. Select All categories ▷. Switch on the Charging stations category.

YOU CAN RECOGNISE CHARGING STATIONS IN THE VICINITY OF THE CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION ON THE MAP BY THE FOLLOWING SYMBOLS:

• Online charging stations The charging power and availability are shown in the symbol for the charging station using arrows and a status indicator. - On-board charging stations The charging stations are shown on the map with white symbols without detailed information. The display of the online charging stations is not available in all countries. 

PAYING FOR CHARGING ON A ROUTE WITH MERCEDES ME CHARGE

Requirements:

- The Mercedes me Charge service is available and subscribed to in the Mercedes me Portal. - The "Display of charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" services are activated. - To select the charging station using Navigation with Electric Intelligence: the "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is activated and the Schedule charging stops option is switched on in the multimedia system. - For authentication at the charging station: after activation in the Mercedes me Portal, you have concluded a charging contract with your payment details with the respective contractual partners. - For authentication using the app: the Mercedes me App is installed on the external device, e.g. tablet or smartphone. - For charging stations without the ability to be activated via the app, you have purchased an RFID card for the contracting partner. ① This function is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: 

i OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

- Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( → page 358). - Read the notes on charging the high-voltage battery at the charging station ( → page 362) and ( → page 363). - Before selection of a charging station: the data for the charging stations is based on the online content available from the respective third-party provider. • Observe the local information and conditions. With the Plug-and-Charge charging function of Mercedes me Charge, you can charge the vehicle at public Plug-and-Charge enabled charging stations. The charging process starts immediately when the charging cable is plugged into the charging station. No further authentication is required. Communication between the vehicle and the charging station takes place directly via the charging cable. This charging function is not available in all countries. To select a charging station: tap on a symbol on the map for a charging station or on a group of symbols for several charging stations. or Select a charging station as a POI and accept it in the list ( → page 590). or When route guidance is active with Navigation with Electric Intelligence, select a charging stop ⓘ in the route overview (→ page 606). Select Details. When arriving at a charging station, the corresponding screen is automatically displayed if necessary.

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED ON THE CHARGING STATION (IF AVAILABLE):

• Name of the charging station operator • Address of the charging station • Plug with availability and information about charging capacity - Opening times • Name of the charging station • Travel time and distance of the charging station from the vehicle • Authentication method • Contact information of the charging station operator • General costs and charging costs • Estimated charging costs and your available energy volumes, if available • Display of available reviews and the ability to review with up to 5 stars • Availability prognosis • Information on green charging Mercedes-Benz provides high-quality certificates of origin to ensure that an equivalent amount of electricity from renewable sources is fed into the grid for charging processes carried out via Mercedes me Charge. Calculate the route ( → page 594). ① If the function is available, the start/stop of the charging process can be selected.

AUTHENTICATION AT THE CHARGING STATION (START/STOP)

During authentication, the charging station checks the contract data. If the check is successful, the charging process is author- ised. Payment is made automatically via the payment method specified in the contract. Depending on the charging station operator, authentication is first carried out at the charging station. The charging cable of the charging station is then activated. Alternatively, first plug the charging cable connector into the vehicle socket and then carry out the authentication at the charging station. ① For some charging stations, unlocking the charging station via the app is not available. In this case use your RFID card to activate the charging process (if available). In the app or on the MBUX multimedia system, select a charging station in the map menu. ▶ Display the details using the widget (programme symbol). Select Start charging process. The charging process starts. In addition, the payment agreement saved with the third-party provider is authorised. If required, enter the PIN for personalisation. Confirm the action. If required, select the connector ID from the list shown. The selected charge port is unlocked. Start the charging process. The start of the charging process is shown. Select the Stop charging process display button in the app. The charging process is ended.   Payment is processed automatically.

IF DATA FOR THIRD-PARTY PROVIDERS IS AVAILABLE, YOU WILL RECEIVE THIS INFORMATION:

• Overview of the charging process • Estimated cost There may be differences between the costs listed and the costs billed. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

OVERVIEW OF THE RANGE ON MAP SERVICE

If there are only a few fast-charging stations or charging stations available within the vehicle's electric range, the service warns you with a notification. The notification recommends charging stations made available to the service by charging station providers/operators.

THE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

- The "Range on Map" service, which is subject to a charge, is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal. • The route type Online routes is switched off ( → page 603).

THERE ARE THREE NOTIFICATION TYPES:

Comfort warning There are no longer enough fast charging stations nearby. • Warning when electric range falls below 50 km As soon as the vehicle falls below the electric range of 50 km, the next charging stations in the vicinity are suggested. • Critical warning There are less than five charging stations including fast charging stations nearby. ① If you do not want to receive notifications, deactivate the option. Allow notifications(→ page 553) for the "Range on Map" service. In addition, the electric range can be displayed on the map ( → page 628). If the electric range of the vehicle is less than 6 km, there is no display on the map. If there are not enough charging stations available within this range, you will receive a notification. If the route type Online routes is switched on, you will not receive any notifications.

OVERVIEW OF CHARGING NEAR DESTINATION

THE FUNCTION IS AVAILABLE UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• The destination has been entered. • The destination address is shown. • For navigation with Electric Intelligence: - Mercedes me connect is available. - You have a Mercedes me connect user account and the vehicle is connected with the account. - The "Navigation with Electric Intelligence" service is available and activated in the Mercedes me Portal.   The services "Navigation with Electric Intelligence", "Display of charging stations" and "Mercedes me Charge" are required for optimal function. The function suggests the best possible charging stop near the destination from which you can reach the destination on foot.

THE DIGITAL MAP SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION, FOR EXAMPLE:

• The route to the destination. • The route to the charging stop. - The pedestrian route from the charging stop to the destination and the walking time in minutes.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN BE USED, FOR EXAMPLE:

- Select the charging station as the destination and calculate the route. - Move the map and reset the map to the current vehicle position. • Change the map scale. - Select additional map symbols, e.g. for displaying traffic information or hazard warnings from Car-2-X.

SELECTING A ROUTE TYPE

Multimedia system: 

USING ONLINE ROUTES

The route is calculated as a fast route with a short journey time. If available, you can select online routes.  ① Online routes are not available in all countries and for all vehicles. To use online routes: switch on the option. TAKING TRAFFIC INFORMATION FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT Select Dynamic route guidance ▶. Select one of the options.

EXPLANATION OF THE OPTIONS:

• Automatic Traffic reports via Live Traffic Information are taken into account ( → page 617). Live Traffic Information and FM home screen are not available in all countries. After asking A prompt appears when a new route is detected with a shorter journey time based on traffic reports. You can continue to use the current route or use the dynamic route instead ( → page 604). Off No traffic reports are taken into account for the route.

CALCULATING ALTERNATIVE ROUTES

Requirements

• The Schedule charging stops option is switched off ( → page 597).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Multimedia system:  Activate Overview of route after start. Alternative routes are calculated for every route. When Schedule charging stops is switched on, the route is calculated with Electric Intelligence.

ACCEPTING A DETOUR RECOMMENDATION AFTER A PROMPT

Requirements:

• After asking is switched on ( → page 603) in the Dynamic route guidance menu. • Route guidance is active. • There are traffic reports for the current route. If a new route with a shorter driving time is determined, the current and new routes will be shown. If another application is active, a notification is hidden. Confirm the notification. To accept the new route: select Accept. To maintain the current route: select Keep to current route.

SELECTING ROUTE OPTIONS

Multimedia system: 

AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE SECTIONS, E.G. MOTORWAYS OR FERRIES

▶ Activate or deactivate the avoid option. Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids motorways, for example. Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes motorways into consideration, for example. The selected route options cannot always be taken into account. Therefore, a route may include a ferry, for instance, even though the Avoid ferries avoid option is enabled. A message then appears and you will hear a corresponding message.

AVOIDING OR USING TOLL ROADS

The use of toll roads requires a usage fee (toll). Select Toll roads ▶. ▶ Activate or deactivate Avoid all. If the option is activated, the route avoids toll roads. If the option is deactivated, the route takes toll roads into account. or Select an option for Payment by cash or card or Electronic billing. Avoid: the route avoids toll roads with the selected method of payment. Use: the route takes into account roads that require a toll corresponding with the payment type selected.

AVOIDING OR USING ROADS REQUIRING A SPECIAL TOLL STICKER

A vignette allows for the use of a route network for a limited time period.  804 EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Select Avoid vignette roads ▶. ▶ Activate or deactivate Avoid all. or Switch individual countries on or off in the list. Avoid: the option is activated. The route avoids roads requiring a special toll sticker in the selected countries. Use: the option is deactivated. The route takes into account roads in the selected country which require you to pay a time-based fee (vignette). ① These route options are not available in every country.

AVOIDING AREAS

Select Avoid areas ≥ ( → page 625).

SELECTING NOTIFICATIONS FOR THE ROUTE

Requirements

- For an audible indication when approaching a personal POI: the USB device contains personal POIs. • The USB device is connected with the multimedia system. • The category in which the personal POI belongs is activated. Multimedia system: Messages & tones

SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF

Activate Reduced messages. If a driving instruction is available for a simple change in direction, you hear a brief announcement, e.g. "turn right in 200 m". The number of driving instructions along the route is minimised. ▶ Activate Detailed messages. If a driving instruction is available and there is a complex driving situation, you hear supplementary information, e.g. "In 200 m turn right and continue to follow the major road". Additional driving instructions are issued for the route, for example on turning major roads. Activate Announce street names. The name of the street into which the vehicle should turn is announced. ① This option is not available in all countries and languages.

SWITCHING TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF

Activate or deactivate Announce traffic warnings. If available, traffic warnings are announced, e.g. before the end of traffic jams that pose a risk.

AUDIBLE INDICATION WHEN APPROACHING A PERSONAL POI

Select Personal POIs. Activate a category. When approaching a personal POI in the selected category an audible indication will be issued.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DISPLAYING A ROUTE OVERVIEW WITH CHARGING STATION

Requirements:

• A destination is entered. Multimedia system:   Arrival time at charging stop, type of charging station Charging stop shows the charging time recommended by the navigation with Electric Intelligence as well as states of charge on arrival and onward journey for an optimal travel time Distance from current vehicle position and remaining driving time Searches for an additional charging station When route guidance is active, the charging stops, entered intermediate destinations the destination are shown.

DEPENDING ON THE ROUTE, TRAFFIC SITUATION AND AVAILABLE DATA, FURTHER INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED:

• Name, destination address Symbols for intermediate destination and destination • Phone number (if available) • Web address (if available) - Traffic information You can influence the route calculated by the navigation with Electric Intelligence using options ① and ②. Select one of the options.

IGNORING A CHARGING STATION

If you do not want to drive to the selected charging station, it can be removed for the current route guidance. The navigation with Electric Intelligence tries to plan the best possible alternative charging station for the route. Select 1. The expected charging output, the dynamic charge level display as well as the current state of charge and the predicted charging target are displayed, for example. Select Ignore. Select Ignore during this journey. The charging station is removed from the route. ① After selecting Details, the detailed information about the charging station is displayed.

ADDING A CHARGING STATION

If you want to drive to a charging station on the route earlier than planned, for example, you can search for an additional charging station. If the charging station is suitable for the route, it will be accepted by the navigation with Electric Intelligence.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Select 4. If necessary, filter the display of the charging stations according to the charging power. Select a charging station. You can also search for a charging station using the symbol on the digital map or next to Where to? (→ page 587).

PLANNING ROUTES

Requirements:

• A destination is entered. Multimedia system:  Enter the intermediate destination ( → page 57). After entering the destination and new calculation of the route, the route overview is shown again. The route contains a new intermediate destination. ① If there are already four intermediate destinations, delete an intermediate destination ( → page 607).

EDITING A ROUTE WITH INTERMEDIATE DESTINATIONS

Requirements:

\- The destination and at least one intermediate destination have been entered. Multimedia system: 

CHANGING THE ORDER OF THE DESTINATIONS

In the route overview, press and hold on a destination. Move the destination with ◀ or ▶. Tap on ☑. The editing mode is ended.

DELETING A DESTINATION

In the route overview, press and hold on a destination. Tap on □. The editing mode is ended.

DISPLAYING THE ROUTE LIST

Multimedia system:  Tap on the navigation window ⑦ (→ page 587).  Example: route list Route sections with turning arrow, distance to change of direction, road number, road name Current driving manoeuvre at the top of the list   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Destination at the end of the list 2 Current vehicle position The route sections are displayed in the navigation window. The route list is updated during the journey. Motorway information shows the available service facilities. After selecting symbols, e.g. for car parks, service areas or motorway exits, the POI is adopted as an intermediate destination or destination. Press the arrow at the bottom of the navigation window briefly. Swipe up or down. Select a route section. The map section is displayed. To return to vehicle position: select Current position.

SELECTING AN ALTERNATIVE ROUTE

Requirements:

• A route has already been created. • The Overview of route after start option is switched on (→ page 603). • The Schedule charging stops option is switched off ( → page 597). When Schedule charging stops is switched on, the route is calculated with Electric Intelligence. Alternative routes are then not available. Multimedia system: EQ Route Other routes The original route and alternative routes with indication of the travel time difference are displayed on the map. An alternative route can also be a faster route, but one that is significantly longer.

THE FOLLOWING ROUTE INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED:

- Driving time • Time of arrival • Distance to the destination • Avoid options based on the set route options - Driving time saved or lost compared with the original route When the alternative routes have been calculated, display the route in the navigation window by swiping to the right or left.

CHANGING ROUTE TYPE

Select Filter. Switching the route type on or off.

AVOIDING OR USING ROUTE OPTIONS

Select Filter. Switch the route options on or off ( → page 604). Confirm the settings with Finished. To start route guidance to the alternative route: select Start. To select an alternative route on the map: touch any point on the alternative route. The alternative route is highlighted.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

ACTIVATING A COMMUTER ROUTE

Requirements:

• You have created a profile ( → page 547). • The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (→ page 568). • The Activate commuter route option is switched on. - The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show destination suggestions. - Routes have been learned for these destination suggestions. • Route guidance is active. ① This commuter route is not available in all countries.

Multimedia system:

Route Activate Activate commuter route. The navigation system automatically detects that the vehicle is on a commuter route. For the daily commuter route, traffic events on the route are also reported when driving without active route guidance. To select commuter route: select Start. Route guidance begins without spoken driving instructions. ① A commuter route is suggested even with delays on the route. To delete a commuter route: select ×.

ADJUSTING THE ROUTE ON THE MAP

Requirements

• A route has already been created. You can change the course of the original route on the map. A new intermediate destination is set in the process. If the maximum number of intermediate destinations is reached, the function is not supported. Press the OK button to confirm the message. ▶ Press and hold lightly on the route. A symbol appears. The route can be changed. Drag and hold the route with your finger to a desired map position. The new route is displayed. The route is recalculated. When the route is calculated, the journey time and distance are compared with the original route. When the finger is pulled away from the display, the intermediate destination is shown on the map. Accept the route with Confirm or reject it with Cancel and return to the original route.

STARTING THE AUTOMATIC SERVICE STATION SEARCH

Requirements:

• ATTENTION ASSIST is activated ( → page 406). • You are driving on a motorway. • There are service stations along the route section ahead.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DRIVING SITUATION

The following notification is shown on the central display ATTENTION ASSIST Tap here to search for rest areas.. Confirm the notification. The service station search starts. The available service stations along the route or in the vicinity of the vehicle's current position are displayed. Select a service station. Calculate the route with the service station as an ▲ intermediate destination or as a ▲ destination (→ page 594). If there are already four intermediate destinations: select Yes in the prompt. The selected service station is entered in the route overview at position 1. Intermediate destination 4 is deleted. Route guidance begins.

STARTING AND EDITING A STORED ROUTE

Requirements:

- A USB device with stored routes is connected with the multimedia system ( → page 687). - The route is stored in the "Routes" folder with the GPS Exchange format (.gpx).

Multimedia system:

 Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is displayed. Select Stored routes.

STARTING A SAVED ROUTE

Select a route. Select Start: route guidance at start or Start: current location. Route guidance begins.

RENAMING A ROUTE

Press on a route until a menu is shown. Select Rename. Enter the name. Select OK.

RECORDING AND STORING A ROUTE

Requirements:

• A USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( → page 687).

Multimedia system:

 Press the double arrow in the destination input line until Stored routes is displayed. Select Stored routes.

STARTING RECORDING

Select Start recording. A white rectangle is displayed. The route is stored on the USB device.

STOPPING RECORDING

Press the white rectangle.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Select End recording.

Route guidance

NOTES ON ROUTE GUIDANCE


WARNING

Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Route guidance begins once a route has been calculated. The road and traffic rules and regulations always have priority over multimedia system driving instructions. Driving instructions are, for example navigation announcements, changes in direction and lane recommendations. Changes in direction and lane recommendations are shown in the navigation window. 

THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS AND FUNCTIONS ARE ALSO AVAILABLE IN THE NAVIGATION WINDOW, FOR EXAMPLE:

Route list • Destination information • Traffic information, e.g. length of traffic jam, delay • Motorway facilities Car park search Emergency lanes If you do not follow the driving instructions or if you leave the calculated route, a new route is calculated automatically. If, for example, the route is diverted or the direction of a one-way road has been reversed, driving instructions may deviate from the actual traffic situation. Alternatives may be offered during route guidance, e.g. before passing a motorway exit road. The additional driving time for the journey along the motorway exit is shown. For this reason, you must always observe road and traffic rules and regulations during your journey as well as the prevailing traffic conditions. The route can differ from the ideal route, for example in the event of roadworks or incomplete digital map data.

NOTES ON SATELLITE RECEPTION

The correct function of the navigation system depends amongst other things on reception of the satellite system used. In certain situations satellite reception can be impaired, malfunction or even not possible, e.g. in tunnels or in multi-storey car parks.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic 

CHANGING DIRECTION OVERVIEW

CHANGES OF DIRECTION ARE SHOWN IN THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:

• Detailed image of the junction The display appears when you drive into a junction. 3D image The display appears when driving on junction-free, multi-lane roads, for example at motorway exits and motorway interchanges.  Example: detailed image of the crossing with upcoming changes of direction ① Name of the street to turn into Change of direction arrow (also on the map) 3 Current distance to the change of direction  Example: 3D image of the upcoming change of direction Manoeuvre point 2 Change of direction arrow (also on the map) Larger map scales show change of direction points instead of change of direction arrows. 3 Current distance to the change of direction Current vehicle position

THERE ARE THREE PHASES WHEN CHANGING DIRECTION:

• Preparation phase If there is enough time between the changes of direction, the multimedia system prepares you for the upcoming change of direction. A navigation announcement is issued, e.g. "Prepare to turn right". The navigation window shows: the direction information or the name of the road which is to be turned into as well as the distance to the change of direction. • Announcement phase The multimedia system announces the upcoming change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Turn right in 300 m".   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic When the Auto zoom map orientation is switched off ( → page 628), a detailed representation of the junction or a 3D image of the upcoming change in direction appears in the navigation window. • Change-of-direction phase The multimedia system announces the imminent change of direction, e.g. by announcing "Now turn right". Example of 3D image: when the distance to manoeuvre point ① is shown with 0 m and the symbol for current vehicle position ② has reached manoeuvre point ③ the change in direction is carried out. Changes in direction are also displayed on the driver's display and head-up display. LANE RECOMMENDATIONS OVERVIEW  Example: lane recommendations Lane not recommended (grey arrow) Possible lane (white arrow) Recommended lane (white arrow, blue background) This display appears for multi-lane roads. If the digital map contains the relevant data, lane recommendations are displayed in the navigation window.

EXPLANATION OF THE DISPLAYED LANES:

• Recommended lane In this lane, you will be able to complete both the next change of direction and the one after that. Possible lane In this lane, you will only be able to complete the next change of direction. • Non-recommended lane In this lane, you will not be able to complete the next change of direction without changing lane. During the change of direction, new lanes may be added. Bus lanes are also shown. Lane recommendations are also displayed on the driver's display and head-up display.

USING MOTORWAY INFORMATION

When driving on the motorway, upcoming motorway facilities and available service facilities are shown in the route list. These include car parks, service stations or motorway exits with service POIs, for example. The entries are sorted according to increasing distance from the current vehicle position. Select an entry.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic If several service facilities are available, select a service facility from the list. The destination address and the map position are shown. Calculate the route ( → page 594). or ▶ Search for a POI in the vicinity. or Use other functions, e.g. store the destination address of the service facility.

DESTINATION REACHED

Once the destination is reached, you will see the ☐ chequered flag. Route guidance will now be complete. The navigation menu is shown. When an intermediate destination has been reached, you will see the intermediate destination flag with the number of your □ intermediate destination. Route guidance is continued.

SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF

SWITCHING OFF

Press the button on the right of the steering wheel or on the MBUX multimedia system during a navigation announcement (→ page 557). The Spoken driving recommendations have been deactivated. message appears. or In the navigation window, select 📷 for an upcoming driving manoeuvre. The symbol changes to ☐. 

SWITCHING ON

Press the button again on the right of the steering wheel or on the MBUX multimedia system. or In the navigation window, select 📄 for an upcoming driving manoeuvre. The current navigation announcement is played. The symbol changes to 📄.

SWITCHING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS ON OR OFF DURING A PHONE CALL

When the zero layer is shown, press the button on the right side on the steering wheel ( → page 542). or Select on the zero layer. The applications are displayed. Select Settings. Select System. Select Audio. Select Navigation & traffic announcements. ▶ Activate or deactivate Driving recommendations during call. To leave the menu: select   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

ADJUSTING THE VOLUME OF NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS

Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Audio Navigation & traffic announcements Select Driving recommendation vol.. Set the volume. To leave the menu: select ↩.

ROUTE GUIDANCE IS ACTIVE

SWITCHING AUDIO FADEOUT ON OR OFF DURING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS

or Press the button on the steering wheel on the right. Tap on the central display. Select Settings. Select System. Select Audio. Select Navigation & traffic announcements. Activate or deactivate Lower audio for driving recomm.. To leave the menu: select ↩.

REPEATING NAVIGATION ANNOUNCEMENTS

Requirements

• A route has already been created. • Route guidance is active.

Multimedia system:

 In the navigation window, select 📄 for an upcoming driving manoeuvre. Select ☑. The current navigation announcement is repeated.

CANCELLING ROUTE GUIDANCE

Requirements

• A route has already been created. • Route guidance is active. Select [⊗] in the navigation module (→ page 587).

OVERVIEW OF OFF-ROAD STATUS DURING ROUTE GUIDANCE

Due to roadworks, for example, there may be differences between the data on the digital map and the actual course of the road. In such cases, the multimedia system will temporarily be unable to locate the vehicle's current position on the digital map. The vehicle is off-road. Road not mapped will be shown. Route guidance may be restricted. When the vehicle is back on a road known to the multimedia system, route guidance continues as normal.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

Destination

SAVING THE CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION

Multimedia system:  When the map is shown, tap on the ▲ current vehicle position. Select Store position. To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite. To save as "Home" address: select Home. To save as "Work" address: select Work.

MANAGING PREVIOUS DESTINATIONS

Multimedia system:  ▶ Select Previous destinations.

SAVING THE LAST DESTINATION AS A FAVOURITE

For a last destination, select .... A menu appears. To save as a favourite: select Save as favourite. To save as "Home" address: select Home. To save as "Work" address: select Work.

DELETING A PREVIOUS DESTINATION

For a last destination, select .... Select Delete. or Select Delete all. Confirm the prompt. When all the favourites have been deleted, Add favourite is available, for example.

EDITING DESTINATION SUGGESTIONS

Requirements:

• The Allow destination suggestions option is switched on (→ page 568). - For the display of destination suggestions: the multimedia system has gathered sufficient data.

Multimedia system:

 Press and hold on a destination suggestion. A menu appears. To cancel a destination suggestion: select Do not suggest now or Do not suggest. To save a destination suggestion: select Save as favourite, Home or Work. Delete a destination suggestion from the favourites ( → page 593).

Route guidance with current traffic reports

TRAFFIC INFORMATION OVERVIEW

Current Traffic reports are received with the Live Traffic Information subscription service. If the subscription has expired, then FM RDS-TMC is available in selected countries. i Live Traffic Information is not available in all countries. The service must be registered in the Mercedes me user account (→ page 617). This secures the free-of-charge period of three years. The service updates the traffic situation via the Internet connection at short, regular intervals. Information on the vehicle's position is regularly sent to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is immediately rendered anonymous by Mercedes-Benz AG and forwarded to the traffic data provider. Using this data, traffic reports relevant to the vehicle's position are sent to the vehicle. The vehicle acts as a sensor for the flow of traffic and helps to improve the quality of the traffic reports. There may be differences between the traffic reports received and the actual road and traffic conditions.

IF YOU DO NOT WANT TO TRANSMIT THE VEHICLE POSITION, YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:

• You deactivate the service in the Mercedes me user account. • You have the service deactivated at a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Further hazard warnings are received using the Car-to-X service ( → page 620).

SHOWING INFORMATION FROM THE SERVICE PROVIDER FOR LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Requirements

• The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information.

Multimedia system:

→ Apps ▶ Mercedes me ▶ My services Select Live Traffic. When the subscription for Live Traffic Information has expired then in selected countries FM RDS-TMC is available.

REGISTERING LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. • You have a Mercedes me user account. Create a Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes.me. A valid email address is required for this. Register the vehicle using the vehicle identification number (VIN). Connect the vehicle with your Mercedes me user account. A code is sent to the multimedia system. Enter the code into the multimedia system.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Accept the general and specific terms of use. Alternatively, you can have the connection completed at a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

EXTENDING A LIVE TRAFFIC INFORMATION SUBSCRIPTION

Requirements:

• The vehicle is equipped with Live Traffic Information. • You have a Mercedes me user account. Call up the Mercedes me website. Call up the Mercedes me user account. Switch to the Mercedes me Store via the linked vehicle. Select Live Traffic Information. Select the renewal period. Add the product to the shopping basket. Accept the general and specific terms of use. Live Traffic Information remains activated for the selected extension period. Activation begins on the date of extension.

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION ON THE MAP

Requirements

• Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic are switched on ( → page 620).

Multimedia system:

 If necessary, move the map ( → page 623).

THE MAP SHOWS THE FOLLOWING TRAFFIC INFORMATION DEPENDING ON THE ACTIVATED SETTINGS:

\- Traffic incidents These are roadworks, road blocks and warning messages, for example. When route guidance is active, the symbols for traffic incidents will be shown in colour on the route. Off the route they are grey. \- Warning messages Warning messages are shown as the ⚠ symbol. Traffic safety information can be shown, e.g. if there are people on the carriageway. If the vehicle approaches a danger area, for example the end of a traffic jam in a dangerous position, the △ symbol is shown on the map. If Announce traffic warnings is switched on and a message has been issued, an additional announcement is made. • Traffic flow information: - Traffic jam (red line) - Slow-moving traffic (orange line) - Heavy traffic (yellow line) - Free-flowing traffic (green line) • Display for traffic delays on the current route The smallest value for the display for traffic delays is a minute.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

SHOWING TRAFFIC EVENTS ON THE ROUTE

Requirements:

• The Traffic incidents display is switched on ( → page 620). Multimedia system:  If there are traffic events on the route, these are shown on the map and in the route overview. ① With the MBUX Voice Assistant you can inform yourself about traffic events on your route. Ask, for example How is the traffic on my route? or How is the traffic at home?. A voice output is given.  Example: traffic events on the map Delay Colour display of traffic flow information, delay and length, road name or road number 3 Switches traffic information display on or off

DURING ACTIVE ROUTE GUIDANCE, THE TOTAL DELAY ON THE ROUTE IS DISPLAYED:

• In the navigation system in the navigation window • In other applications in the status line at the top A traffic event symbol is, for example △ for roadworks. In the map several traffic events may be shown on top of each other. The traffic event symbol shows a plus sign. If available, the street number can be replaced by a street name or both the name and number. If a message about forming an emergency corridor has been issued, Emergency corridor is shown in the navigation window. To see all of the traffic events on the route, swipe to the right or left. The route section is highlighted on the map. To show detailed information in the route overview: tap on a display in the route overview. The detailed information is shown, for example the road section and the direction.

CALLING UP DETAILED INFORMATION ON THE MAP

Tap on traffic flow information on the map, e.g. a red line for a traffic jam section. The detail information is displayed. If several lines are shown on top of the other, then select an item of traffic flow information from the list.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic 

SHOWING TRAFFIC EVENTS ON THE MAP

Tap on a traffic event symbol. The detail information is displayed. Several traffic events are in the immediate vicinity: lap on the top traffic event symbol and select from the list of traffic events.

SWITCHING THE TRAFFIC INFORMATION DISPLAY ON

Multimedia system:  Select View. Traffic. ▶ Activate Traffic incidents and Free-flowing traffic. Traffic incidents, for example roadworks, local area reports (e.g. fog) and warning messages, are shown on the route. To switch traffic information in the quick-access on or off: tap on in the route overview (→ page 606). The indicator lamp lights up or is off.

Car-to-X-Communication

CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION OVERVIEW

THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS APPLY FOR THE CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION SERVICE:

- The vehicle is equipped with an MBUX multimedia system with navigation function. • There is a subscription for the Live Traffic Information service. - The Car-to-X-Communication service is activated in your Mercedes me user account. Car-to-X-Communication is available in selected countries. The communication module automatically establishes an Internet connection once the vehicle is switched on. If there are any hazard warnings, they will be provided shortly thereafter. Depending on the mobile phone connection, provision may take between one second and one minute.

BENEFITS OF CAR-TO-X-COMMUNICATION:

- Dangers are automatically detected by the vehicle or can be reported by the driver. These are then sent to vehicles with Car-to-X-Communication in the immediate vicinity. - If available, current details relating to hazard spots near the vehicle's current position are received. This gives you sufficient time to adapt your driving style to the traffic conditions. The use of Car-to-X-Communication requires the regular transmission of vehicle data to Mercedes-Benz AG. The data is then immediately pseudonymised by Mercedes-Benz AG. The vehicle data is deleted after an appropriate amount of time has elapsed (several weeks) and is not stored permanently. Data which serves as identification is replaced during the pseudonymisation process. In this way, your identity is protected against access by unauthorised third parties.

DISPLAYING HAZARD WARNINGS

Multimedia system:  If hazard warnings are available these can be shown as symbols on the map. The display depends on the settings for the Traffic incidents option.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Select EQ. Select Activate or deactivate Traffic incidents. If the option is activated, all of the symbols are shown. If the option is deactivated, the symbols are only shown when there is a hazard warning.

THE FOLLOWING HAZARDS MAY BE SHOWN ON THE MAP:

• Accidents and breakdowns • Slippery roads, fog, crosswinds and heavy rain • Hazards reported manually • Vehicle with active hazard warning light Roadworks • Additional hazards (if available) If Announce traffic warnings is switched off ( → page 605), voice output can indicate a danger area.

SENDING HAZARD WARNINGS

REPORTING HAZARDS MANUALLY

① Automatically detected hazard warnings are sent by the vehicle. When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position. The Position menu is shown.  Select Report traffic incident. The Thank you for supporting accident prevention! message appears.

Route guidance with augmented reality OVERVIEW OF ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY

① This function is an on-demand feature ( → page 119). ⚠ WARNING Risk of accident and injury as a result of distraction, incorrect depiction or wrong interpretation of the display The camera image of the augmented reality display is not suitable as a guide for driving. ▶ Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation. ▶ Avoid extended observation of the camera image. During route guidance with augmented reality a camera image with the real traffic scene is shown on the central display before a turning manoeuvre. The camera image includes additional information, for example arrows indicating a change of direction. If the options are switched on and this additional information is available, road names and house numbers are displayed ( → page 622).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic  House number 2 Street name Change of direction arrow Route guidance with augmented reality will not be available in some situations, e.g. in the event of poor satellite reception or roads that have not been digitised. Route guidance with augmented reality is not available in all countries.

ACTIVATING ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY


WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to imprecise positioning of additional information The additional information from the augmented reality display may be inaccurate and is not a substitute for observing and assessing the actual driving situation. Always keep an eye on the actual traffic situation when carrying out all driving manoeuvres. Multimedia system:  Select View. Select Augmented reality video. Activate or deactivate Augmented reality video. The camera's video image is shown on the central display before a turning manoeuvre. The video image includes additional information.

SHOWING PROPERTY INFORMATION FOR ROUTE GUIDANCE WITH AUGMENTED REALITY

Requirements:

• Augmented reality is activated ( → page 622). Multimedia system:  Select View. Select Augmented reality video. Activate Street names and House numbers. During route guidance, the activated options are shown as additional information in the camera image.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic 

Map and compass

SETTING THE MAP SCALE

Multimedia system: 

ZOOMING IN

When the map is shown, tap twice quickly with one finger on the central display. or Move two fingers apart on the central display.

ZOOMING OUT

Tap with two fingers on the central display. or Move two fingers together on the central display. (i) You can set the unit of measurement of the map scale ( → page 568).

MOVING THE MAP

Multimedia system:  When the map is displayed, swipe in any direction with one finger on the central display.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

• Select a destination on the map ( → page 593). • Select a POI ( → page 590). • Show traffic incidents on the map ( → page 619). To reset the map to the current vehicle position: select Centre.

SWITCHING THE ROUTE OVERVIEW AFTER START ON OR OFF

Multimedia system:  Select View. Activate □ or deactivate □ Overview of route after start. If the option is enabled, the map shows the full route after route guidance is started and, if available, all alternative routes.

SELECTING POI SYMBOLS FOR THE MAP DISPLAY

Multimedia system:  POIs include restaurants and hotels, for example. These are displayed as symbols on the map. Not all POIs are available in all countries. Personal POIs are destinations which you have saved on a USB device, for example. The display of POI symbols on the map can be activated or deactivated as a favourite. Select View. Select POI symbols on map ▷.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Activate Hide all points of interest. When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are shown on the map according to the settings in the POI categories. If the conditions are fulfilled, the POI symbols are shown with current online information ( → page 629).

SWITCHING DISPLAY OF CATEGORIES FOR QUICK-ACCESS ON OR OFF

Switch a category on or off in the menu.

SELECTING CATEGORIES

In the menu, select Other categories ▶. Activate or deactivate Show all. When the option is switched on, the POI symbols for all categories are shown on the map. or Select ▶ the categories. Activate or deactivate the categories. The POI symbols for the selected categories are shown on the map.

SELECTING PERSONAL POI CATEGORIES

In the menu, select Personal POIs ▶. Select ▶ a category. Activate or deactivate Display on the map. To issue a signal when approaching: activate Visual warning and Acoustic notification.

RESETTING THE POI SYMBOL DISPLAY

In the menu, select Reset POIs. The settings are reset to the standard settings.

SELECTING THE DISPLAY OF ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON THE MAP Multimedia system:

→ → EQ → Select View. Select Show additional information. ▶ Switch the options on or off.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

\- Current street If the option is enabled, it will be displayed in the navigation window. Scale If the option is switched off, the map scale is only displayed on the map when zooming. If the option is enabled, the map scale is permanently displayed on the map. The option also influences the display on the driver's display. Altitude \- Next junction If the option is switched on and the journey continues without route guidance, the name of the next intersecting street will be displayed in the navigation window.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DISPLAYING THE MAP VERSION

Multimedia system:  Select View. Select Map data version. The detail information is displayed. The online map update service from Mercedes me connect can be used to update the map data ( → page 56). A message is shown on the central display when a new map version is available. ① Information about new versions of the digital map can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre.

OVERVIEW OF AREA AVOIDANCE ON THE ROUTE

You can define areas along a route that you would like to avoid. Motorways or multi-lane expressways that pass through an area to be avoided may be included in the route despite being blocked.

AVOIDING A NEW AREA FOR THE ROUTE

Multimedia system:  ▶ Select Avoid new area.

STARTING USING THE MAP

Select Using map. A red rectangle appears. This designates the area that should be avoided. Move the map ( → page 623). Set the map scale ( → page 623). Select OK. The area is entered into the list.

STARTING USING DESTINATION SEARCH

Select Via address entry. Enter the address ( → page 57). Select the destination in the list. The map appears. The area is saved.

CHANGING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED

Multimedia system:  Select an area in the list. Select Edit. To move an area on the map: swipe in any direction on the central display.

CHANGING THE SIZE OF THE AREA

Move two fingers apart or together on the central display. Select OK. The area is entered into the list.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic 

TAKING THE AREA FOR THE ROUTE INTO ACCOUNT

Select the area in the list. Activate Avoid area. If route guidance is active, a new route is calculated. If there is no route yet, the setting is carried over to the next route guidance.

THE ROUTE CAN INCLUDE AN AREA THAT IS TO BE AVOIDED IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The destination is located in an area that is to be avoided. - The route includes motorways or multi-lane expressways which pass through an area to be avoided. • There is no practical alternative route.

DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED

Multimedia system: 

DELETING AN AREA TO BE AVOIDED

Select an area in the list. Select Delete. ▶ Confirm the prompt with Yes.

DELETING ALL AREAS TO BE AVOIDED

If at least two areas to be avoided are set, select Delete all. ▶ Confirm the prompt with Yes.

MAP DATA UPDATE OVERVIEW

As the content of a digital road map has a short life, outdated data may have a negative effect on all navigation functions. For the best MBUX navigation experience, you should install all of the map updates offered by Mercedes-Benz.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR THE UPDATE OF MAP DATA:

• Online map update • Updates from the Mercedes me Portal - Update at a Mercedes-Benz service centre Additional costs can be incurred in this process.

ONLINE MAP UPDATE

REQUIREMENTS:

• Mercedes me connect is available. • You have a Mercedes me user account. • The Online Map Update service is available for your region. • The service has been activated. The Online Map Update service is only available in certain countries. Installation takes place in the background as an automatic map update. The MBUX multimedia system installs all of the available map updates for the European regions in which the vehicle is located or is moved. The online map update is activated at the latest after the next time the vehicle is switched on.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

UPDATES FROM THE MERCEDES ME PORTAL

The map data for several regions can also be updated manually. Log in with your Mercedes me user account at: https://www.mercedes-benz.de/ Follow the menu path My Mercedes Me account > My vehicles > Selection of car > Online Map Update. Select the regions to be downloaded to a storage medium. After the map data has been copied, connect the storage medium with your vehicle. Select the notification with information about a new version of the map data and start the installation. After the MBUX multimedia system has been restarted, the updated map data is used.

OVERVIEW OF MAP DATA

If map data is reinstalled in a vehicle, no activation code needs to be entered. For map data purchased as data media, the enclosed activation code must be entered after starting the installation. Activation codes are only ever valid for one vehicle.

IN THE EVENT OF THE FOLLOWING PROBLEMS, PLEASE CONTACT A MERCEDES-BENZ SERVICE CENTRE:

• The multimedia system does not accept the activation code • You have lost the activation code

DISPLAYING THE COMPASS

Multimedia system:  When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position until the Position menu is shown. Select Compass.

THE COMPASS DISPLAY SHOWS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

- The current direction of travel with bearing (360° format) and compass direction - Longitude and latitude coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds • Number of satellites from which a signal can be received The information is not available in every country.

DISPLAYING QIBLA

Multimedia system:  When the map is shown, tap on the current vehicle position until the Position menu is shown. Select Alerts. The arrow on the compass shows the direction to Mecca in relation to the current direction of travel. The number of satellites received is shown. ① This function is not available in all countries.

SHARING THE VEHICLE POSITION WITH A CONTACT

Requirements:

• A mobile phone is connected to the MBUX multimedia system. - The connected mobile phone supports sending text messages from the vehicle ( → page 647).   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Multimedia system:  The current vehicle position can be shared with a contact. In the Route menu, select Share journey. The display changes to Stop sharing journey. Select the contact ( → page 645). The text message is sent. The display changes back to the digital map. A symbol is displayed in the status line. When the message has been sent, a notification is displayed.

SETTING THE MAP SCALE AUTOMATICALLY

Multimedia system:  Select View. Activate Auto zoom. When the option is switched on, the map scale is set automatically depending on your driving speed and the type of road. The automatically selected map scale can be changed manually. After a few seconds, this is automatically reset. When the option is activated, no detailed display of the junction or a 3D image is shown in the navigation window during an upcoming driving manoeuvre.

DISPLAYING THE SATELLITE MAP

Multimedia system:  Select View. Activate or deactivate Satellite map.

WHEN SATELLITE MAP IS SELECTED, THEY ARE DISPLAYED AT THE FOLLOWING MAP SCALES:

- On-board maps The satellite maps are displayed in map scales from 2 km. • Online maps The satellite maps are displayed in high-resolution map scales from 10 m. When Satellite map is not selected, no satellite maps are displayed. The satellite maps for these map scales are not available in all countries.

SHOWING ELECTRIC RANGE ON THE MAP

Requirements:

• There is an Internet connection. • Mercedes me connect is available. • You have a Mercedes me user account. - The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me • The service is available and has been activated.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic  Multimedia system:  Select View. Range. The electric range is shown on the map with a white line around the current vehicle position. The electric range display on the map is not available in all countries.

DISPLAYING ONLINE MAP CONTENTS

Requirements

• There is an Internet connection. • Mercedes me connect is available. • You have a Mercedes me user account. - The vehicle is connected with the user account and you have accepted the Mercedes me connect terms of use. Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me • The service is available and has been activated. Multimedia system:  Select View. Switch on an online service, e.g. Weather. Current weather information is displayed on the navigation map, e.g. temperature or cloud cover. The service information is not shown in all map scales, e.g. weather symbols. The display of online map content is not available in all countries.

Parking service

NOTES ON THE PARKING SERVICE

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to not observing the maximum permitted headroom clearance If the vehicle height is greater than the maximum permitted headroom clearance, the roof and other parts of the vehicle may be damaged. Observe the signposted headroom clearance. If the vehicle height is greater than the permitted headroom clearance, do not enter. Observe the changed vehicle height with add-on roof equipment. ① This service is not available in all countries. 

SELECTING PARKING OPTIONS


NOTE

Vehicle damage due to failure to observe local information and parking conditions The data is based on the information provided by the respective service providers. Mercedes-Benz does not guarantee the accuracy of the information provided in relation to the car park or parking area. Always observe the local information and conditions.

Requirements:

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account. • The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. • Parking is activated ( → page 631).

Multimedia system:

  Tap on P the map. or In the route overview, select P Parking spaces (→ page 606). Select the search position and search filter, e.g. Near destination and Multi-storey car parks. The map shows car parks suited to the selected settings. Select a parking option. The map shows the parking options in the vicinity.

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS DISPLAYED (IF AVAILABLE):

- Destination address, distance from current vehicle position and arrival time • Information on the car park, e.g. - Opening times - Parking charges - Current occupancy - Maximum parking time Maximum access height The maximum access height shown by the parking service does not replace the need for observation of the actual circumstances. • Available payment options (Mercedes pay, coins, bank notes, cards) • Details on parking tariffs • Number of available parking spaces • Payment method (e.g. at parking meters) • Services/facilities at the parking option - Telephone number Calculate the route ( → page 594).

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS CAN ALSO BE SELECTED (IF AVAILABLE):

• Searching for POIs in the vicinity. • Saving the destination. - Placing a call at the destination. • Sharing the destination via QR code. - Calling up the web address. • Showing the destination on the map.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

DISPLAYING PARKING OPTIONS ON THE MAP

Requirements

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account. • The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. Multimedia system:  Activate Parking. The parking options within the vicinity of the current vehicle position are shown.

PRIOR BOOKING OF A PARKING SPACE

Requirements:

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account. • The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. - You have registered with your payment details for the payment of parking in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective contract partner. • Parking is activated ( → page 631). ① This option is not available in all countries. Multimedia system:  Select a parking option on the map. If a parking space available to book has been selected, select Book parking space. Select the desired booking period. Take note of the cancellation conditions. If the parking space is available for the selected period, the price will be shown. Press OK to confirm. In the booking overview, confirm with Book. If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN. The parking space will be booked in the background. A booking confirmation including a car park ticket will be sent to your registered e-mail address.

MAKING USE OF OR CANCELLING THE BOOKING

Start the Mercedes me app on your smartphone. Open Menu. Select My transactions. Select Parking transactions. Select the desired booking. To make use of the booking: select Show car park ticket. or To cancel the booking: select Cancel booking.  If possible, a parking space booking can be cancelled up to the stated time. If a booking cannot be cancelled, this will already be shown to you during the booking procedure.

PAYING PARKING CHARGES

Requirements:

• Navigation Services is activated in your Mercedes me user account. • The parking service is part of the scope of the Navigation Services. - You have registered with your payment details for the payment of parking in the Mercedes me Portal with Mercedes pay and the respective contract partner. • Parking is activated ( → page 631). ① This option is not available in all countries. Multimedia system:  Select a parking option on the map. If a car park that can be paid for has been selected, scroll down in the parking details. Select Payment. Once the vehicle has reached a parking position with payment function and the vehicle is switched off, a message appears. Using this message you can pay from the vehicle and start the payment process.

STARTING A PAYMENT PROCEDURE

▶ Acknowledge the message. Please note the maximum parking period displayed and any existing additional limitations. If required, a message will inform you about the necessity of displaying information confirming the online payment for the parking space. Select Start the payment process. If required, enter the Mercedes me PIN. Press OK to confirm. The successful start of your parking transaction is shown. Complete the booking with OK. To cancel a parking transaction: after receiving the confirmation request, select Cancel. Minimum charges may be incurred.

ENDING A PARKING TRANSACTION

▶ Stop the active transaction using the Mercedes me app. You receive a summary of the procedure and the costs. If an uncompleted parking transaction is detected for your vehicle as you continue your journey, a message will appear asking whether you would like to end it. Acknowledge the message. When the parking transaction is stopped successfully, another message appears with the details about your completed parking. 

Dashcam

NOTES ON THE DASHCAM


NOTE

Risk of legal consequences due to violation of legal regulations and data protection provisions You are legally responsible for operation and use of the dashcam functions. The legal requirements relating to operation and use of the dashcam can vary depending on the country in which the dashcam is operated. This function is not permitted in all countries. Before using the dashcam, read up on the content of the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements in the respective country of use. Observe the legal regulations, in particular the data protection requirements.

① OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR SAFE OPERATION:

• Only use FAT32 or exFAT formatted USB storage media. - Use USB-IF certified USB storage media. The USB-IF is a non-profit society and stands for USB Implementers Forum. Based on the USB specification, the USB-IF certifies e.g. USB versions, corresponding cables and plugs as well as methods for supplying energy via the USB interface. \- Frequent and continuous high-speed overwriting can damage the USB storage media. Mercedes-Benz recommends a high-quality external SSD drive. The abbreviation SSD stands for solid-state drive. The file size and therefore the duration of single recording is limited by the limitations of the USB flash drive format. So FAT32 formatted USB flash drives do not allow files larger than 4 GB, for example. When the file size is reached, the recording stops and you receive a notification.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE IN THE GALLERY APP:

• Switching write protection on or off - Deleting video files Additional information about the Gallery app ( → page 667).

SELECTING A USB DEVICE FOR A VIDEO RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM Requirements

\- At least one USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( → page 687).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic Multimedia system: Apps Dashcam Select the USB symbol. Select the USB device. When USB devices contain multiple partitions, recorded video files are not always displayed in the recording list. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you use USB devices with one partition.

STARTING OR STOPPING VIDEO RECORDING WITH THE DASHCAM

Requirements

- For recording and saving a video file: a USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( → page 687). • The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: Apps Dashcam If several USB devices are connected with the multimedia system, select a USB device ( → page 633). If no USB device is selected, a selection is made automatically when recording starts. To select a recording mode: select Loop recording or Individual recording. Loop recording records several short video files. When the memory is full, recording is continued automatically. In doing so, other files will be overwritten starting with the oldest file.  Individual recording stops recording when the memory limit is reached. An individual recording is automatically protected against being overwritten. To start: select Start recording. The length of the recording is shown. The Do not remove the storage medium during recording. Before removing the storage medium, eject it first. message appears. The video file is stored on the USB device. To end: select End recording. ① In some countries, geo-coordinates (longitude and latitude) are shown in the video image. For technical reasons, the geo-coordinates may show greater inaccuracies.

A REPORT MAY APPEAR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

- Individual recording: the memory is full or there are only a few minutes recording time available. The video recording stops or will be stopped imminently. Change the USB device or delete a video file. - The camera is not functional, the Camera unavailable message appears. Have the camera checked in a Mercedes-Benz service centre. • If the country border indication has been switched on (→ page 635). - If an outdoor recording is started with the camera app during a dashcam recording, the dashcam recording pauses and resumes automatically after the camera recording is finished. A notification to this effect is displayed.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Navigation and traffic

CONFIGURING DASHCAM SETTINGS

Requirements

• A USB device is connected with the multimedia system ( → page 687). Multimedia system: 

RECEIVING NOTIFICATIONS AFTER PASSING A BORDER CROSSING

Activate National border alert. A message is shown if video is being recorded and the vehicle passes a border. ① This function is not available in all countries.

STARTING AUTOMATIC VIDEO RECORDING

\- Select Automatic loop recording. - Activate Automatic loop recording. When the vehicle is started, video recording starts automatically. ① This function is not available in all countries.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Telephone

Telephony

NOTES ON TELEPHONY


WARNING

Risk of distraction from operating integrated communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion If you operate communication equipment integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. 

WARNING

Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary. As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system and mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone  

WARNING

Risk of injury due to objects being stowed incorrectly If objects in the vehicle interior are stowed incorrectly, they can slide or be thrown around and hit vehicle occupants. In addition, cup holders, open stowage spaces and mobile phone receptacles cannot always retain all objects within. There is a risk of injury, particularly in the event of sudden braking or a sudden change in direction. Always stow objects so that they cannot be thrown around in such situations. Always make sure that objects do not protrude from stowage spaces, luggage nets or stowage nets. Close the lockable stowage spaces before starting a journey. Always stow and secure heavy, hard, pointed, sharp-edged, fragile or bulky objects in the boot/load compartment.

OBSERVE THE ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ON STOWING MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS DEVICES CORRECTLY:

• Loading the vehicle ( → page 256) Further information can be obtained from a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ TELEPHONE MENU OVERVIEW  Bluetooth ^® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone Bluetooth ^® device name of the currently connected mobile phone/of the mobile phone (two phone mode) 3 Signal strength of the mobile phone network Battery status of the connected mobile phone 5 Options 6 Messages 7 Calls up devices Numerical pad 9 Starts contact search BLUETOOTH ^® PROFILE OVERVIEW

Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone	Function
PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)	Contacts are automatically displayed in the multimedia system
MAP (Message Access Profile)	Message functions can be used

 

Bluetooth® profile of the mobile phone	Function
HFP (Hands Free Profile)	Wireless telephony is available
SAP (SIM Access Profile)	The car telephone has access to the SIM card data and dials into the mobile phone network via the exterior aerial

TELEPHONY OPERATING MODES OVERVIEW

DEPENDING ON YOUR EQUIPMENT, THE FOLLOWING TELEPHONY OPERATING MODES ARE AVAILABLE:

- A mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth® (→ page 638). - Two mobile phones are connected with the multimedia system via Bluetooth (two phone mode) ( → page 639). - You can use all the functions of the multimedia system with both mobile phones. Irrespective of this, Bluetooth® audio functionality can be used with any mobile phone (→ page 687).

INFORMATION ON TELEPHONY

THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN LEAD TO THE CALL BEING DISCON- NECTED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION:

• There is insufficient network coverage in the area - You move from one transmission/reception station to another and no communication channels are free • The SIM card used is not compatible with the network available \- A mobile phone with "Twincard" is logged into the network with the second SIM card at the same time The multimedia system supports calls in HD Voice ^® for improved speech quality. A requirement for this is that the mobile phone and the mobile phone network provider of the person you are calling support HD Voice ^® . Depending on the quality of the connection, the voice quality may fluctuate.

CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE

Requirements:

- Bluetooth® is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). - Bluetooth ^* is activated on the multimedia system (→ page 565). Multimedia system: 

SEARCHING FOR A MOBILE PHONE

▶ Select Connect new device.

AUTHORISING A MOBILE PHONE

Select a mobile phone. A code is displayed in the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. If the codes match: confirm the code on the mobile phone. For older mobile phone models, enter a 1 to 16-digit number code on the mobile phone and on the multimedia system for authorisation. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone i Up to 15 mobile phones can be authorised on the multimedia system. Authorised mobile phones are reconnected automatically. The connected mobile phone can also be used as a Bluetooth ^® audio device ( → page 687). You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

CONNECTING A SECOND MOBILE PHONE (TWO PHONE MODE)

Requirements

\- At least one mobile phone is already connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth ^® . Multimedia system:  ▶ Select Connect new device. Select the mobile phone. In some cases, if the query appears, confirm the selection of the mobile phone pair with the Device name 1 + Device name 2 option. The selected mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system.

INTERCHANGING MOBILE PHONES (TWO PHONE MODE)

Multimedia system:  Both mobile phones are shown individually in separate tabs.  Select the tab with the desired mobile phone. Selecting the tab of a specific mobile phone displays the associated telephone contents. Selecting the other tab switches the view to the other telephone. The submenus in the telephone menu (e.g. contacts, call lists, messages) relate to the currently selected mobile phone with the exception of the telephone settings. In the telephone settings, settings can be made for both mobile phones.

CHANGING THE FUNCTION OF A MOBILE PHONE

Multimedia system: 

ACTIVATING A FUNCTION

Select a grey symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The corresponding function is activated.

DEACTIVATING A FUNCTION

One function is active: select the coloured symbol in the line of a mobile phone. The mobile phone is disconnected from the multimedia system. Several functions are active: de-select an active function in the line of one of the mobile phones. The corresponding function is deactivated.

REPLACING MOBILE PHONES

Multimedia system: 

NO AUTHORISED MOBILE PHONE AVAILABLE:

▶ Select Connect new device. Select a mobile phone.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone Newly authorised mobile phone: confirm the numerical code on the mobile phone.

USING IN SINGLE TELEPHONE MODE

Select Device name. A newly authorised mobile phone is connected in single telephone mode. If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single telephone mode, it is connected again in single telephone mode. If a mobile phone is already authorised and has been connected in two phone mode with another mobile phone, a query may come, whether the mobile phone should in future be operated in single telephone mode or connected with another mobile phone in two phone mode. If required, confirm the query about operating mode (single telephone or two phone mode) by confirming the Device name option.

USING IN TWO PHONE MODE

Select Device name 1 + Device name 2. A newly authorised mobile phone is connected with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone has already been authorised and connected in single telephone mode, it will be connected in future with the selected mobile phone in two phone mode. If the mobile phone was previously connected with another mobile phone, this connection is cancelled. 

DISCONNECTING OR DELETING A MOBILE PHONE

Multimedia system: Phone Devices

DISCONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE

Select Disconnect. If applicable, the mobile phone will be automatically reconnected when the vehicle is next started.

DELETING A MOBILE PHONE

Select Devices. Select ⋯ in the line of the mobile phone. Select Delete device. The mobile phone is deleted from the system.

USING A MOBILE PHONE WITH NEAR-FIELD COMMUNICATION (NFC)

Requirements:

- NFC is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) - The mobile phone's screen is switched on and unlocked (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) 

CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE

 Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) against NFC interface in the front stowage compartment. Follow the additional prompts on the central display to connect the mobile phone. Connect the mobile phone in single telephone mode ( → page 638). Connect the mobile phone in two phone mode ( → page 639).

REPLACING A MOBILE PHONE

Hold the NFC interface of the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions) against NFC interface ① in the front stowage compartment. Follow the additional prompts on the central display to replace the mobile phone in one or two phone mode ( → page 639). If required, confirm the prompts on your mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). ① If your mobile phone supports wireless charging, it can be charged on the mat (→ page 277). If the mobile phone is not charging, switch off NFC on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Further information can be found at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/

SETTING THE RECEPTION AND TRANSMISSION VOLUME

Requirements:

• A mobile phone is connected ( → page 638).

Multimedia system:

→ Phone ➕ Devices ➕ Devices This function ensures optimal language quality. Please note that the respective mobile phone must be selected for adjustment of the reception and transmission volume. Select ⋯ in the line of the mobile phone. Select Volume. Set the reception and transmission volume using Reception volume and Transmission volume. Further information on the recommended reception and transmission volume: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone

SETTING THE RINGTONE

Multimedia system:  Set the ringtone. If the mobile phone supports the transfer of the ringtone, you will hear the ringtone of the mobile phone instead of that of the vehicle audio system.

STARTING OR STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION

Requirements

- At least one mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( → page 638). - The tab with the mobile phone for which voice recognition should be started is selected (→ page 639).

STARTING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION

Press and hold the ⚡ button on the multifunction steering wheel for more than one second. Voice recognition is started for the currently selected mobile phone.

STOPPING MOBILE PHONE VOICE RECOGNITION

Press the 📁 or 📞 button on the multifunction steering wheel. If a mobile phone is connected via Smartphone Integration, the voice recognition of this mobile phone is always started or stopped. 

NOTE ABOUT CONTACT SUGGESTIONS

The multimedia system can show contact suggestions based on frequently used contacts, outgoing calls and text messages. For this, the Allow contact suggestions option must be switched on (→ page 568). When you open the call list or the message menu, contacts which you can call or write to will be suggested to you. Suggestions will be shown in the Suggestionstab. The multimedia system does not use the content of messages for suggestions.

SELECTING OPTIONS FOR CONTACT SUGGESTIONS

Requirements

• The Allow contact suggestions option is switched on (→ page 568). - The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show contact suggestions. Multimedia system:  Select Call list or Contacts. Select Suggestions. Select ⋯ in the line of the suggested contact. THE FOLLOWING OPTION IS AVAILABLE FOR SELECTION: • Do not suggest now  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Calls

TELEPHONE OPERATION

Multimedia system: 

MAKING A CALL BY ENTERING THE NUMBERS

Select □. Enter a number. Select [√]. The call is made.

ACCEPTING A CALL

Select Accept.

REJECTING A CALL

Select Reject.

ANSWERING A CALL WITH A MESSAGE

Select = Reply.

ENDING A CALL

Select

PUTTING A CALL ON IN-CAR OFFICE'S TO-DO LIST

Select ☐ Put call on In-Car Office's to-do list.

ACTIVATING FUNCTIONS DURING A CALL

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DURING A CALL:

End call Micro. off • Keypad (show to send DTMF tones) - Add call - Hands-free Transfer the call, e.g. to Front, Rear or All seats. - Private mode Transfer the call the telephone or headphones, for example. Select a function. ① Observe that the functions and symbols can vary depending on the vehicle equipment.

CONDUCTING CALLS WITH SEVERAL PARTICIPANTS

Requirements:

• There is an active call ( → page 643). • Another call is being made.

SWITCHING BETWEEN CALLS

Select the contact. The selected call is active. The other call is on hold.

ACTIVATING A CALL ON HOLD

Select the contact of the call on hold.

CONDUCTING A CONFERENCE CALL

Select Conference. The new participant is included in the conference call.

ENDING AN ACTIVE CALL

Select End call.  On some mobile phones, the call on hold is activated as soon as the active call is ended.

ACCEPTING OR REJECTING A WAITING CALL

Requirements:

• There is an active call ( → page 643). If you receive a call while already in a call, a message is displayed. Depending on the mobile phone and mobile phone network provider you will hear a call waiting signal. Alternatively, in two phone mode you will hear an acoustic signal when the call goes through to the other (not yet active) mobile phone. Select Accept. The incoming call is active. If only one mobile phone is connected with the multimedia system, the previous call will be put on hold. If during a call you accept a call with the other mobile phone when in two phone mode then the existing call is ended. or Select Reply. The incoming call is not accepted. You answer with a message. or Select Reject. This function and behaviour depends on your mobile phone network provider and the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).

USING THE INTERNATIONAL DIALLING CODE

Multimedia system: Phone Press and "0" until a "+" appears in the selection field. Enter the numbers of the country code, regional code and the telephone number. Select ▶. The call is made.

Contacts

INFORMATION ABOUT THE CONTACTS MENU

The contacts menu contains all contacts from existing data sources, e.g. mobile phone or data storage medium.

DEPENDING ON THE DATA SOURCE, IT IS POSSIBLE TO SAVE/LOAD THE FOLLOWING NUMBER OF CONTACTS:

• Permanently saved contacts: 3,000 entries - Contacts loaded from the mobile phone: 5,000 entries per mobile phone

FROM THE CONTACTS MENU, YOU CAN PERFORM THE FOLLOWING ACTIONS:

• Make a call, for example call a contact ( → page 646)   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone • Navigation ( → page 592) • Compose messages (→ page 648) • Additional options ( → page 646) Mobile phone contacts are automatically displayed when a mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system ( → page 638).

DOWNLOADING MOBILE PHONE FAVOURITE CONTACTS

If the mobile phone supports the function, the favourites of the mobile phone are automatically loaded and appear in the overview of the phone menu.

CALLING UP CONTACTS

Multimedia system: 

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS CAN BE USED TO SEARCH FOR CONTACTS:

• Searching by initials - Searching by name • Searching by phone number Enter characters into the search field. Select the contact.

A CONTACT CAN CONTAIN THE FOLLOWING DETAILS:

• Phone numbers • Navigation addresses - Internet address - Email addresses - Relationship (if set)

MANAGING THE FORMAT OF A CONTACT'S NAME

Multimedia system:  Select Name format. Select an option.

OVERVIEW OF IMPORTING CONTACTS

IMPORTING CONTACTS INTO THE CONTACTS MENU

Source Requirements

USB device The USB device is connected with the USB port. Mobile phone A mobile phone is connected to the multime- dia system via Bluetooth ⁴ . Contacts are available. Note that the imported contacts remain in the vehicle and can be accessed at any time regardless of the connected mobile phones.

IMPORTING CONTACTS INTO THE CONTACTS MENU

Multimedia system:  Select a mobile phone , from which the contacts should be imported. Select an option.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone 

SAVING A MOBILE PHONE CONTACT

Multimedia system: Phone Contacts Select ▶ in the line of the mobile phone contact. Select [...]. Select Save. Select Yes. The contact saved in the multimedia system is identified by the MBUX symbol.

CALLING A CONTACT

Multimedia system: Phone Contacts Select Search contacts. Enter characters into the search field. Select the contact. Select the telephone number. The number is dialled.

SELECTING FURTHER OPTIONS IN THE CONTACTS MENU

Multimedia system: Phone Contacts Select ▶ in the line of the contact. Select ... Select an option.

DELETING CONTACTS

Requirements

• The contacts are saved in the vehicle. - To delete an individual contact, this has been imported manually into the vehicle. Multimedia system: Phone

DELETING ALL CONTACTS

Select Select Contacts. Select Delete all MBUX contacts. Select an option.

DELETING A CONTACT

Select Contacts. Select ▶ in the line of the contact. Select Select Delete contact. Select Yes.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone

Call list

OVERVIEW OF THE CALL LIST

Depending on whether your mobile phone supports the PBAP Bluetooth ^® profile or not, this can have different effects on the presentation and functions of the call list.

IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:

- The call lists from the mobile phone are displayed in the multimedia system. - When connecting the mobile phone, you may have to confirm the connection for the PBAP Bluetooth® profile.

IF THE PBAP BLUETOOTH® PROFILE IS NOT SUPPORTED, THE EFFECTS ARE AS FOLLOWS:

- The multimedia system generates a call list independently as soon as calls are made in the vehicle. • The call list is not synchronised with the call lists in the mobile phone.

MAKING A CALL FROM THE CALL LIST

Multimedia system: 

SELECTING ADDITIONAL OPTIONS IN THE CALL LIST

Multimedia system: Phone Select Call list. For contacts that are in the address book: select options. The contact details are called up. For contacts where only one number is shown (not in the address book): select ____.

DELETING THE CALL LIST

Multimedia system:  This function is only available if your mobile does not support the PBAP Bluetooth ^® profile.

Text messages

OVERVIEW OF MESSAGE FUNCTIONS

In the message menu you can receive text messages and create and send them with the help of the MBUX voice assistant. If the connected mobile phone supports the Bluetooth ^® MAP profile, the message functions can be used on the multimedia system.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone You can obtain further information about settings and supported functions of Bluetooth ^® -capable mobile phones at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/ Some mobile phones require further settings after being connected to the multimedia system to activate the messaging functionality (see manufacturer's operating instructions).

SETTING MESSAGE DISPLAYS

Multimedia system:  Select Message display. Select On or Off.

READING MESSAGES

Multimedia system: 

USING THE READ-ALOUD FUNCTION

A message list is shown. To read aloud, select the symbol at a conversation. The message is read aloud.

CREATING AND SENDING A NEW MESSAGE

Requirements

• There is an Internet connection. Multimedia system:  Using the MBUX voice assistant, speak the voice command Send a message to, and name the desired contact ( → page 521). 

DICTATING TEXT

Say the message. You are guided by the voice dialogue.

REPLYING TO A MESSAGE IN THE MESSAGING HISTORY

Multimedia system:  A message list is shown. Select × next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. You will be guided through the steps with the help of a voice dialogue. Say the message.

FORWARDING MESSAGES

Multimedia system:  A message list is shown. Speak the voice command Forward message. You are guided by the voice dialogue.

CALLING A MESSAGE SENDER

Multimedia system:  A message list is shown. Select > next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. Select ... Select Call.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone

USING TELEPHONE NUMBERS, URLs OR EMAIL ADDRESSES FROM A TEXT MESSAGE

Requirements

• An Internet connection is available to call up a URL. Multimedia system:  A message list is shown. Select ▶ next to a contact. The messaging history with this contact is shown. Select a telephone number or a URL in the message. If a URL is selected the web browser opens.

IF A TELEPHONE NUMBER IS SELECTED THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

Call - New message or If In-Car Office and the email function are available: select an email address. In-Car Office opens. The availability of In-Car Office is country-dependent. Select an option.

DELETING A MESSAGE

Multimedia system:  A message list is shown. Select a contact. Press and hold on a message. To delete the message: select Delete.

In-Car Office

IN-CAR OFFICE FUNCTIONS

Using In-Car Office, you can connect your online services to the multimedia system.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Calendar Showing appointments and triggering actions, e.g. reading aloud, placing a call, navigating E-mail Reading, reading aloud, creating, answering and forwarding e-mails - Tasks and calls Managing tasks and pre-booked calls • Voice input Creating appointments/reminders and tasks Alternatively, you can record text contents via the MBUX voice assistant or via the dictation function.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone Further information on the MBUX voice assistant ( → page 522). The zero layer displays notifications or reminders from In-Car Office, such as birthdays or calls due ( → page 536). Please note that certain functions are only available when the vehicle is stationary.

CALLING UP IN-CAR OFFICE

Requirements

• You have a Mercedes me user account. • The In-Car Office service is activated in your Mercedes me user account. - You have a user account with an online service, for example Office 365 or Gmail. In this way, appointments, e-mails and tasks can be synchronised and facilitated. Multimedia system:  Select In-Car Office. Individual functions from In-Car Office can be called up.

LINKING A USER ACCOUNT

Select the desired online service. Scan the QR code. Follow the instructions on the device.

SELECTING CALENDAR FUNCTIONS IN IN-CAR OFFICE

Multimedia system: Apps In-Car Office Calendar Select an appointment. Select a function. The following functions are available: Read aloud Call Navigate Delete Functions are available if corresponding appointment information is saved.

EXAMPLES OF THIS ARE:

- If a telephone number has been saved for the appointment, Call is available. • If a navigable address has been saved in the Online Account for the appointment, Navigate is available.

SELECTING FUNCTIONS OF TASKS & CALLS IN "IN-CAR OFFICE"

Multimedia system: → Apps ➤ In-Car Office ➤ Tasks & calls Select a function for an entry.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Reading aloud - Placing a call This task function requires a telephone number.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone  • Marking as completed √ In the current edit, an entry that has been marked as completed can be marked as open again by removing the tick. - Deleting • Displaying details

MARKING AN ENTRY AS COMPLETED IN TASKS & CALLS

Multimedia system: → Apps ➕ In-Car Office ➕ Tasks & calls Select Tasks & calls. An overview appears. Select √.

READING AND MANAGING E-MAIL

Multimedia system: Apps In-Car Office E-mail Select an e-mail. The e-mail is opened.

ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

Reading e-mail • Answering e-mail (→ page 651) - Forwarding e-mail (→ page 651) • [III] Deleting e-mail

CREATING NEW E-MAIL

Multimedia system: → Apps ▶ In-Car Office ▶ E-mail Select + Create e-mail. Select +. Enter an e-mail address directly via the keyboard. or Select an e-mail address from the contacts. Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information about the contacts menu (→ page 644). Enter the subject and text of the e-mail in the corresponding fields with the keypad. Select Send.

ANSWERING E-MAIL

Multimedia system: → Apps In-Car Office E-mail Select an e-mail. Select Reply. Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad. Select Send.

FORWARDING E-MAIL

Multimedia system: Apps In-Car Office E-mail Select an e-mail. Select Forward.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone  To forward with attachment: select Forward with attachment. Contacts can be used from the contacts menu or from linked online services such as Office 365 or Gmail. Further information about the contacts menu ( → page 644). Forwarding with an attachment is only possible if an attachment is available. To forward without attachment: select Forward without attachment. Enter the e-mail text in the corresponding field using the keypad. Select Send.

OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT AND DICTATION FUNCTION

Multimedia system: → Apps In Car Office E-mail

OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE DICTATION FUNCTION

The dictation function allows you to dictate text content, such as the subject or text of an e-mail, instead of typing the content using the keyboard. The dictation function is not available everywhere with the full range of functions. For the first-time activation of the function it may be necessary to accept the Mercedes me connect terms of use in your Mercedes me user account. The following is an example of how you can dictate the subject and text of an e-mail. Select + Create e-mail. ▶ Add recipients using ⭕. Select The dictation function is started. ▶ Dictate the subject and text of the e-mail. After the voice entry has been processed, it is shown as text. Select Send.

OPERATING IN-CAR OFFICE USING THE MBUX VOICE ASSISTANT

With the voice control of the MBUX Voice Assistant you can operate various functions of In-Car Office and speak in text contents. (i) Further information on operating the MBUX Voice Assistant ( → page 521). The following are examples of some voice commands that you can use to operate In-Car Office. To write new e-mail: say the voice command I want to send an e-mail to John Doe. You are guided by the dialogue. To reply to an e-mail: say the voice command Reply to e-mail. You are guided by the dialogue. To forward an e-mail: say the voice command Forward e-mail. Dictate the text of the e-mail.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone To show tasks: say the voice command Show my tasks. The tasks are shown. To create a calendar entry: say the voice command Create a calendar entry tomorrow at 9 a.m.. You are guided by the dialogue.

Apple CarPlay®

OVERVIEW OF APPLE CARPLAY*


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. iPhone* functions can be used via the multimedia system using Apple CarPlay*. They are operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or the Siri voice control system. You can activate the voice control system by pressing and holding the button on the multifunction steering wheel. ① By briefly pressing the button on the multifunction steering wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using the MBUX voice assistant ( → page 521). Only one iPhone ^® at a time can be connected via Apple CarPlay ^® with the multimedia system. Also for use of Apple CarPlay ^® with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system. As access to the iPhone ^® is restricted by MBUX when an Apple CarPlay ^® session is active, not all MBUX functions (e.g. dialling from the address book) can be fully provided for the connected device. In this case use Apple CarPlay ^® . The full range of functions for Apple CarPlay ⁴ is only available with an Internet connection. The availability of Apple CarPlay ^* may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and content connected to it. Apple CarPlay ^® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

INFORMATION ON APPLE CARPLAY ^®

The Apple CarPlay ^® symbol in the status line switches within Apple CarPlay ^® to the last active display. If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone.  

CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (CABLE)

Requirements

\- The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake applied. Connect the iPhone* to a USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable (→ page 687). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears. Select Accept & start if the application should be started. \- Open the device manager (→ page 639). - Start Apple CarPlay ^® using the relevant symbol next to the device name. If applicable, a message about data protection regulations appears. If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay ^® on your iPhone ^® .

EXITING APPLE CARPLAY*

Select [ ] of Press the button on the multifunction steering wheel (MBUX multi-media system). If Apple CarPlay ^* was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay ^* using the Apple CarPlay ^* symbol in the status line.

CONNECTING AN IPHONE® VIA APPLE CARPLAY® (WIRELESS)

Requirements

- The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). - Bluetooth ^® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). • The device is "visible" for other devices. For safety reasons, the first activation of Apple CarPlay® on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary and the parking brake applied. Multimedia system: Phone Devices Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth ^® (→ page 638). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone Select Accept & start Apple CarPlay if the application should be started. If required confirm the use of Apple CarPlay® on your iPhone®. It is possible at any time to switch between a connection via Bluetooth or Apple CarPlay (wireless) in the device list. If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth, you can connect another iPhone ^® via Bluetooth ^® to use Apple CarPlay ^® via the device manager.

EXITING APPLE CARPLAY®

Select or Press the button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system). If Apple CarPlay ^® was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Apple CarPlay ^® using the Apple CarPlay ^® symbol in the status line.

CALLING UP APPLE CARPLAY® SOUND SETTINGS

Multimedia system: Settings ▶ System ▶ Audio Select the sound settings.

ENDING APPLE CARPLAY ^®

Select the Apple CarPlay ^® symbol in the device manager (telephone, media) that is next to the device name of the iPhone ^® . i Select the Apple CarPlay® symbol in the device manager in the telephone or media applications if Apple CarPlay® should be restarted. If Apple CarPlay ^® was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background the next time it is started automatically. You can call up Apple CarPlay ^® using the relevant symbol in the status line.  

Android Auto

ANDROID AUTO OVERVIEW


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Mobile phone functions can be used with Android Auto using the Android operating system on the multimedia system. It is operated using the touchscreen, Touch Control or voice control. You can activate the voice control system by pressing and holding the ☐ button on the multifunction steering wheel. ① By briefly pressing the ² button on the multifunction steering wheel you can continue to operate the multimedia system using the MBUX voice assistant ( → page 521). Only one mobile phone at a time can be connected via Android Auto with the multimedia system. Also for use of Android Auto with two phone mode, only one additional mobile phone can be connected using Bluetooth ^® with the multimedia system. The full range of functions for Android Auto is only possible with an Internet connection. The availability of Android Auto and Android Auto apps may vary according to the country. The service provider is responsible for this application and the services and content connected to it. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

INFORMATION ON ANDROID AUTO

The Android Auto symbol in the status line switches within Android Auto to the last active display. If route guidance is active on the multimedia system, it is closed when route guidance is started on the mobile phone.

CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRED)

Requirements

• The mobile phone supports Android Auto from Android 5.0. - The current version of the Android Auto app is installed on the mobile phone. - In order to use the telephone functions, the mobile phone must be connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth ° (→ page 638). If there was no prior Internet connection, this is established with the use of the mobile phone with Android Auto.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone  For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake. Connect the mobile phone to a USB port on the multimedia system using a suitable cable ( → page 687). When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears. Select Accept & start if the application should be started. or Open the device manager ( → page 639). Start Android Auto using the relevant symbol next to the device name.

EXITING ANDROID AUTO

Select or Press the button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system). If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.

CONNECTING A MOBILE PHONE VIA ANDROID AUTO (WIRELESS)

Requirements

- The current version of your device's operating system is being used (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). • The device supports the Android Auto function (wireless). - Bluetooth ^® is activated on the device (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). • The device is "visible" for other devices. - Bluetooth® is activated on the multimedia system (→ page 565). ① For safety reasons, the first activation of Android Auto on the multimedia system must be carried out when the vehicle is stationary with the parking brake. The Android Auto function (wireless) is not available in all countries. Multimedia system: → Phone ▶ Devices Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth* (→ page 638). Depending on the device configuration, the query whether Android Auto should be started may appear on the central display after connecting the mobile phone via Bluetooth. In this case, the query must be answered with Yes.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone Select Start Android Auto. When the application is connected for the first time, a message about data protection regulations appears. Select Accept & start. ① It is possible at any time to switch between connection via Bluetooth ^® or Android Auto (wireless) in the device list. If you have already connected a mobile phone via Bluetooth ^® , you can connect another mobile phone via Bluetooth ^® to use Android Auto via the device manager.

EXITING ANDROID AUTO

Select or Press the button on the Touch Control (MBUX multimedia system). ① If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background when reconnected. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.

CALLING UP THE ANDROID AUTO SOUND SETTINGS

Multimedia system: Settings System Audio Select the sound settings.

ENDING ANDROID AUTO

Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager (telephone, media) that is next to the device name of the mobile phone. i Select the Android Auto symbol in the device manager if Android Auto should be restarted. ① If Android Auto was not displayed in the foreground before disconnecting, the application starts in the background the next time it is started automatically. You can call up Android Auto using the Android Auto symbol in the status line.

Transferred vehicle data with Android Auto and Apple CarPlay®

OVERVIEW OF TRANSFERRED VEHICLE DATA

When using Smartphone Integration, certain vehicle data is transferred to the mobile phone. This enables you to get the best out of selected mobile phone services. Vehicle data is not directly accessible.

THE FOLLOWING SYSTEM INFORMATION IS TRANSMITTED:

• Software release of the multimedia system • System ID (anonymised) The transfer of this data is used to optimise communication between the vehicle and the mobile phone. To do this, and to assign several vehicles to the mobile phone, a vehicle identifier is randomly generated.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone This has no connection to the vehicle identification number (VIN) and is deleted when the multimedia system is reset ( → page 572).

THE FOLLOWING DRIVING STATUS DATA IS TRANSMITTED:

• Transmission position engaged • Distinction between parked, standstill, rolling and driving Day/night mode of the driver's display Drive type The transfer of this data is used to alter how content is displayed to correspond to the driving situation.

THE FOLLOWING POSITION DATA IS TRANSMITTED:

Coordinates Speed - Compass direction • Acceleration direction This data is used by the mobile phone to improve the accuracy of the navigation (e.g. for continuation in a tunnel).

Mercedes me calls

MAKING A CALL VIA THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL

Mercedes me calls are not possible in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country.   me button for service or information calls ② SOS button cover SOS button (emergency call system)

Making a Mercedes me call

Press me button ①.

MAKING AN EMERGENCY CALL

To open the cover of SOS button ②, press it briefly. Press and hold SOS button ③ for at least one second. If a Mercedes me call is active, an emergency call can still be triggered. This has priority over all other active calls.

INFORMATION ABOUT THE MERCEDES ME CALL USING THE ME BUTTON

A call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre has been initiated via the me button in the overhead control panel or the multimedia system ( → page 659).

USING THE VOICE DIALOGUE SYSTEM YOU ACCESS THE DESIRED SERVICE:

• Accident and Breakdown Management  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone • Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for general information about the vehicle

YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING TOPICS:

• Activation of Mercedes me connect • Operating the vehicle • Nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre • Other products and services from Mercedes-Benz Data is transferred during the connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre ( → page 662).

CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM

Requirements

• Access to a GSM network is available. - The contract partner's GSM network coverage is available in the respective region. - The vehicle must be switched on so that vehicle data can be transferred automatically. Multimedia system:  Call Mercedes me connect. After confirmation, the multimedia system sends the required vehicle data. The data transfer is shown in the display. Then you can select a service and be connected to a specialist at the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. 

CALLING THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE AFTER AUTOMATIC ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN DETECTION

Requirements:

• The vehicle has detected an accident or breakdown situation. • The vehicle is stationary. • The hazard warning lights are switched on. ① This function is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect accident or breakdown situations under certain circumstances.

REQUIREMENTS FOR COLLISION DETECTION IN THE CONTEXT OF ACCIDENT MANAGEMENT:

• The vehicle is equipped with an anti-theft alarm system (ATA) (code 551). • The vehicle is equipped with the interior protection (code 882). - The vehicle is equipped with the Anti-Theft Protection Package (code P54). - The collision detection service with theft notification has been activated on Mercedes me connect. If a collision is detected when the tow-away protection is primed on a locked vehicle, you will receive a notification in the multimedia system when you switch the vehicle on. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if this functions is available in your country.  In the event an accident or breakdown is detected, the emergency guide shows safety notes in the multimedia system display. This may take a few seconds. ① The availability of collision detection depends on the vehicle. After quitting the emergency guide display on the multimedia system, a prompt appears asking whether you would like to get support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Select Call. - After your agreement, or if the Mercedes me connect service "Accident and Breakdown Management" is active, the vehicle data is transferred automatically ( → page 664). - The Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre takes your call and organises the breakdown and accident assistance. You may be charged for these services. (i) Depending on the severity of the accident, an automatic emergency call can be initiated. This has priority over all other active calls ( → page 670). In addition, if the Mercedes me connect service "Telediagnostics" is active, a similar prompt can appear after a delay in the event of a breakdown. If you are already in contact with the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre or have already received support, this prompt can be ignored or declined. If you answer the prompt for support from the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre with Call later, the message will be hidden and appear again later. The prompt triggered by the Mercedes me connect service "Tele diagnostics", can either be confirmed or declined. After being declined, this will not be shown again.

ARRANGING A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA A MERCEDES ME CALL

If you have activated the maintenance management service, relevant vehicle data is transferred automatically to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. Regardless of whether you have consented to the maintenance management service, the multimedia system reminds you after a certain amount of time that a service is due. A prompt appears asking if you would like to make an appointment. To arrange a service appointment: select Call. After your consent, the vehicle data is transferred and the Mercedes-Benz customer centre takes your preferred appointment date. The information is then sent to your desired service outlet. This will contact you to confirm the appointment and if necessary consult about the details. ① If you select Call later after the service message appears, the message is hidden and reappears at a later time.

GIVING CONSENT TO DATA TRANSFER DURING A MERCEDES ME CALL

Requirements

\- There is an active Mercedes me call via the multimedia system or the me button in the overhead control panel (→ page 659). The prompt to confirm data transfer does not appear in all countries. If the Accident and Breakdown Management services are not activated on Mercedes me, the Do you want to transfer your vehicle data and the vehicle's position to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre to improve the processing of your request? message is shown. The exact phrase may differ depending on the multimedia system installed. Select Yes. • The relevant vehicle data is sent automatically ( → page 662). or Select No and confirm. • Only call control data is transmitted (→ page 662). More information on Mercedes me: https://www.mercedes.me

DATA TRANSFERRED DURING A MERCEDES ME CALL

If you initiate a service call using Mercedes me, data is transferred to enable targeted advice and an efficient service.

THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS MUST BE FULFILLED FOR THE TRANSFER OF THE DATA:

• The vehicle is switched on. - The required data transfer technology is supported by the mobile phone network provider. • The quality of the mobile connection is sufficient.

MULTI-STAGE TRANSFER DEPENDS ON THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

• Reason for the initiation of the call • The available mobile phone transmission technology • The activated Mercedes me connect services • The service selected in the voice control system ① A prompt for consent to the data transfer only occurs if the corresponding Mercedes me connect service is not activated. The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and vehicle equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.

DATA TRANSFER IF MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE NOT ACTIVATED

IF NO MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE ACTIVATED AND THE DATA PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN CONFIRMED THE FOLLOWING DATA IS TRANSMITTED:

• Vehicle identification number • Time of the call ^ 662 EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone • Reason for the initiation of the call • Confirmation of the data protection prompt • Country indicator of the vehicle • Set language for the multimedia system - Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

IF A CALL IS MADE FOR A SERVICE APPOINTMENT VIA THE SERVICE REMINDER, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS ALSO TRANSMITTED:

• Current mileage and maintenance data

IF A CALL IS MADE AFTER AUTOMATIC ACCIDENT OR BREAKDOWN DETECTION USING THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS ALSO TRANSMITTED:

• Current mileage and maintenance data • Current vehicle location

IF ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT IS CALLED VIA THE VOICE CONTROL SYSTEM AND NO SERVICE HAS BEEN ACTIVATED, BUT THE DATA PROTECTION QUERY HAS BEEN CONFIRMED, THE FOLLOWING DATA CAN ALSO BE CALLED UP FROM THE VEHICLE BY THE MERCEDES-BENZ CUSTOMER CENTRE:

• Current vehicle location

IF THE DATA PROTECTION PROMPT HAS BEEN REJECTED, THE FOLLOWING DATA IS TRANSMITTED TO ENABLE TARGETED ADVICE AND AN EFFICIENT SERVICE:

• Vehicle identification number • Time of the call • Reason for the initiation of the call • Rejection of the data protection prompt • Country indicator of the vehicle • Set language for the multimedia system - Telephone number of the communication platform installed in the vehicle

DATA TRANSFER IF MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES ARE ACTIVATED

Only if the respective service is activated will additional incident-specific data be transmitted in the second stage to enable an optimal service. An overview of the data transferred is contained in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

DATA PROCESSING

The data transmitted within the scope of the call is deleted from the processing system after the call is finished, in so far as this data is not being used for other activated Mercedes me connect services. The incident-specific data is processed and stored in the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and, if required to process the incident, forwarded to the service partner authorised by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. Take note of the data protection information on the Mercedes me Internet page https://www.mercedes.me or in the recorded message immediately after calling the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. The recorded message is not available in every country.

Mercedes me connect

INFORMATION ON MERCEDES ME CONNECT

Mercedes me connect or individual Mercedes me connect services are not available in every country. Find out at a Mercedes-Benz service centre if these functions are available in your country. Mercedes me connect consists of multiple services.

YOU CAN USE THE FOLLOWING SERVICES VIA THE MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM AND THE OVERHEAD CONTROL PANEL, FOR EXAMPLE:

- Accident and Breakdown Management (me button or situation-dependent display in the multimedia system) • Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System (automatic emergency call and SOS button) The Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre are available to you around the clock. The me button and the SOS button can be found on the vehicle's overhead control panel ( → page 659). You can also call the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre using the multimedia system ( → page 660). Please note that Mercedes me connect is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, first call the national emergency services using the standard national emergency service telephone numbers. In emergencies, you can also use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( → page 86). Please note the Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

INFORMATION ON MERCEDES ME CONNECT ACCIDENT AND BREAK-DOWN MANAGEMENT

① Accident and Breakdown Management is not available in every country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

THE ACCIDENT AND BREAKDOWN MANAGEMENT CAN INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:

- Supplement to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( → page 86). If necessary, the contact person at the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre forwards the call to Mercedes me connect Accident and Breakdown Management. Forwarding the call is however not possible in all countries. Breakdown assistance by a technician on location and/or the towing away of the vehicle to the nearest Mercedes-Benz service centre You may be charged for these services. - Addition to the emergency guide after automatic accident or breakdown detection ( → page 660) In the event of a breakdown or accident, further vehicle data is sent which enables optimal support by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre and the authorised service partner or breakdown assistance. - Addition to the Mercedes me connect service Telediagnostics With the Telediagnostics function, specific wear and failure reports are recorded by the service provider, in so far as these can be clearly interpreted and are available through the monitoring of components that are subject to diagnostics. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone If your vehicle detects a breakdown or threat of a breakdown, you may be prompted via the multimedia system to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre for further help. This prompt in the multimedia system only appears when the vehicle is stationary. These services are subject to technical restrictions such as the mobile phone coverage, mobile network quality and the ability of the processing systems to interpret the transferred data. In some circumstances, this can result in delays or the failure of the information to appear in the multimedia system. Please note that the service and breakdown call is a Mercedes-Benz service. In emergencies, be sure to contact the usual national emergency number first or use the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system ( → page 668). More information about Mercedes me connect services can be obtained in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com

DATA TRANSFERRED DURING MERCEDES ME CONNECT CALL SERVICES THE DATA TRANSFERRED DURING A MERCEDES ME CONNECT CALL DEPENDS ON:

• The reason for initiation of the call • The service that is selected in the voice control system • The activated Mercedes me connect services You can find out which data is transferred when using the services in the currently valid Mercedes me connect terms of use and the data protection information for Mercedes me connect. You can find these in your Mercedes me user account.

Mercedes me Apps

INFORMATION ABOUT MERCEDES ME

With a Mercedes me user account you have access to Mercedes-Benz services and offers. Availability is dependent both on the country and equipment. You can obtain further information at a Mercedes-Benz service centre or in the Mercedes me Portal: https://me.secure.mercedes-benz.com Further information about on-demand features via Mercedes me can be found in the "General notes" section ( → page 119). ① Make sure you always keep the Mercedes me Apps updated.

CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME USER ACCOUNT

Multimedia system: Apps Mercedes me

VEHICLE IS LINKED TO USER ACCOUNT AND MERCEDES ME IS AVAILABLE

Select Mercedes me ID. Information about the linked user account appears.

YOUR VEHICLE IS NOT LINKED TO THE USER ACCOUNT

If you do not yet have a Mercedes me user account, you can create one at: https://www.mercedes.me or in the Mercedes me App. A valid email address or phone number is required for this. Select  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone Select Apps. Select Mercedes me. Follow the instructions on the display to link the user account with the vehicle. If the Mercedes me App is available on a mobile phone, the vehicle connection can be accomplished using the QR code shown.

CALLING UP THE MERCEDES ME SERVICES

Requirements

• The vehicle is connected with the user account.

Multimedia system:

Apps Mercedes me Select My services. The Mercedes me connect services for which you have a valid licence are displayed in alphabetical order.

ORDERING OR EXTENDING MERCEDES ME CONNECT SERVICES

To order or renew Mercedes me connect services, use the Store. Select Select Store.

DELETING A CONNECTION BETWEEN A USER ACCOUNT AND THE VEHICLE

Requirements

\- The user profile of the user account that was first linked to the vehicle is selected. • The user profile is synchronised ( → page 550). • A Mercedes me PIN has been set.

Multimedia system:

Apps Mercedes me Select Mercedes me ID. ▶ Select Delete vehicle connection. Only the user, whose user account was first connected with the vehicle can delete the connection between all user accounts and the vehicle.

SELECTING APPS

Requirements:

• Depending on the app, the general terms and conditions are confirmed.

Multimedia system:

Apps Select an app.

THE FOLLOWING APPS ARE AVAILABLE, FOR EXAMPLE:

- Weather - Browser • Additional apps, which are purchased or installed subsequently  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone You can also access both of the first two apps via the quick access at Apps. The available features are country-dependent. Licence fees may be applicable.

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR APPS, FOR EXAMPLE:

- Search function - Filter function, for displaying search results at the current vehicle position or at the destination • Display of detailed information Read-aloud function - Setting functions

USING THE GALLERY APP

Multimedia system: Apps Select Gallery.

IMAGES AND VIDEO RECORDINGS ARE DISPLAYED FROM THE FOLLOWING SOURCES, FOR EXAMPLE:

• Dashcam video recordings • Collision detection images • Video recordings and images from other available sources • Video recordings of off-road tracks and Emotion Tours • Video recordings from AMG TRACK PACE Favourites Select a tab. ① The Gallery app is also available on the front passenger display.

FILTERING DISPLAYS

Select Select an option. All files, all images or all video recordings are displayed.

PLAYING BACK A VIDEO RECORDING

Select ▶. Playback starts. To continue playback in full screen mode: tap on the display. To pause playback: select 📄. To continue playback from the desired position: move the ⏻ position on the timeline by sliding it. To select the previous or next video recording: swipe to the right or left.

SCROLLING AND ZOOMING IMAGES

To scroll: swipe on the image in one direction. To zoom: tap twice in quick succession on an image. To select the previous or next image: swipe to the right or left.

ADDING OR REMOVING A FILE FROM THE FAVOURITES

Press and hold on a file. ^ 667 EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone Select Add to favourites/Remove from favourites. A corresponding message appears.

SWITCHING WRITE PROTECTION ON OR OFF

① Active write protection is not supported by every app. Press and hold on a file. Activate or deactivate Write protection.

DELETING FILES

Select To delete a single file: tap on a file. will appear. To delete all files: tap on To delete: select □. A prompt appears. Select Yes. ① A single file can be deleted even after a long press on the file.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

INFORMATION ON AVAILABLE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS

TWO TYPES OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM ARE AVAILABLE TO YOU IN THE VEHICLE:

• Mercedes-Benz emergency call system • 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) The Mercedes-Benz Emergency Call System is not available in all countries. You can find more information on the regional availability of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system at: https://www.mercedes-benz-mobile.com/extra/ecall/

THE FOLLOWING APPLIES FOR BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:

- The transfer of specific data is required for the intended function of both emergency call systems. This will be explained in the "Data transfer" section ( → page 671). - Both emergency call systems are included as standard equipment in your vehicle and are activated at the factory. • The use of both emergency call systems is exempt from charges. - Both emergency call systems only function in areas in which the mobile phone network providers offer mobile phone coverage. For both systems, insufficient network coverage from the mobile phone network providers can result in an emergency call not being transmitted.  

DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AND THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL)

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system 112 emergency call system (EU eCall)

The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network. • Automatic and manual Mercedes-Benz emergency calls are transmitted to a Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. In the event that the emergency call centre of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system cannot be reached (e.g. due to a lack of network coverage), the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically. If you decide to use only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), then the system only logs in to the mobile phone network after the triggering of a manual or automatic emergency call. The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) transmits automatic and manual emergency calls directly to public coordination centres. The 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) in your vehicle meets the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. Proper and full functionality of the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) depends on circumstances beyond the influence of Mercedes-Benz AG. This includes mobile network coverage and the technical infrastructure of the public reception centres in the respective countries. i Please observe that in the event of a repair genuine Mercedes-Benz batteries must be used which have been certified pursuant to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79 (Appendix I). Other manufacturers are also permitted provided their batteries are certified according to the delegated regulation EU 2017/79. There is the option of deactivating the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system and using only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall). Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

MERCEDES-BENZ RECOMMENDS THE ACTIVATION OF THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM FOR THE FOLLOWING REASONS:

- In emergency situations when abroad, you can also get support in a language you speak. • Several transmission technologies are used to accelerate the transfer of the accident data and improve reliability of the transmission. - The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is permanently logged in to the mobile phone network, which ensures faster placement of the emergency call and faster transfer of the accident data. Measures for rescue, recovery or towing away can then be initiated in quickly. - With a Mercedes-Benz emergency call, the accident data is only transferred to the public coordination centre with the approval of the customer. In the event of an automatically triggered emergency call in which there is no voice contact, the accident data is transmitted immediately to the public emergency call centre. - If the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre is not available, the 112 emergency call is carried out automatically.

OVERVIEW OF EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS

Both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) can help to reduce the time between an accident and   the arrival of emergency services at the site of the accident. They help locate an accident site in places that are difficult to access. Both emergency call systems can initiate an emergency call automatically ( → page 670) or manually ( → page 671). Only make emergency calls if you or others are in need of rescue. Do not make an emergency call in the event of a breakdown or a similar situation.

INDICATORS IN THE DISPLAYS

THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY OR THE MEDIA DISPLAY OF BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS:

- SOS NOT READY: the vehicle is not switched on or the emergency call system is malfunctioning. This does not necessarily indicate complete failure of the emergency call system. Emergency calls can still be transmitted. The display only refers to the vehicle and does not take account of the availability of mobile phone networks and the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre. The functional readiness of the emergency call system on the vehicle can be seen when the SOS NOT READY display disappears once the vehicle is switched on. • [SOS]: the icon appears in the display during an active emergency call. If there is a malfunction of the emergency call system, the loudspeakers, microphone, airbag or the SOS button, for example, are faulty.

YOU CAN RECOGNISE A FAULT IN THE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM BY THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS:

\- A corresponding message will also appear in the driver's display. • The SOS button lights up red continuously.

TRIGGERING AN AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY CALL

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on. • The starter battery is sufficiently charged.

BOTH THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM AS WELL AS THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL) AUTOMATICALLY INITIATE AN EMERGENCY CALL:

• After activation of the restraint systems such as airbags or seat belt tensioners after an accident • After an automatically initiated emergency stop by Active Emergency Stop Assist

THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:

• A voice connection is established with the emergency call centre. - A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre. The SOS button in the overhead control panel flashes until the emergency call is finished. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display. Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone

IF AN EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN INITIATED:

- Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre. - On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and/or the police to the accident site. - If no vehicle occupant answers, an ambulance is sent to the vehicle immediately.

TRIGGERING A MANUAL EMERGENCY CALL

To use the SOS button in the overhead control panel: press the SOS button at least one second long ( → page 659). of To use voice control: use the voice commands of the MBUX voice assistant ( → page 526).

THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN MADE:

• A voice connection is established with an emergency call centre. - Remain in the vehicle if the road and traffic conditions permit you to do so until a voice connection is established with the emergency call centre. - On the basis of the call, the emergency call centre decides whether it is necessary to call rescue teams and the police to the accident site. - A message with accident data is transmitted to the emergency call centre. If no connection can be made to the public emergency services, a corresponding message appears in the display. Dial the emergency number 112 or the appropriate local emergency call number on your mobile phone.

EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM DATA TRANSFER

For both the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system as well as the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) data is transferred to the Mercedes-Benz emergency call centre or the public emergency services call centre. Depending on the emergency call system ( → page 668) activated different data is transmitted to the appropriate emergency call centre. 

TRANSMITTED DATA ACCORDING TO ACTIVATED EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM:

Mercedes-Benz emergency call 112 emergency call

• Position data of the vehicle • Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) Direction of travel • Vehicle identification number Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) • Number of people detected in the vehicle Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically Time of the accident • Language setting on the multimedia system Whether Mercedes me connect is available or not This is a requirement for the option of forwarding the call to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre if necessary. • Position data of the vehicle • Position data on the route (a few 100 m before the incident) Direction of travel • Vehicle identification number Drive type of the vehicle (e.g. petrol, diesel, CNG, LPG, electric or hydrogen) • Number of people detected in the vehicle Whether the emergency call was initiated manually or automatically Time of the accident If only the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) is activated in the vehicle, the accident data is transmitted directly to the public emergency call centre.

FOR ACCIDENT CLARIFICATION PURPOSES, THE FOLLOWING MEASURES CAN BE TAKEN UP TO AN HOUR AFTER THE EMERGENCY CALL HAS BEEN INITIATED:

• The current vehicle position can be determined. • A voice connection to the vehicle occupants can be established. • Emergency call data can be called up. For Russia: various functions, e.g. receiving traffic information, cannot be performed for up to two hours after sending an emergency call.

SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION OF THE EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM

Your vehicle checks the functionality of the emergency call system every time the vehicle is switched on. During this time, the SOS button lights up red continuously for five seconds. In the event of a system failure, you will be informed via a text message on the driver's display and the red SOS NOT READY indicator on the central display or media display. Please, make sure, that during 30 seconds after switching vehicle ON the red indicator SOS NOT READY in the upper right corner of display is switched OFF, this means the emergency call system passed diagnostics successfully.  

STARTING/ENDING ERA-GLONASS TEST MODE

Requirements

• The starter battery is sufficiently charged. • The vehicle is switched on. • The vehicle has been stationary for at least one minute.

THE TEST MODE IS CURRENTLY AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING COUNTRIES, FOR EXAMPLE:

Russia - Belarus Kazakhstan Armenia Kyrgyzstan To start the test mode: press and hold the 📞 button on the multifunction steering wheel for at least five seconds. The test mode is started and automatically ends after the language test has been performed. To stop manual test mode: switch off the vehicle. The test mode is ended.

INFORMATION ON DATA PROCESSING

PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM

All processing of personal data via the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)". The data is solely used by the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system for rescue and recovery in the event of an accident. The owner of a vehicle, that is equipped with a Mercedes-Benz emergency call system in addition to the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall), has the right to use the 112 emergency call system instead of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system. Contact address for carrying out deactivation of the Mercedes-Benz emergency call system are the local dealers.

PROCESSING OF PERSONAL DATA VIA THE 112 EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM (EU ECALL)

All processing of personal data via the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) corresponds with the specifications in the EU Regulation 2016/679 "on the protection of natural entities with regard to the processing of personal data (GDPR)" and is based particularly on the necessity to uphold the vital interests of the affected person in accordance with Article 6, Clause 1, Letter d of the GDPR. The processing of this type of data is strictly limited to the purpose of operating the emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112.

DATA RECIPIENT

The recipients of data that is processed using the 112 emergency call system (EU eCall) are the relevant emergency call inquiry terminals that are specified to first receive and handle emergency calls to the standard European emergency call number 112 by the respective country authorities in whose territory you are located.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Telephone 

ARRANGEMENTS FOR DATA PROCESSING

BOTH EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEMS ARE DESIGNED SO THAT THE FOLLOWING REQUIREMENTS ARE FULFILLED:

- The data contained in the system memory is not accessible outside the system prior to the initiation of an emergency call. - Both emergency call systems cannot be traced and there is no continuous tracking in normal operation. - The data in the system's internal memory is automatically and continuously deleted. - The location data of the vehicle is continuously overwritten in the system's internal memory, so that no more than the last three current locations required for the normal function of the system are available. - The record of the activity data of both emergency call systems is only kept for as long as is required to fulfil the purpose of handling the emergency call, and under no circumstances for more than 13 hours after the time that an emergency call is initiated.

RIGHTS OF PERSONS AFFECTED BY THE DATA PROCESSING

The person affected by the data processing (the vehicle owner) has the right to access the data and if applicable can demand the correction, deletion or barring of data that affects him or her and that the processing of which does not correspond with the GDPR regulations. Each correction, deletion or barring carried out according to this regulation must be shared with the third party to which the data has been transmitted, provided this does not prove to be infeasible and does not incur disproportionate expenditure. The person affected by the data processing has the right to complain to the appropriate data protection authority should they be of the opinion that their rights have been infringed by the processing of their personal data. Responsible contact point for the processing of access rights: Konzernbeauftragter für den Datenschutz, Mercedes-Benz Group AG, HPC E600, D-70546 Stuttgart, Germany  

Online and Internet functions

Internet connection

INFORMATION ON CONNECTING TO THE INTERNET


WARNING

Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. 

WARNING

Risk of accident from operating mobile communication equipment while the vehicle is in motion Mobile communication devices distract the driver from the traffic situation. This can also cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle. As a driver, only operate mobile communication devices when the vehicle is stationary. As a vehicle occupant, use mobile communication devices only in the designated area, e.g. in the rear passenger compartment. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating mobile communication equipment in the vehicle.

DEPENDING ON THE VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT AND AVAILABILITY IN THE COUNTRY, YOU CAN ESTABLISH AN INTERNET CONNECTION IN THE FOLLOWING WAYS:

• Vehicles with a communication module: - Using the communication module including data roaming ( → page 676) - Using Bluetooth ^® or Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone • Vehicles without a communication module: Using Bluetooth ^® with a data-enabled mobile phone   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions Using Wi-Fi with a data-enabled mobile phone The Internet functions can only be used to a limited degree whilst driving.

SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION USING THE COMMUNICATION MODULE

Requirements

- The vehicle is equipped with a permanently installed communication module. • A Mercedes me user account is available. • The vehicle is linked to a Mercedes me user account. • The Entertainment Package is active. • The Comfort Data Volume service is active. Multimedia system:  Select Acquired data package. For most Mercedes me connect services, data volume is available when purchasing the services. Additional data volume is required to use some functions, e.g. web browser or Wi-Fi hotspot. If the data volume limit is reached, the availability of Mercedes me connect services is limited. Depending on the vehicle equipment, you can purchase a data package directly from a mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store. To be able to use the data package, you conclude a separate contract with a  mobile phone network provider via the Mercedes me Store, which can be terminated at any time and for which there are no costs. This contract is a prerequisite for using the services from the previously purchased package. The availability of this option is dependent on the country. If the data package option is not available or can be upgraded, you can purchase data volume directly from the mobile phone network provider for a fee. Visit a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether it is possible to purchase data volume in your country directly from a mobile phone network provider. Alternatively, and if available, you can utilise the tethering function of a mobile phone via Wi-Fi or Bluetooth® to use the web browser or Wi-Fi hotspot. With external Wi-Fi hotspots, which are encrypted via TKIP, online software updates cannot be carried out via the external Wi-Fi hotspot.

DISCONNECTING THE AUTOMATIC INTERNET CONNECTION VIA COMMUNICATION MODULE

Requirements

• Wi-Fi or Bluetooth ³ tethering are available in the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions Multimedia system: Settings System Internet and Bluetooth Manage Internet access Select the ⋯ settings in the line of Acquired data package. To disconnect the automatic connection: select the Delete entry option. The communication module is removed from the list of known hotspots, but can be reconnected manually at any time ( → page 676). The Delete entry option permits the use of purchased data volume to be limited. The system is prevented from automatically establishing a connection to the communication module after this option has been activated.

SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WI-FI

Requirements

• The Wi-Fi function is activated on the multimedia system ( → page 566). - The Wi-Fi hotspot function is activated on the mobile phone (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). - Internet access via Wi-Fi is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions). Multimedia system: Settings System Internet and Bluetooth Manage Internet access ① This function is country-dependent. 

The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager

Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol. The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager Select Search for access. Select the mobile phone with the Wi-Fi symbol. It may take a few seconds until the device is found by the Wi-Fi search. Log in to the Wi-Fi network ( → page 566).

THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA WI-FI IS RESTRICTED OR DOES NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The mobile phone is switched off • Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone • The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the multimedia system • The Wi-Fi function is deactivated on the mobile phone • Internet access via Wi-Fi is deactivated on the mobile phone

SETTING UP AN INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH ^® Requirements

- The mobile phone supports the Bluetooth® profile PAN (Personal Area Network). - The mobile phone is connected to the multimedia system via Bluetooth ^® (→ page 638). - Internet access via Bluetooth ^® is activated (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions Multimedia system: Settings System Internet and Bluetooth Manage Internet access ① This function is country-dependent.

The mobile phone is listed in the Internet device manager

Select the mobile phone with the 📁 Bluetooth® symbol.

The mobile phone is not listed in the Internet device manager

Select Search for access. In the list displayed, all mobile phones already known to the multimedia system are shown. New devices can be set up using the phone application. Connect the mobile phone using Bluetooth ^* (→ page 638). If a new mobile phone is connected using Bluetooth ^® , this is also used for the telephone application.

THE INTERNET CONNECTION VIA BLUETOOTH ^® IS RESTRICTED OR DOES NOT FUNCTION IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The mobile phone is switched off • The mobile phone network coverage is insufficient • Mobile data use is deactivated on the mobile phone - The Bluetooth ^® function on the multimedia system is switched off and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth ^® - The Bluetooth function is switched off on the mobile phone and the mobile phone is to be connected via Bluetooth • Neither the mobile phone network nor the mobile phone allow simultaneous use of a telephone and an Internet connection - The mobile phone has not been enabled for Internet access via Bluetooth ^®

CANCELLING INTERNET ACCESS PERMISSION FOR A MOBILE PHONE Multimedia system:

Settings System Internet and Bluetooth Manage Internet access Select options ⋯ next to the name of the mobile phone. ▶ Select Delete configuration. Select Yes.

ESTABLISHING AN INTERNET CONNECTION

Multimedia system: Apps For example, select Browser. If you select a function that requires an Internet connection and the system is currently offline, a menu opens with a selection of possible Internet accesses as well as all tethering devices that are within range. Select an Internet access from the list. The Internet connection is established. Depending on the vehicle equipment and country availability, you can establish an Internet connection via the communication module or connected mobile phones. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions  The availability of the web browser depends on the country.

Connection status

CONNECTION STATUS OVERVIEW

DEPENDING ON THE CONNECTION STATUS, THE FOLLOWING SYMBOLS CAN APPEAR ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY IN THE STATUS LINE:

• Wi-Fi device is selected as Internet access. • ⚙: a Bluetooth ^* device is selected as Internet access. - Mobile phone standard (e.g. 4G + double arrow symbol): the communication module is selected as the hotspot.

DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS

Multimedia system:  ▶ Briefly press the status line. The extended status line is displayed. Briefly press the Internet symbol in the symbol overview. The current connection status is displayed.

NOTES ON DISPLAYING THE CONNECTION STATUS

- When connecting via Wi-Fi, the connection status and device name are displayed. - In the case of a connection via the communication module the following status information can be shown: Type of network - Status (online, offline, data volumes available or used, limited service) \- For vehicles with a communication module, the connection data of non-user paid services can be displayed via Mercedes me connect.

Web browsers

CALLING UP A WEB PAGE

▲ WARNING Risk of distraction from information systems and communications equipment If you operate information systems and communication devices integrated in the vehicle when driving, you could be distracted from the traffic situation. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only operate this equipment when the traffic situation permits. If you cannot be sure of this, stop the vehicle whilst paying attention to road and traffic conditions and operate the equipment with the vehicle stationary. You must observe the legal requirements for the country in which you are currently driving when operating the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 

CALLING UP A NEW WEB PAGE

Select Search. Entering a web address. Select OK.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions The function is country-dependent. ① No web pages can be displayed on the multimedia system while driving.

CALLING UP A WEBSITE FROM THE BROWSER HISTORY

To call up the previous page from the history: select

WEB BROWSER OVERVIEW

 ① Previous website 2 Next website 3 Update URL Adds/removes bookmarks 6 Options 7 Settings

i UNDER ⋯ YOU HAVE THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:

- Tabs - Bookmarks & history - Reading mode Share link - Share content - Request mobile website

CALLING UP WEB BROWSER OPTIONS

Multimedia system: 

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Bookmarks - Browsing history - Entered URLs Select an option. Change the settings.

CALLING UP THE WEB BROWSER SETTINGS

Multimedia system: 

THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Block popups - Enable cookies - Enable Javascript   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions Switch a function on ☐ or off ☐.

DELETING BROWSER DATA

Multimedia system:  THE FOLLOWING SPECIFIC BROWSER DATA CAN BE DELETED: - Cache - Cookies Form data Select one of the options shown.

MANAGING BOOKMARKS

Multimedia system:  Select Bookmarks & history. Select ⋯ after the bookmark. A menu with options opens.

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

- Delete entry Delete all Edit Share Select one of the options shown.

MANAGING TABS

Multimedia system: 

OPENING A NEW TAB

Select New tab.

CHANGING TAB

Select the icon for the desired tab.

CLOSING A TAB

Press and hold the icon of the tab to be closed until a menu appears. Select Close. The tab is closed.

PRIVATE MODE

Switch private mode on ☐ or off ☐. If the private mode is switched on, an icon appears in the input line of the web browser. In private mode, neither the history nor cookies are saved. Bookmarks can also be created in private mode.

SHARING URLs FROM THE WEB BROWSER

Requirements

\- To share via QR code: an app for scanning the QR code is installed on the mobile device.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions Multimedia system: 

SHARING URLs VIA QR CODE

Select Share link. A QR code appears. ▶ Scan the displayed QR code with a mobile device.

SHARING URLs WITH ANOTHER DISPLAY

Select Share content. In the menu drag and drop a display to another display. The displayed web page opens on the other display. ① More information on sharing display content: (→ page 556)

SETTING THE WEB BROWSER IN THE BACKGROUND

Multimedia system:  Press Audio playback continues.

TuneIn Radio

CALLING UP TUNEIN RADIO

Requirements:

• There is a user account at https://www.mercedes.me. • The vehicle is linked to the Mercedes me user account. • The TuneIn radio service is activated. • The data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. • A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system:  Select TuneIn Radio. The TuneIn Radio menu appears. The last station set starts playing. The connection quality depends on the local mobile phone reception. EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Online and Internet functions  OVERVIEW OF TUNEIN RADIO  1 Internet Radio provider Additional information on the current station Controls playback Settings 5 Additional options 6 Favourites 7 Station list Search

SELECTING AND CONNECTING TUNEIN RADIO STATIONS

Multimedia system: Radio Tuneln Radio Select Select a category. Select a station. The connection is established automatically. of Select the search field. Enter a station name. A relatively large volume of data can be transmitted when using Internet Radio.

SAVING/DELETING A TUNEIN RADIO STATION AS A FAVOURITE

Multimedia system: → → Radio → Tuneln Radio

SAVING FAVOURITES

Select a station. Press ☆.

DELETING FAVOURITES

Select a station. Press | ★ |.

SETTING INTERNET RADIO OPTIONS

Multimedia system: Radio Tuneln Radio Tuneln

THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE:

• Select Stream: select the stream quality - Login to TuneIn account: log in to your TuneIn user account • Log Out of Account: log out of your TuneIn user account Select an option.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media

Media

Information about media mode

INFORMATION ABOUT SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA


WARNING

Risk of distraction when handling data storage media If you handle a data storage medium while driving, your attention is diverted from the traffic conditions. This could also cause you to lose control of the vehicle. Only handle a data storage medium when the vehicle is stationary. The driver may be distracted from the traffic situation by the sounds of media playback. Use headphones for media playback to avoid distracting the driver. SUPPORTED FORMATS AND DATA STORAGE MEDIA:

Permissible file systems	FAT32, exFAT, NTFS
Permissible data storage media	USB devices, iPod®/iPhone®, MTP devices, Bluetooth® audio devices
Supported audio formats MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, FLAC, ALAC
Supported video formats MPEG, AVI, MKV, MP4, MV, WMV


i OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

- The multimedia system supports a total of up to 50,000 files. • Data storage media up to 2 TB are supported (32-bit address space). - Due to the large variety of available music and video files regarding encoders, sampling frequency and data transfer rates, playback cannot be guaranteed. - Due to the wide range of USB devices available on the market, playback cannot be guaranteed for all USB devices. • Videos up to FullHD (1920x1080) are supported. • Copy-protected music and video files or DRM (Digital Rights Management) encrypted files cannot be played back. • MP3 players must support Media Transfer Protocol (MTP). - Files with the corresponding format can be played back from the USB device in Dolby Atmos.

INFORMATION ON COPYRIGHT PROTECTION AND TRADEMARKS

Audio files which you create yourself (e.g. copies of data storage media you make yourself) are generally subject to copyright protection. In many countries, reproductions are not permitted without the prior consent of the copyright holder, even for private use. Make sure that you know about the applicable copyright regulations and that you comply with these.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media 

Dolby ATMOS

Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Confidential unpublished works. Copyright 2020-2022 Dolby Laboratories. All Rights Reserved.  Manufactured under licence from Dolby Laboratories, Dolby, Dolby Audio and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.  For DTS Patents, see https://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are registered trademarks, and DTS TruVolume is a trademark of DTS, Inc. DTS, Inc. All Rights Reserved.  DTS ^® Connected Radio ^™ For DTS Patents, see http://patents.dts.com. Manufactured under licence from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS Connected Radio, and the DTS logo are registered trademarks or trademarks of DTS, Inc. in the United States and other countries. © 2020 DTS, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. Lyrics licensed and provided by Lyric Find™. Content licensed and sourced from Radioplayer™.  Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote", MusicID and Playlist Plus are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. This product incorporates Spotify software which is subject to 3rd party licences found here: https://www.spotify.com/connect/third-party-licenses  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media  

TIDAL

TIDAL and TIDAL logo are registered trademark of Aspiro AB in the European Union and other countries. Overview of the media menu  Album cover Active media source Track and artist Active data storage medium and current track number/track in playback list 5 Random playback 6 Repeat 7 Settings 8 Additional options 9 Previous or next track and fast rewind or fast forward 10 Additional categories Playlists and categories Media search Controls playback 14 Timeline When the control menu is called up on the zero layer, the following functions are available: • Controlling media playback • Selecting tracks from the current playlist • Selecting a playback list Media search - Select a media source - Creating favourites - Configuring settings i Further information on: • Overview of the zero layer ( → page 537). • Operating the zero layer ( → page 539).   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media

Connecting the data storage medium to the multimedia system

CONNECTING USB DEVICES


NOTE

Damage caused by high temperatures High temperatures can damage USB devices. Remove the USB device after use and take it out of the vehicle. Connect the USB device to the USB port.

SEARCHING FOR AND AUTHORISING A BLUETOOTH® AUDIO DEVICE

Requirements:

- Bluetooth is activated on the multimedia system and audio equipment. - The audio equipment supports the Bluetooth® audio profiles A2DP and AVRCP. • The audio equipment is "visible" for other devices. Multimedia system: 

AUTHORISING A NEW BLUETOOTH* AUDIO DEVICE

Select Connect device. Detected equipment is displayed in the device list.  Select an audio device. Authorisation starts. A code is displayed on the multimedia system and on the mobile phone. If the codes are identical, confirm on the audio equipment. Select No, only music. The Bluetooth ^® audio equipment is connected with the multimedia system.

CONNECTING PREVIOUSLY AUTHORISED BLUETOOTH AUDIO EQUIPMENT

Select a Bluetooth ^® audio device from the list. The connection is being established.

Starting media playback

Requirements:

• A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system. Multimedia system: 

Controlling media playback

Multimedia system:   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media To continue playback: select ▶. To repeat a track: select □. FOR THE REPEAT FUNCTION THERE ARE THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS: • Select once: the active playlist is repeated. • Select twice: the current track is repeated. • Select three times: the repeat function is deactivated. To play back tracks in random order: select ✗. To rewind or fast-forward a track: tap on the desired point on the timeline. To select the next track: select ▶. To select the previous track: select □. To scroll through tracks quickly: press and hold □ or ▶. To show the current track list: select [≡]. You can also control media playback on the zero layer using the control menu displayed ( → page 537).

Additional options for setting media playback

Multimedia system: 

CALLING UP ADDITIONAL OPTIONS

Select ... The additional options are shown. Select an option.

Media search

NOTES ABOUT THE SEARCH FUNCTION IN CATEGORIES

Under [≡] you can search through all available media files. There are several categories available for selection. The categories shown depend on the connected device and data format. The categories are available as soon as the entire media content has been read in and analysed. Availability of the media search with Android devices may be limited.

STARTING A SEARCH IN CATEGORIES

Multimedia system:  Select a category. Enter a search term in the search bar.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media

USING THE KEYWORD SEARCH

Multimedia system:  You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input. Select A keyboard for character entry appears. Enter the term searched for. The search begins with the first character entered. The more characters entered the more concrete the search results become. Select the desired entry from the result list. If a list with several tracks is selected, then this is opened in the search. To playback all of the tracks in the list, select ⋯ and then Play now.

Media mode on the front passenger display (only vehicles with MBUX Hyperscreen)

INFORMATION ABOUT MEDIA MODE

You can also use functions of the MBUX multimedia system on the front passenger display.

YOU CAN FIND MORE INFORMATION ON THE FOLLOWING TOPICS:

• Information about supported formats and data storage media ( → page 684) • Information on copyright protection and trademarks (→ page 684) • Overview of the media menu ( → page 686)

WARNING Risk of injury from unsecured items in the vehicle

If objects such as headphones/headsets or external audio/video sources are not secured in the vehicle interior, they can be flung around and hit vehicle occupants. Always stow these items or similar objects carefully so that they cannot be flung around, for example in a lockable vehicle stowage compartment. Observe the notes on loading the vehicle.

WARNING Health hazard due to excessive volume on headphones

Excessive volume can damage your hearing. Avoid wearing headphones for long periods of time and at too high a volume (85 decibels). ▶ Ensure that the volume is set to a comfortable level. The headphones are special equipment for the MBUX multimedia system. You can also obtain the headphones from Mercedes-Benz Customer Solutions or in a specialist shop (see the manufacturer's operating instructions).   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media The function of wireless headphones can be impaired by other radio-based electronic devices, such as mobile phones, for example.

STARTING AND OPERATING MEDIA PLAYBACK

Requirements:

• A data storage medium is connected to the multimedia system. Multimedia system:  Select a media source. To adjust the volume: select - in the menu line and press - or +. To set playback via vehicle loudspeakers: press 📄 in the menu line. THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ARE AVAILABLE: • Controlling media playback ( → page 687) • Options for setting media playback ( → page 688) • Starting a search in categories (→ page 688) • Using the keyword search ( → page 689)

Music online

REQUIREMENTS

• There is an account for the music streaming service. • A subscription for the music streaming service has been obtained. • A Wi-Fi hotspot with unrestricted or sufficient data volume is available. Depending on the country, data volume may need to be purchased. • A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. The functions and services are country-dependent. For more information, consult a Mercedes-Benz service centre. Multimedia system: 

ADDING A STREAMING PROVIDER THE FIRST TIME YOU START THE APPLICATION

Select Online music. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. Select a streaming provider. A QR code is shown on the display. ▶ Scan the QR code with the mobile phone. Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.

ADDING MORE STREAMING PROVIDERS

Select Online music. The last active streaming provider is active. Select Select a streaming provider. A QR code is shown on the display. Select Music services. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media ▶ Scan the QR code with the mobile phone. Confirm the connection request on the mobile phone.

LOGGING OUT FROM A STREAMING PROVIDER

Select Online music. The last active streaming provider is active. Select Select Music services. The overview of all supported streaming providers appears. next to the streaming provider. Tap on Log out.

CALLING UP MUSIC ONLINE

Multimedia system:  Select Online music. Music playback can be controlled with the Touch Control or by using the media application.

SEARCHING FOR MUSIC IN ONLINE MUSIC

Multimedia system: 

SEARCHING FOR CATEGORIES IN ONLINE MUSIC

The media content of the streaming provider can be scanned through in the category search. The available categories and the symbol for the category search depend on the streaming provider. Start the category search. The list of available categories appears. Select a category.

KEYWORD SEARCH IN ONLINE MUSIC

You can look for content using the keyword search with free text input. Select A keyboard for character entry appears. Enter the term searched for. The more characters entered when using the keyword search, the more concrete the search results are. Select the desired entry from the result list. Depending on the selected hit, playback is started or a lower level in the search is opened.

CALLING UP ONLINE MUSIC SETTINGS

Multimedia system:  Select Select Music services. Select ☐ next to a streaming provider. Select a setting.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Media Information about the linked accounts can be displayed using the gear icon next to the configured streaming provider. The available information depends on what is offered by the provider of the streaming service.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Radio

Radio

Switching on the radio

Multimedia system:  Start the application on the multimedia system home screen. The radio display appears. You will hear the last station played on the last frequency band selected.

Radio overview

 1 Preview image 2 Active frequency band 3 Station name or set frequency Settings 5 Additional options 6 Switches on traffic reports With DAB equipment: switches on radio announcements 7 Station list Search The availability of the frequency bands is dependent on the equipment. When the control menu is called up on the zero layer, the following functions are available: • Selecting a radio station • Setting radio stations from the station list • Storing radio stations Frequency band Search function - Creating favourites - Configuring settings ① Further information on: • Overview of the zero layer ( → page 537). • Operating the zero layer ( → page 539).   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Radio

Setting the frequency band

Multimedia system:  Select a frequency band or a favourite.

Selecting a radio station

Multimedia system:  Swipe to the left or right on the control element or select a radio station. You can also set the previous/next radio station on the zero layer using the control menu displayed ( → page 537).

Calling up the radio station list

Multimedia system:  Select [≡]. The station list appears. Swipe the station list up or down. Select a station.

Searching for radio stations using station names or frequency entry

Multimedia system:  Select Enter a station name or frequency. Select a station.

Selecting a recommended radio station

Requirements:

\- The multimedia system has gathered sufficient data in order to show station suggestions. Multimedia system:  Select □. The recommended stations are shown. Select a suggested station. The selected station is played.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Radio

Storing radio stations

Multimedia system:  Select a radio station. Select ☆.

Managing favourites

Multimedia system: 

MOVING STATIONS

Press :≡★. The list of favourites appears. Press □ to the far right of the station name. Select Move. Move the station to the new position.

Setting station tracking via Internet radio

Requirements:

• A fast Internet connection for data transmission free of interference. Multimedia system:  Select Select Internet radio. Activate or deactivate the Service Following function. When the function is on, the station is searched for via Internet Radio. If you are driving out of the station's coverage area and the station is available via Internet radio, the Poor reception. Tap here to switch to Internet radio. message appears on the central display.

Calling up a slide show (FM/DAB radio mode)

Multimedia system:  The slide show displays additional information provided by the station as an image. This can include logos, album covers, music tracks, programmes, news or service information, for example. The slide show is available for DAB+ channels that broadcast additional information. Press the station picture on the central display. The image is enlarged.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Radio 

Switching the slideshow on or off (FM/DAB radio mode)

Multimedia system:  Switch DAB Slideshow or Expanded Radio Slideshow on ☐ or off ☐. When both slideshows are switched on, the contents of both slideshows alternate.

Activating/deactivating the frequency fix function

Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate Frequency fix. If the function is activated, the set frequency is kept even if the reception is poor.

Activating/deactivating traffic announcements

Multimedia system:  Select TA. The traffic information is switched on or off.

Activating/deactivating radio announcements

Multimedia system:  \- Switch on Radio announcements. The selected radio announcements are played. When Radio announcements are first switched on, Traffic information service (TA), Travel and Warning are preset. or - Switch off Radio announcements. No radio announcements are played.

Selecting radio announcements

Multimedia system:  Switch an announcement on ☑ or off. For example, Traffic information service (TA), Travel or Warning can be selected. The radio announcements are not station-dependent.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Radio

Setting the traffic information service volume increase

Multimedia system:  Select Navigation & traffic announcements. Set a value for Traffic announce, vol. increase.

Displaying radio text

Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate Radio text information.

Showing or hiding lyrics

The function is equipment-dependent. Multimedia system: 

SHOWING LYRICS

Select Show lyrics. The lyrics, album cover, title and artist of the song currently playing on the radio are displayed. Swipe up or down to go to the bottom or top section of the lyrics. If no lyrics are available for the song currently playing on the radio, Show lyrics is greyed out.

HIDING LYRICS

Select the cross at the top of the lyrics display. or  The radio menu appears.    EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system TV 

TV

Switching to TV mode

Multimedia system:  Select TV. The TV picture appears. If available, the channel and programme information is displayed. If the vehicle is travelling faster than 5 km/h the television picture is hidden from the driver. If available, the channel and programme information is continuously displayed. To show a TV programme on a full screen: tap on the preview picture.

TV mode overview

 Preview image 2 Channel name Features of the TV channel and the current programme Start and finish times of the current programme, graphic showing the remaining broadcast time Settings 6 Additional options 7 Selects the previous or next TV channel from the channel list 8 Favourites 9 Station list 10 Searches for a TV channel   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system TV OVERVIEW OF SYMBOLS  TV standard Channel fix active Audio languages available Subtitles available TV channel is encrypted Open lock: TV channel can be decrypted with the currently connected CI+ module

Showing or hiding full screen

Multimedia system:  To show full screen: press the preview picture. To hide full screen: press ↩ on the central display. The TV menu appears.

Selecting TV channels

SELECTING TV CHANNELS FROM THE MENU

Multimedia system:  Press ▶ or ▶ on the central display. The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel from the channel list.

SELECTING TV CHANNELS FROM THE CHANNEL LIST

Multimedia system:  Select in the menu. Select a TV channel. The TV tuner selects the channel from the channel list. Press the preview picture.

SEARCHING FOR A TV CHANNEL

Select the search bar next to Ⓞ (→ page 698). Enter the first characters. Select the TV channel from the channel list. i Further information on the search bar ( → page 701).

SELECTING A TV CHANNEL FROM THE FAVOURITES

Requirements: • The TV channel is stored.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system TV  Multimedia system: 

SELECTING FROM FAVOURITES

Select :≡★ in the menu (→ page 698). Select the TV channel.

SELECTING TV CHANNELS IN THE BACKGROUND

Requirements:

• Another application is active, e.g. the navigation, in the foreground. - TV mode is switched on in the background and the sound from the selected TV channel can be heard Press ▶ or ▶ on the central display. The TV tuner sets the previous/next channel from the channel list.

DISPLAYING CURRENT PROGRAMME INFORMATION FOR THE SELECTED CHANNEL (EPG)

Multimedia system: 

EPG DISPLAYS THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION (IF AVAILABLE):

- Broadcast times - Names of the current and upcoming programmes Select a programme name with ▶. The programme information is displayed. To scroll: swipe up or down. To leave the programme information display: select

FUNCTION OF THE CHANNEL FIX SETTING

CHANNEL FIX IS SWITCHED ON

The channel is not changed. This is useful if, for example, you drive the vehicle through reception regions that overlap. It prevents frequent switching back and forth between the channels. The FIX indicator is displayed after the name of the TV channel.

CHANNEL FIX IS SWITCHED OFF

Depending on reception quality, the TV tuner automatically switches to an alternative channel with the same programme content but better reception. Using this function, the best possible television picture can be found, regardless of the reception quality.

ACTIVATING/DEACTIVATING CHANNEL FIX

Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate Station fix. When the option is switched on, the display button is activated.

SWITCHING THE COUNTRY-SPECIFIC CHARACTER SET FOR THE TV CHANNEL ON/OFF

Multimedia system:  Activate or deactivate Country-specific character set. When the option is switched on, a country-specific character set is used for the display. When the option is switched off, the character set transmitted by the currently set TV channel is used for the display. The respective TV channel is responsible for the transmission of the channel-dependent character set.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system TV

Channel list overview

The TV tuner shows the current programme on the digital TV channels or radio stations with adequate reception in its own channel list. The order of the channel lists is alphabetical or country-specific. The TV tuner requires a short amount of time to update the information.

THE CHANNEL LISTS SHOW THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION:

• receivable channel names programme title

THE INFORMATION IS SHOWN UNDER THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS:

• it is broadcast by the digital channel • the reception conditions are adequate

Favourites

OVERVIEW OF TV PROGRAMMES (FAVOURITES)

You can save up to 100 digital TV channels in favourites. For quick-access you can save TV channels as favourites.

STORING TV CHANNELS

Multimedia system: 

ADDING A TV CHANNEL TO FAVOURITES

Select a TV channel. Select ☆.

MOVING A TV CHANNEL WITHIN FAVOURITES

Press :≡★. The list of favourites appears. Press □ next to the channel name. Select Move. Move the channel to the new position.

REMOVING A TV CHANNEL FROM FAVOURITES

Select a TV channel. Select ★.

TV programme

SETTING THE TV AUDIO LANGUAGE

Multimedia system:  Select one of the available audio languages ▶ under the Audio language category. Select one of the available options for the selected audio language. The selected audio language, e.g. French, will be kept until the multimedia system is switched off. When you switch on the multimedia system again, the system language is loaded as the audio language. If this is not available, the audio language that appears at the beginning of the list is loaded.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system TV 

SETTING THE TV SUBTITLES

Multimedia system:  Select the available languages ▶ under the Subtitles category. Select one of the available options for the selected language. The selected language, e.g. French, will be kept until the multimedia system is switched off. When you switch on the multimedia system again, the system language is loaded as the language. If this is not available, the language that appears at the beginning of the list is loaded. To show no subtitles: switch Activate off.

HIDING ENCRYPTED TV CHANNELS

Multimedia system:  ▶ Select Hide encrypted channels. When you start the application for the first time or after the system is reset, all TV channels are displayed. If Hide encrypted channels is active, all free-to-air TV channels and TV channels decoded by the CI+ module, for example, are displayed.

Teletext

TELETEXT OVERVIEW

Teletext pages are located between page 100 and page 899. A dynamic teletext page consists of several subpages.

INFORMATION ON MHEG-5 DIGITAL TELETEXT:

• Digital teletext is only available in some countries, e.g. the UK and New Zealand - Interactive multimedia applications such as weather forecasts, news reports and sport results are available It may take some time before all the pages load

SHOWING TELETEXT

Multimedia system:  To switch to page selection: switch between number entry and selection using the arrow button with ☐ and 123. To call up a side: enter the numbers in quick succession. or Select the arrow buttons. To return to the TV programme: select TV.

MHEG-5 DIGITAL TELETEXT

Apart from the functions described above, additional options can be used. To call up data content using colours: select a colour. To move back a level: select a list symbol.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system TV 

Picture settings

SELECTING PICTURE SETTINGS FOR THE TV

Multimedia system: Media TV TV Video settings To set the picture format: activate one of the Automatic, 4:3, 8:3, 16:9, 21:9 or Zoom display buttons. The brightness is automatically set.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Sound

Sound

Burmester ^® surround sound system

INFORMATION ABOUT THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM

The Burmester ^® surround sound system has a total output of 710 W and is equipped with 15 speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.

CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system:  Select one of the functions shown to make settings.

ADJUSTING THE TREBLE, MID AND BASS SETTINGS ON THE BURMESTER SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system:  Set Treble, Mid or Bass.

SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM ON OR OFF

Multimedia system:  The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this purpose. The currently set level is displayed. Switch off the loudness normalisation as follows: Switch on one level. or ▶ Switch off the loudness normalisation.

ADJUSTING THE BALANCE AND FADER IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system: 

ADJUSTING THE BALANCE

Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Sound 

ADJUSTING THE FADER

Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of the vehicle. Setting 0 is recommended for high quality music and voice reproduction.

SELECTING A SOUND PROFILE IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system: 

SETTING AN EXISTING SOUND PROFILE

Select a sound profile.

SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE

Select Personal sound profile and select [○]. Select Reconfigure and restart the set-up assistant.

SETTING UP A PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE FOR THE FIRST TIME:

Select Personal sound profile. Open the set-up assistant with Start. Observe the messages on the display and select the preferred settings. The personal sound profile is created with the selected settings and can be selected in the Sound profiles menu.

CHANGING INDIVIDUAL SETTINGS OF THE PERSONAL SOUND PROFILE AT A LATER DATE:

Select Personal sound profile, then select 🔒 and adjust the desired settings. The availability of a Personal sound profile is dependent on the equipment. The set-up assistant is available when the vehicle is stationary.

ADJUSTING THE SOUND FOCUS IN THE BURMESTER® SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system:  Select a seat or row of seats for the sound focus. The sound focus is activated. or Select the seat or row of seats again. The sound focus is deactivated.

Advanced sound system

INFORMATION ABOUT THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM

The Advanced sound system has a total output of 225 W and is equipped with eleven speakers. It is available for all functions in the radio and media modes. The call can also be made from other audio sources. Replace Media with, for example, Radio in the menu path.   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Sound 

CALLING UP THE SOUND MENU IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system: 

ADJUSTING SOUND SETTINGS

▶ Select one of the functions shown.

ADJUSTING TREBLE, MID-RANGE AND BASS SETTINGS IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system:  Set Treble, Mid or Bass.

SWITCHING LOUDNESS NORMALISATION IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM ON OR OFF

Multimedia system:  The function compensates for differing loudness when changing between audio sources and within an audio source. Several levels are available for this purpose. The currently set level is displayed. The loudness normalisation can also be switched off. Switch on one level. or Switch off the loudness normalisation.

SETTING THE BALANCE/FADER IN THE ADVANCED SOUND SYSTEM

Multimedia system: 

ADJUSTING THE BALANCE

Move the volume distribution between the right and left sides of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speakers on the left and right sides in the vehicle.

ADJUSTING THE FADER

Move the volume distribution between the front and rear of the vehicle in the grid shown. The volume is distributed between the speakers in the front and rear of the vehicle.

Sound Experience

INFORMATION ABOUT SOUND EXPERIENCE

Your journey will be an acoustic experience. For this purpose, the active Sound Experience accompanies certain situations in the vehicle with selected sounds.

IN THE VEHICLE INTERIOR, FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS ARE ACCOMPANIED BY SELECTED SOUNDS:

• Arrival in the vehicle • Starting the drive system • Vehicle acceleration • Recovery of energy from the braking procedure - Exiting the vehicle   EQE - Owner's Manual MBUX multimedia system Sound

IN THE EXTERIOR AREA, FOR EXAMPLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS ARE ACCOMPANIED BY SELECTED SOUNDS:

- Locking and unlocking your vehicle • Plugging in and unplugging the vehicle plug The sound when disconnecting the vehicle plug varies with the state of charge of your vehicle. - Unlocking the vehicle plug • Successful initiation of the charging process • Malfunction when charging In addition, your vehicle welcomes you with an ambient sound outside when the vehicle is stationary and unlocked. The availability of the exterior area sounds is dependent on the country.

CALLING UP SOUND EXPERIENCE

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Driving Sound Experience

SWITCHING SOUND EXPERIENCE ON OR OFF

Switch Sound Experience inside or Sound Experience outside on or off. The availability of the Sound Experience outside is country-dependent.

SELECTING SOUND EXPERIENCE STYLE

Select a style.  Styles are already available, for example Vivid Flux. You can purchase additional styles through the Mercedes me Portal. The availability of styles that can be purchased is country-dependent.

AMG Sound Experience

CALLING UP AMG SOUND EXPERIENCE

Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Driving Sound experience

SWITCHING SOUND EXPERIENCE EVENTS INSIDE OR OUTSIDE ON OR OFF

Switch Sound Experience Events inside or Sound Experience Events outside on ☐ or off ☐.

SELECTING SOUND EXPERIENCE STYLE

Select a style, e.g. Authentic. ① The availability of the style is dependent on the equipment.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care 

< Maintenance and care

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. ASSYST PLUS service interval display 709 Maintenance Management 711 Telediagnostics 712 Engine compartment 713 Topping up the windscreen washer system 716 Cleaning and care 717 EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display 

< ASSYST PLUS service interval display

Function of the ASSYST PLUS service interval display

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display on the driver's display informs you of the next regular service due date. Depending on the operating conditions of the vehicle, the remaining time or distance until the next service due date will be displayed. You can hide this service display using the back button ↩ on the steering wheel. You can obtain information concerning the servicing of your vehicle from a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre ( → page 132).

Displaying the service due date

Driver's display:  The next service due date is displayed. To exit the display: press the back button ↩ on the steering wheel.

Information on regular maintenance work

NOTE

Premature wear through failure to observe service due dates Maintenance work which is not carried out at the right time or incompletely can lead to increased wear and damage to the vehicle. Adhere to the prescribed service intervals. Always have the prescribed maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE

Irreparable damage to the high-voltage battery due to maintenance work not being carried out The high-voltage battery is subject to wear. Maintenance work which is not carried out in time can lead to irreparable damage to the high-voltage battery. Always observe the warning messages about the high-voltage battery and immediately consult a qualified specialist workshop. Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care ASSYST PLUS service interval display 

Notes on special service requirements

The prescribed service interval is based on normal operation of the vehicle. Have the maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed if operating conditions are difficult or the vehicle is subject to increased stress. This is the case for frequent operation in mountainous terrain or on poor road surfaces, for example. In these or similar operating conditions, have the interior air filter changed more frequently. Check the tyres more frequently if the vehicle is operated under increased stress. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop. The ASSYST PLUS service interval display is only an aid. It is the responsibility of the driver of the vehicle to have maintenance work carried out more often than prescribed due to actual operating conditions and/or stresses.

Battery disconnection periods

The ASSYST PLUS service interval display can calculate the service due date only when the battery is connected. Display and note down the service due date on the driver display before disconnecting the battery ( → page 709).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Maintenance Management 

Maintenance Management

Notes about Maintenance Management

If the Maintenance Management service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. You will then receive individual recommendations regarding the maintenance of your vehicle. The calculation of the optimal transmission time of the maintenance request to the service partner is subject to technical limitations that may cause the maintenance recommendation to be perceived as too early or too late or not to be made at all. In this case, you can conveniently arrange a maintenance appointment with the customer centre via the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system. Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. Contact a Mercedes-Benz service centre to find out whether this function is available in your country.

Data transferred when using Maintenance Management

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use". (i) Maintenance Management and the maintenance reminder in the multimedia system are not available in every country. EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Telediagnostics 

Telediagnostics

Notes about Telediagnostics

① This service is not available in all countries. The vehicle can detect if certain wear parts need to be replaced or if malfunctions have occurred in vehicle systems. If the Telediagnostics service is activated, relevant data is automatically transmitted to the manufacturer. If fault conditions are detected by the vehicle system self-diagnosis, the system transmits recommendations for action to the Mercedes-Benz customer centre depending on the fault detected. The customer centre transmits the data to the service partner that you have entered on the Mercedes me website at: http://www.mercedes.me. For selected faults, the notification that a malfunction has been detected may appear in the multimedia system with a request to contact the Mercedes-Benz Customer Centre. From this message, a call can be made directly to the customer centre for assistance. The transmission of a notification to the multimedia system depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment and requires a fast data connection, over which the service provider has no influence. ① Reliable fault detection is subject to technical limitations. Therefore, only a limited selection of faults can be detected and rec- ommendations for action transmitted to the customer centre and the service partners. Mercedes-Benz AG is continuously working on the expansion of this service. The fault detection depends on the country, vehicle model and equipment.

Data transferred when using Telediagnostics

When the service is activated, relevant data is automatically transferred to determine the required scope of maintenance as well as fault detection and fault rectification. Details on data transfer can be found in the data protection information for the Mercedes me connect services. These can be found at: https://www.mercedes.me under "My Mercedes me account", "Terms of use". The scope of the data transmitted depends on the vehicle model and equipment. For technical reasons, not all data is available at all times.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Engine compartment

Engine compartment

Notes on the bonnet

Only the specialist personnel of a qualified specialist workshop should open the bonnet. Access by the customer is not permitted. To open the bonnet, consult a qualified specialist workshop. 

DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. ▶ Never release the bonnet when driving. Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked. 

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury when opening and closing the bonnet The bonnet may suddenly drop into the end position. There is a risk of injury for anyone in the engine bonnet's range of movement. Do not open or close the bonnet if there is a person in the bonnet's range of movement. 

WARNING

Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle

IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED VEHICLE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

• You may come into contact with hot gases. - You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. In the event of overheating or fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service. Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down first if you need to open the bonnet.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Engine compartment 

A

WARNING

Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Observe the following if you must open the bonnet: ▶ Switch off the vehicle. ▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewellery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

A

WARNING

Risk of injury from using the windscreen wipers when the bonnet is open If the windscreen wipers start moving when the bonnet is open, you could be trapped by the wiper linkage. Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the vehicle first if you need to open the bonnet.

Notes on the coolant level

Checking or topping up coolant should be carried out only by the trained personnel of a qualified specialist workshop. Access by the customer is not permitted. To check or top up coolant, use a qualified specialist workshop.

A

DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries when carrying out maintenance work during the charging process During the charging process, the high-voltage on-board electrical system is under high voltage. Do not perform any maintenance work during the charging process.

A

WARNING

Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle

IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED VEHICLE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

• You may come into contact with hot gases. - You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. In the event of overheating or fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service. Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down first if you need to open the bonnet. EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Engine compartment 

A

WARNING

Risk of injury due to moving parts Components in the engine compartment may continue to run or start unexpectedly even when the drive system is switched off. Observe the following if you must open the bonnet: Switch off the vehicle. ▶ Never touch the danger zones surrounding moving components, e.g. the rotation area of the fan. Remove jewellery and watches. Keep items of clothing and hair away from moving parts.

A

WARNING

Risk of scalding from hot coolant You may scald yourself if you open the cap when the drive system is at normal operating temperature. Allow the engine to cool down before opening the cap. When opening the cap, wear protective gloves and safety glasses. ▶ Open the cap slowly to release pressure.

Keeping the air/water duct free

Keep the area between the bonnet and the windscreen free of deposits, e.g. ice, snow or leaves.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Topping up the windscreen washer system 

Topping up the windscreen washer system


WARNING

Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable.  Avoid fire, naked flames, smoking and the creation of sparks when using windscreen washer concentrate.  Top up the washer fluid.  Close washer fluid filler flap ①. You can watch an animation on this topic via the following link:

Requirements

• The vehicle is unlocked.    EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

< Cleaning and care

Information on washing the vehicle in a car wash 

WARNING

Risk of an accident due to reduced braking power after washing the vehicle Braking efficiency is reduced after washing the vehicle. After the vehicle has been washed, brake carefully while paying attention to the traffic conditions until braking power has been fully restored. 

NOTE

Damage from automatic braking

IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHICLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:

• Active Brake Assist • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC • HOLD function • Active Parking Assist To avoid damaging the vehicle, deactivate these systems e.g. during towing or in the car wash. 

NOTE

Damage due to unsuitable car wash Before driving into a car wash make sure that the car wash is suitable for the vehicle dimensions. Ensure there is sufficient ground clearance between the underbody and the guide rails of the car wash. Ensure that the clearance width of the car wash, in particular the width of the guide rails, is sufficient.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE WHEN USING A CAR WASH, ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFOREHAND:

• Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is deactivated. • the HOLD function is switched off. • the 360° camera or the reversing camera is switched off. • the vehicle is locked and the door handles retracted. • the side windows and sliding sunroof are completely closed. • the outside mirrors are folded in. • the blower for the ventilation and heating is switched off. • the windscreen wiper switch is in position 0. - the key is at a minimum distance of 6 m away from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate or a door could open unintentionally. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. • for car washes with a conveyor system: neutral N is engaged. - The vehicle is locked from the inside. If, after the car wash, you remove the wax from the windscreen and wiper rubbers, this will prevent smearing and reduce wiper noise.

Switching car wash mode on or off

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary. • The vehicle is switched on. Multimedia system: Settings Vehicle Driving

ACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE

Select Car wash mode. Select Activate. If one of the settings cannot be selected, this is shown by a next to the respective setting. For an overview of the settings made when activating car wash mode ( → page 52).

DEACTIVATING CAR WASH MODE

Select Switch off. The car wash settings will be reset. The car wash mode is automatically deactivated as soon as a speed of 20 km/h is exceeded.

Notes on using a high-pressure cleaner


WARNING

Risk of an accident when using high-pressure cleaners with round-spray nozzles The water jet can cause externally invisible damage. Components damaged in this way may unexpectedly fail. Do not use a high-pressure cleaner with round-spray nozzles. Have damaged tyres or chassis parts replaced immediately.

TO AVOID DAMAGE TO YOUR VEHICLE, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN USING A HIGH-PRESSURE CLEANER:

- The key is at a minimum distance of 3 m from the vehicle. Otherwise, the tailgate or a door could open unintentionally. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key. - Maintain a distance of at least 30 cm to the vehicle. - Vehicles with decorative foils: Parts of your vehicle are covered with a decorative foil. Maintain a distance of at least 70 cm between the foil-covered parts of the vehicle and the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner. Move the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner around whilst cleaning. The water temperature of the high-pressure cleaner must not exceed 60°C. - Observe the information on the correct distance in the equipment manufacturer's operating instructions. - Do not direct the nozzle of the high-pressure cleaner directly at sensitive parts, e.g. tyres, gaps, electrical components, batteries, illuminants or louvres.

Washing the vehicle by hand

Observe the relevant legal requirements (e.g. in some countries, washing by hand is permitted only in specially designated wash bays). Use a mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). Wash the vehicle with lukewarm water using a soft car sponge. When doing so, do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight. Carefully hose the vehicle off with water and dry using a chamois. ① Observe the notes on the care of car parts ( → page 721).

Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care

To avoid damaging the paintwork and interfering with the driving assistance systems, please observe the following notes:

PAINT

- Insect remains: Soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. • Bird droppings: Soak with water and rinse off afterwards. - Tree resin, oils, fuels and greases: remove by rubbing gently with a cloth soaked in petroleum ether or lighter fluid. • Coolant and brake fluid: remove with a damp cloth and clean water. • Tar stains: use tar remover. - Wax: use silicone remover. - Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care \- Remove dirt immediately, where possible.

MATT FINISH

• Only use care products approved for Mercedes-Benz. - Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials. Only have film attached to the bumper at a qualified specialist workshop. • Do not polish the vehicle and light-alloy wheels. • Only use car washes that correspond to the latest engineering standards. • Do not use car wash programmes with a final hot wax treatment. - Do not use paint cleaners, buffing or polishing products, gloss preservers, e.g. wax.

IN THE EVENT OF PAINTWORK DAMAGE:

• Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. • Make sure the radar sensors function ( → page 391).

Notes on cleaning decorative films

Observe the "Notes on paintwork/matt finish paintwork care" ( → page 719). They also apply to matt decorative films. Observe the notes on cleaning decorative films to avoid damage.

CLEANING

- For cleaning, use plenty of water and a mild cleaning agent without additives or abrasive substances (e.g. a car shampoo approved for Mercedes-Benz). - Remove dirt as soon as possible. Avoid rubbing too hard in order not to damage the decorative film irreparably. - If there is dirt on the finish or if the decorative film is dull: use the paint cleaner recommended and approved for Mercedes-Benz. - Insect remains: soak with insect remover and rinse off the treated areas afterwards. • Bird droppings: soak with water and rinse off afterwards. • To prevent water stains, dry a film-wrapped vehicle with a soft, absorbent cloth after every car wash.

AVOIDING DAMAGE TO THE DECORATIVE FILM

• The service life and colouring of decorative films are impaired by: Sunlight - Temperature (e.g. hot air blower) - Weather conditions - Stone chippings and dirt - Chemical cleaning agents - Oily products - Do not use polish on matt decorative film. Polishing will have the effect of shining the film-wrapped surface. - Do not treat matt or structured decorative films with wax. Permanent stains may occur. Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affected by corrosion and damage caused by incorrect care cannot always be completely repaired. In this case, contact a qualified specialist workshop. You can obtain more information on care and cleaning agents from the manufacturer. In the case of film-wrapped surfaces, visual differences may occur between the surfaces that were not protected by a decorative film after a decorative film has been removed.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care i Have work or repairs to decorative films carried out at a qualified specialist workshop (e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre).

Notes on care of car parts


WARNING

Risk of entrapment if the windscreen wipers are switched on while the windscreen is being cleaned If the windscreen wipers are set in motion while you are cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades, you can be trapped by the wiper arm.  Always switch off the windscreen wipers and the drive system before cleaning the windscreen or wiper blades. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the notes on cleaning and care of the following car parts:

WHEELS AND RIMS

• Use water and acid-free alloy wheel cleaners. - Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. This could damage wheel bolts and brake components. - To avoid corrosion of the brake discs and pads, drive the vehicle for a few minutes after cleaning before parking it. The brake discs and pads will warm up and dry out.

WINDOWS


NOTE

Damage to electronic components due to excess fluids When cleaning the windows from the inside, fluids such as cleaning agents or water may run down and get behind trim parts of the vehicle interior and cause damage to electronic components.  Use cleaning agents as sparingly as possible.  Immediately absorb any excess fluids. - Clean the windows inside and outside with a damp cloth and with a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. - Do not use dry cloths or abrasive or solvent-based cleaning agents to clean the insides of windows. ① After changing the wiper blades or treating the vehicle with wax, clean the windscreen thoroughly with cleaning agents recommended for Mercedes-Benz. Failure to observe the application instructions may result in damage, smear marks or dazzling spots. Remove external fogging or dirt on the windscreen in front of the multifunction camera. Otherwise, driving systems and driving safety systems may be impaired or unavailable ( → page 391).

WIPER BLADES

\- Move the wiper arms into the replacement position (→ page 50).   EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care \- With the wiper arms folded out, clean the wiper blades with a damp cloth. Make sure that the wiper blades are coated. The coating may leave residue on a cloth. Do not rub the wiper blades excessively or clean them too often.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

- Clean the lenses with a wet sponge and mild cleaning agent (e.g. car shampoo). - Use only cleaning agents or cleaning cloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.

VEHICLE SOCKET (HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY)

• Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the vehicle socket. • Do not use high-pressure cleaners or cleaning agents such as soap.

SENSORS

- Clean the sensors in the front and rear bumpers with a soft cloth and car shampoo ( → page 391). - When using a high-pressure cleaner, maintain a minimum distance of 30 cm.

RUNNING BOARDS

• Use water and acid-free cleaning agents. - Do not clean the aluminium trim inserts of the running board with alkaline or acidic cleaning agents such as wheel cleaners. Do not use acidic alloy wheel cleaners to remove brake dust. The aluminium trim inserts could otherwise be damaged.

REVERSING CAMERA AND 360° CAMERA

\- Open the camera cover with the multimedia system (→ page 462). • Use clean water and a soft cloth to clean the camera lens. • Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

TRAILER HITCH

- Observe the notes on care in the trailer hitch manufacturer's operating instructions. • Do not clean the ball neck with a high-pressure cleaner or solvent. - Remove traces of rust on the ball (e.g. using a wire brush). - Remove dirt with a lint-free cloth. • After cleaning, lightly oil or grease the ball head. Before using trailers with anti-torsional coupling, observe the manufacturer's operating instructions.

Notes on care of the interior

WARNING

Risk of injury from plastic parts breaking off after the use of solvent-based care products Care and cleaning products containing solvents can cause surfaces in the cockpit to become porous. When the airbags are deployed, plastic parts may break away. Do not use any care or cleaning products containing solvents to clean the cockpit. EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care 

WARNING

Risk of injury or fatal injuries from bleached seat belts Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can severely weaken them. This can, for example, cause seat belts to tear or fail in an accident. ▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts. To avoid damage to the vehicle, observe the following notes on cleaning and care:

SEAT BELTS

• Clean with lukewarm soapy water. • Do not use chemical cleaning agents. - Do not dry by heating them to over 80°C or exposing them to direct sunlight.

DISPLAY

- Switch off the display and let it cool down. - Clean the surface carefully with a microfibre cloth and a suitable display care product (TFT-LCD). • Do not use any other agents.

HEAD-UP DISPLAY

• Clean with a soft, non-static, lint-free cloth. • Do not use cleaning agents.

PLASTIC TRIM

• Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. - For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. • Do not attach stickers, films or similar materials.  \- Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or sun cream to come into contact with the plastic trim.

REAL WOOD AND TRIM ELEMENTS

• Clean with a microfibre cloth. - Black piano-lacquer look: clean with a damp cloth and soapy water. - For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. • Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents, polishes or waxes.

ROOF LINING

• Clean with a brush or dry shampoo.

CARPET

• Use a carpet and textile cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz.

STEERING WHEEL MADE OF GENUINE LEATHER OR DINAMICA


NOTE

Damage caused by wrong cleaners Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents such as tar remover or wheel cleaner; neither should you use polishes or waxes. Otherwise you may damage the finish. - Clean with a damp cloth and 1% soapy water solution and then wipe with a dry cloth. - For heavy soiling: use a cleaning agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz. • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. • Do not allow the leather to become too damp.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Maintenance and care Cleaning and care • Do not use a microfibre cloth. ① Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change.

GENUINE LEATHER SEAT COVERS

- Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then clean the seat covers with a damp cotton cloth and wipe down with a dry cloth. Regularly clean the seat covers. - For heavy soiling: use a leather care agent recommended for Mercedes-Benz aftercare. • Leather care: use a leather care agent that has been recommended for Mercedes-Benz. • Do not use a microfibre cloth. • Do not allow the leather to become too damp. • Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products. ① Leather is a natural product. It exhibits natural surface properties such as differences in structure, marks caused by growth and injury or subtle colour differences. These surface properties are characteristics of leather and not material faults. Leather is also subject to a natural ageing process during which the surface properties change. Waves or wrinkling in the seat cover may occur due to the stress on the seat; this is caused by the natural leather material.  Regular cleaning and care of the leather reduces soiling, wear marks and ageing damage and thus significantly extends its life span. Clothing that can leave stains (e.g. jeans) may discolour the leather.

DINAMICA SEAT COVERS

• Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cloth to clean. • Do not use a microfibre cloth.

IMITATION LEATHER SEAT COVERS

- Vacuum up dirt such as crumbs or dust and then use a damp cotton cloth and a 1% soap solution to clean the entire seat cover. Do not spot clean. • Use cleaning and care products recommended for Mercedes-Benz. • Do not use a microfibre cloth. • Do not use oil-based cleaning and care products.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance 

< Breakdown assistance

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Emergency 726 Flat tyre 729 Battery (vehicle) 736 Tow-starting or towing away 739 Electrical fuses 747 EQE - Owner's Manual   Breakdown assistance Emergency 

Emergency

Removing the safety vest

 There is a compartment in the door racks of all doors for storing a safety vest. To remove: pull out the safety vest bag ① by the loop ②. Open the safety vest bag and pull out the safety vest. Replace: Fold up the safety vest, roll it up and place it in the safety vest bag ①. Slide the safety vest bag ① along the lower edge of the armrest into the safety vest compartment. Ensure the loop ② hangs out so that it is easy to reach. For a new safety vest, remove the packaging film before sliding it into the safety vest compartment. Otherwise, it may cause unintentional slipping out or make it difficult to remove. Observe the legal requirements in the individual countries.  1 Maximum number of washes 2 Maximum wash temperature Do not bleach Do not iron Do not tumble dry Do not dry clean Class 2 safety vest The requirements defined by the legal standard are only fulfilled if the safety vest is the correct size and is fully closed.

REPLACE THE SAFETY VEST IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• The reflective strips are damaged or dirty  726 EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Emergency • The maximum permissible number of washes is exceeded - The fluorescence property decreases, e.g. due to permanent exposure to sunlight.

DISPOSE OF THE SAFETY VEST IN AN ENVIRONMENTALLY FRIENDLY WAY:

• Please contact your local waste disposal company.

Warning triangle

REMOVING THE WARNING TRIANGLE  The warning triangle Ⓞ is located under the load compartment floor. Remove the warning triangle ①.

SETTING UP THE WARNING TRIANGLE

Fold the side reflectors upwards to form a triangle and attach at the top using the upper press-stud. ▶ Fold the legs down and out to the side.

First-aid kit

 The first-aid kit ⓘ is located in the net in the load compartment on the left when the vehicle is first delivered.

Removing the fire extinguisher

WARNING

Risk of accident due to an incorrectly secured fire extinguisher in the driver's footwell A fire extinguisher may impede pedal travel or block a depressed pedal. This jeopardises the operating and road safety of the vehicle. The fire extinguisher can be flung around and injure the driver or other vehicle occupants. Always store and secure the fire extinguisher in the bracket. Do not remove the fire extinguisher while driving.  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Emergency  Left-hand drive vehicle: pull tab 0 upwards. Right-hand drive vehicle: pull tab ① downwards. Remove fire extinguisher ②.   EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

< Flat tyre

Notes on flat tyres


WARNING

Risk of accident due to a flat tyre A flat tyre severely affects the driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking of the vehicle.

Tyres without run-flat characteristics:

Do not drive with a flat tyre. Change the flat tyre immediately with an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel. Alternatively, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyres with run-flat characteristics:

Observe the information and warning notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres).

IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT TYRE, THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE DEPENDING ON YOUR VEHICLE'S EQUIPMENT:

\- Vehicles with MOExtended tyres: it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. Make sure you observe the notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres) ( → page 730).  - Vehicles with a TIREFIT kit: you can seal the tyre so that it is possible to continue the journey for a short period of time. To do this, use the TIREFIT kit ( → page 731). - Vehicles with Mercedes me connect: you can make a call for breakdown assistance via the overhead control panel in the case of a breakdown ( → page 659). • All vehicles: change the wheel ( → page 764).   EQE - Owner's Manual > Breakdown assistance Flat tyre 

Notes on MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres)


WARNING

Risk of accident when driving in limp-home mode Driving in emergency mode impairs the handling characteristics of the vehicle. Do not exceed the permissible maximum speed of the MOExtended tyres. Avoid any abrupt steering and driving manoeuvres as well as driving over obstacles (kerbs, pot holes, off-road). This applies, in particular, to a loaded vehicle. ▶ Stop driving in the emergency mode if you notice: - banging noise - vehicle vibration • smoke which smells like rubber • continuous ESP ^® intervention • cracks in the tyre sidewalls After driving in emergency mode, have the rims checked by a qualified specialist workshop with regard to their further use. The defective tyre must be replaced in every case. With MOExtended tyres (run-flat tyres), you can continue to drive your vehicle even if there is a total loss of pressure in one or more tyres. However, the tyre affected must not show any clearly visible damage. You can recognise MOExtended tyres by the MOExtended marking which appears on the side wall of the tyre. Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: MOExtended tyres may only be used in conjunction with an activated tyre pressure monitoring system.

IF A PRESSURE LOSS WARNING MESSAGE APPEARS IN THE DRIVER'S DISPLAY, PROCEED AS FOLLOWS:

- Check the tyre for damage. • If driving on, observe the following notes.

DRIVING DISTANCE POSSIBLE IN EMERGENCY MODE AFTER THE PRESSURE LOSS WARNING:

Load condition Driving distance possible in emergency mode Partially laden 80 km Fully laden 30 km The driving distance possible in emergency mode may vary depending on the driving style. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h. If a tyre has gone flat and cannot be replaced with an MOExtended tyre, you can use a standard tyre as a temporary measure.

TREFIT kit storage location

The TREFIT kit is located under the load compartment floor.  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Flat tyre  ① Tyre inflation compressor 2 Tyre sealant bottle Depending on the model, the TREFIT kit may also be located in other places under the load compartment floor.

YOU CAN FIND INFORMATION ON THE POWER CATEGORY (LK) AND/OR ELECTRICAL DATA ON THE BACK OF THE TYRE INFLATION COMPRESSOR:

LK3 - 12 V/20 A, 240 W, 1 kg

AT A DISTANCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1 M TO THE TYRE INFLATION COMPRESSOR AND APPROXIMATELY 1.6 M ABOVE THE GROUND, THE FOLLOWING SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS APPLY:

• Emission sound pressure level L_PA 84 dB(A) • Sound power level L_WA 92 dB(A) The tyre inflation compressor is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. 

Using the TREFIT kit

Requirements:

- Tyre sealant bottle and tyre inflator compressor are ready for use ( → page 80). • TREFIT sticker is present. Gloves are present. You can use TIREFIT tyre sealant to seal perforation damage of up to 4 mm, particularly those in the tyre contact surface. You can use TIREFIT in outside temperatures down to -20 °C.

WARNING

Risk of accident when using tyre sealant The tyre sealant may be unable to seal the tyre properly, especially in the following cases: - there are large cuts or punctures in the tyre (larger than damage previously mentioned) • the wheel rims have been damaged • after journeys with very low tyre pressure or with flat tyres Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Flat tyre  

WARNING

Risk of injury and poisoning from tyre sealant Tyre sealant is hazardous to health and causes irritation. Do not allow it to come into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing, and do not swallow it. Do not inhale any vapours. Keep the tyre sealant away from children. Observe the following if you come into contact with the tyre sealant: Rinse off the tyre sealant from your skin using water immediately. If tyre sealant gets into your eyes, thoroughly rinse them using clean water immediately. If tyre sealant has been swallowed, thoroughly rinse out your mouth immediately and drink plenty of water. Do not induce vomiting and seek medical attention immediately. Change out of clothing which has come into contact with tyre sealant immediately. If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical attention immediately. 

NOTE

Overheating due to the tyre inflation compressor running too long Do not run the tyre inflation compressor for longer than ten minutes without interruption. Comply with the manufacturer's safety notes on the sticker on the tyre inflation compressor. Have the tyre sealant bottle replaced in a qualified specialist workshop every five years. Do not remove any foreign objects which have entered the tyre.  Affix part ① of the TIREFIT sticker to the instrument cluster within the driver's field of vision. Affix part ② of the TIREFIT sticker near the valve on the wheel with the defective tyre.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Breakdown assistance Flat tyre Pull plug ④ with the cable and hose ⑤ out of the tyre inflation compressor housing. Push the plug of hose ⑤ into flange ⑥ of tyre sealant bottle ① until the plug engages. Place tyre sealant bottle ① head downwards into recess ② of the tyre inflation compressor.  Remove the valve cap from valve ⑦ on the faulty tyre. Screw filling hose ⑧ onto valve ⑦.  Insert plug Ⓞ into a 12-V-socket in your vehicle. Switch on the vehicle. Switch on the tyre inflation compressor using On/Off switch ①. The tyre is inflated. First, tyre sealant is pumped into the tyre. The pressure may briefly rise to approximately 500 kPa (5.0 bar/73 psi).

Do not switch off the tyre inflation compressor during this phase!

Let the tyre inflation compressor run for a maximum of ten minutes. The tyre should then have attained a tyre pressure of at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi). If tyre sealant leaks out, make sure you clean the affected area as quickly as possible. It is preferable to use clean water. If you get tyre sealant on your clothing, have it cleaned as soon as possible with perchloroethylene.

IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI) HAS NOT BEEN ATTAINED:

▶ Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. Please note that tyre sealant may leak out when unscrewing the filling hose. Drive forwards or in reverse very slowly for approximately 10 m. Pump up the tyre again. After a maximum of ten minutes the tyre pressure must be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Flat tyre 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained If the specified tyre pressure is not attained after the specified time, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

IF, AFTER TEN MINUTES, A TYRE PRESSURE OF 200 KPA (2.0 BAR/29 PSI) HAS BEEN ATTAINED:

Switch off the tyre inflation compressor. Unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the defective tyre. 

WARNING

Risk of accident from driving with sealed tyres A tyre temporarily sealed with tyre sealant impairs the handling characteristics and is not suitable for higher speeds. Adapt your driving style accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed the maximum speed limit with a tyre that has been repaired using tyre sealant. Observe the maximum permissible speed of 80 km/h for a tyre sealed with tyre sealant. 

NOTE

Staining from leaking tyre sealant After use, excess tyre sealant may leak out from the filling hose. Therefore, place the filling hose in the plastic bag that contained the TREFIT kit. 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental pollution caused by environmentally irresponsible disposal Tyre sealant contains pollutants. Have the tyre sealant bottle disposed of professionally, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Stow the tyre sealant bottle and the tyre inflation compressor. Pull away immediately. Stop driving after approximately ten minutes and check the tyre pressure using the tyre inflation compressor. The tyre pressure must now be at least 130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Flat tyre

A

WARNING

Risk of accident due to the specified tyre pressure not being attained If the specified tyre pressure is not reached, the tyre is too badly damaged. The tyre sealant cannot repair the tyre in this instance. The braking and driving characteristics may be greatly impaired. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Countries that have Mercedes-Benz Service24h: you will find a sticker with the telephone number, e.g. on the B-pillar on the driver's side. To increase the tyre pressure: switch on the tyre inflation compressor.  To reduce the tyre pressure: press pressure release button ① next to manometer ②. When the tyre pressure is correct, unscrew the filling hose from the valve of the sealed tyre. Screw the valve cap onto the valve of the sealed tyre. ▶ Pull the tyre sealant bottle out of the tyre inflation compressor. The filling hose stays on the tyre sealant bottle. Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop and have the tyre, tyre sealant bottle and filling hose replaced there.   EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle)

Battery (vehicle)

Notes on the 12 V battery


WARNING

Risk of explosion due to electrostatic charge Electrostatic charge can ignite the highly explosive gas mixture in the battery. To discharge any electrostatic charge that may have built up, touch the metal vehicle body before handling the battery. The highly flammable gas mixture is created while the battery is charging and during starting assistance. For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use batteries which have been tested and approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.  

WARNING

Danger of chemical burns from the battery acid Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not lean over the battery. Do not inhale battery gases. Keep children away from the battery. Immediately rinse battery acid off thoroughly with plenty of clean water and seek medical attention immediately. 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Environmental damage due to improper disposal of batteries ☒ Batteries contain pollutants. It is illegal to dispose of them with the household rubbish.  Dispose of batteries in an environmentally responsible manner. Take discharged batteries to a qualified specialist workshop or to a collection point for used batteries.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) If you have to disconnect the 12 V battery, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Comply with safety notes and take protective measures when handling batteries. Risk of explosion. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual. If you do not want to use the vehicle for a long period of time, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Notes on the high-voltage battery

▲ DANGER Risk of fire and explosion from excessive internal pressure of the high-voltage battery In the event of a vehicle fire, flammable gas can escape and ignite. Stop the charging process immediately in case of unusual odours, smoke or burn marks. Leave the danger zone immediately. Secure the danger zone at a sufficient distance. ▶ Call the fire service. Observe the notes on charging the high-voltage battery ( → page 358). Risk of explosion. Fire, naked flames and smoking are prohibited when handling the battery. Avoid creating sparks. Electrolyte or battery acid is corrosive. Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Wear suitable protective clothing, in particular gloves, an apron and a face mask. Immediately rinse electrolyte or acid splashes off with clean water. Consult a doctor immediately. Wear safety glasses. Keep children away. Observe this Owner's Manual.    EQE - Owner's Manual > Breakdown assistance Battery (vehicle) 

Starting assistance and charging the 12 V battery

Only have starting assistance provided by a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only have the battery charged at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Replacing the 12 V battery

Only have the battery replaced at a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

< Tow-starting or towing away

Overview of the permitted towing methods


NOTE

Damage from automatic braking

IF ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS IS ACTIVATED, THE VEHICLE WILL BRAKE AUTOMATICALLY IN CERTAIN SITUATIONS:

• Active Brake Assist • Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC - HOLD function • Active Parking Assist To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate these systems in the following or similar situations: When towing. In a car wash. Mercedes-Benz recommends transporting your vehicle in the case of a break-down, rather than towing it away. For towing with both axles on the ground, use a tow rope or tow rod. Do not use tow bar systems. If you notice that the vehicle has lost coolant, do not have it towed away. Have the vehicle transported instead.  

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to towing away incorrectly  Observe the instructions and notes on towing away.

VEHICLES WITH REAR WHEEL DRIVE

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only forwards with the driver in the cockpit Front axle raised No Rear axle raised Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h

4MATIC VEHICLES

Permitted towing methods

Both axles on the ground Yes, for a maximum of 50 km at 50 km/h, only forwards with the driver in the cockpit Front axle raised No Rear axle raised No   EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

Towing the vehicle with both axles on the ground

Observe the notes on the permitted towing methods(→ page 739). Make sure that the 12-V-battery is connected and charged

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING POINTS WHEN THE 12-V-BATTERY IS DISCONNECTED OR DISCHARGED

• The drive system cannot be started. • The electric parking brake cannot be released or applied. • The selector lever cannot be put into position N or P.

ONLY ONE TRANSPORT IS PERMITTED WHEN AT LEAST ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONDITIONS OCCUR:

• If the selector lever cannot be put into position [N]. • If the 12-V-battery is disconnected or discharged. • If the display in the instrument cluster is not working. - If the [icon] Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual message is displayed. - If the [ ] Top up coolant See Owner's Manual message is displayed. • If the Stop Switch off the vehicle message is displayed. In such cases, transport the vehicle ( → page 742). Damage due to towing away at excessively high speeds or over long distances The drivetrain could be damaged when towing at excessively high speeds or over long distances. A towing speed of 50 km/h must not be exceeded. ▶ A towing distance of 50 km must not be exceeded.

NOTE

WARNING

Risk of accident when towing a vehicle which is too heavy

IF THE VEHICLE TO BE TOW-STARTED OR TOWED AWAY IS HEAVIER THAN THE PERMISSIBLE GROSS MASS OF YOUR VEHICLE, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS CAN OCCUR:

• the towing eye may become detached. • the vehicle/trailer combination may swerve or overturn. Before tow-starting or towing away, check if the vehicle to be tow-started or towed away exceeds the permissible gross mass. If a vehicle has to be tow-started or towed away, its permissible gross mass must not exceed the permissible gross mass of the towing vehicle. Information on the permissible gross mass of the vehicle can be found on the vehicle identification plate ( → page 830).  EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away

TOWING AWAY THE VEHICLE

Fit the towing eye ( → page 745). Fasten the towing device. 

NOTE

Damage due to incorrect connection of the tow bar ▶ Only connect the tow rope or tow bar to the towing eyes. Deactivate the automatic locking mechanism ( → page 210). Do not activate the HOLD function. Deactivate tow-away protection ( → page 235). Deactivate Active Brake Assist ( → page 433). Put the selector lever into position N. Release the electric parking brake. Remain in the cockpit during towing and observe the display messages. Do not switch off the vehicle while it is being towed. Do not open the driver's door or front-passenger door, because otherwise the selector lever automatically switches to position P. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to limited safety-related functions during the towing process

SAFETY-RELATED FUNCTIONS ARE LIMITED OR NO LONGER AVAILABLE IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• the vehicle is switched off. • the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. - the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. In such cases, do not tow the vehicle. ▶ Transport the vehicle ( → page 742). 

NOTE

Damage to the drive system due to incorrect towing

THE VEHICLE MAY NOT BE TOWED IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• the vehicle is switched off. • the brake system or power steering system is malfunctioning. - the energy supply or the on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. In such cases, do not tow the vehicle.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away  

NOTE

Damage due to excessive tractive power If you pull away sharply, the tractive power may be too high and the vehicles could be damaged. ▶ Pull away slowly and smoothly.

Loading the vehicle for transport

Requirements

• The vehicle is stationary. • The vehicle is switched off. - The driver's display is in the initial state with no menus open (→ page 499). Transport is also possible with a warning message visible. • The 12-V-battery is charged. If necessary, set the system language ( → page 568). Observe the notes on towing away ( → page 81). Connect the towing device to the towing eye in order to load the vehicle. ① Vehicles with a trailer hitch: you can also attach the tow bar to the trailer hitch. ▶ Switch on the power supply ( → page 329). Put the selector lever into position N. The selector lever may be locked in position in the event of electrical malfunctions. To shift to , provide the on-board electrical system with power ( → page 78).

Vehicles with AIRMATIC


NOTE

Possible damage to the vehicle when loading or unloading When loading or unloading, the vehicle must be raised to transport level. If the transport settings are not shown or the Vehicle not ready for loading message is displayed, the vehicle may not be loaded or unloaded. If required, raise the vehicle to transport level again. A vehicle that cannot be raised to transport level may not be loaded or unloaded using a ramp. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.    EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away  

WARNING

Risk of accident due to activated transport level If the vehicle is raised to transport level, driving and driving safety systems have only limited availability and the view from the vehicle is restricted. Driving safety is severely restricted and there is a risk of an accident! Do not use transport level in normal road operation. Only activate and use transport level to load the vehicle and when not on public roads. Ensure that no persons or obstacles are located in the area surrounding the vehicle.

RAISING THE VEHICLE TO TRANSPORT LEVEL

Press the ↩ button for at least five seconds. Immediately press and hold the OK button for at least one second. The For transport level, switch vehicle on message is displayed. Select vehicle transport. The noise certification mode is intended exclusively for the technical test organisation. It restricts the drive power of the vehicle and must not be used in customer operation. Switch on the vehicle(→ page 331). The transport settings are displayed. Swipe downward to select Transport level and press OK. The vehicle is raised and the Vehicle rising... Do not drive on ramp message is displayed for 5 seconds. The raising process can last up to 60 seconds and can be cancelled with the → button. When raising, do not switch off the vehicle. While the vehicle is being raised, you can manoeuvre at a maximum speed of 40 km/h.  Before loading the vehicle, wait until the transport level has been reached and the Transport level status is shown. If the vehicle is raised to transport level, the transport settings will continue to be shown even after a restart. Operation of the driver's display is restricted.

WHEN THE VEHICLE IS AT TRANSPORT LEVEL, IT IS LOWERED AGAIN IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• When driving faster than 40 km/h. • The 12-V-battery is discharged. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level.   EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away 

TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE


WARNING

Risk of accident when transporting vehicles When transporting vehicles, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to sway and start to skid. Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps. 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. Load the vehicle onto the transporter. Put the selector lever into position P. Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away. ▶ Switch off the vehicle and the power supply. Only secure the vehicle by the wheels.

VEHICLES WITH ADAPTIVE DAMPING ADJUSTMENT


WARNING

Risk of an accident when transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment When transporting vehicles with adaptive damping adjustment, the vehicle/trailer combination may begin to rock and start to skid. Load the vehicle correctly onto the transporter. Secure the vehicle on all four wheels with suitable tensioning straps. 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle from securing it incorrectly After loading, the vehicle must be secured on all four wheels. Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged. A minimum distance of 20 cm upwards and 10 cm downwards must be kept to the transport platform. ▶ Secure the vehicle on all four wheels after loading.

UNLOADING THE VEHICLE

Vehicles with AIRMATIC

Make sure that the vehicle is raised to transport level before unloading ( → page 448).

LOWERING THE VEHICLE AFTER UNLOADING

Switch on the power supply.   EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away Switch on the vehicle. In Transport Settings, swipe up to select the Standard level and press OK. The vehicle is adjusted to the height of the last active level and the Lowering vehicle message is displayed. After the vehicle has been lowered, press the ↩ button for at least two seconds. Transport Settings closes. Towing eye storage location  Towing eye ⓘ is located under the load compartment floor.  Fitting and removing the towing eye  Press the cover ① inwards and remove it. Screw in the towing eye clockwise as far as it will go and tighten. Vehicles with a trailer hitch: vehicles with a trailer hitch do not have a rear bracket for the towing eye. Fasten the tow bar to the trailer hitch. After removing the towing eye, engage the cover ① in the bumper. EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Tow-starting or towing away 

NOTE

Damage to the vehicle due to incorrect use of the towing eye or trailer hitch When a towing eye or trailer hitch is used to recover a vehicle, the vehicle may be damaged in the process. Only use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow away or tow start the vehicle. Do not use the towing eye or trailer hitch to tow the vehicle during recovery.

Tow-starting the vehicle

If the drive system does not start, have the vehicle transported to a qualified specialist workshop, e.g. a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. The drive system cannot be started by tow-starting the vehicle. Do not make any attempts to tow-start the vehicle.   EQE - Owner's Manual Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses

Electrical fuses

Notes on electrical fuses


WARNING

Risk of accident and injury due to overloaded lines If you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or if you replace it with a fuse with a higher amperage, the electric line could be overloaded. This could result in a fire. Always replace faulty fuses with specified new fuses containing the correct amperage. 

NOTE

Damage due to incorrect fuses Using incorrect fuses can result in damage to electrical components or systems or their functions being considerably restricted. Use only fuses approved for Mercedes-Benz with the respective specified fuse rating. Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the same rating, which you can recognise by the colour and the label. The fuse ratings and further information to be observed can be found in the fuse assignment diagram.  Fuse assignment diagram: on the fuse box in the rear passenger compartment ( → page 748). 

NOTE

Damage or malfunctions caused by moisture Moisture may cause damage to the electrical system or cause it to malfunction. When the fuse box is open, make sure that no moisture can enter the fuse box. When closing the fuse box, make sure that the seal of the lid is positioned correctly on the fuse box. If the newly inserted fuse also blows, have the cause traced and rectified at a qualified specialist workshop.

ENSURE THE FOLLOWING BEFORE REPLACING A FUSE:

• The vehicle is secured against rolling away. • All electrical consumers are switched off. • The vehicle is switched off.

THE ELECTRICAL FUSES ARE LOCATED IN VARIOUS FUSE BOXES:

• Fuse box on the driver's side of the cockpit ( → page 748)   EQE - Owner's Manual > Breakdown assistance Electrical fuses • Fuse box in the front passenger footwell ( → page 748) • Fuse box in the rear passenger compartment ( → page 748)

Opening and closing the fuse box in the cockpit

• Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( → page 78). The fuse box is on the driver's side on the side of the cockpit under a cover. Mercedes-Benz recommends you have the fuse box opened at a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the front passenger footwell

Requirements

• Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( → page 78). Right-hand drive vehicles: the fuse box is on the left side.   To open the fuse box: remove cover ①. To close the fuse box: reinsert cover 1.

Opening and closing the fuse box in the rear

Requirements:

• Observe the notes on electrical fuses ( → page 78). The fuse box is located in the centre of the vehicle under the seat. To open and close it, consult a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres 

< Wheels and tyres

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres 751 Notes on snow chains 752 Activating or deactivating snow chain mode Tyre pressure 755 Wheel change 759 Emergency spare wheel 772 EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics 

Notes on noise or unusual handling characteristics

Make sure there are no vibrations, noises or unusual handling characteristics when the vehicle is in motion. This may indicate that the wheels or tyres are damaged. Hidden tyre damage could also be causing the unusual handling characteristics. If you suspect that a tyre is defective, reduce your speed immediately and have the tyres and wheels checked at a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres 

Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres


WARNING

Risk of injury due to damaged tyres Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure loss. Check the tyres regularly for signs of damage and replace any damaged tyres immediately. 

WARNING

Risk of aquaplaning due to insufficient tyre tread Insufficient tyre tread will result in reduced tyre grip. The risk of aquaplaning is increased on wet roads, especially when the speed of the vehicle is not adapted to suit the conditions. Thus, you should regularly check the tread depth and the condition of the tread across the entire width of all tyres.

MINIMUM TREAD DEPTH FOR:

• Summer tyres: 3 mm • M+S tyres: 4 mm For safety reasons, replace the tyres before the legally-prescribed limit for the minimum tread depth is reached.

CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING CHECKS ON ALL WHEELS REGULARLY, AT LEAST ONCE A MONTH OR AS REQUIRED, FOR EXAMPLE, PRIOR TO A LONG JOURNEY OR DRIVING OFF-ROAD:

• Check the tyre pressure ( → page 755). • Visually inspect wheels and tyres for damage. - Check the valve caps. - Visual check of the tyre tread depth and the tyre contact surface across the entire width. The minimum tread depth for summer tyres is 3 mm and for winter tyres 4 mm. EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Notes on snow chains

Notes on snow chains


WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrectly fitted snow chains If you have fitted snow chains to the front wheels, they may drag against the vehicle body or chassis components. ▶ Never fit snow chains to the front wheels. ▶ Only fit snow chains on the rear wheels in pairs. 

NOTE

Damage to components of the vehicle body or chassis due to fitted snow chains If you fit snow chains to the front wheels of 4MATIC vehicles, you may damage components of the vehicle body or chassis. ▶ Only fit snow chains to the rear wheels of 4MATIC vehicles. 

NOTE

Damage to wheel trims through fitted snow chains If you fit snow chains on aluminium wheels you could damage the wheel trims. Remove the wheel trims from the aluminium wheels before fitting snow chains.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES WHEN USING SNOW CHAINS:

- Snow chains are only permissible for certain wheel/tyre combinations. You can obtain information about this from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. - For safety reasons, only use snow chains that have been specifically approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or snow chains with the same quality standard. • Comply with the installation instructions of the snow chain manufacturer. • If snow chains are fitted, the maximum permissible speed is 50 km/h. • Vehicles with Active Parking Assist: do not use Active Parking Assist when snow chains are fitted. - Vehicles with AIRMATIC: if snow chains are fitted, only drive at raised vehicle level (→ page 448). - Vehicles with rear axle steering: if snow chains are fitted, only drive with snow chain mode active (→ page 754).  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Notes on snow chains You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( → page 410). You can deactivate ESP ^® to pull away (→ page 399). This allows the wheels to spin, achieving an increased driving force.    EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Activating or deactivating snow chain mode 

- Activating or deactivating snow chain mode

Multimedia system:  ▶ Activate or deactivate Snow chain mode. When the function is active, the vehicle behaves as if snow chains were installed. For example, the maximum steering movement of the rear wheels is limited and the turning circle is thus increased. Additionally, parts of the driving and driving safety systems are not available when snow chain mode is active.   EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Type pressure

< Tyre pressure

Notes on tyre pressure


WARNING

Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure

UNDERINFLATED OR OVERINFLATED TYRES POSE IN PARTICULAR THE FOLLOWING RISKS:

• The tyres can burst. • The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. - The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. Comply with the recommended tyre pressure and check the tyre pressure of all tyres, including the spare wheel, regularly: • monthly • when the load changes • before embarking on a longer journey • if operating conditions change, e.g. off-road driving Adjust the tyre pressure, if necessary. • Cause increased tyre damage. - Adversely affect driving characteristics and thus driving safety, e.g. due to aquaplaning. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to repeated pressure drop in the tyres The wheels, valves or tyres could be damaged. Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the tyres bursting. Examine the tyres for foreign objects. ▶ Check whether the tyre has a puncture or the valve has a leak. If you are unable to rectify the damage, contact a qualified specialist workshop. Information on the recommended tyre pressure for the vehicle's factory-fitted tyres can be found on the tyre pressure table on the B-pillar on the drivers side ( → page 756). Use a suitable pressure gauge to check the tyre pressure. The outer appearance of a tyre does not permit any reliable conclusion about the tyre pressure.

TYRE PRESSURE WHICH IS TOO HIGH OR TOO LOW CAN:

• Shorten the service life of the tyres.   EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Type pressure 

ONLY CORRECT TYRE PRESSURES WHEN THE TYRES ARE COLD. CONDITIONS FOR COLD TYRES:

- The vehicle has been parked with the tyres out of direct sunlight for at least three hours. • The vehicle has travelled less than 1.6 km. The vehicle's tyres heat up when driving. As the temperature of the tyres increases, so too does the tyre pressure. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: you can also see the tyre pressure in the driver's display ( → page 757).

NOTES ON TRAILER OPERATION

Always inflate the rear axle tyres to the recommended tyre pressures on the tyre pressure table for increased load.

Tyre pressure table

The tyre pressure table is on the B-pillar on the driver's side.  The tyre pressure table shows the recommended tyre pressure for all tyres approved for this vehicle. The recommended tyre pressures apply for cold tyres under various operating conditions, i.e. loading and/or speed of the vehicle. If one or more tyre sizes precede a tyre pressure, the tyre pressure information following is only valid for those tyre sizes. If the preceding tyre sizes are complemented by the [E1] symbol, the tyre pressure information following shows alternative tyre pressures. These tyre pressures may improve your vehicle's ride comfort. Energy consumption may then increase slightly. The load conditions "partially laden" and "fully laden" are defined in the table for different numbers of passengers and amounts of luggage. The actual number of seats may differ from this.

BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED SUBJECTS:

• Notes on tyre pressure ( → page 755)

Tyre pressure monitoring system

FUNCTION OF THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

The system checks the tyre pressure and the tyre temperature of the tyres fitted to the vehicle by means of a tyre pressure sensor. The tyre pressure and the tyre temperature appear in the driver's display. If there is a substantial pressure loss or if the tyre temperature is excessive, you will be warned with display messages (→ page 915) or the ⏻ warning lamp in the driver's display (→ page 934).  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Type pressure The tyre pressure monitoring system is only an aid. It is the driver's responsibility to set the tyre pressure to the recommended cold tyre pressure suitable for the operating situation. In most cases, the tyre pressure monitoring system will automatically update the new reference values after you have changed the tyre pressure. You can, however, also update the reference values by restarting the tyre pressure monitoring system manually ( → page 757).

SYSTEM LIMITS

THE SYSTEM MAY BE IMPAIRED OR MAY NOT FUNCTION PARTICULARLY IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• incorrect reference values were taught in - sudden pressure loss caused by a foreign object penetrating the tyre, for example • there is a malfunction caused by another radio signal source

CHECKING THE TYRE PRESSURE WITH THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

Requirements

• The vehicle is switched on. Driver's display:  Press OK to confirm.

ONE OF THE FOLLOWING DISPLAYS APPEARS:

• Current tyre pressure of each wheel:  - Tyre pressures will be displayed after a few minutes of driving: current values are not yet known to the system. The pressure/temperature values of each tyre are displayed as soon as they are known to the system. - Tyre pressure monitor active: the teach-in process of the system is not yet complete. The tyre pressures are already being monitored. Compare the current tyre pressure with the recommended tyre pressure for the current operating condition ( → page 756). Additionally, observe the notes on cold tyres ( → page 755). The values displayed in the driver's display may deviate from those of the tyre pressure gauge as they refer to sea level. At high elevations, the tyre pressure values indicated by a tyre pressure gauge are higher than those shown in the driver's display.

RESTARTING THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

Requirements

\- The recommended tyre pressure is correctly set for the respective operating status on each of the four wheels (→ page 755).  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Type pressure 

RESTART THE TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

• The tyre pressure has changed. • The wheels or tyres have been changed or newly fitted. Driver's display: Service Select Tyre pressure and confirm with OK. Swipe downwards on Touch Control on the steering wheel. The Use current tyre pressures as new reference values? message is shown in the driver's display. Select Yes and confirm the restart with OK. The Tyre pressure monitor restarted message is shown in the driver's display. Current warning messages are deleted and the yellow ⏻ warning lamp goes out. After you have been driving for a few minutes, the system checks whether the current tyre pressures are within the specified range. The current tyre pressures are then accepted as reference values and monitored. If the tyre pressure levels are not within the specified range, the Please correct tyre pressure message appears.  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change

< Wheel change

Notes on selecting, fitting and replacing tyres 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions If wheels and tyres of the wrong size are fitted, the service brakes or components in the brake system and in the wheel suspension may be damaged. Always replace wheels and tyres with those that fulfil the specifications of the original part.

FOR WHEELS, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:

- Designation Type

FOR TYRES, PAY ATTENTION TO THE FOLLOWING:

- Designation Manufacturer Type 

WARNING

Risk of injury through exceeding the specified tyre load-bearing capacity or the permissible speed rating Exceeding the load-bearing capacity of the tyres can lead to tyre damage and could cause the tyres to explode. Therefore, only use tyre types and sizes approved for your vehicle model. Observe the tyre load-bearing capacity rating and speed rating required for your vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change 

NOTE

Vehicle and tyre damage caused by non-approved tyre types and sizes For safety reasons, only use tyres, wheels and accessories which have been specially approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.

THESE TYRES ARE SPECIALLY ADAPTED TO THE ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS, SUCH AS ABS, ESP ^® AND 4MATIC, AND MARKED AS FOLLOWS:

• MO = Mercedes-Benz Original • MOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended (run-flat tyres only for certain wheels) • MO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (only certain AMG tyres) Otherwise, certain properties, such as handling characteristics, vehicle noise emissions, consumption, etc. could be adversely affected. Furthermore, other tyre sizes could result in the tyres rubbing against the body and axle components when loaded. This could result in damage to the tyre or the vehicle. Only use tyres, wheels and accessories that have been checked and recommended by Mercedes-Benz.  

NOTE

Risk to driving safety from retreaded tyres Retreaded tyres are neither tested nor recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous damage cannot always be detected on retreaded tyres. For this reason driving safety cannot be guaranteed. Do not use used tyres if you have no information about their previous usage. 

NOTE

Possible wheel and tyre damage when driving over obstacles Large wheels have a smaller section width. As the section width decreases, the risk of wheels and tyres being damaged when driving over obstacles increases. Avoid obstacles or drive especially carefully. Reduce your speed when driving over kerbs, speed bumps, manhole covers and potholes. Avoid particularly high kerbs. EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change 

NOTE

Possible wheel and tyre damage when parking on kerbs or in pot-holes Parking on kerbs or in potholes can damage the wheels and tyres. ▶ Only park on level surfaces if possible. Avoid kerbs and potholes when parking.

NOTE

Damage to electronic component parts due to the use of tyre-fitting tools Vehicles with tyre pressure monitoring system: there are electronic component parts in the wheel. If tyre-fitting tools are positioned in the area of the valve, the electronic components could be damaged. ▶ Tyre-fitting tools should not be applied in the area of the valve. ▶ Always have tyres changed at a qualified specialist workshop.

NOTE

Damage to summer tyres at low ambient temperatures At low ambient temperatures, tears could form when driving with summer tyres, causing permanent damage to the tyre. At temperatures below 7 °C use M+S tyres. Accessory parts which are not approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or which are not used correctly, can impair the operating safety.

BEFORE PURCHASING AND USING NON-APPROVED ACCESSORIES, VISIT A QUALIFIED SPECIALIST WORKSHOP AND ENQUIRE ABOUT:

Suitability • Legal stipulations • Factory recommendations

WARNING

Risk of accident with high performance tyres The special tyre tread in combination with the optimised tyre compound means that the risk of skidding and hydroplaning on wet roads is increased. In addition, the tyre grip is greatly reduced at a low outside temperature and tyre running temperature. Switch on the ESP ^® and adapt your driving style accordingly. Use M+S tyres at outside temperatures of less than 10 °C. ▶ Only use the tyres for their intended purpose.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING WHEN SELECTING, FITTING AND REPLACING TYRES:

\- Country-specific requirements for tyre approval that define a specific tyre type for your vehicle.  • Furthermore, the use of certain tyre types in certain regions and areas of operation can be highly beneficial. - Only use tyres and wheels of the same type (summer tyres, winter tyres, MOExtended tyres) and the same make. • Only fit wheels of the same size on one axle (left and right). It is only permissible to fit a different wheel size in the event of a flat tyre in order to drive to the specialist workshop. - Do not make any modifications to the brake system, the wheels or the tyres. The use of shims or brake dust shields is not permitted and may invalidate the vehicle's general operating permit. • Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: all fitted wheels must be equipped with functioning sensors for the tyre pressure monitoring system. - At temperatures below 7 °C use winter tyres or all-season tyres marked M+S for all wheels. Winter tyres provide the best possible grip in wintry road conditions. • For M+S tyres, only use tyres with the same tread. - Observe the maximum permissible speed for the M+S tyres fitted. If the tyre's maximum speed is below that of the vehicle, this must be indicated by an appropriate label in the driver's field of vision. • Run in new tyres at moderate speeds for the first 100 km. - Replace the tyres after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. - When replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics: vehicles with MOExtended tyres are not equipped with a TREFIT kit at the factory. Equip the vehicle with a TREFIT kit after replacing with tyres that do not feature run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tyres.  You can permanently limit the maximum speed for driving with winter tyres ( → page 410). For more information on wheels and tyres, contact a qualified specialist workshop.

VEHICLES WITH THE AMG DYNAMIC PLUS PACKAGE

WARNING Risk of accident caused by non-approved tyre types If you use tyre types that have not been adapted to changes made to the factory speed limit, this can have the following consequences: - The tyres are not suitable for high speeds and the corresponding driving dynamics. - The tyres wear unevenly and affect the roadworthiness of the vehicle. • ABS, ESP® and cruise control operation are restricted. This can jeopardise road safety. Only use tyre types that have been approved for the maximum permissible speed set and the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change 

Notes on interchanging wheels


WARNING

Risk of injury through different wheel sizes Interchanging the front and rear wheels can severely impair the driving characteristics. The disk brakes or wheel suspension components may also be damaged. Only interchange the front and rear wheels if the wheels and tyres have the same dimensions. Interchanging the front and rear wheels if the wheels or tyres have different dimensions can render the general operating permit invalid. Observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" (→ page 759)

THE WEAR PATTERNS ON THE FRONT AND REAR WHEELS DIFFER:

• front wheels wear more on the tyre shoulder • rear wheels wear more in the centre of the tyre Do not drive with tyres that have too little tread depth. This significantly reduces traction on wet roads (aquaplaning). On vehicles with the same front and rear wheel size, you can interchange the wheels every 5,000 to 10,000 km, depending on the wear. Ensure the direction of rotation is maintained for the wheels.

Notes on storing wheels

WHEN STORING WHEELS, OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES:

• After removing wheels, store them in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. - Protect the tyres from contact with oil, grease or fuel.

Overview of the tyre-change tool kit

With the exception of some country-specific variants, vehicles are not equipped with a tyre-change tool kit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out which wheel change tools are necessary and approved for changing the wheel on your vehicle.

YOU REQUIRE THE FOLLOWING TOOLS, FOREEXAMPLE, TO CHANGE A WHEEL:

Jack - Chock - Wheel wrench Centring pin ① The jack weighs approximately 3.4 kg. The maximum load capacity of the jack can be found on the sticker affixed to the jack. The jack is maintenance-free. If there is a malfunction, please contact a qualified specialist workshop. The tyre-change tool kit is located in tool bag ① in the load compartment.   EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change When stowing the tool bag, make sure that it is adequately secured. 

THE TOOL BAG CONTAINS:

Jack Gloves - Wheel wrench Centring pin - Folding chock - Ratchet for jack

Preparing the vehicle for a wheel change

Requirements

• The vehicle is not on a slope. • The vehicle is on solid, non-slippery and level ground. • The required tyre-change tool kit is available. If your vehicle is not equipped with the tyre-change tool kit, consult a qualified specialist workshop to find out about suitable tools. Apply the electric parking brake manually. Move the front wheels to the straight-ahead position. Shift the transmission to position P. Vehicles with AIRMATIC: set the raised vehicle level for greater ground clearance ( → page 448). Switch off the vehicle. Make sure that the vehicle cannot be started. Place chocks or other suitable items under the front and rear of the wheel that is diagonally opposite the wheel you wish to change. Unload the vehicle.

Fitting/removing the hub cap

Requirements

• The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change.  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change 

REMOVING

 Remove socket ② and wheel wrench ③ from the vehicle tool kit. Position socket ② on hub cap ①. Position wheel spanner ③ on socket ②. Using wheel spanner ③, turn hub cap ① anti-clockwise and remove it.

FITTING

Before fitting, check hub cap Ⓞ and the wheel area for dirt, and clean if necessary. ▶ Position hub cap Ⓛ and turn until it is in the right position. Position socket ② on hub cap ①. Position wheel wrench ③ on socket ② and tighten hub cap ①. i Specified tightening torque: 25 Nm

Removing and fitting the wheel trim/hub caps

Requirements

• The vehicle is prepared for a wheel change ( → page 764).

MULTI-PIECE WHEEL TRIM

On vehicles with aluminium wheels, the trim parts may be damaged when the wheel is changed. Before unscrewing the wheel bolts, remove the multi-piece wheel trim. To remove: using both hands, carefully reach into two wheel trim openings and remove the wheel trim. To fit: place the wheel trim in position and press firmly until it engages.

Raising the vehicle when changing a wheel

Requirements

• There are no persons in the vehicle. • The vehicle has been prepared for a wheel change ( → page 764).

IMPORTANT NOTES ON USING THE JACK:

• Use only a vehicle-specific jack that has been approved by Mercedes-Benz to raise the vehicle. - The jack is only designed for raising and holding the vehicle for a short time while a wheel is being changed and not for maintenance work under the vehicle. - The jack must be placed on a firm, flat and non-slip surface. If necessary, use a large, flat, load-bearing, non-slip underlay.   EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change \- The foot of the jack must be positioned vertically under the jack support point.  

RULES OF CONDUCT WHEN THE VEHICLE IS RAISED:

• Never place your hands or feet under the vehicle. • Never lie under the vehicle. • Do not start the vehicle and do not release the electric parking brake. • Do not open or close any doors or the tailgate.   Using the wheel wrench, loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel you wish to change by about one full turn. Do not unscrew the screws completely.  Position of the jack support points  Cover of the jack support points Before positioning the jack, you must remove the covers for the jack support points. To remove: turn clip ① on the cover one quarter turn and remove. Pull the cover downwards using handle ② until the cover releases at the top of the longitudinal member panel.   EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change Remove the cover.   Cover of the jack support points To fit: insert tabs ③ of the cover into the recesses of the longitudinal member panel and press the covers closed.  Insert retaining clip ① into the cover, as shown in the illustration, until you hear it engage in the floor bush. Make sure that the floor bush in the vehicle is correctly aligned to the cover.  NOTE Damage to the vehicle due to using an unsuitable jack You can damage the vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage battery if you use a jack that is not specifically designed for the jack support points of the vehicle. Only use jacks that are specifically designed for the jack support points, or use an appropriate adapter. NOTE Risk of damage to the vehicle due to incorrect positioning of the jack If you do not position the jack at the designated jack support points, you could damage your vehicle and, in particular, the high-voltage battery. ▶ Only position the jack at the designated jack support points. Take the ratchet out of the tyre-change tool kit and place it on the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AUF" are visible. EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change  Position support ② of jack ④ on jack support point ①. Turn ratchet ③ clockwise until support ② sits completely on jack support point ① and the base of the jack lies evenly on the ground. Turn ratchet ③ until the tyre is raised a maximum of 3 cm from the ground. Loosen and remove the wheel ( → page 768).

Removing a wheel

Requirements

The vehicle is raised.

Note on AMG vehicles:

 1 NOTE Damage to the ceramic brake disc when changing a wheel Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Take particular care. Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring pin. When changing a wheel, avoid applying any force to the brake discs, as this could impair the level of comfort when braking. NOTE Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel. Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning. NOTE Damage to threading from dirt on wheel bolts Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a dirty surface. Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt completely.  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change  Screw centring pin ① into the thread instead of the wheel bolt. Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts completely. Remove the wheel.

Fitting a new wheel

Requirements

\- The wheel to be changed is removed and the centring pin is screwed in (→ page 768).

WARNING

Risk of accident from losing a wheel Oiled or greased wheel bolts can cause the wheel bolts to come loose, as too can damaged wheel bolts or wheel hub threads. ▶ Never oil or grease the threads. In the event of damage to the threads, contact a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Have the damaged wheel bolts or damaged hub threads replaced. Do not continue driving. Observe the information on the choice of tyres ( → page 759). For tyres with a specified direction of rotation, an arrow on the side wall of the tyre indicates the correct direction of rotation. Observe the direction of rotation when fitting. Note on AMG vehicles:  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change 

NOTE

Damage to the ceramic brake disc when changing a wheel Mercedes-AMG vehicles with ceramic brake discs: during removal and repositioning of the wheel, the wheel rim can strike the ceramic-brake disc and damage it. Take particular care. Ask another person for assistance or use a second centring pin. 

NOTE

Damage to the wheels' plastic elements when changing a wheel Plastic elements on wheels may be damaged when removing and repositioning the wheel. Do not raise the wheels by the plastic elements when removing and repositioning. Slide the wheel to be mounted onto the centring pin and push it on. 

WARNING

Risk of injury from tightening wheel bolts and nuts If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip. Only tighten wheel bolts or wheel nuts when the vehicle is on the ground.  Be sure to observe the instructions and safety notes on "Changing a wheel" ( → page 759). For safety reasons, only use wheel bolts which have been approved by Mercedes-Benz and for the wheel in question. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated until they are finger-tight. Unscrew and remove the centring pin. Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight. ▶ Lower the vehicle ( → page 770).

Lowering the vehicle after a wheel change

Requirements

• The new wheel has been fitted ( → page 769). 

NOTE

Risk of vehicle jack becoming trapped by the AIRMATIC system If the AIRMATIC system has released air when raising the vehicle, the jack can become trapped when the vehicle is lowered. Start the drive system. This adapts the vehicle level. Remove the jack from under the vehicle. To lower the vehicle: place the ratchet onto the hexagon nut of the jack so that the letters "AB" are visible and turn anti-clockwise.   EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Wheel change  Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ⑤ with an initial maximum force of 80 Nm. Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a diagonal pattern in the order indicated ① to ② with the specified tightening torque of 150 Nm. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to incorrect tightening torque The wheels could come loose if the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to the prescribed torque. Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel nuts are tightened to the prescribed tightening torque. If you are not sure, do not move the vehicle. Contact a qualified specialist workshop and have the tightening torque checked immediately. Check the tyre pressure of the newly fitted wheel and adjust it if necessary. The following does not apply if the new wheel is an emergency spare wheel.  Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: restart the tyre pressure monitoring system ( → page 757). 

Emergency spare wheel

Notes on the emergency spare wheel


WARNING

Risk of accident caused by incorrect wheel and tyre dimensions The wheel or tyre size and the tyre type of the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel and the wheel to be replaced may differ. The emergency spare wheel or spare wheel can significantly impair driving characteristics of the vehicle. To prevent hazardous situations: Drive carefully. ▶ Never fit more than one emergency spare wheel or spare wheel that differs in size. ▶ Only use an emergency spare wheel or spare wheel briefly. Do not deactivate ESP*. Have the emergency spare wheel or spare wheel of a different size replaced at the nearest qualified specialist workshop. The new wheel must have the correct dimensions.

OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES ON FITTING AN EMERGENCY SPARE WHEEL:

- The maximum permissible speed with an emergency spare wheel fitted is 80 km/h. • Do not fit the emergency spare wheel with snow chains. - Replace the emergency spare wheel after six years at the latest, regardless of wear. • Use the wheel bolts that are included with the emergency spare wheel. - Check the tyre pressure of the emergency spare wheel fitted. Correct the pressure as necessary. The specified tyre pressure is stated on the label of the emergency spare wheel. Vehicles with a tyre pressure monitoring system: if an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the tyre pressure monitoring system cannot function reliably. For a few minutes after an emergency spare wheel is fitted, the system may still display the tyre pressure of the removed wheel. Only restart the system again when the emergency spare wheel has been replaced with a new wheel.  EQE - Owner's Manual Wheels and tyres Emergency spare wheel 

BE SURE TO ALSO OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING FURTHER RELATED SUBJECTS:

Notes on tyre pressure ( → page 755) • Tyre pressure table ( → page 756) • Notes on fitting tyres (→ page 759) • Fitting an emergency spare wheel ( → page 764) EQE - Owner's Manual   Technical data 

< Technical data

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Notes on technical data 775 On-board electronics 776 Regulatory radio information 779 Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview Operating fluids 832 Vehicle data 835 Trailer hitch 844 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Notes on technical data

Notes on technical data

The technical data was determined in accordance with EU Directives. The data stated only applies to vehicles with standard equipment. You can obtain further information from a Mercedes-Benz Service Centre. Only for certain countries: you can find vehicle-specific vehicle data in the COC documents (CERTIFICATE OF CONFORMITY). These documents are supplied when the vehicle is delivered.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data On-board electronics

On-board electronics

Notes on tampering with the drive system


NOTE

Premature wear through improper maintenance Improper maintenance may cause vehicle components to wear more quickly and the vehicle's operating permit may be invalidated. Always have work on the drive system and related components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.

Two-way radios

NOTES ON FITTING TWO-WAY RADIOS


WARNING

Risk of accident due to improper work on two-way radios If two-way radios are manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly, the electromagnetic radiation from the two-way radios can interfere with the vehicle electronics and jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. You should have all work on electrical and electronic components carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.  

WARNING

Risk of accident due to improper operation of two-way radios If you use two-way radios in the vehicle improperly, their electromagnetic radiation can disrupt the vehicle's electronics. This is the case in the following situations, in particular: • The two-way radio is not connected to an exterior aerial. - The exterior aerial is fitted incorrectly or is not a low-reflection aerial. This could jeopardise the operating safety of the vehicle. Have the low-reflection exterior aerial fitted at a qualified specialist workshop. When operating two-way radios in the vehicle, always connect them to the low-reflection exterior aerial. EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data On-board electronics

NOTE

Invalidation of the operating permit due to failure to comply with the instructions for installation and use The operating permit may be invalidated if the instructions for installation and use of two-way radios are not observed. ▶ Only use approved frequency bands. Observe the maximum permissible output power in these frequency bands. ▶ Only use approved aerial positions.  ① Rear roof area On vehicles with a panorama sliding sunroof, fitting an aerial is not permitted. Use Technical Specification ISO/TS 21609 (Road Vehicles - "EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket radio frequency transmitting equipment") when retrofitting two-way radios. Comply with the legal requirements for detachable parts.  If your vehicle has fittings for two-way radio equipment, use the power supply and aerial connectors provided in the pre-installation. Observe the manufacturer's supplements when fitting.

TWO-WAY RADIO TRANSMISSION OUTPUT

The maximum transmission output (PEAK) at the base of the aerial must not exceed the values in the following table. FREQUENCY BAND AND MAXIMUM TRANSMISSION OUTPUT

Frequency band Maximum transmission output
2-m- frequency band144 - 174 MHz	50 W
Terrestrial Trunked Radio (TETRA)380 - 460 MHz	10 W
Two-way radio2G	2 W
Two-way radio3G/4G/5G	0.5 W

THE FOLLOWING DEVICES CAN BE USED IN THE VEHICLE WITHOUT RESTRICTIONS:

- two-way radios with a maximum transmission output of up to 100 mW - two-way radios with transmitter frequencies in the 380 - 420 MHz frequency band and a maximum transmission output of up to 2 W (TETRA) • mobile phones (2G/3G/4G/5G)

THERE ARE NO RESTRICTIONS WHEN POSITIONING THE AERIAL ON THE OUTSIDE OF THE VEHICLE FOR THE FOLLOWING FREQUENCY BANDS:

TETRA  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data On-board electronics 2G/3G/4G/5G   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

< Regulatory radio information

Specific information on wireless applications in accordance with 2014/53/EU

Besides the typical frequencies for mobile communication cars by Mercedes-Benz make use of the following automotive radio applications. TYPE OF WIRELESS APPLICATIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS IN ACCORDANCE WITH 2014/53/EU

Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength
Remote Keyless Entry 20 kHz (9–90 kHz) ≤ 72 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 105 kHz (90–119 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry 120 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Wireless Power Transmission 127 kHz (119–135 kHz) ≤ 66 dBμA/m at 10m with the magnetic field strength level	decreasing 3dB/octave above 119 kHz
Near-field communication 13.553–13.567 MHz ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10m
Remote Keyless Entry, Garage Door Opener, Tire Pressure Monitoring	433 MHz (433.05–434.79 MHz) ≤ 10 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 868 MHz (868.0–868.6 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Block Heater Remote Control, Garage Door Opener 869 MHz (868.7–869.2 MHz) ≤ 25 mW ERP
Bluetooth, Kleer, RLAN, wireless Headphones 2.4 GHz ISM band (2400–2483.5 MHz) ≤ 100 mW EIRP
RLAN 5.1 GHz UNII-1 (5150–5250 MHz)	≤ 25 mW EIRP

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength Interior Monitoring Radar, RLAN 5.8 GHz UNII-3 (5725–5875 MHz) ≤ 25 mW EIRP Remote Keyless Entry 7.25 GHz UWB (6.0-8.5 GHz) ≤ -41.3 dBm/MHz EIRP mean ≤ 0 dBm/MHz EIRP peak 76 GHz radar 76-77 GHz ≤ 55 dBm peak EIRP Carsharing Module NFC: 13.553-13.567 MHz Bluetooth*: 2402-2480 MHz NFC: ≤ 42 dBμA/m at 10 m Bluetooth*: ≤ +4 dBm (class 2) Rear Seat Entertainment System Bluetooth®: 2400-2483.5 MHz WLAN 2.4 GHZ: 2400-2483.5 MHz WLAN 5 GHz: 5150-5250 MHz 5725-5875 MHz Bluetooth*: -0.8 dBm WLAN 2.4 GHZ: 14.5 dBm WLAN 5 GHz: 20.5 dBm 13.3 dBm Two-way radio (Tel7 telephone control unit) E-GSM (900 MHz) GSM (1800 MHz) UMTS (Band I, III, VIII) +24 dBm (+1/-3 dB) LTE (Band 1, 3, 7, 8, 20, 28) +23 dBm (±2 dB) Compensator ECE DE003 and ECE DE004 GSM (E-GSM 900) GSM (E-GSM 1800) UMTS (I, III, VIII) < +23 dBm LTE (B1, B3, B7, B8, B20) < +33 dBm < +30 dBm < +23 dBm HERMES (Hardware for Enhanced Remote, Mobility & Emergency Services) WLAN (2400-2483.5 MHz) WLAN (5736-5833 MHz) < 20 dBm < 14 dBm   Technology Frequency range Transmission output/magnetic field strength

	GSM (E-GSM 900, Class 4)	< +33 dBm (+2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800, Class 1)	< +30 dBm (+2 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 900 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +27 dBm (±3 dB)
	GSM (E-GSM 1800 8-PSK, Class E2)	< +26 dBm (±3 dB/-4 dB)
	UMTS (2100 WCDMA FDD B1, Class 3) < +24 dBm (±1 dB/-3 dB)
	LTE (FDD B I, B III, B38, B39, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±2 dB)
	GPS (1575,42 MHz +/- 2 MHz) Receiving only
RAMSES (Router And Mobile SEviceS) GSM (E-GSM 850 / E-GSM 900, Class 4)		< +32.5 dBm (±1 dB)
		GSM (E-GSM 1800 / E-GSM 1900, Class 4)
	UMTS (WCDMA FDD I, II, III, IV, V, VIII, XIX, Class 3) < +23.5 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (FDD B1, B2, B3, B4, B5, B7, B8, B9, B18, B19, B21, B28, Class 3)	< +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	LTE (TDD B38, B40, B41, Class 3) < +23 dBm (±1 dB)
	GNSS (1559–1610 MHz) Receiving only

Further information and updates are available at the following web address: https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en

Regulatory radio identifiers and specific notes

The tables and sections contain the following regulatory radio information: • Manufacturer information • Required regulatory radio identifiers, listed by country/region: - Manufacturer's specifications - Model designations - Radio equipment approval numbers • Specific information on wireless components Further information and updates are available at the following web address: https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information OVERVIEW OF MANUFACTURERS

Manufacturer Manufacturer Information

ADC ADC Automotive Distance Control SystemsGmbH, Peter-Dornier-Straße 10, 88131 Lindau, Germany

Bosch Robert Bosch GmbH, Daimlerstraße 6, 71229Leonberg, Germany

Continental Antenna Continental Advanced Antenna GmbH, Römer-ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany

Continental Automotive Continental Automotive GmbH, Siemensstraße12, 93055 Regensburg, Germany

Gentex Gentex Corporation, 600 North CentennialStreet, Zeeland MI 49464, USA

Harman Becker Harman Becker Automotive Systems GmbH,Becker-Goehring-Strasse 18, 76307 Karlsbad, Germany

HELLA HELLA KGaA Hueck & Co., Rixbecker Straße 75,59552 Lippstadt, Germany

Hirschmann Hirschmann Car Communication GmbH,Stuttgartter Straße 45-51, 72654 Neckartenzlingen, Germany

Huf Baolong Huf Baolong Electronics Bretten GmbH, Gewerbestraße 40, 75015 Bretten, Germany

HUF HUF Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, SteegerStraße 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany

KATHREIN KATHREIN Automotive GmbH & Co. KG, Römer-ring 1, 31137 Hildesheim, Germany

LEOPOLD KOSTAL LEOPOLD KOSTAL GmbH & Co. KG, Hauert 11,44227 Dortmund, Germany

Manufacturer Manufacturer information

MARQUARDT MARQUARDT GmbH, Schloßstraße 16, 78604Rietheim-Weilheim, Germany
Meta System Meta System S.P.A., Via T. Galimberti 5, 42124Reggio Emilia, Italy
Molex Molex CVS Dabendorf GmbH, Märkische Straße	72, 15806 Zossen, Germany
Panasonic	Panasonic Automotive Systems Europe GmbH, Robert-Bosch-Straße 27, 63225 Langen, Germany
Schrader	Schrader Electronics Ltd., 11 Technology Park, Belfast Road, Antrim BT41 1QS, Northern Ireland, United Kingdom
Sennheiser	Sennheiser electronic GmbH & Co. KG, Am Labor 1, 30900 Wedemark, Germany
Veoneer	Veoneer Sweden AB, Wallentinsvägen 22, 44737 Värgärda, Sweden
WITTE-Velbert	WITTE-Velbert GmbH & Co. KG, Hoeferstr. 3-15, 42551 Velbert, Germany

ALGERIA

Agréé par l'ANF Référence du Certificat de conformité

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

Homologué par l'ARPCE Référence du Certificat de conformité

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna RKE223GNS (locking system) 71/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 122/H/ANF/2021
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)	122/H/ANF/2021
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 123/H/ANF/2021
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 106/H/ANF/2020
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 107/H/ANF/2020
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 172/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 188/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 189/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 190/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 195/H/ANF/2021
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 193/H/ANF/2021

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 194/H/ANF/2021

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	186/H/ANF/2021
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	3681/1-73.0A 1639/DT/DG/ARPT/15
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyro pressure sensor)	652/1/DT/DG/ARPCE/2020
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	56/H/ANF/2021
Schrader	GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	3994/1.69-DA/2098/DT/DG/ARPT/17
Schrader	DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/ARPT/17
Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	2695/1-NO.431396/DT/DG/ARPT/17
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	32/H/ANF/2021

ARGENTINA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer	Model designation Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	H-26206
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	H-24637

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) H-24376  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)

H-17929

Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) H-23974 HELLA DM4 (locking system) H-17845 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) H-15694 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) H-15695

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)

H-20027

HUF HUF14632 (locking system) H-15541 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) H-11545 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) H-16874

MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	H-17689
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	H-21034
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	H-21035
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	H-17598
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	H-23101
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	H-24933
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	H-17213
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	H-17212

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	H-23166
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	H-4788
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	H-23292
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	H-25586
Schrader	GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	H-20495
Schrader	DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	H-20959
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	H-24664

AUSTRALIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION  Manufacturer Model designation

ADC	ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)

Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

 Manufacturer Model designation

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)

BAHAMAS REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2014_082
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) URCA_TA_2019_167
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	URCA_TA/2017_184
Bosch	MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)	URCA_TA/2017_157
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_195
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	URCA_TA/2020_068
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)	URCA_TA/2017_119
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	UCRA_TA/2016_009
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli-fier)	UCRA_TA/2020_032
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	URCA_TA/2017_078
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	URCA_TA/2019_053
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	URCA_TA/2019_052

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

HUF HUF4761 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_087
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA/2017_094
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_081
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) URCA_TA_2017_042
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_128
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_129
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2017_021
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) URCA_TA_2019_141
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) URCA_TA_2020_141
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_031
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) URCA_TA/2015_033
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) URCA_TA/2019_250
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_TA/2015_009
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_101
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2021_001
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) URCA_TA_2020_046
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_247

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Veoneer	77V12BSM (radar sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_169
Veoneer	77V12CRN (radar sensor)	URCA_TA_2019_168
Veoneer	77V125CRN (radar sensor)	URCA_TA_2021_027
Veoneer	MMRV1 (radar sensor)	URCA_TA/2015_063
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	URCA_TA_2020_056

BELARUS

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION  Manufacturer Model designation

ADC	ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation

Harman Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication module)

HELLA DM4 (locking system)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer MMRV1 (radar sensor)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

BOTSWANA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2018/2026
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2020/5186
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4674
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4975
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	BOCRA/TA/2017/3788
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4387
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)	BOCRA/TA/2019/5050
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/5075
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4661
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4662
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4724
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4723
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4664
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4593
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4389
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	BOCRA/TA/2019/4388

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4390 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/5135 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4758 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2020/5473 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4359 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4360 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2019/4687 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4975 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2019/4980 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) BOCRA/TA/2021/6191 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) BOCRA/TA/2020/5342

BRAZIL

Note on two-way radio systems in the vehicle:

These systems are not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems. REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
		number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) 03691-15-05298
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 07359-21-12817
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 3691-15-5298
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)	00325-20-02149
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)		03189-17-02856
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	04689-17-05364
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	1855-12-5762
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	1787-12-8058
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system) 03627-15-06643
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	00053-13-06643
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	02712-15-03366
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 01333-17-02930
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 01395-11-02930
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 01392-11-02930
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 00616-17-02930

  EQE - Owner's Manual Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 06218-19-02930 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 11149-20-02930 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 03149-19-02930 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 03756-15-02930 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 03757-15-02930 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) 03034-20-07018

Further specific information

Rear Seat Entertainment System:

This system is not protected against harmful interference and must not cause interference in properly approved systems. This product is approved by ANATEL in accordance with the procedures set out in Resolution 242/2000 and complies with the relevant technical requirements. Further information can be found on the https://www.anatel.gov.br 

BRUNEI DARUSSALAM

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) DTA-004005 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DTA-004222 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) DTA-011039 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) DTA-006601 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) DTA-006678 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) DTA-006665 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) DTA-004998 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) DTA-005043 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) DTA-017264 HELLA DM4 (locking system) DTA-000351 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) DTA-001661 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) DTA-000794 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-000310 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit) DTA-003757   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number HUF HUF14632 (locking system) DTA-006138 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) DTA-000615 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) DTA-007245 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) LPD-38937 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DTA-000068 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DTA 000066 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) LPD-38890 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DTA-003525 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DTA-005850 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DTA-011312 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DTA-011313 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DTA-003662 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) LPD-29665 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen- sor) LPD-29665 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DRQ-D-JATI-07-2000-109000 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor) DTA-001514  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor- DTA No. 003893 ing system control unit) Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor- ing system control unit) DRQ-D- MAJU-02-2011-111083 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DTA-004000 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DTA-003999 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DTA-010423 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DTA-006216 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) DTA-005628

EURASIAN ECONOMIC UNION

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer	Model designation
ADC	ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Bosch	LRR3 (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information 

EAC

EAC

Manufacturer Model designation Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) HELLA DM4 (locking system) Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) HUF HUF4761 (locking system) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

EAC

EAC

Manufacturer Model designation MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader BG3FP4 (lyre pressure sensor) Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor) Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

GHANA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer	Model designation Radio equipment approval number
		NCA APPROVED
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)	ZRO-1H-7E3-152

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Bosch FRSCPCCF (radar sensor) ZRO-M8-7E3-230
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ZRO-M8-7E3-X53
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)		ZRO-M8-7E3-225
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-277
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)		BR3-1M-GE2-16A
HELLA DM4 (locking system) BR3-1M-GE2-157
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X45
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ZRO-M8-7E3-X47
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) EX6-6M-GE2-16C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X49
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X50
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X51
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X52
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	BR3-1M-GE-129
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	ZRO-1H-7E3-26E
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	SRO-1M-7E4-11B
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X4A
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X4C

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	ZRO-M8-7E3-X3C
Veoneer	77V12BSM (radar sensor)	ZRO-1H-7E3-142
Veoneer	77V12CRN (radar sensor)	ZRO-M8-7E3-230
Veoneer	77V125CRN (radar sensor)	7E5-7M-X72-RDR
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys-tem)	SRO-1M-7E4-X59

INDONESIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)	68676/SDPPI/2020
		7163
ADC	ARS4-A (radar sensor)	70266/SDPPI/2020
		7163
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)	74264/SDPPI/2021	7163
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	74267/SDPPI/2021	7163

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) 74265/SDPPI/2021

7163 

Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 74266/SDPPI/2021

7163 

Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 67882/SDPPI/2020

7163  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya 

Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 76621/SDPPI/2021

7163  Dllarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)

66185/SDPPI/2020 10325  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekilarnya  Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 66911/SDPPI/2020 7163  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya 

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)

69379/SDPPI/2020 7163  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information 

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval	number
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A(Steuergerät)	66678/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Continental Automotive NTG7 MID(Headunit)	70732/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Continental Automotive NTG7 HIGH(Headunit)	70733/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval	number
Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM(Headunit)	70731/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Continental Automotive NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS(Headunit)	70734/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID(Headunit)Production: Germany	64019/SDPPI/2019 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

		number
Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH	(Headunit)Production: Germany	64018/SDPPI/2019 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Harman Becker NTG6N ENTRY/MID	(Headunit)Production: Hungary	63775/SDPPI/2019 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Harman Becker NTG6N HIGH	(Headunit)Production: Hungary	63774/SDPPI/2019 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

		number
Harman Becker NTG7 MID(Headunit)		65544/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Harman Becker NTG7 HIGH(Headunit)		70513/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM(Headunit)		65543/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information 

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
	number
Harman Becker NTG7 PREMIUM PLUS(Headunit)	70512/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Harman Becker NTG7 RSU(control unit)	66387/SDPPI/2020 7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 69378/SDPPI/2020	7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	72438/SDPPI/20217163[IMAGE]

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval	number
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 71369 /SDPPI/2020	7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 72974 /SDPPI/2021	7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 78368/SDPPI/2021	7163⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya[IMAGE]

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

	number
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 26742/SDPPI/2015	3533
	⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekilarnya
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 41121/SDPPI/2018	5125
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) 67373/SDPPI/2020	7163
	⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekilarnya
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) 80676/SDPPI/2022	7163
	⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekilarnya

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

	number
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) 80621/SDPPI/2022
	7163
	⚠️
	Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) 67372/SDPPI/2020
	7163
	⚠️
	Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) 64126/SDPPI/2019

7163

Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) 69077/SDPPI/2020 7163 7163  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekilarnya  MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 75282/ SDPPI/ 2021 7163  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya  MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 75285/ SDPPI/ 2021 7163  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 82980/SDPPI/2022 7163

Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekilarnya

 71668/SDPPI/2020 7163 Molex WCH-302b (Steuergerät)

Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya

 71220/SDPPI/2020 7163 Molex WCH-302d (Steuergerät)  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information 

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
Molex WCH-302e	(Steuergerät)	71669/SDPPI/2020 7163
		⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Panasonic DAIRSE	(Steuergerät)	63550/SDPPI/2019
		⚠️Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan fisik dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020		9338
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)		75465/SDPPI/2021
		7163
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 72765/SDPP/2021		7163
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)		57058/SDPPI/2018
		3612

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
	number
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	25626/SDPPI/20153612
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	62396/SDPPI/20207163
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 72023/SDPPI/2020	7163
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) 74749/SDPPI/2021	7163
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 66830/SDPPI/2020	7163
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 78366/SDPPI/2021	7163

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 66792/SDPPI/2020

7163  67233/SDPPI/2020 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) 10325  Dilarang melakukan perubahan spesifikasi yang dapat menimbulkan gangguan flisk dan/atau elektromagnetik terhadap lingkungan sekitarnya 

ISRAEL

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

	Approval number of the Ministry of Communications:
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 55-09697
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 55-07525
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 55-08783
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 55-08334
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 55-08333
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 55-08395

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Continental Automotive D-WMI2017B(Steuergerät)

51-75654

Continental Automotive D-WMI2017A(Steuergerät)

51-75367

Continental Automotive D-WMI2016A	55-08177
(Steuergerät)

Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A	55-08179
(Steuergerät)

Continental Automotive RKE213E1	51-49867
(Antennenverstärker)

Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS(Antennenverstärker)

51-70799

Continental Automotive CMKG1	51-75924
(Schließsystem)

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless(Schließsystem)

51-59703

Hirschmann	920287A	51-62759
	(Schließsystem)

Hirschmann

920287A(Schließsystem)

51-49357

Hirschmann

920287A(Schließsystem)

55-12320

Huf Baolong

TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)

63-63571

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (lyre pressure monitoring system control unit)

63-66757

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 51-75788 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) 55-09027 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) 55-09028 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) 51-75547

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen-sor)

51-78338

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

51-73152

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) 51-77898

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

51-64111

Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) 55-09441

Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)

51-29611

Schrader MFR (tyre pressure monitor- ing system control unit)

55-06040

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor- ing system control unit)

51-79817

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 55-08176 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) 55-08301

JAMAICA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer	Model designation
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)
Continental Automotive	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	RKE223E1GN5 (aerial amplifier)
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

Manufacturer Model designation

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

JAPAN

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) 201-190814 (R) Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) 201-190815 (L) Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Transmitter)

CANADA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2R Sennhelser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IC:2099A-M3IETW2L Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio IC:2099A-BTT100 Transmitter) Sennheiser M3IETW2 C (Charging Case) CAN ICS-3(B)/NMB-3(B)

KUWAIT

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
	number
Sennheiser M3IETW2 (Momentum True Wireless 2)	Ref. 4870
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Transmitter)	Ref. 4871

MALAYSIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) HIDF15000153 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Bosch MRRevo14F (radar sensor) CIDF15000490 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) HIDF15000153 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) HIDF16000136 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) HIDF15000153   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)		CIDF15000578
Continental Automotive D-WMI2020A (control unit) RGEZ/12A/1019/S(19-4128)
HELLA DM4 (locking system) CIDF15000578
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) RAUU/63A/0311/S(11-0432)
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) RAUU/22C/0615/S(15-1864)
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen-sor)		CIDF17000184
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) RAYN/25A/0715/S(15-2385)
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) RAAU/16B/1112/S(12-2053)
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) HIDF15000153
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	RDDK/33A/0317/S(17-0669)
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0263)
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	RAUU/62A/0311/S(11-0264)
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	RDDK/31A/0217/S(17-0405)
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	RDDK/25B/1019/S(19-0943)
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	RGLO/02A/0720/S(20-2580)
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	CIDF19000029
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	CIDF19000029

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	CIDF19000029
Meta System	ITS/TPS (interior protection)	RAVG/18Q/0212/S(11-2068)
Meta System	MUW II (interior protection)	RAVG/17Q/0212/S(11-2067)
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	RCDD/03A/0615/S(19-2094)
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	RBEF/28A/0419/S/(19-1542)
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	RBEF/51A/0121/S/(20-5642)
Schrader	MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
Schrader	MFR3 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	RAQP/62A/0419/S(19-1694)
Veoneer	77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)	HIDF15000153
Veoneer	77V12BSM (radar sensor)	HIDF15000153
Veoneer	77V12CRN (radar sensor)	HIDF15000153
Veoneer	77V125CRN (radar sensor)	HIDF15000153
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	RDDK/43B/0420/S(20-1749)

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

MOROCCO

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
		AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) MR 9490 ANTR 2014-07-23
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) MR 20231 ANRT 2019-06-27
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) MR 20575 ANRT 2019-07-29
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) MR 5371 ANRT 2010		2019-12-05
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) MR 9186 ANTR 2014-04-22
Bosch MRRRe14FCR (radar sensor) MR 13900 ANTR 2017-05-04
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) MR 10631 ANTR 2015-07-16
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli-fior)		MR 21174 ANTR 2019-10-14
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) MR 21701 ANTR 2019-12-05
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)		MR 13681 ANTR 2017-04-04
HELLA DM4 (locking system)	MR 14426 ANTR 2017-07-28
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	MR 6700 ANTR 2011-11-16
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	MR 7260 ANTR 2012-06-13
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)	MR 32214 ANTR 2022-03-08
Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure moni-toring system control unit)	MR 14320 ANTR 2017-07-07

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

Huf Baolong	TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 19561 ANTR 2019-04-26
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system) MR 10506 ANTR 2015-06-22
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	MR 7829 ANTR 2013-02-14
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	MR 10697 ANTR 2015-08-05
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	MR 13429 ANTR 2017-03-03
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	MR 6698 ANTR 2021-11-04
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	MR 6699 ANTR 2021-11-04
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	MR 13300 ANTR 2017-02-15
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	MR 19199 ANTR 2019-03-25
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	MR 23805 ANRT 2020-04-22
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	MR 10645 ANTR 2015-07-21
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	MR 10987 ANTR 2015-10-22
MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	MR 18817 ANTR 2019-02-12
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 10216 ANRT 2015
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	MR 19241 ANRT 2019
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	MR00026829ANRT2020
Schrader	MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 19527 ANRT 2019-04-30

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 19527 ANRT 2019
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MR 14777 ANRT 2017-09-20
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	MR 16355 ANRT 2018-04-19
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	MR 6706 ANRT 2011-11-17
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) MR 10436 ANRT 2015-05-25
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) MR 20097 ANRT 2019-06-14
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) MR 20149 ANRT 2019-06-19
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) MR 27966 ANRT 2021-03-29
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	MR 23310 ANRT 2020-03-10

MEXICO

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

NOM
Manufacturer	Model designation Radio equipment approval number

ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPCOAR14-1191 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) IFETEL: RLVCOR19-1062 Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) IFETEL: RCPBOLR09-0828

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	IFETEL: RCPBOMR14-0922
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)	IFETEL: RCPBOMR17-0598
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	IFETEL: RLVKARK15-1741
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	IFETEL: RLVCORK19-2174
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	IFETEL: RCPCOCM19-2315
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)	IFETEL: RLVDAMA18-1827
Gentex	MUAHL 5 (convenience sys-tem)	IFETEL: RCPGEMU15-0448
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHEDM17-10
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHI9211-0472
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHI9212-0608
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHI9222-2674
Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen-sor)	IFETEL: RLVHUTS17-0806
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHUHU15-1204
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVHUHU12-1587
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVKOKK15-0891
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	IFETEL: RLVMEDC17-0348

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information     Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446 MARQUARDT DC12K (Interior protection) IFETEL: RLVMADC11-0446 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS17-0222 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMS19-0449 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMEMS20-0957 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1042 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) IFETEL: RLVMAMK15-1043 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) IFETEL: RCPMA3319-0530 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RCPSCAG15-0627 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCAG19-0705 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCBG21-0750 Schrader MFR (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCMF15-0959 Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCMF19-0777 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCGG17-1665 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor) IFETEL: RLVSCDG18-04    Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit) IFETEL: RCPSCMR14-062 Sennhelser M3IETW2R (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435-A1 Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) IFETEL: RCPSEM320-0435 Sennhelser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Transmitter) IFETEL: RCPSEBT18-1407 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) IFETEL: RCPWISD20-0943

MONGOLIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFIERS

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) A19000633 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) A18000328 HELLA DM4 (locking system) A18000329 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) A19000400 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) A19000371 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) A19000372   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) A18000289 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) A19000516 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) A20000085 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) A19000374 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) A19000374 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) A19000401 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) A20000067

NIGER

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 029/ARCEP/DG/19
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)	083/ARCEP/DG/19
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 082/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 097/ARCEP/DG/19
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 098/ARCEP/DG/19
HUF HUF4761 (locking system)	053/ARCEP/DG/19

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system) 037/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	010/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	008/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	009/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	014/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	HOMO-0096/ARCEP/DG/2019
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system) 034/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system) 035/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	015/ARCEP/DG/19
MARQUARDT	MU1 (locking system) HOMO-0095/ARCEP/DG/2019

NIGERIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer	Model designation
ADC	ARS4-A (radar sensor)
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)
Bosch	MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation

Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)

Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system)

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)

HELLA DM4 (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287A (locking system)

Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)

Hirschmann 920702A (locking system)

HUF HUF14632 (locking system)

HUF HUF4761 (locking system)

LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)

MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)

MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)

Manufacturer Model designation

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Schrader MFR3 (control unit)

Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)

Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

OMAN

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/2016/14	D080134
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/7769/19	D172338
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/7983/19D172338
Bosch	LRR3 (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/1049/09
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/1849/14
Bosch	MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)	TRA/TA-R/4353/17
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	TRA/TA-R/2715/15D090258

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

	number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)	TRA/TA-R/8337/19
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/8642/19	D172338
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/4158/17D080134
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/4548/17	D080134
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0210/11	D080353
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0655/12	D080353
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TRA/TA-R/13300/22	D172338
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	TRA/TA-R/4516/17D100428
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure sensor)	TTRA/TA-R/7506/19
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/2665/15
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA/TA-R/0920/12
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/3129/16
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)	TRA/TA-RD/4056/17D100428

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

		number
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/0227/11D080353
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/0228/11D080353
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/4136/17D080134
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/7316/19D172249
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/9324/20D100428
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/2848/15D080353
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/2900/15D080353
MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	TRA/TA-R/7051/19D172249
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TTRA R/2380/15D080134
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TRA R/7287/19D172338
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TRA/TA-R/10694/20D172338
Schrader	MFR (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	TRA/TA-R/7464/19D090258

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval

	Number
Schrader MFR3 (tyre pressure monitor- ing system control unit)	TRA/TA-R/7467/19D090258
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA/TA-R/4686/17	D080134
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen- sor)	TRA/TA-R/5511/18D172249
Sennheiser M3IETW2R (Earbud) TRA/TA-R/10988/21
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Transmitter)	TRA/TA-R/10976/21
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/2706/15
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7706/19	D172338
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/7707/19	D172338
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TRA/TA-R/11335/21	D172338
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys- tem)	TRA/TA-R/9150/20


PAKISTAN

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.9389/2019
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)	TAC NO: 9.198/2020
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	TAC NO: 9.142/2016
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)	TAC NO: 9.100169/2019
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	TAC NO:9.100175/2019
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.213/2017
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (control unit)	TAC NO: 9.9836/2019
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.409/2017
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.845/2013
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.846/2013
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)	TAC No. 9.412/2022
HUF Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	TAC NO: 9.620/2017
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.598/2015
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	TAC NO: 9.790/2013

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.118/2016 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TAC NO: 9.131/2017 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TAC NO: 9.829/2013 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TAC NO: 9.830/2013 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.133/2017 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.100171/2019 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TAC.NO: 9.774/2020 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.486/2015 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TAC NO: 9.497/2015 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.039/2016 Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.9167/2019 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.68/2021 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO:9.538/2017 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor) TAC NO: 9.789/2018 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9284/2019 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.9391/2019 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TAC NO: 9.477/2021 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) TAC NO: 9.527/2020

PARAGUAY

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 2019-05-I-0271 ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 2019-11-I-0602 Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 2019-09-I-0508 Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 2017-06-1-0000162 Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 2019-05-I-000236 Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 2021-02-I-00101 y 2016-02-I-0000038 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) 2019-12-I-0656 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 2020-02-I-0110   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)		2017-05-I-0000136
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 2017-08-I_0000261
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) 2016-5-I-000134 y 2011-06-I-0059
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) 2017-04-I-0000119 y		2012-05-I-0096
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) 2022-03-I-0149
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen-sor)		2017-09-I-0000328
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) 2020-06-I-0284 y 2015-08-I-0000226
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) 2017-12-I-0000409 y		2012-10-I-0178
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) 2015-06-I-0000181
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)	2020-12-I-0898 y 2015-06-I-0000181
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)	2021-05-I-0304; 2016-5-I-000144 y 2011-06-I-0067
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)	2021-05-I-0305; 2016-5-I-000143 y 2011-06-I-0068
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	2017-04-I-0000101
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	2019-10-I-0581

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)		2020-08-I-0604
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system)		2020-07-I-0390 y 2015-07-I-0000200
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system)		2020-07-I-0391 y 2015-07-I-0000201
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)		2019-04-I-000216
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	2015-04-I-0000150
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	2019-05-1-000261
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	2021-02-I-0063
Schrader	GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	2020-02-1-0044
Schrader	DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	2019-11-1-0632
Veoneer	77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor)	2020-07-I-0510
Veoneer	77V12BSM (radar sensor)	2019-07-I-0399
Veoneer	77V12CRN (radar sensor)	2019-07-I-0398
Veoneer	77V125CRN (radar sensor)	2021-04-I-0188
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	2020-06-I-0326

Further specific information  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

D-WMI2020A: This vehicle has the following radio frequency component approved by CONA-TEL - Paraguay: Wireless interface for mobile devices, Continental brand, model D-WMI2020A manufactured by Continental Automotive GmbH. Radio equipment approval number: 2019-11-1-0600

Rear Seat Entertainment System:

DAIRSE: Importer: Condor S.A.C.I Casa Central, J.B. Gorostiaga 315 y Guaraníes, Asunción, Paraguay, (595 21) 569 7000, [e-mail]

PHILIPPINES

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) ESD-1409466C ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) ESD-1920226C Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) ESD-1920531C Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) ESD-1408917C Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) ESD-1716172C Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) ESD-1511856C  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) ESD-1921015C Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) ESD-2021556C Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) ESD-1714865C HELLA DM4 (locking system) ESD-1715539C Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) ESD-1105246C Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) ESD-1206044C

Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	ESD-1715393C
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system)	ESD-1511236C
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	ESD-1206521C
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	ESD-1510698C
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	ESD-1714489C
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	ESD-1105216C
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	ESD-1105215C
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	ESD-1715652C
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	ESD-1919133C
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	ESD-2022426C

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) ESD-1510644C MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) ESD-1510645C MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) ESD-1919198C

Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)

ESD-1715393C

Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sen-sor)

ESD-1919585C

Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-RCE-2124846 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) ESD-1715977C

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

ESD-1817081C

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) ESD-1510921C

WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)

ESD-2022599C

ZAMBIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
		number
Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/11
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)		ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/3
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/4
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/12
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/11
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/12/18
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system) ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/48
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/16
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/17
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/5/18
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2018/9/30
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/123
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/20
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/21
MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/3/6
MARQUARDT	MU1 (locking system)	ZMB/ZICTA/TA/2019/7/124

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

SERBIA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) 011 20
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) 011 19
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) 011 19
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor) 011 19
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) 011 17
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) 005 17
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) 005 21
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)		005 19
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) 005 20
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system)		005 20
HELLA DM4 (locking system) 005 20
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	005 18
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	005 18
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)	005 22
Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	005 20

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval
		number
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system) 005 21
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	005 21
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	005 18
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	005 20
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	005 20
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	005 20
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	011 17
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	005 19
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	005 20
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	005 21
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	005 21
MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	005 22
Meta System	MUW II (Interior protection)	011 19
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	005 15
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	005 15
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	005 20
Schrader	GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	005 17

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	005 18
Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	011 11

Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) [011 18] Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) 011 19 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) [011 19] Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) 038 21 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) 005 20

SINGAPORE

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer	Model designation Radio equipment approval number
ADC AR54-A (radar sensor) DA103365
ADC AR54-C (radar sensor) DA103365
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) DA103365
Bosch LRR3 (radar sensor)	DA103365

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	DA103365
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)	DA103365
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	DA105282
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier)	DA107248
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	DA103365
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	DA105282
Continental Automotive	D-WMI2020A (control unit)	DA103365
Harman Becker	HERMES 3.0 (communication module)	DB107091
HELLA	DM4 (locking system)	DA103365
Hirschmann	920287A (locking system)	DA103365
Hirschmann	920287B (locking system)	DA103365
Hirschmann	920702A (locking system)	DA105282
HUF Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	DA30668
HUF Baolong	TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure sensor)	DA28467
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system)	DA105282
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	DA103365
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system)	DA103365

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) DA103787 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) DA103365 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) DA103365 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) DA103787 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) DA103787 MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) DB107091 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) DA103365 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) DA103365 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) DA103787 Meta System ITS/TPS (Interior protection) DA103365 Meta System MUW II (interior protection) DA103365 Schrader AG6SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA103787 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA107968 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA103365 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) DA105282 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor) DA105282 Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) DA103365 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) DA103365 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) DA103365 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) DA103365 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) DA107248

SOUTH AFRICA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

ADC	ARS4-A (radar sensor)	TA-2014/1637
ADC	ARS4-C (radar sensor)	TA-2019/1595
Bosch	FR5CPCCF (radar sensor)	TA-2019/1200
Bosch	MRR1Rear (radar sensor)	TA-2014/212
Bosch	MRRe14FCR (radar sensor)	TA-2017/2013
Bosch	LRR3 (radar sensor)	TA-2009/464
Continental Antenna	RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier)	TA-2015/1438
Continental Antenna	RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier)	TA-2020/043
Continental Automotive	CMKG1 (locking system)	TA-2019/5405
Continental Automotive	MARS Keyless (locking system)	TA-2016/3500

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys-tem)		TA-2015/1386
HELLA DM4 (locking system) TA-2017/2518
Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TA-2011/374
Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TA-2013/1262
Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) TA-2022/0162
Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen-sor)		TA-2017/1393
Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure sensor)		TA-2019/1440
HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TA-2015/1077
HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TA-2012/1543
LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TA-2015/595
Meta System ITS Master (interior protec-tion)		TA-2011/1636
Meta System ITS Sensor (interior protec-tion)		TA-2011/1227
Meta System MUW II (interior protection)	TA-2019/261
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	TA-2017/312
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	TA-2011/370

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	TA-2012/1542
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	TA-2016/3314
MARQUARDT	MS4 (locking system)	TA-2019/843
MARQUARDT	MS5 (locking system)	TA-2020/5765
MARQUARDT	MK1 (locking system)	TA-2015/179
MARQUARDT	MK2 (locking system)	TA-2015/180
MARQUARDT	3350.38 (locking system)	TA-2018/3985
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TA-2015/072
Schrader	AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TA-2019-133
Schrader	BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TA-2020/773
Schrader	MFR (control unit)	TA-2019/273
Schrader	MFR3 (control unit) TA-2019-273
Schrader	GG4T (tyre pressure sensor)	TA-2017/3884
Schrader	DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TA-2017/2933
Schrader	MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	TA-2011/1370

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA-2015/2087 Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA-2019/1380 Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) TA-2019/1382 Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) TA-2021/0150 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) TA-2020/055

SOUTH KOREA

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) R-C-Ca3-RKE223E1 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) HUF HUF14632 (locking system) MSIP-CRM-HHF-HUF-14632 Schrader MFR (control unit) MSIP-REM-SRD-MFR Schrader MFR3 (control unit) KCC R-R-SRD-MFR3A Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit) KCC-REM-SRD-MRXMC34MA4  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) MSIP-CRM-SRD-AG6SP4 Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) R-C-SRD-AG3PF4 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) R-C-SRD-BG3FP4 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) MSIP-CRM-SRD-GG4T Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sen- R-CRM-SRD-DG6W2D4

TOGO

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Continental Antenna RKE223E1 (aerial amplifier) No. 024/19 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) No. 040/19 HELLA DM4 (locking system) No. 039/19 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) No. 089/19 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) No. 088/19 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) No. 041/19 LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) No. 060/19 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) No. 055/19   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) No. 057/19 MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) No. 056/19 MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) No. 008/19 MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) No. 101/19 MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) No. 021/19 MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) No. 022/19 MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) No. 016/20

UKRAINE

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) UKR.355-123/19 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) UA.R.TR.052.682-19 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) UA1.001.021175-20-TE Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) RTS.UKR.355-34/18 HELLA DM4 (locking system) UA.TR.109 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) UKR.355-7/20  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor)	UA 1.001.018568-19-TE
Huf Baolong	TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)	UA 1.001.019289-19-TE
HUF	HUF14632 (locking system)	UKR.355-113/19
HUF	HUF4761 (locking system)	UA1.001.018653-19-TE
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system) 10094.006682-19
MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system)	UA.R.TR.052.307-19
MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system)	UA.R.TR.052.308-19
MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system)	UA.R.TR.052.309-19
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system)	UA1.001.019129-19-TE
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system)	UA.R.TR.052.528-19
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system)	632.16-CET
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) UA1.001.019233-19-TE
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) UA1.001.019234-19-TE
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system)	UA1.001.018888-19-TE
Schrader	AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	UA.TR. 032

   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA-TR-001 Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA-TR-109 Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) UA.TR. 028 Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor) UA.TR.028 WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system) UA.R.TR.052.120-20

UZBEKISTAN

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Continental Automotive RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Continental Automotive RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) HELLA DM4 (locking system) Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) Hirschmann 920287B (locking system)  Manufacturer Model designation LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information

UNITED ARAB EMIRATES

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) TA RTTE: 58296/17, DA40068/15  ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) TA RTTE: 77062/19, DA40068/15  Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) TA RTTE: 74533/19, DA36758/14  Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) TRA ER64693/18, DA65993/17 Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial ampli TRA E76442/19, DA65993/17 Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) TRA ER77964/20, DA0018994/09 Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking system) TRA ER56005/17, Gentex MUAHL 5 (convenience sys-tem) TRA ER41849/15, Haram Becker HERMES 3.0 (communication module) TRA ER03601/21, DA0028019/10  Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number HELLA DM4 (locking system) TRA ER56616/17, DA44932/15 Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) TRA ER52213/17, DA35219/14 Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) TRA ER42011/15, DA35219/14 Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER57806/17, DA36976/14 Huf Baolong TSSSG4G6b (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit) TRA ER7307/19, DA0086237/12 HUF HUF14632 (locking system) TRA ER63716/18, DA36976/14 HUF HUF4761 (locking system) TRA ER55496/17, DA36976/14 HUF HUF13145 (locking system) TRA ER08607/22 DA36976/14  LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) TRA ER62622/18, DA0105247/13 MARQUARDT DC12A (locking system) TRA ER53465/17, DA0018994/09 MARQUARDT DC12B (locking system) TRA ER0067828/11, DA0018994/09   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT DC12K (locking system) TRA ER0067829/11,	DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) TRA ER52668/17,	DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) TRA ER71616/19,	DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) TRA ER80720/20,	DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) TRA ER64145/18,	DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) TRA ER64146/18,	DA0018994/09
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) TRA ER69280/19, 0018994/09
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TRA ER37156/15, DA0047074/10
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TRA ER70533/19, DA0047074/10
Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER96175/21,	DA0047074/10
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) TRA ER57985/17,	DA0047074/10
Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	TRA ER960528/18, DA0047074/10

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Schrader MC34MA4 (tyre pressure monitoring system control unit)		TRA ER37066/15, DA0047074/10
Sennhelser M3IETW2L (Earbud) ER78231/20
Sennheiser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio Transmitter)		ER64728/18
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER96352/21;		0020858/10
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) TA RTTE: ER72324/19;		0020858/10
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor)	TA RTTE: ER72323/19;	0020858/10
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor)	TA RTTE: ER95775/21;	0020858/10
WITTE-Velbert	SDHTAG3NFC (locking sys-tem)	TRA ER79695/20, DA0018994/09

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information 

UNITED KINGDOM

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

 Manufacturer Model designation Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) Continental Antenna CMKG1 (locking system) Huf Baolong TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sensor) HELLA DM4 (locking system) Hirschmann 920287A (locking system) Hirschmann 920287B (locking system) Hirschmann 920702A (locking system) LEOPOLD KOSTAL KK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) MARQUARDT MS2 (locking system) MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader BG3FP4 (tyre pressure sensor)  Manufacturer Model designation Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)

Further specific information

Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

D-WMI2016A, D-WMI2017A, D-WMI2017B: Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 10 cm between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. D-WMI2020A: Restrictions or Requirements in the UK: A separation distance of at least 0 cm between all persons and the device must be provided at all times. The Device must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.  

UNITED STATES

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number Sennhelser M3IETW2R (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2R Sennheiser M3IETW2L (Earbud) FCC ID: DMOM3IETW2L Sennhelser BTT100 (Bluetooth Audio FCC ID: DMOBTT100 Transmitter)

Information on installation clearances

Charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI):

The charging unit for wireless charging of mobile devices (WMI) complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 0 cm (in contact) between the source of radiation and your body. This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same time as another transmitter or antenna.

Rear Seat Entertainment System:

USA: "This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device must not cause any harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. This device must be installed and used at a distance of at least 6 cm from the body." Canada: "This device complies with ISED Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device must not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. This equipment complies with ISED radiation exposure limits established for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 5 cm between the radiation source and your body."

Radar sensors:

ARS4-C (ADC), ARS4-B (ADC), ARS4-A (ADC), FR5CPCCF (Bosch), MRR1REAR (Bosch), MRREVO14F (Bosch), LRR3 (Bosch), 77V12BSM (Veoneer), 77V12CRN (Veoneer), MMRV1 (Veoneer) For the USA only: Information on exposure to high-frequency radiation: This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits established for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment must be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body. This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same time as another antenna or transmitter. For Canada only: This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiation source and your body. BT Audio Transmitter (BTT100):  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information This equipment complies with FCC and IC radiation exposure limits established for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with a minimum distance of 9 cm between the radiation source and your body. This transmitter must not be placed in the same location as or used at the same time as another antenna or transmitter.

VIETNAM

REGULATORY RADIO IDENTIFICATION

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval	number
ADC ARS4-A (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-	pany Limited
ADC ARS4-C (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-	pany Limited
Bosch FR5CPCCF (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-	pany Limited
Bosch MRR1Rear (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-	pany Limited
Bosch MRRe14FCR (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-	pany Limited
Continental Antenna RKE213E1 (aerial amplifier) Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0274151118AF04A2
Continental Antenna RKE223E1GNS (aerial amplifier) Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedB1522011121AF04A3

Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval		number
Continental Automotive CMKG1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam TechnologyCompany LimitedC0001070120AF04A2
Continental Automotive MARS Keyless (locking sys-tem)		Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-pany LimitedB0748240419AF04A2
HELLA DM4 (locking system)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-pany LimitedC0204030321AF04A3
Huf Baolong	TSSRE4A (tyre pressure sen-sor)	C0112200717AF04A2
LEOPOLD KOSTAL	KK1 (locking system) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Com-pany LimitedC0313140421AF0403
MARQUARDT	DC12A (locking system)	Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0208030321AF04A3
MARQUARDT	DC12B (locking system)	Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0076210121AF04A3
MARQUARDT	DC12K (locking system)	Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0077210121AF04A3
MARQUARDT	MS2 (locking system)	Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0075210121AF04A3

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information   Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

MARQUARDT MS4 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology	Company LimitedC0913110821AF04A3
MARQUARDT MS5 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology	Company LimitedC0141140520AF04A2
MARQUARDT MK1 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology	Company LimitedC0049150121AF04A3
MARQUARDT MK2 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology	Company LimitedC0050150121AF04A3
MARQUARDT 3350.38 (locking system) Suntech Vietnam Technology	Company LimitedC0131030221AF04A3
Schrader AG5SP4 (tyre pressure sensor)	Suntech Vietnam TechnologyCompany LimitedC0002050119AF042A
Schrader AG3PF4 (tyre pressure sensor)	Suntech Vietnam TechnologyCompany LimitedC0120220519AF04A2
Schrader GG4T (tyre pressure sensor) Suntech Vietnam Technology	Company LimitedC0170191017AF04A2

 Manufacturer Model designation Radio equipment approval number

Schrader DG6W2D4 (tyre pressure sensor)	Suntech Vietnam Technology Company LimitedC0078070518AF04A2
Veoneer 77GHz MMRV1 (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Veoneer 77V12BSM (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Veoneer 77V12CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
Veoneer 77V125CRN (radar sensor) Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company Limited
WITTE-Velbert SDHTAG3NFC (locking system)	Mercedes-Benz Vietnam Company LimitedA0847130820AF04A3

Information on the specific absorption rate (SAR)

INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE

For France only: The values have been determined and tested in accordance with the Décret n° 2019-1186 guideline regarding the indication of the specific absorption rate (SAR) of wireless vehicle components. Further information and updates are available at the following web address:   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data > Regulatory radio information https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en INFORMATION ABOUT THE SPECIFIC ABSORPTION RATE

Vehicle components SAR value in W/kg Applicable limit value
Compensator ECE DE003 & ECE DE004 < 0.2 W/kg 2 W/kg
DAI RSE 1.8 W/kg 2 W/kg
D-WMI2020A 0.018 W/kg 4 W/kg
HERMES communication module < 0.4 W/kg 2 W/kg
RAMSES communication module 0.036 W/kg 2 W/kg
NRCS2P 0.003 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG6 0.199 W/kg 4 W/kg
NTG7 0.08 W/kg 2 W/kg
NTG7RSU 0.07 W/kg 2 W/kg
Tablet PC SM-T230NZ	0.7 W/kg 4 W/kg
Radio data transmission telephone system	0.24 W/kg 2 W/kg

Importer information for regulatory radio components

FOR MOLDOVA ONLY:

Importer

S.C. GRAND PREMIUM S.R.L. Moldova mun. Chisinau, str. Hîncesti sos., 2/2

FOR TURKEY ONLY:

Importer

Mercedes Benz Otomotiv Ticaret ve Hizmetler A.Ş. Genel Merkez Akçaburgaz Mah. Süleyman Şah Cad. No: 6/1 34522 Esenyurt/Istanbul

FOR UKRAINE ONLY:

Importer

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Regulatory radio information  PJSC "AUTOCAPITAL" https://regulatoryradioinformation.corpinter.net/en Velyka Vasylkivska str. 15/2 01004 Kyiv Ukraine

FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM ONLY: Importer

Mercedes-Benz Cars UK Limited Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England

Importer of Mercedes-Benz vans

Mercedes-Benz Vans UK Limited Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA

Importer of Mercedes-Benz spare parts

Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics Delaware Drive, Tongwell Milton Keynes, MK15 8BA England Further information and updates are available at the following web address:   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview 

Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION PLATE   Vehicle identification plate (example: Kuwait) Vehicle manufacturer Place of manufacture 3 Manufacturing date 4 Vehicle model 5 VIN  Vehicle identification plate (example: all other countries) ① Vehicle manufacturer 2 EU general operating permit number (only for certain countries) VIN (vehicle identification number) Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight (kg) Maximum permissible gross weight of vehicle combination (kg) (only for specific countries) 6 Maximum permissible front axle load (kg) 7 Maximum permissible rear axle load (kg) a Paint code   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle identification plate, VIN and engine number overview  The data shown in the illustration is example data. VIN BELOW THE FRONT RIGHT-HAND SEAT  ① Imprinted VIN (vehicle identification number) 2 Floor covering VIN AT THE LOWER EDGE OF THE WINDSCREEN  VIN (vehicle identification number) as label The VIN as a label at the lower edge of the windscreen is only available in some countries.

ENGINE NUMBER

Further information on motor numbers can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Operating fluids

Operating fluids

Notes on operating fluids


WARNING

Risk of injury due to harmful operating fluids Operating fluids can be toxic. When using, storing and disposing of operating fluids, observe the imprints on the respective original containers. ▶ Always keep operating fluids in the sealed original container. ▶ Always keep children away from operating fluids. 

ENVIRONMENTAL NOTE

Pollution of the environment due to irresponsible disposal of operating fluids Incorrect disposal of operating fluids can cause considerable damage to the environment. Dispose of operating fluids in an environmentally responsible manner.

OPERATING FLUIDS INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING:

\- lubricants Coolant - Brake fluid • windscreen washer fluid • climate control system refrigerant Only use products approved by Mercedes-Benz. Damage caused by the use of products that have not been approved is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty or goodwill gestures. You can identify operating fluids approved by Mercedes-Benz by the following inscriptions on the container: • MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51) • MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)

FURTHER INFORMATION ON APPROVED OPERATING FLUIDS IS AVAILABLE AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:

- in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids by entering the designation - At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com • At a qualified specialist workshop

Notes on brake fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( → page 832).   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Operating fluids 

WARNING

Risk of an accident due to vapour pockets forming in the brake system The brake fluid constantly absorbs moisture from the air. This lowers the boiling point of the brake fluid. If the boiling point is too low, vapour pockets may form in the brake system when the brakes are applied hard. This impairs the braking effect. ▶ Have the brake fluid renewed at the specified intervals. Have the brake fluid regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. Only use a brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB-Freigabe or MB-Approval 331.0.

Coolant

NOTES ON COOLANT

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( → page 832).  

WARNING

Risk of fire- and injury from antifreeze If antifreeze comes into contact with hot component parts in the engine compartment, it may ignite. Allow the drive system to cool down before you top up the antifreeze. Make sure that no antifreeze spills out next to the filler opening. Thoroughly clean the antifreeze from component parts before starting the vehicle. 

NOTE

Damage caused by incorrect coolant Only use coolant that has been premixed with the required antifreeze protection.

INFORMATION ON COOLANT IS AVAILABLE AT THE FOLLOWING LOCATIONS:

• In the Mercedes-Benz Specification for Operating Fluids 320.1 - At https://operatingfluids.mercedes-benz.com • At a qualified specialist workshop  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Operating fluids 

NOTE

Overheating at high outside temperatures If an inappropriate coolant is used, the cooling system is not sufficiently protected against overheating and corrosion at high outside temperatures. Only use coolant approved for Mercedes-Benz. Observe the instructions in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Operating Fluids 320.1. Have the coolant regularly replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

PROPORTION OF ANTIFREEZE CONCENTRATE IN THE COOLING SYSTEM:

• A minimum of 50% (antifreeze protection down to about -37°C) • A maximum of 55% (antifreeze protection down to -45°C)

Notes on windscreen washer fluid

Observe the notes on operating fluids ( → page 832). 

WARNING

Risk of fire and injury from windscreen washer concentrate Windscreen washer concentrate is highly flammable. If it comes into contact with hot components, it may ignite. Make sure that windscreen washer concentrate is not spilled near to the filler opening.  

NOTE

Damage to the exterior lighting due to unsuitable windscreen washer fluid Unsuitable windscreen washer fluids may damage the plastic surface of the exterior lighting. Only use windscreen washer fluids which are also suitable for use on plastic surfaces, e.g. MB SummerFit or MB WinterFit. 

NOTE

Blocked spray nozzles caused by mixing windscreen washer fluids Do not mix MB SummerFit and MB WinterFit with other wind-screen washer fluids. Do not use distilled or de-ionised water. Otherwise, the fill level sensor may be triggered erroneously.

RECOMMENDED WINDSCREEN WASHER FLUID:

• above freezing point: e.g. MB SummerFit • below freezing point: e.g. MB WinterFit For the correct mixing ratio, refer to the information on the antifreeze container. Mix washer fluid with windscreen washer fluid all year round.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data

Vehicle data

Vehicle dimensions

THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

- Tyres Load • Condition of the suspension • Optional equipment  Height when open 2 Height HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEIGHT

Model	Height when open	Height
All models 2188 mm 1929 mm

VEHICLE LENGTH

Model

EQE 350 4863 mm or 4868 mm

All other models 4863 mm

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

All models
Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2141 mm
Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1940 mm
Vehicle height 1685 mm
Wheelbase 3030 mm
Maximum ground clearance (vehicles with steel suspension)	181 mm
Minimum ground clearance (vehicles with steel suspension)	131 mm

Vehicle dimensions (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

THE HEIGHTS SPECIFIED MAY VARY AS A RESULT OF THE FOLLOWING FACTORS:

\- Tyres  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data Load • Condition of the suspension • Optional equipment  Height when open 2 Height HEIGHT WHEN OPEN AND HEIGHT

Model	Height when open	Height
Mercedes-AMG EQE 434MATIC		2176 mm 1917 mm
Mercedes-AMG EQE 534MATIC+		2350 mm 2121 mm

VEHICLE HEIGHT

Model

Mercedes-AMG EQE 43 4MATIC 1673 mm

Mercedes-AMG EQE 53 4MATIC+ 1672 mm


VEHICLE LENGTH

Model Mercedes-AMG EQE 43 4MATIC 4881 mm Mercedes-AMG EQE 53 4MATIC+ 4879 mm

VEHICLE DIMENSIONS

All models Vehicle width including exterior mirrors 2141 mm Vehicle width excluding exterior mirrors 1931 mm Wheelbase 3030 mm Maximum ground clearance (AIRMATIC) 184 mm Minimum ground clearance (AIRMATIC) 139 mm

Weights and loads

PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE DATA:

- Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload. - Vehicle-specific weight information can be found on the vehicle identification plate. ROOF LOAD

Model	Maximum roof load
All models 100 kg

  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data

Weights and loads (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

PLEASE OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING NOTES FOR THE SPECIFIED VEHICLE DATA:

- Items of optional equipment increase the unladen weight and reduce the payload. - You will find vehicle-specific weight information on the vehicle identification plate (see the vehicle Owner's Manual).

ROOF LOAD

Model Maximum roof load All models 100 kg

Maximum design speeds

The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of the tyres. Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED

Model All models

Maximum design speed (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The following values only apply to vehicles with the AMG Driver's Package. The maximum design speed can differ from the stated figures in practice. It depends on the operating conditions, the optional equipment and the size of the tyres. Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

MAXIMUM DESIGN SPEED

Model All models

Off-road driving

Also observe the notes on driving off-road, driving in mountainous terrain and fording ( → page 337).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data 

FORDING


NOTE

Damage due to water when fording

WATER CAN ENTER THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• the maximum permissible fording depth when driving through standing water is exceeded • a bow wave forms during fording • water accumulates during fording of flowing water Do not exceed the maximum permissible fording depth and drive slowly through the water. The specified value indicates the maximum permissible fording depth for vehicles that are in roadworthy condition and for slow driving through standing water.

ROADWORTHY CONDITION:

All fluids topped up • With driver in vehicle Driving through flowing water reduces the permissible fording depth due to the accumulation of water. 

FORDING DEPTH

Model Fording depth All models 30 cm

NOTES ON THE ANGLE OF APPROACH/DEPARTURE

The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are in ready-to-drive loading condition. The values depend on the vehicle tyres and vehicle weight.

ROADWORTHY CONDITION:

• All fluids topped up • With driver in vehicle On vehicles with AIRMATIC, loads up to the maximum payload have no influence on the approach/departure angles.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data

ANGLE OF APPROACH/DEPARTURE

Model Angle of approach Angle of departure All models 18° 22.6°

Off-road driving (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

Please also observe the notes in the Owner's Manual for the vehicle on driving off-road, driving in mountainous terrain and fording.

FORDING


NOTE

Damage due to water when fording

WATER CAN ENTER THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT AND VEHICLE INTERIOR IN THE FOLLOWING CASES:

• the maximum permissible fording depth when driving through standing water is exceeded • a bow wave forms during fording • water accumulates during fording of flowing water Do not exceed the maximum permissible fording depth and drive slowly through the water. The specified value indicates the maximum permissible fording depth for vehicles that are in roadworthy condition and for slow driving through standing water.

ROADWORTHY CONDITION:

All fluids topped up  • With driver in vehicle Driving through flowing water reduces the permissible fording depth due to the accumulation of water. 

FORDING DEPTH

Model Fording depth All models 30 cm

NOTES ON THE ANGLE OF APPROACH/DEPARTURE

The specified values are maximum values for vehicles that are in ready-to-drive loading condition. The values depend on the vehicle tyres and vehicle weight.

ROADWORTHY CONDITION:

All fluids topped up • With driver in vehicle On vehicles with AIRMATIC, loads up to the maximum payload have no influence on the approach/departure angles.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data 

ANGLE OF APPROACH/DEPARTURE

Model Angle of approach Angle of departure All models 17.5° 22.1°

High-voltage battery

NOTES ON THE POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY

In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identifiers are located on the vehicle in the following places: • On the inside of the socket flap • On the charging cable connector In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier. For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section(→ page 358).    Supply type: AC Standard: EN 62196-2 Design: type 2 Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 480 V RMS Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Design: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V 3 Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Design: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V Missing values were not available at the time of going to press.

ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (EQE 300 AND EQE 350 4MATIC)

EQE 300 EQE 350 4MATIC Type Lithium-ion Usable energy content 89 kWh   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data  EQE 300 EQE 350 4MATIC

Range
Charging time - mode 4 with a maximum charging capacity of 170 kW	Approx. 32 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 22 kW charging capacity	approx. 4 h 45 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 11 kW charging capacity	approx. 9 h 15 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 7 kW charging capacity	approx. 14 h 30 min

ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (EQE 350 AND EQE 500 4MATIC)

EQE 350EQE 500 4MATIC
Type Lithium-ion
Usable energy content 90.56 kWh
Range
Charging time - mode 4 with a maximum charging capacity of 170 kW	approx. 32 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 22 kW charging capacity	approx. 4 h 45 min

EQE 350 EQE 500 4MATIC

Charging time - mode 3 with 11 kW charging capacity	Approx. 9 h 30 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 7 kW charging capacity	approx. 14 h 30 min

Charging time - mode 3 applies to AC charging from 0% to 100% of the usable energy content. Charging time - mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content. The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply. The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover ( → page 358).

High-voltage battery (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

NOTES ON THE POWER SUPPLY FOR VEHICLES WITH HIGH-VOLTAGE BATTERY

In accordance with European standard EN 17186:2019, vehicle identifiers are located on the vehicle in the following places: • On the inside of the socket flap • On the charging cable connector  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data In addition, charging stations in European countries are equipped with energy supply identifiers. You can recharge your vehicle at charging stations whose charging station identifier corresponds to the vehicle identifier. For further information on charging the high-voltage battery, refer to the "Charging the high-voltage battery" section(→ page 358).    Supply type: AC Standard: EN 62196-2 Design: type 2 Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 480 V RMS 2 Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Design: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 50 V to 500 V Supply type: DC Standard: EN 62196-3 Design: FF Plug type: charging cable socket and vehicle plug Voltage range: 200 V to 920 V Missing values were not available at the time of going to press. 

ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (MERCEDES-AMG EQE 43 4MATIC)

Mercedes-AMG EQE 43 4MATIC

Type Lithium-ion Usable energy content 90.56 kWh Range Charging time - mode 4 Approx. 32 min with a maximum charging capacity of 170 kW Charging time - mode 3 approx. 4 h 45 min with 22 kW charging capacity Charging time - mode 3 approx. 9 h 15 min with 11 kW charging capacity

ENERGY CONTENT AND CHARGING TIMES (MERCEDES-AMG EQE 534MATIC+)

Mercedes-AMG EQE 53 4MATIC+

Type Lithium-Ion Usable energy content 90.56 kWh Range Charging time - mode 4 Approx. 32 min with a maximum charging capacity of 170 kW Charging time - mode 3 with 22 kW charging capacity  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Vehicle data Mercedes-AMG EQE 53 4MATIC+

Charging time - mode 3 with 11 kW charging capacity	Approx. 9 h 30 min
Charging time - mode 3 with 7 kW charging capacity	approx. 14 h 30 min

Charging time - mode 3 applies to AC charging from 0% to 100% of the usable energy content. Charging time - mode 4 applies to DC charging from 10% to 80% of the usable energy content. The time taken to charge the battery depends on the state of charge of the battery, the ambient temperature and the charging capacity of the battery. The charging capacity, in turn, depends on the supply voltage, the current intensity and the type of power supply. The nominal voltage range for your vehicle can be found on the information label in the socket cover.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Trailer hitch 

< Trailer hitch

General notes on the trailer hitch

Modifications to the cooling system may be necessary, depending on the vehicle model. The retrofitting of a trailer hitch is only permissible if a trailer load is specified in the vehicle documents. Further information can be obtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Mounting dimensions of the trailer hitch

 Fastening points 2 Overhang dimension 3 Rear axle centre line The overhang dimension and fastening points are valid for a trailer hitch installed at the factory.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Trailer hitch OVERHANG DIMENSION LENGTH

Model	Overhang dimension
All models 1047 mm

Towing capacity

The drawbar load is not included in the towing capacity. TOWING CAPACITY, BRAKED (AT A MINIMUM START-OFF GRADEABILITY OF 12 %)

Model Towing capacity, braked
EQE 300	750 kg
EQE 350
EQE 350 4MATIC	1800 kg
EQE 500 4MATIC

TOWING CAPACITY, UNBRAKED

Model	Towing capacity, unbraked
All models 750 kg

Trailer load (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)

The drawbar load is not included in the towing capacity. 

TOWING CAPACITY, BRAKED (AT A MINIMUM START-OFF GRADEABILITY OF 12 %)

Model Towing capacity, braked All models 1800 kg

TOWING CAPACITY, UNBRAKED

Model Towing capacity, unbraked All models 750 kg

Maximum tongue weight- and load capacity

NOTE

Damage caused by the trailer coming loose If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg. Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight.

1 NOTE

Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed. Do not exceed the permissible load capacity.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Trailer hitch Observe the additional notes on load capacity ( → page 491). TONGUE WEIGHT Model Maximum tongue weight All models 100 kg LOAD CAPACITY All models Maximum load capacity

When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head and additionally to the guide pin	100 kg

Maximum tongue- weight and load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)


NOTE

Damage caused by the trailer coming loose If the tongue weight used is too low, the trailer may come loose. The tongue weight must not be below 50 kg. Use a tongue weight that is as close as possible to the maximum permissible tongue weight. 

NOTE

Damage caused by the bicycle rack coming loose When using a bicycle rack, both the maximal tongue weight and the maximal load capacity should be observed. Do not exceed the permissible load capacity. TONGUE WEIGHT Model Maximum tongue weight All models 75 kg LOAD CAPACITY

All models Maximum load capacity
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head	75 kg
When attaching the bicycle rack to the ball head and additionally to the guide pin	100 kg

Permissible axle load, rear axle

AXLE LOAD WHEN TOWING TRAILER

Model	Axle load
All models 1780 kg

EQE - Owner's Manual > Technical data Trailer hitch Permissible axle load, rear axle (Mercedes-AMG vehicles) AXLE LOAD WHEN TOWING TRAILER Model Axle load All models 1835 kg   Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps 

< Display messages and warning/indicator lamps

This interactive PDF works like a website - tap or click a button to jump straight to where you want to go. You can return here at any time via the navigation bar at the top left. Display messages 849 Warning and indicator lamps 920 EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages

Introduction

INFORMATION ABOUT DISPLAY MESSAGES

Display messages appear on the driver's display. Display messages with graphical symbols are simplified in the Owner's Manual and may differ from the symbols on the driver's display. The driver's display shows high-priority display messages in red. Certain display messages are accompanied by a warning tone. Please act in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes in the Owner's Manual.

FOR SOME DISPLAY MESSAGES, SYMBOLS WILL ALSO BE SHOWN:

- ① Further information - × Hide display message With the left-hand Touch Control, you can select the respective symbol by swiping to the left or right. Pressing ① displays further information on the central display. Press the × symbol to hide the display message. Display messages to be acknowledged can be hidden by pressing the back button ↩ or with the left-hand Touch Control. The display messages will then be stored in the message memory. Rectify the cause of a display message as quickly as possible. High-priority display messages cannot be hidden. The driver's display will show these display messages continuously until the cause of the display message has been rectified.

CALLING UP SAVED DISPLAY MESSAGES

Driver's display:  The Message memory: XXmessage appears on the driver's display. Scroll through the display messages by swiping upwards or downwards on the left-hand Touch Control. To exit the display: press the ← back button.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Occupant safety

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop * The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 149). 

DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Front left malfunction Consult workshop ^{^} The restraint system is malfunctioning ( → page 149).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Front right malfunction Consult workshop * The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 149).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Second row of seats, left Malfunction Consult workshop * The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 149).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Second row of seats, right Malfunction Consult workshop * The restraint system is malfunctioning (→ page 149).  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately.

RECOGNITION OF A RESTRAINT SYSTEM FAULT:

The restraint system warning lamp does not light up when the vehicle is switched on The restraint system warning lamp lights up continuously or repeatedly during a journey Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Left window airbag malfunction Consult workshop ^* The restraint system is malfunctioning ( → page 149). 

WARNING

Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Right window airbag malfunction Consult workshop ^{^} The restraint system is malfunctioning ( → page 149). 

WARNING

Risk of injury or fatal injury due to a malfunction in the windowbag The windowbag might be triggered unintentionally or might not be triggered at all in the event of an accident. Have the windowbag checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual * The front passenger airbag has been disabled even though an adult or a person of adult build is on the front passenger seat. If additional forces are applied to the seat, the weight the system detects may be too low. 

WARNING

\- Risk of injury or even fatal injury when the front passenger airbag is disabled If the front passenger airbag is disabled, It will not be deployed in the event of an accident and cannot perform its intended protective function. A person in the front passenger seat could then, for example, come into contact with the vehicle interior, especially if the person is sitting too close to the dashboard. Be aware of the status of the front passenger airbag both before and during the journey. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( → page 150). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual

^ THE FRONT PASSENGER AIRBAG WILL BE ENABLED WHILE THE VEHICLE IS IN MOTION IN THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS:

even when a child, a small adult or an object weighing less than the system weight threshold is located on the front passenger seat • even when the front passenger seat is not occupied The system may detect objects or forces that are adding to the weight applied to the seat.

WARNING

Risk of injury or death when using a child restraint system while the front passenger airbag is enabled If you secure a child in a child restraint system on the front passenger seat and the front passenger airbag is enabled, the front passenger airbag can deploy in the event of an accident. The child could be struck by the airbag. ▶ Ensure, both before and during the journey, that the status of the front passenger airbag is correct. NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Make sure that no objects are trapped under the front passenger seat. Check the status of the automatic front passenger airbag shutoff ( → page 150). If necessary, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Occupant presence reminder inoperative * The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Do not leave persons or animals in the vehicle ^a The occupant presence reminder suspects that there are persons or animals in the rear of the vehicle. Do not leave any persons or animals behind when leaving the vehicle.

Key

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Replace key * Have the key replaced. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Change key batteries * The key battery is discharged. Replace the battery ( → page 198).  Key not detected (white display message) * The key is currently undetected. Change the location of the key in the vehicle. Try to start the vehicle. If the key is still not detected, place it in the slot for starting with the key ( → page 334). Start the vehicle.  Key not detected (red display message) The key can no longer be detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.

IF THE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:

You can no longer start the vehicle.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. Ensure that the key is in the vehicle. If the key is in the vehicle and is still not detected: ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key ( → page 334). The key battery is weak or discharged. Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( → page 195). Replace the key battery, if necessary ( → page 198).  Key being taught in Please wait Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual ^a The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new key. ▶ Wait until processing is complete. * Key detection is malfunctioning. Change the location of the key in the vehicle. Place the key in the slot for starting the engine with the key ( → page 334). Please place key in the cup holder or Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket See Owner's Manual * The key was not detected. Place the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334). If the key is still not detected: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The Digital Vehicle Key has not been detected.  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Key not detected Place the Digital Vehicle Key in the stowage space ( → page 332). If the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The key or the Digital Vehicle Key is currently undetected. Change the location of the key or the Digital Vehicle Key in the vehicle. Try to start the vehicle. If the key is still not detected, place the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334). If the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected, place the Digital Vehicle Key in the stowage space ( → page 332). Start the vehicle. * The key or the Digital Vehicle Key are no longer detected during a journey and may no longer be in the vehicle.

IF THE KEY OR THE DIGITAL VEHICLE KEY IS NO LONGER IN THE VEHICLE AND YOU SWITCH OFF THE VEHICLE:

 Key not detected Place Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket You can no longer start the vehicle. You cannot centrally lock the vehicle. Ensure that the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle. If the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is in the vehicle and is still not detected: Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Place the key in the stowage compartment ( → page 334). Place the Digital Vehicle Key in the stowage space ( → page 332). The key battery is weak or discharged.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Check the battery using the indicator lamp ( → page 195). Replace the key battery, if necessary ( → page 198). The charge status of the rechargeable battery of the end device with the Digital Vehicle Key is too low. Immediately charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key end device. Otherwise, it may not be possible to restart the vehicle after it has been switched off. If the key or the Digital Vehicle Key is still not detected: Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Replace key See Owner's Manual * If the Digital Vehicle Key is not renewed, the vehicle cannot be unlocked/locked or started. The system automatically renews the Digital Vehicle Key. When the renewal is complete, the message disappears and the Digital Vehicle Key is available again.  Do not forget key * A warning tone will also sound. This message reminds you to take your key with you when you leave the vehicle. This also applies to the Digital Vehicle Key.  Digital Vehicle Key Charge device * The charge status of the rechargeable battery of the end device with the Digital Vehicle Key is too low. Immediately charge the rechargeable battery of the Digital Vehicle Key end device.  Key being taught in Please wait * The vehicle is processing in order to teach in the new Digital Vehicle Key. ▶ Wait until processing is complete.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Key does not belong to vehicle * The vehicle cannot be unlocked/locked or started. Use the Digital Vehicle Key belonging to the vehicle.

Lights

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Malfunction See Owner's Manual * The exterior lighting is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Vehicles with a trailer hitch: a fuse may have blown. ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. ▶ Check the fuses and replace them if necessary ( → page 78).  Automatic driving lights inoperative * The light sensor for automatic driving lights is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Switch on headlamps ^a You are driving without low-beam headlamps. Turn the light switch to the ND or AUTO position.  Switch off lights * You are leaving the vehicle and the lights are still switched on. Turn the light switch to the AUTO position. DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited * The DIGITAL LIGHT system is malfunctioning. The lighting system will continue to work even without the functions of the DIGITAL LIGHT system. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

	Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic)	* The type of traffic has been selected manually.
	Check the setting and change it manually if necessary (→ page 293).
Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only	* The automatic headlamp conversion for left-hand/right-hand traffic has malfunctioned.
	Change the headlamps over manually (→ page 293).
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbeam Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 289).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbam Assist available again display message will appear.
	Drive onOperate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist is available again.
Adaptive Highbam Assist inoperative	* Adaptive Highbam Assist is malfunctioning.
	Drive onorStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.Until then, operate the high beam manually.
Adaptive Highbam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Adaptive Highbam Assist Plus is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 291).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. The Adaptive Highbam Assist Plus available again display message will appear.Drive on


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative Operate the high beam manually until Adaptive High Beam Assist Plus is available again. * Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus is malfunctioning. Drive on or ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. ▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Until then, operate the high beam manually. Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction * The hazard warning lamp switch is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Front left parking lights * The front left parking light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Front right parking lights * The front right parking light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Left low beam * The left low beam is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right low beam * The right low beam is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Left main beam * The left high beam is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right main beam * The right high beam is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Left daytime running lights * The left daytime running lights are malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right daytime running lights * The right-hand daytime running lights are malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Left cornering light * The left cornering light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right cornering light * The right cornering light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Front left turn signal * The front left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Rear left turn signal * The rear left turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Front right turn signal * The front right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Rear right turn signal * The rear right turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Left mirror turn signal * The turn signal lamp on the left mirror is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right mirror turn signal * The turn signal lamp on the right mirror is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Left brake lamp * The left brake light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right brake lamp * The right brake light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Third brake lamp * The third brake light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Left tail light * The left tail light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Right tail light * The right tail light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Reversing light * The reversing light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Rear fog light * The rear fog light is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Number plate lamp * The number plate lamp is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Trailer left turn signal * The left turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Trailer right turn signal ^a The right turn signal lamp on the trailer is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Trailer brake lamp * The brake light on the trailer is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Trailer tail light * A tail light on the trailer is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Inoperative indicator lamp in driver display. Consult workshop * An indicator lamp on the driver's display is defective. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Currently unavailable High-voltage battery charging incomplete. * The high-voltage battery is charging. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. Wait until the charging process has achieved a minimum state of charge.  Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage battery * The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. Charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358).  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Pre-entry climate control via key available again after starting vehicle  Pre-entry climate control via key currently unavailable. High-voltage battery low * You have attempted to switch on pre-entry climate control more than three times with the vehicle switched off. Start the vehicle for ten seconds. Pre-entry climate control is operational again. * The charge of the high-voltage battery is too low. Pre-entry climate control cannot be switched on. Charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358). When the high-voltage battery is sufficiently charged, pre-entry climate control will be operational again.

Drive system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual * The drive system is malfunctioning. Have the vehicle transported only using a transporter or trailer ( → page 739).  Acoustic presence indicator inoperative * The sound generator (acoustic vehicle warning system) is malfunctioning. No vehicle noises are being produced. The vehicle may not be heard by other road users. Drive with particular care. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times * You have pressed the start/stop button while the vehicle is in motion. To switch off the drive system while the vehicle is in motion ( → page 331). Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual * It is not possible to start the vehicle.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Top up coolant See Owner's Manual A malfunction has occurred in the drive system. Switch the vehicle off and lock it. After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again. If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The coolant level is too low. 

NOTE

Damage to the drive system due to insufficient coolant ▶ Avoid long journeys with insufficient coolant. Have the cooling system of the drive system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.  Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle * The coolant is too hot. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of injury due to overheated vehicle

IF YOU OPEN THE BONNET IN THE EVENT OF AN OVERHEATED VEHICLE OR FIRE IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT, THE FOLLOWING SITUATIONS MAY OCCUR:

• You may come into contact with hot gases. • You may come into contact with other escaping hot operating fluids. In the event of overheating or fire in the engine compartment, keep the bonnet closed and call the fire service. Allow the overheated vehicle to cool down first if you need to open the bonnet. ▶ Wait until the drive system has cooled down. Make sure that the air supply to the vehicle radiator is not obstructed. Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.  * The cooling system has detected a component fault. Avoiding high loads on the drive system, drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop. Socket flap blocked Please open manually * The socket flap is not opening automatically. An obstruction may be hindering the opening process. Make sure that no objects are in the opening area. Open the socket flap again. The socket flap is not closing automatically. An obstruction may be hindering the closing process. Make sure that no objects are in the closing area. Close the socket flap again.   Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Please close socket flap manually. Automatic function inoperative	^ The socket flap is not closing automatically. The motor of the socket flap may be defective. ▶ Close the socket flap manually. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Charger cable connected	* You cannot pull away while the charging cable is connected. ▶ Disconnect the charging cable from the vehicle.
Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual	* The charging cable connector cannot be removed from the charging station's socket. ▶ Press the EMERGENCY OFF switch on the charging station. If the charging cable connector cannot be removed after that: ▶ Request service personnel from the operator of the charging station via the emergency call button or the emergency numbers attached to the charging station.
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault	* A malfunction has occurred in the charging station or the RFID card is not recognised. ▶ Start the charging process at a different charging station. or ▶ Have the RFID card checked to ensure it is functioning.
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual	^ A temporary malfunction has occurred in the charging station. ▶ Wait until the malfunction has passed. or ▶ Start the charging process at a different charging station.
AC charging inoperative Consult workshop	* The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction. ▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

  Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

DC charging inoperative Consult work- shop	a The charging process cannot be started due to a malfunction.►Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual	* The drive system is outside the normal operating temperature range, e.g. due to extremely low or high outside temperatures.Drive system power output is reduced. The yellowreduced-power warning lamp is on.Once the operating temperature of the drive system returns to normal (e.g. after a short trip), the full output will be available again. The display message and the yellowreduced-power warning lamp will go out.Drive on carefully. a The high-voltage battery is not charged sufficiently.Drive system power output is reduced. The yellowreduced-power warning lamp is on.Drive on carefully.Charge the high-voltage battery immediately. a If the drive system power output is still reduced, there is a fault in the drive system.Drive on carefully.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Please charge the high-voltage battery. Otherwise the vehicle may not start	a Due to a possible drop in temperature of the high-voltage battery, the starting ability or the range may drop significantly until the vehicle is restarted.Charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358).
Please wait in READY status Warming bat- tery See Owner's Manual	a Operational readiness is establishedin the transmission positionis engaged.The high-voltage battery is warmed up to the operating temperature. This process can take a few minutes and may be prolonged if defrostling of the windscreenis activated.The heating process ends when transmission positionis engaged. However, when you are driving, the output will be significantly limited until the high-volt-age battery has reached its operating temperature.
Preparing drive system...	a The insulation of the drive system is being tested. This process can last for up to ten seconds.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Battery capacity too low Stop Charge immediately ^ The charge level of the high-voltage battery is so low that it is no longer possible to drive the vehicle. The drive system can no longer be restarted. When the drive system is restarted, the message Battery capacity too low Stop Charge immediately will appear again. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358).  Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible * The high-voltage battery has overheated. There is a risk of fire. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. If possible, stop the vehicle in the open air and ensure that all vehicle occupants get out. Supporting vehicle functions may activate automatically, e.g. air-recirculation mode as part of climate control. Do not continue driving. If smoke is present, leave the danger zone and call the fire service immediately. Consult a qualified specialist workshop even if there are no external signs of a fire.  Malfunction * The drive system is malfunctioning. A warning tone will also sound. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Malfunction Visit workshop ^a The drive system is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Have high-voltage system checked See Owner's Manual Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again ^a A function restriction has occurred in the drive system. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * It is not possible to restart the drive system due to a malfunction. Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.  Output and range reduced See Owner's Manual * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. Output and range will be severely restricted. Switch the vehicle off and lock it. After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again. If the display message appears again: Drive on carefully. Fully charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358). If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual * It is not possible to start the vehicle. A malfunction has occurred in the drive system. Switch the vehicle off and lock it. After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again.  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Drive malfunction Achievable speed limited Stop soon If the display message appears again and the vehicle does not start, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The drive system is malfunctioning. The maximum vehicle speed is restricted. The drive system will shut off within a few kilometres. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving. Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Drive malfunction Achievable speed severely limited See Owner's Manual * The drive system is malfunctioning. The maximum vehicle speed is restricted. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Reserve level Charge high-voltage battery * The charge level of the high-voltage battery has dropped into the reserve range. Charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358).  Malfunction * The drive system is malfunctioning. The output of your vehicle is restricted. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Stop Switch off the vehicle * The drive system is malfunctioning. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the drive system. Do not continue driving. Do not tow the vehicle; stop towing if necessary. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Malfunction Visit workshop * The drive system is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Performance severely limited * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. Output and range will be severely restricted. ▶ Switch the vehicle off and lock it. After waiting for a short time, unlock the vehicle and start it again. If the display message appears again: Drive on carefully. ▶ Fully charge the high-voltage battery ( → page 358). If the output and range are still reduced, there is a malfunction in the drive system. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (yellow display message) * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered. Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out at a qualified specialist workshop. High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (red display message) * A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It will no longer be possible to start the electric drive system after the distance displayed has been covered. Have the necessary maintenance work on the high-voltage battery carried out immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

High-voltage battery malfunction. Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again ^a A malfunction has occurred in the high-voltage battery. It will no longer be possible to restart the drive system once it has been switched off. Do not switch off the drive system; drive on to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 ^a The driver's display is inoperative due to a failed software update. The display message will be shown every time the engine is started. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to failure of the driver display In the event that the driver display fails or malfunctions, you will not recognise function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety. This may impair operating safety. Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible and notify a qualified specialist workshop. If the driver's display fails, you may not recognise function restrictions affecting systems relevant to safety or the speed display, for example. The operating safety of the vehicle may be impaired ( → page 571). Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in a few minutes ^ You are leaving the vehicle in a ready-to-drive state. Get out of the vehicle, secure it against rolling away and take the key with you. If you do not leave the vehicle, switch off the electrical consumers, e.g. the seat heating. Otherwise, the 12-V battery may discharge and starting the engine may be possible only with the help of a second battery (jump start).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Restricted mode activated Drive performance reduced * When the beginner driver mode is activated, the drive power is reduced (→ page 403).  Trailer coupling Check lock (white display message) * The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer. 

WARNING

Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears. ▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. Initiate a new swivel movement ( → page 64). When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational. Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away. If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck ( → page 64).

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage. If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck ( → page 64). Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Trailer coupling Check lock(red display message) * The trailer hitch is not operational during a journey with a trailer.

WARNING

Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. ▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears. ▶ Stop immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch off the vehicle. Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. Initiate a new swivel movement ( → page 64). When the display message disappears, couple up the trailer and drive on. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * When the vehicle is stationary with a coupled trailer, the trailer hitch is not operational. Uncouple the coupled trailer and secure it against rolling away. If the ball neck has been folded in: unlock the ball neck ( → page 64). Swivel the ball neck into the end position manually and let it engage. If the ball neck has been folded out: unlock the ball neck ( → page 64). Swivel the ball neck beneath the bumper manually and let it engage. If the display message does not disappear, the trailer hitch is malfunctioning and the ball neck is not locked. Do not couple up the trailer. Drive on without the trailer. Note the reduced ground clearance due to the unlocked ball neck. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE. POSSIBLE CAUSES: • malfunctions in the power supply signal interference Stop in accordance with the traffic conditions and switch the vehicle off and on again. If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up display inoperative * The head-up display has an internal error. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Head-up display Brightness currently reduced See Owner's Manual * THE BRIGHTNESS OF THE HEAD-UP DISPLAY IS REDUCED. POSSIBLE CAUSES: \- Dirt on the windscreen in the camera's field of vision 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop  Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual • Faulty exterior brightness signals Switch on the windscreen wipers. Clean the windscreen If necessary. Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop. * A power steering malfunction has occurred. Steering characteristics may be impaired as a result. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The power steering assistance is malfunctioning.  Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual

A WARNING

Risk of an accident due to altered steering characteristics If the power assistance of the steering fails partially or completely, you will need to use more force to steer. If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. If safe steering is possible, drive on carefully. Visit or consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The steering is malfunctioning. Steering capability is significantly impaired. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. ▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Rear axle steering currently malfunctioning * The rear-axle steering is temporarily unavailable. The turning circle may become wider. Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit workshop The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be at an angle when you drive in a straight line. Adapt your speed and drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop Immediately. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop immediately * The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. The rear axle has no steering capability. The steering wheel may be tilted considerably when you drive in a straight line. Depending on the steering wheel's tilted position, the steering wheel will also vibrate and a continuous warning tone will sound. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. When stopping, bear the enlarged vehicle width in mind. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Snow chain mode Maximum speed exceeded * The maximum permissible speed for snow chain mode has been exceeded. Drive more slowly. Ambient light warning support inoperative * The ambient lighting may not provide full visual warning support. Lock the vehicle and unlock it again after a few minutes. If the display message appears regularly, contact a qualified specialist workshop.  * At least one door is open. Close all doors.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 ^a The bonnet is open. 

WARNING

Risk of accident due to driving with the bonnet unlocked The bonnet may open and block your view. ▶ Never release the bonnet when driving. Before every trip, ensure that the engine bonnet is locked. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  * The tailgate is open. Close the tailgate.  * The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has dropped below the minimum. Top up the washer fluid ( → page 50). Top up washer fluid  * The washer fluid filler flap is open. Close washer fluid filler flap ( → page 50). Washer fluid flap open Wiper Malfunction * The windscreen wiper is malfunctioning. ▶ Restart the vehicle.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

If the display message still appears: Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Transmission

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Only select P when vehicle is stationary * It is possible to select the park position P only if the vehicle is stationary. Depress the brake pedal to stop. Shift the transmission to park position P when the vehicle is stationary. Apply brake to deselect P position ^ You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P and into another transmission position. Depress the brake pedal. Select transmission position [D], [R] or neutral [N]. Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out of P or N * You have attempted to shift the transmission out of park position P or neutral N and into another transmission position. Depress the brake pedal. Start the vehicle. Change the transmission position. Apply brake to engage D or R * You have attempted to select transmission position D or R. Depress the brake pedal. Select transmission position D or R. Apply brake to engage R * You have attempted to select transmission position R. Depress the brake pedal. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

	Select transmission position [R].
Apply parking brake to park Visit work-shop	*A malfunction has occurred in the emergency power supply to park position [P].Consult a qualified specialist workshop.Until then, always select park position [P] manually before you switch off the vehicle.Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.
Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door open Transmission not in P	* The driver's door is not fully closed and transmission position [D, R] or neutral [N] is selected.The vehicle may roll away.Select park position [P] when switching off the vehicle.
Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake to park	* The transmission is malfunctioning. Park position [P] cannot be selected.Park the vehicle safely.Use the electric parking brake to secure the vehicle against rolling away.On gradients, turn the front wheels so that the vehicle will roll towards the kerb if it starts moving.
Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P	* While the vehicle was at a standstill or driving at very low speed, neutral [N] was engaged with the drive system or the vehicle switched on.
	!NOTEDamage to the vehicle due to rolling awayWhen the vehicle is switched off or the driver's door is opened, automatic engagement of park position [P] is deactivated.The vehicle may roll away.Be ready to brake.Do not leave the vehicle unattended.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

	▶ Depress the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a standstill.
	▶ Engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
	▶ To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position D or R.
N automatically activated Please engage transmission position again	* Neutral N was automatically engaged when the vehicle was rolling or being driven.
	i When you open the driver's door in neutral N, park position P will be engaged automatically.
	▶ Engage park position P when the vehicle is stationary with the brake pedal depressed.
	▶ To continue driving with the brake pedal depressed, select transmission position D or R.
N is selected Please select desired trans-mission position	* The accelerator pedal was depressed while the vehicle was rolling or moving in neutral N.
	▶ To accelerate the vehicle, select transmission position D or R.
Reversing not pass. Consult workshop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is not possible to select transmission position R.
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Malfunction Stop	* The transmission is malfunctioning. The transmission shifts to neutral N automatically.
	▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions.
	▶ Depress the brake pedal.
	▶ Engage park position P.
	▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position	* The transmission is malfunctioning. It is no longer possible to change the transmission position.
	▶ If transmission position D is selected, consult a qualified specialist workshop and do not change the transmission position.
	▶ For all other transmission positions, park the vehicle safely.

 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message) * There is a malfunction in the auxiliary battery. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Until then, always select park position P manually before you switch off the vehicle. Before leaving the vehicle, apply the electric parking brake.

Brakes

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Parking brake See Owner's Manual * The yellow indicator lamp is lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To apply:

Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Apply the electric parking brake manually ( → page 388). If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake: Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. ^ The yellow (F) indicator lamp and the red (P) indicator lamp are lit. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

To release:

Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Release the electric parking brake manually ( → page 388). or  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Release the electric parking brake automatically ( → page 387). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. The yellow 📄 indicator lamp is lit and the red 📄 indicator lamp is flashing. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning. The electric parking brake could not be applied or released. ▶ Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on

To apply:

Release and then apply the electric parking brake manually ( → page 388).

To release:

Apply and then release the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake or the red indicator lamp continues to flash: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away. * The yellow 📋 indicator lamp is lit and the red 📋 indicator lamp flashes for approximately ten seconds after the electric parking brake has been applied or released. It then remains lit or goes out. The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.

If the state of charge is too low:

Charge the 12 V battery.

To apply:

Apply the electric parking brake manually. If it is not possible to apply the electric parking brake:  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Where necessary, also secure the parked vehicle against rolling away.

To release:

If the conditions for automatic release are fulfilled and the electric parking brake is not released automatically, release the electric parking brake manually ( → page 388). If it is still not possible to release the electric parking brake: Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Release parking brake * The red 📄 indicator lamp is flashing.

THE ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE IS APPLIED WHILE YOU ARE DRIVING:

A condition for automatic release of the electric parking brake has not been fulfilled ( → page 387). • You are performing emergency braking using the electric parking brake ( → page 389). Check the conditions for automatic release of the electric parking brake. Release the electric parking brake manually.  Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release * The red [E] indicator lamp is lit. You have attempted to release the electric parking brake with the vehicle switched off. Switch on the vehicle.  Brake immediately * A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function was activated. A horn may also sound at regular intervals. You cannot start the vehicle system. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Malfunction See Owner's Manual Immediately depress the brake pedal firmly until the display message disappears. You cannot start the vehicle system again. * The brake force boosting function is impaired. Hill Start Assist may be impaired. 

WARNING

Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. Drive on carefully. ▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The brake force boosting function is impaired and the braking characteristics may be affected.  Malfunction Stop vehicle 

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Check brake fluid level Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

WARNING

Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. - Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Do not top up the brake fluid. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Check brake pads See Owner's Manual * The brakepads have reached the wear limit. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Driving and driving safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

  currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP ⁴ ) * ABS and ESP* are temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be temporarily unavailable. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. 

WARNING

Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP ⁴ are malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilisation. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. ▶ Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully.   inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP ^® ) * ABS and ESP ^c are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of skidding if ABS and ESP ^® are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Drive on carefully. Have ABS and ESP ^® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ESP®) * ESP* is temporarily unavailable. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. 

WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP is malfunctioning* If ESP ^* is malfunctioning, ESP ^* cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. Drive carefully on a suitable stretch of road, making slight steering movements at a speed above 30 km/h. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP ⁴ ) If the display message does not disappear, consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. Drive carefully. * ESP ^* is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. The brake system will continue to operate normally. Braking distance may increase in an emergency braking situation. 

WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP ^* is malfunctioning If ESP ^c is malfunctioning, ESP ^* cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Drive on carefully. Have ESP ^® checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.    inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD, ABS and ESP®) ^a EBD, ABS and ESP ^e are malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of skidding if EBD, ABS and ESP ^b are malfunctioning The wheels may block during braking and ESP ^® does not perform any vehicle stabilization. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Drive on carefully. ▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.  Off Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break! * The HOLD function is deactivated because the vehicle is slipping or a condition for activation is not fulfilled. Reactivate the HOLD function later or check the activation conditions for the HOLD function ( → page 401). * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigue or an increasing lack of concentration on the part of the driver ( → page 404). If necessary, take a break.  ATTENTION ASSIST Microsleep Take a break! * ATTENTION ASSIST has detected indicators of microsleep (→ page 404). A warning tone will also sound. Take a break. Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages  Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

ATTENTION ASSIST Remain alert! (white display message)

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected that the driver is looking away from the traffic situation (→ page 404).A warning tone will also sound.▶ Look back at the traffic situation.

ATTENTION ASSIST Remain alert! (yellow display message)

* ATTENTION ASSIST has detected that the driver is not looking at the traffic situation after the warning has been issued (→ page 404).A continuous warning tone will also sound.▶ Immediately return your gaze to the traffic situation.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.If the driver still does not react to the warning, an emergency stop can be initiated by the system (→ page 423).

 -km/h Cruise control inoperative ^ Cruise control cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. Observe the activation conditions for cruise control ( → page 408). Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Cruise control and the limiter are malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Cruise control and Limiter inoperative Cruise control off * Cruise control has been deactivated. If there is an additional warning tone, cruise control has been deactivated automatically ( → page 406).  ---km/h * The limiter can temporarily not be engaged. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 passive ^ If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the point of resistance (kickdown), the limiter will be switched to passive mode (→ page 407). Limiter inoperative * The limiter is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Speed Limit Assist is temporarily unavailable. Drive on Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. Speed Limit Assist inoperative * Speed Limit Assist is malfunctioning. Drive on or \- Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. - If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h * You have reached the maximum permissible stored speed for winter tyres. It is not possible to exceed this speed. 120km/h! Maximum speed exceeded * You have exceeded the maximum permissible speed (for certain countries only). Drive more slowly. Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Traffic Sign Assist is temporarily unavailable. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again. Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations. Traffic Sign Assist inoperative * Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Continue driving in compliance with the traffic regulations. or - Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. - If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h ^A AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.

NOTE

The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Drive in a manner appropriate for the current level, but do not exceed 80 km/h. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h * AMG RIDE CONTROL + Is malfunctioning. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected. No faster than 80 km/h. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. AMG Ride Control Function limited See Owner's Manual * At least one of the main functions of AMG RIDE CONTROL + is malfunctioning. The system is outside the operating temperature range or the on-board electrical system voltage is too low. Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

NOTE

The vehicle's suspension and damping behaviour is restricted. The vehicle body may tilt heavily to the side during cornering. Drive on carefully. ▶ Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend. Avoid sudden steering movements. Drive on carefully. Reduce speed considerably before taking a bend. Avoid sudden steering movements.  STOP Vehicle level too low * You have pulled away despite the vehicle level being too low. ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away. If the display message does not disappear and a warning tone also sounds, AIRMATIC is malfunctioning: No faster than 80 km/h and consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


NOTE

The tyres on the front axle or the fenders could be damaged by large steering movements Avoid large steering movements while driving and listen for scraping sounds. If you hear scraping sounds, pull over and stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions, and set a higher vehicle level if possible. Set a higher vehicle level ( → page 451, 448). Depending on the malfunction, the vehicle will be raised.  Lowering

* THE VEHICLE LEVEL WILL LOWER FOR THE FOLLOWING REASONS:

You have selected a different drive program. You have exceeded the speed limit. You have changed the vehicle level by pressing the button. Operation with a trailer or bicycle rack: if an electrical connection has been correctly made, you have exceeded the speed limit.  Rising * Your vehicle is adjusting to the level you have selected.  Vehicle rising Please wait * The vehicle level is too low. The vehicle will be raised to the selected vehicle level. Wait until the display message disappears before pulling away.  Max. speed 20km/h * AIRMATIC is functioning only to a limited extent. The current level is too high. The vehicle's handling characteristics may be affected.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Compressor is cooling No faster than 20 km/h. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * Due to frequent level changes within a short space of time, the compressor first needs to cool down in order to set the selected vehicle level. When the compressor has cooled down, the vehicle will continue rising to the selected vehicle level. Drive on in a manner appropriate for the current level. Make sure that there is sufficient ground clearance.  Reduce speed * You are driving too fast for the selected vehicle level. Drive more slowly and then select the desired vehicle level again. You are driving too quickly with a trailer or the trailer hitch socket is being used, e.g. for a rear bicycle rack. Read the notes on trailer operation.  Not in curr. drive prog. * The Downhill Speed Regulation is not available in the currently selected drive program. Change the drive program.  inoperative * The Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Max. speed 40 km/h * The maximum speed of 40 km/h for the Downhill Speed Regulation has been exceeded. Drive more slowly. RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual * POSSIBLE CAUSES: The activation conditions have not been fulfilled ( → page 453). EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

RACE START cancelled

^A POSSIBLE CAUSES:

• you released the accelerator pedal during RACE START. • you depressed the brake pedal during RACE START. You can try RACE START again at the next start.

Driver assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 ---km/h * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC cannot be activated as not all activation conditions are fulfilled. Comply with the activation conditions of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 413).  suspended * If you depress the accelerator pedal beyond the setting of Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC, the system will switch to passive mode (→ page 410).  Off * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC was deactivated. If a warning tone also sounds, Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC has deactivated automatically ( → page 413). Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( → page 410). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Drive on carefully. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

or If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. Active Distance Assist inoperative * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. Drive on carefully. or ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. ▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Distance Assist available again * Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC is operational again. Switch on Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC ( → page 413). Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual * FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE: • Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function Evasive Steering Assist PRE-SAFE® PLUS Vehicles with Blind Spot Assist: PRE-SAFE® PLUS is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( → page 427). Drive on carefully. As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. or If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual ^A FOR VEHICLES WITH THE DRIVING ASSISTANCE PACKAGE, THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS MAY BE TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE OR ONLY PARTIALLY AVAILABLE: Active Brake Assist with cross-traffic function • Evasive Steering Assist PRE-SAFE® PLUS Drive on carefully. or Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear; consult a qualified specialist workshop. Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( → page 421). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Drive on ▶ Check the tyre pressure If necessary. Active Steering Assist inoperative * Active Steering Assist is malfunctioning. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC remains available. Drive on or Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.  * Active Steering Assist has reached the system limits (→ page 421). You have not steered independently for a considerable period of time. Take over the steering and drive on in accordance with the traffic conditions.  

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops * Active Steering Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Active Steering Assist is available once more.  Beginning emergency stop * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. Active Steering Assist will initiate an emergency stop (→ page 421). Put your hands on the steering wheel. Information on cancelling an emergency stop ( → page 423). Active Emergency Stop Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual * Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable. The ambient conditions are outside the system limits ( → page 423). As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again. Drive on or If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. ^ Vehicles without the Driving Assistance Package: Active Emergency Stop Assist is temporarily unavailable due to multiple emergency stops. Take over the steering and stop in accordance with the traffic conditions. Switch the vehicle off and switch it back on Active Emergency Stop Assist is available once more. Active Emergency Stop Assist inoperative * Active Emergency Stop Assist is malfunctioning. Drive on or Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.   Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Active Lane Change Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Change Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 425).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.► Drive onor► If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Active Lane Change Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Change Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is temporarily unavailable. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 410).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.► Drive on
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Stop-and-Go Assist is malfunctioning.Active Stop-and-Go Assist has been deactivated. Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC and Active Steering Assist are still available.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

  Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Blind Spot Assist currently unavailableSee Owner's Manual	* Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 441).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.
Blind Spot Assist inoperative	* Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.▶ Drive onor▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.▶ If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.▶ Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarily unavailable.The system limits have been reached (→ page 441).Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.▶ Drive onor▶ If the display message does not disappear, stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.

Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative * Active Blind Spot Assist is malfunctioning.  Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

	► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	* When you establish the electrical connection to the trailer, Active Blind Spot Assist will be unavailable.► Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is temporarily unavailable.The ambient conditions are outside the system limits (→ page 444).As soon as the ambient conditions are within the system limits, the system will become available again.► Drive on
Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is malfunctioning.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Active Lane Keeping Assist functions restricted See Owner's Manual	* Active Lane Keeping Assist is available but restricted.► Drive onor► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.


Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Beginning emergency stop  temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty  * Your hands are not on the steering wheel. The Active Lane Keeping Assist will initiate an emergency stop (→ page 444). Put your hands on the steering wheel. Information on cancelling an emergency stop ( → page 423).

^A FRONT AND CORNER RADAR SENSORS (HEREAFTER "SENSORS") ARE MALFUNCTIONING. POSSIBLE CAUSES:

The sensors are dirty • Heavy rain or snow • Extended country driving without other traffic, e.g. In the desert Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. Drive on carefully. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Clean all sensor covers from outside ( → page 391). ▶ Restart the vehicle. 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

  Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual

^ THE VIEW OF THE MULTIFUNCTION CAMERA IS RESTRICTED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:

- Dirt on the windscreen in the field of vision of the multifunction camera • Heavy rain, snow or fog - Mist on the Inside of the windscreen: in certain weather conditions, mist can form on the Inside of the windscreen during cold times of year in particular. This mist on the windscreen will be removed automatically within a short time with the aid of a heater. The restriction is temporary. Driving systems and driving safety systems may be malfunctioning or temporarily unavailable. The brake system, steering and drive system will continue to function normally. Drive on carefully. Once the causes of the problem are no longer present, the driving systems and driving safety systems will be available again and the corresponding symbols will be switched off. If the display message does not disappear: ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Clean the windscreen, especially in the position of the multifunction camera ( → page 391). ▶ Restart the vehicle.   Restricted during trailer operation * When the trailer socket is occupied, some driving systems will be available only to a limited extent. Drive carefully if you are towing a trailer or have the bicycle rack mounted. Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Driver camera view currently restrictedSee Owner's Manual	* THE VIEW OF THE DRIVER CAMERA IS REDUCED. POSSIBLE CAUSES:Objects or stickers are projecting into the driver camera's field of vision.The driver camera is dirty.Keep the driver camera's field of vision free.Clean the driver camera if necessary. Please comply with the notes on caring for the interior relating to the display (→ page 722).
Change steering wheel/ seat positionuntil 6 dots are visible on the upper edgeof the screen	* The driver camera cannot capture your line of sight.Change the steering wheel and seat position until six dots are visible on the top edge of the screen.The display message will appear again if the driver camera is again unable to detect your line of sight after 30 minutes.The display message will no longer appear if you confirm the display message and the driver camera cannot detect your line of sight during the entirejourney.
Driver camera inoperative See Owner'sManual	* The driver camera is malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE functions are malfunctioning.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative SeeOwner's Manual	* The PRE-SAFE Impulse Side system is malfunctioning or inoperative after having already been triggered.Consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PRE SAFE PLUS inoperative See Owner'sManual	* The PRE-SAFE system is malfunctioning.Drive onorStop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages  Parking assistance systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions
PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.► Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant unavailable at rear when towing a trailer	* If transport equipment, e.g. a trailer or bicycle rack, is attached to the trailer hitch and the electrical connection is correctly established, Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is not available at the rear when reversing. The rear manoeuvring assistant is also unavailable in this situation.► Press the left-hand Touch Control and acknowledge the display message.
Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	* Active Parking Assist and Parking Assist PARKTRONIC are malfunctioning.Once the cause of the problem is no longer present, the system will be available again.► Continue driving while paying attention to the vehicle's surroundings.or► Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions and restart the vehicle.► If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.
Limited availability of Active Parking Assist manoeuvring assistant See Owner's Manual	* Active Parking Assist's manoeuvring assistant is temporarily unavailable or only partially available.► Clean all sensors of the parking and camera system (→ page 721).► If the display message still appears, consult a qualified specialist workshop.

 EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Inoperative * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Battery

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 12 V on-board electrical system Visit workshop * The 12 V on-board electrical system is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual * The 12 V battery is no longer being charged and the state of charge is too low.

NOTE

Possible damage to the drive system if you continue driving Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Switch off the vehicle. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V battery ^a The vehicle is off and the state of charge of the 12 V battery is too low. Switch off electrical consumers that are not required. Drive for 30-60 mins. or Charge the vehicle at a charging station ( → page 358).  Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge the 12 V battery * The 12 V battery charge level is too low. Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Leave the vehicle running If the display message disappears: drive on. If the display message does not disappear: consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tyre pressure monitor

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

Tyre press, monitor currently unavailable * There is interference from a powerful radio signal source As a result, no signals from the tyre pressure sensors are being received. The tyre pressure monitoring system is temporarily unavailable. The tyre pressure monitoring system will restart automatically as soon as the cause has been rectified. Drive on Tyre press. monitor inoperative * The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre pressure sensors  Wheel sensor(s) missing  Check tyre(s) * The wheels fitted do not have suitable tyre pressure sensors. The tyre pressure monitoring system is deactivated. Fit wheels with suitable tyre pressure sensors. * There is no signal from the tyre pressure sensor in at least one wheel. No pressure value is displayed for the affected tyre. Have the faulty tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop. * The tyre pressure in one or more tyres has dropped significantly. The wheel position is displayed. A warning tone will also sound.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure • The tyres can burst. • The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. • The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. ▶ Observe the recommended tyre pressures. Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary. ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. ▶ Check the tyre pressure ( → page 755) and the tyres. * The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the tyres, or the difference in tyre pressure between the individual wheels is too great. ▶ Check the tyre pressure and add air, if necessary. When the tyre pressure is correct, restart the tyre pressure monitor ( → page 757).  Rectify tyre pressure  Warning tyre malfunction ^a The pressure in one or more tyres has dropped suddenly. The wheel position is displayed.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with a flat tyre • The tyres can overheat and be damaged. • The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking characteristics may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Do not drive with a flat tyre. Do not exceed the maximum permissible driving distance in emergency mode and the maximum permissible speed with a flat MOExtended tyre. ▶ Observe the notes on flat tyres. Notes on flat tyres ( → page 79). ▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tyres. ^a At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.  Tyre(s) overheated 

WARNING

Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. ▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Display messages 

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Reduce speed ^ At least one tyre is overheating. The affected tyres are displayed in red. At temperatures close to the limit value, the tyres are displayed in yellow.  WARNING Risk of an accident from driving with overheated tyres Overheated tyres can burst. ▶ Reduce speed so that the tyres cool down. Reduce your speed so that the tyres cool down.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning and indicator lamps

Overview of indicator and warning lamps

Some systems will perform a self-test when the vehicle is switched on. Some indicator and warning lamps may briefly light up or flash. This behaviour is non-critical. These indicator and warning lamps indicate a malfunction only if they light up or flash after the vehicle has been started or during a journey. DRIVER'S DISPLAY  DRIVER'S DISPLAY WITH DRIVER CAMERA 

INDICATOR AND WARNING LAMPS OCCUPANT SAFETY

Restraint system ( → page 922) Seat belt ( → page 922) Occupant presence reminder (white) (→ page 922) Occupant presence reminder (yellow) (→ page 922)

DRIVE SYSTEM

Reduced power System error Electrical fault

VEHICLE

Trailer hitch ( → page 924) Power steering (yellow) (→ page 924) Power steering (red) (→ page 924) Rear axle steering (yellow) (→ page 924)   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps Rear axle steering (red) ( → page 924)

BRAKES

Electric parking brake (yellow) (→ page 926) Electric parking brake (red) ( → page 926) (D) Brakes (yellow) ( → page 926) (1) Brakes (red) ( → page 926)

DRIVING AND DRIVING SAFETY SYSTEMS

ABS ( → page 928) ESP ^* (→ page 928) ESP ^® OFF (→ page 928) ESP OFF ESP ^* OFF ( → page 928) ESP® SPORT (→ page 928) ATTENTION ASSIST (→ page 928) Traffic Sign Assist ( → page 928) Distance warning ( → page 928) Active Brake Assist (→ page 928) Active Brake Assist (→ page 928) Active Brake Assist ( → page 928) AIRMATIC ( → page 928) AMG RIDE CONTROL + (→ page 928)

MERCEDES-BENZ EMERGENCY CALL SYSTEM

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system (→ page 933)

TYRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM

Tyre pressure monitoring system ( → page 934)

EXTERIOR LIGHTING

Standing lights (→ page 281) Low beam ( → page 281) High beam ( → page 283) Turn signal lights (→ page 283) 04 Rear fog light (→ page 281)

SYMBOLS ON THE CENTRAL DISPLAY

Drive Away Assist ( → page 474) Rear cross traffic warning ( → page 475) Manoeuvring brake function ( → page 476)    EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Occupant safety

Warning/Indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Restraint system warning lamp * The restraint system red warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is on. The restraint system is malfunctioning ( → page 149). 

DANGER

Risk of fatal injuries due to restraint system malfunctions Components in the restraint system may be activated unintentionally or not deploy as planned in an accident. In the event of an accident, the high-voltage on-board electrical system may not be deactivated as intended. You may suffer an electric shock if you touch the damaged components of the high-voltage on-board electrical system. ▶ Have the restraint system checked and repaired immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ After an accident, switch off the vehicle immediately. Drive on carefully. Note the messages on the driver's display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately. * The red seat belt warning lamp flashes and an intermittent warning tone sounds. The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt while the vehicle is in motion. Fasten your seat belt ( → page 148). There are objects on the front passenger seat. Remove the objects from the front passenger seat.  Seat belt warning lamp flashes  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Seat belt warning lamp lights up * The red seat belt warning lamp lights up once the vehicle has started. In addition, an intermittent warning tone may sound. The red seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passenger to fasten their seat belts. Fasten your seat belt ( → page 148). If you have placed objects on the front passenger seat, the red seat belt warning lamp may remain lit.  Occupant presence reminder warning lamp (white) * The white occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit. The occupant presence reminder is deactivated.  Occupant presence reminder warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow occupant presence reminder warning lamp is lit. The occupant presence reminder is malfunctioning Note the messages on the driver's display.

Drive system

Warning/Indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Reduced-power warning lamp * The yellow reduced-power warning lamp is on. Drive system power output is reduced. Note the messages on the driver's display.  System error warning lamp * The red system error warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is in a state of operational readiness. There is a malfunction in the drive system. Note the messages on the driver's display.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Electrical fault warning lamp * The red electrical fault warning lamp is lit. There is a fault with the electrics. Note the messages on the driver's display.

Vehicle

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Trailer hitch warning lamp * The red trailer hitch warning lamp is lit. The trailer hitch is not operational. WARNING Risk of an accident if the ball neck is not locked The trailer may become detached. ▶ Stop the vehicle immediately in accordance with the traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. ▶ Uncouple the trailer and secure it against rolling away. Initiate a new swivelling procedure and do not re-couple the trailer until the display message disappears. Note the messages on the driver's display.  Power steering warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. Note the messages on the driver's display.

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Power steering warning lamp (red) * The red power steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The power assistance or the steering itself is malfunctioning. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Note the messages on the driver's display.  Rear axle steering warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. Note the messages on the driver's display.  Rear axle steering warning lamp (red) * The red rear axle steering warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. The rear axle steering is malfunctioning. 

WARNING

Risk of accident if steering capability is impaired If the steering does not function as intended, the vehicle's operating safety is jeopardised. ▶ Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps  Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions Note the messages on the driver's display.

Brakes

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Electric parking brake indicator lamp (red)  Electric parking brake indicator lamp (yellow) * The red electric parking brake indicator lamp flashes or is lit. The yellow electric parking brake indicator lamp is also lit in the event of a malfunction. Note the messages on the driver's display.  Brakes warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. WARNING Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired. Drive on carefully. Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. The Hill Start Assist may be malfunctioning. Adjust your speed and drive on carefully, leaving a suitable distance to the vehicle in front. If the driver's display shows a display message, observe it.  

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Brakes warning lamp (red) Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The red brakes warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running.

POSSIBLE CAUSES:

The brake force boosting is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be affected. There is insufficient brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Note the messages on the driver's display.

WARNING

Risk of accident and injury if brake force boosting is malfunctioning If brake force boosting is malfunctioning, increased brake pedal force may be necessary for braking. The braking characteristics may be impaired. The braking distance can increase in emergency braking situations. ▶ Stop in a safe location immediately. Do not continue driving! Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

WARNING

Risk of an accident due to low brake fluid level If the brake fluid level is too low, the braking effect and the braking characteristics may be impaired. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. Do not top up the brake fluid.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Driving and driving safety systems

Warning/Indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 ABS warning lamp * The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ABS is malfunctioning. If an additional warning tone sounds, EBD is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be malfunctioning. Note the messages on the driver's display.

WARNING

There is a risk of skidding if EBD or ABS is malfunctioning The wheels may lock during braking. The steerability and braking characteristics are heavily impaired and the braking distance may increase. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Drive on carefully. ▶ Have the brake system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  ESP ^* warning lamp flashes * The yellow ESP ^* warning lamp flashes while the vehicle is in motion. One or more wheels have reached their grip limit ( → page 395). Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.   EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 ESP ^® warning lamp lights up * The yellow ESP ^® warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP ^® is malfunctioning. Other driving systems and driving safety systems (e.g. BAS) may also be malfunctioning. Note the messages on the driver's display.

WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP ^e is malfunctioning If ESP ^* is malfunctioning, ESP ^* cannot carry out vehicle stabilisation. In addition, other driving safety systems are switched off. Drive on carefully. Have ESP ^* checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Drive on carefully. Consult a qualified specialist workshop immediately.  ESP ^® OFF warning lamp * The yellow ESP ^® OFF warning lamp is lit while the vehicle is running. ESP ^® is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions


WARNING

Risk of skidding when driving with ESP ^® deactivated ESP ^® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited.  Drive on carefully.  Deactivate ESP ^® only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP ^* cannot be activated, ESP ^* is malfunctioning.  Have ESP ^® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.  Observe the notes on deactivating ESP ^* ( → page 395).  ESP OFF * The yellow ESP OFF warning lamps are lit while the vehicle is running. ESP Is deactivated. Other driving systems and driving safety systems may also be inoperative.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

WARNING

Risk of skidding when driving with ESP ^® deactivated ESP ^® does not act to stabilise the vehicle. The availability of further driving safety systems is also limited. Drive on carefully. Deactivate ESP ^® only for as long as the situation requires. If ESP ^* cannot be activated, ESP ^* is malfunctioning. Have ESP ^® checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop. Observe the notes on deactivating ESP ^* (→ page 396).  ESP SPORT * ESP ^® SPORT is activated while the vehicle is running. When ESP ^® SPORT is activated, ESP ^® will stabilise the vehicle only to a limited extent.

WARNING

Risk of skidding if ESP ^® SPORT is used incorrectly When you activate ESP ^* SPORT, there is an increased risk of skidding and having an accident. Activate ESP ^TM SPORT only in the circumstances described below. Observe the notes on activating ESP ^® SPORT(→ page 396).  ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp * The ATTENTION ASSIST warning lamp is lit. ATTENTION ASSIST is malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp  Warning lamp for distance warning * The Traffic Sign Assist warning lamp is lit. Traffic Sign Assist is malfunctioning. Note the messages on the driver's display. * The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicle is in motion. The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speed selected. If there is an additional warning tone, you are approaching an obstacle at too high a speed. Be prepared to brake immediately. ▶ Increase the distance. Function of Active Brake Assist (→ page 427).  Active Brake Assist warning lamp * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. Due to dirty sensors or a malfunction, the system is not available or the range of functions is restricted. Note the messages on the driver's display.  Active Brake Assist warning lamp * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. The system is switched off or the range of functions has been automatically restricted. This may be the case if the driver is not wearing a seat belt or another driving system has been activated. Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist ( → page 427).  Active Brake Assist warning lamp * The Active Brake Assist warning lamp is on. After you drive off, the system's range of functions will be restricted due to the teach-in process. Depending on the ambient conditions, the teach-in process may take a few minutes. Observe the notes on Active Brake Assist ( → page 427).  Suspension warning lamp (yellow) * The yellow AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC. Note the messages on the driver's display.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Suspension warning lamp (red) * The red AIRMATIC warning lamp is lit. A fault has occurred in AIRMATIC.

NOTE

The vehicle's driving characteristics will have changed significantly. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Suspension warning lamp (yellow) Note the messages on the driver's display. Consult a qualified specialist workshop. * The yellow AMG RIDE CONTROL + warning lamp is lit. There is a fault in the AMG RIDE CONTROL +. Note the messages on the driver's display.

Mercedes-Benz emergency call system

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Mercedes-Benz emergency call system warning lamp * The Mercedes-Benz emergency call system is malfunctioning. The Mercedes me connect system is also malfunctioning. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Tyre pressure monitor

Warning/Indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

 Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp flashes *The yellow tyre pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) flashes for approximately one minute and then remains lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning.

WARNING

There is a risk of an accident if the tyre pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning The tyre pressure monitoring system cannot issue a warning if there is pressure loss in one or more of the tyres. Tyres with insufficient tyre pressure may impair the driving characteristics as well as steering and braking. ▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked at a qualified specialist workshop. Consult a qualified specialist workshop.  Tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp lights up * The yellow tyre pressure monitoring system warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit. The tyre pressure monitoring system has detected tyre pressure loss in at least one of the tyres.

WARNING

Risk of an accident due to insufficient tyre pressure • The tyres can burst. • The tyres can wear excessively and/or unevenly. • The driving characteristics as well as the steering and braking may be greatly impaired. You could then lose control of the vehicle. Observe the recommended tyre pressures. Adjust the tyre pressure if necessary.  EQE - Owner's Manual > Display messages and warning/indicator lamps Warning and indicator lamps 

Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ Solutions

▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions. Check the tyre pressure and the tyres.  Back to Contents EQE - Owner's Manual > Index 

< Index

Searching for something specific? Click on the relevant initial letter here and look it up. Incidentally, you can also use your PDF reader's search function at any time.

0-9 937	>	G 986	>	N 1008	>	U 1044	>
A 938	>	H 987	>	O 1010	>	V 1046	>
B 947	>	I 990	>	P 1013	>	W 1050	>
C 951	>	J 994	>	Q 1017	>	Z 1056	>
D 962	>	K 995	>	R 1018	>
E 979	>	L 996	>	S 1025	>
F 983	>	M 1000	>	T 1034	>

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index > 0-9 < 0-9 3D driver's display, 3D instrument cluster Function/notes 498 4MATIC 357 0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02  EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

A

A/C function

	Activating/deactivating (operating unit)	3>2	ERA-GLONASS test mode	6>3	Activating/deactivating	4>4
	switching on/off (MBUX) 313	>	Accident prevention	4>4	Brake application	4>3
ABS 394		>	Accident, emergency call	3>6	Exit warning	4>1
Accelerator pedal		3>4	Acoustic presence indicator	3>7	Function	4>1
Access data			Acoustic vehicle alerting system	3>7	Trailer operation	4>3
	Setting (Bluetooth*)	6>7	Activating/deactivating the acoustic locking verification signal	1>6	Active Brake Assist
					Function	4>7

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Setting 433		Route-based speed adaptation	47	Function	44
Active Distance Assist DISTRONIC		Storing a speed	43	Setting the sensitivity	46
Activate/deactivate variable limiter 413		Active Emergency Stop Assist	43	Trailer operation	44
Activating/deactivating	43	Active headlamps	25	Active light function	25
Active Emergency Stop Assist	43	Active Lane Change Assist		Active Parking Assist
Active Lane Change Assist	45	Activating/deactivating	47	Automatic braking function	49
Calling up a speed	43	Function	45	Cross traffic warning	45
Function	40	Active Lane Keeping Assist		Drive Away Assist	44
Increasing/decreasing the speed	43	Activating/deactivating	46	Exiting a parking space	48

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                  

Function 466	>	Active Steering Assist		Adaptive Highbeam Assist
Manoeuvering brake function 476	>	Activating/deactivating	43	Activating/deactivating	290
Memory Parking Assist	47	Active Emergency Stop Assist	43	Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus
Parking	5	Active Lane Change Assist	45	Switching on/off	292
Pausing	48	Function 421	>	Additional door lock	296
Remote Parking Assist	49	Active Stop-and-Go Assist	49	Adjusting bass, mid-range and treble settings
Active Service System PLUS	79	Adaptive brake lights	42	Advanced sound system	796
Active Speed Limit Assist	47	Adaptive cruise control	47	Adjusting mid-range, treble and bass settings
				Advanced sound system	796

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                         Adjusting the balance/fader

	Advanced sound system 706	>
	Burmester ® surround sound system	704

Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings

	Advanced sound system 706	>
	Burmester* surround sound system	794

After-sales service

Air conditioning menu
Air distribution	3>5

Adjusting the bass, mid-range and treble

Burmester ° surround sound system

7>4

Advanced sound system

Adjusting the balance/fader 706

>

Air distribution

	Calling up	3>2
	Climate control	3>3

Adjusting the mid-range, treble and bass

Burmester 5 surround sound system

7/4

Calling up the sound menu

796

Fragrance system

Front air conditioning

3×2

Adjusting the sound focus

Burmester ° surround sound system

725

Switching loudness normalisation on/off

786

Ionisation

Rear compartment climate control

3.5

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index   

	Selecting climate modes 314	>	Air vents		Airflow
Air distribution			Setting 324	>	Setting 308	>
	Overview 314	>	Air/water duct	7.5	AIRMATIC
	Setting 308	>	Airbag		Setting the vehicle level	4.8
Air freshener system		3.7	Inflating	1.7	Vehicle levels	4.7
Air inlet		7.5	Overview 164	>	Alarm system	2.4
Air pressure		7.5	PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps	1.0	All-wheel drive	3.7
Air suspension		4.7	Warning lamp	1.9	Alternative route	6.8
					Ambient lighting	2.4

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                         Track Race 53 AMG Active Sound, Vehicle sound AMG steering wheel buttons

	Selecting sound characteristic (steering-wheel button)	(2718)
	AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package, Power increase	(2787)

Setting  Android Auto

AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package, Power increase	393
AMG DYNAMIC SELECT
	Setting drive programs 352

AMG steering-wheel buttons  Connecting a mobile phone (wired)  AMG RIDE CONTROL + AMG TRACK PACE Configuring  Information   

Function 449	###
Selecting the suspension setting	###
Setting the vehicle level	451

Drag Race  Sound settings   

Selecting the suspension setting

450

Function 573  Transferred vehicle data  

Setting the vehicle level

(Y25K)

Telemetry display  Android smartphone   0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                             Animals 158  Ending  Assembly licence plate, front  Anti-lock braking system 394  Notes  Assistance system  Anti-theft alarm system  Overview  Assistant display Anti-theft protection  Sound settings  Menu (driver display)  Additional door lock  Transferred vehicle data  ASSYST PLUS Immobiliser  Apps, Mercedes me Battery disconnection periods  Apple CarPlay ^® , Smartphone  Mercedes me calls  Service interval display  Connecting an iPhone ^® (cable)  Mercedes me connect  Service requirements  Connecting an iPhone ^® (wireless)  Selecting (MBUX multimedia system)             0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

ATA			Setting	4>6	Automatic climate control	3>3
	Deactivating the alarm 235	>	Attention assistant	4>4	Automatic co-driver airbag shutoff
	Function 234	>	Augmented reality		Function 153	>
	Interior protection	2>6	MBUX route guidance	6>1	Automatic distance control	4>0
	Interior protection function	2>6	Authorisations		Automatic driving lights	2>2
	Tow-away protection	2>5	Setting	5>5	Automatic emergency call	6>0
	Tow-away protection function	2>5	Authorised workshop	1>2	Automatic front passenger airbag shut-off
ATTENTION ASSIST			Automatic car wash	>	Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat)	1>2
	Function 404	>	Automatic car wash mode	7>8	PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamps	1>0

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    Automatic measures after an accident 156> Automatic mirror folding function 304 Automatic seat adjustment 295 Automatic transmission 327 Autonomous braking 47 AVAS 3>7 Axle load Trailer operation  Trailer operation (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)  0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    B

Bad weather light 286		>	Battery		Battery (key)	18
Bag hook 267		>		High-voltage battery	77	Beginner driver mode
Ball neck			Battery (12 V battery)			Activating/deactivating 494
	Extending/retracting	64		Charging	78	Function 493
	Trailer coupling	497		Notes	76	Belt
BAS		394		Replacing	78	Adjusting the height 128
Basic information 145		>		Starting assistance	78	Fastening 128
			Battery (high-voltage on-board electrical system)	80		Notes on wearing correctly 127

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                 

Releasing 163		Bluetooth*		Brake Assist System	394
Bicycle rack		Connecting a mobile phone	5	Brake Assist System	394
	Load capacity 845	Information	5	Brake disks	395
	Load capacity (Mercedes-AMG vehi-cles)	Setting up an Internet connection	6	Brake fluid	892
	Trailer operation	Switching on/off	5	Brake force distribution	490
Blind Spot Assist		Bonnet		Brake lamps
	Activating/deactivating	Opening/closing	7	Adaptive brake lights	492
	Function	Brake Assist		Brake pads	395
		Active Brake Assist	4	7

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    Brakes

	ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) 394	Limited braking effect (salt-treated roads)	325	Flat tyre	79
	Active Brake Assist 427	New/replaced brake pads/brake discs	325	Overview of aids	108
	Adaptive brake lights	Parking brake	326	Tow-starting	716
	BAS (Brake Assist System)	Post-collision brake	156	Towing methods	91
	Driving tips	Recuperation	320	Transporting the vehicle	712
	EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)	Running-in notes	325	Wheel change	714
	Electric parking brake	Braking assistance		Burmester* surround sound system
	Handbrake	Brake Assist System	324	Adjusting the balance/fader	714

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    Adjusting the sound focus 705 Adjusting treble, mid-range and bass settings Automatic loudness normalisation 704> Calling up the sound menu 704 Information 794 Selecting the sound profile 795 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

< C

Call list

	Deleting 647	>
	Making a call 647	>
	Overview 647	>
	Selecting options	647

Calling the customer centre for Mercedes-Benz

Calling up a web page

639

Calling up the sound menu

	Advanced sound system	706
	Burmester* surround sound system	704
Calls, Telephone operation
	Accepting	623

Activating functions during a call 643

Calls with several participants

683

Declining

Ending a call	[KTAB]
Incoming call during an existing call	[23H01]
Making	[TK22]
Mercedes me	[TH3K]
Telephone	[6C26]
Using overhead control panel
Using the international dialling code

 0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    Camera

	360° camera 456	Opening the camera cover (reversing camera)	452	Washing by hand	79
	Activating using GPS (reversing camera)	Reversing camera	454	Car-to-X-Communication
	Button 461	Selecting the view	452	Display on map	620
	Cleaning	Transparent bonnet	450	Overview	620
	Driver camera	Car key	195	Sending hazard warnings	621
	Function	Car wash		Care
	Information	Automatic car wash	92	Air/water duct	75
	Manage activation points	Car wash mode	9	Automatic car wash	92

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                   

Camera 721	>	Plastic trim	7>2	Washing by hand	7>9
Car parts 721	>	Real wood/trim elements	7>2	Wheels/rims	7>1
Car wash mode 10	>	Roof lining	7>2	Caring for plastic trim	7>2
Decorative foil	7>0	Running boards	7>1	Caring for rims	7>1
Display	7>2	Seat belt	7>2	Caring for the roof lining	7>2
Exterior lighting	7>1	Steering wheel 722	>	Caring for the steering wheel	7>2
Head-up display	7>2	Trailer hitch	7>1	Carrier	2>6
High-pressure cleaner	7>9	Vehicle interior	7>2	Central display
Paint	7>9	Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery	7>1	Operating	5>3

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Central locking system		Charge level/charge display	37	Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4)	35
	Button 207	Charging		Indicator lamps on vehicle socket 366	>
	Key 196	>	12 V battery	>	Mains socket, mode 2
Centre airbag (driver, front passenger)			At time of departure	38	Maximum charging current (mains socket)
	Inflating	17	Charge level display	37	Notes on charging the high-voltage battery
Centre airbag (driver's backrest)		14	Charging cable control panel	35	Notes on the high-voltage battery
Centre airbag (driver's seat backrest)			Charging station, mode 3	32	Rapid charging station, mode 4
	Information	14	Configuring weekly profile	38	Starting the charging process (alter-nating current, mode 2/3)
Charge level display		37	Ending the charging process (alter-nating current, mode 2/3)	39	Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4)

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Stowing the charging cable 360	>	Charging process		Child seat
USB port 67	>	Paying	690	Adjusting the vehicle seat	124
Wallbox, mode 3	352	Charging settings	378	Approval categories	175
Wirelessly charging a mobile phone	276	Charging stations		Basic instructions	178
Charging cable		Showing on the map	599	Brief overview of most important points	176
Control panel	385	Checking the coolant level	74	Fitting ISOFIX/i-Size	175
Stowing	350	Child safety lock		Front passenger seat	172
Charging near destination		Rear door	179	Overview of warning stickers	171
Route	692	Side window (rear)	171	Rearward-facing	175

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Recommendations for child restraint systems	Children		Cleaning
Risks/dangers 169		Avoiding dangers in the vehicle	1>9	Air/water duct
Seats suitable for belt-secured child restraint systems	Basic instructions	1>8	Automatic car wash	52
Seats suitable for i-Size child restraint systems	Chock	>9	Car parts	7>1
Seats suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems	City lighting	2>6	Car wash mode	>9
Securing to the front passenger seat with the seat belt	Classic menu display content		Decorative foil	7>0
Securing to the rear seat with the seatbelt	Selecting	5>3	High-pressure cleaner	7>9
Top Tether	Clean varnish	7>9	Paint	7>9
Without automatic co-driver airbag shutoff			Real wood/trim elements	7>2

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

	Sensors 721	>	Activating/deactivating the A/C function (control panel)	3>2	Closing/opening the windows (air-recirculation button)	34
	Vehicle interior 722	>	Air conditioning menu	3>2	Defrosting the windscreen	3>2
	Vehicle socket for the high-voltage battery	7>1	Air distribution	3>8	Demisting the windscreen	3>8
	Washing by hand	7>9	Air distribution settings	3>4	Demisting windows	3>6
Cleaning carpets		7>2	Air vents (front)	3>4	Fine particle status display	3>2
Cleaning seat covers		7>2	Air vents (rear)	3>4	Fragrance system	3>7
Climate control, Air conditioning system			Airflow	3>8	Immediate pre-entry climate control	3>3
	Activating/deactivating	3>1	Automatic control	3>3	Inserting/removing the flacon (fragrance system)	3>8
	Activating/deactivating (rear operating unit)	3>1	Automatically controlling (rear operating unit)	3>3	Ionisation	3>7

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Notes 308	>	Switching the A/C function on/off (MBUX)	3>3	Cockpit
Operating unit 308	>	Synchronisation function	3>6		Overview (central display)
Pre-entry climate control for departure time	3>0	Temperature	3>8		Overview (MBUX Hyperscreen)
Pre-entry climate control when the vehicle is unlocked	3>9	Ventilation with comfort opening 227	>	Collision detection (parked vehicle)
Rear operating unit	1>5	Windscreen heater	3>9		Setting
Rear window heater	3>8	Climate control settings		Combination switch
Resetting the climate control settings	8>5	Resetting	8>5		Lights
Setting	3>2	Co-driver airbag shutoff, PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF	1>3		Windscreen wipers
Switching air-recirculation mode on/off	3>6	COC papers, Certificate of conformity	7>5

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Comfort		Connection status		Making a call	636
	Information 47	>	Displaying	639	Name format
Communication module			Overview	639	Note about suggestions
	Disconnecting automatically from the Internet	636	Contacts, Address book, Phone book		Options
	Setting up an Internet connection	676	Calling up	635	Selecting options for suggestions
Commuter route		609	Deleting	636	Storing
Compass		637	Importing	635	Content sharing menu
Components subject to radio regulations			Importing (overview)	635	Calling up
	Declaration of conformity	134	Information	634	Controlling media playback

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

	Sharing MBUX display content 556	Coolant		Cruise control
Control element (MBUX multimedia sys-tem)		Notes	83	activating/deactivating	498
	Setting acoustic feedback 543	Cooling	368	Calling up a speed	498
Control elements:	18	Copyright	13	Function	496
Convenience closing	27	Cornering light	25	Requirements:	498
Convenience feature		Correct use	14	Setting a speed	498
	Closing/opening the windows (air-recirculation button)	Cover	29	Storing a speed	498
Convenience opening	27	Cross traffic (warning)	45	Cup holder
		Crosswind Assist	38	Rear	273

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index C >  Cup holder in the rear 105  0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index     < D

Damage			Starting/stopping a video recording 6>4	Online services 1>1
	Limited protection 158	Data processing in the vehicle 1>9		Deactivating the alarm 2>5
Damping system ADS PLUS			Data protection	Dealership 1>2
	AIRMATIC 447	Granting authorisations 5>5		Declaration of conformity
	Setting the vehicle level 4>8		Data protection rights 1>1	Components subject to radio regulations 1>4
Dashcam			Data storage	Electromagnetic compatibility 1>4
	Configuring settings 6>5		Data protection rights 1>1	Jack 1>5
	Selecting a USB device 6>3		Electronic control units 1>9	TIREFIT kit 1>8

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                    Decorative foil 720  Saving as a favourite  Selecting from the map  Defrost function 312  Destination entry  Selecting previous destinations  Deployed components  Accepting a destination suggestion  Destination entry (multimedia system) Entering a 3 word address  Notes  Deployment situations  Entering an intermediate destination  Selecting a POI  Destination  Entering geo-coordinates  Detecting inattentiveness  Selecting a contact  Diagnostics connection  Selecting a received destination 594  DIGITAL LIGHT Selecting from favourites  Activating/deactivating  EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                  

Active headlamps 285	>	Topographical compensation	206	Starting the vehicle	312
Assistance functions 286	>	Digital Owner's Manual	11	Unlocking setting	215
Bad weather light 286	>	Digital Vehicle Key		Unlocking the vehicle	214
City lighting	216	Function	210	Direct commands
Cornering light	215	Locking the vehicle	214	Voice commands for MBUX voice assistant	519
Enhanced fog light function	216	managing	212	DIRECT SELECT lever
Intelligent Light System	214	Problem	215	Engages neutral	314
Motorway mode	215	remove	213	Engaging drive position	316
Overview	214	Setting up	210	Engaging park position automatically	315

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                  

	Engaging reverse gear 354	>	Display (MBUX multimedia system)		12 V on-board electrical sys-tem Visit workshop	94
	Function 353	>	Settings	53	Acoustic presence indicator inoperative	88
	Selecting park position	35	Display message		ATTENTION ASSIST Micro-sleep Take a break!	86
Disconnect device (high-voltage on-board electrical system)		38	Calling up on driver display	89	ATTENTION ASSIST: Take a break!	86
Display			Notes	89	Automatic driving lights inop-erative	81
	Care	72	Display messages		Battery capacity too low Stop Charge immediately	83
Display (driver's display)			--- km/h	93	Battery overheated Stop, everybody out! Outdoors if possible	83
	Overview of displays	55	LIM --- km/h	87	Beginning emergency stop	96
	Overview of displays (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)	57	--- km/h	87	Brake immediately	80

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual > Index D > 

Camera view restricted See Owner's Manual	currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP*)	Front right malfunction Consult workshop
Change key batteries	currently unavailable See Owner's Manual (ESP*)	Front right parking lights
Charger cable connected	Digital Vehicle Key Charge device	Front right turn signal
Check brake fluid level	Do not forget key	Have high-voltage system checked See Owner's Manual
Check tyre(s)	Do not leave persons or animals in the vehicle	inoperative See Owner's Manual (ABS and ESP*)
Compressor is cooling	Fault Drive at max. 80 km/h	EBD inoperative See Owner's Manual (EBD, ABS and ESP*)
Coolant Stop Switch off the vehicle	Front left malfunction Consult workshop	inoperative See Owner's Manual (ESP*)
Currently unavailable Charge high-voltage battery	Front left parking lights	SOS Inoperative
Currently unavailable High-voltage battery charging incomplete.	Front left turn signal	inoperative

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index D > 

Key being taught in Please wait 8>8	Left daytime running lights 8>4	Malfunction Stop vehicle 8>1
Key being taught in Please wait 8>0	Left low beam 8>3	Malfunction Visit workshop 8>6
Key does not belong to vehicle 8>1	Left main beam 8>4	Malfunction Visit workshop 8>3
Key not detected (red display message) 8>7	Left mirror turn signal 8>5	Malfunction 8>5
Key not detected (white display message) 8>7	Left tail light 8>6	Malfunction 8>3
Key not detected Place Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket 8>9	Left window airbag malfunction Consult workshop 8>4	Max. speed 20km/h 9>1
Key not detected 8>9	Lowering 9>1	Max. speed 40 km/h 9>2
Left brake lamp 8>5	Malfunction See Owner's Manual 8>1	Maximum speed exceeded 8>8
Left cornering light 8>4	Malfunction See Owner's Manual 8>1	Not in curr. drive prog. 9>2

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index D > 

Number plate lamp8>6	Pre-entry climate control via key currently unavailable, High-voltage battery low8>8	Reduce speed9>9
Off9>3	Rear axle steering currently malfunctioning8>2	Release parking brake8>0
HOLD Off8>6	Rear axle steering Malfunction Stop immediately8>3	Replace key See Owner's Manual8>0
Output and range reduced See Owner's Manual8>4	Rear axle steering Malfunction Visit workshop8>2	Replace key8>7
Parking brake See Owner's Manual8>8	Rear fog light8>6	Reserve level Charge high-voltage battery8>5
Parking brake Switch on vehicle to release8>0	Rear left turn signal8>5	Restraint system malfunction Consult workshop8>0
LIM passive8>8	Rear right turn signal8>5	Restricted during trailer operation9>1
Performance severely limited8>6	Rectify tyre pressure9>7	Reversing light8>6
Pre-entry climate control via key available again after starting vehicle8>8	Reduce speed9>2	Right brake lamp8>5

EQE - Owner's Manual Index D 

	Right cornering light8>4		Second row of seats, right Mal-function Consult workshop8>3		suspended9>3
	Right daytime running lights8>4		Start the vehicle to charge the 12 V battery9>5		Switch off lights8>1
	Right low beam8>3		Steering malfunction Drive carefully Visit workshop8>1		Switch on headlamps8>1
	Right main beam8>4		Steering malfunction Increased physical effort See Owner's Manual8>1		temporarily unavailable Sensors dirty9>0
	Right mirror turn signal8>5		Steering malfunction Stop immediately See Owner's Manual8>1		Third brake lamp8>6
	Right tail light8>6		Stop Switch off the vehicle8>5		Top up coolant See Owner's Manual8>9
	Right window airbag malfunction Consult workshop8>5		Stop vehicle Leave vehicle on to charge the 12 V battery9>5		Top up washer fluid8>4
	Rising9>1		STOP Vehicle level too low9>0		Towing not permitted See Owner's Manual8>8
	Second row of seats, left Mal-function Consult workshop8>2		Stop vehicle See Owner's Manual9>4		Trailer brake lamp8>7

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                  

Trailer coupling Check lock (white display message)	878	Washer fluid flap open	874	Active Distance Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	973
Trailer coupling Check lock (red display message)	879	Wheel sensor(s) missing	976	Active Distance Assist inoperative	974
Trailer left turn signal	876	AC charging inoperative Consult workshop	871	Active Emergency Stop Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	976
Trailer right turn signal	877	Active Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	978	Active Emergency Stop Assist inoperative	976
Trailer tail light	877	Active Blind Spot Assist inoperative	978	Active Lane Change Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	977
Tyre(s) overheated	978	Active Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	979	Active Lane Change Assist inoperative	977
Vehicle is ready to drive Shutdown occurs when locked or automatically in a few minutes	877	Active Brake Assist Functions currently limited See Owner's Manual	974	Active Lane Keeping Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	979
Vehicle rising Please wait	971	Active Brake Assist Functions limited See Owner's Manual	975	Active Lane Keeping Assist functions restricted See Owner's Manual	979
Warning tyre malfunction	977	Active Distance Assist available again	974	Active Lane Keeping Assist inoperative	979

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                   

Active Parking Assist and PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual	973
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable due to multiple emergency stops	976
Active Steering Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	975
Active Steering Assist inoperative 905
Active Stop-and-Go Assist currently unavailable see Owner's Manual	977
Active Stop-and-Go Assist inoperative See Owner's Manual	977
Adaptive Highbeam Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	872
Adaptive Highbeam Assist inoperative	872
Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	872

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus inoperative	883
Ambient light warning support inoperative	883
AMG Ride Control Function limited See Owner's Manual	899
Apply brake and start vehicle to shift out of P or N	895
Apply brake to deselect P position 885
Apply brake to engage D or R	885
Apply brake to engage R	885
Apply parking brake to park Visit workshop	896
ATTENTION ASSIST Remain alert! (white display message)	897

ATTENTION ASSIST Remain alert! (yellow display message)	897
Auxiliary battery malfunction (white display message)	898
Blind Spot Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	998
Blind Spot Assist inoperative	998
Blind Spot Assist unavailable when towing a trailer See Owner's Manual	998
Cannot start vehicle See Owner's Manual	898
Change steering wheel/ seat position until 6 dots are visible on the upper edge of the screen	92
Charging fault Please change charging method See Owner's Manual	81
Check brake pads See Owner's Manual	82

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                   

Check low beam setting (left/right-side traffic)	(KSAT)
Consult workshop without changing the transmission position	897
Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again	894
Cruise control and Limiter inoperative	897
Cruise control inoperative 897
Cruise control off 897
DC charging inoperative Consult workshop	892
DIGITAL LIGHT Functions limited	891
Drive malfunction Achievable speed limited Stop soon	895

Drive malfunction Achievable speedseverely limited See Owner's Manual	875
Driver camera inoperative See Owner's Manual	92
Driver camera view currently restricted See Owner's Manual	92
Front passenger airbag disabled See Owner's Manual	875
Front passenger airbag enabled See Owner's Manual	876
Hazard warning lamp system Malfunction	873
Head-up display Brightness currently reduced See Owner's Manual	870
Head-up display currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	870
Head-up display inoperative	870

High-voltage battery malfunction. Consult workshop without starting the vehicle again	87
High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (red display message)	86
High-voltage battery malfunction. No start in approx. XXX km Consult workshop (yellow display message)	86
Inoperative indicator lamp in driver display. Consult workshop	87
Limited availability of Active Parking Assist manoeuvring assistant See Owner's Manual	93
Limiter inoperative	88
Low beam setting (left/right-side traffic) Manual adjustment only	82
N automatically activated Please engage transmission position again	87
N is selected Please select desired transmission position	87

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                    Not possible to unlock charging cable See Owner's Manual  Occupant presence reminder inoper- ative  Only select P when vehicle is stationary  PARKTRONIC and manoeuvring assistant unavailable at rear when towing a trailer  PARKTRONIC inoperative See Owner's Manual  Place the key in the marked space See Owner's Manual  Please charge the high-voltage battery. Otherwise the vehicle may not start  Please close socket flap manually. Anti-entrapment active  Please close socket flap manually. Automatic function inoperative  Please place key in the cup holder or Digital Vehicle Key in inductive charging bracket See Owner's Manual  Please wait in READY status Warm- ing battery See Owner's Manual  PRE-SAFE impulse side inoperative See Owner's Manual  PRE-SAFE inoperative See Owner's Manual  PRE-SAFE PLUS inoperative See Owner's Manual  Preparing drive system... 872  RACE START cancelled  RACE START not possible See Owner's Manual  Reduced drive system performance See Owner's Manual  Restricted mode activated Drive performance reduced  Reversing not poss. Consult work- shop  Risk of vehicle rolling away Apply parking brake to park  Risk of vehicle rolling away Driver's door open Transmission not in P  Risk of vehicle rolling away N activated manually No automatic switch to P  Snow chain mode Maximum speed exceeded  Socket flap blocked Please open manually  Speed limit (winter tyres) XXX km/h  Speed Limit Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual  0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                                  

Speed Limit Assist inoperative 898	Wiper Malfunction	874	Door, Convenience doors
To switch off the vehicle, press the Start/Stop button for at least 3 seconds or 3 times	Displaying road names/house numbers	622	Additional door lock	216
Traffic Sign Assist currently unavailable See Owner's Manual	Distance control	40	Child safety lock (rear door)	189
Traffic Sign Assist inoperative	Distance warning	47	Closing the convenience doors	21
Transmission Malfunction Stop	DISTRONIC	40	Emergency key	216
Tyre press. monitor currently unavailable	Dolby Atmos*		Opening (from the inside)	216
Tyre press. monitor inoperative	Calling up Dolby Atmos*	2	Opening the convenience doors	21
Tyre pressure monitor inoperative No tyre pressure sensors	Information	2	Power closing function	216
Vehicle not currently being charged Charging station fault	Recessed door handles			217

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

	Setting convenience doors 215	>	Drive Away Assist	474	Driver camera
	Unlocking (inside) 206	>	Drive position	376	Activating/deactivating	572
Door control panel			Drive program display	379	Function	571
	Seat operation	172	Drive programs		Driver display
Door handles			AMG DYNAMIC SELECT	372	Track Pace menu	577
	Extending/retracting	287	Selecting	379	Driver's display, Instrument cluster
Downhill Speed Regulation		470	Drive system		Assistant display	576
Drag Race, Drag race		575	Manual switch-off	378	Classic menu	573
Drinks holder		270	Starting (emergency operation mode)	374	Head-up display	571

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

Menus 501	>	Supersport menu	5>6	Driving off-road	3>7
Navigation menu 509	>	Understated menu	5>3	Driving safety system
Notes	4>6	Warning/indicator lamps	2>5	ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)	3>4
Off-road menu	5>9	Driver's seat		Active Brake Assist	4>7
Operating	4>9	Adjusting electrically	2>0	Active Lane Change Assist	4>5
Service due date 709	>	Easy entry and exit feature	2>1	Adaptive brake lights	4>2
Service menu	5>5	Seat heating	2>7	ATTENTION ASSIST	4>4
Sport menu	5>8	Driving abroad		BAS (Brake Assist System)	3>4
Status displays	5>5	Light adjustment low beam	2>4	Blind Spot Assist/Active Blind Spot Assist	4>1

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index                                                                        

Cameras 391	>	STEER CONTROL	40	Electric mode	37
Cruise control 406	>	Traffic Sign Assist	46	General driving tips	35
EBD (Electronic Brakeforce Distribution)	40	Trailer Manoeuvering Assist	41	Light adjustment when driving abroad	34
ESP a (Electronic Stability Program)	35	Your responsibility	31	Off-road driving	37
Hill Start Assist	42	Driving system		Rear axle steering	37
HOLD function	41	AMG RIDE CONTROL +	49	Recuperation	30
Off-road ABS	34	Driving tips		Running-in notes	35
Overview	32	Acoustic presence indicator (sound generator)	37	Drowsiness detection	44
Radar and ultrasonic sensors	31	AMG DYNAMIC PLUS package	33

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index     DSR

	Activating/deactivating 420	>	Displaying vehicle data 351	>
	Changing the target speed 421	>	Drive program display	379
	Function	420	Drive programs	377
	Notes	420	Function	377
Duplicate key		199	Selecting the drive program	379

Dynamic handling control system 

DYNAMIC SELECT

Calling up the fuel consumption indicator 3>1 0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    < E

E-mails 527		Function	3>1	Manually applying/releasing	3>8
Easy entry feature		ECO display	3>0	Releasing automatically	3>7
	Setting 252	Electric Intelligence		Electrical fuses	78
Easy exit feature		Route with charging stations	5>7	Electromagnetic compatibility
	Setting 252	Electric mode, Notes	3>7	Declaration of conformity	1>4
EBD, Electronic Brakeforce Distribution 400		Electric parking brake		Electronic Stability Program	3>5
ECO Assist		Applying automatically	3>6	Emergency
	Activating/deactivating	Emergency braking	3>9	Emergency guide	87

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index   

Fire extinguisher 76	>	Electric parking brake/handbrake 386	>	Tailgate	24
First-aid kit (soft sided) 56	>	Emergency call		Emergency operation mode
Overview of aids	18	Automatic	60	Starting the vehicle	34
Safety vest	5	Manual	61	Emergency shutoff (high-voltage on-board electrical system)	38
Warning triangle	77	Emergency call system		Emergency start (drive system)	76
emergency braking		Mercedes me connect	96	Emergency stop assistant	43
Active Brake Assist	47	Emergency key		Emotion Tour
Brake Assist System	34	Door	26	Explore	25
Carrying out	39	Inserting/removing	17	Overview	24

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    Emotion Tour Routes

Operating 26

>

Function/notes

5>9

Start/stop button

3>1

ENERGIZING Coach

Calling up	526	Engine number	830	Function/notes	579
Function	525	Starting (Digital Vehicle Key)	332	Handwriting recognition	560

ENERGIZING COMFORT

Overview of programmes	532	Engine electronics	756	Setting the keyboard language	550
Starting the programme	533	Engine number	830	Environmentally friendly driving	14

ERA-GLONASS test mode  EQE - Owner's Manual Index  ESC, Electronic Stability Control 395 Exit warning 411 ESP ^v

	Activating/deactivating 399	>	Active Parking Assist	456
	Adjusting (steering-wheel button) 399	>	Drive Away Assist	474
	Crosswind Assist	398	PARKTRONIC	453
	ESP® SPORT	396	Exterior lighting
	Function	395	Care	71
	Trailer stabilisation	398	Light adjustment when driving abroad	24
EU type approval number		890

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index   

F

Factory settings

MBUX reset function 572	>
Fatigue detection 404	>

Fault message

Driver's display

879

Favourites

	Adding a destination 593	>
	Calling up	5>1

Deleting Home address Moving Overview Renaming Work address Fine particle status display        Fingerprint sensor MBUX multimedia system Fire extinguisher First aid First-aid kit (soft sided) Fitting Snow chains Tyres/wheels      EQE - Owner's Manual   Index   

Fitting accessories			TREFIT kit	7>1	Fragrance system
	Limited protection 158	>	Wheel change	7>4		Activating/deactivating 3>7
Fitting the licence plate (front) 123		>	Floor mats	2>9		Inserting/removing the flacon 3>8
Flacon		3>8	Fog light (extended range)	2>6		Perfume vial 3>8
Flat towing			Foil covering			Setting 3>7
	Pulling/towing	4>4	On camera/sensors	3>1	Free software 1>3
Flat tyre			Radar and ultrasonic sensors	3>1	Frequencies
	MOExtended	7>0	Fragrance	3>7		Mobile phone 7>7
	Notes	>				Two-way radio 7>7

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index   

Front airbag			Operating	620	Fuse assignment diagram	78
	Inflating 157	>	Front passenger seat		Notes	78
Front headlamps 281		>	Adjusting electrically	220	Rear	748
Front passenger airbag			Fuel consumption indicator	31
	Disabling/enabling	1>2	Function in the event of an accident	1>7
Front passenger airbag shutoff			Function seat	1>2
	Information (child restraint system on the front passenger seat)	1>2	Fuses
Front passenger display			Cockpit	738
	Information	6>9	Front passenger footwell	748

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    

G

G-meter (driver's display, Sport menu) 508

Gallery app			Programming buttons	3>2	Opening/closing	68
	Operating 667	>	Synchronising the rolling code	3>3	GPS-based vehicle level
Garage door opener			General driving tips	3>5	AIRMATIC	429
	Clearing the memory	3>5	Genuine parts	1>6	Setting	429
	Open/close gate	3>5	Global search		Grab handles	219
	Problem	3>4	Function	5>4	Gross mass	830
			Overview	5>4

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index     < H

Handbrake 386		Hazard warnings		Function	5>1
Handling characteristics		Car-to-X-Communication	6>0	Memory function	2>4
Unusual 750		Head restraint		Operating	5>2
HANDS-FREE ACCESS	2>2	Adjusting (rear)	2>3	Switching on/off	5>3
Hands-free system	6>6	adjusting manually (front, 4-way) 243		Headlamp flashing	2>3
Handwriting recognition	5>0	Removing/fitting (rear)	2>4	Headlamp range control	2>6
Haptic accelerator pedal, Pressure point	3>4	Head-up display		Headlamps	2>1
Hazard warning lights	>5	Care	7>2

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index     Heating

	Activating/deactivating 311	>	Mercedes-Benz emergency call sys-tem	>6	Configuring weekly profile	>78
	Centre console 309	>	High beam	>23	Connection types	>80
	Climate control	308	High-pressure cleaner	>79	Disconnect device	308
	Rear window	309	High-voltage battery		Ending the charging process (alter-nating current, mode 2/3)	309
	Seat	257	Charge level display	37	Ending the charging process (direct current, mode 4)	375
	Steering wheel	259	Charging at time of departure	378	Energy flow display	579
	Windscreen	309	Charging cable control panel	305	General notes on charging	308
			Charging duration	80	Mains socket, mode 2	301

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index   

Maximum charging current (mains socket)	3>4	Voltage types	8>0	HOLD function
Notes 737	>	Wallbox, mode 3	3>2		Function 4>1
Range 840	>	High-voltage on-board electrical system			Switching on/off 4>1
Range maximisation	3>4	Charging cable control panel	3>5	Home screen
Rapid charging station, mode 4	3>3	Disconnect device	3>8		Central display 5>1
Starting the charging process (alter-nating current, mode 2/3)	3>6	Indicator lamps on vehicle socket	3>6
Starting the charging process (direct current, mode 4)	3>2	Manual switch-off	3>8
Stowing the charging cable	3>0	Hill descent control	4>0
Type	8>0	Hill Start Assist	4>2

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index > 1  < I

i-Size child restraint system		Implied warranty	1>7	Managing e-mails	6>1
	Fitting 185	Importer information		Marking a task as completed	6>1
	Suitable seats 181	Regulatory radio information	8>8	Selecting functions (calendar entry)	6>0
Identification plate		In-Car Office		Selecting functions (Tasks & Calls)	6>0
	Engine	Answering e-mail	6>1	Incorrect behaviour by vehicle occu-pants
	Vehicle	Calling up	6>0	Limited protection	1>8
Immediate pre-entry climate control 323		Creating an e-mail	6>1	Increase in traffic information volume
Immobiliser	2>4	Forwarding e-mail	6>1	Setting	6>7

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index > 1 

Indicator lamps/warning lamps		Adaptive Highbeam Assist	29	Topographical compensation	26
	PASSENGER AIR BAG 150	Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus	21	Interior lighting
Indicator/warning lamps		Assistance functions	26	Ambient lighting	24
Individual drive program		Bad weather light	26	Setting	24
	Configuring	City lighting	26	Switch-off delay time	26
Inside rearview mirror		Cornering light	25	Interior protection	26
Intelligent Light System		Enhanced fog light function	26	Intermediate destination
	Activating/deactivating	Motorway mode	25	Editing	67
	Active headlamps	Overview	24	Starting the automatic service station search	69

EQE - Owner's Manual > Index > 1 

Internet		Smartphone integration	>8	Overview of connection status	679
	Calling up a web page 679	>	Web browser in the background 682	>	Restrictions	675
	Calling up the web browser settings 681		Web browsers	670	Setting access data (Bluetooth*)	677
	Calling up web browser options	670	Internet connection		Setting up (communication module)	676
	Deleting a bookmark	671	Cancelling permission (mobile phone)	678	Setting up (Wi-Fi)	677
	Deleting browser data	671	Disconnecting automatically (communication module)	676	Setup (Bluetooth*)	677
	Managing bookmarks	671	Displaying the connection status 679	>	Ionisation	37
	Mercedes me connect	674	Establishing	678	iPhone*
	Setting up a Wi-Fi hotspot	576	Information	675	Smartphone integration	673

0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02 EQE - Owner's Manual > Index > 1  ISOFIX child restraint system

Fitting 185	>
Suitable seats 180	>

EQE - Owner's Manual Index < J Jack Declaration of conformity 125 Storage location 79 Jump-start connection  EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    K

Key		Problem	1>9	Knee airbag	1>4
	acoustic locking verification signal 196>	Replacement key	1>9
	Battery 198 >	Unlocking setting	1>6
	Deactivating a function	KEYLESS-GO
	Emergency key	1>7	Deactivating	8>6
	Energy consumption	8>5	Locking/unlocking the vehicle	2>7
	Function	1>5	Problem	2>9
	Key ring attachment	1>7	Unlocking setting	1>6

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index    < L

Lane Change Assist 425		>	Setting	578	Light switch	291
Lane Keeping Assist 444		>	Last destinations		Lighting
Lane recognition			Selecting	570		Intelligent Light System 294
	Active Lane Change Assist	4>5	Level control			Interior lighting 294
Lane recognition (automatic)			AIRMATIC	47	Lights
	Active Lane Keeping Assist	4>4		AMG RIDE CONTROL +	479	Active headlamps 295
Language			Light adjustment			Adaptive brake lights 492
	Notes	5>7		Driving abroad	5	Adaptive Highbeam Assist 299

EQE - Owner's Manual   Index  

Adaptive Highbeam Assist Plus 291	Hazard warning lights	25	Rear fog light	232
Assistance functions 286	High beam	23	Responsibility for lighting systems	21
Automatic driving lights 282	Intelligent Light System	24	Setting low beam	23
Bad weather light	Interior lighting	24	Switch-off delay time	23
City lighting	Light adjustment when driving abroad	24	Switching the Intelligent Light System on/off	29
Combination switch	Locator lighting	23	Topographical compensation	26
Cornering light	Motorway mode	25	Turn signal light	23
DIGITAL LIGHT	Off-road light	26	Limiter
Fog light (extended range)	Reading lamp	24	Activating/deactivating	28

EQE - Owner's Manual Index > L 

Buttons 408	LINGUATRONIC		Load compartment cover
Calling up a speed 408	Live Traffic Information		Extending/retracting	254
Function 407	Displaying the traffic map	6,8	Removing/fitting	255
Passive mode	Displaying traffic incidents	6,9	Loading, Stowage compartments
Permanent setting	Extending a subscription	6,8	Bag hook	257
Requirements:	Information of the service provider	6,7	Roof luggage rack	30
Selecting	Registering on Mercedes me	6,7	Tie-down eyes	36
Setting a speed	Load capacity		Loading guidelines	256
Storing a speed	Bicycle rack	8,5	Loads	256

EQE - Owner's Manual Index  Locator lighting 293 > Loud sound Lumbar support 292 Locking/unlocking Additional door lock 206  Automatic locking (MMS)  Digital Vehicle Key  Doors (from the inside)  Emergency key  KEYLESS-GO  Mercedes me connect  Low beam Activating/deactivating  Left-hand/right-hand traffic  Light adjustment when driving abroad  Setting  lubricants  Luggage  0-9 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ F294 0056 02